This is a digital copy of a book that was preserved for generations on library shelves before it was carefully scanned by Google as part of a project
to make the world's books discoverable online.
It has survived long enough for the copyright to expire and the book to enter the public domain. A public domain book is one that was never subject
to copyright or whose legal copyright term has expired. Whether a book is in the public domain may vary country to country. Public domain books
are our gateways to the past, representing a wealth of history, culture and knowledge that's often difficult to discover.
Marks, notations and other marginalia present in the original volume will appear in this file - a reminder of this book's long journey from the
publisher to a library and finally to you.
Usage guidelines
Google is proud to partner with libraries to digitize public domain materials and make them widely accessible. Public domain books belong to the
public and we are merely their custodians. Nevertheless, this work is expensive, so in order to keep providing this resource, we have taken steps to
prevent abuse by commercial parties, including placing technical restrictions on automated querying.
We also ask that you:
+ Make non-commercial use of the files We designed Google Book Search for use by individuals, and we request that you use these files for
personal, non-commercial purposes.
+ Refrain from automated querying Do not send automated queries of any sort to Google's system: If you are conducting research on machine
translation, optical character recognition or other areas where access to a large amount of text is helpful, please contact us. We encourage the
use of public domain materials for these purposes and may be able to help.
+ Maintain attribution The Google "watermark" you see on each file is essential for informing people about this project and helping them find
additional materials through Google Book Search. Please do not remove it.
+ Keep it legal Whatever your use, remember that you are responsible for ensuring that what you are doing is legal. Do not assume that just
because we believe a book is in the public domain for users in the United States, that the work is also in the public domain for users in other
countries. Whether a book is still in copyright varies from country to country, and we can't offer guidance on whether any specific use of
any specific book is allowed. Please do not assume that a book's appearance in Google Book Search means it can be used in any manner
anywhere in the world. Copyright infringement liability can be quite severe.
About Google Book Search
Google's mission is to organize the world's information and to make it universally accessible and useful. Google Book Search helps readers
discover the world's books while helping authors and publishers reach new audiences. You can search through the full text of this book on the web
at http : //books . google . com/|
Digitized by
Google
Digitized by
Google
Digitized by
Google
Digitized by
Google
Digitized by
Google
Digitized by
Google
FIRST BOOK m LATIIf ;
OOMTAINIRO
GRAMMAR, EXERCISES, AND VOCABULARIES,
ON THE METHOD OP
CONSTANT IMITATION AND REPETITION.
JOHN Mve>L LNg?'% C K, A.M.,
PROFESSOR OF LANOUAOKB,
GEORGE R. CROOKS, A.M.,
AOlUirCT PS0FB8S0B OF LANOUAGBS III DICKIM80X OOLLSOI.
HARPER & BROTHERS, PUBLISHERS,
89 CLIFF STREET, NEW YORK.
* 1848.
Digitized by
Google
Entered, according to Act of Congress, in the year 1846,
By Harper & Brothers,
In the Clerk's Office of the Southern District of New York.
Digitized by
Google
PREFACE.
This book is designed, as the title-page states, to
contain within itself Grammar, Exercises, Reading-
book, and Dictionary; in short, all that the pupil will
need before commencing the regular reading of Cae-
sar or any other easy Latin author. It has been pre-
pared, as far as possible, on the following principles :
1. The object of studying languages is twofold : (1),
the acquisition of the languages themselves ; and (2),
the mental discipline gained in acquiring them.
2. No language can he thoroughly acquired with-
out the outlay of much la\)Our and time. All schemes
which promise to dispense with such outlay must be
pronounced visionary and chimerical.
3. But labour without fruit does not contribute to
mental cultivation. Labour and pain are not neces-
sary companions: learning should not be "wrung
from poor striplings like blood from the nose, or the
plucking of untimely fruit."*
4. The grammar of a language cannot be understood
until the language itself is at least partially acquired.
5. The vernacular may be learned, so far as its use
is concerned, without grammar : a foreign living lan-
guage may be so learned, but never so thoroughly,
nor even so rapidly, as with grammatical aids. In the
study of a dead language grammar is indispensable.
6. "A grammar intended for beginners should be
formed altogether differently from one intended for
• MUton.
Digitized by
Google
IV PEErACE.
the higher classes, both in the distribution of the mat-
ter and in the mode of presenting it. Those who think
that the pupil should use the same grammar from the
beginning of his course to the end, are quite in error/'*
7. In elementary books^ or in teaching, no etymo-
logical form nor grammatical principle should be pre-
sented to the pupil without an immediate application
thereof to practice^ which should be kept up, both
orally and in writing, from the very first lesson.
8. The all-important rule of practice, in the acqui-
sition of language, is imitation and repetition. This
is no new invention; all good teachers have known
and used it ; but yet it has been but slightly employ-
ed in elementary books heretofore.
9. Models for imitation should be simple at first,
and gradually made more complicated; but they
should always be selected from pure authors, say, in
Latin, from Cicero and Caesar.
10. The pupil's ear should be trained to correct-
ness from the beginning, and the simplest rules of
prosody learned and applied as soon as possible.
For this purpose, the quantity of all syllables should
be marked in elementary books, and attention to it
should be strictly enforced by the teacher.
11. The foreign idiom, both as to the use and ar-
rangement of words, should be made familiar to the
pupil by constant practice. Nothing can be more
hurtful than exercises in which foreign words are used
in the idiom, and according to the arrangement of the
vernacular.
How far we have been successful in carrying out
these principles, the book itself must show,
• Ktlhner.
Digitized by
Google
PKEFACE. ▼
We have aimed to combine the advantages of con-
stant repetition and imitation of Latin sentences from
the beginning, with a more thorough drilling in ety-
mological forms than is common. In order to effect
this combination, we have necessarily deviated from
the ordinary grammatical course to some extent ; but
we trust that experienced teachers will find, from an
examination of the table of contents alone» that our
arrangement is not devoid of systematic and even
logical order.
While we have not gone out of our way to bring in
novelties, we have yet adopted every new method
which we have deemed to be an improvement. None
of the class-books of any repute in England or Ger-
many have escaped our notice in the preparation of
this work ; and we have made free use of them all,
without slavish adherence to any. Perhaps the most
marked peculiarity of the etymological part of the
book will be found to be the doctrine of the genders of
nouns of the third declension, which we have reduced,
for the first time, to a form at once philosophical, we
hope, and practical.* Some steps toward the meth-
od here presented have been taken by Madvig, Weis-
SENBORN, and others in Germany ; but none of these
writers has brought out a clear exposition of the doc-
trine, adapted to the actual purposes of instruction.
The arrangement, also, of the verbs,t according to
the formation of the perfect-stem, founded mainly
upon the classification of Grotefend (better set forth
by Allen), will be found, we trust, to be an improve-
ment upon any yet offered.
• The Btiinmary of roles, witb all the exceptions, will be found to occu-
py two pages only, viz., p. 132, 133,
t Lessons IxiL-lxix^ and p. 868-279.
1*
Digitized by
GooqIc
VI PREFACE.
The Syntax, in its details, generally follows Zumpt ;
but in the arrangement, especially of Part IL, we
have approached nearer to the plan of Billroth.
The admirable syntax of Becker, adopted by Kuhner
in his Greek and Latin Grammars, we deem too dif-
ficult for beginners.
The Exercises are selected, as far as possible, fi*om
Caesar's Gallic War. Although we have laboured
hard to keep out bad Latin, we do not hope that all
our sentences will escape criticism. We have found,
fi:om actual experiment in our classes, that the exer-
cises to be rendered from Enghsh into Latin are
within the capacity of any student of ordinary indus-
try who studies the book in order ; and we do not
know that thi^ can be said of any book of the kind,
of equal extent, in use among us.
A few words as to the use of the book may not be
out of place. Our own method has been to employ
the lessons, for a considerable time at least, entirely
in oral instruction, the teacher pronouncing first the
Latin sentences distinctly, and requiring the pupil to
give the corresponding English without book ; and
then pronouncing the English sentences, and requi-
ring the pupil to give the corresponding Latin. As
the quantities are marked (in Part I.) in all syllables
except those to which the general r^tes apply, we
require the pupil to observe quantity :iii his pronun-
ciation from the very beginning, so that he learns
prosody by practice before the rules are given. For
the purpose of review, the summary of Etymology
(Part III.), which contains, in short compass, all that
is necessary to be learned by heart, will be found
very convenient. After the student has passed
Digitized by
Google
PREFACE. VU
through Parts I. and IL, he will find little difliculty
in committing accurately the Rules of Syntax (Part
IV.), with most of which he will be already familiar.
The Reading Lessons at the end will give him easy
practice in the syntax* and in word-building. For
the convenience of those who may need it, we have
condensed into a few pages, in Appendix L, all of
Prosody that is essential for the understanding of
hexameter verse.
The preparation of this book was originally sug-
gested by our sense of the inadequacy of the ordina-
ry modes of instruction, and especially by the ad-
vantage which we ourselves had derived from the
use of Ollendorff's method in the study of the Ger-
man language. Finding that Rev. T. K. Arnold
had prepared a series of books on the same principle,
we used them in our own classes for some time, with
a view to revising them for republication. They
were found unsuited to our purpose in many respects,
and we therefore formed the design of preparing an
entirely new series, adapted to the use of American
schools. The first of these is now presented to the
public.
DicJnnson. College, April 7, 1846. ^
%* In Fart L the qnantity is marked on all syllables except those to
which the general roles apply. At the beginning of Part U. additional
rales of quantity are given, and the marks are snbseqaently omitted on
many syllables, in order to afford the pupil exercise npon the roles. In the
Syntax and B.eading Lesscms they are omitted almost entirely. Great pains
have been taken to ensore accuracy in the marks of quantity, hot we can-
not hope to have avoided error entirely.
* Oar Second Book in Latin will contain a fuller development of Syntax,
in a series of progressive exercises in writing Latin.
Digitized by
Google
PREFACE TO SECOND EDITION.
In thits edition, a number of errors in the marks of
quantity, which had crept into the first, are corrected.
We have also placed a series of Examination Ques-
tions at the end of the book, which will add, we hope,
to its practical value.
Carlisle, November, 1846.
Digitized by
Google
TABLE OF CONTENTS.
Iin?aODU0TION.
Pag*
{ 1. Divisioii of the Letters 1
^ 2. Syllables, Claantity, Accent ••••••.. 1
$3. Proiraiiciation •••••3
1 4. Division of Words 4
PARTL
PARTIAL EXHIBITION OF THE FORMS OF WORDS.
Summary {f Ettential Point$ 8
$5. FirstDeckmumofNouns.— First C(mjugatumcf Verbs. (L— V.) 10
First Declension of Notins, Nominative, Vocative, and Gknitive
Cases 10
First Conjugation of Verbs, /»<ra»n^*v0 . . .^ . .14
First Declension of Nonns, Aocosative Case. — ^First Conjuga-
tion of Verbs, Transitive 17
First Declension of Nonns, Dative and Ablative Cases . . 19
$ 6, Second Declension of Nouns. — Second Conjugation of Verbs.
(VI.— VOL) 23
Second Declension, Masculine 22
Second Declension, Neuter. — Second Conjugation of Verbs . 26
$7. Adjectives of First Class, Three Endings. (IX.— X.) . . .28
Forms of Adjectives in as, a, nm 28
Someformsof Esse, to^ • . 30
(8. Third and Fourth Conjugations ef Verbs. (XI.) . . .33
i 9. Passive Verbs. (XIL— XHI.) 3«
f 10. Third Declension of Nouns, PaHial Treatment. (XIV.— XV.) . 40
f 11. Adjectives of Second Class, Two Endings. (XVI.) . . .44
$ 12. Adjectives of Third Class, One Ending. (XVH) . . .46
^13. Fourth Declension of NouTu. (XVIDL) 48
i 14. Fifth Declension of Nouns. (XIX) 51
i 15. Pronouns. (XX.— XXXI.) 53
Pronoun, Personal, 1st Person. Verb, 1st Person . . .53
Pronoun, Personal, 2d Person. Verb, 2d Person . . .5?
Pronoun, Personal, 3d Person 61
Pronouns, Demonstrative • • . 63
Pronoun, Relative • • 68
Pronoun, Interrogative • 7f
Digitized by
Google
X TABLE OF CONTENTS.
'PronowoB, Indefinite 73
PronounB, Corrdative 74
$ 16. Numerals. (XXXH.— XXXIIL) 77
jl7. Verbs of Third Conjugation in io. PCXXIV.) ... 81
$18. Verbs, Deponent. (XXXV.) 83
$ 19. Adverbs. (XXXVL) 85
^20. Prepositions. (XXXVn.— XXXVIH.) 88
$ 21. AnalysU of TmsefwrmatwM. (XXXIX.— XI.L) ... 92
PABT n.
FULLKR EXHIBITION OF THK F0BM8 OF WOBBS.
$ 1. Additional Rules of Quantity 99
$ 2. Tenses of Verbs for Completed Action, Partial Treatment.
(XLin.— XLVI.) 102
Perfect Tenses of Esse 102
Perfect Tenses of 1st, 2d, and 4tli Cpx^jngations .... 104
Perfect Tenses of 3d Conjugation 106
J 3. Third Declension of Nouns, Fuller Treatment. (XLVIL
— LVn.) 110
Irregalar Nouns 129
Sommary of Rules of Gender, Third Declension. . . .132
5 4. Comparison of Adjectives. (LVUL — ^LX.) .... 134
$5. Comparison of Adverbs 140
$6. Supine. (LXI.) 141
J 7. Tenses of Verbs for Completed Action, Active Voice. Fuller
Treatment. (LXn.—LXIX.) 144
Forms of Perfect Stem, 1st Conjugation 144
Forms of Perfect Stem, 2d Conjugation 146
Forms of Perfect Stem, 3d Conjngation 149
Fcnms of Perfect Stem, 4th Conjugation 159
§ B. Tenses for Completed Action, Passive Voice. (LXX.) . .162
$ 9. PaHiciples. (LXXL— LXXV.) 165
Present Participle Active 165
Futore Participle Active 168
Perfect Participle Passive 170
Ablative Absolnte 172
$ 10. Infinitive. (LXXVI.— LXXIX.) 176
Forms of Infinitive 176
Accusative with Infinitive 178
$ 11. Gerund. (LXXX.) 184
$ 12. Gerundive. (LXXXL— LXXXII.) 187
Gerundive used for Gerund • . 187
Gerundive used to express Duty or Necessity • . . .189
% 13. Imperative Mood. (LXXXHI.) 192
$14. Sentences 194
$ 15. Conjunctiont. (LXXXTVv-LXXXV.) 195
Digitized by
Google
TABLE OP CONTENTS. XI
jlB. Suijunetive Mood. (LXXXYI-^XCUL) iS
Bubjanctiye Present . . . _ 199
Sabjnnctive Perfect 209
Bnbjimctiye Imperfect and Phiperfeot Conditional Sen-
tences 205
Babjunctxre withat^ne (P«f^<e) 209
Snbjimctiye witli at {Consequence). Sncceision of Tenaes . 212
Babjvnctive witli qnin, quo, quominna. Periphraatio Forma 214
Bubjxmctiye with q«nm 217
BabjnnctJTeiQ Belatiye Sentencea 220
^n. Oratio Obliqua. (XCIV.) 223
lis. Impersonal Verbs. (XCV.— XCYL) 226
$ 19. Irregular Verbs. (XCVIL— CL) 230
Poaae 230
Velle, Nolle, Malle 239
Ferre 234
Fieri, Bdere •••••••• .236
Ire, Claire, Neqaire 238
ifiO. Defective Verbs. (CIL) 241
PARTin.
aUMMART OF STTMOLOOT. '
$ 1. Letters, Quantity , S^e. 247
\ 2. Noun 248
$3. Adjective 251
\ 4. Numerals 254
45. Pronoun .••••••••.. 255
ie. Verb 258
1. Claaaea of Verba 256
2. PartaoftheVeib 258
3. CoDJogation • 259
4. The AoziliaiyBaae, to^ . • • • • • • •260
5. ParadigmaofBegnlar Verba 261
6. Verbsinioofthedd Coi^jagation • • • • • .266
7. Deponent Verba 266
8. Periphraatio Co^jogation 266
9. Fonnation of Perfect Btem . . . • * . . . .267
10. Lists of Verba, with yariona Perfiocta and Snpinca . . .268
First Conjogation • • • . 268
Second Conjogation • . . 269
Third Co^iogation 271
Foorth Conjogation 276
Deponent Verba . • • • 277
Inchoatiye Verba . • • • 279
11. Irregular Verbs, Paradigma ^9
12. Defectiye Verbs ^^
Digitized by
Google
XU TABLK OF CONTENTS.
rac*
13. Imperscmal Verbs S83
$7. Adverb 285
$8. PreposiHon 288
$9. Conjunction 289
$ 10. InteijecHon 290
PART IV.
•VXKABT OF STHTAX*
PART I. 8IMPLX 0BNTUIOI0.
L Subject and Prodicate 293
n. UseofCaaes 295
Nominative • • . • . Si95
Genitive •••••••••.. 295
Dative •••• 298
Accusative, ••••• 300
AMative 302
m. Use of the Indefinite Veib •••••... 306
InJinUioe .••••• 306
Participle 907
Gerund . . • 308
Gerundive 308
Supine 309
PABT II. COMPOnHS 8B1ITB1ICX8.
X. Co-ordinate Sentences 310
XL Subordinate Sentences 810
A. Participial Sentence^ 311
B. Accusative with Infinitive 312
C. Conjunctive Sentences 913
D. Relative Sentences • ... 916
E. Interrogative Sentences 318
Oratio Obliqua •••••••••. 319
Appendix I. Prosody , . . 323
Appendix n. Greek Nouns ••••••.. 326
Appendix DX The Calendar •••••,.. 327
Appendix IV. AbbreTiations •••••••. 329
WORD-BinLDINO ••••. 333
Bjcadino Lessons •••• 340
Latin-English Vocabvlabt ••••••••355
English-Latin VocABVLAsr 383
Digitized by
Google
^^ or IBS ^ A
[TJinvLr.-viv/J
INTRODUCTION.*
^ 1. DIVISION OF THE LETTERS.
(1.) The letters are the same as in English, with
the omission ofw; k is used in but few words, and y
and z only in words borrowed from the Greek.
(2.J Six are vowels,^ viz., a, e, i, <?, w, y : the remaining
nineteen are consonants.^
^ Sounds formed by an vninterrvpted emission of the air from the throat
Called vowels (voc ale s = soundings letters), becaose capable of being
sounded by themselves.
' Sowids formed. by interrupting the emission of air fiom die throat
Called consonants (con-sonare =to sonnd together), because incapable
ci being sounded by themselves.
(3.) The consonants are divided into
(a) Liquids,' I, w, n, r;
{h) Spirants,' fe, 5, j ;
(c) Mutes,' 6, c, d,f, g, k, p, q, U v ;
• The Liquids are formed by 9, partial inteiraption of the voice ; the Spi-
rants chiefly by the breath ; and the Mutes by a more complete intermp^
turn of the passage of the air from the throat. J^is regarded, indeed, sim*
ply as an aspiration, though in many words it fills the place of a conso-
nant
(d) Double consonants,* x, z.
* JC\b compounded of c s, g s, and z (occurring only in Greek words) of d 8.
(4.) The imion of two vowels into one syllable forms
a diphthong. These are, in Latin, a u, e u, a e, o e (gen-
erally written cb, as), and, in a few words, ei, oi, uL
^ 2. SYLLABLES, QUANTITY, ACCENT.
(5.) Every word contains as many syllables as vow-
els ; 6. ^., m i 1 e s, a soldier, is not pronounced in one syl-
lable, as the English word rnffe^, but in two, mi-les.
(6.) The quantity of syllables (that is, their length
♦ This Introduction may be omitted by very young puoils in their first
study of the work ; but the references to it in the subsequent lessoui
ihouid be carefully attended to. ,
Digitized by
Google
2 QUANTITY. ^ACCENT.
or shortness) depends upon that of the vowels which
they contam. The dash (~) placed over a vowel de-
notes that it is long ; the semicircle (^, that it is short
A vowel that may be used either as long or short is
marked (^, and is said to be common.
(7.) The following rules for the quantity of sylla-
bles must be carefully observed:
(a) All diphthongs are hng; e. g.^ mens-®, tables;
au-rum, gold.
(b) A vowel followed by another vowel is short;
e. g.f DeuSy God.
Thif rule applies, even tfaoagb h intenrens between die two ▼oweUi, aa
h is not regarded as a ccmsonant (3, b,n.3); e. g., trkbo, vSha
(c) A vowel followed by two consonants, or a doub-
le one (3, d), is long by position; e. g.f in am ant, the
a before nt is long by position.
53^ [Every syllable to which none of ifuee three rvlee i$ apfUceble vnU he
marked with its proper quantity in the foliowing pages, until other rules are given.]
(8.) A word of but one syllable is called a Monosyl-
lable ; of two, a JHssyllable ; of more than two, a Po/-
y syllable. Thus, 1 e x is a monosyllable ; 1 e g i s, a dis-
syllable; in c 51 as, a polysyllable.
(9.) The last syllable of a word is called the ulti-
mate ; the next to the last, the penuU ; the second from
the last, the antepenult. Thus, in the word incdlas,
the syllable las is the ultimate, c5, the penult, and in
the antepenult.
(10.) The accent of a syllable is a stress or eleva-
tion of the voice in pronouncing it. Observe the fol-
lowing rules :
(a)^ Every dissyllable is accented on ihepenult; e.
g.y b5nus, pono.
(6) Every polysyllable is accented,
1. On the penuU^ when the penult is long; e. g.^
kmire.
Digitized by
Google
PEONUNCIATION. »
2. On the antepenult, when the penult is short;
e.g., animtig. ^
§ 3. PRONUNCIATION.
(11.) [Almost every modem nation has its own way of pnnoondng Lat-
in. Bat as the vowels have nearly the same sounds in all the Cerent
countries of CorUtnenial Europe, there is something i^pioaching to uni-
fiMmity in their pronunciation; the English, hpw9ver, give peculiar
sounds to some of the vowels, and they pronounoe Latin, therefore, unlike
all the rest of the world. Li this country two methods prevail, which, ibr
flomrenience' sake, may he called the Continental and the English. We
give them hoth, stating, at the same time, our decided preference for the
first, both on the score of consistency and convenience. Li both methods
tkaeoMoaonte are prcmounoed neariy as in Bngtish.}
(a) The Continental Method.
Table of Vowel Sound*.
Short &, as m hat. Long i, as in machme.
Long a, as in father. Short 6, as in not.
Short 6, as in net. Long o, as in no.
Long e, as in there. Short d, as in tub.
Short 1, as in sit. Long u, as in fiill.
Diphthongs.
^ or oe, as e in there.
au, as ou in our.
eu, as eu in feud.
ei (rarely occurring), as i in nice. :
(b) The English Method.
The vowels have the EngUsh long or short sounds,
Exc. A final, in words of more than one syllable,
has a broad sound ; as, fama (fame-ah).
MonotyUailes.
In monosyllables, if the vowel be the last letter, it
has the long soimd ; as me, do ; if any other klUr, the
ihort sound ; as «<, 6 ft.
Digitized by
GooqIc
4 DIVISION OF WORDS.
XXMyOsNet mnd Po^f§iflUble§,
(1.) The vowel of an accented penult has the long
sound,
(a) Before another vowel ; as, D^us.
(b) Before a single consonant; as, J 6 vis.
It has the short sound,
(a) Before two consonants, or a double consonant ;
as, mundus, rexit.
(2.) The vowel of an accented antepenult has the
^Aor^ sound; as, r^gibus.
(3.) An accented vowel before a mute and liquid
has usually the long sound ; as, s&cra.
§ 4. DIVISION OF WORDS.
(12.) I. Words are divided, according to their sig^
nijication^ into eight classes, called Parts of Speech,
viz., Noun, Adjective, Pronoun, Verb, Adverb, Prep-
osition, Conjunction, Interjection.
(13.) The Noun is the name of an object (person,
or thing) ; e. g., John, man, house.
Nouns are divided into,
(a) Proper, denoting iniiutrfaaZ objects ; e.g.^John^
CcBsar, Rome.
(b) Common, denoting one or more of a class of
objects ; e. g., man, house, horses.
(c) Abstrac't, denoting a quality; e. g., goodness,
haste, virtue.
(14.) The Adjective expresses a quality or property
belonging to an object ; e. g., good, small; as, a good
boy, a small house.
(15.) The Pronoun is a substitute for the noun ; e.
g., lie, she, it, are substitutes for man, woman, book.
(16.) The Verb declares something of a person or
thing.
Digitized by
Google
DIVISION OF WORDS. O
E. g^ the boy dances ; the boy tleeps ; the boy is good. (Id this
last cue the quality " good" u affirmed of ** boy/' by meant of
the verb is.)
^^ Participles, Gerunds, and Supines are words partaking in ihe
meaning of the verb, and in the form of the noon.
(17.) The Adverb qualifies the meanmg of a verb,
adjective, or other adverb ; e. g., the boy learns rapid-
ly ; the boy is remarkably faithful ; the boy learns very
rapidly.
(18.) Prepositions express the relations of objects
simply ; e. g.,from me ; in the house.
(19.) Conjunctions connect words and sentences ;
e. g-., Thomas and John went to town ; Thomas went,
hut John remained.
(20.) Interjections are merely signs of emotion ; e.
g.^ alas!
(21.) II. Words are divided, according to their
form^ into,
(1) Four inflected, viz.. Noun, Adjective, Pronoun,
Verb.
(2) Four uninfl^cted, viz.. Adverb, Preposition, Con-
junction, Interjection.
Rem. Infection is the variation of a word to express different rela-
tions ; e. g., boy, boy<, &e boy** hat ; I love, I am laved, &c The in-
flection of Nouns is called Declension ; of Verbs, Conjugation. The
Latin langaage makes much more nse of inflection than the English.
(22.) III. Words are divided, according to their/or-
mation, into,
(1) Derivative, i. c, derived from other words.
(2) Primitive, i. e., not derived from other words.
E. g., manly, manhood, are derivatives from the primitive man.
(3) Compound, i. e,, made up by the union of two
or more words.
(4.) Simple, i. e., not so made up.
E. g., man-kind is a compound, made up of the two simple words
mtin and kind.
A 2
Digitized by
GooqIc
Digitized by
Goc^Ie
PART I.
PARTIAL EXHIBITION OF THE FORMS OF WORDS,
iircLubiiro
TENSES OF VERBS FOR INCOMPLETE ACTION.
I
Digitized by
Google
SUMMARY.
[The roles and statements on this pag^e and the fbUowing ere to be
tlumnigbly learned^ as they must be appHed constantly.]
(23.) Or THE Letters*
(1) Six are vowels, a, «, t, o,u^y;
(2) Four liquids, I, m, w, r ;
(3) Three c-sounds, c, g, q ;
(4) Two jp-sounds, &, J? ;
(5) Two ^sounds, d, t ;
(6) Two double consonants, x, z.
(7) The diphthongs are au^ eu^ae^oe (and rarelj et, at,
lit).
(24.) General Rules of Quantity.
(1) A vowel before another is short ; ۥ g-., tI a*
(2) A vowel before two consonants, er a double one, is
Umg hy position ; e. g.^ am ft nt.
[As a mate followed l^ a Ixqvid caues some ezceptians to this
role, we shall mark the quantity, in tiiat case, doubtful ; thus,
IgrL]
(3) An £phthongs are long ; e, g,^ mens s, au-mm.
[In the following pages of Part I., tiie quantity of all syllables i»
marked, except those which are covered by tiie above rales.}
(25.) General Rules of Gender.
[In English, gender is determined by sex alone ; e. g^ man is mas-
culine, woman feminine. But in Latin, gender is determined partly by
the meaning of nonns, and partly by their endings. The general roles
here given from the meamngt apply to noons of all tiie declensions.]
Digitized by
Google
SUMMARY. 9
I. Masculines : Names of male beings ; of most rivers^
winds, mountains, months, and naiions.
II. Feminines : Names affenude beings, cities, countries,
trees, plants, and islands.
III. Neuters : All indeclinable words.
IV. Common : Such as have but one form for masculine
and feminine; e. g,,exn I, an exile (male or female).
[These four mlet are oontained in the foUowiag Tenet.]
(25. a.) Males, rivers, winds, and mxmntain^ most we find
With months and nations Masculine declined ;
'But females, cities, countries, trees we name,
As Feminine ; most islands, too, the same.
Common are such as both the genders take.
And Neuter all words undeclined we make.
[There are many exceptiong from these roles, which must be learned
by obserration.]
Explanation of Marks and Abbreviations.
The mark ^^ indicates a short vowel.
" ** — indicates a long vowel.
«« «« s= indicates that two words or phrases aid equiv*
alent to each other.
" *• + between two words shows that they are com-
pounded together.
e. g. means, ybr example (exempli gratia).
Passages in brackets [ ] are not meant to be committed to
memory.
In the Exercises, words in parentheses ( ) are not meant
to be translated.
The References are made to paragraphs, not to pages.
In a reference, R. means Remark ; N. mewaafoot-noU.
Digitizedands after c 6 r o n &.
(h) Theqtteeii^s crown (i.e., I Rdginae cdrdn&.
not the king^s). \
(h) Rule of Position. — The genitive (when emphatie)
stands hefore the noun on which it depends ; e. ^., in (h)
rdginsB stands hefore cdron&.
[Words in the exercises considered emphoHc are in ttolict.]
(39.) EXERCISE.
I. Translate into English.
AUL c61mnb8B. Rds& ancillsB.
P]um& ftquilae. Ocdba f ug&.
O r6gin& (voc.). PrdTlnci& Gallise.
Filift &gricd]ae. Mdmdri& fugs.
Rgglna fm&. 6fili&!
Cdlumb€e plumji. AquildrUm f ug&.
II. Anstoer the questions in the foot-note.*
III. Translate into Latin.
Fiig& Belgftriim.
PlQmaB &quil&riim.
Inj&ridr&m m6mdri&.
Lingu& Ceh&rftm.
FilisB rdginftrum.
Lingu& Belgftriim.
The queen*s dove.
The farmer's eagle.
The flight of doves.
The girVs rose.
The queen's rose.
The flight of the Celts.
The wings of the doves.
The recollection of an injury.
O Celts!
The wings of eagles.
O eagle.
Galba*s daughter.
The shades of the woods.
The memory of the queen.
The girl's dove.
The language of the province.
O Belgians !
The flight of the queen.
* 1. What is the quantity of the ultimate (9) of a n c i 1 1 ae ? Why ? (24,
3.) Ofitspenult? (9.) Why? (24,2.) Ofthe penult of G alii e? Why?
(24, 1.)
2. What is the quantity of a in injuriarum? (36,6.)inmemoriaf
(36, a.)
3. What is the Btemofcolumba, ala,ro8a? &c. (30.)
4. Whatis the^e7u2erofroBa, ala,fuga? &c. (36, c.) Whatisthe
gender of G alba, agricol a? (25, o.)
5. What is the case of rosa, provincise, injuriarum, memo-
r i a ? What their number ?
<t. How many cases have Latin nouns ? (31.) Wliat are ihey 7 (31.)
B
Digitized by
Google
14 riE8T DBGLSN0ION.
LESSON III.
First Declension of Nouns. — Nominative and Genitive
Cases. — First Conjugation of Verbs. — Intransitives.
(40.) Examples.
Tofiy,
Todance^
(a) The eagle JUe$,
(b) The girl dances^
vdl&rd.
salt&rd.
ptiellft salt&t.
(41.) SUBJECT AND PREDICATE.
(a.) Every sentence (e. g,, the eagle flies) consists
of two parts :
1. The subject^ i. e., that of which something is de-
clared (a noun, or some word used instead of a noun) ;
e. g., eagle.
2. The predicate^ i. e., that which is declared of
the subject (generally a verb) ; e. g., flies.
Rem. The predicate is frequently an adjective or participle oomid<ited
with the sabject by the verb is ; e. g., the rose is stoeet.
(b.) The verb in the predicate agrees with the sub-
ject in number and person ; e. g.jthe eagle flies: here
Jlies is in the third person singular, to agree with eagle.
(42.) Active Verbs are those which express activi
ty ; e. g., the eagle ^le*, the boy dances. Active verbs
are either
{a) Transitive, i. e., such as require an object to
complete their meaning ; ^. g., the boy killed (Whom ?
or what ?) the squirrel. Here killed is a transitive verb.
(6) Intransitive, i. e., such as do not require an ob-
ject; e* g., the birds ^y; the4>oy dances.
[All the verbs used in this lesson are intransitives.]
(43.) (a) The infinitive form of a verb expresses
its action indefinitely, without reference to person or
time : e. g,, to dance, to plough.
Digitized by
Google
FIB8T CONJUC^ATIOlf OF VEEBS. 15
(6) The indicixtive mood of a verb expresses its
action definitely, as a fact or question ; e, g., he ploughs.
Does he dance?
[The imperative and subjunctive moods are treated of here-
after.]
(44.) Tenses.
(a) The present teUse expresses incomplete action
in present time ; e. g., I am ploughing, I plough.
(6) The imperfect tense expresses incomplete ac-
tion in past time ; e. g,, I was ploughing, I ploughed.
{c) The future tense expresses incomplete action in
future time ; e. g., I shall be ploughing, I shall plough.
[RtM. Am liiese l^iree &tms all express imperfect or incompiae action,
they should be called Present Imperfect, Past Imperfect, Future Im-
p&rfect. Bat as the present lutmes are fixed by almost universal
usage, we retain them ; advismg the student to fix distinctly in his
mind the principle that tiiese fonns properly express action as ron-
Hnuing or incomplete. The tense-forms for completed action will be
given hereafter.]
(45.) Con JUG ations.
{a) In Latin, the different moods, tenses, numbers,
and persons of verbs are expressed by various end-
ings ; and the affixing of these to the proper stem of
the verb is called conjugation. (21, Rem.)
(b) There are four conjugations of verbs, distin-
guished by their infinitive-endings.
(c) The infinitive-ending of ihit first conjugation is
are (silong) ; e.g., v5l-are, to fly ; ar-are, to plough.
(^d) To find the stem of any verb, strike off the in-
finitive-ending; e. g., vol-are, stem vol-; ar-are,
stem ar-k To form any mood, tense, (fee, of a verb,
affix the proper ending to the stem thus found.
Digitized by
Google
16
FIRST CONJUGATION. INTRANSITIVES.
(46.) SOME ENDINGS OF THE FIRST CONJUGATION.
iNFiNrnvB, ftr£.
INDICATIVB.
3d Sing.
3dPluraL
Present.
ant
Imperfect.
ab&t
fibant.
Futote.
fibit.
fibant
(47.) By affixing these endings to the stem v 5 1-,
we get the following
PARTIAL PARADIGM.
IW F A N ITI V K, v6l-fa-6, to Ph.
INDICATIVK.
3d Sing.
3d Plor.
Present.
v51-St ^> «^
itfiies,
vdl-ant, ihey
Imperfect.
vdl-abSt, ^> «^ it
tocuflyinji.
v51-&bant they were
flying.
Fntara.
vol-ibit he, the, U
toiUfly.
vdl-ibunt, they wiU
fly-
Rem. In Latin we need not use the personal pronoong he, she, it, or
ihey, with the verb, as in English, because the peraon-endiogi t and
n< indicate the person snflBciently.*
(48.) EXERCISE.
I. Vocabulary.
Oirl, pnella, is.
Forces, copioB^t arom (pi.).
Sailor, nanta, ob (m.).
A Belgian, Belga, m.
To hasten, festin-arS.
To watch, vigH-Sre.
Galba, OalbS, e.
To fly, v6l-§re.
To dance, salt-firS.
To cry out, exclSm-SrS.
To sup, ccen-ire.
To walk, ambul-arl.
II. Example.
The eagle fixes. \ AqullA v51&t.
Rvle of Position, — The subject nominative generally ihtb-
cedes the verb; e. g., in the above example, &quil&
precedes vol&t.
Jin the above example, which word is the subject ? Why 7 (41, a, 1.)
Winch the predicate f W * - - — -
SqniU? Why? (41,*.)]
Wmch the predicate f Why? (41, a, 2.) How does volat agree witii
III. Translate into English.
Cdlumbse v51ant. — Ancil]& saltftt. — Puellae excl&mant. — R6-
gin& coenab&t. — PueM ambtilab&t. — Copiae fesfinant. — ^Aqul-
be v51abant. — Galb& festin&bit. — ^Rgginft salt&t. — Nautse vigi-
l&bant. — Filift rdginae salt&fait. — Belgse festinant. — Filift Gal-
* But when a new subject is introduced, or emphasis is required, tiie
personal pronoon most be used in Latin.
t CopiS, in the singular, means abundance; in the i^lani, forces.
Digitized by
Google
FIRST CONJUGATION. ^TRANSITIVES. 17
be excl&mllt. — PuellsB ambul&bant. — Copke Belg&riim festinA.
bunt. — Saltabant. — Ambulabant. — Coenabunt. — ^Naut& ainbtil&«
bit. — YigUabant. — ^Nauts saltant. — ^Agrlcdl& coen&bit.
IV. Answer the questions in the foot-note.^
V. Translate into Latin.
The dove flies. — The girl walks. — The maid-servant hastens.
• — The sailors dance. — The queen's maid-servant cries out. — The
farmer was supping. — The queen will sup. — The sailor was
watching. — The farmer's daughtei' will dance. — The girl's dove
will fly. — ^The queen's maid-servant will walk. — She was hast-
ening. — They were watching. — He (or she) was supping. —
The eagles were flying.— GalBa was hastening. — The forces of
the Belgians will hasten. — Eagles will fly. — The sailors were
crying out. — The queen was walking.
LESSON IV.
First Declension of Nouns^ Accusative Case, — First
Conjugation of Verbs, Transitives.
(49.) To love.
Queen,
Daughter,
(a) The queen loves her
daughter.
&m-&rd.
r3gin&.
filift.
Reginfi, fili&m &m&U
The queen her-daughter loves.
Rem. The possesnvei, his, her, dus., are not expressed in Latin, except
ix the sake of perspicnity or emphasis.
(50.) (a) It has been stated (41) that every sentence
consists of two parts, subject and predicate ; so the
English sentence (49, a) contains the subject, queen, and
the predicate, loves. But this predicate is limited by
• What is the quantity of the ultimate of Columba ? Why ? (24, 3.) Of
die penult 7 Why? (24,2.) Of the ultimate a of;nie22a? (36, a.) Of the pe-
nult t (24,2.) Why.t Of the antepenult t W^y? (24,1.) WTiatkindof
action does t;o^n^ express ? (44, a.) In what time 7 Wliat kind does am<
bOlibat ? (44, b.) In what time 7 In what tenses may inoomplete action
be expressed 7 (Pres., past, and fat) What is the stem of wfcn^? Ofer-
damafU f Of casftabant ? [The Jitem may be found by striking off any
tense-en ding .] Why can the personal pronoun be omitted m Latin 7 (47,
Rem.) Wben must it be usea 7 (47, Rem., N.)
B2
Digitized by
Google
18 OBJECT ACOUSATITE.
the word daughter^ which is called the direct object of
the yerb. So, in the Latin sentence (49, a), we have,
Atfy'eet Dinct object, Pndkati.
Regina. filiam. am&t
(b) A verb thus taking an object is called a Trans'
itive verb (42, a)j and its direct object is said to be
in the Objective case in English (e. g,^ daughtet)* and
in the Accusative case in Latin (e. ^., filiam). We
have thus the following :
(51.) Rules of Syntax,
(a) The Accusative is the case of the direct object,
(6) Transitive verbs govern the acctisative,
(52.) The accusative-endings of the first declension are.
Sing, ftm; c. ^., fiK-am, r3gin-am, daughter^ queen.
Plur. as ; e. g-., fiK-S,s, rggin-as, daughters^ queens.
(53.) EXERCISE.
L Vocabulary.
MOdHf lunS, OB.
To delight, delect&rS.
Medicine^ medioma, m.
To te^ p68Mesiioh of; I QccfipSiC
or, to teite, S
Island, influla, sb.
To call, v6car6.
To (prep.), ad. (wiA aoooi.).
Poet, poeti, as.
To praiee, land&rd.
To love, amire.
Earth, terra, 89.
To prepare, pSr&re.
Shadow, )
To obscure, obscur&ri.
To arm, anu&re.
Through (prep.), p6r (with ace).
II. Example.
The poet praises the queen. | Po6t& r3gln&m laud&t.
Ride of Position, — ^The object accusative stands before the
transitive verb ; e. g., in the above example, the object
r6gin&m stands befi>re the transitive verb laud&t.
III. Translate into English.
LQn& naut&s d&lect&t. — ^Agrlcdl&fifi&s &m&t. — ^AnciUsm^dX-
cin&m p&rant. — Umbrfi, terrae (33, c) lan&m obscfir&t. — Nauta
r6gin&m kudant. — Galb& copi&s arm&b&t. — UmbrS, sylv&riim
agiYc51as dslect&t. — Galb& sylvas occup&t. — Copiae Belg&rftm
sylvas occupabant. — C51umbas p6r sjlv&s v51&bant. — ^R^gin^
ancillas v5c&t. — Ancilke rd j^n&m imant. — Agricdl& f iH&m vdc&-
Digitized by
Google
VIRST DECLENBION.-*^DATIVE AND ABLATIVE. 10
Ut-— R6gm& podt£lm kudabit^-r-RdssB ancillas ddlectant — Cd-
pi&s armabunt (47, Rem.). — Sylvas occupabunt (47 Kem.}.
IV. Answer the questions in the foot-n^te*
V. Translate into Latin.
The moon delights the farmer. — The farmer's daughter (38, h)
prepares the medicine. — The eaglets feathers delist the queen.
^The Belgians arm (their) forces. — The shade of the wood de-
fights the poet. — Galba will take possession of the wood. —
(They) walk through the woodd. — (They) take possession of the
island. — The farmer loves (his) daughter. — The farmer^s daugh-
ter praises the poet. — The queen will call the maid-servants. —
The queen loves (her) maid-servants. — The shadow of the
Morth will obscure tlie moon. — The poet will praise the sailors.
LESSON V.
First Declension. — Dative and Ablative Cases.
(54.) The dative case of nouns expresses the object
to or for which any thing is done ; e.g.<, the man gives
(to) the hoy a book. Here boy is in the dative case.
Rem. The accusative ca«e, hook, is the direct object of the verb givet ;
the dative, hoy, the rernote object
(55.) {a) The ablative case of nouns expresses the
person or thing with^from, in, or by which any thing
is done ; e. g.j he filled the cup with wine. Here, with
wine would be expressed in Latin by one word, in the
ablative.
{b) The ablative is also governed by prepositions
expressing the relations with,from^ by, <fec.
(56.) The Dative endings are, Sing, ae : Plur. is
{long).
* (1.) What pronoims are not ezpreiied in L atin 7 (47, "R., 49, E.) For what
pwpose are wev sometimes used ? (2.) By what is the transitive verb
Wtedt (By a direct object) What is the case of the direct object in
Latinf (51, a.) Wliat ia the direct object of &mSt, land&tt &o.
Digitized by
Google
30
DATIVB AND ABLATIVE.
The Ablative endings are, Sing, a {long) : Plur. is
(long).
(57.) FIBBT DECLENSION.
CASE-ENDINeS AND FARADieM COMPLETE.
Sincular.
Norn.
i.
te.
Qen.
».
irOxn.
Dat.
m.
I8.
Ace
Sm.
&8.
Voc
S.
m.
AbL
i.
18.
"" j
Singular.
PluraL ll
Norn.
sylv-a, a wood.
sylv-aB, woods.
Gen.
sylv-iB, ofatoood.
sylv-firum, of woods.
Dat
Bylv-oB, to a wood.
sylv-ia, to woods.
Ace.
Bylv-am, a wood.
sylv-is, woods.
Voc.
sylv-fi, O wood I
1 Abl.
Bylv-S, toith, Ac, a wood.
Bylv-is, withf &c., woods.
Rem. Some nomui of this dedensioii are lued only in the phtral;
"viz^^dlYltim, riches ; nuptise, Kmarriage; \nu\A\m,9Jiamlnuik.
(58.) EXEBCISE.
I. Vocabulary.
ToestabUsK 7^^^^^^^^
To strengthen, )
With (prep.), dim (goveimng t^e ab.
ktive caae).
To abound, Sbandfir6,(witil abL).
Deserter, perfugfi, m.
Tear, lacr^^mi, 8b.
Inhabiiant, incolS, m (25, IV.).
Way, viS, 8B.
To show, monstrflrS.
Ambush, or sfiares, insldloe, arom
(oBed only in the pL).
Wild beast, fSrS, ab.
To give, dar6.*
To beseech, obsScrarS.
Letter, littgne, aram.t
Friendship, SmicItlS.
11. Examples.
(a) The fanner shows t^|Agrlc51& pueUis Ti&m mon-
way to the girls. str&t.
Rule of Position. — The remote object* usually precedes
the direct ; e. g.y in example (a), puellls precedes vidm.
{b) The queen walks with the \'R^^iA cUm ancillis ambii-
maid'Servants. l&t.
Rule of Position. — The preposition and its noun precede
the verb ; e. g., in example (6), the words cUm ancillis
precede amhuldt,
* Bfirg has S short before r6.
t Litter&, sinsr., means a letter (as of the alphabet) ; littSne, plur., a
letter = an epistle.
Digitized by
Google
FISST DECL£N8ION. 21
III. Translate into English.
6alb& insldias p&r&t.— 6alb& Belgis (54) in^di&s pftr&t.— Bel-
gae &miciti&m confirmant. — ^Belgas cum rggina &miclti&iii confir-
mant. — Insult f^ris* &bund&t. — Po3t& rSgiiis (dat., 54) rdsam
d&b&t. — Copiae p^r insnUUn festiiiant. — Pdrfu^ rdgin&m obs£-
crd,bant. — Perfugae cum ULcrj^mis regin&m obsficrftbant. — PSr-
fuga r^ginae (dat., 54) littdr&s d&b&t. — Iiic5]ae r6gin&m obsd-
crabant.
IV. Translate into Latin.
The poet praises the queen. — Galba establishes friendship. —
Galba establishes friendship with the Belgians. — The Belgians
wiD prepare snares. — The Belgians will prepare snares for the
inhabitants (54). — ^The islands abound (in) herbs (58, III., note).
— ^Poets give roses to queens (54). — The Belgians are beseech*
ing Galba. — The Belgians are beseeching Galba with tears. —
The queen will establish friendship. — The queen will establish
friendship with the Belgians. — The deserters will beseech the
queen. — The deserters will beseech the queen with tears. —
The Belgians were preparing snares. — The Belgians were
preparing snares for the deserters (54).
* FSris is the abL Rule of Syntax.— The abl. case is used with aU^^B
▼eibs and adjectives of aboujiding and wanHng. ^
Digitized by
Google m
§ 6.
SECOND DECLENSION OF NOUNS.— SECOND
CONJUGATION OF VERBS. (VI.— VIII).
LESSON VL
Nouns. — Second Declension^ Masculine.
(59.) Example
Orassus,
s.
Crass-iis.
Of Orassus,
Crass-!.
Messenger,
Tohasteuy
nunti-tis.
fesfinart.
messengers.
Dunti-i.
The messenger of Or€ts8tts\
hastens. \
NuBtl-iis Crass-i festli
The messengers hi
uten. 1
Nuntl-i festtnant.
(60.) The Second Decleiiiion comprises all nouns
whose gen. sing, ending is i (long). The nom. has
two endings, us for masc. gender, and um for tb0
neut.
(61.) The case-endings for the masculine gender are
as follows :
Sing.
Plur.
Nom.
Qs.
Nom.
1.
Gten.
L
Gen.
orum.
Dat.
6.
Dat.
18.
Ace.
tim.
Ace.
08.
Voc.
6.
Voc.
i.
AbL
0.
Abl.
18.
Rem. The noons in its of this declension are the only Latin noons ia
which the vocative-ending difiers from the nominative.
(62.) By adding these endings to the stem serv- of
the noun serv-us (a slave), we get the
PARADIGM.
\rz — 1
Sing.
Plur.
Nom.
serv-us, a slave.
serv-i, slaves.
Gen.
serv-i, of a slave.
serv-o, to or for a slave.
gerv-um, a vnve.
serv-orum, of slaves.
Dat.
serv-ls, to or for slaves.
Ace.
serv-oB, slaves.
Voc.
serv-e, O slave t
serv-i, O slaves !
Abl.
serv-6, with, by, &c., a slave.
serv-Ts, with, by, &c., slaves.
Digitized by
Google
SBCONB DEOLSN8ION. 88
[Rem, 1. Nearly aUnowig in u« are «sasc.;b«ttii« xiamei of Ir0(t,j>^<(ra<i,
&c, are fem,hj the general role (S5, a). The four noana, alrua,
beUyi cdlus, diitqffi humua, ground ; y annua, /on, are alto
fern, YiTUB, juice; pel&gua, the tea; vnlg^us, the common
people, are neuter.
Rem. 2. Filius, son, and proper namei in !u8, take i ibr tiie too-
atire-ending; e. g.,fiU, Osonf Tulli, O TtiUy !
Rem. 3. DSus, G<m2, haadeua for vocting-; and iatbepbural K.
and y. dii, Q. deorum, D. and AbL diis. Ace deos.]
[For Greek nonna of this declension, see Appendix.]
(63.) EXERCISE.
1. Vocabulary.
Matter (of a family or of slaves), do-
min-iis, f.
Slave, serv-us, 1.
Village, vTc-UB, i.
Ambattador, atlieutenanttlegS^ua,l,
Garden, hort-us, L
To, Sd (prep, with ace.).
In, In (prep, with abL).
Captive, captiv-tis, L
A Chrman, Genn&i-&i, t
To Gall, vdcarS.
To recall, r6vdcar8.*
To call together, oonrSciii.*
An ^duan, JSdn-us, L
To fog, verbgrftrt.
To ride (on horseback), iqoItirS.
^^ He rides to the village, ftd vlcnm SqnitSt When to implies
motion, it most be translated by ad with the accnsatiye.
11. Translate into English,
Ddmonus servum vdc&t. — Servti8ddxi^yi5(54) mddlcin&in p&r-
at, — Crasstis Tictim occtip&t. — ^Nuntitis Crassi vigil&t. — Servl
&d viciam festinant. — Nuntiils ligato (54) vi&m monstr&t. — Servi
domlnos laudant. — AgricdUi &d viciim Squit&t. — Captavi festSnft-
bunt. — Galb& copias (48, I.) Germanorum conv6c&t.* — Nun-
tius capfivos rfivdc&t. — Senri In horto ambul&buat. — Md\d
Crassd (54) insidi&s p&r&bant. — Nimtitls c5piSB ^duordm rdvd-
c&b&t. — Ddmlnus servos verb^r&t.
IIL Translate into Latin,
[Eacollect &at words in parentheses ( ) are dot to be translated.]
The messengers caQ-together the ^duans.~The slaves pi^-
pare medicines for (their) master (dat., 54). — The -^duans take-
poasession-of the woods. — The master praises (his) slaves. — The
slave is ha«tening to (ad, mth occ) the woods. — The ambassa*
dors ride to $he village. — Crassus will prepare an ambush for the
^ Th$ prefix con ^ea the verb the additional meaning of together ; ^e
pirefix re oSback, as in revocdri and convocart
Digitized by
Google
24 SECOND DECLENSION.
JEduans. — The lieutenant calls together the Germans. — The
messenger wiU show the way to the captives (64) — The
slaves are watching. — The master flogs (his) slave. — Galba will
ijkall the lieutenant. — The Germans were preparing an ambush
for Galba (54). — The slave was showing the way to the mes-
senger (64). — The messenger was hastening to the village. —
The slaves are watching in the garden.
LESSON VII.
Nouns. — Second Declension^ Masculines continued.
(64.) All nouns of the second declension whose
stem ends in r reject the ending us in the nom. and e
in the voc; e. g., N. and V. kger, field, instead of
ager-u s, ager-e. Moreover, most of those which have
e in the nominative drop it in the oblique* cases ;
e. g,9 N. age r, G. Sgri instead of ager-i.
(65.) Learn the following
FARADIOM.
Nom.
Gen.
Dat
Ace.
Voc.
Abl
4gr-i, of thejidd.
igr-6, to or for field.
5g6r, O^W.'
ftgr-o, with, by, ^c, field.
pu6r (m.), boy.
pu6r-i, of the boy.
pu6r-6, io or for.
pugr-um, boy.
pu6r, O bov !
pu€r-6, with, by, Sf-c.
vJr, maTi.
vir-i, of the man.
vir-6, to or for.
vir-Qm, man.
vir, O man !
vir-o, with, by, ^c.
Nom.
Gen.
Dat.
Ace.
Voc.
AbL
^-l,fields.
agr-oriim, of fields.
4gr-l8, to or for fields.
igr-OB, fields.
«gr-T, 6 fields I
ftgr-is, with fields.
pu6r-i, boys.
pu6r-6rum, of boys.
pu8r-is, to or for.
pu6r-6s, boys.
pu6r-T, O boys !
pa6r-is, with,by, ^c.
vir-I, men.
vir-orum, of men.
vir-is, to or for.
vir-5s, men.
vir-i, O men !
vlr-f s, with, by,^c.
Rem. Only the following nouns keep the e in all the ccuies, viz., adul-
^r, adulterer; pu6r, boy; abdiT,father-in4aw; g€ngr, son-in-law ; res-
p6r, evening ; Iib€ri (nied only in plural), children ; with the com-
poonds of/er «nd ger; e. g., Liicifgr, iMcifer; comlgSr, homed.
* l^e oblique cai et indnde all the casei except the nominative and
▼ocatire.
Digitized by
Google
SECOND I>ECLEN0ION.
95
(66.)
I. Vocabulary.
EXERCISE.
Boy, paSr, L
Master (of a school), mSgiitSr, tri (64).
Faiker-inrkm, gdcSr, i (65, B.).
Herb, heibS, a.
Bdtolar, ducipul-iis, L
^8(m,fm4l«,i(62,B.2).
U. Exampk,
(a) Tht wood abounds in
wild leasts.
Man, Tfr, L
Game, lud-uf , L
i9<m^»4Mo, gSaSr, i (65, B..).
Children, liberi, omm (rarely oMd ia
singular).
i?VcM,5g€r;igri(64).
Syhifdris ftbirndftt.
T^ uxxM^ in- wUd 'beasts
abounds.
(a) J2uZ€ q/* Syntax. — The ablatave case is used witii ad*
jectiYes and verbs of abounding and wanting.
HI. Translate into English.
Padr m&gistram &m&t. — Regin& sdcdr&m ftmftUt. — ^Pudri in
ftgro ambulabunt. — Agri herbis (abl., 66, II., a) Abundant. — A.g-
ricdlft p6r ftgros (58, II., b) 6qu!tftt.— Igrlcdlft sdcfirfim v6c&t^
Pudllae m&^trum laudant. — Vin in ftgris ambul&bant. — Lddi
pnftros delectant. — Rdgin& gdndrds &m&bit. — Viri ad viciim
festin&bant. — Agrlcdlft fibdr5s &m&t. — M&gistdr disclptUos con-
Tdc&t.
IV. franslate into Latin.
The girls wait in the fields. — The field abounds in herbs (66,
n., a). — The sailor calls back the boys. — The queen loves (Her)
son-in-law. — The queen gives (her) son-in-law (dat., 54) arose.
— The scholars love (their) master. — The fields abound in herbs
(66, II., a). — ^The farmers were walking through the fields. —
The son of the master calls the boys. — The master walks in
the garden with (his) sons. — The herbs of the field delight the
poet. — Gi^es delight girls. — The farmer shows the way to
the boy. — ^The master will praise (his) scholar^. — ^The master
wiU fiog (his) scholani.
c
Digitized by
Google
26
SECOND CONJUGATION OF VESB8.
LESSON VIII. •.
Nouns. — Second Declension^ Neuter. — Verbs^ Second
Conjugation.
(67.)
Slave.
servtis
Cup.
pdciiltim (neut.).
TojiU,
impldrd.
The slave fiUs hi$ mmter's
Serviis pOcillilm ddnaSni
cup.
impldt.
The-slave ihe-cup of-kU'-master
fills.
(68.) The case-endings of the second declension for
the neuter gender are,
Sioc.
Plur.
Nom. Ace., Yoc.
nm.
a.
OeiL
i.
orum.
Dat, AbL
0.
IS.
Rem, The ending! of the nom., aoa, and yoc. are always the lame in
aenter nouns. In this declension, those of dat. and abL are alike also.
(69.) By adding these endings to the stem pocul-,
we get the
PARADieM.
Nom.
pocul-um, a cup.
pOcul-a, cups.
Gen.
pocul-i, of a cup,
p6cul-6, to or fir a cup.
p6cul.drum,ef«^. \
pat
p6cul-is, to or for cups. M
Ace.
pocul-um, a cup.
pociU-S, cups. n
Voc.
pocul-um, O cup 1
yocvU^Ocupt! U
Abl.
];>dcul-o, uiUht oy, &c, a cup.
pocul-is, with, from, *«., cap».||
THE SECOND CONJUOATION OF VERBS.
(70.) The second conjugation comprises all verbs
whose infinitive-ending is ere (e long before r d) ; e. g.f
mon-er^, to advise; dbC'er^f to teach.
(71.) SOME EWPIWeS OF THE SECOND CONJUGATION OF VERBS.
INFINITIVK, %Ti.
INDICATITB.
3d Sing.
SdPlm^
Pr«Mat
St.
ent
Imperfect.
ebftt
fibant.
Futar*.
6brt
6bnnt
Digitized by
Google
SECOND CONJUGATION OP VEBBS.
2'>
(72.) By ajSixing these endings to the stem m on-, we
get the following
PARTIAL PARADIGM.
Tsmnrivx, mon-ftrg, to advite.
liwic.
3d Sing.
3dPlur.
Present.
mon-^t, he, she, &c.,
advises.
mon-§nt| they ctdvise.
Impeifect.
mon-ehSX, he, she, &c.,
foas advising,
mon-Sbant, th^
admsing.
J. Fatare.
wiHadpisf^
^n-ibwa^ they will
advise.
foere mdn-el
(73.) EXERCISfl.
I. Vocabulary.
Assistance, auxaium, i (68). TofU, implerg (70).
To ask, entreat, idgarS. Danger, pSriculuxn, L
Camp, csfltra, drum (pi.) To fear, tlmerfi (70).
To move, xnSverS (70). Forum, forum, L
Cup, x>dciilum, i. Toum, oppidihn, L
• Wine, vmum, L
II. Translate into English.
Legfttiis amdfiiim r5g&t.— -Galb& copias &d (63, 1., ^) castrft
rdy5c&t. — Servus pociiluin vino (55, a) impldt. — CrassiiB castrft
mdvdt. — CopiaB &d oppidum festinabant — jLgAchVk oppSdum
kad&t. — Copias Germ&ndrum ftd castrft fesfinftbunt. — Nuntius
pSriculum timdt. — ^Pueri p6r fbrum ambtilant. — Germftni p6ri-
ciilft non limeDt. — Legafi p6r oppidum ambulabunt. — ^Agrfcftlft
oppldft -Slduorum laudftbft't. — Crassiis oppidtim occtip&bftt. —
Servi pdculft impl3bant.
III. Translate into Latin.
The iBduans were asking assistance. — The Germans will*
more (their) camp. — The Germans were praising the town.— •
The ambassadors of the iBduans hasten to (63, I., ^") the
camp« — The forces of the Belgians fear the danger. — The mes-
senger win recall the ambassadors to the camp. — Galba's mes-
senger will recall the Germans to the town. — The ambassadors
praise the towns of the Germans. — The farmers were walking
through the forum. — The boy walks through the town. — The
sailors wiD not fear the danger. — Crassus wiU not move (his)
camp. — The Germans were-taking-possession-of the town.—
The servant was filling the cup.
Digitized by
Google
§ 7.
ADJECTIVES OF FIRST CJuASS. (IX— X.)
LESSON IX.
Adjectives. — Class /, i^Sfa^iim.
(74.) Thb Adjective (14), in Latin, agrees with the
noun in gender^ number^ and case^ and therefore has
endings to distinguish these; e. g.j pu6r b5n-us, a
good boy; pOeM bdn-d, a good girl; ddnum bdn-
G m, a good gift.
(75.) We divide adjectives into three classes, ac-
cording to their endings. Those of the^r^^ class have
the fern, endmg of the first decl. of nouns, and the nutsc.
and netU. endings of the second* Thus,
(76.)
ENDINOS.
PAKADIGM.
8TN017X.AJU
M.
T.
N.
^
F.
N.
N.
Ufw
fi.
dm.
bte-iid.
bdn-ft.
b&i-iim.
G.
i
e.
1.
bdn-i..
bdn-B.
bdn-i
D.
&
».
a
bdn-d
bdtt-e.
bdn-dw
A.
um.
im.
um.
bdn-um.
bte-im.
ban-am.
V.
«.
i.
mw^
bdn^
b6n4u
bdn^im.
A.
o.
i.
a
bdn-d.
bdn-a.
bon-db
PI.T7BAL.
N.
i
».
fi.
bdii4.
bdn-n;
bdB4L
o.
oroixL
ftnun.
drum.
bdn-onun.
bdn-ftnun.
bdn-oriSm.
D.
U.
If.
u.
bdn-lf.
bdniB.
bdn-ii.
A.
di.
fti.
8.
h6ori§.
bftn-ai.
bte4L
i V.
1.
o.
fi.
bdn-i.
bdn-89.
bdn-&.
!LL=
U.
ii.
if.
bdn-ii.
bon-li.
bdnlia.
(77.) Adjectives whoie stom ends in ^r do not
take the endings Qs of the nommative and d of the
vocative,
(a) Most of them drop the d in inflection ; e. g.^
pulch«r, pulchr-ft, pulchr-iim, heautyul;
pulcbr-I, pnkhr-w, pokhr-i^ &c.
Digitized by
Google
ADJB0TJVB6 OF FIl^T ChABB. 20
{h) Butasp^r, rough; Hedr, tarn; lib^r^yVe^; mXs^r,
miserable; ^r 09p 6 r, fortunate; tdndr, teiider{vid the com-
pounds of gd rand f&r; e* g., cornig^r, flammif6r)i re-
tain it; e. g.^
XB&a&Tf mig6r-&, n^(86r-uin»
misdr^i, n^lsdr-as, xnlsdr-i, &c.
(78.) BX8AGISE.
I. Vocctbulary.
Oooc^ b&i-uB, S, urn.
dny^ magD-da, 8, tinL
Manyt molt-uB, 8, um.
Thick, dens-uSi 8, um.
Broadf wide, lat-us, 8, tSm.
3fy, xne-uB, 8, um.
Tkf, tu-u8, 8, Um.
II. Examples.
(a) T^ slave fXU tkelarge ISenriis p^ciiliiinin&gniitn
.&i«, hers, 4t» (own), ta-fii, S» um.
Moiter (of slares), hiriii, u
ToAof^hSberS.
JExample, exemplum^ u
River, fldvids, i.
ToJHghten, terr6r6.
oi;?. I impl&t.
Rule of Position. — (a) The adjective, nnleBs em^iatic, fi^
lows the noon; e. g., in the above ezas^to, ^lagailm
follows p o c ti 1 u m.
(5) The slave fills the queen^s I Servils magniim t^gjim pdc-
largecwp. \ tiliim impldt.
Rule of Position. — (5) When the noun governs another in
the genitive, die adjective stands first, and die genitive
between it and its nonn ; e. ^., in example (&), magnum
rOgpuue pocttlilm.
III. Translate into EngUsh.
Re^n& filUim snUm 8.m8.t. — Servi&s p6ctllilm mettm impldt. —
Servi p6ciiUl magn& implent. — FxiM mSgistrftm bdntim &mant.
— ^BelgSB vic6s moltOs h&bent. — ^AgilcdUL bdntis vi&m monstr&t. —
M&gist^r pu^ros b5nd8 ddcSblt. — Mftgistii bdni exempUL bdnii
pn^ris (54) dant. — Lfigftti&s magn&m regin» (78, II., b) cdr6n8in
vfdftt. — FerffigsB &d fl6viiUn< Kbtiim festSnaat. — Serves magntim
poigri (78, n., b) pOciiltLm impldbftt. — Sjlfm densse mmdos ter-^
reat.^ — ^Pudn sylv&m dens&m tifmebunt.-*-Serviis bdniis hSriim
&mftt.
rV. Translate into Latin.
The JEdnans have many villages,— The qu©«» ^^^ (her)
C2
Digitized by
Google
30 aOafE FORMS OF EBBE.
good son. — ^mie fimner shows die liiick wood. — Good slayes
love (their) misters. — Good masters love (their) slaves. — The
Belgians have' many towns. — The broad rivers frighten the de-
serters. — The boy sees the large town. — Crassus recalls the good
lieutenant. — The son praises the great queen. — The Germans
have large villages.^^He praises thy slave. — He loves thy daugh-
ter. — He will praise his own daughter. — The deserters were
hastening to the broad river.— The slave will fill the large cup
of his master (78, U., h). — The lieutenant will see many villages
of the Belgians (78, U., &^The thick wood will fri^ten the
boys.
LESSON X.
Some Forms ofjS s s e. — Adjectives continued.
(79.) Learn ^the following forms of the irregular
verb Esse, to be :
XNDICATIVK.
3d Sing.
SdPlur.
Pnvent.
est, if.
sunt;, ore.
6nmt, xoere.
Future. ||
grant, they wOl be. |
(80.) (a) Jn<fofcnceM««ce. |^°"»'* '""!"" V*"
I Indolence a vice w.
Here Inertia is the subject of the sentence ; v i-
t i li m is the predicate ; both in the nominative.
Rule of Syntax. — (a) The noun in the predicate must be
in the same case as the subject, when it denotes the same
person or thing.
(81.) (h) The rose is heauti-\'R,6B^ pulchr& est.
jvl, I The rose beautiful is.
Here rdsa is the subject, and pulchrS. thepred-
icate ; both in nom. sing. fem.
Bute of Syntax. — (5) The adjective in the predicate agrees
with the subject in gender, number, and case.
[As a general mJe, a sentence sbonld not end with a manosyttaMe ; bat
in short passages, such as the above, especially when the word before est
ends in a wnod, or m, it is admissible.!
Digitized by
Google
ADJECTIVES, CLASS FIBST.
31
(82.) EXERCISE.
[Eefer to Kales of Position (78, IL) and to Hem. on a4iectiTes ending in
o-{77}.]
I. Vocabulary.
Ha/ppy^ beatus, S, um.
True, verus, S, um.
Friendship, Snilcitla, sb.
Everlcistinff, seznpltemus, S, um.
Labienus, LSbienus, i.
FooUth, staltuB, i, um.
Tender, tener, S, um (77, b).
Flame, HomcaSi, a.
Sed, ruddy, ruber, a, um (77, a).
A lettf, f51ium, I.
Butt, taurus, i.
Homed, comiger, 8, um (77, b).
iManh, fignus, 1.
Europe, EurSpS, n.
Peninsula, peninsulS, ib.
Anger, Ira, ib.
lUustriom, cl&rus, 8, um.
Crow, corvuB, i.
Black, niger, S, um (77, a).
Not, ndn (always placed before the
word which it qualifies)
Always, semp&r (adv.).
Cow, vaccfi, 8B.
Attica, Attitc&f n.
Britain, Biltann^ 8B.
Ireland, Hibenizfi, 8b.
B5m semper be&ti stint.
Verae ftmicitiaB sempltenuB
sunt.
L&bieniis leg&tiis £r&t.
Stolti non sunt be&ti.
Miserable, miser, a, um (77, b).
Hem. In such phrases as the good, the urise, &c., the noun fmenj is .
omitted in Latin, as in English ; e. g., good mej^ = b 5 ni ; fools =
stulti; the happy = he iti. Also, iik»»y^«^» =multa (neut);
oU things = omnlS.
II. Examples.
The good are always happy.
True friendships are everlast-
ing.
Lahiewus was a lieutenant.
The foolish are not happy.
III. Translate into English.
PueMpulchrft est (81, 6).— Herb« ftgr6rftmt6nSr»sunt(81,
h) Ate &qull&riim m&gnae sunt. — Flamm& rubr& est. — F6K&
r5s&rum pulchrft sunt. — Tauri comigfiri sunt. — Agni tdndri in
Agris sunt. — ^Reginft pulchrii in hort6 ambulftbftt.-t-Pu6r &gn5s
pukhios vldftt. — V6r& Amicitia sempiternft est. — Stulti miseri
sunt— Eur6p& peninsiilft (80, a) est.— Atticft pSninsiilft est.— Irft
^titim est magntim.— Crassus legates 6rftt.— LabiSnfis Ifigftttls
elirAs 6rftt.— Corvtis plum&s nlgrfts hftbSt.— Stulti n6n sunt
be&ti. — ^Bdntis semper befttiis est.
IV. Translate into Latin.
The queen was beautiful.— The queen's daughter was beau-
Digitized by
Google
92 AI>JECTIY£8 OF FIRST CLASS.
tiful. — The beautifu] daughter walks m the garden. — ^The fields
abound in tender herbs (66, 11^ a). — The feathers of doves are
beautiful. — The feathers of crows are black. — The flames were
ruddy. — ^The leaves oi roses are tender. — Cows are homed. —
The queen walks in the garden with (cUm) her beautiful daugh-
ters (f ^btis*). — The gill will see the tender lambs in the fields.
— The good are not always happy. — ^Fools are not always mis-
erable. — Crassus was a great lieutenant. — Britain is an island. —
Ireland is an island. — Geneva is a large town. — Anger is always
a vice. — Everiatting frienddiipe are true. — Fnendahips are not
always everlasting.
* Fills, daughter, and dei» goddnt, have abL pi. in abfts, instead of
It, to digtingnian them firom fiUla» tona, dila» gpda.
Digitized by
GooglQ
§ 8.
THIED AND FOURTH CONJUGATIONS OF
VERBS.
LESSON XI.
Verbs. — TTiird cmd Fourth ConjugatioM.
(83.) Th» Third Conjugation compnses all verbs
"Whose infiiiitive ending ia erS (6 short before r6) ;
e. g.^ scrib-ere, to write.
(84.) SOME ENDINGS OF THE THIRD CONJUOATION.
Kfraonvs, Are.
maaoAtvnL,
Singular.
PhinO.
PrsMOt.
it
ont
Inmerlbct.
eto.
Sbimt
Fator*.
St.
ent.
(85.) By affixiijig these endings to the stem sx^r ib-»
we get the Mowing
PARTIAL PA&ADieM.
INDIOATXVX.
3dBias.
■cdb-i^ he, thtf &c.,
^ Fitir.|acifb-iii]t» ikey wrUeJifU!ir^^vA,thoywert
writing.
Imporfect.
8onb-«bi^ hej tket
(fjc,t was wriHng.
■dlb^ he, she, &e,
wiUwrite.
■crib-en^ th^ wiU
write.
THE FOURTH OONJUOATION.
(86.) The Fourth Gor^ugation comprises all verbs
whose infinitive-ending is irS (i long before r6) ; e.g,f
aud-ire, to hear.
(87.) SOME ENDINeS OF THE FOURTH CONJUOATION.
I MBbag.
iwJtNATivj^i Irc
XNDIOATIVIE.
1^
Imperfect
iibat
iSbant
rntuM.
iee.
lent
(88.) By affixing these endings to the stem and-.
We have the following
Digiti'zed
by Google
84 THIRD AND FOURTH CONJUGATIONS OF VERBS.
FARTIAI* FARADieM.
mFmiTivjt, md-tnfto hear.
DiDICAxxv*.
Had Sing.
HadPliir.
PreMot
aad-!t, he, she, &c.,
heca^.
aiid-Iimt» they hear.
Imperfect
aad-iebat,A«,#A«, &c,
weu hearing,
and-iSbant, theytoere
hearing.
aod-iSt, he, ehe, Ac,
toiUhear,
aad-ient^ they wiU
hear.
(89.)
I. Vocabulary.
EXERCISE.
To $end, mitterS (83).
In (prep.). ™«*
To $leep, domilre (86).
Bed<ihamber, dihXcHl^aa, L
To run, corr&rd (83).
To rule, rtgeri (83).
Tower, casteUiiiD, L
II. Example*
Crassus comes to the large
totom
Small, parrtfi, S, iSm.
To come, T^re (86).
A Roman, &dm&niii. S, tSm.
To lead, duogrg (83).
World, mondOs, L
To conquer, vinoSre (83).
Toforttfy, mubirfi (86).
Dipitiac»s,'DiYitiM^L
Crassiis magnftm ftd oppt-
dtim vdnlt.
Mide of Position. — ^The adjective belon^g to a noun gor-
emed by a preposition is frequently placed bejore the
preposition, «. ^., magntim in the example.
Ill, Translate into English.
Belgae l@gftt5s mittunt. — ^Belga Isgfttds &d Crassiim mittont. —
Pndri in cubiculd donmont. — Puelte parv5 (89, II.) In ctibiciild
domudbant. — RSginft magntim &d oppidiim vdnidt. — QdlhiSi cO-
pi&s It5m&noriim dtkiAt. — Du (62, R., 3) mnndum rdgont. —
Deds mundtim sempdr r60t. — Rdm&ni GhiUos vinc^bant. — Ld-
g&tjis casteM munieb&t. — ^dui nuntium ad LabiSntim mittont.
^-Copiae Belg&rum ftd oppidtim vdnient. — DMti&cils copi&s
JBdnoriim dac@b&t
' IV. Translate into Latin.
The horse runs. — The boy sleeps. — The boy was running. —
The slaye comes. — Crassus fortifies many towers. — The sla^e
was coming to (63, J., 0^) his master. — The beautiful boy will
deep in a little bed-chamber (89, II.). — The gods always govern
* In, BigniiVing into or unto, govenui the accusative; signifying m
gorernf the Mlaiwe,
Digitized by
Google
THIRD AND FOURTH CONJUGATIONS OF VERBS* 85
the world. — The Romans are coming to the large town. — ^The
farmer was sleeping in the field. — Divitiaciis was leading tha
forces of the ^duans. — The Belgians send messengers to Craa-
SOS. — Crassus sends a messenger to the Belgians. — ^The girls
win sleep iin a little bed-chamber. — Crassus wiQ fortify the
towers. — The Romans take-possession-of the towers of GaoL
Digitized by
Google ^
§ 9.
PASSIVE VERBS. (XII.— XIIL)
LESSON XII.
Verbs. — Passive Voice. — First and Second Conjuga-
tions.
(90.) The endings of the third persons of verbs, in
the tenses for incompkte or continued action (44), are
the same in the passive as in the active voice, with
the addition of the syllable ur . Thus, we have in the
(91.) FIRST CONJUGATION,
3d Sing.
SdPlur.
ActiT*.
SmSit he, shct it, lavet,
im-ant, ihey love.
un-&t^r, he, ike, it ii loved.*
gm-anMIr, fJUy org laved.
3d Sing.
3dPlar.
Ssa-dbat, he wa$ lavir^. I Sm-abat-ib-, he wa$ loved.
Km-iUKmt,theyioerelomng. \ fim-abant-iJr, they were loved.
3d Sing.
SdPlur.
im-diit, he shall or will
love.
im-abufU, ihey thaU or
wiU love.
fim-ablt-Ar, he shall or wilt be loved.
Sin-&bimt-ifr, they thaU or wiU be
(92.)
SECOND CONJUGATION.
3d Sing.
3d Plur.
▲cttT*.
m6a-€t, he advises.
mon-erU, they advise.
mSn-^t-ir, he is advised.
mSn-ent-dr, they are advised.
3d Sing.
3d Plur.
m6n-U>at, he was advising.
jaLhJXribant, they were advi-
sing.
mdn-Hhi^Hr, he was advised.
m5n.€bant-t{r, they were advised.
3d Sing.
3d Plur.
m6n-ebU, he wiU advise,
mburibuni, they will ad-
vise.
mdn-^btt-fir, he will be advised.
mdn-^bont-iir, they wiU be advised.
* The English langaage has no fonns for incomplete action in tiie pass-
ive voice. Re is loved, he was loved, &c., the house is buiU, &c., -pro '^^
express action complete. An awkward periphrasis— he is being i
Digitized by
Google
Crassiis Ifigfttfim T6eit.
Legfttiia a Cra886 Tdc&tfic
PASSIVES OF FIRBT ANJ> SSCOITD CONJ0GATIOV8. 37
(dS.) IXXftOIftB.
I. Vocabulary.
Cfame, sport, lacKui, L « I 7V> feadl» dficire.
Toddight, delectus. | fiptte^ ooo«pii«.
II. Exampks.
(a) Crassus caUs the lieuUn-
ant.
(b) . The. lUtUerumt is caUed
by Crassus,
In tliese examples, tbe same action is expresaed {yvt^ tbe caBmg of
ike lieutenant) in (a) by lihe tMcHve tank, m (b) by the passive. By-
ery sentence in wMcb a trandthre yerif ocean may Urns be diaaged
into Qie passive fcnn. The agtnt (Crassos) is the sulfjeet nowunor
twem(a); and in (^) is expressed by tiieaMafiM^CmMo^widi^
peefoskkm «, by.
Rtm. If ^subject be aM«n^,npt a jwnon, nor considered as a jMr-
son, tbet iHrei>p9itton is omitted ; e. g., PdciUQm vino imptU^, dio
cap v fSkod wUk wine. (This is the abl ci cause or m eant ,)
ni. Translate into English.
AuziHiim a Idgato rdgatur. — ^Aiix^Qium a ]3g&td n$g&hfttiir. —
Anxifinm a legato rogabitar. — Copiae a Galba rSvdcantfir. — Pdcfl-
Mm a serYo implgbator. — Oppida a Craaso occupabantar. — M6-
dl^ia ab «Mn^ p^Mbltar.— Pu^ri b5m a mj^gistrd la u dan tii r.
— Copiae GenifiaiidFiiiii a Labidnd rdvdcabiiiitiir. — ^PdciUa Tind
(93, IL, R.) impleiitur — Pu6n lu& (93, 11., K.) ddbctentar.
IV. Translate into Latin.
The master is loved by (bis) schoters. — The maff^r will be
loYecLbj (lus) good scholars. — The cups will be filled (with)
wme (93, II., R.). — The Germans were eafied together by
Cnatas.— The vil^g^ were seissed fay th« Raipans. — The
tpi^im win 1^ seized by the ^diuuas^ — Medicines are prepared
by the skves. — Good boys wiH l^, piaised by their masters. —
The good boys wiD be advised by ^their masters. — The scholars
are taught by their master. — The scholar was taught by his
the boose mbelnghdlt^^ia sometimes .employed, bat is not to be approved.
The honse is buuding is afbrm sanctioned by usage, bat in many verbs it
would be ambigooos. The jmpil mus^ remmnber^ then* ^at in the exer-
cises in the First Part, the lonns is loved,is admsed, was admsedf ko., are
D
Digitized by
Google
88 PA8SIVE8 OF THIRD AND FOURTH CONJUGATIONS.
master. — The giris are defiglrted widi games (93, 11., R.). —
The slaves will be delighted with games. — The queen is praised
by (her) maid-servant — The queen was praised bj (her) maid-
servant. — T&e queen will be praised by (her) maid-servant.
LESSON xm.
Verbs. — Passive Voice. — Third and Fourth Conjuga^
(94.)
tions.
THIRD CONJUGATION.
Actire.
r<g-»^ KCf the, it nde$,
T^t^-whtt they rule.
3d Sing.
3d Plur.
1T^gib-Hr, he, the, it it ruled.
rggont-ilr, they are ruled.
rig-ebat, he wot ruling. ||rSgeb&t>^, he wcu ruled.
r^g-ibani, they toergrttwy.||rggebant-flr, they were ruled.
3d Sing.
3d Plor.
3d Sing.
3d Plur.
r6g-^, he thall or will rule,
rig-ent, they shall or wiU
rule.
Hg^t-itr, he shall or wHl be ruled.
r6gent-tin they shall or wiU be ruled.
(95.)
FOURTH CONJUGATION.
dd Sing.
3d Plnr.
Aetiw. .
ttQd'% he hears.
aad-innt, they hear.
ItaidSt-Ur, he is heard.
andinnt-iir, they are heard.
nfPXKFXCT.
3d Sing.
3d Plur.
aad-i§bftt» he was hearing,
and-iebant, they were hear-
aadi€bat-iii^, he was heard.
aadiebant>iln t^ ^^re heard.
beheard.i
3d Sing.
3dPfair.
and-iSt, he shall or will
hear.
aod-ien^ they shall or wHl
hear.
aad-i6C-itr, he shall or wiU
waMeiBA^^iheyshaUorwiabehemdA
(96.)
I. Vocabulary.
A Roman, BomSnua, I.
7h lay aside, deponezS.
Oarrison, pnesldium, I.
EXERCISE.
AGaulQaSL^h
To distribute, ^^^^^^
arrange,
IL Translate into English.
Legati ft Belgis mittuntiir. — Mnndiis & De6 rfigltftr. — C^pm-
Digitized by
Google
PASSIVES OP THIED AND FOUKTH CONJUGATIONS. 39
Romanor&m & Gralbft ducnnt&r. — Galfi a Rdm&ms ▼incimtiir. —
Ir& a rSgina ddpdidtur. — Castelliim & Labifino mdnitiir. — ^Pnsd-
£& & legHto dispdnuntur. — Ldg&ti &d iEduds mittebantiir Cd-
piffi ^duorum ad victim ducentiir. — EpistdUL &r6giii& scribitiir. —
Oppid& Beig&r&m mnmdbantiir. — ^Nuntii &d CraMfim mittent&r.
III. Translate into Latin,
Galba is conquered by the Belgians. — ^The camp ii fortified
bj Crassus. — The forces of Crassus are led to fiie camp. — The
forces of the iBdui are sent to the yillage. — ^Anger will be laid-
aside by the queen. — Galba was conquered by the Grauls. — ^Let-
ters will be written by die queen. — Letters are written to (ad)
Crassus. — The garrisons are not distributed by Crassus. — The
towers are not fortified by the Belgians. — ^The world is always
governed by God. — The Germans are ruled by a lieutenant. —
A letter wiU be written by the queen.
Digitized by
Google
§ 10.
THIRD DECLENSION OF NOUNS.— PARTIAL
TREATMENT. (XIV.— XV.)
LESSON XIV.
Nouns. — J%ird DecknmoTi.
(97.) The Third Declension comprises all nouns
whose gen. sing, ends in is.
Sem, To fii¥l tke ^tam of any noon of t]^a dedepiifliv itrike off !■
from the gen. aiog<; e. g., gen, hominis {cfa f7uin);stem hdmin.
(98.) The case-enduags are as follows:
Singakr.
nomL 11
M. & F.
Neat.
M.&P.
Neat
N.
—
N.
eik
i(tt).
a
is.
If.
G.
um (ium).
um (ium).
D.
1.
r
D.
{buc.
Ibiu.
A.
em(im).
likeN.
A.
eg.
i(tt).
V.
UkeN.
likeN.
V.
eg.
«(i«).
A.
6(1).
e(i).
A.
ibufl.
m»:
Rem, 1. The nooL ending is not given, because of the many fopns in
which that case ocean. Of the changes to which the stem is sub-
ject, see hereafter (Part H).
Si. Of the endings Im, i (in ace and abL sing.), and ia, ium (plnr.), see
hereafter (Part IL).
3. The genders of all nouns of this declension are marked in the vo-
cabularies. The general rules of gender (25, a) of oonn^ apply to
this declension : special rules are given (355). We give here only
(99.) Partial Rule of Oender. — Most nouns which add s to
the stem to form the nominative are feminine.
(100.) PARADIGMS MASCULINE AND FEMININE FORMS.
Sing.
Sp«ch (m.).
HoDoar (m.).
City (f.).
Nstion (race), C
Law(C).
N. and V.
sermd.
honSr.
urb-B.
gens (gents).
lex (legs).
Gen.
sermon-is.
hdndr-Is.
urb-Is.
gent-Is.
l^-Is.
Dat.
sermon-i.
hdndr-L
arb-i.
gent-I.
leg-l
Ace.
Benn6n-6m.
hondr^m.
arb-6m.
gent-€m.
leg-&n.
AbL
sermon-g.
hdnor^.
urb-€.
gent-6.
leg-g.
Plur.
Speeches.
Hononn.
Cities.
Races.
Laws.
N., A., V.
sermon-es.
h5n6r-6s.
urb-C8.
gent^s.
l«g-€s.
Gen.
sermon-iSm.
hdnOr-tim.
urb-itlm.
gent-ItXm.
teg-iim.
ID. and A.
hdudr-fbOs.
urb-Ibtis.
gent-lbiis.
isg-nios.
Digitized by
Google
THIRD S|;CLEN@ION pF NpUNS. 41
Rem, 1. Obienre that i{ or ^ in the ntemha dropped in the nom. before
»; and c ot » combined witb s to form x; e.g., Iaii8=laiid-s;
arx = arc-s; lex=leg-t; genB = gent>s.
3. An tbe ending! are short bat I (dat. sing.) and da (N., A., V. phor.).
(101.) EXERCISE.
I. Vocabidary.
[in the following vocabularies, t^ stem of ererjr noen of the third ie-
denaion ia placed immediately afier ihe nommatiTe form, and before
the genitive ending.]
Rock, pfitrS, n.
Tree, arbdr, (aibdr) fa, £
To buUd a neit, nIdlflcarS. *
C<nQfr, CoeiaSr, (Caeiir) fa.
And, 6t (coi\j.).
Consul, OQDMiii, (constil) fa, m.
Oenerql, impSr&tSr, (impSrfttdr) fa,iii.
A Helvetian, He^Stiifa, L
Kv%g, rex, (reg) fa, m.
L«t,lex,(l%)J«»f*
To abrogaJ^ ftbr5gftre.
•^ joatOa, fi, tm.
Woriiy, digntfa, fi, dm.
Part, paiB, (part) fa, d
Commoi^^people, pleba, (pleb) fa, £
Tok0iie,mnifi^'
II. 3Van5&zte tTi^o English.
Rex 1^-Qs &br6g&t. — Copise |Ul uri>-dm fe8tinaiit.-^Ldg-M
justsD Bunt. — Pars pleb-ls urfo-dm r^linqtiit. — Magn& pairs pl^b-
isurb-dm rdBiiqiiit. — ^Aqdils In p^tris dt arb5r-lbiis ilIdtfKcant. —
L*g-€8 1^ r^g-d ftbrdgantiir. — C6pi» ftd nrb-^m r^Tdcantiir. —
Hel?6tn &d CsBS&r-^m l^g&tOs mittont. — Nuntius sermon-^m
con^Is laud&t. — ln^)$r&tdr nuntios rdvdc&t. — ^Rex dignis (54,
ud 82, 1., R.) b6n5r-fis d&bit.-^-CopisB Belgtrttm iub-«m rftBn-
qndbant.— C«BS&r ftd vicds festinftbftt — Ldgftti &d imp«r4tdr-6m
mittnntiir — Imp6r&t5r nuntios &d nrb-^m mittdt. — Legits
pvt-dm cdpiftriim r6y5c&blt.
IIL Translate into Latin.
The kws were just. — ^The king wffl revoke Ae Iaw8.^-Th»
general win leave the vilbge. — llie consols siend ambaQsadors.^ —
The consuls recall the ambassadors. — Doves build their nests in
gardens and trees. — ^The consuls are praised. — ^The city is for-
tified. — ^Honours will be given* — Honours are given to the wor-
thy (82, 1., R.). — Ambassadors, will be sent to liie consuls. —
Honours are ^ven to Caesar (54). — The speech of the consul
is praised. — Honours are ^ven to the general. — ^A great part
of the common-people win leave the city. — The consuk wtfl
recan the conomon-people. — The ambassadors wiU leave die
«ty. — ^The general win be sent. — Caesar win be recaned.«—
The laws were unjust.
Da
Digitized by
Google
42
THISD DECLENSION.
LESSON XV.
Nouns. — Third Declension^ continued.
(102.) PARADIGMS. — NEUTER FORMS.
11—85—
8e«(n.).
Song (a.).
Work (n.).
▲miMl (n.).
N.,A,V.
D.
AbL
mSr-Ts.
mar-i.
mSr-L
carmSn.
carmin-is.
carmin-I.
carmin-6.
dpiif.
op€r-ii.
6p6r-L
6p6r-6.
SnimSl.
Snimal-ia.
finlm&l-L
anImal-L
Flur.
Seae.
Sonp..
Works.
Animals.
N., A., V.
G.
D., AbL
mSr-ift.
mar-iOm.
m&r-lbOs.
carmln-a.
carmln-um.
carmin-ibiia.
dp6r-&.
SpSr-um.
Sp^r-Ibiia.
Sntmftl-Tft.
SD&nal-Tdm.
finimSl-iboa.
Rem. 1. Neuters whose nom. ends in al, ar, or e, take i for abL sing.
ending; IS, nom. plnr., and iQm, gen. plor.
2. Partial Rule of (?e»<20r.— Noons whose stems end in a 1 or it r aio
neuter.
I X E R C I S E.
To curct heal, sanflrfi.
To miHgate, mitigar^.
River, flumSn, (flumln) Is (n.).
To svfim across, transnarC (gov. <xee,).
Work, dpus, (dp€r) is (n.).
Fish, piscls, (pise) is (m.).
Time, tempiis, (temper) is (n.).
To change, mutftrfi.
Man, hdmS, (hdmin) is (m.).
Stormy, turbid, tarklidAa, X, iSaa.
(103.)
I. Vocabulary.
Name, nomSn, (nomin) is (n.).
To enrol, conscrib6r6.
JVeaty, foadiis, (foedSr) is (n.).
To violate, vidlfirS.
Spoil or booty, prsBdS, sb.
My, sociiis, L
Summer, aestas, (aost&t) is (f.).
Cold, fiigus, (Mg5r) is (n.).
Burden, dniis, (onSr) is (n.).
To carry, portftrd.
W0und, vcdniis, (TnhaSr) is (n.).
II. Translate into English.
Consul ndniiD& conscrlblt. — Caes&r foedus (ace.) vidl&b&t, dt
prsed&m sdciis (54) d&b&t. — iEstfts frigus (ace.) mitlg&t. — Per-
fagSB flumdn (ace) transnilbaDt. — Magniim 6piis est. — FlumSn
pisclbus &bund&t (66, 1., a). — Tempus hdmin^s mut&t. — Tem-
p6r& mutantur.— Frigils aestatfi (93, II., R.) mifigabitur —
Copisd Belgariim fluinin& transn&bant. — Servus dnus (ace)
magnum port&t. — Cses&r npmin& non conscribfit. — Onus mag-
niim est. — M6dlcin& vulniis s&nftt. — Carmln& puell&s delectant.
— ^NomXn& hdmlnilm m&tabuntiir. — M&ri& turbid& sunt. — Fla-
mdn magnjim erat torbldiim. — ^Magnft atmt dndr& captiTdriim.
Digitized by
Google
THISD DECLENSION. 48
III. Translate into Latin.
The Germans violate treaties. — The consuls will not enrol
the names. — The slaves were carrying great burdens. — ^The
messenger was-swinmiing-across the river. — The boy swims-
across the river. — Great burdens are carried. — The burden will
be carried by the slave. — The rivers abound in fish (66, 11., ay —
The wounds are healed. — The burdens are great. — The lieu-
tenant will not violate the treaty. — ^The names are enrolled by
the consuls (93, II.). — The treaty is violated. — The treaty is
violated by Cssar. — The treaty will be violated, and the spoil
will be given to the allies (dat.). — The consul enrols the names
of the deserters. — The names of the deserters will be enrolled.
The wounds of the prisoners wiH be healed.
Digitized by.
yHoQRle
5 11.
ADJECTIVES OF THE SECOND CLASS.
LESSON XVL
Adjectives. — Second Cktsss — Two Endings.
(104.) Adjbotiybb of the Second Class have is ia
the nom. sing, for masc. and fern, endings, and e for
the neuter. They are dechned throughout like the
third declen»on of nouns ; a. ^., br^yls, short.
(105.) PAHADIGM.
8INOI7I.AB.
VUJMJLL. ll
Mmc.
Fein.
Neat
Mmc
Fem.
Neat U
N.V.
brfvis.
br6v-I«.
br6v-6.
br6v-€«.
brev-€«.
brtr-li. 1
G.
bi«v-ii.
br6v-Ig.
brtv-lB.
brfiv-ium.
brSv-IQm.
br6v-iiim.
D.
brfiv-I.
brCv-L
br«v-L
br^ylbOfl.
brer-Tbuf.
brSv-IbiSM.
Ago.
hrtv-em.
brftv-Sm.
brtv-6.
br6v^.
br6y-€a.
brey4S.
Abl.
br«v-I.
bi€v-I.
brtv-L
bi«v-IbQ8.
brev-Ibtta.
bi«v-!bQ8.
i2ef». 1. Twelve a4jectiyes* of diu daas take Cr for the ending of
tihenom.sing.maac.infltemdof Is; e.^., &c6r,£crXs, acrS; cSlS-
bSr, Celebris, celdbrS.
Rem. 2. The abL has I instead of f in jfivSnts, a youth; SBdlllf ,
4BdUe, The gen. pL has ttm instead of Ytlm in cSUr, fw^
(106.) EXERCISE.
L Vocabulary.
Uncertain, inoertOs, 8, tlm.
Utefyl utXKs, &
/ran, ferrttm, L
Cfold, tauiim, L
Severe, heavy, fpd.yU, 6.
L^e, vm, m (£).
Brave, fortits, 8.
PatietUly, p&tientdr (adv.)*
Wolf, Ifipils, i (m.).
liifce, simXUs, 6.
^ cAt^, princeps, (prindTp) is (c, SU^
IV.).
!,«.
/Viewer, ptt6r, (patr) Is.
JVoMe, nSbtlXs, 6.
.<i0, ^ v)hole, 5
^Twee^, dnlcls, 6.
To demand, posc6r6.
Soldier, miles, (miBt) is (m.).
Study, zeal, studium, L
Kt9MZ> bSnigniis, a, mn.
Dog, ctols, (cftn) is (c.^ 25, IV.).
To endure, tdlfirftrfi.
Hottage, obsSs, (6b8Td)is (c, 35, IV.).
' AcSr, »harp.
AlScfir, cheerfuL
Gainpester, of the plain.
OSysUr, famous.
C«l6r, sttnft.
fiqaestSr, equestrian.
Pimster, marshy.
Pedester, pedestrian.
SSlubSr, salubrious,
Sylvester, woody.
Terrestfir, terresiriaL
VmoSr, swift.
Digitized
by Google
ADJECTIYESy BBOONB CLASS. 45
P&t«r filid Mnigniis est.
C&ids liip5 ^[n^ffis est.
U. Examples.
(a) The father is kind to kU
son.
(h) The dog is like (to) the
wolf*
(c) Rule of Syntax. — ^The dative case is used with dl adjec-
tives that are foDowed b$r the words to or for in Eng^
fish: hence with adjectives expressing (a) adcantage or
disadvantage^ {b) likeness or itnltkeness*
[Adjectives of liieneu or unRkeness alio take tlie gen.]
"tn. Translate into English.
Mifit^ omnes p^ricill&m tlment. — Imp^rfttdr fortis miKtfis
omnes convdc&t. — Vitft brftvls est. — Vitft est brdvis 6t incertft. —
Vindm est dnkS. — PrincYpes fortes oppld& omni& mtlniebant. —
Cses&r obsadSs noblles posclt — Tempus br^vd est. — ^Non omnes
mifites sunt fortes. — Ferrum utile est. — ^Aurdm et ferrum sunt
atl£& hdmMbus (106, II., c). — Maes vulntis gr&vd p&tienter
t5Igr&t.— Consiil fortls pdriciilft ndn timeblt.— Ferrftm tLtm
hdn^tnibus (106, II., c) est.— MiBt«s fortes vufaiirlL griivi& pft-
tienter t5ler&bunt.— StiicUtkm est puens (106, II., c) Utile.—
Imper&tdr mifitibiis (106, II., c) benigntis er&t.— C&ifls liipO
dmiHs est.
IV. Translate into Latin.
Tlie noble queen comes to the city. — ^The brave Heutenant en-
dures patiently (his) severe wound. — ^AH the sokfiers hasten to
the camp. — The brave chiefs will fortify many towns. — The
fioble hostages conae to Cesar (63, I., ^^). — The time is un-
certain. — Soldiers are not always useful. — Towns are useful
for men (106, II., e). — ^Nobl^ ambassadors are sent — ^Many
hostages are demanded by the consuls (93, 11.). — ^AU the
soldiers will be called together. — Not all chiefs are noble. —
"Wine is sweet and iron is useful. — The dangers are not fear-
ed by the brave soldiers (93, II.). — The brave tieutenant
praises the noUe diief— Dogs are like wolves (106, II.)* —
The study of letters (litterftriim) is useful for aU (106, II.) —
The soldiers are kind to the prisoners (106, II.). — Gold is heavy.
--Iron is not like gold (106, II.).
Bven ia theie, tb» endiiig U is lometimes loond in qooi. Bin#i mmso. ;
e. g., tumuUut equestrii, Liv., xxix., 35.
Digitized by CiOOglC
§ 12.
ADJECTIVES OF THE THIRD CLASS.
LESSON XVIL
Adjectives. — Third Class. — One Ending.
(107.) Adjectives of the Third Class have but one
ending in the nominative for all three genders ; e. g-.,
felix (m., f., n.), happy; audax (m., f., n.), bold:
pauper (m., f., n.), poor.
(108.) PAEADiGM. — FillXj happy.
f-
BTKOVULJL.
TLV%AJs, ll
HaM.
Fein.
NeuU
H.K.
Fein.
Neot.
N.y.
feUx.
felix.
fl&llx.
feliC-€fl.
fellc-efl.
fellc-ifi.
G.
felic-la.
felic-lB.
feUc-Is.
felic-Ium.
felic-ittm.
felic-iOm.
D.
fellc-i.
felic-I.
£eUc-I.
felic-Xbiifl.
felic-lbiia.
feHc-Ibtifl.
Ace
fellc-dm.
felic-em.
felix.
felloes.
feliC-€8.
feHc-!a.
AbL
fellc-L
feKc-i.
felic-i.
felic-IbOs.
felic-ibtis.
felic-Ibus.
[Rem. 1. The abLhas S instead of! {a) in panpSr, poor; s^nex, dd
(gen.8en!s); princeps^e^i^; com-p on, possessed of, and moBt end-
ing in 6s; e. g^., hospfis, guest; pjabfis, grown up, &c. Also in
the oomponnds of corptls, coldr, and pSs.
(b) Participles in ns have, as participles, S, bat as adjectives i; e, g.,
florentS r6»i, the rose blooming; florenti rds&, in a blooming
rose,
(c) Adjectives used as noons take 6;'0. g., sJlLpIens, a noise man,
abL sftpientS.
Rem. 2. The gen. pi. takes ilm instead of itim in y 6 ta s, old (vgtSrQm) ;
consors, partaking of; degSnSr, degenerate; dlvSs, rich;
Inoipn, helpless ; ta^taiiT, mindful ; immSmSr, t^nmtn^/ttZ; i>J|p*
pi ex, suppliant; dbSr, rich; vigil, watching. Also in all which
take 9 in tiie abL ; e. g^ prinoeps, piindEpS^ princXpiim.]
Digitized by
Google
ADJECTIVES. THIRD CmM. * 47
(109.) EXEECI8E.
I. Vocabulary.
Fierce, itrox, (Itx6c) ta (107).
To wage, carry on, gSrSrS.
Honesaidder, Sqafis, (Sqnit) Is (m.).
Tenacunu, tSnax, (tSnac) Is (107).
Wise, sipiens, (sSpient) is (107).
Dealh, man, (mort) Ys (£).
T49 f«n«to, redintdgr&rS.
JZ^d Jygs, (divit) rs (107).
^^■^y, t^rrerd.
II. Exampk.
The whahitaTUs carry on a
fierce war.
TT^
Sttzg, cervfis,L
Powerful, pStens, (pSteot) Hi (107).
iSTcou/, expldritSr, Hi (m.).
7V> ibZ^ oocIdSre.
BatUe, yrmWSm, L
^lui, St (001^).
Swift, v&ox, (v«l6c) I^
Horse, dqmu, L
Citizen, civis, (<5v) iii (c, 85, IV.).
Incdlas belliim &trox gftront.
[Refer to 78, II., a.]
III. Tron^&te into English,
Incdlae beM magn^ 6t &tT6ci& gdmnt. — Nuntiiis vdlox &d castrft
v^idt. — Eqmtgs v6l6c6s &d syhrftm festinant. — Vlr s&piens mor-
tem non timi^t. — ^Discipdlus m^mdriftm tenftcdm h&bftt. — M6-
m5ri& in pilaris est t^Dax. — Imp^r&tdr nuntiuin yfilocdm mittgt.
— ^Principes fortds praeMm &trox redintegr&biiiit. — Cerviis v6-
tox est. — ^Equds velox currit. — C&nSs sunt ydloc^. — S&piens
(82, 1., R.) non semper divds est. — DiTltSs non sempdr befttl
sunt.' — Princeps pdtens leg&tds mittit. — PrincipSs pdtentSs
captiTds occidunt. — Imp^rfttdr prindpds omnCs conydc&t.
IV. Translate into Latin.
The thick woods terrify the swift messenger. — The fierce
battle terrifies all the inhabitants. — The noble general was prais-
ing the swift messenger. — The illustrious consul sends ambas-
sadors to (63, I., ^^) the powerful chief. — The powerful
chief will kill all the prisoners. — Rich (men) are not always
wise. — The wise (man) does not fear the fierce battle. — The
soldiers praise the rich citizen. — The memory in boys is al-
ways tenacious. — Dogs and horses are swift. — The consul
will not renew the fierce battle. — The illustrious general wiD
recall the swift horse-soldiers. — Rich citizens fear fierce wars.
—The fierce battles were terrifying all the hostages.^ — The
wise genera! calls-together all the ambassadors. — The fierce
battle will be renewed- — All the prisoners wiH be killed by the
powerful chiefii (93, II.).— The swift messengers are frighten-
ed. — Ghreat wars are carried on. — ^Rich citizens are killed.
Digitized by
Google
§ 13.
FOURTH DECLENSION OP NOUNS.
LESSON xvm.
Nouns. — Fourth Declension.
(110.) The Fourth Decknsion comprises all ooims
whose gen. sing, ends in us {long). The nom. ending
for masculines id li s, and for neuters u ; e. ^.9 f r ti c t-
u s, fruity masc. ; c o r n - u, Aom, neut
(111.) The case-endings are as follows:
— UST-
kMC
Neat.
^hir. 1
1 it^ ■ 1
1 lietrt. 1
N.andV.
fit.
O.
IC. ma V.
Of.
M,
Gen.
US.
lu or 11.
Gen.
iliim.
aSaD.
Dat
fiL
u.
Dat
rbuB.
!bOs.
Aoo.
tBL
u.
Ace
Uf.
fJA.
AbL
u.
u.
AbL
IbQi.
...^^
(112.) By adding these hidings to the stems frud'
and com* J we get the
PARADIGM.*
SiiiR..fniit(in.).
hnr., flniit
Sine., born (n.).
Plar.,honM.
N.«ndV.
ftact-iii.
fract-u8.
Gen.
froct-us.
fract-utim.
N., A., V.
com-iML
Dat
fract-iiL
fract-iba«.
Gen.
corn-US, or u.
oom-attan.
Aco.
froct-nm.
fract-ufl.
Dat, AbL
oom-u.
coni-KbOs.
AbL
fract-u.
fract-ibtifl.
[Mem, 1. The Mowing take 0biit in dat and abL plur. instead of
Ibus, viz., Sciis (£), needle; arcus (m.), bow; artQs (m.), joint;
ficils (i),Jig4ree; IScils (m.), lake; partiis (ul), birth; portQs
(m.), harbor ; qnercus (£), oak; spSctts (jxl), den; tribiis Cf.),
tribe; p«cii (n.), cattle; Yfirtl (n.), a epit.f]
2. The femipiine novms of tlds declension are, icils, needle; aniia^
* The ibartli declension is only a contracted fiirm of the third: thus.
N. frnct-us.
G. froct-uls, contr. froctus.
D. fract-i&
Aoo. froct-ufioa, oontr. iructdin» &o.
t The IbDoWing yenies embrace these :
AroQs, ScQs, portfis, Tdru,
FIolls, 12c(is, artfis,
SpSoOs, qneicfis ; €U$o, pScu,
Trfbtis too, and partus.
Digitized by
Google
irOUNS. FOUETH DECLElTBIOlf;
40
cld wmum; d5mtis, hatue; ftcili,^; mlBfii, hand! nUrfiM,
daughter-4n-law ; ^ or t^ad^ gaUery ; tribtii, tribe; qaerotli^
oak. AIbo, IdHSj -uiim ^oMl osAy in plural), tke Idei.'*
3. Ddmiis (£), house, is thus TOclined :
N^V.
a
D.
Ace.
AbL
Sing.
dom-ils.
T\
-m.
•Qm.
-6.
1 Plor.
d5m-ii8.
-num. }
-drum. >
•Ibiia.
-us (rarely). J
•Ibfifl.
4. The gen. domi is used only in the sense of at home; e. g.,
mSoe, <tt my home, at my house.
Ali3.) ,* EXERCISE.
T. yocahilary.
ddml
To lead aver, or across, transducers.
Approach, adventus, iis (m.).
To await, expect&rS.
Singing, cantus, us (m.).
Prait, fructOs, us (m.).
To adorn, omarC.
Four, qn§ttu6r (indeclin.).
To build, aedXficare.
Horn, comii, us (n.).
Army, exercTtOs, us (m.).
Harbour, port&s, iis (m.).
Enemy, hostis, (host) is (c, 25, IV.).
Bird, ivis, (&v) is (f.).
II. Examples.
{a) The Helvetians lead
part of their forces across
the Rhine,
(b) Casar leads a great ar-
^y of Germans across the
Rhine.
Grief, luctQs, ust (m.).
To lay aside, depdnSrS.
Sadness, nuBrSr, drist (m.).
Tempest, prdoella, m.
To raise, tdl^rfi.
Wave, fluctCLs, us (m.).
Star, sldiis, (aider) Is (n.) (102).
Shore, litttts, (littSr) is (n.) (102).
Wind, yentOs, I (m.).
Roll, v(^«r6.
Boundary, {wS§, (fin) lis (m.).
The Rhine, Khtaiis. L
Ship, navis, (n&v) Is (f.).
Helv^tii partem cdpiftri&m
RhSntkm transdQcant.
CsBS&r magniim Germ&nO-
rum exercitum trans
Kh^num transducit.
Rule of Syntax. — (a) Verbs compounded with the prepo-
sition trans are generally followed by tiuo accusatives ; e»
g., partem and Rhenum in (a).
{h) But sometimes the preposition is repeated ; e. g., trans
in (6).
m. Translate into English.
Helv6t» Ckesd'Hs (38, h) adventiim expe ctftbant.—- Adventfl
The rest are fern, by
* Iciis, mSniis, ti^iiis, domtis, porficus, and IdOs.
tiie general rale (25, II.).
t Moardr = silent grief; lucttts = mowmvng.
E
Digitized by
Google
y
so Nou]rt.*-^FOumTB DBCLSNaioir*
(•bL, 65, «) Caetiils hottfit terrentilr.— Avis pu^l&m cantQ (55,
A) detoot&t. — Fmetfid arbdi^s (aec,pl.) ornant. — Fract&s terns
&giicdl&m delectant. — P&t^r d6mQ8 (ace. pL) quftttfldr aedlHcft-
blt. — N&T68 in portu funt. — Regin& lucttim dSpdnlt. — S&pientd«
hicttttn dt moBrdrtm dSpoDunt. — PrdceDft magnOs flnctfis {ace,
pi.) tollebftt.— Pr6ceM fluctds (ace. pL) ftd 8id6rft toffit>- Pufir
tanrttm corafi (abL, 55, a) ti^nftt. — Coniii& cervi magii& sunt^-^
Fhicttls magid yenlis (55, a) rolmntdr. — Le^tilt exerdtdm dH"
clt. — Leg&tils &b £di]l8 (from the ^duans ; t. e., then: country)
exercittim dtldt. — ^Agiicdlft tauri^m comibds (55^ a) tJ^Ddk||^ —
Adventiis patris puell&m delect&bit. — Caes&r exerdtiiia fifS^n
transddcit (113, II., a). — ^L^gfttiia p^r fines Helvdtioram exer-
clttim dilcdt.— Aridviatils Germftnos trans Khdniim transdddt
(113, II., h).
Rem, Hom$ iM trtailaled hy ddmttm, the mo. of douai ; tlMS» T%»
sailor lead* the boy hame-^^tMA pnfinim domtm dudt.
IV. Translate into Latin.
My father wiU build four bouses. — The tempest is roDiiig
great waves to the shores (63, 1., ^^. — Vast waves are raised
to the stars 1^ tempests^— The turbid sea is rolling vast waves
to the shores.— The ftrmer leads the ^ris home from (ah) liie
city. — CsBsai* wiU lead the army over the turbid river.— Cassius
leads the army through the boundaries of tho^i^Sduans and
Helvetians. — ^The Helvetians await the coming of Caesar. —
The boy will hold the bull by the horns (55, a). — The farmer
is delighted by the fruits (55, a) of the earth. — The king lays
aside his griefs and sadness. — ^The singing of the birds (Hviiim)
will delight the soldiers. — The trees are adorned by many fruits.
— There are many large ships in the harbour. — The winds raise
the great waves to the stars. — The lieutenant was leading the
army of the JEduans across the Khine. (Repeat trans (113,
tl., h) ). — The borns of bulls are large. — ^The queen will lay
aside her grief and sadness. — ^The master sends his slaves home
Digitized by
Google
U4.
FIFTH DECLENSION OF NOUNS.
LESSON XIX.
Nouns. — Fifth Declension.
(114.) The Fifth Declension compriset all nouns
whose gen. ending is li. The nom. ending is es.
(115.) There are but few nouns of this declension,
and they are sM feminine except dies, day^ and me-
ridies, mid-day; and even dies is fern, in the sing,
when* it means ^ fixed day.
(116.) The case-endings are as follows:
C
Bingv
Plor.
N.V.
€8.
6s.
D.
Sbtti.
Aco.
Sm.
6.
ebtii.
Mtm. In tbe gen. and dat the e in ei i« long when avowel stands be-
fiire it ; eg., di-SI: thort when a consonant stands beibre it; «. g^
fld-6I.
(117.) By adding the endings to the stems r- and
di-, we get the
PARADIGMS.
TW(£).
Bingolar.
PkraL
BingnJar.
PhffaL
N.V.
r-68.
i>es.
dl-6s.
dl-€s.
G.
r-S.
r-drflm*
di-firiun.
D.
r-€L
dr-€I.
di-ebtts.
Aoc.
r-fon.
r-ds.
dt-Sm.
dl-te.
AbL
r-6b«ia.
dT-«.
dl-ibflii.
JZ^. Only res, diSs, spScxis, hare the pfaff.oompleto; tiie gea,
dat.,Mi(i aU. i»lnr. are wanting in all otliers.
BXEECISB.
(118.)
I. Vocabulary*
To appointf constStQ^^
To lead out, 6duc&^
To lead bach, rgdacSre.
Lineofbaiae,\kA^SL
To draw lej^/instr&erS.
About, circitSr {prep, with ace.).
About mid-day, cirdU^ meri£dm<
Victory, victArii, m.
mdrday, mftidH^ «I (m.).
Sixth, sextos, S, Qm.
Renard, pramiOm, L
Sun, 861, (b6I) Xb (m.).
Sating, ocoftsus, us.
Seventh, septitanis, 8, tm.
Out of, 6 or ex {prep, with ablatire).
FaUh, promise, ftdfis, 6L
T^ nea:^, postdrOs, 8, Haa
Tojight, pagnir«.
Digitized by
Google
52 NOUNS. FIFTH DECLENSION.
Caes&r ftci^m instrfilt.
Postdr5 did castril m5vent.
II. Examples.
(a) Casar draws up the line
ofbatUe.
(b) The next day they move
the camp.
(c) Ride of Syntax. — ^The point of time at which any thing
occniB 18 expressed by the ablatiye ; e. g.<, in (h)po$tero
die. — At sun-set = sSlis occ&sil.
III. Translate into English.
Spes victoriaB mifitds delect&t.— MUttes spd (93, II., R.) yic-
toriae delectantiir. — Diss vfinit. — Cses&rdidm constltiiit. — Caes&r
didm cum ISg&tls constltuit. — ImpSr&tdr fortis exercitum educit,
6t &ci6m instruit.— Circitfir mSrididm pugnant. — Caes&r, circitdr
mdrldiSm, exercitiimin castr& rSducit.— Sexto die (116, II., c)
Caes&r exercitum ex castris edticit. — SpSs prsemiorum pti^ros
delect&t. — Pii^ri spS praemiorum dslectantm*. — Solis occftsQ
Helv&tii castr& mdvebant.— Septlmo die Belgie t^pi&s onmes
ex castris educSbant. — Sofis occasti Ariovistiis &cidm instruit.
— Circitdr mdridi&m proelium rddintfigrabunt. — Consul clariis
di^m cum Idg&tls constituit. — Princip@s nobilSs fid^mvidlant.
IV. Translate into Latin.*
The hope of victory delights the noble chiefs. — The consul
about mid-day leads out the army and renews the fierce battle.
— The powerful chiefs, at the-setting of-the-sun (118, IL, c),
kin all the prisoners. — The day will come. — The consul, at the
setting of the sun, will renew the great battle. — ^At the setting
.of the Sim the great battle will be renewed. — On the sixth day
all the forces will be led back to the camp. — The Germans ap-
point a day with Caesar. — The next day the Germans move
(their) camp. — ^Ariovistus, on the next day, draws out the line
of battle. — Caesar appoints the mid-day with the ambassadors.-—
About mid-day the messengers come. — ^About mid-day the ooii«
sul will come. — Caesar will not violate (his) promise.
Digitized
by Google
5 15.
PRONOUNS. (XX.— XXXI.)
LESSON XX.
Pronouns. — Substantive-Personal and Adjective*
Personal — Verbs^ First Person.
(119.) Thb three pronouns ego,/; iu^thou; sul^of
jLimselff hers^y itself^ are called Substantive^ because
they are used as substantives, not as adjectives ; and
Personal, because they express the person speaking,
the person spoken to, and the person spoken of.
(120.) The Substantive-Personal Pronoun* of the
first person is thus declined :
Norn.
Gen.
Dat
Ace
— ^' —
Sing.
Plur.
11
eg6, /.
ji6a,tDe.
m6i, of me.
nostrum, J -^
mlht tome.
nobis, to us.
mS, me.
m6,bymefkc. 11
n6hlM,byus,&c.
(121.) Derived from the Substantive-Personal Pro-
nouns are the Adjective-Personal or Possessive Pro-
nouns ; called Adjective, because they agree with
nouns ; and Possessive, because they express possession
{my, thy, his, &c.).
(122.) The Adjective-Personal Pronouns of the^r«<
person are declined, in both sing, and plur., like adjec-
tives of the First Class (76, 77, a). They are,
(a) Deriyed frommSt, N. mSfis, mSS, mStfm, my » mine.
G. mS]^ mSffi, m£!, of my (vocmasc. mi).
&C. &c. (like b dnii 8, 76.)
(i) " from nostri, N. nostSr, nostrS, nostrom, ottr, ourv.
G. nostiT, DOstrsB, nostil, of our.
&c. &c. (like p ul cb 6 r, 77, a).
(123.) The following forms of Verbs in the first per
son must now be learned :
E2
Digitized by
Google
M
PEIUSONAL PmONOUNB.
FIRST CONJUGATION ! FIRST PERSON ENDINGS.
iNFiN. ACT., art.
INFIN. PASS, art. ||
Indk. preaent
j Imperfect |
Futare. ||
1st Sing.
l8t Plur.
Act.
§mils.
Pass.
or.
amOr.
1 Act
SbSm.
1 abamiu.
Pass.
abSr.
§b§mtir.
Act.
§bd.
ftbimiis.
Pass.
abdr.
§blmiir.
(124.) Thus, from the stem am, of am- a re, to love^
we have :
INFIN. ACT., Omari, to love.
INFIN. PASS., dmOri, to be loved.
Inapgrfcct.
Fotara.
Act.
Ilove.
Am-ftmtis,
Pass.
ftm-dr,
lam loved.
fim-ftmfir,
we are lowed.
Act.
im-&bim«
Twos loving.
ve were loving.
Pass.
im-ibir,
Iwas loved.
Sm-&bftm&r,
we were Ufved,
AcL
IshaUlove.
wethaUlove.
Pass,
&ai-&b5r,
TshaU be loved.
im-ib&nftr,
we shall beloved.
[Rem. The stadent will learn the passive ending^s readily by observing
that r is t^e passive charajeteristic, which is added to tBe active j the con-
sonant ending of the active^ where it has one, being^dropped.]
(125.) EXERCISE.
I. Vocdbulary.
Book, Hbgr, bri (m.), (64).
Friend^ Smicils, i (m.).
Brother, frttSr, (fratr) Is (m.y.
Cicero, C!c6r6, (Cic6r6n) is (m.).
Sister, sdrdr, (sdrdr) is (f.).
WUh (i. e., ai one's house), ftpttd
(prep. ace.).
Fault, cnlpS, m.
Ynterdttjf, fa&i (adrO.
II. Examples.
(a) Ihavt a hook. 1 £8t mih! Ubdr (i. c, (kere i$
I a book to me).
Ride of Syntax. — The dalive case is used with est or sunt,
to denote the person who h<is or possesses something.*
The tlung possessed is nom. to est or sunt.
AH my (possessions), oauAa mei
(neat. pL).
Five, qninqvS.
Sharply, icntSr.
To-morrow, eras (adr.).
Very much, greatly, valdS (ady.).
To blame, vitup&Srg,
To sing, cant&i^.
Three, tr«s» trift (scU. of Clan IL).
Pu6r mecum in horto hdii
am^^b&t.
(6) The boy was walking
wUh me in the garden yes-
terday.
Ride (^Position. — ^The prepontion cOm is si^ed, to die
personal pronouns; e.g., mecum, t£^m«;^6bi8cuni«
with US} instead of ciim m6, cum ndtus.
IBecoQect that Ae personal and possessive proobons are not e:qiire88ed
in Latin, unless emphasis or perspicoity demands Jt]
* This is called Ae Dative ofPo$se$siom,uidtiMaM ahrijs 1
to as Koah. kv the pnpiL
Digitized
by Google
PERSONAL nOVOWB. FUST PERSON. U
III. Translate into English.
£gd caiit6, dnOcHs audit — ^£g6 dt frfttSr ambillftintis.* — ^figd
<t f ilitks meiis festin&mtis. — Sunt mlhl trSf fibri (125, II„ a).-^
SoBt iniM quattudr dqui dt qninqtl* dines. — Id hort6 ambiU&-
bftm.— A Wnis (82, I., R.) ftrnftbdr.— Clc6r5 «.md laudator
Hostes nobiscjim (125, II., 6) ftciitdr pugnant. — ^Hdri In ftgris
ambulab&muf.^ — ^P&tdr ftd nds nuntium mittdt* — Culpft noatrH est.
— Crfts In horto caBn&Mmiis. — Dftlect&bamtlr. — Pudii In hortd
nobisciim ambiil&bunt. — ^Littdr&riim studiiimf (38, b) wSht (106,
II.) Qtlld 6rlt. — ^A m&gistr6 laud&b&r. — OmnUi me& mCcAm
port5. — ^£g5 & fr&trd Takld &m5r. — ^NOs laudftmftr, puettas vitA-
pdrantur. — ^Nos a m&gistro yerb^r&blmtbr.
IV. Translate into Latin.
We praise the beautiful gir]. — ^We have (125, II., a) four large
cups. — I have (31$ there are to me) four sons and three daughters
(125, II., a). — ^We shall praise Caesar's brave soldiers. — I walk,
ny friend rides.— I and ray sister wil ride.*—- 1 and my brother
win walk* in the king's garden4*^I and my father wiQ sup* in
the garden to-morrow. — ^We shall always praise the wise and
food^-^The works of Cicero will be praised by m$ (93, XL, &),
die'works of Caesar by the soldiers. — ^The fault is miBe.-<*'We
have many large cups (125, II., a).**I have three beautiful sisters.
-^I have fi>ur brothers.-^My father will walk with me in Cau-
ser's garden {CasdrU In hortO),t — ^The study of literature is
vseful to us (106, II.) — To-day we shall si^ with (apod)
Ciassus. *
LESSON XXI.
PronounSt Personal and Possessive^ continuedk — Verhs^
First Person^ continued.
(126.) Thb following are some of thd endings for
the first person in verbs of the
* If a predicate have two or more nominatiyes, connected by a ooi^onc-
tkm, it takes generally the plural number ; and if the aominatiTes be of
different penK>iM, the verb takes ths first penon rather Aan the lecoiid,
£e ■econd rather than the third. _^ _
t Littdrftrfim itftditim«tt«|n<r««t< (or ■tady)o/W«rfl^ (letters).
i In all snch cases, put the prep, between the genitiye ana the noon
forezBed by the prep.
Digitized by
Google
M
V£KBS. ^FIRST PBRSON*
SECOND CONJUGATION.
STSM.
SIXOULAB XNDINOS.
PLUaAZ. ENDINOS. ||
Present
Imperfect
Future.
m5a-
mdn-
Sbtan.
PsMive.
e6r.
ebSr.
Sbor.
▲ctivft.
SmOi.
ebftmOfl.
ebimtis.
pHMtre. b
emOr. [
ebfimtir.
eblmur. fl
[JZem. The student will learn these fonns readily by observing^ that
they differ chiefly ftom those of the first conjugation in having e be-
fore the last syllable instead of a. By adding the ending, as above
given, to the stem mon-,. which stands i ' ' " '
the
I at the left hand, he will fonn
he paradigm of monerS, to advi8e.\
(127.) The following are some of the endings for
the Jirst person in the third and fourth conjugations.
THIRD CONJUGATION.
Present
Imperfect
Future.
rtg-
r6g-
8INOni.AB SNDHVOS.
6.
ibSm.
Sm.
PaoatT*.
6r.
gbSr.
ar.
PLUKAI. KNDINOS.
Active.
bnus.
ebftmOs.
Snnis.
Imtir.
ebftmiir.
€mur.
[Rem. Compare these with the endings of the 2d oo^j., and obserre
that
1. In ^epres. e is dropped in the sing., and » assumed in the plur.
2. The imperfect is precisebr the same.
3. But iihe future is a new K>rm.
4. By adding the endings to the stem placed at tiie left, yos fom die
paradigm of rggSrS, to rule,]
(128.)
FOURTH CONJUGATION.
8TKW.
SINOni.AB ENDINOS.
PLURAI. SNJDINOS. |
Present
Imperfect.
Future.
aud-
aud-
aud-^
Actire.
i«.
iebSm.
Pawivft.
ior.
i6b5r.
iftr.
Actire.
imQs.
iebimfis.
i^mOs.
Pa»iTe;
unOr.
>eb&m«lr.
iemur.
[Rem. Observe that the endings of the 4th com. differ from those of
> tiie 3d simply by prefixing the letter f . In the Ist phxr. the i pre-
' fixed combmes with that of the ending? Imils, Imtir, and fonns imfi%
imiir.]
(129.)
_j!e---i:* Vocabulary.
EXEEGISE.
Fierce, f^rox, (ferSc) Is (107).
Nothing, nXbn (neut indecL).
To be well, vfilerS.
To arrange, disp6n£r6.
II. Example.
I have nothing to do toith
Antony (125, II., a).
Wicked, imprSbiis, S, tim.
Garrison, pnesldifim, I.
Latin, Lfttmiis, ft, tim.
Antony, Ant&iids, L
Nihil est mlh! ctim Ant5iii5
(t. e., there is nothing to me
with Antony).
Digitized by
Google
VSBB8. BECOND PKR80N. 5T
III. Translate into English.
2d Conjugation.— ig6 6t frftt^r T&lemiis (125, III.*).— A
m&gistro ddcdbimur. — LingaUm L&tin&m d6ced. — ^A. p&trd m6-
nedr. — ^A m&gistrd bdno ddcemtir. — ^Ab hostd tim6b&r. — ^Hos-
tium adventiim nOn timdbft. 3d Conjugation. — Rdg^bftmar. —
Pr8B«kfi& dispdnSbftmiis. — ^A Ded rd^imiir. — £gd exerdtiiiD
duc&m. — ^A filid meo rdlinqu&r. — Liipds f^rdcds occidlmtU.
4tth Conjugation. — Ca8te1]& muniemtUi. — ^Ayiikm cantdm audi-
miisw — Cr&s &d urbdm v^ni&m. — Nihil est mihl cttm impfdbis.
— ^Nihil est Dobis cum host^tis.
rV. Translate into Latin.
2d Conjugation, — I and my son are well (126, III.*).—
We shall see the brave soldiers. — I am taught by good masters.
— ^We were fearing the approach of the enemy. — 1 was teach-
ing the Latin language. — ^We shaU-b^ feared by the enemy. —
We shall be advised by our father. 3d Conjugation. — We
were led by a brave general. — I was killing three wolves. — ^We
are ruled by a good king. — ^We shall arrange the garrisons. —
I shall bring (ducere) my daughter from (ab) the eily. — We
shall lead the forces of the Germans. 4th Conjugation.—^We
were heard by the master. — ^We shall sleep in the little town
(89, II.).— We shall come to the town to-morrow.— I shall be
heard by the giris. — ^We were fortifying the towns. — ^We have
nothing to do with the foolish (129, II.). — ^I have nothing to do
with Caesar.
LESSON XXIL
Pronouns. — Substantive-Personal and Adjective^Per*
sonal. — Verhs^ Second Person.
(130.) The Substantive-Personal Pronoun of the
second person is thus declined :
Mhy\
Sing.
Phir.
tu, thou,
vdB, you.
tn^ of thee.
vestrL J of
vestaram, > you.
tib%tothee.
vdbls, to you.
te^thee.
yoB,you.
tu, Hum. \t&,
r6B,you.\
(131.) The following are some of the endings pf the
second person of verbs of the
Digitized by
Google
PERSONAL PEOVOUV* — BBCOND PERSON.
riRST
CONJUCIATIOK.
STKir.
satajjhAM, mKDOiQB. \
riAJMAL SMBXNOS. ||
I Prei.
U frap-
II Fat
am.
am-
AcU
abat.
abii.
P.«.
aiii.
ib&ilf.
&beri8.
Act
atls.
&ba^.
Pass. 11
ftmlm. 1
&b&iiiInL U
fiblmM. ]
(132.) EXERCISE.
L Vocabularjf*
Yttterday, b&x (adr.). I To wuM, valnerirt.
3\>.iZ<^, HodiS (adr.). I ToJSght, pa«Bfir6.
II. Translate into English.
Cr&8 meciim coen&bls. — Tu md ftmAs, dgd td &m6. — ^VOs
TdblBciim pugDfttis. — Tu cant&s, nos audimus. — In horto ambii-
l&batas. — Tu ft p&trd vald3 ftmftiis. — ^V da vitapdramini, nos lau-
dftmur. — Nihil est tibi cum Ces&rd. — Crfts vobisciim coenftbd.
—Nos laudftbimur, vos vltup^rftbimioi. — ^NiMl vobis est cum bd-
nis. — Hdri ambulftbatis.— ^H5die pugnftbitas. — Laudftb&mim. —
Vuln^rftbimini. — ^Vficfttafl. — ^Vdcftmini. — Xmatto. — Amftminl.
*— Cantftbfttis. — Vdcftbftmini.
III. Translate into Latin.
To-day ye were supping with us (125, II., b). — ^Ye lore U8»
we love you. — ^Ye were singing, we were hearing. — ^Yo have
nothing to do widi the king (129, II.). — ^Thou wast greaitly
loved by Caesar. — ^Ye shall be praised by our nnster. — ^Ye shaU
tM blamed by tJie good (62, 1., R.). — Ye are caBed by the mes-
senger.— Thou fightest with thyself* (125, II., 6)— Ye shaU
sup with us to-morrow. — Thou wilt fi^t to-morrow. — ^Thou
wast loving. — Thou wast loved. — Thou wilt blame. — ^Thou
wilt \>e blamed. — ^Ye are praising. — ^Ye are praised. — Thou
woiuidest« — Thou art wounded. ;
/■
LESSON iXIIL
Pronouns^ Personal and PossessiveyContinued, — Verbs^
Second Person^ Second ConjugtUion,
(133.) The followiBg are some of the endings for
the second person, in verbs of t he
* TScfim. ■
Digitized by
Google
I
TSXB8. — 0SCOND PEBSOIC
SECOND CONJUeATiON.
6t
Pros.
Imp.
Fut.
mon*
mon-
mon-
UNGm^AR SNDOrGt.
Act.
§b&8.
ebi8.
6ri8.
eb€ris.
Act.
Stis.
6bftt!i.
IM. L
[nl. y
imlnll. H
onlnL |[
VMM.
(mini,
dbftmlnll.
SbUnlnL
(134.) The Adjective-Personal (or Possessive) Pro-
nouns of the Second Person are, toas, &, dm, thy;
and vester, vestra,vestrum, t/our,
G. tui, Bi,% of thy^ &c,
N. vestdr, vesM, vestri&in, youTp
G. vestri, vestraB, vestn« o/youTp
(135.) EXBJtCISE.
I. Vocabulary.
(a) Derived from tui,
(h) Derived from v e s t r i,
Tkou art, e« {3d persoB sing. ind.
pres. of esse).
Ye are, estis (2d person pL oi dp.).
/»«, $rtm (Ist impeiC do.).
^««»e, ) causa.
for the take €f, S eatiB& (abL).
2\> &ar», disc6r«.
II. Examples.
\fl) N e is aa interrogative particle used in asliing questioM*
It is annexed to the word to which it especially refers ; e* ^m
Of eoniCimmg, dft (prep. aU.).
To laugh, rtd£nS.
To ftjoke, gavderS*
Safetif, s&lus, (sSlflt) Is (£}.
Leader, guide, dux, (due) Is (m.).
Wiy, car (adr.).
Because, that, qudd (copj.).
(1) Do ^oti teach the boy ?
(2) Do you teack the boy ?
(3) Do you teach the &oy?
T Ci n d pudrtim ddcds ?
DOcesnft pudri&in?
Pu^rumnd ddc^s ?
In (1) t(i has the emphasis; in (2) ddcds; and in (3)
pudrtim.
(^) Ye are wamed,./>r ikt I Vestr» sftlfltls cau0i
9ake of your (own) safety. \ mdnemXnl.
Rule of Position. — C a u s ft, f(yr the sake of (die aU. of
causft, a cause)^ is always placed after the genitive which
depends on it.
(c) I was yow leader. | Dux 6g6 vestftr di:ft,m.
III. Translate into English.
Vidftsn^ servum naefim? (136, IL, 2).— Tu» sftltitSs eansft .
(135, n., h) m6n6ri8. — CQr ridstis 7— Vostra eftlutis caus&
adndmXnl.— Gaude6 qu5d tu 6t pfttftr tuiis viletis (125, HL, ♦).
Digitized by
Googl^
60
VEKBS. SECOND PERSON.
— Vldeb&snd miHtds ? — Dd culpft tuft mOneb&ris.— Car ridebft-
tls. — Hoetiiim adventtlm non tlmdbis. — Tusb s&lutilt causa mdn-
ebdris. — Nos discdmiis, vos ddcebimiol. — Tlmetiand CaBS&rls
adventiim? — ^Esn6 tu be&ttU ? — Calp& toft est (the fault is thine),
^Pudri !d horto vdbisciim ambiil&bant. — ^M&gistdr 6gd vestdr
eram (135, II., c).
IV. Translate into Latin.*
[The emphatic wordg are in italici.]
Did you see your master ? — Do you fear the approach of
CsBsar? — ^Are you happy? — ^You were warned (advised) for
the sake of your own safety. — Are you and your father toell 7
(125, III., ♦). — ^The fault was yours. — ^You shall see the ene-
my, but (s6d) shaD not fear (them). — I am your friend.^—I was
your friend. — You teach, but we learn. — ^You shall teach, but
we shall learn. — ^Why do you not (non) fear the master ? — ^You
were warned of (d e) your fault. — Do you see your slaves ?—
Are yott Caesar ? — Why do you fear the master ? — ^You shall
see great cities and many men. — We shall sup with you to-mor-
row. — You shall be warned, for the sake of your own safety. —
We rejoice that you and your daughter are well (125, III., *).
LESSON XXIV.
Verbs, Second Person, Third and Fourth Conjugations.
(136.) The following are some of the endings of
the second person in verbs of the
THIRD CONJDOATION.
8TXM.
▲OTITB KNOIN08.
PASSXVX XNDXN08. |
SdSiof.
Sd Plur.
SdSinK.
Sd Plur. 1
Pres.
reg-
la.
Itls.
grta?
ImM.
Imper.
reg-
ebfig.
Sbatts.
€hSaU.
ebamlhL
Fut.
reg-
eg.
§tl8.
§ris.
(137.) The following are some of the endings of
the second person in verbs of the
FOURTH CONJUGATION.
STEM.
ACnVB KNDIN08.
PASSIVX SNDXN08. ||
Pres.
Imp.
Put
aud-
aad-
and-
SdSinf.
IS."
ieb&s.
ies.
2d Plor.
itrs.
iebatls.
ictTs.
2d 8iDg.
Ills.
iebari3.
ieiis.
2d Plor.
iebamlhL
i&DXhl.
* 'When you, your, occur, translate them both in siag. and plur., fixr
the sake of practice.
Digitized by
Google
PES80NAL PEONOUN8. 61
(138.) Observe,
(a) That the pre«ent ending! of the 3d and 4th ooqfiigationf are ikBtgfy
alike, the vowel (i) of the fourth being lonr ^).
(b) That the imperfect and future endi^^ of nie fawrik ocK^liigatifln
di£Per from those of the third by prefixing the letter i
EXBBCISE.
(139.) Vocabulary.
Plant, plants, m. Whence^ ondd (t^^*)*
To sow, to plant, sSrSr6. Long, longfi (adv.).
To find, invSnire. BadXy, miOd.
Orator, Orator, (Orfitdr) Is (m.). To punish, ^ubM.
Voice, vox, (v6c) Is (£). 8o, tSm (adv.).
To read, IggSrS. Bird, fivls, (ftv) Is (£)
(140.) Translate into English.
3d Conjugation, — Cur ndn scribls. — ^Arbdrds gt fdaotfta 86r^
l>&ti[8.~Hd^d &d CaBS&rdm imtteils.--Cur t&m mW scriUs ?—
Ad castT^ rdducdmini. — Ldgis-n6 Clc^roDls dpdr& ? — ScriblB-
nd dpistdUUn &d Caes&r6m? 4th Conjugation. — ^Undd vdms?
— Cfir t&m loDge donms ? — M&gistrilin bdniiin invdnids. — ^Audis-
*n6 m&gistri vocdm? — Cor ndn vdnidtis? — ^A. CsBS&rd audMs.
—A m&gistro puniemlni. — Orftt5r6in audietfs. — In hortd dor*
mieb&tls. — Canttim &Tium auditls. ^
(141.) Translate into Latin. [Refer to ISdyll.}
Zd Conjugation. — Are you writing a letter? — ^Thou wast
planting a tree to-day. — Were (yon) reading the works of Cicero ?
—Why do you read so badly ? — ^Are you writing a letter to the
messenger? — ^Thou wilt read Caesar to-day. — Thou art sent
to the camp. — Thou wilt be led by the ambassadors. 4th Con"
jugation. — ^Why do you not come ?-— Ye shall hear the voice of
Caesar. — Thou wilt sleep in the camp.— Ye shall be heard by
the master. — Thou shalt be punished. — ^Ye are heard. — Thou
shalt hear the singing of the birds.
LESSON XXV.
Pronouns. — Substantive-Personal and Adjective-Pei^
sonal, Third Person.
(142.) The Substantive Pronoun of the third per-
son is thus declined :
F
Digitized by
Google
PERSONAL nU>VOI7N.^-TBIl]> PERSON.
Phv.
henelf, it$eif.
ihtm'%M, to tkem^
■e, tkem$dve$.
ice
m6, by ikem-
$cm8,icc.
(143.) The Adjectif>e Pronoun of the third person
is declined like an adjective of the first class : thus,
Derived from 8 ui, 1 N. siius, &, iim, his, hera, its. Us own.
I G. atii, », i, of his, hers, Us^ &c
Rem. Obsenre ^ftt stti is not a regtilar proaoim of tfae fliird penciiv
like the English ke^ tketU^hot reflexive ; e. ^^ poSr sd Iwoit, ^
^ praiae$ Umelf. It tiierefore has no nam, case. [The nom.
proiKiaDS he, eke, ft, are not often expressed in Latin ; hot when
they mu9t be, a demonsUrtitive proooRB, generally hie, is, or ille, is
employed.]
EXERCISE.
(144.) Vocabulary.
Hand, mSnQs, us (f.) (11^ 2).
To love (tDtih esteem), diKg-€r8.
To live, viv.€i*.
To contend, ixmteaA-4t^
Tq defend, dehwS^m.
To bum, incelid-€r6.
Totonsman, oppld&niis, S, uol
A Scqnanian, SAqcUbms, L
(145.) Examples.
{a) Odcsar caUs Divitiacus
to himself,
(i) The girl writes <fe« letr
ter fcith her mon hand.
Among, intdr (prep.).
Com, friimentdm, L
From (prep.) t or ib.f
A legion, 16gid, (Ugito) li (£).
TV ruUt eommmnd, inip^Hr-irS (witii
dat of parson).
C8M&r DiTiliAeiim ftd •« ¥«eil.
PueM ^i8t(»&m mftQft snft
•erflblt.
(JZcMft. fie is often donUei, for th^ sike of emphasis.]
(e) Jfen aUo(tys love them-
selves.
(d) The good live not for
themselves, hut for all.
Hdoainds sempdr s^sd d!fi«
gont,
vivunt.
(146.) Translate into English.
Hostes int^r sg coiatendtint. — Op{Adim sd suftqud &b hostit-
biis defendebant.^ — ^<^lv^tu oppld& Bail omniA incendixnt. — C«-
s&r tres ISgidnes secum h&b^t. — Consul leg&tos &b s6 ^mitt^t.
— S&piens omnifi, 8u&* sSciim port&t. — ^Helvfitii 6t S^qu&ni ob-
* Omnift suS = all hit {property) ; the noun being understood.
t Ais used befbi* consonants only ; &b before either Towels oroonsonaats. -
Digitized by
Google
]>BMON8TBATiyE PBONOITNS.
68
aides intSr s^sd d&bant. — ^Bdm sdsd nOn ^gnnt. — HeMtSl
frumentum omnd* sdcum portabant. — ^Imprdbi silA sempdr Ti-
▼unt — Sftpieos sib! semper impdr&t (147).
(147.) JRule of Syntax. — The Dative ig used witb lome
verbs signifyiDg to command^ to nde^ to obey.
(148.) Translate into Latin.
Good men do not praise themselves. — ^The tawnsmen were
fightbig with each other (inter s e). — The wise man always
carries aU his (property) with him. — ^Bad men always love them-
selves. — The general has three legions with him. — The towns-
men wiH cany aU their com with them. — ^Bad men do not rule
themselves (147). — The ^doans wiH defend themsekes and
theur (property) from the s<MerB. — CsMar was dismissing the
messenger from Mms^ — ^The Germans will bum their villages.
LESSON XXVI.
Demonstrative Pronouns.
(149.) The Demonstrative Pronoims are so called
because they are used to point out an object ; e. g.^
this^ tliatj thesCf those. \ *
(150.) U.ihat (often used' for he, she^ it (14a»R.),
is thus declined; also id6m, the very same, com-
pounded of is and dem.
=n
Sinpilar.
PIuraL
Singukr.
Plana. IJ
N.
is, 58, Id.
ii,6ffl,65.
idem, eSdSm,
Idem.
ildSm, eiBdem, E
eftdSm.
a.
Sjite.
eorilm, eftnun,
eoriixn.
ejusdSm.
ednmdSm, cA-
nmdem, ed-
nmd&B.
D.
Si.
iis, or els.
eidem.
iisdSm.
Ace.
ISQm, Sfinii Td>
e5s, eas, ei.
dmdem, eim-
dem,!dem..
e«sdem, efts-
d£m,«id£m.|
Q Abl
eo, eft, efi.
iis, or eis.
eddfim, e&d^
eadSm.
iisdem. |
(151.) The following forms of the verb esse, to 6e,
ftiust now be learned.
* T rtmvnttlm oam» s all their wm.
Digitized by
Google
64
DEHONBTRATITE PRONOONB.
TKMSES.
8INOULAB. H
Present
Imperfect
Future.
sOm, / am.
Srioi, wa9.
6r6, shall or will be.
Sd.
es, thou art.
Srfts.
eris.
Sd.
estf he, $he, ^cCfis.
6r5t
grit
PLUKAI,. II
Present
Imperfect
Future.
silmils, toe are.
Srftmiis, were.
Siimiis.
Sd.
estfs, ye are.
Sritifs.
Siltis.
3d.
sunt, they are.
erant
Srunt
EXERCISE.
(152.) Vocabulary.
To refrain, tempgrai«.
Merdumt, mercfttdr, (mercfttdr) Is
(m.).
Colour, cmr, (cSldr) Is (m.).
A^ atqu« (coiy.).
Plato, Plfito, (Platdn) is.
(153.) Examples.
(a) T^6 Helvetians contend
with the Germans^ and
keep them off from their
hoimdaries.
(h) mhe father calls hiB{otDn)
sM to hiin{self)»
{cwFhe father calls "boR
daughter and her son to
him(«ey).
^^ Observe csrefoHy, that if his, hers, its, refers to the principal sub-
ject of the sentence, it is expressed by the possessive (sntts, S, iim); but
if not by the genitive (ejils) of the demonstrative (Is, eS, !d).
(154.) Translate into English.
(1) Is, e&, Id, used for he, she, it (personal).
li ftb injuri& temp^pnt. — Is est Xn proviiici& tuft. — Merc&-
tdrSs &d eos sspd vdniunt. — ^A.b lis mi3lt& (82, I., R.) posdmtis^
— BelgaB ciim ^dms contendunt, eosqtie suis fioIbtU (153, a)
prdhlbent.
(2) I s, used as demonstrative, this, (hat ; also,^ e mAs the same
Elegant, eiSgans, (elegant) Is.
Gladly, vnUingly, UbentSr (adv.).
Way, journey, It6r, (Ittn&r) Is (n.).
Kingdom, regniim, L
Flower, fl6s, (flOr) Is (m.).
Writer, script&r, (scriptGr) b (m.)
Never, mmquim (adv.).
Helvdtii ciim Germ&ms con-
tenduBt; edsqtie suis finl-
btLs prdhibent.*
Pfttdr filiiim sutim ftd sd yd-
cftt.
P&tdr fili&m sMm 6t fOiiim
ejiis &d sd vdc&t.
* Svisfimbus is in the ablative. AH verbs oi separating, depriving, See
may take a noun in the ablative, with die direct object in the accusative^
Digitized by
Google
DEMONBTBATIY E PRONOUNS;
65
In ed ItihidrS Cass&r Crasstim vldftt. — ^Dtiinndrix, eO temp6r6
(118, II., c) regnum tfinebftt,— Non semper idim floilbiis (125.
II., a) est c616r. — ^In ed, provinciil sunt quattudr l^gidnds.
(3) Distinction between 3ju8 and sutis, &, um.
Cicdr6 est script5i%l&rus ; Sjas libros fibentdr l^^mtiB. —
Caes&r &d sd Dumndrigdm atqfie filium ^Hs vdc&bit. — Pl&tft est
scriptdr elSgans ; Ejus 5p^r& fibentdr Idgfi.
Dux 6gd vest^ dr&m.— Ss-nd tu Sdcr&tSs ?— Esdsnd be&ti ?.
— Caes&r dnx vestSr 6r&t.
(155.) Translate into Latin.
They were walking in the garden yesterday. — The king
will give them (dat., 64) rewards. — They are in Gaul. — Mer-
chants never come to them. — ^We were demanding rewards of
(ab) diem. — In that province Caesar finds many deserters. — In
that province there are three legions. — ^At that time (abl.*, 118,
II., c) Caesar was leading the army .7— Horses (125, II., a) hava
not always the same colour. — Caesar caUs Divitiacus and his
brothers to him (self). — Caesar is an elegant writer ; we read his
works with pleasure. — I am your leader. — ^You shall be our
leader. — Caesar was our leader. — The iSduans contend with
the Helvetians, and keep them oflf their boundaries.
LESSON XXVII.
Demonstrative Pronouns^ continued.
(156.) The Demonstrative hie, hsec, hoc, this^
points out an object which is present to the speaker^
and is called demonstrative of the^r*^ person ; e. g.f
this book (of miTie), hie liber.
Nom.
Oen.
Dat
Ace.
AbL 1
Sing.
Phir.
hic,b»c,hdc.
hI,h{B,h8BC.
hdrOm.
hmc.
his.
hoc.
ho., his,
hsec.
h6c h«ch6c
his.
JSem, Hie is used also (as was stated 143, R.) for he, she, it ; e. g., hie
didt, he (this man) tpeaks.
(157.) Ist^vistft, istfid, this, that, pointe out an
Digitized by dOOQ IC
\
M
OKMOVSTILATmB FBOVOUWl.
object which is present to the person spoken to^ and is
called the demonstrative of the second person ; e. g.^
that hook {ofyours)^ istfi liber.
Nom.
0«ii.
Pat.
IF K^
▲u. ll
Sing.
Plur.
istiid.
iitiOo.
iitoriim, irihn,
iBtOd.
JBem. IstS is often used to denote comtempt; e. ^., istS-ne did[tf
Does ihatfdlovo speak 7
(158.) 1116, ill&, illfld, points out an object re-
mote from the speaker (f^haty the former ^ opposed to
hie), and is called the demonstrative of the third per-
son. . It is used often for the personal prcmoun ke^ shCf
U (148, R.).
1^* It IS declined throughout like istd, istft, istiid.
JUin. In the genitiyes, istins, illins, ipsluo, Hie pepuJlI is long,
oontraiy to the general rule (34, 1) that a vowel befiire another U
short
(159.) Ipse, ipsa, ipsum, is properly an adjunct
iive pronoun, as it is added to other pronouns ; e. g.^
I (and not another) jmme mysdf. I fig5 me ipsS laadA.
IpraUe mysdf (and not anodier). | figtt m§ ip siim landA.
BXBftOISS*
(160.) Vocabulary.
Opinion^ sententiS, so.
To please, plScSrS.
To di$plca$e, dispKcirS.
Soul, SnimOs, L
Proverb, prOverhtttm, L
Lazy, ignavQs, 8, tba.
Season, rfitid, (rStiSn) Is if.)*
Anknal, SnXmmi (iUi^^nftl) U (neol.).
Pleasing, agreeahUf grfitils, i, tUn.
Bau, torplm « (104)^
Friend, amfeiis, L
To doos^, prsBdlc&re.
To, obey, parir« (witii dat; 147).
Old, yetvs, (vfitSr) is (108, XL, fl).
<S^(7ai^, carmSa, (cannlz^ is (^).
Precept, pnecepttLm, L
(161.) Examples.
(a) This opinion plecues me, I Hsbc sententift mi hi pl&cdt
th«t di$please$ (me), | ill& dis^c6t
Digitized by
Google
DEHdHiTKATIVE FI01I0UNB. 67
RuU ef Syntax, — ^Veibs of pUeuing, oheymg, penuadmgf
commanding, fawmring, and the reverteftak^ the Dative
Istd tails ftmictlfl ibc el&rfts
est.
Ajumtis ipsd 89 m5ydt
Turp6 est dd seipsd prss-
d!c&r«.
(6) That friend of yours w
on iUustrioue man.
(c) T^ tfouZ itself moves it-
self.
(<Q Jit is hose to boast ofone^s
Rule of Syntax, — The infinitive is used as the suliject of
a verb, and is then regarded as a noun in the neuter gen-
der; e. g.y praedicard (to boast), in (d), is nom. to es^
and turp6 {base) agrees with it in the neuter.
(162.) Translate into English.
(a) Hi pudri m&gistro pSrent. — Hst litt$r» valdd md ddlec-
taiit.^ — CIcdrtnk fibif yaldd wSbl plftcent : eos fibent^r Idgft.^
H6o beMm grftvfi est — ^Hic pu^r bdnus est, illd Ign&Tiis.
(6) l8t& tuH f ilift pulchk est.— Ist^d tutim carmdn mih! (106,
n., c) grftt^m est. — Praeclfiri, sunt ist& tu& praeceptiL — V6ti&s
iUftd prdveiiniim wSlA pl&cdt.
4e) Omni ftaKmU s^psam dlfi^t.— Imp6rftt5r ipsd mifitibiUi
(147) impdr&t. — £g5 mA ipsd nOn famdftb&m. — TfL teipsilm laud^
&bl8. — S&piens sib! ipsi impdriit.
{d) Jucundiim est &mfiid.
(168.) Translate into Latin-
(a) That iUustnous precept was-pleasing-to (placdb&t) Cato.
^-That brave general will command the soldiers. — The soldiers
willingly obey this brave general. — ^This precept pleases me,
that displeases (me). — ^The worius of Csesar please me very
much ; I read them gladly (libentdr).
{b) That horse of yours is a beautiful animal. — ^I keep in
memory (mdm^ria teneft) that excellent precept of yours.—*
Those songs of yours are pleasing (grftt&) to me. — ^That letter
of yours was defi^ting me very much.
(c) The soul rules itself (161, c) by reason (riUianfi, 66, a).—
The poet himself praises himself (169). — Caesar himself will
command the legions (161, c).— The soldiers willingly (llbantdr)
Digitized by
Google
RELATIVE PRONOUN.
obey Caraar himself. — ^Do you (135, 11.; 1) praise joimelf ? —
Wise men themselves always rule themselves (147).
(d) It is pleasant to love (one's) friends. — It is base to boast
of (one's) friends. — It is agreeable to please (one's) father.
LESSON XXVIII.
(164.) The Relative Pronoun (whOf which)^ qui,
q u sBy q u 5 d, is thus declined :
Nom.
Geo.
Dat
Ace
AbL .
Sing.
Plur.
qui, quae,
quiB.
ciijtlB.
qOiOFuXIl* qpftiTiTifi
qadrom.
cm.
qnn>&i.
quSm, qoim,
qu6cL
qadf, qnifl^qiue.
qud, qua, qud.
qoibiii.
Rem. dnicunqud, ^uecnnque, quodcunqud {vhotoeoer, vkid^
soever, whatsoever) u declined like qui, quae, qu5d: cnnqnfi be-
ing simply annexed to the different cases*
(165.) The ReUUive commonly refers to some preceding
word, which is therefore called the antecedent ; e, g., The f?um,
who lives well, is happy. Here man is the antecedent ; who,
the relative. The sentence in which the relative occurs is call-
ed the relative sentence ; the other the principal or antecedent
sentence ; e. g, (above), the man is happy, is the piincqnl sen-
tence : who lives weU, the relative sentence.
EXEB
(166.) Vocabulary.
Poor, iBgens, (»gent) Is (108).
Enottgh^ sStifs (adv.).
Nearest to, neighbours to, prozimtis,
S, ilm.
To dwell, inc51Sr6 {intrans.).
To inhabit, incoldrS {trans).
Blood, sanguis, (sangulh) Is (m.).
Also, gtl&m (conj.).
Heart, cor, (cord) Is (n.).
To despise, contemners.
Magnanimous, magnSnbntts, S, tim.
Honest, honourable, honestiis, fi, ilm.
(167.) Examples,
(a) The boy, who reads,
learns.
CISE.
Fountain, fons, (fimt) Is (m.).
Water, SqnS, 8B.
Winter-Quarters, MbemX, Oriim (pL).
To winter, hidmftrfi.
Arethusa, Ardthusa, s.
To return, restore, reddSre.
Virtue, virtus, (virtut) Is (£).
To repel, prdpulsarS.
T\) vaunt, ostentarS.
Fame, ftmfi, ».
To do, to make, f ftcSx&
One, ta&M, S, iim.
Pu^r, quild^t, disdt.
Digitized by
Google
RELATIVE FEONOUN. 09
The prU who reads, learns,
(b) The boy, whom toe see,
is handsome.
The girl, whom toe see, is
handsome*
Puell&, qu8B l^glt, discit
Pudr, qu6m lifdemils, est
pulchSr.
Puell&, quUm videmiis, est
pukhrlU
Ride of Syntax. — The Relative Pronoun mnst agree with
its antecedent in gender and number (as in (a) ), but its
ease is fixed by the construction of the relative sentence
{e. g., in (a) qui is nomin. to legit: in (b) qudm is
ace., governed by vlddmiis).
(c) Jwhotmte. |Eg5, qui s crib 6.
Wewhoimrite. |No8, qui scribimiis.
Ride of Syntax. — ^The verb in the relative sentence agrees
with the relative in number, but takes the person of the
antecedent.
' (1) ^gens est Is, qui nOn
s&tits h&b«t.
(2) Is aegens est, qui nOn
s&tits h&bdt.
(3) Qui non s&tifs h&bdt, is
aegens est.
(4) Qui ndn s&tifs h&bdt,
aegens est.
Rule of Position. — ^The relative generally stands at the be-
ginning of its. sentence, and (1) as near to its antecedent
as possible. (2) Is and qui are made emphatic when
Is begins the principal sentence and qui the relative
sentence ; (3) and still more emphatic when the relative
sentence stands first. (4) The antecedent is often
omitted entirety.
(168.) Translate into English.
(a) Proxinfl sunt Germ&ms, qui trans Rhdntim incdlunt.—
Omnd &nim&l, q u 6 d sangulndm h&bdt, h&bdt dti&m cdr. — Csb-
s&r, trSs Idgiones, q u as In prdvinciS, hiSmabant, ex lubemis edG-
d[t — Omni& (82, I., R.) quse pulchr& simt, honestd, sunt.
(b) Felix est rex, q u d m omnds civSs &mant. — In hftc insfi*
Ift est fons &quie dulcis, cui nom^n est Ar3thu8& (125, II., a).
(€[) He is poor who has not
enough.
Digitized by
Google
70 INTXEAOOAnVE PEOVOUNS.
— AridTistiis obaidds reddit, quds hibdt ib JE^kds.— <}a]li»
sunt partes trds, qn&riim Qn&m Bdg» inoftfamt.
(d) (1) Be&ti sunt ii, qudr^m Tit& Yirtutd (abL, b5^ a) rdg^-
tftr. — (2) 1 8 fbrtis est, qui injftryUn prOpaliiC — (3) Qui se
ostent&t, Is stoltiU dldttir {is caUed a fool), — (4) Qui famftm
bdniiB oontenu^ virtutdm cootoBmiL — ^Fortls et magB&oimils
•St, nOn qui Hl^t, sdd qui propuls&t ii^&ii&in.
(169.) Translate iiUo Latin.
{a) The songs which w« hear are pleMaii|: (grata) to us
(106, II., c). — ^The king who rules v^tlj is hi^ijfi — ^M animals
which have Uood hare also hearts. — Cassar kiads across the
Rhine the five legions which were wintering in th^r prorince.
(b) Hi^py is the teacher whom all Qiis) scholars love. — ^In
ihht (eft) island (there) is a city whose name is (to which the
name is*^ 125, II., a) Syracuse (Syr&c&8»). — ^In this (hac)
city there is a fountain whose name is Arethusa. — Of Britain
(there) are three parts, of which (gen.) the Eng^sh inhabit
one.
(d) (1) Happy is he whose Ufe is ruled by the precepts of
virtue. — ^He is wise who dilig^tly serves (cdllt) the gods. —
(2) They are brave who repel an injury. — (3) They who vaunt
themselves are called fools. — (4) Who repels an injury, ig
brave and magnanimous.
LESSON XXIX.
Interrogative Pronoun.
(170.) The Interrogative Pronoun is precisely lik<#
the Relative in form, excepting that for the nom., sing.*
and masc, it has quis, and for the nom. and ace, neut.f
quid; thus, qui s, qusB, quid.
(171.) Quisnftm, quaehftm, quidn&m, express amore
emphatic interrogation than the simple qui s, quae, quid, the
syllable nam answering to our English ** pray ;'* e. ^.,
Pray, what are you doing ? \ Q u i d n & m &gis ?
* S u n t, ploral, becanie S 7 r ft c 4 s » is phorsL
Digitized by
Google
INnEBO«ATITE FBCHVOONS.
71
(172.) In asking questions, the different easM of qttit can be
naed as substantives or as acyectives, ezceptiiig tkiat
(1) In the nom. sing, masc., quis is used as a substantive.
In the nom. sing, masc., qui is used as an adjective.
(2) In the nom. and accus., neut., quid is used as a sub*
stantive.
In the nom. and aocus., neut., quod is used as an ad-
jective.
(1)
(2)
Quis v«nit?
Qui hdmftvdidt?
Quis homo est?
Quid tiUnds?
Qudd pdriciiKhntlmfis?
Whooomee?
Whatman conus?
Who is the man ?
What do ycufiar 1
What danger do you
Star?
(173.) The answer yes is given by repeating the verb wbkh
asks the question ; no, by repeating the verb with n 6 n. V 6 r ft
{ctrtaifdy)^ added to the verb in an affirmative answer, gives it
more emphasis \ e. g.^
Arc you writing 7
I am writing*,
Are you reading 7
lam not reading.
Will you do what I ask 7
IwUl certainly do (it).
Scnfals-nd?
Scribft.
Legis-n6?
Non Ugft.
F&cids-n6 qua* rftgftl
F&ciftm vdrft.
8XBR0I8B.
(174.) Vocabulary.
NeWfi^yuM, S, ton.
NewB, novf (neat gen. of n5yus, used
witli a nent adj. or pionoan).
NSm, iwterrogatioe pctrtide, used
when no ii expected as the an-
■wer.
To do, Sg6r6.
To be among, IntereiiS (Inter +
etMOt bat pM iiUemtl^itkat
istkeHfimtneef
Between, among, intSr (prep., aoo.).
Beast, brute, bestiS, n.
An evil, miltUn, I.
WiOunO, sine (prep., abl.).
Figure, f%urS, 8b.
Mortalt moitAlis, 6.
Certainljf, vSrd (afBrmatiTe parti
ere).
To oaimf,y^^aMb*
Immortal, ixunort^,! A.
• Hnc, qnn, ploral, shoold be translated this, what, singular,
t Observe the force of in prefixed to adiJectivas. MorttOls = mortaig
bk + moctalis = immortalis, immortaL
Digitized by
Google
72 INDEFINITE FftONOUNB.
(176.) Examples,
(a) What is (he news ?
{b) Is there anything new ?
(There u not, ii there t)
(c) Why do you laugh ?
Quid est nfivi? (=What
is there of new?)
Nilm est quidn&m ndvi?
(Nam expects tiie aofwer no.)
Quidrides?
(176.) Translate into English.
Quls DOS vdc&t?— Cuj^ hic Kbdr est?— Qudm vldes? —
Qi:dd &^. — Quid interest intdr hdmindm dt besti&m ? — Qu&m
dOmiim invfimes An6 mftlXs ? — Quid 16g^ ? — ^&inst61&m. — Qua
&micita& est intdr imprdbos ? — Niim CsBS&rdm times ? — ^Ndn til-
med.— Qua in urbd (125, IV., N., t) siimils ?— Qids hdm5
est? — ^£g5 Slim CsDs&r. — NtUn toimils figur&m h&bdt? — Sunt
n6 hdminds mortftlds ? — Sunt vdrft. — Qi:dd times ? C8B8&r6m
▼ebis.
(177.) Translate into Latin.
Who calls me ? — ^Whose are those books ? — What men do
you see ? — ^What are you writing ? — ^A letter. — ^What book are
you reading ? — What is the difference between the good and
the wicked ? — ^Who is the soldier ? — ^What is the difference be-
tween wolves and dogs ? — ^Do you not fear the enemy ? — ^I do
not fear (them.) — ^What man will you find without a faidt (cul-
pa) ? — ^In what town are we ? — ^Whose house is this ? — ^What
city will you find without eyils? — What is the difiference
between men and beasts ? — ^What do you fear ? You are car-
rying the king. — ^Are men immortal (niim) ? — ^They are not.
LESSON XXX.
Indefinite Pronouns.
(178.) The Indefinite Pronouns denote an object in
a general way, without reference to a particular indi-
vidual ; e. g.^ any one, some one^ &c. They are,
1. duidfim, a certain one, &c^ plural, some*
Digitized
by Google
INDEFINITE PRONOUNS.
78
3. au i s qu «m , any, any one («. g^ when it ia denied that there are any).
[Neut quic qufim (subst) ; quod quftm (adj.). This pronoun ia uaed
chiefly in negative sentences.]
4. du i 8 p i & m , somebody, some (neut).
5. All qui B , some one, something (neut.); any (adj.).
6. CluiBqud,eac^unusquisqu6,eacA one (stronger than quit qufi).
7. Ecquis ? used interrogatively, (does) any one? anything?
I^ Observe carefully that each of the above takes quid in
neuter nom., and ace, when used substantively; and qudd
when used adjectively.
EXEBCISE.
(179.) Vocabulary.
'The tenth, ddcunns, ft, tun.
A javelin, tr&gdlft, 89.
To see, to notice, conspIcdrS.
JudgmeiU, discretion, consilium, i.
Eternity, aetemitas, (89temitat) is (£).
Maker, artificer, f&bdr, fftbri (m.).
Fifth, quintus, ft, dm.
Youth, jnventus, (Juventut) fa (£).
Fortune, fortunfi, sb.
Forever, in SBtemum.
Belong, pertindrd.
(180.) Exampks.
(a) Something new.
JSach one of tis,
A certain thing new.
Some dignity.
Art, are, (art) Is (£).
Form, formft, sb.
To discover, inv6nnr6.
For, dtfinim, conj. (alwaya atandi
first in its clause).
Cultivation, hum<inity, hflm&Dltafl»
a^ (f.).
CovMnon, communis, ia, h.
Bond, vineiilttm, i.
Dignity, dignitAs, (dignitat) & (£).
Body, corpfis, (corpte) is (n.).
Aliquidndvi.
UnusquisquS nostrtlm.
Quiddftm ndvi.
Xllquid dignit&tis.
Ride of Syntax, — The indefinite pronouns may be used
partitiv^ly, and then govern the genitive.
{b) A certain one of the sol-
diers.
Some of the soldiers.
Quid&m {sing.) ex milltt*
biis.
Quid&m {plur.) ex milltl-
biis.
Rem. The ablat with ex is used instead of the genitive, especially
with quidftm.
(181.) Translate into English.
Qui dam ex miHtlbiis d^ma Id^dnls vdnieb&t. — Quinto diA
(118, II., c) trftgiil& a qu6dftm miKtft conspicitiir.— yirl, in
qiflbds ft liquid consilii (180, a) est, magn&i^iml sunt.— Temptla
G
Digitized
by Google
74 eOUlBLATIVB PROHOUNS.
est para qnmd&m seternlt&ds. — Culvls (125, II., a) Anlmfifi
corptU est. — QuIHbdt est fftbdr fort&DSB suae. — ^Unicuiqufi*
(125, II., a) nostriim (180, 120) est Mmtis immort&Es. —
Quisqud qostriim (180) In eternum vivdt,-p— Ai^Uni^ non h&b6t
fbrm&m ftliquftm, ndc figurlUnv«^JLllquid ndvi invtoiSs. —
£tdidm onmM art^ qu» ad htkm&idtfttdm pmiSnent, h&bent
q u o d d & m commft n6 yinctUiim.
(182.) Translate into Latin,
[The proDoaiui of the lesson are italicized in the exercise.]
Some of the soldiera of the fifth legion are wounded (pres.).-*-
On the fifth day (118, II., c) the enemy is noticed by a certain
soldier of the tenth legion. — ^Men, in whom there is some dignity
(180), are magnanimons.-— To each man (= of men) ther^ in
a soul and a hody.f^I will giye the book to any^one-yov^pUase
of the scholars. Eaek one of us shall live foreyer. — ^You wiS
discoYer a certain thing new.-^Some of the soldiers are in the
city. — ^For all the arts which belong to cultivation have a certain
common bond,*^ Youth is a certain part of life* — ^Is not (estna)
any man-you-pUase the maker of his own fortune ?— 'Haa the
soul {u$€ nam) am^ §oirm or figure 1
LESSON XXXI.
Correlative Pronouns.
(183.) Correlative Pronouns are such as an^ti^er to
each other ; c. g.^ how great ? so great. How many f
so mani/f &c.
[This correlation is often expressed in English by adverbs or ooi\)ano-
tioDS: nu^tLmtanmt as is the gfneral to an tlie troops, Aa.}
(184.) The Correlative Pronouns are
teverl
qaaUsciinqad, of whatever
kind.
qoantasonnqa*, komever
great,
SHquantiis, eomewhat great.
*il£qiidt, «om«.
*qnotquttty however many.
* ^nns and qnisqnd are both dedined in ftnnflqaisqai^. dn&s
has |Ren. Anifls, dot. flnL
Digitized by
Google
CORRELATIVE PRONOUIVB.
75
Sem.1. an&lisf ef tokathindt qvantflgf hm graOtt qn6tf
M^no many f are also naed interrogatively.
2. Those xnaiked thus {*) are indeclinable ; the rest are declined lika
acyectiref.
EXERCISE.
(185.) Vocabulary.
Where, «bl (adv.).
Toil, opSrft, ».
Pleasure, volaptis, (v5IapC&t)Is (£)
RtuHMTOy praniiChsQy I.
6o2e2, aTVom, L
Money, pdounii, iqt.
i^<M(n <im6r, (tilmAr) U (nt).
Or, v6l (coi\j.).
Advantages, bonX (nent adj.).
7\9 <{^!^ pnBbAr0.
To eovet, eaq^eUM. [b (£).
MtrtOUy, UMraliku, (BUMHtat)
(186.) Exatfyaks.
(a) So much toil (= of toil).
How much pleasure f (*=of
pleasure 7)
No reward (= nothing ofre-
warc^.
Much gold {=^ of gold).
Tantdm Operas.
Quantiim Tdlupt&tlst
Nihil prasmii.
Mnltiim auri. (But, much
money = meLgn& pecQnift»
not multi&m pecAoisB.)
AHquantiim ftgri.
A pretty large piece of
ground.
Rule of Syntax.-'The neuters, tantiim, quantiim,
&liqnant^m; also, multi&m, nihil, qnli, ftliquld,
and others, are nsed as neuter nouns, and followed by the
genitire (Synt., 695, 6., R.).
Obs, Tanttlm,
anantdm in nent, witii genitive = «o
'.ch, how many ; bat in ntiaac. and feuL, agre
ffttfM, to
many, how muen., iww man,y ; but in maac. and fern- agreeing with
the noon, so great, how great; e, g,, how many booisf qnantiim
llbr6rikm; so great fear, tantjia unOr,
(b) As is the master, so are the
scholars.
Qa&lis est mftgisti^r, t&Us
sunt discipfifi ; or (with est
and sunt omitted), qnAlls
mftgistdr, t&lds disdpiiB.
(187.) Translate into English.
Quftles sunt dtic^s, t&lds sunt miHt^s. — ^Fort&ns b5n& (82,
II.), quantftcunqud sunt, incert& sunt. — ^Tantus tlmdr omndm ex-
erdtdm occupab&t. — ^tJbl tant&m virtat^m invdnies? — Quan-
tum Tdlupt&tls virtQs prsebdt ! — ^Fratri est (125, II., a) &Kquan-
Digitized
by Google
76 CORRELATIVE PRONOUNS.
ttim pdcunise. — ^Virtus nihil prsemii t61 pecuniae expdtlt. — ^P&t6r
mihi magn&m p^cuni&m d&btt. — Quantum (186, Obs,) fibroriiin
h&bSs ? — Qu6t homines, tdt sententitaB.
(188.) Translate into Latin.
As are the genei'als, so are the soldiers. — ^As is the king, so
are the leaders. — ^As are the masters (heri), so are the slaves.
— ^As are the fathers, so are the children. — So great an army
is coming. — ^The advantages of the body, however great they
may be (sunt), are imcertain. — ^Where will you find so great
tiberality ? — ^How many (186, Ohs,) rewards does virtue afford ?
— Good (men) covet no (186, a) reward. — ^Will your father
give (135, II.) you much money? — ^Has your brother much
gold ? — ^As are the chiefs, so are the citizens. — My father has
(125, II., a) a pretty large piece of ground.
Digitized by
Google
§ 16.
NUMERALS. (XXXII.— XXXIII.)
• ^
LESSON XXXII.
Numerals. — Partial Tabk.
(189.) Numerals are divided into the four classes
following, of which the first three are adjectives^ the
fourth, adverbs.
1 ^
CAKDINAI..
ORDINAL.
DiSTRIBimTX.
ADVKRBIAIm
One «pi«c«, one bjr
One, two, ftc
Fint, tacood, ftc
one, one at n time,
Once, twice. Ac
1 I-
talis, ft, tbn.
piimfis, ft, ihn.
singiili, », ft.
8«meL
1 II-
duo, n, 6.
86ciiiidiiB,ft,ain.
bini, SB, ft.
Ml.
1 ™-
tres, 68, tria.
tertitis, ft, dm.
temi, », ft.
t6r.
1 ^'
qaatta6r.
qaartds, ft, iim.
qafttenu, », ft.
qaater.
1 v*
quinque.
qointos, ft, am.
qoini, se, ft.
quinqoief.
VI.
8§X.
sextus, ft, am.
sgni, SB, ft.
sexies.
vn.
s^ptdm.
•eptiands,ft,iim.
septeiii,»,i.
septite.
vm.
octd.
oct&vofl, ft, um.
octoni, », ft.
octieg.
rx.
ndvdm.
nonos, ft, iUn.
nSvgni, e, ft.
noviet.
X.
d6c«m.
ddcimds, ft, iim.
dgn!,s, ft.
dftciefl.
XL
IIIIQGCUXI*
ondecimoa, ft,
am.
daddddEmiii, ft,
xn.
dtiddddmo.
dnddeni, », ft.
daSdedM.
L—
^TW^
Mem. For die dedension of fi»fl< and eZuo, see 194. Tris is decUned
like a plural adjective of second dass, 194. The remaining cardinals
are midedined. The ordinals and distributives are dedined like
adjectives of the first class.
EXERCISE.
(190.) Vocabulary.
In all, altogether, omnind.
Multitude, mnltittadd, (nmltittudXn)
is(£).
Hour, horft, ss.
To he distant, distftr6.
Mile, minift,* (mill) iilm (pL n.).
Year, anniis, I.
Monih, mensis, (mens) Is (m.).
Another, tltAr, ft, iim (194, E. 1.).
Thirty-six, sex et trigintft.
To levy, conscribfird.
Night-^ateh, vigllia, a.
From, after, d6 (witii abl.).
To strive, to haeten, contenddrA.
Italy, Itftlift, 8B.
* Mi llfi, plwr. millift = 1000.
^awile.
Millift (passnttm, of paces nnderstood)
G2
Digitized by
Google
^8 NUMERALS.
(101.) Examples.
(a) They fight four hours,
(h) The city is distant five
miles,
(c) A ditch eleven feet wide.
Hor&8 quattadr pugnant.
Urbsdist&tquinqud iiiilli&.
F068& und^cim p^des l&t&.
Rule of Syntax. — ^The accusative answers to the qnestions
how long ? (whether of time or space), how hroad 1 how
high? &c.; e. g.^ in (a) ^oras; in (6) milli&; m (c)
pddes.
((£) How long 7 may also be expressed by a noun in l)ie geni-
tive, depending on another noun ; e. g.^ a ditch of ten feet^
fo6s& d6c6m pddtim.
(192.) Translate into English.
£rant omi^nft ltindr& dud. — GaUiae sunt |^urt68 tr6s, qaftrom
nn&m incdlunt Belg», altdr&m AquitftM. — ^Uniis d multltOdXnd
Tulndrfttiir. — ^Hdrfts sex pugn&bant. — Urbs dist&t ddc^m mifiift.— ^
In annd du6d6clm menses sunt.— Caes&r dti&s Idgidnds conscri-
Ut. — Ca&s&r trds Idgl5n6s quao In Gallia, hi^m&bant edudt. —
Caes&r trfts Iftg^onSs dx MberMs Adfidt-^Sunt omninft ltin$r&
qu&ttu$r.— CsBS&r dd qufirtft vig^& l^gionds edudt. — Consul
l^^dndm dddm&ffl In castHl rddQdt. — Cdes&r ctim quinqud Id-
^ombitt in ItfiMm contendit— iTrilt ommn^ ih Q«fli& Idgid
an&.
(198.) Translate into Latin.
There are in all three ways. — There are of (Jaul three parts,
of which the Sequanians inhabit one. — ^There are of the city
five parts. — Four of (= out of) the multitude are wounded. —
The soldiers fight seven hours. — In three years are thirty-six
months. — The villages are distant nine miles. — The wood is dis-
tant four miles. — The consuls win levy six legions. — Caesar will
lead out five legions from Italy. — ^The general was levying two
lemons in Gaul.^— Ctesar w91 lead out the soldiers in the second
watch. — The consul, in the third watch leads back the soldiers
into the camp. — The tenth legion fights (pugnat). — There arc
altogether in Gaul two legions. — Caesar brings back the fifth le-
gion. — Caesar brmgs back the fifth legion after the second watch.
Digitized by
Google
NUMttALfl.
7»
LESSON XXXIII.
Numerahi continued.
(194.) Declension of tin us, duo, and tres.
/
[j — '~
One,Sin^
Two, rt«r.
tlm.e,Ptf. 1
N.
O.
p.
onas, H, am.
unidfl, ffts, Iflg.
uni, i,L
the rest regular.
:N.v.
Gen.
D.Ak
Aoc.
dad, daie, dad.
dadrJitA, daartbn, dadrfiitt.
dadboi, dnabiU. dodbtti.
dads and dad. dale, dad.
trf; trig, txU. ^ |
triftm, tridm, triiim.|^
tribfli«crtb«i,tribAi.
tr^f, tret, trii. |{
iZtffit. (1.) Like Uniis are declined
Aliiis, i, ud, another.*
Alt6r, i, Urn, the one, ^ ctktr (of two).
Neotdr, tri, triim, neither of the two,
Nallaa, i, am, no one.
Solos, i, iim, alone,
Tdtfti, i, iim, d^ whole.
mills, a, dm, anjf one.
trtdr, ti«, trtav whieh of the two.
0terqad, traqa«, tromqii., aocft of
^ <wo, 6o^; and other oon^onndfl
o[mer.
(a.) Like 4md is declined ittbd, si, «, &o<».
EXESCISB.
(195.) Foca^tt/ary.
What one, qadtds, i, iim.
Moett pldrasqad, ftqod, dmqad ; e, g.,
most men, hdminds pl6riqad , most
insects, insect! pidrftqad.
Virgil, Virgfliils, L
Mbre, aiigls (adr,)r
(Refer to tU edhutm of ^stritethres {180).]
(196.) Exampks.
{a) My father ttnU give us
two books apiece.
(6) What hour is it? The
third,
(c) He wiU come for my sake
alone,
((if) Which pleases you?
Neither.
(e) The beams are three
feet distant (apart) from
each other.
Abemn,tnbB,{teib)Uliy
Insect, insectdm, L
Horace, Hdratids, I.
To migrate, mfgrird.
Writer, scriptdr, (script(Vr) h (m.).
Mother, voMbe, {matt) Is (£).
P&tdr nOtoa binds llbros di-
bit.
Qiidt& hdrH est? Tertift.
Me& uniiLs causft (abl.) y^-
nidt.
tJt6r Hbl pl&cdt? Neut6r.
Trabes mtdr sd distant ternds
pedes (191, c).
* When iQifts is repeated, it means some, others.
Digitized by
Google
80 NUMERALS.
(197.) Translate into English.
Matdr notna qu&ternds fibrds d&bit. — ^Ndbis sunt (125, II., a)
term dqm. — ^Binas omnlbib &\lbtis ftla sunt. — Insect& plerftqu6
sends, &lift octdnds, p6dds h&bent. — Qu5t& hdr& est ? Ndn&. —
Mifites utriusque exercltus sunt fortes. — Tu& unius causa yd-
nient. — Y irgilitis atqiie HorfttiCis pogtae sunt prsclftri ; titdr tibl
m&gis pl&cSt ? (161, a.) Virgilitls. — Bis In anno mlfitSs v6m-
unt. — September est non^ anni meniDLS. — Tr&b6s intdr sd dis-
tant binds pddds (191, c),
(198.) Translate into Latin.
[Some of tiie words will be ibazid in 194, iL 1.]
We have (125, II., a) four dogs apiece (196, a). — ^The mas-
ter gives us five books at a time. — ^All men have (125, II., a)
tvro eyes apiece. — Most insects have six (senos) feet; some
(194*) nine, others (194*) ten, others (194*) twelve.— What
o'clock (hour) is it ?— The fifth.— The eighth.— The eleventh.
— The twelfth. — ^The generals of each army are brave. — ^Why
do you come? For your sake alone (196, c). — Cieero ai^
Caesar are excellent writers ; which pleases you ? Neither.
— ^Which pleases you more ? Caesar. — ^The birds migrate twice
in the year. — The soldiers will come eight times a year. — Oc-
tober is the tenth month of the year ; November the eleventh ;
December the twelfth. — The beams are four feet distant frona
each other. — The beams are seven feet apuxt from each other.
Digitized by
Google
§ 17.
VERBS OF THE THIRD CONJUGATION IN W.
LESSON XXXIV.
Verbs of the Third Conjugation in id.
(199.) Some verbs of the third conjugation, instead
of taking the simple verb-stem for the tense-stem in
the tenses for incomplete action, add i to the verb-
stem in these tenses. They form the infinitive, how-,
even in ere, like other verbs of the third.
(200.) Infin. Active, cap-Srg, to take.
8INOULAB. ll
Present
Imperfect.
Future.
cftp-i-dbim.
C«p-i8,
C«p-i-68.
cftp-!t
cftp-i-6btt.
cftp-i-«t
PLUBAI.. II
Present
Future.
cftp-i-mus.
cftp-i-ebftmns.
cUp-i-emus.
cip-Xtls.
cftp-iebfttib.
c&p-ietl8.
dlp-{-unt n
c^X-ebant R
cftp-i-ent
Ikfin. Passive, c ftp- i, to 6c taken.
SmOXTLAB. ll
Present
Imperfect
Future.
cap4-dr.
G&p-I-6b«r.
cip-i-«r.
cftp-fi-ris.
cftp-i-dbAiis.
c«p-i-6ri8.
dlp-i-tfir.
c«p-i-6bft«ir.
c&pl-6tnr.
PLUKAL. II
Present
Imperfect
1 Future.
cftp-i-miir.
cftpi-6bAmib.
cftp-X-fimi&r.
c»fp4-»wTTi|. c&p-i-untdr. N
cftp-I-«bftmXid. c«p-i-dbantiir. 1
cftp-i-drnXu. cSp-i-entJir. \
EXERCISE.
(201.) Vocabulary.
Pn an cases, verbs of the class described above will be indicated bi
the Tocabolaiies by the ending id» after tbe infinitive fonn; e. g^ «a
make, ftc«r« (i«).l
Digitized by
Google
82 VERBS OF THIRD CONJUGATION IN 10.
Exetue, exowAiS.6, (excos&tidn) Hi
(£).
To receive, accept, acdtpdrd (id).
Way, road, it6r, O^tiiidr) ii (neat).
Te undettdhe^ fiisc!p«rtt ifX).
To make, fiUsdrd (id).
(202.) Exampk.
Willingly desar give$ par-
don and receives the excuse.
And, qad.*
Skip, Divli, (niv) U (£).
To repair, to renew, to rebuild, rSlt-
efirfi (id).
Long, longjif, S, dm.
fFbU; morut, L
Harbour, portiiB, ui (m.).
excus&lionemqud* ace! pit.
(203.) Translate into English.
LalHdAus multii Germ&iidriim (78, II., 6) oppida c&pieb&t. —
HelvdtiX pdr provinci&m nostr&m itdr f&citint. — ^Vulndr& grd.vi&
ft miHtlbiis accif^untiir. — ^dui bellum magnilm sudcipi^bant.
— ^Libentfir C»8&r nimtilds accipit, nscftte (201, N.) vM&m d&t.
^-ImpMlt5r obsld^ clTit&tls fibentdr accipiSt. — ^Nantium &
patrd crfts acclpi6s.^-Cra8s&s nRvda looigfts, <{iub In porta flfaDt,
rdficit. — Consul muros urbis r^fldt.
(204.) Translate into Latin.
•Rie enemy were making (their) way tfaroogh onr {Nrorince. —
The Romans were ra{Hd^(cdldrit6r) making their way through
Gaul. — ^We shall receive a meseenger from the city to-day. —
The Helvetians were undertaking a severe and ^reat war. —
The 8(^klier8 receive many and severe woonds.^—We shall make
(our) way through Britain. — Caesar will wiSin^y receive ^e
excuse of the ^duans, and grant them (iisque) favour. — The
gifts of a Either are gladhjr (Ubentdr) received. — ^The long ships
are repaired by Caesar. — The general was rebuilding the old
(vdt6r«s) ships which were in the harbour. — ^We shall re-
build the old waUs.
(205.) Observe the formation of the following
words :
Acd[p«r« (to mxK^» = id (^)-fc«p«r« {to take).
Sa8d^»6r6 (to undertake, = gab (u9u2er)+cftpdri6«
B^nc«]«(to7«6«i2i),=r»+f9o6r*(tomai«a^atn). i
^^ In the compoaition of veibi with prepoflitioiui, H frequen^ passes
into i, as in these examples.
* 1tt joins words or sentences which sre considered independent sad
ef equal importance with eachother; qadj^M a word sr ssnteftos c^bse*
ly to another, as an appendage to it
Digitized by dOOQ IC
§ 18.
DEPONENT VERBS.
LESSON XXXV*
Dqxment Verbs.
(206.) Deponent verbs are such as have the joojf-
ive form, but an active meaning ; e. g.^ hortdr, /ea>
kort (not / am exhorted).
(207.) The forms of deponents in the tenses for
incomplete action of the indicative mood are precisely
the same as those of passive verbs (Lessons XII.,
XIII.) ; we therefore need only give the^r^^ persons.
(208.) DBFOWENT FORMS.
tNDlCATnrs*
istconj.
3dcoi -
3dcoi
hortSr, / cEftoit.
f&teOr, Ja^es*.
g£qa6r, JfoUotD.
meCidr,/
hortibir, I wot exkortlm^. JbormOr, Iwmt
fftttbftr, J too* amf easing. f&tCWr, ImUeonf—,
sequlbftr, I ibme fattemnng. aSqiiir, IwiUfiOom,
•, Iwmt mea$uring.\BaetikP, Iwmmmtwn,
flMMWw. metiSbftr,
iNrnnTivs.
1. hort4W,
toeackort.
2.ft«rt,
to iionfm*
r tW' In the vocabnlarief deponent verbs are always given by fly fi
JinUwe forms. Observe Aat the ending -»ri shows mat thei v«* is c
the Ist conj.; -6ri, the 2d; -i, the 3dj -iri, flie 4th.]
tii-
of
EXERCISE.
(209.) Vocabulary.
[Transitive deponents govern the aocnsathre, unless it is otherwise
mentioned in the vocabularies.]
To embrace, amplect-i.
To gain, to possess owls setfcf, p6t-
iri (with gen. or abL ; general-
ly gen. in Cas.).
To endtanour, con-aif .
TofoOoto, s6qa-i.
AZiOtyS, tanqoam (adv.).
To strive after, pursue, persSqa-I
(per + s6qni, tsfoOow through).
Glory, gl6ri«, «.
AU, tSttts, i, nm (194, B., 1).
Bravery, virtue, virtfis, (virtflt) Is (£).
Long, difi (adv.).
SvfhfauU, peccfttttm, i.
Digitized by
Google
84 DEPONBNT VERBS.
(210.) Example.
The Hdvetians endeavour to Helv6tai p6r prdyinci&m no«-
pass (= to make way) tr&mltdrf&cdr6c6nantur.
through our province.
Rule of Syntax, — ^The infinitive is used in Latin (as in
English) to complete the imperfect ideas expressed by
certain verbs ; e. g,, I toish, I can, I hasten, I endeavour^
&c., as f &c6r6 in the above example.*
(211.) Translate into English.
P&tdr filitim et fiU&m amplectltur. — Impdr&tdr mlfit^s di& hor-
tftbfttiir.— Dumndrix totitis (194, R. 1) Galliae p6tatiir.— Peccft-
t& me& £&tdb5r. — ^Prindp^s totitis Gallias pdtiri cdnftbanttir. —
Kdm&ni per Biltanniam Itdr f&cdrd cdnantiir. — Gldri& virtutdm
tanqu&m umtNr& s^qidttu*. — Magnds hdminSs virtatd (55) mdti-
miir, non fortunS. — Mifit@s semper glori&m pers^qumittir. — ?
Mifites ducdm Hbentdr s^quSbanttir.
(212.) Translate into Latin.
The father will embrace (his) sons and daughters. — ^The chiefs
possess themselves of all the province. — Do you confess (135,
II.) your fault? — ^The Helvetianis were endeavouring to pass
through Gaul. — Glory will follow bravery as a shadow. — ^We
were exhorting the soldiers yesterday. — ^We shall gladly follow
CsBsar. — They are rapidly making their way through our prov-
ince. — ^You measure men by (their) fortune, not by (their)
bravery. — ^The chiefs will endeavour to lead the army across the
Khine (113, II., a). — Generals always strive after glory. — Are
you exhorting (135, II.) your son ? — The Romans always fol-
lowed glory.
* Observe carefoUy tbat a purpose is never expressed by the simple
Infinitiye in LatizL It would not be Latin to say discSrS vSnit^ he comes
toleam.
Digitized by
Google
§ 19.
ADVERBS.
Digitized by
Google
86 ADVERBS.
Prfidenf , prudent I Pruden-Mr, prudently,
BipienB, wise. \ 6ipien-t6r, wisely.
Rem, And ax, boldf makef andae-Mr, boldly.
3. Some are derived from nouns by adding ttls or tim to tlie stem
by meam of a coxmectittf vowel , e. g», caA-W6A,from heaven ; fond-
1t6M,from the ground, totally ; ge6g-9L-tSm, byjlocks, Ac
(216.) Cases of adjectives, especially in the neuter
gender, are often used as adverbs ; e. g.^ dulce, stoeet^
ly; primtlm, jftr5< ; falso, /a&eZy, &c.
BXSROISE.
(217.) Vocabulary.
Wdl, bdnd, derived irregnlariy from
bttZkfis, good.
Bravely, fortitftr, derived regolariy
{215, 2, a) from fortits, brave.
Sharply, spiritedly, acritdr, derived
regularly from icdr (acr-is), sharp.
SwifUy, c6l6r!fe6r, derived regularly
fxoax cdldr, swift.
Happily, beatd, derived regnlariy
(215, 1) from belt&i, happy.
Honestly, hSnestS, derived regularly
from honeitfta, honest.
Almost, f «i«.
Rightly, reoie, detfred regolariy
from reotAa, rifJU.
Impiously, impie, derived regolariy
from impiila, impious,
Injlocks, grSgfttitm.
To labour, lxb6rtrd.
To blame, to accuse, Jind fault with,
incuiard.
Socrates, SdcrStSs, (Socrttt) is.
Not even, neqnldem (always separa-
ted by one or more wdrds).
Hdnestd «t reet« T!?6r6 Mt
b6nd et be&t* Tirftrft.
(218.) Ezampks.
(a) Th Ute JkmeiUy And
rightly is to live well and
happily.
Rule of Position. — The adverb is generally' [daced htfart the
word which it qualifies.
(() Almost all men love themr I Omnds f 6r 6 hdmXiiM sdsd diH-
selves. I gont.
F6r6 18 generally placed between the adjective and noun,
(o) He does not praise even I Ne Sdcrfttdmquld^mlaud&t
Socrates. \
(219.) Translate into English.
Hostds nobisciim (125, II., b) aciltdr pugnftbant. — ^£qm in
&gri8 c61ei1t6r currebant. — ^Bdn^ Tiyftrd est befttd Tivdrd.-«-Cer-
vi grfigfttim sempdr currant. — Sempdr s&piens rect© tmt. — ^Dia
Digitized by
Google
ADVERBS. 87
et acrltSr miHtes pugn&bant. — Omnes f^rd hdn^Ss impie vivunt.
^-OmnSs f(Bre &y38 blsln anno migrant. — ^N6 Cicdrdndm qniddm
laudabit. — ^N3 hoc qiddSm (not even with this) delectftbittir.
(220.) Translate into Latin.
The JEdnans wdre fighting long and [rravely.-^^aB8flr sharply
accuses the Helvetians. — ^Horses and stags run swiftly. — ^The
fanners were labouring long in the fields. — ^Almost all men love
tfaeir (own) children. — Csesar led almost all the Germans across
the Rhine (113, II., a). — I waited for you long. — The bad do
not Mve happily.— To Kve happily is to live rightly.— You will
not be delighted even with this. — ^Not even this will delight (my)
father. — Not oten C«esar will be praised. — ^Afanott all birds fly in
flocks. — They do not praise even Virgil. — ^Almost all wise (men)
live happily.;— Almost all men strive-after glory. — To live pru-
dently is to live happily. — ^The commander will blame the
lieutenant sharply.
Digitized by
Google
§ 20.
PREPOSITIONS. (XXXVII.— xxxvni.)
LESSON XXXVII.
Prepositions.
[This lectkn (981) need not be learned by heart in the fint ooone, baft.
■honld be constantly referred to whenerer examples occur.]
(221.) The following prepositions govern the cu:--
cusative case :
Id, to.
Xpttd, at.
Ant 6, before (of time and place).
AdversiiSi adversiim, agaifut.
Cis, citri, 'on this aide.
Circa and circi&m, around, eibout.
Circitfir, eUnnU, towards (indefi-
nitely of time Qt number).
Contri, againtt,
Brgft, towards.
Extra, beyond, without.
Infra, beneath, bdow (the contraiy
of s flora).
Inter, between, among.
Intri, within (the contrary of ex-
tra).
Jaxti, near to, beside.
5b, on account of.
Pdnds, in the power cf.
P6r, through.
P6n6, behind.
Post, <^i(er (both of time andapaoe).
PrsBtdr, b(»ide.
Pr6p6, near.
Proptdr, near, on account cf.
Sdcandflm, ofter, in ixecordance
with.
Sflprs, above.
Trans, on the other side.
Versiis (is pat after its noon), <a-
wards a place.
Ultra, beyond.
(222.) The following govern the ablative case :
Pr8B, before, owing to.
Pr6, ba ore, for.
Sin 6, without.
T 6 nfl s (is pat after its noon), €ufar
as, up to, .
A, ah, from, by.
Clam, without the knowledge cf.
C6r&m, in the presence cf.
Cdm, with.
Be, down from, concerning.
£, ex (d before consonants only,
ex before both consonants and
vowels), out of, from.
The following lines contain the prepositions governing the abUtiTe, and
can be readily learned by heart :
Absqaft, a, &b, abs, and de,
C6rftm, clam, cflm, ex, and €,
Tfoiis, sln6, prd, and pne.
(223.) The following govern the accusative or
ablative :
1. In, (a) with the aeeus., (1) into, on, to (to the question whither ?) (2)
against, {b) With the abloHve, ia, aa {to the qaeuiaxm where t)
a. Sftb, (a) with the aceus,, (1) nnder (to the qaestion whither?) <S) aboat
Digitized by
Google
PREPOSITIONS.
89
«N* towazdfl (indefinitely of time), (b) WiA Ote dUatwe, under (to the
qoestion where 7)
3. 6 & p 6 r, (a) with the acau,, above, over, {b) With the ciblaiwet npon,
oanceming.
4. Subtftr, under, beneath (but Httle lued).
EXERCISE.
(224.) Vocabulary.
The Oaronne (river), Chtaromni, e.
An Aquitanian, 4^qaitAntbi, i.
Aquitania, Aq[iiitani&, e.
The Leman, or Geneva (lake), U-
mannofl, I.
Jwra (moontain), JurS, m (m. 25, a).
To extend or carry, perddcdrS (p6r
+dtto6r6).
State, (nvit&B, (cnvitAt) !■ (£).
Moyal power (kingdom), regnflm, L
Hi»tory,l3iaMn§,m,
Fable, filbdli, ».
TV bound (limit), contiEneriS (oon+t6-
nerfi).
Part or «i(2e, pars, (part) is (£).
On one su2e, nnft ex partd.
The Rhone (river), BhSdinibi, L
To i»ru2e; dividdrd.
Lake, liciis, As (m.), (112, B. 1).
To remain, minerd.
GaDos ftb Aqnitftms G&rum-
n& flamdn dividit
(225.) Examples.
(a) Theriver Garonne sepa-
rates the Oatds from the
Aquitanians,
Rule of Syntax, — ^Two nouns expressing the same person
or thing take the same case, and are said to be in appo-
sition with each other ; e. g., in the above example, G &-
rumn& flumSn.
(5) Casar hastens into OauL
(c) There was altogether in
Gaul one legion.
Cses^ln Galli&m contendlt.
£r&t omninft In Gallia Idgid
un&.
(226.) Translate into English.
Cas&r ft l&cfi ftd montftm, miirdm perdQdt. — ^Apiid* H^rddd-
tfim, p&trdm histdrisB, sunt multae filbulsB. — C»s&r ft l&cQ Ld-
mannd ftd mont6m Jnrftm, mtkriim perdudt. — Mdrc&tor in urbd
mftndt. — ^Pndii In ddmd sunt. — ^Princeps regniim In civlt&td oc-
ciipftt. — ConstU exerdtiim in finds Sdqnftn^riim ducit — Hel-
v«tu contlnenttir flnft ex part6 (125, IV., N4) fltlmind Rhdno;
altdrft ex parts mont6 Jflrft, tertift ex partd IftcQ Ldmannd 6t
flamind Khddftnd.
• Apud is used with the names of autbora (instead of in, with the name
of tfaeur woriu) ; e. g., ipftd CIc6r6n«m Ifigimils, we read %n Ctcero.
H2
Digitized by
Google
M PRKP08ITI0N».
(327.) Translais into Latin*
Caesar was extending walls and ditches (fossasque) from thd
river to the camp. — ^The soldiers remain in the camp. — Caesar
will seize the royal power in tlM •Cate.«*-The met Rhine sep-
arates the Ganls from the Q^naans. — Caesar hastens into Italy
and levies (conscribdr^) ^'^e legioiffi. — The deserters remain in
the town. — ^The general wifl lea^t&e soldiers into Italy. — ^Aqni-
tania is bounded on ode side by, the river G^snimna ; on another
side by mountains; on the third side by the river Rhoue. —
Tou win find (invenies) many fine (praeclftrft) precepts
in (apud) Cicero. — ^You will find many fables in Herodotus, the
fbther of histoiy.
LESSON xxxvm.
Prepontions in Composition.
(228.) Most of the prepoditlons given in Lesson
XXXVII. are used as prefixes in composition with
verbs, and modify their signification; c. ^., pon^rd,
to place; post-ponere, to place after.
(229.) The following prepositions are never used
alone, but always as prefixes in composition :
1. Amb, round, about (firom ambo, boik) ; ambird (fima toib^Hr^f to
go round), to toalk round, to canveuffor votet.
% Co]],to£'e^Aer(aTariatkmofoaiii,«M^);oon>Jtingpdrd(eott+jtiii*
g6rd), to join togeth&r, to unki*
3. niordif,<iMi9u2er(avariatioa(if 4d>.^tMii)| dii«otd6ra(dIs+€«.
ddrd, to give ptaet Mvnder), to itpart.
In, with a^Jeottrfes, maani notf ia-dootlif, unhattnod; wltii
verbi» meana in, intot *< gt ir*ri&inp<(r<( ^a+rumpdrd), to
burftinU).
4. Ae, back, again ; r^-Hc^ird (rH-f iodrd, to mak$ again), to r^
5. Be, atide; s«-duc4r« (se+duo^rft, to lead Oitroff), to eeduee.
Digitized by
Google
PKEPOSITIONS. 91
Cihort, c5horf , (cohort) !i (£)
To station, oolldc&r6 (con+l5cir«).
To distribute, distribu«r« (dk+triE-
budrd).
Africa, AfUci, 9.
Ewropt, Enrdpi, e.
Horstmani ^a6s, (dqait) it (m.).
EXEECISE.
(230.) Vocabulary.
A^ain (ady.), roniui.
7V7/^n to ff ether, oo^jimgdrfi.
TV? ^Mr«< »i»c/, irnimpdr4.
TV ^fse in^ ^ <;d9n^, In c^trft ir-
rompdrd.
ikfedtfemmean, Mdditerrftiieib, I,
dm.
To separate, f Sptrard (fld+pitr&r6).
(231.) Translate into English.
Consfil rcirsfis Iftgidnes In I^bernft rSdftdt. — ^Ldgfttiis qniiiqud
efthmrtet cam exerdta conjnngltt. — ^Milltflt oittnds In oppidAm
irmmpant. — M&rd Mdditerrflnei&m AMc&ra ftb Eturdpft sdp&r&t.
— ^Belg^ 8d oiim Germftoiii conjungdbant. — ^Imp6r&tdr exercMm
In hibenus colldc&t. — Germftni dqidt^s In castas (223, 1, a)
irrompdrd conanttlr. — Galb& exercitiim In Idbernls coHftcftt,
]i&gi6ne8qu6 In cMt&tes distilbidt.
(232.) Translate into Latin.
Caesar will lead the cohorts back again into winter-qnarters.
— ^An the Germans were barsting into the camp. — The Belgi-
ans win unite themselves with Cssar. — The brave soldiers were
tiying to burst into the town. — ^The illustrious general was sta-
tioning the soldiers in winter-quarters. — ^The legions are distrib-
uted among (In, wiik accus.) the states. — ^The legions are led
back mto winter-quarters. — ^The Mediterranean Sea separates
Spain (Hispftni&) from Africa. — CaBsar will join all the horsemen
with the army.
Digitized by
Google
§ 21.
ANALYSIS OF TENSE-FORMATIONS. (XXXIX
— XLI.)
Digitized by
Google
ANALT8IS OF TBNSE-FOKMJ^|^iqU ' ] ,' ,,X^ *'
(235.)
TABLE.
Teoae-
Stem.
Connect.
VoweL
Peraon-
Endings.
FOBUS COMPLKTX. 11
1.
2.
3.
4. II
1.
8zn-
a.
O.
fano (ama-o).
m5n6-o.
rfigK).
audl-o.
8.
ftm&4.
mong-8.
rt^.
audI-8.
2.
mda-
e.
t
fim&t
mon6-t
rtg-i-L
au<U-t
3.
reg.
t
ftma-ixius.
mdnd-miis.
r6g-I-mttfl.
audl-mlLB.
tis.
fim&-tia.
m5n6-ti[s.
r6g-i-ti[8.
audl-Os.
4.
aud^
i(u).
nt
fimftriit
m5n6*nt.
r6g-u-nt
audl-Q-nt
J2em. ObservB that the vowels are long before the perBon-endings In
let, 2d, and 4th oo^jngations, except where they come before o or
t. In those before o, the general nue (24, 1] prevldlB ; and it is also
an invariable rale, in Latin, that no vowel %n ajinal syllable can be
long before t.
(236.) EXERCISE.
[The pupil shonld hereafter analyze the tense-forms, as they occur, some-
what as foUows :]
Am as: verb-stem t am-; pres, tense-stem, &m-; connecting
vowel, b; 2dpers. ending, s.
MdnSmiis: verb-stem, mon-; pres. tense-stem, m5n-; ctyr^
necting vowel, e; Istplur. ending, mfis.
K^gitls: verh-stem, rSg- ; jpres. tense-stem, r6g-; connect-
ing vowd, i ; 2d plur, ending, tis.
Audlunt: verh-stem, aud-; pres» tense-stem, aud-; con^
necdng vowels, i and u; Zdplur. ending, nt.
In like manner, analyze
Festin&s, h&b^t, viddtls, conv5c5,
y^^aamos, pr5hibent, \^§X, h&b€tis,
Vdc&tSs, posdmus, dormlmus, munitrnt,
festin&tito,
pngnftt,
laudant,
Rdvdcfint, Ydidmit, auditis, ambiil&miis, vnlndrftmtlfl.
LESSON XL.
Analysis of Tense-FormationSy continued.
Active.
(237.) IMPERFECT TENSE.
(a) Person-endingSy m, s, t, mus, tis, nt.
(b) The tense'Stenif
(1.) In Ist conj. adds ftb to the verb-stem ; e. g., ftm-&b.
(2.) In 2d conj. " 6b ♦• c. ^., m5n-6b.
(3.) In 3d conj. ♦• fib •♦ «. ^., r6g-6b.
(4.) In 4th conj. •* I6b •• «. ^., aud-lfib.
Digitized by
Google
M
AN ALTttDI OF TBVSl-rOKMATXOKit
(c) The connecting vowel a b used to join the tense-
stems and person-endings ; e. g,^ d.mab-d.«m.
n
8tMD.
Con.
Vow.
Penon-
II
roBKS coifPi.KTS. II
L
^
a
4.
m.
im«bfrm.
mta^bfrm.
regibim
andlMA-m.
L
Im-ib-
■.
Smibfr«.
mta«MrC
rtgiMrC
audMbM.
2.
m&n-6V
t
ImaMrt
inta«b4-t
r6g6bft<
«aai6b6rt
a
r«ff-«b.
sudI6b-
nrai.
rtg«bft-m&i.
4.
tifl.
ftmflblrtta.
in6n6bft-tls.
r«g6bft-tls.
andl6ba-tls.
L^==
imib&4it Imtetbimt.
T«g6b&4lt
FUTURE TEHSE.
(238.) I. We treat the 1st and 2d conjugations first.
In these,
{a) The person-mendings are, o, s, t, mfis, tis, nt.
(fr) The tense-s^emSf precisely like the imperf. in
the same conjugations,
(1.) In l8t coi\|., add &b to the Torb-stem ; <. ^., &m4lb.
(2.) In 2d conj., " eb " €. ^„ mdn-eb.
(c) The connecting vowel i is used to join the ten^e-
stems and person-endings; e. ^., &niab-i4; moneb-
i-t. But in the third person plural, u is used instead
of i; e. g.9 amab-u-nt
Eem. In (be 1ft penon the ooonectixig vowel li dropj^ed (ai in S34,
«,&.!); (iuu, imab-o (not imib^-o).
(239.)
TABLE
•
TmmMImb.
^^srsi^
Endiiigt.
yoam ooMPZ.aTB. ||
1.
8.
im-ib.
i
o.
)ina«.
Ilia.
nt.
1.
ftmahK).
imabi.8.
taoMt
«m«Hin48.
Am&bi-tib.
imftbdnt
2.
mdndb-o.
mdnftbi-t.
m6ndU-mfif.
mdndU-tis.
(240.) IL The 3d and 4th conjugations preset some
irregularity in the future.
(a) The;>er^<m-e»rff7ig^i,are, m, s, t,mus, tis, nt
(b) The tense-stem^
(1) In the 3d conj., is the simple ¥erb*8ten); e.g^ rftg.
(9) In the 4th conj., it adds i to the verb-item ; #. ^«, an d -L
Digitized by
Google
AMALTBXB OF TIWIE-FOEIIATIOlffl.
M
(c) The c<^mecting vowel e is used to join the
tense-stem and person-endings; r^g-e-miiSy aud-i«-
e-mus. But in thej^r^^ person a is substituted for e
in both conjugations; e. g., r^g-E-m, aud-i-ft-m,
not reg-e-m, audi-e-m. •
(241.) TABLE.
Tense-stem."
"Son^TVowdT
Pen/Eading.:
rOBMS COVPLXTX. II
««r
a.
10.
3.
rig&'in.
4.
ai]aill.m.
r*-
r6g#-(i.
•ucB«-0.
h
rtge-t.
Bxim-t,
«»
<»««•
r6g«.mfifc
MdiA-mJii.
Itis.
r6gfi.t&.
audifi-tis.
-
Int.
rtgre-nt
audifi-nt
(242.) (a) KXAMFLSS.
A m ab & tl 8 : verh'.stem, ft m - ; tense-stem, ft m ftb- ; imperf. con .
vowel, a; ^ pint. ending, -tls.
Amftbltit: «er6-5tem, ftm-; tense-stem, ftmftb-;yu^ co».
«(>U7€2, X ; 2d plur, ending, ^ tl 8.
Aadidmft8: verlHstem, and-; fut. tense-stem, audi-; con-'
necting vowel, e; Ist plvr. ending, -mii8.
r^* The pnpU should keep up the habit of finding any tense-fbrm
which he may need to use, hv putting together 1^ pxpper pvlaii e,gn
■tem, ending, Ac., rather than by recurring to the paradigms.]
(fr) Analyze the following :
Landftbftm, laudftbd, laudftbitfe,
Ddcdbfimtia, mmiiebftmtts, ISgftm,
Ocddebant, dormiebfttis, scribdmtts,
Donniftm, aadXdt, ddcdbunt,
^* &;c. dec.
LESSON XLI.
Analysis of Tense-Fonnations, continued.
PASSIVE VOICE.
(243.) The passive-endings are,
Sing. Ist person, r ; 2d person, ris or r6; 3d person, tttr.
Plnr. 1st person, mdr; 2d person, mini; 3d person, ntiir.
(244.) These endings are affixed to the tense-stems,
formed as hi the active voice, and with the same con*
Digitized by
Google
96
ANALTSia OF TBNSE-FOEMATIOIItl.
necting vowels. Only the following apparent irrego-
larities are to be noticed.
(a) In the Ist pen. pres. indio. the ending r is added to the
full present active form; 6.^., &mo, &mo-r; ddceo, ddceo-r,
&;c.
(b) In the 3d conj., 2d pers. sing., pres., e is used for con-
necting vowel instead oft; e. g., rdg-d-ris, rSg-ft-rd, in-
stead of rdg-i-ris, 6cc,
(c) In the 1st and 2d oonj., future, 2d pers. sing., e is used
for connecting vowel instead of t ; e,g,, mdneb-ft-ris, &m&b-
d-ris, instead of llmab-i-rlt, mdndb-i-ris.
(245). EXERCISE.
Examples. — Ddcentiir: verb-stem, ddc-; pres, tense-stem^
d 6 c - ; connecting vowel, e ; 3d plur. pass, ending, - n 1 1& r.
Amftbamiir: verb-stem,, am-; imperf, tense-stem, &m&b-;
imperf. conn, vowel, a; Int plttr, pass, ending, -mdr.
- Audientur: verb-stem, And-;fut, tense-stem, audi-;^!^.
conn, vowel, e; 3dplur.pass, ending, -ntiir.
ItSgdr: verb-stem, r6g-; pres, act, 1st pers*, rego-; Isfc
pers, pass, ending, -r.
(246.) Analyze
R6g6bamiir, occid^mtir, l8udantiir«
Ddcebimiir, audiSmlni, videblmiir,
Timebfins, d6c6b«r!s, ddcebuntOr,
Ddceb&miid, &m&tiir, rftg^tiir,
^. &4i. 6CQ.
Digitized by
Google
PART 1 L
PULLER EXfflBITION OP THE PORMS OP WORDS.
Digitized by
Google
Digitized by
Google
Digitized by
Google
100 ADDITIONAL RULES OF aUANTITY.
(251.) o final is common ; but long in dat. and aU. cases of
nouns and adjs. used as adverbs (c. g., falsd^
^•)* ®S^' dud, dct5, BTe short,'
(252.) u final is always long ; e. g.y d i a.
(B) FmoI C0»MIMDll#.
(253.) An final syllables ending in a consonant (except «) are
short.
RuUtfor ufinoL
(254.) Final fts, 6 s, 6 s, are generally 2(m^ ; e. g.<, am&s«
doc 6 s, equos.
Rem. 1. d f if short (1) in nouns whidi have sbort pennlt in the gen. ;
e.^.,mn6f (mlllt-XB).
2. 6 f is <Aor< in oomp 6 s, imp 5 8.
(255.) Final Is and iis are generally short; e. ^., reg-Is,
domin-us.
Bern, I, if is long (1) in dat and abL ploral of nouns ; (3) in 3d pex^
son sing, of reibs of 4th coi\JQgation ; (3) ocnopoands of v is ; e. ^.»
mavis, qaamvis, dx.
2. As is long (1) in noons of 3d decL which have t long in t;ha^4p9nTilt
of gen.; e.^., virtfls (fltis), palfls (udls); (S) in gen. siag^ and
N., A., V. plnr. of 4(h declension.
(2.) Derivation and CBmposition*
(256.) Derivative and coinpound words generally retdn the
quantity of the primitive and simple words; e. g,, &mo,
Amicus; pdno, imp6no.
(3.) Increase,
[A noon is said to increase when it has more syUahles in die gen.
than in the nom. {e.g,, mil-fis, mH-it-is ; here it is the increase);
a verb, when it has more syUahles than the 2d pers. sing, indic
{e.g., im-as, im-&t4s ; here it is the increase.]
(257.) In the increase of nouns, a and o are generally long ;
«» t» w, y, short.
(258.) In the increase of verbs, a, e, and o are generally
long ; I, «, short.
(4.) Penults.
(259.) Eveiy perfect tense of two syllables has flie first long
(as viob[), except bibi, fXdi, tiili, d6di, st6ti, and soldi.
I.) Penults of adjectives, (1) Id us, icus, short; (2)
Digitized by
Google
ADDITIONAL RULES OP aUANTITY. 101
Inns, doubtful (often ^g); (3) His and bills, derived from
verhs^ short ; from rumns^ long.
[All exceptions to. the above rales that are not stated wHl be marked
in the vocabularies.]
(261.) EXERCISE ON QUANTITIES.
[Give the quantity of the unmarked syllables of the following wordi,
with the rule for each.]
1. Final Vowels*
Ipse, agmiiie, die, rdgdre, rfige, ddcSbfire, re, mdve, mdvdre, b6ne (adv.,
fiom bSnus), CaesSre, opt!me (adv., from optlmiis), me, ddmini, vigllia, audi,
advento, ire, hi, oonsilio, consiile, de, tertia, vigiliae, contra, rdga, mtaeo,
tta, firactn, Smo.
2. Final Consonants.
Obsides, bdnas, vigilias, Smat, miles (miKtis), miHtes, r5gftv6ras, has,
bfinnm, lampas (lamp&dis), pedes (pdditis), pddites, iilas, adventas (gen.),
regis, simnl, andis, linter, aadltis, vigUiis, cftpat^ virtus (virtutis), ddmXnis,
mSnos, r3g¥tur, rSgitis, mnnis, mdnivdras.
3. Increase.
Amatis, mllitis, andiris, obsidem, mdnemns, monebatis, itineris, rdgabas,
m5nebamiir, audimos, mdnebimini, vdlnptatis, sermonis, mormore, pdditei^
damorem, milites, vnltorem, Smatis, mdnebatis, mdnetote, audite, Idgimns,
pedem, sfigetis (from sSges).
4. Penults.
Mftlddjcos, mXrificns, bdndficns, ftcilis (from fikno), padrilis (from jmer),
imahilis (from imo), servilis (from servos).
Digitized by
Google
§2.
TENSES OF VERBS FOR COMPLETED AC-
TION.— PARTIAL STATEMENT, (XLIILr—
XL VI.)
LESSON XLIIL
nnse FermsfcT Compkted Action. — Indicative.
(262.) In Part L we made use only of those tenses
of the verb which express action as continuing or
incompktCj viz., the present, imperfect, and future.
There are three tenses also for completed action, viz.,
perfect {I have u;nWe7i), pluperfect (I had written), fu-
ture perfect (/ shall have written). The stem for all
these is the same.
(263.) The endings for these three tenses are,
riAHLAL, j|
Perfect.
Pluperf".
Fut. Peri:
i.
drftm.
6r«.
Sd.
is&
drfts.
6rfs.
ad.
lb
6rtt.
6rft
drftmus.
Siimns.
Sd.
Sratls.
entis.
C6raiH,or
6nmt
drint.
(264.) By adding these endings to the perfect-stem
fu' of the verb ess^, to be, we obtain the forms per-
fect (I have been), pluperfect (I had been), future per-
fect {I shall have been).
Teme-Stem.
Perfect.
Plaperfect.
Future Perfect
/'i-
«ram.
6rd.
*
isti.
erftg.
firis.
Fu.
. it.
drftt
6rit
SimHa.
dramiis.
firfmiif.
istis.
6r&t!s.
«r!t^.
I, dnrnt, or Sre.
firant.
erint
(265.) Double use of the Perfect. — It must be carefully ob-
served that the Latin perfect has two uses, one answering to
the English perfect, and the other to the Engtish imperfect.
Digitized by
Google
TSNgU FOB COMFLBTBO ACmOU* 108
Thns, Jul ""leans not only / Aooe (een, but / «>a#. We call
the former che perfect j7re«€i»<; the latter the perfoei aariat,^
which expresses mom^ntory action in past imt i e. g^ Qrautu
wf duef of the embassy — Crassils prmceps togitidois fuit:
SXBEOISE.
(266.) Vocabulary.
Pr€dtei ItiOMy (land) U (Q.
After^ post (prep, ace,),
Befortt aaf (pMp. aec).
BsoautSivaaijaminU^
How long ? qoamdiA (adv.).
Afterward, poatei.
Virtwnu, prSbfla, ft, nm.
Si in vita senipdr prdM f n^rl-
mus, dti&m post mort&m
beat! 6 rim As.
Mifites Romftni pislus mulfis
interfudrunt.
To he ever, to preside over, to com-
mand, pnaeaai (pnH-aaae, to be
IiqMs).
To he wanting, dea a a< (dft | e aa fi,
to he from).
To he in, to be present at, interesad
(inter+eas^, to be among).
Sick, mger, gra, gram (77, a).
(267.) Examples.
(a) ffwe shall have been al-
ways virtuous in life, after
death also we shall be
happy.
(5) The Roman soldiers
were present at many hat-
ties.
Rule of Synlax.--^he compounds of est^ with the prepo-
sitioDs p r », i n t • r, o b, p r o, d 6, take the dathe case*
(268.) Translate into English.
Th^mistddds vir roagntUi ^ diras fEdt.--CQr bM In schdlft
noD fuisti ? — Quid, cum patre in horto fui.-'-Quanidia in urb6
fuistis ? — Sex dies (191, c). — ^Antd bellCim in urbd fuerftmtif.
— Crassns l^gftttis (225, a) copm Romanoriim praefudrftt. —
Nunqu&m dedrit ^b! laus homiotim, si semp^ prdbtis fuetls.
— iEge>n6 {135\ II., a) fuis'ti h«rl ?— Antfi Ciceronis «tftt6m
orat^ds muM 6t cl&ri fuerant, n^ posteft dftfuerant» — Csesftr
prs^s radOs interfult.
(269). Translate into Latin.
pteo^eet the double use of the perfect {present and aoristt S«5).]
Divitiacus commanded (pr » f u i t) the forces of the ^duans.
* The aorist uae of the perfbet ia wore oa wn we i» lAti» tbatt the
nt.
Digitized by
Google
104 TENSES FOB COMPLETED ACTION.
— ^If yon shall have been always Tirtnous in life, after deatii
also you shall be happy. — If we are always virtuous, the praise
1^ men shall never be wanting to us. — ^We were not in school
yesterday, because we had been in the garden with (our) fa-
ther. — Had you heen (136, II., a) in our garden ? — Have you
been sick ? — How long have you been in the city ? Four
days (191, c). — The lieutenant had been in the city before the
war. — ^Before the age of Cassar there had been many and
great generals ; nor were they wanting afterward. — Cssar and
the Koman soldiers were present at many batdes.
LESSON XLIV.
Tenses of Verbs for Completed Action^ continued.
(270.) The tense-stem of the perfect tense is form-
ed in most verbs as follows :
(1) In 1st conj. by adding &v to the verb-stem ; «. ^., &m-&v.
(2) In 2d conj. ** ft ** e.g., mdn-ti.
(4) In 4th conj. ** iv •* e.^., aud-iv
[The third co^jvgation \m treated in the next lesBon.]
(271.) By adding the perfect-endings (263) to thb
tense-stems formed (as in 270), we obtain the follow-
ing perfect-tense forms of §.mare, <o love ; moner^
to advise; audird, to liear.*
PBP.-8TEMS.
/, thou, he, we, ye, they,
>% isti, It, tmfis, UtiB, dnmtyor )
n
Isrconi
2d conj.
4thcoQJ.
ftmav-
xndntl-
aadiv-
hnve loved,
heme advised,
have heard.
* In the first, second, and foorth conjugation8,it is obvioas that the per-
fect is made n^ of the cnide-form of the verb and/«i; e. g^ ama-fai=7
imtvi; mond-foi = monui ; aadi-fai=aadiyL
Digitized by
Google
PERFECT TENSE.
EXERCISE.
106
(272.) Vocabulary.
PreceptOTi pnBceptdr, (pneceptdr) Hi
(n,.).
TVibunCf tnbdnnfl, i (m.).
Sister, Bdr6r, (sdrdr) Xa (£).
DUgrtice, ignOmlnifi, 8b (£).
PUeuantf jilcimdag, fl, Han,
AU night, p«r tOt«m nocMm.
DUigetUly, dlligentdr (215, 2, b).
From every side, ondiqafi (adv.)*
To excite, ezicitftrfi.
Digitized by
Google
IM PSKPSCT TMHM.
towers of Oaul. — The coviing of Caesar terrified llie iEduans
and Hebetians. — I have often walked in Csssar's garden, on-
the-other-side-of the Tiber (trans Tibgdm).
LESSON XLV.
Tenses for Compkted Action^ continued. — Perfect
TensCf Third Conjugation.
(276.) The perfect teuse-stem of most verbs of the
third conjugation is formed by adding s to the verb-
stem; e.g.f
Porfect^tent.
r«g-€p», taruU, r*g-s = re»-
scrib-6rd, to write, scrib-s =; sciq)»-
l{kd-^r6, to play y tild-s s: lus-
(277.) Rvlea of Euphony.
(!) A c-sound before s forms X ; dac-8 = dux; rdg-s =
rex.
Rem. C| g, hr go, qn, are claiied among k-aonnds. t alao (generally)
before s forma x; ▼iy*8:svix.
(2) b before s is changed into p ; e.^^., ac rib- s^c scrips;
U&b'-s = nup8.
(3) A t-sound is (generally) dropped before s; Itld-8=Itt8;
claud-s=claus.
Rem, t and d are Hie t-sonada.
(278.) By adding the perfect-endings (263) to the
stems of reg-er6, scrib-€r§, lud-§rd, we obtain
the perfect tense-forms (have rukd^ have written, have^
played}.
1 PEBFKCT-8TBM«.
BNTONOS.
(r6g-i=) rex-
•crib-as) scripa-
1 (lftd-8=) laa- '^
/, ihott, he, we, ye, ikey,
>h isti, it; imds, istis, eront^or)
have ruled,
have written.
hm^fU^ed.
Digitized by
Google
PBBFBCT TEN»B. lOT
EXCRCISE.
(279.) Yocabulary.
Digitized by
Google
108
PLUPERFECT AND FUTURE PERFECT.
— Orgetorix led-together to the trial all his household and all
(his) dependents. — ^Why have you drawn (your) sword ? — Why
have you not written to (your) fiither ? — ^The ^duans levied
many soldiers. — We have divided the nature of man into soul
and body.
LESSON XL VI.
Tenses for Completed Action^ continued. — Pluperfect
and Future Perfect Tenses.
(283.) (a) The pluperfect tense simply adds to the perfect
tense-stem the imperfect of esse {to be); viz., dr&m,
^rfts, 6cc,
(b) The future perfect simj^ adds to the perfect tense-stem
the future of esse; viz., ^r6, dris, 6cc. ; but in 3d plural it
changes u into i; viz., 6rint, instead of drnnt.
(284.) Thus, from am-are, m5n-er€, reg-6r€
aud-ir^, we have,
PBF.-STBM.
PLUPSIirXCT-JENDINa.
1. fcnav-
2. mdnd-
3. rex-
4. aadlv-
/, thou, he, we, ye, they,
I drSm, erag, 6m, erftmiii, IkniXa, 6rant,i
hadhved.
hadadvised,
hadrttled.
had heard.
1. «mSv-
2. monu-
3. rex-
4. aodiT-
I 6t6, &b, Mt, ^ftaaUM, 6iltiDi, «rint, i
shaU have loved.
9haU have ruled.
EXERCISE.
(285.) Vocabulary.
V^/Ues, angastis, arum (pL).
To err, errflrfi.
To draw, dilcdrS.
A principle, principimn, L
To attack, oppngnBi^
Near, jaxth (prep. aoe.).
Already, j&n (adv.).
To take by ttorm, expogxtirS.
(286.) Translate into English.
{a) Pluperfect. — MiKtfis dia et aciltdr pugnftv^rant. — Tl/Mt
filiiim saepd m5nti6r&t. — Du&s I6gidn6s In ItaliA conscripserft-
miis.— Helvdtl! j&m p6r angustias c6pifts sufts transdux^rant.**
Digitized by
Google
PLUPBBFECT AND FUTUSC FBBFECT. 109
CaDS&r casteDft GrallisB muniTdr&t 6t trfis Idgidnfts ex hibernis
ednxdr&t.
(b) Future Perfect.
Rem. The fiUwre perfect is lometimef ued in Latiii, when in Eng-
lish we ihoold me the limple perfect ctr future ; e. g..
When I {shaUj have written the \ Oaiun epistdlin^icripgerd, idtS
letter, I thaU come to you, \ vSniim.
Qamn &micum in horttim duxdrft, &d td ydQi&m.-^Haad
err&ydr6, si & Platond princlpitim duxdr6. — Qaoin hostte cat-
telUl exptigD&v^nDt, urbSm ips&m (159) oppugnftbimt. — ^Haad
err&yeris, si ft Cic^roDe priocipid. duxdris.
(287.) Translate into Latin.
(a) Pluperfect. — The general had drawn his sword. — Near
the cily the soldiers had fought long and spiritedly. — Caesar had
levied one legion in Italy, and led-out seven from (their) win-
ter-quarters in Gaul. — ^The Helvetians had abready led their
f(Mt;es across the Rhine (113, II., a), through the boundaries
of the Sequanians. — I had often advised you for your own
sake (135, II., h).
(b) Future Perfect (R., 286, b), — ^When we have written
the letters, we shall come to the city. — ^We shall not have err-
ed, if we shaD have drawn (ducdrd) our principles from Plato.
— ^When Caesar shall have taken-by-storm the city, he will at-
tack the tower itself (159).
K
Digitized by
Google
§ 3.
NOUNS OF THIRD DECLENSION.— FULLER
TREATMENT. (XLVII.— LVH.)
[Tm tfairi d«cleiui<m oontuiis more noimt tlian oil the o&ien tog^etii-
er. It slao ntvolvei grtmter difkcoltiM ; aud we tfaerefi>re give it a
foil treatment in the fbtiowing aectioa, wludb sbo^ be fwrefiiHy
stadied.]
LESSON XLVII.
(288.) The genitive-ending of the third declension
is Is.
Rem. To find tihe stem of any noon of this declension, strike qW i*
from the gen.; c^., G., nomlnis {of a Tuttne), stem, nomin.
(289.) ENDINGS FOR ALL THE CASES.
8IN6UI.AK.
PLUBAI.. II
H-MMlF.
N.
H. Mid F.
ft.
N.
N.
ds.
^m^
a
Is.
is.
Q.
fim (ifim).
iim(iiin4.
D.
L
L
JX
ibOs.
ibfis.
A.
6m (im).
likeNom.
A.
«s.
& (i4).
V.
likeNom.
like Nom.
V.
6s.
A.
6{i).
«(i).
A.
!btls.
Ibiis.
(290.) The nom.-ending is not given, because of the many
forms in which that case occurs. The most common nom^-end'
ing is s ; but the stem itself is often employed as the nom. ;
and is often, agiun, changed. We make six classes, which
must be carefully distinguished, viz. :
(291.) CLASSES.
L Nouns which add s to the stem in the nonunative with-
out any vowel change. (FenUnines.)
Noims which insert a connecting vowel (e or i) before
adding s. (Feminines.)
Nouns which change the stem-vowel (i into e) before
adding s. {Masculines,)
IV. Nouns which add 6 to the stem. {Neuters.)
II.
III.
Digitized by
Google
NaUNfl, THIBD DECLENSIOIfy CLASS !•
Ill
V. NouQA i^iich present the unchanged stem in the nom-
inative withoat adding s. (Masculines^ except -al,
-ar, -ur, which are Neuter,)
YI. Nouns which present the stem changed in the nomina-
tive without adding a. (MasqitUnes, Femnines, and
NetUers,)
QiaSL] [Before entering upon th« paradifmi, the ■tndent sboald letrn
thoroughly the following rules of euphony ^ which prevail geaenUly
in Latin noons and verbs.]
(1) c or g before s unites with it to form x ; «. ^.» le g-S is
writtenlex; arc-s = arx; voc-s = vox, &:c.
(2) d or t before s is dropped; e, g,y laud-s=rlaus;
quiet-s^quies; parent-s = paren8*
(293.) Class I. — The Nominative adds s to the
Stefn, without any Vowel change. (Feminines.)
Sing.
Ciljr (C).
Citadel (C),
Praise (C).
Race (nation), C
QttiH(C). ll
N. and V.
orb-s.
arx (arc-s).
laas (laud-s).
gensCgent^j).
quids.
Gen.
urb-rs.
arc-Is.
laud-Is.
gent-Is.
quiet-Is.
Dat.
«b-I.
mee4.
laud-I.
gent-S.
quieM.
Ace.
wb-«m.
tae-%m.
laud-^m.
gent-Sm.
qui€t-SnL
AbL
urb-«.
arc-d.
laud-6.
gent-6.
quiets.
Plur.
Cities.
CiUdels. j Praises.
Races (nations).
N.,A.,V.
urb-es.
arc-ds.
laud-es.
gent-^
qui^lr^
Gen.
urb-!iim.
arc-Ium.
laud-tim.
gent-Itim.
quiSt-Qm.
D. and A.
urb-rbtis.
arc-rbds.
laud-ibtts.
gent-Ibtls.
quiet-IbOs.
On this class» observe carefully that,
(294.) As to the case-endings, i u m is the gen. plur. endmg
of those BCHiae whose stMns end in two consonants ; e. g., urb-s,
urb-is, urb-ium; nox, noct-is, noct-ium; cdhois, cohort-
Is, c6hort-ium.
(295.) As to gender, they are mostly feminine. Hence,
Mule of Gender. — ^Nouns which add s to the stem, witbout
changing the stem-vowel, to form the nom., ure feminine.
[i20Vi. Bxceptions. ThelbUowingare fnoMv/tnesf
1. dens (dent-Is), tooth.
mons (mont-Is), mountain.
fims {fyat'U)ffimnta4n.
pons (pont-is), bridge.
rddens (rudent-Is), rope.
'bidens (bident-Is), hoe.
•torrens (torrent-is), torrent.
*trldens (trldent-!s), trident.
'^6rien8 (5rient-Is), ecut.
'^occidens (occident-lB), toest.
• These nouns in ens are properly adjectives, with a masc. noun under-
itood ; e. g., cneos sol, tonenf amxas, &c.
Digitized by
Google
112
NOUN8, THIRD DECLEN8ION| CLA88 I.
3. Ghrex, (grSg) It, ajtoeki alio a few Doans in ix and ax.
3. VinkB, (pfiriet) is, loaU; p6a (p6d-It), /oo^; Upia, (l&iriUl) U,ttone,
viUi (yfid-is), <«7ie^^.]
[S^ The ruZes of gender should be learned by heart ; Ae lists of ex-
ceptions need not be, onless they are very short. All exceptions mi a
mailed in the yocabolaries ; and the UstB shoold be referred to whenever
cases occor.]
To Class L belong the noons of the following endings, al whidi tiie
pupil has had fireqaent examples :
Libert&s, libertat-Is, liberty; dign!t&s, dignltftt-Is, dig"
nityj and, in shcnt, all noons in & s, & tis.
Virtus, y irt tit -U, virtue; and all others in fis, utis.
PSlAs, palud-Ts, swamp; andotliersin As, Adis.
In the following Exercise several o( the exoqftiom wiU be found.
EXERCISE.
(296.) Vocabulary.
Highest {the top), smnmos, S, iim.
Middlet mSdiiis, S, iim.
To leave, r£linqii6rS (perf-stem, r^-
Uqu-).
To secede, sSceddrS (perf-stem, sS
cess-).
To take core of, cdrftre.
To Umch upon, to reach, attingSrS.
To seek, to aim. at, pStdrS.
To cut down, rescind&i6.
Romulus, Bdmulns, T.
Hercynian, Hercynios, S, tun.
Senate, sSn&tds, fis (m.).
Agrippa, Agrippi, 8B (m.). '
Where, ublnfim ?
The common people, plebs, (pl6b) Is.
Patricians {of Rome), patres, (patr)
iim (pL).
An interreign, interregnOm, I.
Speedy, dttiis, a, tUn.
[The noons which occor in the preceding lesson are not named in the
Yocabolary : the learner will find them, and observe their gender,]
(297.) Examples.
(a) On the top of the mount-
ain.
(b) On the tops of the trees,
(c) In the middle of the city,
(d) Where in the world ?
In summo montfi.
In summis ftrbdrlbiis.
fn medi& urbd.
Ublli&m gentitim?
(298.) Translate into English.
M agn& pars pldbU urbdm rdHquit, 6t in mont^m (295, R. 1 )
sGcesslt. — Tiim patrSs Agripp&m &d plebdm misCrant (401, 3, 5).
— Hercyni& sylv& fines mnltftriim gentiilm attinglt. — Cassitis,
Ifig&tus (225, a), tres cohortes in arcdm oppidi duxtt. — ^tJbi-
n&m gentiijm silmils ?^-De^ ct&r&t gentds. — Aqu31» in sum*
Digitized by
Google
NOUNS, THIBD DECLENSION, CLASS IL
113
mis montlbiis mdificant. — Magnus (78, II., h) &yiiim grex
(295, R., 2) 8umm&m arcdm pdtunt. — Mifites pontdm (295, R.,
1) rescindunt. — ^Ldg^s Rom&ndrum justas fudrunt. — Summiis
moDS (295, R., 1) ab hostabus tdnetur. — Caes&r ad utramqud
(194, R. 1) partem pontits prsesldium r^Hquit. — Post RomiiU
mortdm unites (194) anm interregnum fult. — S&pient68 mortem
non timent. — Mors cit& vdnidt.
[AH the nocms shotild be declined, the role of gender given, and the ex-
ceptions referred to if necessary. The formations of the verbs should be
cai«fally analyzed.]
(299.) Translate into Latin.
The laws were just. — ^The fountain was beautiful. — ^The
Hercynian forest touches the boundaries of five nations. — ^The
common-people left the city, and seceded to the mountain.—
The doves built-their-nest in the top of the citadel (297, a). — ^A
large flock of birds flew over the city. — ^The soldiers fought
long on the middle of the bridge (297, c). — ^Then the senate sent
an ambassador to the common-people. — God takes care of cities
and nations. — The Belgians inhabit one part of Gaul, the Aqui-
tanians another. — ^Where in the world (297, d) are we ? in
what city do we live ? — Caesar fortified each part of the bridge.
LESSON XL VIII.
Nouns. — Third Declension^ continued.
(300.) Class II. — The Nominative inserts a Conr
necting'vowel (e or i) before adding s to the Stem.
(Feminines.)
e ituerted.
i inserted. 11
SiBtuU,.
Cloud (C).
Ship (C).
N. and V.
nab.^-8.
n&v-i^.
Gen.
ndb-is.
nftvia.
Dat
nflb-I.
ntv-i.
Ace.
ndb-«m.
nftv-dm or tm.
Abl.
ntlb-e.
nftv-6 or I.
Clouds.
Ships.
N. A. V.
nflb^.
nftv-€s.
Gen.
ndb-iam.
nav-itim.
D. and AbL
nflb-ibfis.
nfty-Tbus.
K2
Digitized by
Google
114 N0VW8, THUD DECUHiioify cajuw lU
On this class, observe carefully,
(301.) As to the ease-endingi : [(1) Th© •cc-anding Im
instead of d m is used : 1, m>meHme$ (but rwely) in the words
clavls, key; messls, harvest; nftvis, Mp: 2. commonly
in fehrls, fever; pelvis, hann; puppls, sUm; restls,
rope; sficfirls, axe; turrls, tower: 3. always tai amxi»«i»t
a rule; sitlBy thirst; tusBia, cough; rin, force.]
[(2) The abL-eDding i instead of 6 is used (not, however, to
the exclusion of e) in all those words which take Im in the
ace.; «. ^., turrls, turrim, turri: vis, vim, vi (al-
ways) . Also in i g n 1 s, fire ; c i v 1 s, citizen,]
(3) The gen. plur. ending i ik m instead of ti m is used is
most nouns which insert e or i before adding s to the stem.
[Proles, canls, panis, vatls, juvfinis have Urn.]
(302.) Rule of Gender. — Nouns which insert a vowel (e or i)
before adding s in the nominative dx% feminines.
[Rem. Exceptkmst
Amuii (hl), river. faicts (m.), bundle,
AxTa (m.), axle. folHs (m.), beUotos,
CalUs (m.), path, fOnis {m), rope.
CSalllfl (m.), canaL faaOa (».), ehib.
CoUTs (m.), kiU. ignia {m,),Jire.
Crinia (m.)» hair. xnensis (zn.), ffumth,
Snais (m.), iword, orbia (m.), eirele,
EXERCISE.
[In the vocabnlariea, the Roman nmnerala X., XL, dec, placed after
noona, refer to the class to wfaic^ thej bekn^.}
(303.) Vocabulary.
•pivSa (m.), bread.
piacia (m.),JUh.
poatib (m.), post,
•entia (at.), bramiie,
ungala {m.),Jin^ernaiL
yectla (m.), lever,
vermia (m.), worm.]
To dread, formidftrd.
Pilot, gflbematdr, ia (m.).
To bring, ftgdr* (perf-atem, 6gr-).
To procure, comparftre.
A CarthagifUan, CartbAglnienaia, ia.
To raise, to kindle, exdttirS.
Power, poteat&a, (pdteatiit^ ia iU I-)-
Barbarian, baiiiftrfia, I.
VehemejUly, graatly, vehfimentfir
(215, 9, b).
To build, aedlf Icare.
A feet, claaaia, & (f., IL).
And, ac.
Twenty, vlglntl ^ndeoL).
Lofty, altiia, tf, iim.
Thirteen, trdddcizn (indecL).
The Druids, Dmidea, dm (m.» pL).
Thirst, aitta, (alt) ia {I, XI).
To relieve, levftrfi.
To dispute, diaptltar6.
To terrify, terrirB (f«rfect-8tetti»
teirii-).
(304.) Translate into English.
Nubes ssepd lun&m obsciirant. — Civds class^m hosti^m for*
Digitized by
Google
HOUHB, THIRD DS0LBN9IONf OLAiS III.
115
midant. — Caes&r naves loogas sedificaTltt ^t naut&s giibeniatd-
rSsque (202, N.) comp&rfivit. — Crassi^B &d oppidum torrSs
alias 3^t. — Vdtdrgs Romani vim Cartha^mensium non formi-
d&v6rant. — Caes&r turrds Mddcim excitfivit. — Milites ignSs
magnos in summd montd (297, a) excitfivSrunt. — Druides dS
deorum immortali^m vi ac potest&td dispiHant. — Classes adven-
t6» (dvds tem^t.— Aqua eatlm (301, 1) lgv&t.--N«v& nftvltim
figurd. vdh^ment^r (215, 2, 5) barb&ros terruit.
(305.) Translate into Latin.
Jaofty towers are raised by Csesar.— ^llie geoend prepared
twenty long ships. — The Meutenant brought the towers to the
wall of the city. — ^The power of the Romans terrified the Gauls.
— Wine does not relieve thirst. — The sun is often obscured
by the clouds. — The aj^roach of the fleet and the soldiers ter-
rified the citizens. — A great fire is kindled on the top of the
mountain by the ^duans. — The general stationed the ships
near the wall of the city. — ^The clouds are black. — The coming
of our fleet and the strange (n d v a) figure of the ships terrified
an tike barbarians.
LESSON XLIX.
Nouns. — Third Declension^ continued..
(306.) Class HI. — The Nominative changes the
Stem-vowel (i into d) before adding s to the Stem.
Vowel i changed into e. ||
Singular.
Soldier (m.).
Book (m.).
N. and V.
Gen.
Bat.
Ace.
AbL
mil^-s (milet-s).
znUrt-Jfl.
mittt-i.
zmUt-6m.
milrt-6.
c6d*c (codecs).
COdlC-lfl.
c6dlc-l.
c6dlc-6m.
c6dIc-«.
Plural.
Soldiera.
Bookau.
N. A. V.
Gen.
D. and A.
miUl-Ss.
mlllt-um.
miUt-rbas.
cOdlc-es.
codlc-iUn.
codlc-ibtis.
On this class, observe that,
(307.) As to the case-endings, they are all regular.
(308.) Am to gender^ they are mascvUne. Hence,
Digitized by
Google
116 NOUNS, THIRD DECLENSION, CLASS UU
Rule of Gender, — ^Nooos which change the stem-TOwel
1 into 6 before adding s in the noniinatiye are masculine,
Exc. Merges (f.), (mergttis), a sheaf.
EXERCISE.
(309.) Vocabulary.
Digitized by
Goog^le
Digitized by
Google
lis HOUHS, THIED BECLElfBI09» COJUKI IV.
(316.) Exampks.
(a) For Marseilles U washed
on three sides by the sea.
Masaffia ^olm ti^Oms ex p«rtl«
bos m&rl (aU., 93, II«^ b^
R.) aUMttir.
Nostrd mftri (55) longis n&vi-
bus uti conraevimtis.
(h) In our sea {i.e. , (he Med-
iterranean) we were accus-
tomed to use long ships.
Rule of Syntax. — ^The deponent verb titi, to use^ goyems
the ablative; e. ^., navibus, in (6).
(317.) Translate into English.
Longe iUi& nftvlg&tift est In angnstd mftrl atqn^ In vasto
atqud &pertd oce&no. — Long» fudnrnt naves quibus (abL, 316,
b) nostro mar! (55) uti (infin.) consu^vimus. — ^Ven6ti autem
latis navlbus uti consuev^runt. — IVfihl (125, II., a) cubild est
terr&. — ^Rdm&nortlm cubili& magD& fuerunt et splendid^. —
Imper&t5r quinqufi naves ex nav&li edQxIt et praelium com-
misit. — ^Turris dr&t proz!m& portui (106, II., c) nav&llbiis-
que. — Caes&r, interim, omnes naves quae erant in navalibus
incendit. — Ven&t&r r6t6 diligentdr pftrftb&t. — ^Vftn&t&ws rdti&
cems (54) p&rabant.
(318.) Translate into Latin.
The farmers were preparing nets for the (54) doves. — Cor-
inth is washed on two sides by the sea. — ^The ships which (316,
b) the Venetians were accustomed to use in our sea were long.
— ^In the vast and open ocean we use broad ships. — Navigation
is far different (longd ali&)ina narrow river and in the open
sea. — ^I had (125, II., a) a high tree (for my) bed.— Caesar was
pursuing Pompey by sea and land. — ^The tower was veiy near
to the dockyard. — The general, in the mean time, was rebnOd-
ing an the old ships in the port and dockyards.
Digitized by
Google
n(Xm$h TBtM DSOLMrStOI^ CLAM ▼.
119
LESSON LI.
Nouns. — Third DecknsioTif continued*
(319.) Clabs V. — The Nominative presents the
Stem unchanged.
1. Masctdine Fonn$.
HODOor (m.).
COitaa! (m.).
OOOWCIIL).
Bratber (m.).
jr. and V.
h6a6T,
consilL
uuidr.
fifttdr.
Gen.
hdndr-is.
conBill-ii.
ans6r-if.
frfttr-if.
Dat
hdndr-I.
consdl-L
ansdr-L
frfttr-i.
Ace
h&nor-im.
oonsdl-taL
•ABhr-enu
fMr-4uL
AbL
hdndr-e.
conBul-6.
«ns6r-«.
fiAtr-6.
Plaral.
Honours.
Coiwuls.
OceM.
Brothers.
N., A., V.
hdndr-6s.
contAl^.
anar.«g.
frAtr-««.
Gen.
hdndr-tUn.
consol-nm.
ansdr-nm.
frurdm.
D. ftnd AM.
bOndr-Ibfis.
cons4l-Ibtt8.
ans6r-ibAB.
frttr-lbfli.
On these, observe,
(320.) As to case-endings^ they nearly aU take the regular
endings throu^out ; but those whose stem ends intercHrber
drop the e in all cases but the nom. ; <• g,, fr&tdr, fr&tris ;
imh^r {a shower) imhr 1 8.
Bjerm, Imbdr, lintSr, ventSr, take Ittm &r gen. pL ending:
(321.) As to gender^
Mule of Gender, — ^Nouns which present the unchanged
stem in the nom. (except those whose stems end in al,
ar, ur, dr) are masculine.
[Exception (L) In art &rh6r, ^rls {tree), iBfemimnei and Sd6r, ikU,
{pure wheat) f aeqnor, drig («ea), marmdr, dns {marble), are neat (Obs.,
aascolines have 5 (long) in the stem ; neuters 5 (short) ). The ending «2
generally bebngs to names of male beings (e. ^., consul): if applied to
females, it may be feminine also (e. ^., exul, a female exile).
Eao^tioE {%) irt liat^r (ioat) is muc orfem^t Ham folkmiag are
mufti '/ •ftdtyer {cffrpn), absv (^of), Ter (rAe spring), Terber {Mi)
tHao, all names ciplantM in er: e. g., piper {pepper), zlagTber {ginger),
ftc]
EXERCISE.
(322.) Vocabulary.
Noise, cUmdr (Oris, Y., 1).
Cassius, Cassius, L
FoAjeJugfim,!.
Archer, sigittariiis, L
SUnger, fimditor {Ma, Y., 1).
Succour, subsldldm, L
Main, imbir (b, 380).
Continuance, oontilhiittid, (oontlnflt-
ti6n) is (f.).
Skin, tent made of skins, pelltt, (pell)
is (f. n.).
Desert, desertdm, i.
Shepherd, pastdr (Oris, V., 1).
Hunter, van*t«r (6ris, V., 1).
Digitized by
Google
120 nOVVBf THIRD DEOLEN8ION9 CLA80 Y.
(323.) Translate into English.
Impdr&tor ad se merc&tores undiqae coDydcavit.^
Mifit^s omnes magno cum cl&more in oppldmn irmperunt.
— ^Helvdtii Cassium consulem ocddunt, exerdtumque 6juB
(153, c) syb jttgum* mittant. — CaBS&r sagitt&rida et fundi-
tores subsidiof (dat.) oppld&nisf (dat) misit — ^Mifites con-
ti[nu&ti[oDe imbrium (320, R.) sub pelHbus contlnentor. —
Incdlae desertorum sunt pastores, yenatores, et mer-
c&tdres. — DiyifisB merc&torum sunt incertae. — Caes&r
omnem dquitatum funditores s&gitt&rioeque .pontem (113,
II., a) transdnxit et ad hostes contendit.
(324.) Translate into Latin.
The Britons slew the general, and sent all the soldiers under
the yoke. — The archers and slingers killed the chief. — Bj the
continuance of the rains, the merchants are kept in the town. —
The townsmen burst into the tents (peUes) with a great noise.
— The archers and the slingers hasten to the town. — The con-
sul Cassius led all the slingers oyer the bridge. — The Britons
killed the scouts (exploratores), and sent the arch'ers and sling-
ers under the yoke. — The scouts hasten to the consul. — The
general sent twenty soldiers for a succourf (dat.) to the mer-
chants, f — The inhabitants of the town are merchants. — The
riches, of merchants, howeyer great (184) they are, are uncer-
tain. — The soldiers slew all the inhabitants of the desert — The
illtistrious consuls led all the footmen oyer the bridge (113,
II., a).
* A conqaered army was made to march mider a sort of yoke or gallows
as a mark of disgrace.
t Rule of Svniax,—Douile Dathe. Two datiyef , one of die person, the
other of dae thing, may be nidd wilii esse, and wiA yeibs of giving,
eonUng, tending, dec.
Digitized by
Google
HOUNSy THULD DECLENSION, CLASS V.
121
LESSON HI.
Nouns. — Third Declension^ continued.
^325.) Class V. — The Nominative presents the
Stem unchanged.
2. Neuter Forms.
1 Si«gul«r.
Animal (n.).
Spur (n.).
Liglitniitg (a.).
Marble (o.).
N.,A.,V.
Gen.
Dat
AbL
Snimal-Ts.
ftnim&l-i.
ftmmali.
caldir.
calcftr-is.
calc§r-L
calcari.
folgur.
folgdr-ia.
fo^r-i.
fblgur-*.
marmdr.
marmdr-Ti.
marmdr-L
manndr-S.
PluhO.
AniinaU.
Spom.
Ligbtnings.
Marbles.
N.,A.,V.
Gen.
LD. and AbL
Snimfllia.
Snimfll ium.
toftnal-ibiis.
calcari*.
calcar-ium.
calear-ibas.
fblgtbr-A.
falgtir-um.
fulgfOr-lbOi.
marmdr-A.
manndr-dm.
marmor-Ibili.
On these, observe,
(326.) (a) As to case-endings, tiiose in al, ar, make abl. I,
n(»n. plur. 1&, gen. plur. !um.
(6) As to gender, they are neuter. Hence,
Rule of Gender. — Nouns which present in the nom. the
unchanged stem in al, ar, ur, and dr (short), are netUer.
Exceptions in ftl: Sal {salt) is masc. and neut. in the sing;., and mate,
s SI 3 8, in plnr. L ar, Uris {household god), masc.
Exceptions in fir: Pfir [thi^, furfur {bran), turtur {turUe-dove),
▼ultur {vulture), are masc. -•
Exceptions in 5r. (Oecollect that 5r, Oris (with o long), is a vtase.
ending (321) ; and that &rbor, Sris {tres), is /em.)
Rem. Os, OS sis {bone)^ is neut.
EXERCISE.
(327.) Vocabulary.
Laoel, plain, planfis, A, um.
A plain, the sea, i»qu6r, Is (V., 2),
(derived from ssquos, plaint see
below, 328).
Revenue, tax, vectigSl, (vectigsl) Is
(V., 2).
To create, creftrfi.
Hatred, odium, 6di(im, i.
Many, very many, compldrds, ft or
ift (gen. fim or ifim), used only in
pluraL
Cku9, gSnfis, (g6n6r) Is, neut
Temple, templum, i
To place, pdndr6.
Abode, ddmlcilifim, i.
To goad, concltflrS.
Frugality, parslmdnift, sb.
Indeed, quIdSm (adv.).
Placid, plftcMus, ft, fim.
A marble temple, a temple ofmarbht
templfim de marmdrd.
Sharp, ftcutfis, ft, fim.
Glare, splenddr, (splenddr) Is (V., 1).
To farm, r«dlm«re (r«d«m-).
Digitized by
Google
122 VOUNSt THIRD DECLEN8ION9 CLASS ¥•
(328.) Example.
The sea is Uveltfrom which
€tlso the poets call it
sequor (the sea).
Mftrft pl&niim est ; ex qa5
66&m sequor iUiid podtas
ydcant.
^^ Here the antecedent of qao is die aentence mird pltn&m est.
(329.) Translate into English.
Magnum hoc fult yectig&l, add magnftm cre&vlt ddiilm.^- *
Dmnndrix, complarSs annos (191, a, Rule) omni& ^duorom
vectig&li& rdddmdr&t. — CompIiir& (or coinpluri&) sunt gdnd*
r& anlm&liiim. — Templiim de marmdrd In fiiro pdn&m.
Crassus ddmiim magn&m de marmdrd splendido adiflc&Tlt.
— ^F u 1 g ii r & mifitds T^hdmentdr terru^runt. — ^Terr& est ddm-
Xciliiim hdm!niim ^t&nlmaliii m. — Mllites subit5 6qude c a 1*
c &r 1 b tL 8 (abl., 55, a) condt&rd coepSrunt. — C a 1 c & r i a &c&tii
sunt.
(330.) Translate into Latin.
Gloiy is a great spur to brave men. — The horses fear the
sharp spurs. — The glare of the lightnings terrified the horses.
— ^Almost (f e r e, 218, h) all animals are useful to men. — These
were great revenues indeed, but they created great hatreds. —
The seas were level and placid. — Frugality is a great revenue.
-^We shall place a temple of splendid marble in the midst (in
medio fdro, 297, c) of the forum. — The poets call (m&r6) the
sea equor, because (quift) it k level. — The woods are tlie
abode ci many animals. — ^Pompey for many years had ftimed
the revenues of Asia. — ^The *c^ff^ky (ftquitds) be|^ te pat
spurs to thehr horBes (= to goad Ihe^orses with spurs).
Digitized by
Google
NOaNS, THIRD DBCLEN8ION9 CLASS VI.
123
LESSON LIII.
Nouns, — Third Declension, contintied.
(331.) Class VL — The Nominative presents
Stem changed.
1. Masculine Forms,
the
II
(c) VerbaUin io {altjem.).
1 Singular.
Speech (m.)-
Dust (ra-).
Flower (m.)
ReMon(C).
N.andV.
sermd.
pnlvis.
fids.
ritid.
Gen.
semi6n-is.
piilTdr-!s.
fl6r-!8.
rfttion-is.
Dat
sermdn-i.
palvflr-L
fldr-i.
rfttida-i.
Ace
germdn-^m.
palvdr-dm.
fldr-Sm.
ritidn-^m.
AbL
sermdn-e.
palv8r-6.
fl6r-6.
ifttion-d.
Plu«l.
Speeches. ||
Flowers.
Reasons.
N.,A.,V.
serm6n-68.
||polvflr-Ss.
fl6i>es..
rttidn-es.
Gen.
Benndn-om.
pnlrdr-tlm.
fldr-nm.
rfttidn-dm.
D.&AbL
sermdn-Tbos.
||pulv6r-ibus.
fldribus.
rttidn-ibtls. U
On this class, observe,
(332.) As to case-endings : 1. Final n of the stem is gener^
aUy dropped in Latin nouns in the nominative. (In sanguis,
sanguln-ls {hhod), it is changed into s.)
2. Final r of the stem is often changed into s, as in p ul vl s,
flOs, md«, &c.
(333.) Rule of Gender, — Nouns which simply drop n of the
stem in the nom. are masculine (except abstract ndtms
inlo).
Special Rem. — Abstract notma in io (dnis) are feminine ; e. g., rat-io^
reoion; oltio, revenue. (Tfaey are a ^ery large class, fozmed by add«
ing io to tiie supine-stem of verbs.)
(334.) Ride of Gender, — Nouns which change dr of the
stem into Is, 6r into Os, are moicMM; 6* g,t pnlfis
(pulvfir), flos (fl6r).
EXERCISE.
(335.) Vocahulary.
MatvMT^ custom^ m6s, (mdr) Is (VI.,
1,*).
BMw, latrd, (latrOn) Ts (VI., 1, a).
Pirate, pnsdd, (prosddn) Is (VL, 1, a).
Centwrian, centOrid, (centnridn) Is
(VL, 1. a).
Uon, led, (leon) Is (VL, 1, a).
Speech, language, neem&, (sdrmOn)
Is (VL, 1, a).
Smrendar, didSA&, (d«ditid&) U
(VL, 1, e).
Reheaion, rSbellid, (rebellion) U
(VI., 1, c).
The Sacred Way, Via Sacit.
Digitized by
Google
124 NOUNSy THIBD DECLENSION, CLASS TI.
To tlay, trdcld§i«.
Nurse, ndtrix, (nntrlc) U (L).
Devoid of, expers, (expert) b (107).
To draw, trih«rt (trax-; 277, 1).
Eloquent, disertila, fi, tm.
Adorned, omatfii, i, Qm.
To go, xrd.
By chance, fortd (adv.).
As, Bicfit.
£tiMi, bUndftf , ft, ftm.
M5r6 latrdntLm.
Mord sud.
Speech (in the abstract), or an ora-
tion, 6ratid, (orfttidn) is (VI., 1, c).
Dust, pulvts, (pulv«r) is (VI., 1, b),
Egyptian, JEgyptOs, L
Sweet, pleasant, soAyis, Is, d.
To wander, errtrS.
To employ, ntS. (with abL, 316, b),
ToJinisK conflcdrd O^o).
The rest, the remaining, rdllqatts, ft.
Bill.
(336.) Examples,
(a) After the manner of roh-
hers,
(h) After his (her or their)
own manner*
(c) Deooid of reason* Rfttidnls expers.
Rvle of Syntax. — Adjectiyes signifyiDg abounding, want^
privcUion, &c., govern the genitive (sometimes abl.).
(d) We say, a doud of dust ; the Latin says, a power of
dust — ^vis pulvdrls.
(337.) Translate into English.
1. (Masculines, Class VL, 1, n dropped.) — Centaridnds
nuEtiim Labidnum fibentdr sSqudbanttir. — Leg&tiis sermd*
nem k>ngum conficit. — Multl ^dui Caes&iis sermoni (dat.,
267, b) interfudrmit. — ^Imp6rftt5r r^fiquos latronds prsedd-
n&sque trucld&vit. — ^Afilc& nutrix est leonilm fdrocitim.
3. (Verbal Nouns in ion, all Feminine.) — ^Helvdtii leg&tos
de (concerning) dedltione ad Caes&rdm nusdrunt. — ^Barb&ii
rdbelliondm turpdm fdcdrunt. — Legatiis, oration^ acii
(aU., 55, a), barfo&ros ad dedltiondm trant. — Or&tio disertft
dt orn&t& omnibus (161, a) pl&cdt — Fdr» sunt r&tionls et
5 r & t i 5 n IS . expertes.
3. (Nouns changing ^r of the Stem into is, dr into Gs; all
Mcuculines.) — Pulvls et umbr& sumtis. — ^MiHtes, edddm tern-
p6r6 (118, II., c) magn&m vim pulvdris viddbant. — Ib&m
forte Tift sacrft (abl., 55, a) sictit metis est mos. — ^^gypia,
mdrd praedontim (336, a), nftves incenddre (infin., 210) con-
suSvenint. — Suftves tui mords mIM (161, a) valde plftcent. —
Pi-sedon^s, mor6 sad, oppidft incenddrd coepdrunt.
Digitized by
Google
NOUNSy THIRD DECLBNSIONy CLASS VI.
125
(338.) Translate into Latin.
1. (Masculines^ Class VL, 1, n dropped.) — Caesar ecnploTs
kind language* (abl., 316, 6), and draws the barbarians to a sur-
render. — Many of the Helvetians heard the severe speech (78,
U., b) of Caesar. — ^The bands of robbers and pirates wander by
sea and land. — ^The general slew all the wicked pirates. — Is
(135, II., a) Airica the nurse of lions ? — Is Europe (nukn, 280,
h) the nurse of fierce lions ?
2. (Verbals in io, aU Feminine,) — Caesar drew-out from
(their) winter-quarters the four legions which he had levied
(conscripsdr&t) in Italy. — The eloquent oration pleased all.
— ^The barbarians made a base rebellion afber (their) surrender.
— Lions are devoid of reason and speech.
3. (Nouns changing 6r of the Stem into is, or into ds ; McU'
ctdines.) — The flowers are beautiful. — The customs of the
Germans were good. — Death turns (vertlt) all tlungs into
dust. — At the same time (118, II., 5), a great cloud of dust (336,
d) was seen by the soldiers. — I was sleeping in the garden, as
is my custom. — The ^duans, after the manner of pirates, slew
the ambassadors.
LESSON LIV.
Nouns. — Third Declension^ continued.
(339.) Class VI. — The Nominative presents the
Stem changed.
2. Feminine Forms.
n of the Stem dropped, and I changed into 6. \\
Singular.
Image (f.).
Hwl (f.).
N. and V.
Gen.
Dftt.
Ace.
Abl.
imftgd.
lniftg£Q*l8.
!m5gln-i.
bnft§(n-fim.
imaging.
grandd.
grandin-Is,
grandln-i.
grandin-dm.
grandIn-§.
PluraL
Images.
Hail.
N,A.,V.
Gen.
D. and Abl.
Imftgln-ei.
Jmagin-um.
imftgin-tbns.
grandin-es.
grandin-iQin.
gran^bi-ibils. |
Sermo.
L2
Digitized by
Google
126 NOUNS, THIRD DBCLBNSION, CLASS VI.
On these, observe,
' (340.) Rule of Gender. — Nouns which drop n, and change
i into o in the nom., 9re feminine.
Exceptions. Ord6 {order), card* {hing^l turbd (wkirlmnaj, are
masculine. N6m6 (nobody), marg* {margin), are common.
(Homo, man, if maac by the general role, 35^ a.)
Mem, Gird {JU$h) makea gen. carnii, dat carni,Ac, confiracted
from carlnis, carini, &c.
EXERCISE.
(341.) Vocabulary.
Lily, ISMm, L
Virgin, virg6, (virgin) U (VL, 8).
Prayer, prex, nam. not used, (prtks)
is (I.).
To celebrate, to extol, c61ebr*r6.
Origin, origd, (origin) Is (VL, 8).
To collect, c6g6r6, c6n+ag6r6 (perl-
stem, coeg).
Order, rank, ordfi, (ordin) Is (VL, ji)
(m.).
Whirltcind, tnrb6, (torbln) Is (VL,
2, 340, exc).
Safe, salvns, ft, iim.
, sonmAs, L
Same, iddm, eftddm, Id6m (150).
Multitude, moltitadd, (moltltadin) Is
(VL, 2).
To set forth, exp6n6r«.
Swallow, Mnmdd, (hinmdin) Is (VL,
2).
Harbinger, prsenontilL 8B.
Spring, v6r, is (321, exc. 2).
Resemblance, sImillWdd, (slmflltil-
dln) Is (VI., 2).*
To preserve, keep, servarS.
To caU {nam>e), appellard.
Council, concilimn, L
(342.) Translate into English.
1. Somnus imag5 mortis est. — ^L3g&ti e&d6m quae Cses&r
dix6r&t multltudin! exponunt. — Hirundinds prseonnliae
yens sunt. — Galli oppidum ex slmilitudlnS floris LUium
appellabant. — Consul matnim virginum-que prSeibus exd-
tatur. — ^Podts celebrant Romiilum, driginSm gentis.
2. Princlpes ^duorum magn&m multitlidindm hdmi-
niim ex agns coSgerunt. — MlHtSs ordin 6s n5n servant. —
Caes&r centiirXQn6s primOrtim ordlnum&d concifium convdcat-
— Cic6r8 in magnis turbinibfis navdm reipul^ca (351, 3)
gdbem&vlt, 6t salv&in In portu cdldc&Ttt.
. (343.) Translate into Latin.
1. Speech (serm5) is the image of the m'md. — Sleep is often
the harbinger of death. — The soldiers feared the f<Nrce of the
* Slmmtadd floris a»reMemblance to ajlower.
Digitized by
Google
NOUNS, THIED DECLENSION, CLASS TL
127
bail. — ^The centurions were setting-fortli the fame (tilings)
which the general had commanded.^-The brave tokliers are
moYed by the prayers of the mothers and the virgins.
2. The consuls collect a great multitude of men from the
towns. — Caesar dismisses from (ab) the council the centurions
of the first ranks. — The archers and the slingers did not keep
their ranks. — Caesar calls (v 6 card) to the coundl the centuri-
ons of all the ranks. — The brave consul in the great whirlwinds
win govern the ship of state (351, 3). — Cassar will place the
ahip of state safe in the pprt.
LESSON LV.
Nouns. — Third Declension^ continued.
(344.) Class VL — The Nominative presents the
Stem changed.
3. Neuter Forms.
-
(a) Vowel rluutgtd. \
(b) Vmoel and Com. ekanged. ||(c) Cmi».dumg^\^
Singular.
Sov (o.).
Strengtii (n.^
Work (n.).
Body (n.). 1 Law (•.).
N.,A.,V.
(Jen.
I>mt.
AbL
carmen,
cannlii-to.
carmin-^.
robfir.
robfir-fe.
r6b^^L
r6bor-€.
illl
corpdB. jua.
corpSMi. ur-fa.
coip6r-L T«r-L
corp6r-«. || jur-«.
Plural
Songt.
I .Works.
Bodien. Lawa.
N^ A.,V.
GezL
D.,AbL
carmm-tt.
cannin-iuiL
carmin-Ibiis.
rdbor-ft.
r6bdr-4iin.
robfir-IbiSs.
dper-ft.
oper-ttm.
opdr-ibds.
corpdr-i. \
oorpor-dm.
ar-&
nr-tbfis.
On this class, observe,
(345.) As to gender, they are all neuter. Hence,
Mule of Gender, — ^Nouns which, in the nominative, change
the stems In into ftn, 5r into iir, and 6r, 5r, or Qr into
u 8, are neuter.
Ksoeptkm. (1.) In in: oo^ pectite, p^etMa (mase.), a coimA.
(3.) 5r izitoiir: none.
(3.) Sr into tta: none.
(4.) 5r into Qi : only Ifipiis, Idpdiia (masc.), a hart.
(5.) ur into nt: mua, murla (ma«c.)> nunue; tellai, flrit
(fom.), €aiik
Digitized by
Google
128
N0UN8« THIKD DECLEKBION, CLASS Tl.
(346.) Under this head may be classed the follow-
ing nouns of rare endings :
1. Poem&, &ti8 (neuUr), a poem. Nouns of this form are
derived from the Greek, and are aU nenters. They prefer the
MkUng is to Ibi&s in the dat. and abl. plnr.
2. Halee {ntuUr)j h&ldcis, brine, and l&c {neuter), lactls,
milk, are the only Latin nouns ending in c in the nom.
3. C&ptit, capitis, head, is the only Latin noun skiing id
t in the nom. It is neuter.
EXERCISE.
(347.) Vocabulary.
Arrogance, arrog^antift, a.
Crvmtt ciimSn, (crindn) ii (VX, 3,
a).
To want (lack), to he free from, c4-
rtre (with aR).
FoUy, ■talti[ti&.
Wondcrfidt mlrif icilB, i, fim (minu
-Kado).
Naked, nfldiifl, S, um.
Strong, viUdOs, t, tUn.
The whole qffair, omsSM r6s.
(348.) Examples,
{a) To condemn to death.
To delay, tardirtt.
Oift, mUn&B, (nranSr) it (YL, 3, b).
Quickly, citd (adv.).
Haret Idpiis, (lep5r) ia {m^ 345, 4).
Milk, l&c, (lact) is (n.. 346, 2).
Flesh, cdr^ (cam) ia (£, 340, IL).
Young man, jay6iiia» ia (m.) : gen.
pL, QxxL
Danube, D&ndbiiia, I (m.).
Jugwrtha, Jagorthi, a.
If, al (coi\J^.
C&pitis (or c&pitd) condem-
nfird ( = to condemn of (he
head).
Jttde of Syntax. — With verbs ai condemning, the punish-
ment (if capital) is put in the gen. or abl.
(6) To be free from a crime. I Crimlnd c&rdrd ( = to want
I crime).
Rtde of Syntax. — ^The ablative case is used with verbs (and
adjectives) of abounding and wanting.
(349.) Translate into English.
Socr&tds arrdgantiae 6t stultltisB criming c&rdb&t. — ^Rhdntis
et Rhdd&nus magn& sunt flumin&. — Magnft et mirificft simt
omni&Dei 6pdr&. — Galli semper nudo corpdrfi (8ynt.,716, 2)
pugn&bant. — Corpdr& Germ&ndrilm vfiHdft et miilfic& fndrunt
— Magnltadft dpdrfim onmdm r6m tardftbat. — Si mQn6r&
Digitized by
Google
IBRE6ULAE NOUNS. 129
tardas, nihil das ; bis d&t, qai dtd dat. — ^Vdnfttdr Idpdrds tifml-
dos in syMs persdqitftar. — ^Athdnienses Socratdm c&plt6 con
demnarunt.* — Cur t&ldm virom c&pitis condemn&stis ?^
Brltanm lactd et camft i^yunt.
(350.) Translate into Latin.
Tlie bodies of the young men were strong. — ^The man (yir>
was free from the crime of folly. — ^The Danube and the Rhin»
are great rivers. — ^Do the Gauls (num, 280, h) fi^t with naked
body ? — The works of Cicero are excellent : I read them (eos)
with {Measure (libentdr). — ^The Romans condenmed Jngurtha
to death (348, a). — Did the Athenians (280, h) condemn Socra-
tes to death ? — ^The captives were condemned (imperf. pass.) to
death. — ^The timid hare was wandering in the woods and fields.
— ^Is-it-possible-that (280, h) the Britons live (on) (abl.) milk
and flesh ? — ^Your pleasant scnigs (161, h) delighted (d elec-
ta re) me.
LESSON LVI.
Irregular Nouns.
(351.) We give here the declension ofafsw irreg*
ular nouns.
1. Jupiter.
Nom. jQpitdr.
Gen. J5vis.
Dat. Jdvf.
Ace. JdvSm.
Abl. J6v6.
Digitized by
Google
180
nUtSQULAE yOUNfti
3. BoSy an ox or cow.
Singolur.
Nom. Bes.
PUffil.
B«T68.
Gen. Bdvls.
Bodm.
Dat. Bdvi.
Bobus or Bubiis.
Ace. B5?dm.
B6v6s.
Voc. Bos.
B6v6s.
AbL B6v$.
Bobus or babfis.
won is inflected; e. g^
Respublica (res+publica), a republic^ sta
Singalar.
Nom. RespnbKcft.
Gen. ReipubHca.
Dat. ReipubKcae.
Ace. RempnbEcfim.
Voc. RespubKc^.
Abl. RepubKcft.
Plural.
ReapuMlca?.
R6bmpnl:^tefs.
Respubfics.
Rdbuspubficis.
4. Jusjurandum (jus+jurandum), an oath.
Singular.
Nom. Jusjurandtim.
Gen. Jurisjurandi.
Dat. Jurijurando.
Ace. Jusjurandum.
Abl. Jurijurando.
Plural.
Jurajurandft.
Jurajurandft.
Rem. The genitive, datirei asid ablative pinral are not oaed.
BXBB.
(352.) Vocabulary.
Faith, promise, Hdetf, eL
To bind, obstringSrfi, (5b-i-striBSfir9}
(perfl-stem, obstrinx).
To take care of, ctrSrO.
FoUy, stoltittifi, 8B.
To lose, imitterg, (&+ni^t6i«) (pec£-
stem, ftmis).
To intrust, committdrd, (oon-f-mit-
t6t6) commla (wil^ dat).
JSspeeiaUy, maximfi (adv.).
To ioortkip, ciHHM^ (peril-item, c6-
Ifl-).
CISE.
Apis, Apis, is (£).
Sacred, sanotus, 8, iim.
Formerly, oKm.
Guardian, cnstOa^ (cnstod) Is (m.
and f.).
Juno, Jund, (Jdaoo) is (£).
Husband or wife, coi\)iix, (oonjtig)
is (m. and f.).
Nation, n&tid, (nStion) Is (£).
An Egyptian, JEgyptSs, L
But especiaUy, mAximd antdm.
ifuMTvOk l£(nerrfi^ ».
Digitized by
Google
ntftBGULAR KOOKS« ISl
(353.) Translate into English.
Frindpes intdr sd flddm et jusjflrandfim dftbant. — ^Aric
▼ist^ cMtatSm jQrejurando (55) dt obslittbiis obstrinidt. —
Apiid Kdm&nos, consults rempubllc&m cur&y6nmt. — Muto
natidnes pdr stultati&m respubllcas snSts ftittisertmt.— Vdtd-
r&s maxima Jdvdm cdhidrant. — ^gypti Apfan, sanctvLin
bovdm (225, a), olim cdluSrmit. — Jupltdr est hQjiis nrUs
custos. — ^Jun5 dr&t J 6 vis conjux. — Civds ir&m Jdvis timenU
— Comu& bourn sunt magn&.
(354.) Translate into Latin.
The robbers will give an oath amcHig dieiQB^vea.-^8B8ar
binds all the Germans by a promise and an oath. — Caesar bound
the chiefe of the state by an oath and by hostages. — ^The senate
hitmsts (com mitt it) the whole republic to Cicero. — ^Thd
consuls win take care of our republic* — ^The ancients worship-
ped many gods, bat especially Juf^ter. — ^We have lost the re-
public by (per) our own folly. — Jupiter is the guardian of our
house. — ^Apis, the sacred ox, is the guardian of thit city. —
Minerva was the daughter of Jupiter. — Grood men do not fear
the anger of JupitOT*
Digitized by
Google
183 RULES OF 6BNDEE9 THIRD DECLENSION.
(355.) LESSON LVII.
Summary of Ruks of Gender from the Nominative
Pormation.*
I. Masculines either
1. Add 8, and change the stem-vowel before it; e. g.^ ^ *
gurgds, gurglt-ls, whirlpool; milfts, milit-is, wl-^
aier ; codex, cddic-is, hook, )
2. Present the stem er, ul, or, without adding s ; €. ^.,
ans6r, ans6r-ts, goose; consul, constil-^, consul;
hdndr, hon5r-l8, honour.
3. Drop n without adding s; t. g.y sermo, serm6n-ls,
speech; carbo, carbon-is, com*
4. Change dr of the stem into Is, 5r into ds ; e. ^.,
clnis, cin6r-ls, ashes; pulyis, pulT6r-is, dust;
flos, i\6r 'U, flower.
11. Feminines either
1. Add s without changing the stem-yowel; e.g.^ urb-s,
urb-ls, city; nox (noct-s), noct-ls, night; tox
(vdc-s), ydc-!s, voice ; quies, quiet-is, quiet.
2. Insert a yowel (e or i) before adding s ; e. ^., nt^h-e-s,
nub-is, doud; n&v-i-s, nay -is, ship.
3. Drop n, and change i into o ; e, g,, im&go, im&gin-is,
image ; grando, grandin-is, hail,
UL Neuters either
1. Add e to die stem ; e,g,, m&re, m&r-is, the sea.
2. Present the unchanged stem al, ar, ur, 6r; e. g,, &ni-
m&l, anim&l-is, animal; calc&r, calc&r-is, spur;
fulgtir, fulgur-is, lightning ; 3qu5r, aequ6r-is, sea.
3. Change in of the stem into 6n, 6r into i&r, and dr, dr,
orQriutous; e.g"., carman, ear mi n -is, «on^; dbtir,
. 6b6r-is, ivory; 6ptis, 6p6r-is, work; corpus, cor-
pdr-is, body ; crtis, crur-is, leg.
* Abundant iOutrations of these roles have been ffiven. The stadent
•honld now learn them tboroagfaly by hearty and apply them in llie fob-
sequent lessons.
Digi'tized by
Google
BXCSPTION8. 183
Exertions*
I. 1. (My merges, mer^tls (f.), shectf.
' er, feminine : Itntdr, boat.
er, netUer : c&d&vdr, ubSr, v6ri)6r, v6r, tilbdr, spin-
th^r, with all the names of plants m dr.
I. 2.' 6 T, feminine : arb6r, tree.
dr, n«uter.- cdr, &ddr, aeqndr, marmdr.
Eem. The n«u^erf have 6 {ihort) in the stem ; tiie «uif-
, eulines, 6 {lon^),
J 2 ^ The abstract nouns' in lo are all feminine ; e. ^., riUio
I. 4. None.
'Masculines. Viz,, fons, mons, pons, dens and its
-rj . I compounds, torrens, ocddens, drlens.
"^ Grex, Greek nouns in ax, and a few in ix ; liipis,
vfis, p&ri6s, p6s.*
' Masculines. Latin nouns ending in nls ; e. g., ignis
(m.),fire ; with
IT n i Piscis, orbis, calHs, and candlls ;
^' ^' ^ Unguis, cauKs, axis, and ann&Hs ;
Fascis, sentib, fustis, canis, ensis ;
Vecds, vermis, posHs ; also men^s*
jj « J Masculines. Ordo, cardo, homo, turbo,
n. o. J Common. Nemo, margo.
III. 1. None.
iSSl, mxisculine and neuter in singular ; mascuUne in
plural. L&r, Iftils, masculine.
Fur, furfiir, turttir, vulttir, mascuUne.
Mcuculine : changing in into dn, only pectin, comh ;
changing dr into us, only Idptis, hare ; chang-
ing u r into us, only mus, numse. Feminine :
tellus, earth.
• There are also a few Cfreek words that are mascdBiie. As, assls,
eom, is masculine ; vas, vftsis, vase, is neater.
M
Digitized by
Google
M.
COMPARISON OP ADJECTIVES, (LVnL— LX.)
(356.) ABJECTiVES are inflected both in English
and Latin to express degrees of quality ; e. g..
hraoer,
fort-i6r,
bravest.
fert-iffslmiiii.
LESSON LVIII.
The Comparative Degree*
(357.) The comparative has the ending i6r for
the ma^cvline^ and ius for neuter. These endkigs
are added directly to the stem of the adjective ; e.g"..
Brofoe, fort-is ;
braver, fort-ior;
fort-ius.
Hard, dor-us ;
harder, dftr-ior;
dOr-ins.
Beautiful, piilch-er>
r-);S
more beautiful, pnkhr-ior ; ptQchr-ius.
{stem, pulchr-);
Rem, 1£ the stem endtf in 8 vowel, the oomparatiTe is ibnaed by lIlA
xue of mtgis, mare, instead (rf'tiie ending; c g.,
pums, pi-OS ; more pious, migls plus.
JU, idone-us ; more Jit, mftgis IMtineem.
(358.) DECLENSION OF COMFARATIYES.
smouLAm.
■•se.ndF«in.
Neat.
Kaac and Fem.
Neat. H
N.andV.
dur-i6r.
ddrifts.
dflr!dr6s.
dClr-i«rft.
Qen.
dur-loris.
der-iorftu
diSr-!«rfim.
ddr-{6r£lm.
Dat
dur-iori.
dftr-iori.
ddr-i5fibns.
ddr-idrfbiis.
Ace.
dur-idrSuL
dnrias.
dur-iores.
ddr-iOrtL
AU.
dflr-IOre.
dur-I6r€.
dfir-ISribfis.
dflr-ioribus.
J2em. In the later writers, I iivsed for tU. sing,
instead of S.
endliif fra^pMd^
Digitized by
Google
COBIPASISON OF ADJBCnVSS.
185
EXEEOISB*
(359.) Vocabulary.
ZjOce, iimilar to, simSiB (takes iai^
sometiiiiefl gen., 106, IL, c).
Amiable, ttmfibilis^ is, d.
Eloquent, eldqxiens.
Eaxellent, prsestanB.
Jgneranee, Igndratio, (ignontion) U.
Knowledge, identia, ae.
Silver f vrg/soltxa^ L
Vile, paltry, vilis, ia, fi.
Juetice, JTutittifl, se.
(360.) Exampks.
(a) A pirate is more like a
wild heast than a man.
DeoT, precious, ciribi, X, ttm.
Few, pawn, ^ & (twed only in pL).
Indeed, qoidem (adv. ; alwajf standi
next c^ter the word to which it
refers).
Swift, cSlSr (105, B. 1).
Than, qn&n (con>).
To seek, qmBrevOh
Antonine, AntOninna^ i
Future, futorus, fi, fim.
(&) Nothing is mxrre amiable
than virttie.
Praedo ffirae (106, II., &) est
s 1 m 11 i o r quam h5rolni
(dat).
Nihil est &m&blliu8 quam
virttis, or
(c) Nihil est virtatd &m&-
bilius.
(c) Rule of Syntax, — ^The conjunction quam (than) is fre-
qnentiiy omitted, and then the nomi with the compara-
lire must be put in the ablative case.
Cicero was more eloquent
than Casar.
Cicero fiiit CsBS&re fil5-
qnentior.
(361.) Translate into English.
Nihil est virtate prsstaatius. — Vhrtus est prsBstantior
quam robur (344). — Igpor&tio mSlorum atllior est quam sci-
enti&. — ^Aurtim gr&vius est argentd. — ^Argentumvilius est
auro, virtu tlbns aurum. — ^Lupi fdrdcidres sunt quam
cftnes. — ^Tuflus Hoslalius fdrdcior erat Rdmfilo. — JusHtiam
qusiimus; rem (app., witJi justitiam, 225, a) aur6 carid-
rem. — Panels (dat. gov. by c&rior, 106, 11., b) cftrior fides
est, quam pecunia. — ^Mihi (dat.) ftmici&s fult me ipsd c&ri5r.
— Omnds suds (t. e., his friends) cftros h&bet {he holds) ; md
(ace.) quldem s 6 ipsd c&ridrdm. — ^Nemo Romandrum (par^
UHve gen.) dldquentior fuit Clcerdne.
(362.) Translate into Latin.
1. IVUh qua m.— The horse is swifter than the dog,— -Igno-
Digitized by
Google
186
COMPAEISON OF ADJECTIVES.
ranee of future evils is better than knowledge (of them). — ^Lions
are fiercer than wohres. — ^Antonine was more pious (357, R.)
than CsBsar. — ^The son was more amiable than the father. — ^A
robber is more like a wolf (dat, 106, II., b) than a man.
2. WithotU quam (with ablative). — Justice is a thing more
precious than gold. — Gokl is more paltry than virtue. — ^Nothing
is more amiable than virtue. — To Crassus his friends were
dearer than himself. — He (hcui) held aU his own {friencls)
dear, but Cicero even dearer than himself. — What (170) is
heavier than water? GoH. — ^What iflt more excellent than
strength ? Virtue.
LESSON LIX.
Superlative Degree.
(363.) The superlative ending is i s s i m li s, which
is added to the stem of the adjective.
PoMtira. Coiii|wrmtiT». Si^trlathr*
J9ear, cftr-us ; c^^rer, c&r-ior ; dearest, cS^r-i a simtB,
Brave, fort-is ; braver, fort-ior ; bravest, fort- i s s i m ii s.
Happy, more happy, most happy,
felix (fefic-s) ; fefic-ior ; fefic- i s si m ti s.
(364.) But adjectives whose stems end in e r add
the ending rimus.
Unhappy, miser ; most unhappy, miser- r 1 m ti s.
Svnft, c6l6r ; swiftest, c61er- r 1 m ti s.
Beautiful, pnlcher ; m^st beautiful, pulcher- r 1 m ti s.
(365.) Several adjectives whose stems end in 1 add
1 1 m u s.
Easy, fftcU-ls ; tasiut, fi&cil-ll m ft a.
EXERCISE.
(866.) Vocabulary.
Cyrus, CfrlSM, L To p t^ ete tv e moderation^ mftdtim hS-
Hannibal, Hannibil, (HanoXbil) U, bdrA (= to have moderation).
DifficuU, difflcmi (dl-KSoQif ). Carthage, Cartbftgo» (CuiaAslh) b.
Moderation, m6dAB, I, Metal, mdtaUtim, L
i>«rw«», Diiiw, i To stain, mSoQlarft.
Digitized by
Google
COMPARISON OF ADJEOTIVES. 137
(367.) Examples.
(a) Socrates was very wise, i S5crate8 s&pientissimus
I fuit.
A high degree of qaality {very good, very wise, &c) is ezpreaied in
Latin by the superUUive,
{h) Of aU thesey the ^eZ-l Hdmm omnimn fortisslmi
gians are the bravest. \ sunt Beiges.
Rule of Syntax. — The genitive plural is used with the
superlative degree : the most learned of the Romans ;
doctissimiis Romanornm (partitive gen., synt, 697).
(c) Among the Helvetians
the noblest was Orgetorix.
Apud Helvdtios nobl-
lisslmus fuit Orgdtdrix.
(368.) Translate into English.
Urfos Syr&cusas (app., 225, a) GrsBC&rum urbium est pul-
cherrimd. — ^Prsestantisslmi Persarum rSgesfuerunt Cyrus et
Darius. — ^Pompeius magnam belli gloriam mortd (55, a) tur-
pissimft m&ciilavit. — ^Hannibal fortissimtis erat omnium
Carthaginiensium. — Gallorum omnium fortissimi sunt Bel-
gsB. — Cicdro Sldquentisslmus fuit Rom&norum. — ^Difflcilli-
mum est modum h&bdrd (161, d). — ^Apud ^duos ndbllissl-
mus et fortisslmus fuit Divlti&cus.
(369.) Translate into Latin.
Plato was veiy wise (367, a). — Plato was the wisest of aU
the Greeks (367, b). — ^The city Rome was the most beautiful
of aU the Roman cities. — Of all these, the Britons are the bra-
vest. — The most excellent leaders of the Romans were Caesar
and Pompey. — Carthage was a very beautiful city. — Of aU
things, the most difficult is to preserve moderation. — Of all
(men), the most happy (beatus) is the wise (man). — The hard-
est of aU metals is iron. — Among the Greeks Themistocles
was the noblest. — Caesar led the bravest soldiers across the
very broad river.
M2
Digitized by
Google
188
IRREGULAR COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES,
LESSON LX.
Irregular Comparison of Adjectives.
(370.) Several adjectives are quite irregular in
their comparison. The following are the most im-
portant.
Copip«r«tiv.
SoperhtiTa.
eood, bdnus.
bctdf mSIuB.
greixtf VDk^tm*.
muck, molttia.
9maU, parvils.
oldt sSnex.
young, Mvenis.
oviwardy extfinu.
bdow, inf iros.
above, stlpdrtUi.
hind, pofltgriis.
better, m6lior.
worse, pejor.
greater, ml^dr.
less, ndndr.
older, Bgni6r.
younger, jtuoidr.
fnore outward, ezt^or.
lower, inferior.
higher, stipfiridr.
hinder, post^ridr.
best, opOmas.
worst, pessImAs.
greatest, maximus.
^^' Jplflrfmtti.
very many, > *^ •"**"**•
leoMt, mii^lis.
wanting.
wanting,
outermost, extrSmiitf.
lowest, infimttB, or
Imiis.
highest, Bdpremtis, or
BommOs.
hindmost, postr§mag.
(371.) Several adjectives have no positive, but form
the comparative and superlative from a preposition,
adverb, or obsolete word.
Comparative.
Superlative.
(on this side, citra.)
[withinr, intra.)
{beyond, ultra.)
{near, pr5pe.)
{bad, deter.)
nearer, ctteridr.
inner, interior.
farther, tilt6ri6r.
neatrer, prdpl5r.
worse, detSrUSr.
former, prior.
nearest, cttlmiiB.
inmost, intlmas.
worst, dlterrfmOi
first, primiis.
Bern. 1. Div£s, rich', richer, ^thor, ^Tttior; richest, ditlssliniis,
tissXinTU. (Cicero uses the longer form, CaBsar the shorter.)
2r Compoond adjectives in dtcns, fleas, vdlus, add entior fi>r the
comp., and entissimus for the saperl. ; e. g., bSn^-rdlos {Jknevolent),
bSnST6l- entior, bSnSTSl-entisslmiis.
EXERCISE.
(372.) Vocabulary.
Disgraceful, unworthy, indign&i, fi,
iim (in+dignos).
Infamy, disgraceful crime, fl8{^-
titim, T.
Wisdom, sSpientii, e.
The Suevians, SuSyl, dram.
Warlike, bellicOstis, S, ilm.
Condition, conditio, (condltidn) If.
America, AmSrica, 8b.
Emperor, imper&t$r, dils (355, L, 8).
Digitized by
Google
IRREGULAR COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES* 189
(373.) Exampks.
(a) It is disgraceful to he
conquered by a superior ;
more disgrjiceful (to he
conquered) hy one inferior
and lower.
Indignmn est ft stlpdridre
viDci; iodignins ab inferi-
or e atque humilidre.
pSere the infin. pfuis. vinci is used as a nent noozi, nom. to ei^ and
indignnm agrees with it in tiie predicate.]
(h) What is hetter for man i Qidd est h5ii^i mdlitis s&-
than toisdom ? | pientift (360, c) 1
[Here homM is in tlie dat (advantage or disadvantage, 106, XL, b).}
(374.) Translate into English.
Nihil est melius quam (360, h) sftpientift. — Hibemi^
minor est quam Bntannid,. — Nihil est p6jus flftgitio. — Hos-
tSs cMeiit^r Idcft (309) siipdriora occdp&bant. — Maximft
pars Aquitaniae ob»[d3s ad Caes&rem mislt. — Suev5rum gens
est longS maximll et bellicosissimft Germftnorum omnium
(367, h), — Ailovistus agrum SSquftnum, qui optlmus drat
totius GaDiae occtipavit — Infimft est comKtio et fortunft ser-
Tomm. — ^Prlmus et maxlmus rSgum Romanorum fdit
KomMus.
(375.) Translate into Latin.
It is disgraceful to be conquered by a junior, more disgrace-
ful by a senior. — What is better than virtue ? what worse than
vice ? — ^What is better for man than honour ? Wisdom. — ^Eu-
rope is less than Asia ; Asia than America. — The bravest of
the Be^ans were seizing the higher grounds (ldclj|. — The
greatest part of Gaul made (fecit) a surrender. — "Ilie first
and greatest of the Roman emperors was Caesar. — The poor
are often more benevolent (371, R. 'd^jthan (quam) the rich.
— ^The worst (men) are often more-happy than (quam) the
best. — ^Among the Helvetians (by) far the richest and noblest
was Orgetorix.
Digitized by
Google
Digitized by
Google
^St l!».f4~^>s
r r "
§ 6.
SUPINE.
(377.) The Supine presents the action of the. verb
under the form of a noun in two cases, the accusative
and ablative. The former supine ends in um, the lat'
ter in u ; which endings are added to the supine-stem
of the verb.
LESSON LXI.
Supines.
(378.) The Supine-stem is formed by adding to
the verb-stem,
(1) Inlstconj., ftt; «. ^., &m-&^.
(2) In 2d coDJ., \X\ e. g.^ m5n-lt-.
(3) In 3d coDJ., t; «. ^., reg-t = rect-.
(4) In 4tJi conj., 1 1 ; e. ^., and-it-.
\Rem. Many supines, however, use different connecting vowels, or
take s (and not t) before nm and a. For tliis reason, therefore, all
sapine-stems wiU be given in the following vocabolaries. Where
no snpine^stem is given, it is to be understood that the verb has no
supine.]
(379.) The supine in tim is a verbal noun of tJie accusative
case, and is put after verbs of motion to express the design of
that motion ; e» g.^
L3g&ta &d CaBsftrSm vdniunt
rdg&ttim* auidliiim.
Ir6 dormittim.
(a) AmlmssadoTs come to
Casar to ask assistance.
(&) To go to sleep (to sleep-
ing).
(380.) The su^nne in u is a verbal noun of the ablative case,
and is used afber adjectives signifying good or had, easy or diffi-
cult, pleasant or unpleasant, 6cc,
* adgftttlm= accus. answering to the qaestion wkUker.
Digitized by
Google
142
BUPINB.
Estf&dld factfl.*
EstmirftbUd dicta.
(a) It is {a thing) ecuy to do
(or, to be done),
(b) It is (a thing) toonderfid
to tell (or, to be told).
(381.) The foDowing are neariy all the supines in u which
are in use: dictQ, audita, cognlta, facta, inventO,
m^mdrftta.
EXEBOIfE.
(383.) rocabubny.
To a$k, iemamdt pottiilirS (pcwtu-
Ut).
To congratulate, gratulari (giftttt-
lat), dep.
To come together, oonTfinirB (0011+
y<^mr6, oonvfin-, oomvent-).
To complain, qnSrdr (quest).
Custom, consuStudd, (ooiuraetudin)
U (£, 355, n., 3).
To collect com, frdmentari (frumen-
tftt).
A rrmriow, TrSvfr, I (65).
(383.) Example.
Divitiacus came to
to ask assistance.
To hmege, oppugnlrft (oppognftt).
Hand, hand of men, mfinus, tbi.
Wonderful, mlr&lnlis, S (104).
Very easy, perf icOis, « (104).
To do, ftc6r6 (fact).
To tay, tell, dicdre (diet).
Best, optimiis, S, um (370).
To find, inT^nirS ^+v6iurB), iii-
▼ent
To happen, acciddftt.
To endure, tdl6rftr6 (tdl6rat).
Senate, sSn&tiui, tkf.
Rome
Bivitiftciis R m & m vdnit
auiLlliiim postulatiim.
Rule of Syntax. — The aceusatiTe is used with the names
of towns and smtU islands, to answer to the question
fvhither ; e. g.^ in (a) Rdm&m.
(384.) Translate into English.
1. Supine in iim. — Princip^s cMtfttis &d Csesfirem gr&tii-
latiim convenSrunt. — ^Tr^vM magnSl m&nu (55, a) castrft op-
pug n at u m ydnerunt. — L^gftti ftb ^duis ven@runt, q n e s t u m.
— Caes&r ex consudtftdind Qnftm l^gidndm misAt frttmentft-
ttim. — Leg&ti Rdmftm &d sdn&ttim vdnerunt auxXlium pos-
tai&tum.
2. Supine in u. — Est peri^ild facta. — Est jucundtim au-
dita. — QuaBd&m (178, 1) sunt turiM& dicta. — Qu5d optXmOm
est facta, f^i&na. — ^Virtds difflcXBs est iuTenta. — ^Midtft
acddunt dur& tdlSr&ta.
* F acta = ablatlTe of respect, wherein.
Digitized by
Google
SUPINE. 148
(385.) Translate into Latin.
[Wcnrdfl in Italic to be rendered by fnpinei.]
1. Supine in urn. — The consuls, accordiDg to (ex) custom^
sent a large band to collect com. — ^AU the chiefs of the iBdnans
were coining to Rome to ask assistance. — All the ambassadors,
accordiDg to custom,* came*together to Cssar to congratulate
(him). — The soldiers of the tenth legion came to the general to
oompUdn. — ^The Germans came (in) a large band to attack the
town.
2. Swpine in u. — ^It is (a thing) wonderful to he heard. —
WhsLt (quod) is base to he said, I will not say. — ^What is diffi-
cult io he done, I will do. — A true (verus) friend is difficult to
he found. — Some-things are very easy to he done.
* According to custom :si ex confMtadiae.
Digitized by
Google
§ 7.
TENSES OF VERBS FOR COMPLETED AC-
TION.— PERFECT, PLUPERFECT, AND FU-
TURE PERFECT.— FULLER STATEMENT.
(LXIL— LXIX.)
(386.) It has been stated (262) that the tense-stem of the
perfect, pluperfect, and future perfect tenses is the same. In
Lessons XLIV., XLV. we gave one mode of forming this
tense-stem for each conjugation. There are several other
modes, which we now proceed to state, taking up the conjuga-
tions separately. To make the tables complete, we shall repeat
ttie first method at the head of each.
LESSON LXIL
Forms of Perfect-stem. — FirsP Conjugation,
(387.) There are four ways of forming the per-
fect-stem in the^r^^ conjugation,
I. By adding Hky to the verb'Stem ; &m-&r6, &m-&y
n. " ii " 86n-ftr«, s6n-fi
III. reduplicating* the first con- ) , ^ ^ , „ ,
sonant with d ; >
IV. lengthening the stem-vowel ; j tl v -ftrft, j a v -.
On this table, observe that Class
I. ccmtaiiu most of the veiba of the first coi^gatlon.
IL oontainB eleven simple veibs (of which a list may be found, 664).
HL contains bat two simple verbs, viz., dftrfi, to give, and stard, to
stand.
IV. cfwrtains bat tv>o simple verbs, viz., jiivare, to assist, and Iftvir^
to wash,
(388.) To form the perfect, pluperfect, or future perfect of a
* To redupUcate a consonant is to pr^ix it to a stem with some con-
necting-vowel ; thos, mord-, redaplicate with o, momord; st-tre, re-
daplicate with e, stest-, but the second s is dropped, st6t-.
Digitized by
Google
PERFECT-STBM, FIRST CONJUGATION,
145
verb of any of the above classes, simply add the endmga of tlios*
tenses respectively to the perfect-stem ; thus :
InfinitiTe. PerfecVstem. Perfect tooM.
To /<»*«£, v6^a^6, rlitt-
To give, d-Xrd, d6d-
Tohdp, jilv.&rfi, juv-
latL
It
imtls.
istiDi.
^erant, or ere.
PlupeifiBut. Foton Piribct.
ftrim. drft.
6r§a, 6rl8.
drftt erit
firftmiis. fii^tmiis.
drOBt. drint.
EXERCISE.
(389.) [^p* Hereafter, in all the vocabalaries, the perfect and inpina
stems of verbs will be given in parentheses, inunediately after the infiwi'
iive. When no perfect or supine stem is given, it will be nndenitood tiiat
tbose forms of the verb are wanting ; and where two are given, tiiat &a
verb nses both. Thos: to hdp, IQvard (jftv-, jdt-); to glitter, mioftr<^
(micii-); to fold, plic&rS (pUcftv-, pucn-, plicAt-, plicit-). In these exam
pies mic&rd has no supine ; plictrS has two perfect and two supine forms.]
(390.) Vocabulary.
To demand {command), imp^rftre
(av-, at-).
To give, dare (dSd-, dftt-, 387, HI.).
Hunger, ftmfis (is), (300).
To tame, d6mare (dSmCi-, d5mlt-,
387. IL).
To thine, or jUuh forth, SmicSre
(fimlcii-, §+nucare, 387, II.).
To surround, circnmst&re (stitt- and
stdt-).
The $and, dry ground, azf dam, !
{n^eut. of taidja, dry).
An attack, impStus, ds (110).
To assist, adjtlvard (juv-, ji&t-, ad-{-
juvare).
(391.) Exampks.
(1) Stare = fo stand; con-st&re, to stand together, to
halt; circum-stftre, to stand-around, to surround*
(The compounds of s t ar e, with prepositions of one sylla-
ble, have stit- for perfect-stem; those with tuH), stfit-.)
(2) To resist or K^t^tonJJ Alicui rdsistdre.
any one* I
Partial Rule of Syntax — Many verbs compounded with
prepositions govern the dative*
•N
Door, nSris, (ftr) Is (300).
To creak, cr6p&rd (crepii-, crepft-).
To chide, reprove, incrdpare (in+
creplrd, crfipfi-, crdpit-).
A little while, paullispdr (adv.).
To withstand, rSsistfird (restiit^
rg+stftre).
To halt, constard (constitt-, con-f*
stare).
As soon as, simulatque (adv.).
To slay, kiU, interfic^re (interim
interfect-)*
To make, fiicdre, id (f^, fact^
199).
Digitized by
Google
146 PERFECT-STEM, FIRST CONJUGATION.
(3) To put any one to flight.
(4) To make an attack.
ACquem in ftigam d&re
( = to give unto flight).
Impdtum f&cdre.
[The Latin words in the fi^wing exerciies which iUmtrate the let*
tont are spaced.]
(392.) Translate into English.
Oppldftni, obsides qnos Css&r impSr&v-dF&t, ddd-erunt. —
Venfttores f&nid (abl., 55, a) liipos ddmu-erunt. — ^Ex monte
suMtd (adv.) flammaB emicu-drnnt. — ImpSr&tor oppid&nos
frumentd (55) adjuv-it. — ^Num cr6pu-6runt fSrgs? — Cae-
s&r vdhSmenter (215, IL, b) miHt^s incr3pu-it. — ^Hostes
nostris paullisper restlt-drnnt. — ^Hostes militibiis (391, 2)
circnmstdt-drunt, multosqne interfgc-erunt. — Nostn in
hostes impdtum fgc-dront, atque eos (391, 3) in fugam d3d-
Grunt. — NostTi simiilatque in arido constit-^runt, in hostes
impStum f^c-drunt atque eos in fugam ddd-grunt.
(398.) Translate into Latin.
The flame shone-forlli. — From (ex) the-top-of the mountain
(297, a) the flame suddenly shone-forth. — ^The huntsman had
tamed the wolf.^— The townsmen had given the hostages. —
The Belgians gave all the hostages that (rel. pron.) Caesar had
demanded. — The general had reproved the lieutenant and
(que) the soldiers. — Our (men) were-withstanding the enemy
(dat.) — Our (men) bravely withstood the enemy, and (que)
killed many. — The Belgians surrounded our (men) (dat, 391,
2), and killed many. — The Romans often put the Belgians to
flight. — Our men haltdd upon (in) the dry-ground. — As-soon-as
our men halted upon dry-ground, they bravely withstood the
enemy (391, 2). — Our men put-to-flight the enemy whom
(dat., 391, 2) they had bravely withstood.
LESSON LXIII.
PerfecUstem. — Second Conjugation.
(894.) The perfect^stem in second conjttgation is
formed in Jive ways.
Digitized by
Google
FERPECT-STEM, SECOND CONJUGATION. 147
I. By adding n to the verb-stem ; mdn-erd, mdn-fi-.
II- " 6v " d6l-6r6, d6l-6v-.
Ill- " s " mftn-6r6, man-8-.
IV. reduplicating the first con- }
sonarU and vmvei ; \ mord-Srfi, m6-mord..
V. lengthening the stem-vowel ; v i d -Sr6, v i d -.
(395.) On this table, observe that Class
L contains fnott of the verbs of the second ccn^jiigation.*
n. contains only fler«,«o««e3»; n6rg,to«pf»; d6l€rli, to destroy!
with the compounds of the obsolete words plSrS, to Jill;
51er6,t to grow; siiere,t to he accustomed, [For a list, seo
663, n.]
HL contains many verbs, of which a list may be fomid (663, IIL).
The rales of euphony must be applied here.
(a) b be&re s sometimes passes into s.
lafinitire. Perftct. 8iq>ine.
To command, jab-6re, jub-sl=jussi, jussfim (jub-sum).
(b) t-soond before s dropped.
InfiohtTs. Perfect. Sopine.
Tolaughf rid-ere, iid-si=risi, risiUn (rid-sum).
(c) c-sound +8 = x. Any c-sound before t=c.
InfinitiTe. Perfect Sopine.
Totncrease, aug-ere, ang-si=aux-], aucttUn (aug-tom).
(i) c-sound after 1 or r dropped before s.
Infinitive. Perfect Sapine.
To glitter, ftilg-6re, ftdnii (ful(g)s-i), ful-sum(ful(g)sum).
IV. contains /<wr simple verbs. See list (663, IV.).
Infinitive. Perfect Supine.
To bite, champ, mord-€re, md-mcnrd-T, morsum (mord-sum).
Tovau;,j;>r0mu^spond-Sre, sp5-pond-i, sponstun (spond-sxmi).
[The compounds of these verbs drop the reduplication ; eg».
Infinitive. Perfect Supine.
To answer, rCspond^e, respond-!, responsum (respondHram).]
V. contains eight simple verbs, for wUch see list (663, V.).
Infinitive. Perfect ^_„
To favour, fiv-er6, filv-i, fautum.
To move, mdv-erfi^ mov-i, motnm.
EXERCISE.
[Befer to 386 and 389.]
(396.) Vocabulary.
Carthage, Carthago, (OarthSgin) Is To fill up, complSre (oompl«v-, coi
plet-, 395, IL) [con+plgrej.
Oood ioill, vdluntfts, (voluntit)
(293).
To destroy, deUrd (delev-, ddlet-,
395, II.).
* Many examples of this class have already occurred.
t Some of these have sco in present indicative : adolesco, oonsuesco.
Digitized by
Google
148
PBRFEOT-STEMy SECOND CONJUGATION.
Tq remain^ mSn£r6 (mans-, mans-,
394, HL),
To come, vdnirg (v6n-, vent-).
A slayer, interfbctor, oris (319).
To tee, vid&© (yid-, vis-, 395, V.).
To open, fipSrirS (ap6rii-, apert-).
Gaie, portft, e.
To flee, ftigere (io), (fiig-, faglt-).
Bit, bridle, frmxmm, I (plnr. 1 and ft).
SagvrUum, Sftgontmn, L
Hill, ooUXs, Is (m., 303, R.).
(397.) Exampk.
Seipio ] St^pio, nis.
(mmome^Q >
4/Woaniw, ) AfricAnQs, L
Numaniia, Numantia, s.
^ defence, fortyication, mtbiitio (nis),
(C, 333, R.).
Biven up to, cufar as, nsqiid (adv.).
Cheat, ingens, (ingent) is (107).
Standard, signum, L
Tooth, dens, (dent) Is, (m., 295, R.).
On the very day of his ar-
rival.
Eddem quovdndrat did
( = £^ wry day on which
day he had come).
(398.) Translate into English.
Hannibal S&guntum dele ▼ it, Scipio Carth&^nem. — Scipio
AMcftnuB nrbes dnas pbtentis^mas, Carth&ginem St Numan-
tiam delevit. — Caes&r h&s munitiones diEgentSr auxit. —
Gain partem coUis, usqtie &d murum oppidi, castiis (55, a)
complevdrant. — ^Adventtis Idg&ti siunm& sp6 et v61untate
urbSm compl3vit. — ^Diii barb&ri in fide mansdrant. — It&
complures dies (191, a) mansdrant castril. — CsBS&r eddSm
did (118, II., c) in ^duos castr& movit. — Imper&tor, eodem
quo Tdndrat di© (397) castHi mdvit — BrQtns et Cassius, in-
terfect6res (225, a) CsBsftris, beUum ingens mdv^runt.* —
Ldgidnes, slmtilatque noetrS. sign& vide runt, portfts &pdfud-
runt. — ^Equus frmnoB mdmordit. — Spdpondistind pro am- *
ico? Sp6pondi.
(399.) Translate iiito Latin.
Scipio destroyed Carthage, a most powerful eity. — God has
fiUed the world with all blessings (bona, neut.). — Socrates
never laughed. — The forces of the Ganls had filled the whole
(o m n e m) place, even-up to the wall of the town. — The Gauls
had filled-up the higher (siipdrior) part of the hill with
(their) very-crowded (densissimus) camp. — The coming
of Cesar filled the army with the highest hope and good-wiD.
For many years the barbarians had remained in friendship and
* In the sense ofexoited, stirred up.
Digitized by
Google
P£KFECT-8TEM9 THIXD CONJU6AIIOV. 149
fidelity (fide que). — Caesar moved (his) camp into the (terri-
tory of the) iEduans on the very day of his arrival. — The ene-
my saw our soldiers, and fled. — ^The horses were champing the
bits. — The wolf bit the dog with his teeth (56, a).
LESSON LXIV.
Perfect-stems. — Third Conjugation,
(400.) The perfect-stem in the third conjugation is
formed in six ways.
I. By adding B to the verh-stem ; scrib-erd, scrip-s-.
n. " il " c51-6r6, c61-ii-.
III. " y, (wiv " p6t-6r6, pet-iv-.
IV. reduplication ; c u r r -6r6, c ii c n r r -•
V. lengthening the stem-vowel ; f 6 g-fir6, f fl g-.
VI. taking the simple verb-stem ; v o 1 v -6r6, y o 1 v -.
We shall take up these separately, treating in this lesson
only the first.
(401.) Class I. — Perfect-stem formed by adding 8
to the Verb-stem,
Most verbs of the third conjugation come under this class*
It has abready been illustrated, but we here give a fuller ac-
count of the rules of euphony, in connexion with the various
stem-endings.
1. b before s or t pMsei into p.
IftfinitiTa Fwfact. Sopiaa
To write, scnb-SrS, 0crip«-i (scrib-f-i), Sdiptcan ^iorib4aB^.
To marry, ntib-iM, nupa-I (nub-8-i), mptiim (aiib4am).
S. A e^otmd -f8==x (c, g, h, v, gu, qn are classed with c-sonnds. If a
Btem ends in ct, the t is dropped, and the c unites with s to form
x). Any c-soond before t = c.
InfimtiTfe Perfect. Stipiii#^
To lead, duc-SrS, dnx-i (dmc-s-I), dnc-tom.
To cover, t6g-€r6, tex-i (teg-s-I), tec-tam (teg-tooBi).
TodrcRo, trtth^S, trax-I (trah-s-i), trac-tum (trah-tom).
N2
Digitized by
Google
150
PEftFECT-STEBffy THIRD CONJUGATION.
To live, ▼iv-firt, vix-I (viv-«-i), vic-tom (viv-tum).
I eztinc-tom
To quench, extingu-^rt, extiiix-I(extingii-i.I), \ (extrnga-tom).
To boU, cdqa-4ir6, oox-i (ooqa-s-i), ooc-tnm (ooqa-tom).
We class here also,
Iiiflnithr6« Perfe c t. 8iq>iBe.
To flow, flu-Srfi (fluv-), flax-i (fluv-« i), flnx-nm (flaT-ram).
To build, ■tra-Ard (stroc-), stroz-I (■trocji-i), ■trao-tam.
3. d or t before ■ either (a) ii dropped, or (&) paMOf into a.
Infinitire. Perfect. Sopine.
(a) To divide, divid-Sr6, dlvis-i (divid-f-i), divi-sun (diTid-ivm).
{J}) To yield, go, c6d-&r€, cess-i (ced-s*i), ces-snm (ced-anm).
To send, mitt-^rfi, mls-i (mit^-i), miB-flom (mitHram).
4. (a.) m or r before 8 sometime* passes into s.
InfinitiTe. Perfect. Sapine.
To presi, prSm-«r6, press-i (prem-s-I), pres-som (prem-som).
To bear, gSr-Srd, gess-i (ger-s-i), ges-tom (ger-tom).
{b.) Bat if m be retained, it assnmes p befiire it.
InfinitiTe. Perfect Siqitne.
To take, 8Am-6r6, smn-ps-I (snm-s-I), somp-tom (snm-tomX
5. If the stem ends in rg, the g is dropped before s.
InfinitiTe. Perfect. Sopine.
To scatter, sow, sparg-dr6, spars-i (sparg-s-i), spar-sunL
EXERCISE.
(402.) Vocabulary.
To bind, surround, cingdre (cinx-,
cuM^, 401, 2).
To draw up, instrttere (instrox-, in-
stract-, 401, 2).
To shut, daoddre (dans-, dans-,
401, 3, a).
To retreat, r6cSdgre (re+c6d«re,
cess-, cess-, 401, 3, b).
To approach, accddfire (ad+cSdere,
cess-, cess-, 401, 3, b).
To grant, ooncddfire (con+c«d8re,
cess-, cess-, 401, 3, b).
To bear, carry on, gSrSre (401, 4, a).
To spend, oonsAmere (oon+sAmSre,
samps-, sampt-, 401, 4, b).
(403.) Exampks.
(a) In all directions,
(h) Upon an expedition.
Rampart, vallfim, i
Triple, triplex, (tripHc) Is (107).
Janus, Jftnos, i.
Numa, Nomft, ».
Veteran, ySterSnos, S, iim.
In three dicisions, tripar6td (adr.).
Suddenly, r^pentS (adv.).
By-night, noctu (adv.).
There, Ibl (adv.).
Dragon, drfico, (drfic5n) is (333).
Arms, armii, 6ram {used only in plu-
ral).
Neighbouring, fii^tiEmas, i, iim.
State, civltas, (clvit&t) is (293).
In omnes partes.
In expdditidnem.
Digitized by
Google
PERFECT-STEM, THIRD CONJUGATION. 151
(404.) Translate into English.
In tuS, dpistdl& nihil mlhi scripsisti de tms rdbus. — Bar-
X^kn. valid et fossft (55, a) hibernft cinxdrunt. — Caes&r tripB-
cem &ciem instruxit Idgidnum ydtdr&n&rom. — ^R6m&ni tera-
plum Jani bis post Numa regnum clausdrunt. — Impdrfttx>r
exercitum in duas partes divisit. — CaBS&r trlpartito milites
^quitesque in exp^ditionem mi sit. — Prindpes r^pentd ex
oppido cum copiis rScessdrunt. — ^Mifites noctu usqud ad
castr& accessdrun t.-^CaBS&r obsidibus (54) fibert&tem c o n>
cessit. — Germ&ni cum Helvdtiis beUum gesserunt. — Mag-
num et gr&vS 5nus armorum mifitSs pressit. — ^Explor&tor ad
castr& hostium access it, atque lb! m&gnara partem di^i con-
sumps it. — Cadmus dentes dr&conls spars it.
(405.) Translate into Latin*
The ambassador wrote nothing concerning his own affiurs. —
The scout approached even-up to the walls of the town. — The
aeutenant sent-away messengers in all directions. — Caesar sent-
away the horsemen in three divisions into the neighbouring
states. — Cadmns slew (interfgcit) the dragon and sowed
Lis (ejus) teeth. — Cssar drew up the veteran legions in (abl.)
a triple line. — The soldiers spent a great part of the day in the
camp. — The enemy approached the town by-night. — The
townsmen shut the gates. — The Helvetians retreated by night
with all (their) forces. — Caesar sent-away the scouts in three
divisions upon an expedition. — The general sent-away the mes-
sengers by night in all directions. — The soldiers approached
even-up-to the rampart, and there spent a great part of the day.
LESSON LXV.
Perfect-stem. — Third Conjugation^ continued.
(406.) Class II. — Perfect-stem adds H to the Verlh
stem.
(a) Without change of the verb-stem (see list, 666, II., a) ;
e.gn
To nourish, maintain, al-6r6, Sl-il-I, al-tam.
To honour, euUivate, c5l-«re, cdl-tii, cul4»m.
Digitized by
Google
152
PERFECT-STEBffy THIRD CONJUGATIOIT.
{b) With change of yerb-ttem (666, II., h).
To place, p6ii-«r6, p6§Hl-i,* pos-Ttnm.
To beget, gign-erg, gia-t-i, gCn-l-tam.
Ci*A8s III. — Peffect-Hem adds r or Ir to the Verb^
stem.
(a) Adds y (and lengthens stem-yowel, if diort). (List, 666,
III., a,)
[These generally drop n, r, or 8c,t or change the order of the letters*
They most be carefiilly observed, as they occur in the vocalmlaries.]
To despise, spem-^rS, spr6v-i, Bpr6-tam (spem-tom).
To be accustomed, Bttesc-ir6, sogv-l, saS-tom.
(b) Adds iv (list, 666, III., b).
To 8ede, strive after, pet-6r«, p«t-iyl, pStl-tam.
EXERCISE.
(407.) Vocabulary.
Spaniard, Hispflnus, L
Command, jnsstis, te.
Against, eontrft (prep^ ftoc).
Peoph, p6puliiB» L
Immediately, stfitink
Avienus, Avi&aSm, L
To instigate, stir vp, instigftie
(av-, at-).
To place in, to put into, imp^iJSx^
(im+p6nerg, 40«, b).
To remove, rH/toMrfi (riSmor-, rS-
mot-, re+m&yCre).
To arrange, distribute, di^raiiSrfi
(difl+ponSrS, 406, b).
To relate, coinmdm6rir6 (ay-. At-,
oonrfmSmorftre).
(408.) Exampks.
Property, UuSSk, m.
To cross over, transirC (trans+iHI^
ly-, It-).
To decree, determine, decemSril
(d§cr§y-, deeret-, de+oemgre).
To disamrse, dissMM (diflser»>
dissert) dis-|-sSr^r6).
To plunder, dMpSrS (rip«-> r^^
di+r«p6re)4
A beast of burden, jumentom, L
Sacred rites, sacrS, omm (n., pL).
Instead of, pr5 (prep., aU.).
Advice, counsd, oon^fiao, L
On account of, db (prep., ace).
To despise, spemfire (406, IIL, a).
Winter, hiems, (hi6m) Is (293).
(a) By the command of Ca- 1 Ju s s ft (abl., 55, a)
sat.
* P6nd=p6sXno; i>dsai=pos-iy-i.
t In these verbs the n or sc does not properly belong to the root^ bat is
employed simply to strengthen the present hidicatiye and infmitivv ; to
know, nd-ere, strengthened nosc-ere, &c.
t Observe that the compounds of rfip fir 6, fSc8r6, c«p8r«, with tww-
OM^ioTM, change a into i m the infinitiye; diripSre, conflcSre, accl>
p«r«.
Digitized by
Google
PKEmCCT-STZH, THIRD OOlf JUOATIOV. 1S9
{b) To place on shipboard.
In n&Yds impdndrd (jmi
into ikijps).
Ad exercitum.
Ad finefl £dii5rTim.
(c) With (near) the army.
On the borders of the
JElduans,
Ad is often used by Cesar in the sense of near or wUh (i. e^ along
with).
(409.) Translate into English.
BQsp&iH, joflStt C«s&ii0, eo8 exercitQs qnot (165) oo]itr& p5p-
iilam Rdm&num midtos jam annos (191, a) ftludrant, st&tim
dimiserunt. — Avi6n6 (toc.), qu5d {Jbecaxue) in Itfilift mifites
populi Romfini contrft rempQbfioam inttigSksti (349, N.); et,
pro miHtibiis, tnam fllmlliam in n&ves impdsuisti; db eas
res, ftb exercita med te r^mfireo. — Csroftr Idgiones qnas in
It&lift, hibemdrnm cantft (135, II., b)^ dispoai&drat, ad se
revdc&vit. — Cur consOiom meum spreyisti? — Css&r, his de
cansis qnas commSmdrftvi, KhSnum transire decree 6 rat. —
Multi s&latom Mb! (dat.) in fiig& p61iT6rHat (or petiftmnt, 349,
N.). — Caesftr tMam hiftmem (191, a) ipse ad exerdtam (408, c)
m&n6re decr^yit. — C»s&r dufts Idgiones ad fhioa .fidndmm
pdsnit.
(410.) Translate into Latin,
The Spaniards had maintained an army (for) many years
(191, a). — Orgetorix maintained, at-his-own-expense (snmptfl
suo), a large number of soldiers. — Caesar i^aced the camp on-
tlw-borders-of (408, c) the Seqnanians^ — Socrates discoursed
concerning (de) the inmiortality of the soul. — The pirates
plundered many towns. — Cssar distrifaited three legions in
Italy, for-the-sake-of winter-quarters. — Thou-hast-despised
my coimsels ; thou-hast-instigated the soldiers against the re*
public ; thou hast put beasts^of-burden instead of soldiers into
the ships : an-accomnt-of these things, I remove thee from my
army. — ^The Romans honoured most-religiously (maxim ft
religion e) the sacred-rites of Jupiter. — CsBsar, for (de)
these reasons, had determined to cross die RMae. — ^Many sol<
ctofi son^ safety for tfaemsebes (by) flight.-— Th* inhabitants
■ODght peace frcmi (a) the Romans.
Digitized by
Google
154
FKEFBCT-STBMf THIRD CONJUGATIOIT.
LESSON LXVI.
Perfect-stem. — Third Conjugation^ continued.
(411.) Class IV. — Perfect-stem reduplicates the
first Consonant,
rSome cf these prei ent vowd-iAtmges, which moflt be carefiilly ob-
MiTcd. la) When the finit vowel ii i or n, the first cooscmaiit m
redaplicftte^ with that vowel j (b) in oOier verbs, with 6. (c) The
• , withl]
served, (a) '^
rednplicftted i
compoonds of d&rd, to give, ^
(a) First vowel i, o, or u.
lofinitive.
To learn, disc-€r6.
To demand, posc-ere.
To beat, tond-«r6,
(ft) Other verbs reduplicate with e (note vowel-changes in
stems).
Perfect
c6-cid-I Ot tlufrt),
p8-pul-T,
ce-(^-I (i long),
Perfect. Supin*
dl-dlC'i {b dtoppedj, (nosnpine).
pd-posc-I, (no supine),
td-tiid-i, tii-sam (tnd-
t).
loflnitiTe.
To/aU, cld-€re,
To drive, repd, pell-Srd,
TofeU, kiU, csd-6r«,
(c) Compounds of d & r d.
IndnHiTe.
To add, ad-dSrd,
To lote, per-d&g.
Saptne.
eft-sum (cad-snxn).
pul-sam.
c»B-nm.
Ad-did-I,
per-dXd-I,
Snpioe.
ad<^-tam.
per-dl-tom.
EXEROISB.
(412.) Vocabulary.
The whole, flnSversos, 8, Urn.
Duty, ierviee, mAnns, (mAnfir) Is
(345).
WaU», mnnii, iom (pL, neot).
Coming together, cof^Uct, congres-
sds, us.
Seventy, septttaginta (indecL).
To touch, tangfirft {t»tlg; tact-, 411,
*)•
To spare, paroSrS (pfipero-, pardtt-^
pars- ; governs dative),
(413.) Examples.
(1) To demand peace of
CsBsar.
To turrouhd, cingSre (401, 9).
Nobody, nSmo, (nemin) is (m. and
f., 25, a).
Woman, mulier, is (f., 25, a).
Child, infant, infans, (infant) is (c.,
25, a).
Thirty, trigintft.
Eighty, octdginta.
Immense, inunensus, i, Hm.
8um-qf-money, pdcunia, n.
To add, addSre (411, c).
(a) Cass&rdm p&c6m pos-
c6r6 ; or (h) p&cdm a CaB-
sftrS posc6r6.
Digitized by
Google
PEBFECT-STEM, THIRD CONJIJOATION. 155
Rule of Syntax. — Verbs of demanding (a) govern two ac-
cusatives, one of the person, the other of the thing;
but (b) the person may be put in the ablative with the
preposition a or &b.
(2) About twenty.
(3) To give one's self whoUy
up.
(4) The leader spared toom-
en.
Circiter viginti.
T 6 turn sd d&rd ( = to give
one's self whole up).
Dux mtilieribus p6per-
cit.
Rule of Syntax. — ^Verbs of sparing govern tiie dative.
tW Observe, the perfect of cfldSrS, to fall, k cdoidi ; of cnd€r6,
to fell or killf cScidi. •
(414.) Translate into English.
Legati ad Caesarem vgnfirunt, eumque pftcem (413, 1, a)
poposcerunt. — Hoc a me (413, 1, fc) munus univers& pro-
vincifi. p6 pose it. — Pueri linguam LaHnam didicSrant. — ^A
Grsecis Galli urbes maembus cingdrd didic6runt. — Nostri, in
primo congressu, circiter septuaginta cSciderunt; in his
Quintus Fulginius. — Arbdr v6tus c^cidit, quam (165) ferrS
(55, a) nemo cecidit. — LSg&tus, simulac provinciam tStigit,
Inertias (dat.) totum se d6dit. — Postquam Caes&r v6nit, ob^des,
armll, servos p5 pose it. — Milites non mulidribus, non infantl-
bus, pSpercerunt. — Caesftr l6gionibus cohort^s circiter tri-
ginta addidit. — Mors nulli (194, R. 1) hominum (partit. gen.)
p6percit (413, 4).
(415.) Translate into Latin.
The JEduans demanded peace of Caesar (413, 1, I). — The
whole province demanded peace of the Romans (413, 1, a). —
Of-our-men (nostri, nom., pi.) about eighty fell; among
them, Labienus. — Have you (135, II., a) learned tlve Latin
language? — The farmer felled very-many (plurlmas) trees
in the wood. — ^As soon as the lieutenant touched the province,
he plundered many towns. — The general demanded seventy
hostages, and an immense sum of money. — The old trees fell.
— This service the general demanded of me. — The leader
spared all the temples of the gods ; but the soldiers spared not
(n o n) women nor (n o n) children. — Caesar added to the foot-
soldiers about twenty cohorts. — Caesar added to the foot-soldiers
thirty horse-soldiers.
Digitized by
Google
150
PSRPSCnVSTEBff, THUD CONJUGATION.
LESSON LXVII.
Perfect-stem. — Third Conjugation, continued.
(416.) Class V. — Perfect-stem kngthens the Stem-
vowel of the Verb,
{a) Without YoweH-chxage.
To read, gather^ IflfiHW,
To conquer, vino-tott,
{h) With TCfwtH-ebBBge.
To drive, ag-4ir6.
To break, §nmg-W^
(c) io verbs (199).
Tofty, ffig-i«,
To take, cSp-id,
7b east, fic-i6,
To dig, f dd*i4»
To make, do, f «c-i4»
tUs-X.
cSp-6r6,
BXEKOISiU
(417.) Vocabulary.
Remains, remnant, rSliqoie, inim
(pL) (OT, B.).
To collect, ool%dr« (l«g-, lect-, 0011+
I6g«r6).
To receive, take back, r6d[p6re (o§p-,
cept-, r6+c5p6r6).
HeadUmg, pfSBcepi, (piiBd^it) te
<a4i., 107).
To reodve, acapdre (c8p-, cept>, ad+
capSre).
To bring-together, to compd, cdg6r6
(coSg-, coact-, con+«g6r6).
2rV> frrvo^ through, petfriagdrfi (frSg-,
fract-, peH-fraog^rft).
Dart, javelin, telum, I.
(418.) Examples.
(a) roigto^on^^tf^ei/Aocifc.
(h) WitMn the memory of our
fathers.
ftlg-X,
C6p-i,
feci.
lec-tom.
Tic-tOSL
■c-tanL
frao-tuD*
fdg-t-tam.
cap-taQL
jao-tam.
fac-tom.
To hurl, cai^Ic6'« ( j6c-, ject-, ccm+
TV? «fu2ertoi«, gaadpSrtt {c€p-> oept-^
8ab+cIpSr£).
To finish, conf icfirt (f 6c-, feet-, con+
facgrd).
To begin, indpdri (inc^^ iiioq^t-,
in+cap6r6).
£^a^ tfitas, ft, dm.
Cappadocia, CappfidOda, s.
^ district, pftgns, L
uSgypt, JEgyptQB, i ^).
£;an^^fik^(adr.).
TWai, jddlciimk, L
FamHy cf slatva, fimnia, m.
S« r«cip6r«.
Se ddmttm r^edpXt.
Patrnm D08tr5riim mft-
m5ri& (abl., 55, a>.
Digitized by
Google
PEEFB0TH3TBM, THOtD OOlfJIWATlON. 167
(c) Lucius Cassius, the con-IL. Cassias, consul.
The (j9nntofl»«f») first name is rarely written oat L. stands finrL no ins,
T. for Titus, &a ComuZ is in appositioD (2S5, <^ witii JL Catnu$,
(d) In wid-tummer. |Mddi& astfttd (118, IL, e),
(419.) Translate into English.
Servus meus or&tioDes et histdrias et carm^a l^git. — L3-
g&tus r^fiquias exercitils c olid git, Itlndribusque tQtis perCap-
pftdociam sd in Asiam r^cdpit — Nostri acdtdr impdtom fd-
c 3 runt atque praecipites hostes 6gerunt. — ^L&bienus, cum
his cOpils qnas ft Cassftre accepdrat, lid fines JEduorum con-
teiidit.-^Poiiipeiii8 magnftm ex Asift et iE^pt5 dassem co«-
gerat. — Mifites facild (adv.) hostium ftciem perfregSrnnt
atque in ede imptoun fdceraat.— I£c pftgns tlnus, patrum
nostrOmm m^mdrift, L. Cassium oonsftlem (418, c) interfdcd-
rat, et ejus exercitom sob jftgom (323, N.) misdrat. — Hostes
Bul^to tela in nostros conjdcdrunt. — ^Pompetns belkim T«rd
(in the spring, 118, XL, e) suscdplt, mSdift sestfttd confeclt.
(420.) TranslcEte into Latin.
The general had collected (c 5 g d r e) great forces. — ^Pompey
bvonght-together a great army from Asia and Egypt. — Have
you read the books of Cicero? — ^The general collected the
remnant of his army, and betook himself into Gaul. — Oar
(men) dro^e the enemy headfeng, and slew many. — Lahienos
had received four legions ftom Caesar.— -Labienus, with the
legions which he had received from Cssar, hastened to the
confines of the ^duans. — Orgetorix broi^t-tegettier to Ihe
trial all his fbmify-of-'siaveB ^m eirery side.— The ^nemy
brooght-togsulier afl (their) ships into one place. — ^The Romans
eosfly broke-tiiroag^ the feie-of-battle of tlie JEdoans. — CeMsr
finished the great wmr hiHiikl-sunmier (418, d) which be had
bagun in-the-sprifig (118, U^ c).
o
Digitized by
Google
158
PBKFBOT-BTBMy THIKD CONJUGATION.
LESSON LXVIII.
Perfect-stem. — Third Conjugation^ concluded.
(421.) Class VI. — PeTfect'Stem = simpk Verb-stem,
{a) Steins ending in u or v (Ust, 666, VI., a).
Totkarpen, icii-6r6, icti-i, acu-tnm.
To roll, volv-firfi, volv-i, volil-tam.
{h) Consonant-stems (list, 666, VI., b).
To turn, vert-Srd, vert-i, ver-rom.
(c) Compounds of can do and fendo (obs.) belong here;
To bum, incend-fttC, ino«nd-!, inceiiHimn.
To defend, W€urd qf, d«fend-6re, ddfend-i, ddfen-ram.
EXERCISE.
(422.) Vocabulary.
The back, tergom, L
ToJUw together, oonfla^re (oonflox-,
conflux-, con+flaere, 401, 2).
Discipline, disdCpllnfi, m.
Austerity, severity, sSySritas, (seve-
ritftt) is (293).
To dissolve, dissolTdrtt (■oIy-, lAlftt-,
dlH-Mlyere).
To return, r6vert6r8 (r6v6rt-, re-
yew-, r6+vert?r6).
(423.) Examples.
(a) The general appointed
a day for the council.
(6) What {number of) long
ships he had.
(c) To divide or distribute
among.
(424.) Translate into English.
Hostes terg& vertgrunt. — Divitise (57, R.) quae ad Romam
confluxgrunt, morum disclplinam sdvdiitatemque d is sol-
ver unt. — Caesar diem cum legatis constituit. — Dies, quam
Caesar constituerat cum l3g&tis, Tdnit, et l3g&ti ad eum
To appoint, to station, to determine,
coDfltltudre (stita-i stitiit-, oon+8t&-
taerfi).
To divide, to distribute, distiibiiSrd
(btl-, but-, dis+trlbuSre).
Desirous, covetous, cQpidua, i, iim
(govemg geniHv^,
To know, learn, oognoscfirS (oogndy-»
cognit-, con+DOfodrd).
To turn, verterS (421, h).
Imp^r&tor diem concllid
(dat.) constituit.
Quidquid n &▼ i u m (180) 1 o nr
gftrum hAbebat.
Distribudre (with ace. of
things and dat. oi ptrson).
Digitized by
Google
PERFECT-STEM, FOURTH CONJUGATION. 159
<150) rdyertdrunt.—- MiHtes sSse (145, c) fortitter (215, 2)
defenderunt. — Hostes copias suas in tres partes distribu-
eraDt. — Caesar, quidquid n&vium longarum h&bebat, legfltis
praefectisqae (423, c) distrlbuit. — ProeellsB fluctus vastos ad
littdr& volvfirant. — Csesar exercitum flumen (113, II., a)
transducSre constituit. — Caesar Dumndrigem ^duum sd-*
cum (125, II., b) ducdre constituit, quod (conj.) eumt cupl-
duni imperil (synt, 698, &, 1) cognovSrat. — ^diu ex ifindre
ddmum (113, III., R.) reverterunt.
(425.) Translate into Latin.
The soldiers defended the city very bravely (376). — The
general stationed the foot-soldiers near (ad, 408, c) the wall of
the town. — On-the-next-day (118, II., c) Caesar stationed all
the horse-soldiers in-front-of (pro) the camp. — ^The chie& of
the states returned to Caesar. — The day which Caesar had ap-
pointed for the council came, and the chiefs of the states re-
turned to him.^Our (men) turned their backs. — The riches
of the Romans had dissolved (their) discipline and austerity of
manners. — What money (423, b) he had he distributed among
(423, c) the lieutenants and soldiers. — The i£duans divided
their forces into two parts. — The tempests rolled vast waves to
the stars. — ^The general determined to take (due ere) the
lieutenant with him. — The seas were rolling great waves to
the shores.
LESSON LXIX.
PerfecUstem. — Fourth Conjugation.
(426.) The perfect-stem in the fourth conjugation
is formed mfive ways.
I. By adding iv to verb-stem ; aad-ir6, aud-iv-.
XL " ii " &p6r-ir6, &p6r-a..
III. " • " sSp-ir6, sep-8-.
IV. lengthening stem-vowel ; v 6 n-ir6, v 6 n -.
V. taking simple verb-stem ; comp 6 T'ir6^ comp 6 T'.
Digitized by
Google
160 PBBFBCT-BTBM, FOUBTH COMJUOATIOH.
(427.) On this table, observe that Class
I. ooiit«iiiiiiM»<oftheT«rb0ofthefbiii1faooc4«gfatioo.
[Komeioiu example! bate already ocamerpd. Any pecnMar
are ghraa in tiw voeabolariea.]
XL contsini/ntr nmide reifaa (aae list, 667, IL).
InAoitiTtt. Perfect Supiw
To open, uncover, iper-irft, ip«r-ft-r, iper-tom.
Toleapy «a-ir«, "il-tt-I* wd-tam.
ITT, oontainfl nine limple verbs (see list, 667, IIL).
Infinitire. Pwrfact. SttfrtM.
To bind, vinc-irB, vinx-i (viuc-s-i), vinc-tam.
To think. sentW, ieiis^CseDl^i), J (.^iitwwm^,
nr. fioritafas bat one yreih.
ItSnitif. Partat Sapiww
TooMu; v€n4r6, vfin-i, yen-tunL
V. coiiNiins two Torbs.
IsAnitiTe. PeHect Sapiafc
3\> «c«rto»»,/»uJ, comp«r-irfi, iMnp^H oemper^uiB.
To discover, rtpdr-fre, i«p«r4, rtter-tam.
EXERCISE.
<428.) Vocabulary.
To come togetiher, astemble, couye-
nire (cCn+renlre, 427, IV*.).
To find, inyttiilrB O^-pv^nlrd, 4S7,
IV.).
Thither, to that place, eO (adv.).
7\> open, fiperire (427, IL).
W^^en, qanm.
Youth, Juventds, ( jfirentfit) is (f.).
To lay waste, poptUiri, dq>. (pdpo-
lat-).
After that, postqaam {adv.).
Tc leap down, dSsilire (ddsllil- and
d€sili-, desTll^, dd+sSHre).
To come near, to approach, appr5-
pinqoire (fd4-p>@piB<|aire, wr^
at-), with dot.
To agree, consenOre (con+sentire,
427, IIL).
To disagree, dissenfire (dfa+senfire,
427, m.).
To come to, reach, arrive at, pervS-
nire (p6r+v6nire, 427, IV.).
Example.
{a) In a hutde ^ avcalry. I £ q u e « t r i p r » 1 i 6.
Bade of Syntux^-'-ThB ablatiTe is used to express the man^
ner of ao action, especially with an ac^eetive.
(429.) Tranship into English.
MiHtM ex n&^^bua d&iillerunt et hostibus (3d^l. 2) appr5-
pinqnftnuit (349, N.). — Opf^dani portas &pdru3runt, et ae,
atque opfildcim CseiiUi dJlddruitf.^-lioflte8 inter se dissensd-
runt. — Omnes ciTea una nteiit^ (abL, 438, a) consevsA'
Digitized by
Google
PERFECT-STEM, FOURTH CONJUGATION. 161
runt. — ^Helv^tu jam per angostias cojnas suas transdaxdrant,
et in iBduorom fines pervgndrant, eorumque agros pdpiila-
bantur. — Caesar cum L&bi6no Numantiam (713) pervenit,
ibique consules iny^nit. — Quum miHtes eo c on v end-
runt, n&ves tinum in Idcum coegdrunt. — ^£d postquam C»-
8^ pervenit, obsides etarma pdposcit.
(430.) Translate into Latin,
After-that the townsmen saw the standards, they (^ned the
gates, and gave themselves (up) to Caesar. — The Germans, in the
cavahy battle (428, a), leaped-down from (their) horses. — The
general led the army through the straits, and on the seventh
day arrived at the boundaries of the Germans. — The towns-
men leaped-down from the wall. — All the soldiers agreed
(with) one mind and voice (▼ o x). — When Caesar anivedHit the
town, the townsmen opened the gal!e8.-^When the general
reached Numantia, he called together the citizens. — ^When the
horsemen reached the town, the townsmen opened the gates.
— The lieutenant led-back the soldiers to the town, and there
found the general.
03
Digitized by
Google
§ 8.
FORMS OP TENSES FOR COMPLETED AC-
TION, PASSIVE.
LESSON LXX.
Tenses of Verbs for Compkted Action, — Indicative
Passive.
(431.) The tenses for completed action, passive
(perfect^ pluperfect, future perfect), are compounded
of the perfect participle passive and of the tenses of
the verb esse, to be: thus, amatus sum, I have been
loved; amatus es, thou hast been loved, &c.
(432.) (a) The perfect participle of any verb is the form of
which the supine is the accusative, and is inflected (like an ad-
jective of three terminations) with the endings iis, &, um;
thus :
Sopioes. PerC Part
Amat-i&m, ftm&t-iis, &, iim, loved,
M5nit-tim, mdnlt-i&s, &, um, advised,
Rect-tim. rect-tis, &, i&in, ruled.
Audit-fim, audit- lis, &, um, heard.
(b) The perfect participle, then, of any verb, is formed by
adding the inflection-endings iis, &, tbn to the supiBe-stem.
Digitized by
Google
(433.)
PEKFECT FORMS, PABSITE.
PARADIOH.
i6d
PBSFKCT PA8SIVK.
Sm&tds, S, iixn, i
Singular.
sUm, I have been laved,
6s, thou hast been loved.
est, he, she, it, has been loved.
Smfttl, 89, S,
PluraL
sumds, toe have been loved.
estis, ye or you have been loved.
stmt, they Kave been loved.
PLnPEBFECT.
Xm&ttis, A, iim.
ftmati, ffi, ft,
Sineular.
SrSm, I had been loved.
€ras, thou hadst been loved.
6rat, he, she, it, had been loved.
Plura].
Sramiis, we haid been loved.
firStis, ye or you had been loved.
erant, they had been loved.
FUTUBE PEKFECT.
ftmatCUt, S, urn, <
Smftt^ SB, S»
Singular.
€ro, I shall have been loved.
6ris, thou wilt have been loved.
6rtt, he, she, it, will have been loved.
Plural.
Srimiis, we shall have been loved.
Sritis, you will have been loved.
grant, th^y will have been loved.
(434.) Vocabulary,
To rout, to defeat, peUdre (pfiptil-,
polfl-, 411, b).
To dkmlge, emmtiare (e+xnmtiSre,
av-, §t-).
Sure, certain, certos, a, um.
To drive back, rfipellfire (rfipill-,
repnls-, r6+pell6re).
Private information, indlcinm, L
(435.) Ezampks.
(a) To inform any one.
{h) Casar was informed*
(c) All Oavl is divided into
three parti.
Beginning, Mtinm, L
Casticus, Castifctis, i.
Conference, colldqaiom, t
To hold, obtin6rd (obtitna-, obtenty
ob+t6nere).
Departure, discessiis, Um.
Nobility, nobHrtas, (nobffitat) U (£,
Allqudm certidrftm fft-
c6re ( = to make any one
more certain).
CaBsftr certidr factus
est ( = Casar was made
more certain).
Gallia est omnia divisa
in partes tres.
Digitized by
Google
164 FBEFBCT FOBBCSy PA881VB.
The perfect paiiive participle ia ■ometimei used widi eit u ta ad-
jective, and is then to be rendered aa a present ierue; e, g^ in {c), eit
diyiBA^^ is divided,
(436.) Translate into English.
Miles vnhidr&tus est. — ^BeQa gesta £rant. — ^Exerdtos Cassii
ab HeMtiis pulsus drat, et sub jftgum missus drat — ^Ea
res HelvStiis (54) per indiciam enuntiata est. — ^Helvdtii de
Cses&ris adventu certknres facti sunt. — ^f)^bi de Caes&ris ad-
▼entu Helvdtii certiores facti sunt, legates ad eum miserunt.
— Barb&ri telis (93, II., 5, R.) et munitione rSpulsi sunt. —
InitiumfugaB a Duimi5rige et ejus ^uitibus factum est. —
Legftti a DiVitiaco, JEduo (225, a) ad Caesarem missi erant.
— P&ter CasUci regnumon Sdquinis multos annos (191, Rule)
obtinudrat et a sdn&tu p5puli Ildmftni Amicus (80, a) appellfi-
tus 6rat. — ^Dies coUdquio (54) constitutus est, ex eo diS
quintus.
(437.) Translate into Latin.
The centurions of the first ranks were wounded on the same
day (118, II., c), — Caesar was inftnrmed (435, a) of (de) the
approach of the enemy. — The general had been informed of
the departure (d i s c e s s u s) of the Germans.— -The beaming
of the flight had been made by the soldiers of the tenth legion.
— The tenth legion had been defeated by the Germans, and had
been sent imder the yoke. — The conspiracy of the nobility was
divulged to the Helvetians through private-informatkm. — ^The
war had been canied-on (fw) many years (191, Rule)* — "Hie
enemy were driven-back by the darts of the soldiers. — ^Ambas-
sadors were sent by Cassius the constd (225, a) to the chiefs.
— The iCduans were called friends (80, a) by the senate of the
Roman people. — ^The townsmen were wounded by the darts
of the soldiers. — The horsemen of the enemy were driren-back
by the darts of the soldiers. — ^A day had been appointed for tiie
ronference*
Digitized by
Google
§9.
PARTICIPLES. (LXXI.— LXXV.)
(438.) The Participk presents the idea of the verb
under the form of an adjective : (a) the rising sun ;
(6) I saw the boy writing a letter. Sometimes, as
in (fl), its use is wholly adjective ; again, as in (6), it
governs the case of its verb. There are two active
participles in Latin, the participle of the present and
the participle of XYi^ future ; two passive^ the perfect
and the verbal in dus.
LESSON LXXL
Present Participle Active.
(439.) (a) The endings of the present participle actire for
the four conjugations are,
1. 2. 8. 4.
-ans, -ens, ens, -iens.
{b) By adding these endings to the stems respectively of the
▼erbs &m-&re, mdn-6re, rdg-6rd, aud-ird, we obtain the
present participle active :
Loving, advising, ruling, hearing.
Am-ans, m5n-ens, rdg-ens, aud-iens.
(440.) The present participle is declined like an adiective of
the third class (108).
Sizijiular. Plural
N. V. Amans. N. V. AmantSs, ftmantift.
Gen. Amantls. Gen. Amantiilm.
Dat. Aman^, 6cc, Dat. Amantibiis, &c.
Rem. The abL fdng. ending ii I when the part is used itrictly %b an
«4J. ; e. g., in florenti roiR, in a hloomint^ ro$e.
Digitized by
Google
166
PBESENT PAETICIPLE ACTIVE.
(a) Observe carefully that the Latin present participle ac-
tive expresses incomplete or continued action ; the language has
no active participle to express complete action. We cannot
translate the English having loved by any Latin active parti-
ciple.
(h) But deponent verbs (206) have both participles, the pres-
ent and the perfect ; esdurrting^ hort-ans; having exhorted^
hort'&ttis.
EXERCISE.
(44 L) Vocabulary.
To rise, 6nA {dep., ort-).
To desire, cup6r6 (I6-, Iv-, I^ 406,
JIL,b).
Labour, toU, UbSr, (ISb5r) !■ (m.,
319).
Watching, watchfulness, vigUantift,
m.
Especially, prtssertitm (adv.).
To depart, diBcddSrd (dis+cSdere,
401, 3, h).
To tveep, flert (flfiv-, flSt-, 395, 11.).
To look upon or at, intaSri (dep.).
AU, the whole, canctiui, fi, dm.
To worship, adore, ftdor&re.
Eye, dculxis, L
A Persian, PenS, as.
To doubt, dubitarg (ftv-, ftt-).
To set out, pr5f icisci (dep., prSfect-).
To sit, 8dder6 (sed-, sess-, 394, V.).
Firmament, heaven, CGelum, i.
To shine, micftre (389, EP*)-
The sun, sol, (sol) is (m., 319).
PtiU, planus, ft, ihn (with gen^
To be wanting, de-essd (with dot.').
Star, steUS, as.
To set [e, g^sA the heavenly bod-
ies), occIddrS (occid-, ooc&s-, ob-f-
diderd).
To throw before, pr6jTc6rB (jdc->
ject-, pro+j&cSre).
(442.) (a) Recollect that, to form pres. part act, yon add to the stem
ans in 1st oonj. ; e. g., am-ans : ens in 2d and 3d oonjs. ; e. g^
mon-ens, die-ens : iens in 4th conj. ; e.g., and-lens. Also, add
lens in the 16 verbs (199) of 3d conj.; e. g., clip-io, ciip-iens;
ftc-io, fac-iens.
ijb) In deponent verbs, the same rules apply: hort-jlri, hort-&ns:
5r-irl» 6r-iens; inta-eri, intn-ens, &c. The per£ act part,
in deponents adds (is, ft, um to the snpine-stem: hort-ftri^
hortftt-ds, A:c.
{e) The participle is used to abridge discourse.
(1) He heard me when J J He heard me saying that,
said that= \ Me Id dIcentSm andivit
(2) God, who governs all C QoA, governing all tiiingi.
\ Deus, omnift giibern&ns.
things=
(3) To him that desires^
_ i (The man) desiring.
Cflplenti
Digitized by
Google
PRESENT PARTICIPLE ACTIVE. 167
{d) He threw himself «^*) r- /•_,
CflBsar's feet, t a- n '*»j yj- * ^
K Se Cob sari &d pSdes prOjccit.
(e) Can enim, vero, or antem stand first in a clause or sen-
tence ? (No.)
(443.) Translate into English.
M6 Id dicentem audivistiiie ? — Persae sdlem drien-
tem (442, c) &ddrant. — ^L&bignus, suos (his men) hort&tus,
cupientibus signum dat. — Non ^Dim l&bor aut vigUantia,
cupienti praesertim &Hqaid (178, 5), Cassio dedrat (267, b).
— Caesar ab hibemis in It^Lliam disc^dens, l3gatos convdcat.
— ^Mulieres flentes 86se Caesari (442, d) ad pedes pr6j6c6-
runt.~Nemo, cunctam intuens terrain, dS divina providen-
tia duMtabit. — Caesar, in Italiam prdficiscens, l3gatOB
omnes ad se rgydc&vit. — Divlti&cus, flens, & Caesard haeo
{these things) pStebat. — Clcdro C&tdnem vidit in horto sd-
dentem. — Quant& (184, R. 1) est s&pientia Dei, omni&
g&bernantls ?
(444.) Translate into Latin.
[The words which illastitite the lesson are in Italie.]
The firmament is fuU of shining (438, a) stars. — "No one,
when he looks at (= looking, 442, c, 1) the firmament and stars,
win doubt respecting (d e) the wisdom of God. — Did they hear
me (135, II., a) when I said ( = saying) that (id) ? — The bar-
barians were-worshipping the setting sun. — Labienus, having
exhorted (440, h) his men, made an attack upon the enemy
(in hostes). — Caesar willingly gave the signal to the soldiers
when they desired it { = desiring). — To him that desires ( = de-
siring) anything, no labour wiU-be-wanting (267, 6). —Caesar,
departing from winter-quarters, giveel rewards to the soldiers.
— ^The eye, not seeing itself (s6, ace), sees other-things
(&li&). — The iSduans, weeping, threw themselves at the feet
of Caesar (442, d). — I saw my brother sitting in the garden
yesterday. — How-great is the power of God, who governs
( = governing) the world ?
Digitized by
Google
168 PARTICIPLB PUTURB ACmTB.
LESSON LXXII.
Participle Future Active.
(445.) The ending of the future participle active is
urusy which, added to the supine-stem^ forms the
participle ; e. g.^
About to love, of one who toill love, &mat-tlril8.
About to advUe, or one who will advise, mdnH-urtis.
(446.) PERIPHRASTIC CONJUGATIOIT
The different tenses of e s s e (to be), joined with the participle
future active, form what is called the periphrastic conjugation*
C Smatords stim, / wUl love, am about to love, intend to love,
Pres. < Mmatorus ds, thou, &c., &c.
^ So thioagfa aU the persons.
C Smitorils drSm, I vxu about to love, intended to love, &c
Past \ Smfttords 6ras, ihoit, 6cc., &c.
f So throngh all the persons.
fftmitfirfis 6ro, / tihaU be about to lope, $haU beoniks point of loo-
ing,&c
Smatdrfis Sris, thou, &&, &0.
So through all the persons.
6XERGISB.
(447.) Vocabulary.
To call v/pon, invdcire (in+vdcftre,
&V-, at-).
To collect into a Jlock, congrSgfire
(fiv-, at-)-
Foreign, ftlienus, S, ilm.
To procure, oompSrare (tr-, at> ood
+ptoare).
To last, durare (dflrav, dflrat).*
To implore, imploraxe (in+plorare,
fiv-, at-).
(448.) Exampk.
The Athenians sent amhas- I Atheniensds iSg&tos misdront,
sadors to consult the oracle. \ or&ciilum consulturds.
*' Darare, transitive, = to harden ; intrans., = to become hard, i e.^ to
last
t TransjYcere, transit, = to convey over; intrans., = to cro$$ over.
Alone, solos, 9l, tUn (194, 1).
To cross over, tr&jicere (tnyso-, trft-
ject-, trans+jftcere).f
Amman, a surname of Japiter, Ham-
m5n, Ts.
To behold, speotAre (av-, at).
To proceed, pergdre (perrez-, p«r-
rect^).
To consult, consnldre (constQu^oon-
snlt-).
Digitized by
Google
PARTICIPLE FUTUSB ACTIVE, 199
Rule of Syntax, — The future active participle is used after
a verb of motiou to express the design of that motion.
(449.) Translate into English.
1. Avds, in &]i6nas t^ras migrftturse, congregantur.-— *
Caesar, in Galliam prdfecturus, cent&riones convdcat.-^
German!, bellum gesturi, Deos inv5c&v6runt. — Sa^nens
bdn& ( neut. pi.) comp^Urat semper dar&ttir&.
2. Periphrastic Conjugation — Caesar de quarts vlgiM castr&
mottirus est. — Scripturus sum. — Dumndrix impdrium
suae civit&tis obtenturus erat. — Impdrfttor, cum sd]&
ddcimft l^gione prdfecturus erat. — ^dui ausilium &
pdpuk> Rdmano implorfttdri sunt. — Germftni bellum
gesturi erant.
3. Future Participle used to express a purpose (448). — Scipio
in Afirlcam trftj^it, Carthftginem dSletQrus. — ^Ingens hdm-
inum multitude in urbem congrdg&tur, Iftdos spect&t&r &. —
Alexander in Asiam contendit, regnum Persftrum occtipa*
turus. — Alexander ad Jdvem Hammonem pergit, consul-
turus dS 5ngine su&.
(450.) Translate into Latin,
1. The soldiers, when-a^out-to-set-out for (in) Spain, called-
upon the gods. — Many (men) have procured possessions
(bdn&) which'wUX-not-last ( = not about-to-last). — The gen-
eral, when-dboul'to^ross the river, sends-away the horse-sol-
diers. — Caesar, intending-to-send a messenger, calls together
the centurions.
2. Periphrastic Conjugation. — ^Dumnorix was ahotU'to-seize'
upon the royal-power. — The general is ahout-to-set-out from the
camp witii five legions. — The iBduans are about-to-carry-on a
fierce war. — ^The hostages were intending-to-implore aid from
tiie general.
3. Future Participle to express a purpose. — The Mdruaa
sent ambassadors to-implore help from Caesar. — The enemy
crossed die river in-order-to-hesiege the town. — The men flock
(congregor) fit)m-every-side to die town, to-hehoLd the
glumes*
p
Digitized by
Google
170
PBftPECT PARTICIPLE PABSITB.
LESSON LXXni.
Perfect Participh Passive.
(451.) (a) The perfect passive participle is formed (as stated
432, h) by adding tho adjective-eDdings us, &, tim to the su-
pine-stem; t.g.<,
InC SapiM-atcin. Peril Part
Xmfli§, amat-, im&t-ftfl, i, tm, loved, or liomng teea wved,
C conquered, or hairing &«•»
vinc6r», rict^ rict-is, «, ttm. ^ conquered,
{h) It is declined throi^hoat like an adjective of the firU
doss (76), and must agree with the substantive in gender^ mM»-
her^and ca$t; e.g., piior laudfttiis, puell& laudfttft.
(e) The d^nent yerbs use the perfect participle form ac-
tiivdy; e.^., hortfttns, Aa«tfi^exAor<e«{.
BXEECISB.
(462.) Voci^tary.
Sudden, rdpen^niis, H, ftm.
To alairm, perturbftre (ftv-, &^).
To seize, Bnatch up, arripSrS (anrlp-
io, arripft-, ftirept-, ad+rSpdrfi).
Auxiliaries, tiiudli&, drum.*
To pta-to^Jtigfa, diiMeamJU, ffij^.
To drioe-em Or toge^er, ooosp^ftre
(oompQl-, oantpoli-, eon+p^drt)'
To induce, adddcSre (dux-, duct-,
ad+ddc6r6).
Influence, auctoiTtas, (auctovftat) Tt.
To prtoaU Upon, p«naavMi (nidv->
mfit-, per-f-mt^VM^ i. «« to novo
(453.) Examples.
(a) il< Cbrint^
At Romt*
Ai Catthagtk
At Athens.
A wagon, eatriSs, T.
To buy up, ooimtoft (Cm-, eiiipt>
coiH-dinfir6).
Aristides, Aristldef (Aristid) \e.
Pkarsahis, Phanaliu, ! (f., 25, a).
To depart^-out'of, 03cc6der6 (ozeesi-v
ezo«BS-k ex-fcSdiriQ.
Rhetoric, iAiSltoAA,m,
To expel, ezpeUfire (ej^iil-, ex*
pulB-).
To tUmuUde, nid«o8r0 (dux-, dnot-).
Btro^-denm, ofipUitfts, (O^ li
(»»)-
Gorinthl*
Rdm«.
Carth&gln^
AthAnis.
Ride of Syntax. — ^The place tohere is put in the ahl&ihe^
* Anzilium in sing. » aid, aaeietance t inphtr. « tmxOimy troope.
Digitized by
Google
PERrSCT PAETICIPLB PABSIYB. 171
if the name be of the ihird dedensioD or phml number;
otherwise in the genitive,
(h) FSrom Rome. I R o m ft.
From Carthage. |Carth&gln<(.
Bule of Syntax. — ^The place whence is put In the ahladve.
(c) To Rome. R o m ft m.
To Athens. A then ft s.
Rule of Syntax. — The place whither is put in the accusa-
tive if it be a town or small island.
Rem. With the names of countries or large islands, the prep, in or
ad is employed: to Italy, in Itftliam; to Egypt, ad^gyptam.
(d) The soldiersjhaving been
defeated, took to flight.
(Lat. The soldiers, defeat-
ed, threw themselves into
flight.)
(e) The chief, wften he wcu
expelled from hiscountrj,
fled to Rome.
(/) As large a mumber as
possible,
(g) A sudden occurrence.
MiHtds, pulsi, in fiigam sd
conjficdrunt.
Princeps, patrift expuUfts,
Romam fa^t.
Quam maxXmut nftmdr-
us*
RdpentSnft rSs.
(464.) Translate into Engluh.
Nostii {our nun), rdpentinft rS (55, a) pertnrb&ti, arm&
arripiunt. — ^Auxilift perturbftt&,in fiigam sd conjecdrunt.—
MiHtes hostes fiigfttosin flumen compilldrunt. — Helvdtii, his
rebus adducti, legfttos ad Ctesftrem dd deditione mittunt. —
Gain, bis rebus adducti, et auctOiltftte Orgetoilgis per-
moti, jumentorum et carrorum quam maidmum numdrum
coemerunt. — Princlpes, adventu Romanorum permdti, legft-
tos ad Caesftrem de dddltiond mittunt. — Aristades, patrift ex-
p u 1 s ii s, Lftcedaemdnem f^gLt. — Didn^sius, Sj^rac&sls e x p u I-
siis, C5rinthl ptieros ddcSbat — Prindpes, eppidd ex puis I,
Romam (453, c) ygnerunt. — Leg&tus, rftpentina rft partur-
bfttu#, ceot^riones conv6eat.
(455.) Translate into Latin.
The Hebretians, prevailed up9n by the kifluenee of Casar,
led (their) army across the Rhine.— The chiefo, induced by
Digitized by
Google
172 ABLATIYS ABSOLUTE.
these coDsideratioiis (= things), gbe hostages and an immense
som-of-money to the lieutenant. — Pompey, when he had been
defeated {= defeated^ 453, d)9X Pharsalus, fled to Alexandria.
-— Jugnrtha, when he wcu expelled from Africa, came to Rome.
— The soldiers, alarmed by the sudden occurrence (453, g)f
take to flight (453, d). — For (enim) Pompey, although-he-had-
heen-defeaied (=r defeated) (in) no (nullo) battle, departed-out-
of Italy. — Our (men) drove on the alarmed and discomfited
enemy into the River Rhine. — ^The Helvetians, induced by
these considerations (= things), bought-up as large a number as
possible (453, /) of horses and beasts-of-burden. — The orator,
having-heen-expeUed-from Athens, taught rhetoric at Carthage
(453, a, R.). — ^The general, induced by these considerations,
gave great rewards to the soldiers. — Orgetorix, stimulated by a
ftrong-desire of royat'power, made a conspiracy of the nobility.
LESSON LXXIV.
Participles. — Ablative AhsohUe.
[Tax ablative abiolate is a very important part of La^ constnictioo*
and sboold be tborongfaly learned.]
(456.) The participle is used in the ablative with a
noun^ "when it is independent of the subject and object
of the sentence.
(a) When Tarquin was
reigning^ Pythagoras
came into Italy*
Pyth&g5ras, Tarqulnio
regnant Of in It&liam vd-
nit.
Here Tcvrquin is independent of PythagoraSt the subject of the sen-
tence.
(457.) The want of a perfect active participle in
Latin is frequently supplied by the ablative absolute.
with a passive participle.
(5) Ldbienus, having ta-
ken possession of the
mountain^ was waiting
for ovT men*
L&bi6nus, montft occiip&-
t5, nostros expect&bat.
Digitized by
Google
ABLATIVE ABSOLUTE. 178
Here it woald be impossible to say Libidnns, oootipfttas mon-
tern, as occupdtus is passive, not active.
(458.) A noun may be put in the ablative absolute
"with another noun without a participle.
(a) In the pratorship ofCce-
ear.
(h) In the consulship of Mar-
cus Messala and Marcus
Piso.
Caesftre praetord (= Caesar
being praetor).
M. Mess&la et M. Pisdnd
cons til! bus (= Messala and
Piso being consuls).
[ThiB constmctioii is used mostly to designate Hie time of an event]
EXERCISE.
(459.) Vocabulary.
To avail, vSldrd (vSlil-).
Tiberius, Tiberius (i).
To die, morin and mdri (mortii), dep,
A pleading, dictio, (dictidD) Is (333).
Catiline, C&tmnS, a.
Christ, Cbristiis, !.
To finish, peiflcere (perfftcere,
perf §c-, perfect-) ; also, conflcdre
(ffio-, feet-).
To reign, regnare (tv-, ftt-).
Night, mm, (noct) Is (294).
Territories, fines (pL of finis, 300).
(460.) Translate into English.
Nihil praecept& y&lent, nisi adjtiyante nfttQrft (456, a). —
Deo juyante, f&cilis est l&bor. — ^Tibdrio regnante, Chris-
tns mortuus est. — Concilio dimisso, principes ad Caesarem
reverterunt. — Die constitutft causae dictionis, Orgetonx ad
judicium omnem suam familiam, ad hominum miUia decern,
undique coegit. — Caesar, op ere perfecto, praesidift disposuit.
— Caesar, hostibus pulsis (457, b) in fines ^duorum perr©-
nit. — Caesar, duobus bellis confectis, in hibem& exerci-
tum duxit. — ^Bello confect5, principSs civitfttum ad Caes&-
rem, gratiil&tum (379), convengrunt.— ^C&ti]in&, Cicerond
con sill e (458), conjurfttidnem f&cit. — N&tiirft diicd, nun-
quam errabimtis. — Orgetorix, Marco Messftlft et Marc 5
Pisond constilibus, conjtirationem nobiHtatis fdcit.
(461.) Translate into Latin.
Our precepts will avail, when nature assists {=: nature assist-
ing) > — JVhen the sun rises (=the sun rising), the night flees.
^-When the council was dismissed (=the council being dis-
missed), the chiefs began to beseech Caesar. — When the coun-
cil was dismissed^ C»sar called the lieutenants to himsetfU—
P2
Digitized by
Google
174 ABLATIVE ABSOLUTE.
CsMar, tohm the work vHufinuihed (= the work being fini$hed)t
fortified the towers. — Caesar, having defeated Pompey {^Pam-
fey being defeated)^ retamed to Rome. — Csetar, having finish-
ed the toar, led-back his arm j into the territories of the ^du-
ans. — In the consuUhip of Cicero^ Catiline was expelled from
Rome. — When God assists (= God assisting), it is not difficult
to labour. — Wi^ Oodfor otar guide (= God leader)^ we shall
never err.
LESSON LXXV.
Ablative Absolute^ continued.
EXERCISE.
(462.) Vocabulary.
Phalanx, philanz, (philtng) U (i»3).
To hinder, prohibfire (Mbft-, hIbXt>
pro-|-hftb6re).
CnauM Pompey, Cnoiiii Pompftini.
Of owl $ own accord, ultro (mdv.).
To change, commutftre (tT-, tt-)
To be bam, iias(^ (n&tos), dep.
Senate-house, curia, m,
Augustus, Aogustiu, L
To mbstain from, abstlnfire (abttX-
nil-, abstent-, abi+t6ner6), with
abl
A plan, purpose, i^ontfliBm, I (not
ooneilium).
To harass, l&ceBiSre (Iv-, It-« 406,
m., b).
prom higher ground, 6 loc6 fiipe-
riord.
A dart, piKim, L
(463.) Translate into English.
L&bidnus, mont^ occdpato, nostros expect&bat, praelidque
abstin3bat. — Barb&ri, conslliocommut&to, nostros l&cessdre
ccepdrunt. — Milites, d Idco siip^ridre pills missis, f&cUe hos-
tium ph&langem perfregdrunt (416, b), — CognUo Cses&ris ad-
ventu, Aridvistus l3g&tos ad eum mittit. — Cnoeo PompeiO
et Marco Crasso consiillbus, German! flumen Rhenum
transivfirunt. — Nullo hoste prohlbente, Crassus legionem
in Helvdtios perduxit, lUque hiem&vit. — ^His rebus cognltis,
impdratoa* ips6 ad exercltum contendit. — ^Hftc audita pugnft,
magna pars Aqnitama obsides ultr5 n^it. — Belgse, omnibus
Ti^is oppidisqne incensfs, ad castr& CsBsttria conteadA-
nmt. — Augusts regnante, Christus nfttos est.
Digitized by
Google
ABLATIVE ABSOLUTE. 175
(464.) Translate into Latin.
The barbarians, having changed their flan ( 3= plan being
changed), made an attack upon our men. — The soldiers, ^av-
ing'broken-through the phalanx^ began to harass the enemy. —
The Belgians, having heard ofthi9 battle^ sent ambassadors to
Caesar. — The soldiers, having taken-possesaion-of the mountain^
easUy put the enemy to flight (391* 3)* — Cicero, v?hen he knew
of the conspiracy^ went to the Senate-house. — As no enemy
hindered (=^no enemy hindering)^ the lieutenant led the army
across the Rhine. — When this battle was heard {of), the Bel-
gians, of-their-own-accord, sent hostages and ambassadors to
Caesar. — In the consulship of Cicero and Antony f Auguttns
was bom.
Digitized by
Google
$ 10,
INFINITIVE.— (LXXVI.—LXXIX.)
LESSON LXXVI.
Infinitive Forms.
(465.) The infinitive expresses action as completea
or incomplete, but without reference to person or
time ; e. g.f
ACTIVE.
to lovei OT to he loving, loving^
&m-ftre.
Action Incomplete,
(Inf. Pres. Act.)
Action Completed,
(Inf. Perf. Act.)
Action Incomplete,
(Inf. Pres. Pass.)
Action Completed,
(Inf. Perf. Pass.)
to have loved,
&m&T-i88.d.
PASSIVE.
; to he loved,
I &m-&ri.
to have heen loved,
&mfttiis, ft, nm« esse orfuisse.
[Rem, The names present and perfect do not distingnish properly tk»
two forms of the infinitive, bat, as they are in onirersal fue, we
have to adopt Uiem. Hie stadent most remember that the present
expresses action incomplete, and the perfect action complete ; but
that the ttme of the acticm most depend noon the verb with which
the infinitive is connected in the sentence.]
(466.) FORMS OF THE INFINITIVE.
] PKESENT. ]
PSBVKCT. ll
Active.
Passive.
ActiTC
Tumre.
1. fim-ftr6.
2. m6n-er6.
3. r6g-€r6.
4. aadire.
ton-ftrL
mdn-dri
r6g-i.
audiri.
ftmavO
m6nd-l . ^
rex- f™*'
audiv-J
imatOs, «, tun, )
mtoltiSs, fi, flm, ^. w . <• -..-x
rectos, «, dm, ■ «"»« K fawseM
auditds, i, fim, j |
Rem. Observe that perf. inf. act. simply adds tiie ending -IssS to
the perf. -stem of the verb ; and petf. inf. pcus. is formed by the
perf. pcus. part, of the verb, combined with ess 6 (sometimes
fuissi).
Digitized by
Google
INFINITIVE.
177
EXERCISE.
(467.) Vocabulary.
To lay waste, vastAre (av-, at-).
Chtgkt, dabere (deba-, debit-).
To be vacant, vScflre (intraiunt).
/ am able, possum; / was able,
p6tiu.
(468.) Examphs.
Peace, pax, (p&c) ts (293).
A very few, i>erpaiicX, a, a.
EvU deed, maldf loimn, L
To break through, permmpere (peiw
rflp-, perropt').
(a) I wish to ham.
The enemy began to cross
the river.
Cdpio discdre.
Hostes flQmen transire cob-
pdrant.
Mule of Syntax. — ^The infinitiye is used, as in English,
to complete the imperfect ideas expressed by many
words.
gp* Such words are, to with, to be able, ought, to be accustomed, to
hasten, to determine, Sac\ also, the a^jectiyes dignus, indignas,
aadax, 5cc
Helvdtiis est in finlmo (=t/ 1«
in mind to the Helvetians).
Nonnnnqu&m interdiH, ssb-
pids noctfi.
Iti[n«r6 pr6hlb6re (153, a).
In conspectQ.
(6) The Helvetians intend.
(c) Sometimes by day, often-
er by night,
{d) To Jceep-off-from the road,
(e) In sight of.
(469.) Translate into English.
Caesar in Galli& hidmftre constltuit. — Mdm se suaque ab
Helvdtiis defenddre non pdtufirant. — Agri vastftri non
debent. — Hostes per munitiones perrumpdre cdnftti sunt.
—Agri Suevorum v & c & r e ^cuntur. — Mifites incdlas expel-
13 re non potudrunt. — MultStudo pudrorum miilidrumque
f ii g 6 r e coepit. — ^Hehrdtii maidmum niimdrum jumentorum et
carrorum cogmdre constltuSrunt. — Germ&ni copias suas
Rhenum transdQcdre con&ti sunt. — ^Helvdtii cum proidmis
civitatibus pftcem et &micltiam confirmftre constltudrunt.
(470.) Translate into Latin.
[Place the infimtdye before the verb on which it depends.]
Our towns ought not to-be-taken-by-storm. — In sight of our
army, the fields ought not to be laid-waste. — ^The enemy en-
deavoured sometimes-during-the-day, oftener by-night, to burst-
Digitized by
Google
ITS ACCUBATIVB WITH INPINITIVB.
dirou^ the fortificatioii8.^-Tlie JEduans were not able to expel
the enomy from (their) territories (153, a). On oae side,* the
lands are said to be vacant. — The boys and the women began
to fly-in-every-direction (passim, adv). — The Helvetians intend
to make (their) way through oar province. — A very few are
able to keep-off the HelvetiaDB from the road. — The Helvetiaoa
ought to cross-over without any (uUo) evil-deed. — ^The remain-
ing multitude of boys and women began to fly in-evory-diiec-
tion.
LESSON LXXVn-
Accusative with Iitfinitive.
(471.) Verbs sigoifyixxg to know, to see, to fe^ to
thinkj to 9ayj with some others, have frequently a
sentence depending on them, the subject of which is
in the accusative, and the verb in the infinitive.
He ^aio that war was ^^a- 1 UndXque bellum p&rftr:i vl-
ring <m aU $ides. | ddbat.
Here bellaxQ, the ffOlgeot. «i jBociis»tiv# bftfixie the infiDitive par%ri;
after the verb ri debate he uao.
(472.) Many dependent sentences which are introduced in
English by the conjunction that^ are expressed m Latin by the
accusative and infinitive. To translate such sentences into
Latin, observe the following method :
1. Omit the word (haJt,
2. Change tiie nominative following OiaJt into the Latin
accusative.
3. Change the English verb into tiie Latin infinitive.
The messenger says that
the horsemen are hurling
darts.
Nuntius dicit, 6 qui tea tW
conjicftre.
(473.) If the predicate of the sentence containing the acca«
satiye and infinitive be an adjective, it must agree with llie
accusative subject in gender, number, and case.
Uoa«spti«.
Digitized by
Google
ACCUSATIVE WITH INFINITIVE.
179
He knows that Cicero is do-
quent.
I perceive that the water is
cold.
Sdt Cicdrdnom ettft 616-
quentem.
Sentio &quam frigldam
esse.
EXJBBCIBE*
(474.) Vocabulary.
To fawmr, ftvSro (fiir-, fiuit-» 31^
v.), (gorenii dot,).
While, dam (adv.).
To lo»e, imitMro (t+mitteni, 401,
3,*).
Nuntaus die it
conjicftre.
NuDdus dixit
conjicdre.
Nuntins dixit
eonjficisse.
6qTi!teft tSBl
ftquXtes tm,
dqtdtes tm.
To think, exigtrm«re (Av-, it-).
To encamp, ooostddre (oons0d-, oon-
sess-, con+siddre).
To know, ware (sciv-, 8<^t-).
Stone, VkpXa, (Iip!d) b (m.).
Nearer, prftpins (adv., 376).
(475.) Examples.
(a) The messenger say« that
the horsemen are hurl-
in g darts.
(6) The messenger said that
the horsemen U7 ere hull-
ing darts.
(c) The messenger said that
the horsemen had hurl-
ed ds^rtS'
{d) Word is brought to Cte-
sar.
(e) To have about himself.
(476.) TranslaU into English.
Hely^tii existimant, Rdm&nos discdddre. — ^Expldrfttor
dixit, hostes consfidiss e. — Cssar scit, Dumndrlgem
fllyere Helvdtiis. — HeW^tii dicunt, se omnem Sj6nft«
torn & m i s i 8 s e.-— Csesllri nunti^tum est, m i 1 i t e s magnitQ-
cKnem sylv&rum time re. — Nuntins dixit, dqultes tela
conjicdre. — Ga)ba certior factus est, 6 alios omnes dis-
co ss is se. — Explor&tores dicunt, oppldum ab hostitbus
t e n e r i. — Dum hsc in coUdquio gdruntur, Cses&ri nnntifttum
est, equltes Ariovisti prOpius acceddre, et l&pides te|aque
in nostros conjlcdre.
[Be careful, in translating the following English into Latin, to write
first the leading sentence, and after it the accos ative and tfaejnfin.
Hive, observing tibe rules in (472)^ 9^ j^kiwiiif ^ OE^ff^^ 9n|rds
in we exfunples given above.]
Css&Ti nnntifttum est (=t< w
told to Caesar).
Circum se h&bere.
Digitized by
Google
180 ACCUSATIVE WITH INFINITIVE.
(477.) Translate into Latin.
Caesar knows that this (thing) is true (473). — The scouts
say that the horsemen of Ariovistos are approaching (475, a).
— ^The ambassadors said that the Helvetians had lost all their
cavafay and all their senate. — Word was brought to Caesar
ihat the horsemen of Ariovistus were hurling stones against
(In, with accus.) our (men). — Word-was-brought to Caesar
that Ariovistus had-departed from the camp. — Caesar was in-
formed by the scouts thai the enemy had encamped under
(s 6 b, wiOi abl.) the mountain. — The lieutenant says thcU the
mountain is held by the enemy. — The general thinks that our
plans are told to tlie enemy. — Word was brought to the gen-
eral that aU the Gauls had departed by night. — The chiefs say
ihat Diviiiacus always has a great number of horse-soldiers
about himself.
LESSON LXXVIII.
Accusative with Infinitive. — Perfect Infinitive Passive.
(478.) It has been stated (466, R.) that the perfect infinitive
passive is formed by the perfect participle passive, combined
with esse (sometimes fuisse).
When the accusative is used with this infinitive, die participle
must agree with the accusative in gender^ number, and case ;
e. g.,
(a) The messenger says that
the JEduans have been
conquered.
(b) Ariovistus said that all
the forces had been routed
in one battle.
(c) The horsemen brought-
back-ujord that the town
had been taken-by-storm.
Nuntius cKcit, ^duos victos
esse.
Aridvistus dixit, omnes cd-
pias uno praeliofasas
esse.
£qultes r^nuntiftverunt, o p -
pidum expugnfttum
esse.
IT* Observe tbat ia (a) the part victos agrees with the aocns. JE duos ;
in (ft),ffl8as with cdpias; in {c), expngn&tam with oppldam.
Digitized by
Google
ACCUSATIVl: WITH INPINITIVB. 181
EXERCISE.
(479.) Vocabulary.
ToJiTuirOut, r6p€rire (427, V.).
To frighten completely, perterrtre
(pertemi-, pertenft-, per+ter-
p6re).
TVibuUny, sfipendiiriafl, tH, Hm.
To bring back word, r6xraiitiAre (&▼•,
at-).
To rout, fiindere (ffld-, f dih, 416, a)
To overcome, ilipCrtre (!▼-, it-).
Bond, duxin, Tincdhmi, L
7V> Ao2d m memory, to remember,
mSmSrit t^dre.
jTo put (or CM/) tf» cAotfM, in yinctt-
la cx)^jIcSre.
(480.) Translate into English.
Caesar rdpSriebat Mtium f^gsB a Dniim6rige factum esse.
— ^Impdr&tor dixk, Sqnit&tam esse perterritum. — Caesar
mfimdrift tdnebat, L. Cassimn constilem occisum esse ab
HeWetiis. — Aridyistos dicit, ^dnos sfhi (54), stipendiSrios
esse factos. — Ceesar certior factos est, leg&tos in vinctUa
conjectos esse. — £qidtes rdnunti&veraiit, castra esse
m a n i t a. — Dixit bella gesta ess e. — Rdpdriebat dtiam Cae-
sar, Initimn fiigse a Dnmndrige atqne ejus Multibus factum
esse; eorumque fi&gft (55, a) r^Hquum dqult&tum perter-
ritum esse. — Aridvistus dixit omnes OaDorum cdpias CLno
abese praefio (55, a), fdsas ac s&pdratas ease.
(481.) Translate into Latin.
Caesar found-out that the cavaby had been completely-fright-
ened by the flight of Dumnorix. — ^The ^duans say that they
(s e) have been routed by the Germans. — Caesar remembered
(= held in memory) that the consul's army had been defeated
by the Helvetians. — Caesar remembered that the consul had
been slain, and his (ejus) army sent under the yoke (323, N.).
— Caesar was informed by the chie& that hostages had been
given. — ^The lieutenant said that the ^ambassador had been cast
into chains. — ^Ariovistus said that all the forces had been over-
come by himself. — ^Ariovistus said that the Gauls had been
overcome by himself in one battle. — The ^duans say that they
(s e) have been made tributary to Ariovistus {dat.)»
Q
Digitized by
Google
108
OfnviTiTB Funnts*
LESSON LXXIX.
h^Uhe Future Active and Passive.
(482.) By the combination of the future participle
active with e 8 8 6 (or f u i s s 6), an infinitive future
active is formed ; e. g.^
&m&tarfltY&,fliii«e88 6, tohe about to love^to intend lovmg.
, . , ^, ^,. ^ ito have been about to love, to
*mitartt8,»,ftm.fiii.8«,J ka»ci,dended loving.
(483^) Finally, by combining the supine with the
verb i ri,* we form the infinitive future passive; e.g.^
&m&tum iri, to he ahout to he loved.
doGtiim iri, tohe about tohe taught,
Rem, 1. Thia ibm, bdng derived fimn the tupinet U ap^ed alike to
nooDt of all senders and of both nomben.
9. Aj there is no future inJiwUive in Cngliih, we most translate the
Latin /ifhcfv infinitive by a periphrasis, as above.
To rtatore, reddere (reddid-, rodfit-,
rH-dire, 411, c).
Unfriendly, biimfcos, i, um (bi+
imlcas).
To demmmdrhofk, rSpfitire (i«pMlv->
rdpMt-, B&f P^tdre).
Tq rffute, xiMmre {jkr-, it-}.
(484.) Vocabulary.
To penuade, persntdere (per4«aa-
d€re, S11&S-, sals-) ; governs dot.
To refnxin, temp^rtre (iv-, fit-, fol-
lowed by ftb with obL).
To neglect, aSgfigere (atglez-, oSsr-
lect^ a»c+l«sSre).
To eowtptt, oft|;«re (co^-, oo•c^,
cOn+&g&re).
(484, a.) EoMtmpk.
The general said ^tat he | Impftrfttor dbdk « 8 cum 861&
t(H>iiU come u;t(^ t^ tenOi I dMmft Ifigiooe Tentdram.
legion alone. \
Rem. The e s s 6 in die fiitare infinitive is freqaently omitted ; e. g.i
intibe above, ventflrnm.
* Ir ! is the infinitive passive form of the verb It %, to go. It is not io
nsa, ezoept in combination as abova.
Digitized by
Google
INPINITIVB FUTURE. 168
(485,) Translate into English.
ITuture Infinitive Active*
IDumndrix existlmat sd regnum obtentfLrum esse.^
Helvdtii enstlmabant sfi finittmis (dot*) persu&sQros. —
Caes&r existimftbat, finltiunos tempdratflros ab injOrift. —
Caes&r dicit, se ^doorum injdriat non neglectQrum. —
Helvdtii existXmabaat, td i£doo6 vi (301) coactflrot.
— Aridvistus dixit, ^duis (54) sd obsides redditQmm
ess e. — Css&r dicit sd, proidrnft noctd (118, II., c), de qnartft
^^Oi&, eastril m^tQriim. — ^Imp6r&tor, hdmines ininuc5 kdLrxA
(428, a) tempftr&tfiros ab injuria et mWflcio, noo esistX-
mabat.
(486.) Translate into Latin.
Future Infiudvo Active.
Cssar said that he would move his camp. — ^Dumnorix thouf^
that iie weuld-hold the mlMtaiy^omwaiid of his own state. —
The |;etteral says that he is-about-to-demand-back the host-
ages. — ^The iBduaos say that they-are-about-to-implore assist-
ance frpiQ (a) the EomaB pe<^le. — Dumnorix assures (themy
liiat he is-about-tOrseiEe the royal-power with his own (sud)
army. — Ariovistus said that he would not restore the hostages*
— Cssar did not think that the allies would-refirain from ii^juxy.
— Caesar thought that he would-compel the Germans by force.
—•Ariovistus said that he would-refuse the Mendahip of the
Roman people.
Digitized by
Google
§ 11.
THE GERUND.
LESSON LXXX.
(487.) (a) The gerund expresses the action of the
verb under the form of a noun of the second declen-
sion, in the genitive^ dative^ accusative^ and ablative
cases (i, 6, u m, o).
(6) The gerund-stem is formed by adding to the
verb-stem,
In the Ist coDJngatioiii -and; e. g., & m - a n d -.
•* 2d ** -end; e.g., mdn-end-.
" 3d " -end; e.g., rfig-end-.
«* 4th " -iend;* e. ^., aud-iend-.
(c) The gerund of any case is formed by annexing the case-
ending to the gerund-stem; e. g., gen.., &mand-i; dat.f
&mand-o; occ, &mand-um; a52., &mand-d.
(488.) As the infinitive is used as a verbal noun in the nomt-
native and accusative cases, so the gerund is used in the re-
maining cases ; e. g.,
Nom. S crib 6 r 6, urriting.
Gen. Scribendi, o/*imftn^.
Dat. Scribendo, to orybr tm^n^.
. (Scribdrfi, ) .,.
^'^'^•iscribendum,}^^^^-
Abl. Scribendd, loith toriting.
(489.) The rules for the use of the cases of nouns appdy abo
to the cases of the infinitive and gerund ; c. g.,
Nom. WriHng is useful, scribdre est tidle.
n rrtL * r '^ ' r i ( BTS SCrib O udi eSt fitf-
Gen. The art ofumUng is useful, <
* Also in the io verbs (199) ; e. g., cftp-io, cftp-iendi
Digitized by dOOQ IC
THE GERUND.
165
Dat.
D _• -r 7 r M- ( charta scribe nd 6 est
Paper u ttsefiufir writing, I _
( I learn toriting, ^scribdre disco.
Ace. < I learn during writing, > inter scribendum
( } disco.
Abl. We learn by wridng, scribendo discimns.
Rem. With a preposition, the accttsaHve gerund miut be nsed, and
m^ the infinitive ; a d (inter, ob) scribendum, not a d (inter, ob)
Bcribdre.
(490.) The gerund' governs the same case as the verb from
which it is derived ; e, g,,
The art of training hoys wlArs pner5s edticandl
difficuU. I diifldlis est.
EXERCISE.
(491.) Vocabulary.
To make loar, bellare (&▼-, fit-).
To plunder, to obtain-booty, prsedari
(prsdftt-), dep.
Wearied, defessns, S, um.
Sufficiently, s&tds.
To think, cdgitflre.
Opportunity, time for, spStiom, I.
(492.) Exampks.
To deliberate, deliberive (&▼•, It-).
To take, s&nSre (samps-, sompt-).
Agriculture, ftgricoltora, e.
Desire, stddimn, i.
Life, age, at&a, (setAt) is (293).
Mind, mens, (ment) Xa (355, IL, 1.)
(«)
Sp&tium arm&
d&tum est.
c&piendi
FrQmentandi caus&
lat.).
(aft-
Time was given for
(= opportunity was given
of) taJcing-up arms,
(b) For the sake of collect-
ing-com.
(493.) Translate into English.
Spes prsdandi hdmlnes &b ftgriculttirft rdvdcftbat. — Spa-
timn defessis ex pugn& excedendi non d&tmn est. — ^Brdve
tempns aet&tis s&tis est longam ad btod be&teqne vTvendum.
— Hdminis mens discendo ftKtur.-^Pars fiqnitatus, pras-
9 a n d 1 causa, missa est. — ^Nox finem oppugnandi ftcit.^ —
Magna pars equitatus, frfimentandi causa, missa 6rat. —
Cognovdrat enira Caesar, magnam partem fiquitatas, prsBdandl
f r u m e n t a n d i que causa, trans RhSnum missam fuisse (471).
Q2
Digitized by
Google
186 GBRUND.
-^Imp^ir&tor diem ad deliberandum sQmit. — Imp^rfttar
dixit, 86 diem ad deliberandum sumptQmm (484, a). —
Spes prsdandi, sti&diumqne bellandi incdlaa ab ftgricul^
tQr& et UUbdre revdc&bat. — Ddcendd ddc6mar,
(494.) Translate into Latin.
The desire of plundering and making-war has recalled the
farmers from (their) fields, — ^Time for (492, a) hurling the
darts was not given to the soldiers. — Time for (of) fighting
was not given to the horsemen. — The horsemen were sent into
the territories of the JEdnans for the sake of'ColUcting'amu —
The mind of man is nourished by thinking. — Time for depart-
ing-out^ the town was not given to the wearied citizens. —
The citizens ask time for (of) deliberating. — ^Wisdom is the
art of living well. — Cesar recalled the tenth legion into Gaul,
for-the-sake-of wintering. — We loam by teaching. — Oppor-
tunity of attacking the town was not given to the soldien«
thou|^ thej desired it (= desiring it).
Digitized by
Google
§ 12-
THE GERUNDIVE, OR VERBAL ADJECTIVE
IN DUS, DA, DIJM.
(495.) (a) The gerundive expresses the action of
the verb (generally with the additional idea of ne-
cessity or continuance) under the form of an adjec-
tive of thejlJr^^ class (76).
(6) T^e gerundive-stem is precisely the same as
the gerund-stem. The cases are formed by adding
the endings of the adjective ; c. g-.,
N. &mand-ti8, &, i&m.
6. &mand-I, as, I, &c.,
and so through all cases and both numbers.
LESSON LXXXL
The Gerundive used instead of the Gerund.
(496.) The gerundive is used (to express contin-
ued action) as a verbal adjective, agreeing with the
noun, instead of the gerund governing the noun ; e. g,,
Gen. Cf writing a Utter,
Dat. To or fir writing let-
ters.
Ace. To write a letter, .
AU. By writing a letter.
Scribends dpistdlae, in«
stead of 8 crib end! dpis-
tdlam.
Scribendis 6 pi 8t5]is, in-
stead of scribendo 6 pis-
tolas.
Ad scrlbendam i^pistd-
1am, instead of ad scr!-
bendum fipistdlam.
Scrlbenda 6pist61ft, In-
stead of scribendo ftpls-
t51am.
Digitized by
Google
186
GERUNDIVE.
Em. The genmdire musl be used fin* Ae dative or aeeutatk>e of tlia
genmd when it has an active govemment It may be oaed for it
in any other case, nnless the object of the gerand is a neuter ad-
jective or proooon ; «. g., of learning the true = veradiscendi,
ntit vSrorum diteendarum i of hearing this, hoc ku die ndUno^
JMus audiendL
EXERCISE.
(497.) Vocabulary.
To ckooae, ddHgdre (ddleg-, ddect-,
d6+l6gere).
To purtue, oonsdqal (consScftt), dtp.
To failt to be intujieient, d«f Ic«re
(dfifCc-, defect-, d6+f ftcSre).
To form a detign, oonsiliam cSpfire
(io).
Space-qf-two^eart, biennifim, L
(498.) Examples.
{a) The Helvetians redconed
that the space-of-two-years
was enough for themselves,
(6) The space of three-days,
(c) The house was given to
the robbers to plunder.
The farmer gave his house
to the robbers to plunder.
To redton, deem, dOcdre (diix->
dact-).
To diecem, cemdre (406, CL HL, a).
Care, cfira, m.
To apply, adhibdre (adMbA-, adhib.-
It-).
Negligent, negHgens, (neg&gent) is
(107).
Hehdtii biennium
s & t i 8 esse duxemnt.
slbi
Tridni sp&tium.
Ddraus latardidbus diripien-
^ d&d&t&est.
Agricdla ddmum latrdnlbus
diripiendam dddit.
ly After verbs of giving^ going, sending, receiving, and the
like, the gerondive expresses a purpose or object,
(d) For completing (=fin- 1 Ad eas res c o n f i c i e n d & s.
ishing) these things, \
(499.) Translate into English.
Urbs ft dilce miHtibiis dirlpienda dftta est. — Urbem dux
miHtibus diripiendam dddit. — Snblto Galli confi^um belli
gdrendi c^peront. — Subitd Galli Idgionis oppngnands
consilium c3pdrant. — Ad eas res conficiendas Orgdtorix
dSli^tur. — Helvdtii, ad eas res conficiendas, biennium sibi
s&tis esse duxSrunt. — Crassus Iggatos tribunosque militum in
finltimas civltfttes frumenti p^tendi causft dimisit. — ^Plftto
Komam (453, c) ad cognoscendas Numae leges contendit.
i— In vdluptftte spernendft virtus maxim© cemltur. — Muhi.
Digitized by
Google
GERUNDIVE. 189
in Sqais p&randis, adblbent cdram, sed in ftmicis dfill-
gendis negBgentes sunt. — ^Militee* ad urbem expugnan-
dam, tridui sp&tium ^bi s&tis esse duxSrunt.
I
(500.) Translate into Latin.
For completing these things (498, d) Caesar gave to the
Gauis the space of three days. — ^The JSduans had suddenly
formed the design of besieging the town. — Crassus is chosen
for carrying-on the war (498, d). — ^Pythagoras went to Sparta
(453, c) to learn (498, ^F") the laws of Lycurgus. — Casar
reckoned that the space of two years was enough for himself,
for overcoming the Gauls and finishing the war. — ^The general
sent an the cavalry across the Rhine, (or the sake of seeking
com. — ^Ariovistus hastened (contendere), with all his forces,
lo attack the town (498, 17). — The Britons sent ambassadors
to CsBsar, in>order-(ad)-to-seek (498, 17) peace.
LESSON LXXXII.
The Cferundive used to express Necessity, ^.
THE GERUNDIVE AS SUBJECT.
(501.) (a) The gerundive in the nominative neuter (di&m)
is used with esse to express necessity or diUy. If the person
be expressed, it must be put in the dative.
One must write, I Scribendtim est.
I must write. \ Scribendtim est m!M.
^* Here the gerundive is the subject of the sentence
(the duty ofvrriting is to me).
(h) This neuter nominative may be combined with all the
tenses of esse ; e. ^.,
Scribendum est mlhi, I must write,
Scribendum erat m!hi, I had to write,
Scribendum erit, I must write hereafter •
&c., &c.
Digitized by
Google
190
0£ftDNDlVB*
(c) This tieoter nominatiTe may goyern the ease of itt verb ;
ClTibofl {dat,) mihv6mendani
est.
lUtidiie Qtendum est.
We must kdp ike citizens.
One must use reason.
TBS eXKUlTDIYS AS P&SBtCATE.
(502.) The genindiTe is also used with esse, in all eases and
genders^ as a verbal adjective, agreeing with the notm, to ex-
press necessity or worOiiness ; e. g., I am to be l&vedt ftmandus
sum ; thou art to he lovedt ftmandus ^, &c. The person, if
specified, is put in the dative.
Tullift m!hi &niand& est.
I must love TuUia (= Tul-
lia is to he loved hy me.)
All (kings had to he done
hy Casar {=zCasar had
to do all things).
9* Here the gerundive is the predicate,
EXERCISE.
Omni& Csesari drant ftgend&.
(503.) Vocabulary.
Flag, vexilhun, L
To tet-^p, prOponSre (prO+pdnfire,
pdsft-. p6slt-, 408, a).
To go-fortoardt procMSre (pr6+c§-
dSre, 401. 3, b).
A. KtHe too far, paalld longini
{adv,).
To think, piitsre (&▼•, it-).
(504.) Exampks.
(a) Ctesar causes a bridge to
he made (= takes care that
a bridge should he made),
I must hear.
Est is often omitted with the
(&) The centurions thought
(hat nothing should he
done rashly.
To semi for, aroefsflre (areesi^>
flrcessit-).
To undSrtUuid, ptiaehe, inttl1Ig6re
(intellez-. intellect-).
To detentUite, ttitadre (stfttft-, stS-
tot-).
In vain, fraatr9u
More widely, l&tiiis (adv,, 376).
Cssar pontem f&ciendum
(esse) ctUrat.
Mlhi audiendum.
gerundive, as in (a).
Centi&ridnes n!hn tdmfire
& g e n d u m (esse) existimft-
bant
* The aceutaHv ii hardly ever used after the neat gemndive.
Digitized by
Google
GERUNDIVE.
(505.) Translate into English.
(1.) OeruTuUve in the itominative muter (dlim).
MiHtibus de n&vibns 6rat ddslliendum. — MiHtibus
flimii] et de n&vibus (drat) dfislliendum, et cum hostibas
6rat pagnandum. %
(9.) Oerundive as a verbal adjecHve, agreeing wi^ the noun,
Caes&ri omnia tlno temp6re (118, II., c) drant ftgenda;
yexiUiim prdponendum; rdvdcandi milites; qui pauDo
loDgius processdrant arcessendi; &cieB instruenda; mi-
lites hortandi; signum dandum. — Prohibenda est
Ira. — ^Bellum D6bis est susclpiendum. — Cses&r slbi l&tiuft
distrlbuendum exercitnm ptitat. — Impdrfttor dicit, jam
slbi legfttos audiendos. — Cas&r iibi intellexit frustra tao-
tum l&bdrem sumi (471), st&tuit expectandam classem. —
Cses&r pontem f&ciendum ctlrat atque It& exerdtum tr&-
dQcit.
(506.) Translate ifUo Latin.
(1.) Oerundive in natninaiive, neuter (d ttxn).
We must leap-down from the ships.-^IFc must read. — You
must hear, — You must fight for liberty (pro libertate). — AU
must hear ; we must read. — ^Witli whom (quibuscum) must I
fight ? — We must leap down from the Walls and fight with the
horsemen.
(8.) Oerundive ob a verbal a^ectioe.
I must do afl things at once (= all things must he done hy me
at one time). — You must give the signal. — We had to set up
the flag. — C€esar must send ambassadors. — The soldiers must
fortify the camp. — The general must encourage the soldiers. —
The Heivetians cause bridges to he made ever the river. — Cae-
lar thought that the arm/y mfust he led-over. — Caesar thought
that the army must he divided by him (sibi), kad distributed
more-widely. — The general says ^uU he must wait-for the
fleet.— Divitiacufl says that this-thing (hOe) must he done by all
the Gaols.
Digitized by
Google
§ 13.
IMPERATIVE MCXDIX
LESSON LXXXIII.
(507.) The imperative mood expresses the action
of the verb as a command^ wish^ entreaty, &c. ; e. g.f
Love thou ! Hear thy parents.
(508.)
F0RM8
OP THE
IMPERATIYC.
AcnvB. (1
Sm-
mdn-
aud-
SdSinf.
KorhXo.
fiorlto.
lorita
SdSins.
fttXK
6to.
Ito.
ito.
SdPhir.
fttftorfttdtd.
rteoritote.
ltd or itote.
SdPlnr.
Into,
finto.
dnto,
!«nto.
.
FA88IVX. ll
m6n-
aud-
are or ftt5r.
er6 or etdr.
6r6 or itdr.
irt or itor.
fttor.
6t5r.
Itdr.
itor.
ftinTn? or ftm&idr.
emim or 6iidn6r.
imliu or bnindr.
imini or imlndr.
antor.
ent»r.
nntor.
iimt6r. |
Rem. 1. Observe that the 2<2 pert. sing. act. can be obtained from any
verb by striking off rd from the infinitive; e. g., inf., fim&rS;
imper., fim&; and that the fid pert. sing. pass, is the infinitive
form precisely.
2. The longer forms of the 2d person are nsed especially in reference
U} future time ; e. g., in laws, statutes, and the like.
3. The io verbs of 3d ooig. take Ike imperative endings of ^e 4th in
the 3d pern, plor.: thns, cfipinnto, let them take; c&piuntor,
let them be taken. 7 Ac io has 2d pen. sing. fie.
EXERCISE.
(609.) Vocabulary.
[Deponents take, of course, th^ passive endings.]
Enmity, inlnucltii, m.
To despise, oontemn6re (con-f-tem-
ndrd, temps-, tempt-).
Fleeting, f«gax, (f Agtc) U (107).
To pursue, folloio, pemSqni (persfi*
cflt-), dtp.
Associaiion,fdlo«skip, sdoiStls (fttli,
293).
Digitized by
Google
IMFERATIVE MOOD.
193
SkoWf spdciSi, specie! (117).
To trust, creddre (crddid-, oi«di»^
411, c) ; gorerns dot.
AdnUrCy adxnirari (At-), dqf.
Nd audi.
Nd crdd« cdl5ri.
Frail, perishable, cidtLc&B, S, iSm
(from cddSri, to fall).
To shun, avoid, vitftrd (av-, At*).
Judge, judex, (judic) is (306).
To revere, vtodrAri (vgnfirAt-), dep,
(510.) Exampks,
(a) Do not hear.
Do not trust appearance
(colour).
Rule, — ^With imperatires, nd must be used for noL
(Ndn would be very bad Latin.)
(6) Letthe judge neither give \ Judex prsemia nS dftt6 nfivfi
nor take rewards. | capito.
Neither — nor = nS — ndvS.
(c) Instead of parents =^ |P&rentum Idco (aU.)
(511.) Translate into English.
Pueri (voc.), p&rentds &m&td. — Magistri pueros lingu&m
L&tin&m d 6 c e n t o. — Magn& vis est in virtudbus ; $&s ( 150 )
exclt&f si fortd dormiunt. — Abstinetotd omni injuri&
(dbl.) atque inimidtiis. — I m p S r 3, irae ( 147 ). — Ns p e r s S-
q u S r e omnia, quae sp^ciem glorise h&bent. — Haec omnia, quae
h&bent sp^ciem gloriae contemn^: brevift, f ugaci&, c&duc&
existimft. — N© credits omnibus. — Judlces praemium n©
e&piunto, n6v6 danto. — V i t a sdcifitatem imprdborum. —
Vdndr&r© Deum, ven6r&r6 p&rentes, et quos p&rentum
16c6 (55, a) tibi (54) n&tur& d^dit. — Pueri praeceptores, & qui-
bus docti sunt, ftmanto etvdnSrantdr.
(512.) Translate into Latin,
Bojs, revere (your) parents.— Zrf the master teach the boys
the Greek language. — Do not rouse-up (your) vices : rouse-up
(your) virtues, if perchance they sleep. — Abstain ye from (ahL)
an vices and enmities. — My son, rule (your) anger (dat.y 147).
— Do not admire all things which have the show of glory .—r
Do not ye fear death. — Do not trust to the show of glory. —
Love those whom Nature has given to you in place of parents.
— Do not seek the association of the wicked. — Neither take
(cdpire) nor give a reward.--'-H'«ar the wise and good.
R
Digitized by
Google
§ 14.
SENTENCES.
[Tbk ■tadenft ■boold now be made to nnderatand sometfaixig of sentei^
ces. The fi>Ilowing limple Btatements can readily be nndentood.]
(513.) (a) The sentence, ** the messenger fied,** ia a simple
sentence, as it contains but one subject and predicate.
(6) The sentence, " the m^senger, who saw me, fled" is a
compound sentence, as it contains more than one subject and
predicate.
(«) In the last example, ** the messenger fled" is called the
PRINCIPAL SENTENCE ; and ** who saw me," the subordinate
sentence.
(514.) The following are some of the classes of subordinate
sentences :
{a) The accusative toiih the infintUve ; e. g*, Nuntitis dixit,
gquitds tel& conjlcdrd (The messenger said that the
horsemen were hurling darts). Here ^quitSs tdl& conji*
cdrd (that the horsemen were hurling darts) is the suhordincUe
sentence ; nuntius dixit, the principal sentence.
(h) Conjunctive sentences, i. e., such as are introduced by a
conjunction or adverb of time ; e. g*, C<Ksar, when he had
crossed the river, drew up his army. Here, Ciesar drew
up his army is the principal sentence ; tohen he had crossed
the river, the subordinate sentence.
(c) Relative sentences; e. ^., 'Nuntius, qu! missus est,
dixit {The messenger, who was sent, said). Here nun-
tius dixit is the principal sentence; qui missAs est,
the relatim subordinate sentence.
{d) Interrogative sentences (i. e.), such as are introduced by
an interrogative word ; e. g.. Tell me what you are doing ?
Here what you are doing is a subordinate interrogative sen-
tence.
Digitized by
Google
§ 15.
CONJUNCTIONS.— (LXXXIV.—LXXXV.)
LESSON LXXXIV.
Copulative Conjunctions.
(515.) Copulative conjunctions unite words or
sentences together. They are,
St, quS, &c, atqud.
NSc, ndqud.
Eti&in, iM^iGn, qti5qo^, Mm,
BXBRCISE.
And.
Neither, nor.
Also,
(516.) Vocabulary.
Only, BOlftm ; Ttot only, ndn s5lQin.
A debtor, 6b«ntfta, T.
Formerly, at one time, qooadun.
Rick, opaleBS> (dpiUent) U (107).
To hasten, to march rapidly, propfi-
rarS (av-, at-).
To give largess, to bribe, largM
(largit-), dtp.
Once tmd again, sdmil «tq«i^ ltd'
E*tate, res f ftimliArls, e (104).
A wheel, rSta, «.
(517.) Examples.
(a) Darius equipped a fleet,
md placed over it IkUis and
Artaphemes.
Some {some persons), nBmmSS, m, S
(nOn+DoUAs)!
Javelin, trlgiili» m.
To hurl under, ivbjIc&NI ( jte-, jeet-,
Bub+jttcdre).
I profit, ben^, prostbn* (prd+som) ;
govems dot.
To the scmte place, eOddm (adr.).
IW much, i^mi «% i, Am.
TV)^, summit, oalxnAB, (oiilni&i) &i
(345).
To pray, 6rare (ftv-, at-).
D&riuB classem eompiir&yit,
eiqu6 Datim prssfdcit 6t
Art^pherneni.
(a) lit coimeots independent words and sentenees; qad join8 one
word or senteiice to another lather as an appendage. Thus,, in (a), dt
*Pr6stimis inflected like stim, bnt inserts d before the vowels;
e.^., prod-ess e, prod-Ss, prod-est (not p«>-«^ pro-est).
Digitized by
Google
196 COPULATIVE CONJUNCTIONS.
joins Dfttim and Artftphernem; and qafi joina the aentence
^placed aver ii" Ac, aa an i4>pendage to the eqw^ment of the fleet.
Hdmines fdri &c barb&ii in
provinciam v^niebant a t q a 6
in Italiam contend3bant.
(b) Fierce and harharotu men
were coming into the jprov-
ince, and were hastening
into Italy.
{b) Ao iMWied heAn cotuonanU, hat JMO^heSare vowels ark, Atqii6
Biay be used before either yowela or oonaonanta.
(c) Casar both Jiad indvl-
ged and teas greatly con-
fident in the tenth legion.
D6clmsB Idgioni CsBsar dt in-
duls6rat dt confiddbat max-
ims.
{c) £l t Mowed by another 6 1 meana both—and.
Eti&m atqud dti&m.
Et 3tiam.
Non soliim — s'dd Stiam.
(d) (1) Again and again.
(2) And again.
(3) Not oidy — liU also.
(618.) Translate into English,
OrgStdrix &d judicium omndm su&m f&miliam coS^t, 6t
omn3sclient@sdbsBr&td8qud eodem (adv.) condnxit. — Carth&go
dt Cdrinthds atqu^ Numantia, dpulentissimae qudnd&m St
v&HdissimsB civitates, dsletae sunt & Rdmanis. — Css&r finem
prdpdrandl (489) f &clt, pontem q u S &d flumSn Khdnum poi^t.
— Discipiili S t audiunt 6 1 &mant praeceptorSs. — ^Rom&ni n 6 n
solum ItinSrum causS, (135, II., R.) sSd Stiam possessionis,
culminft montium occupS,v@runt. — ^Non solum vires (plural
of vis) sSd Stiam tela nostris (dat.) deficisbant. — ^His rebus
Dumndrix S t suam rSm f dmiliarem auxSrat 6 1 f^ult&tes &d
largiendum magn&s comp&r&vSrat. — ^Hostes 6t & Idco supSriore
in nostros tela conjiciebant 6t nonnulH intSr carros rdtasqud
tr>Ufts subjlciebant, nostros q u d vulnSr&bant. — Contemnuntur
ii qui ndc sibi nSc alter! (194, R. 1) prdsunt. — NSc mSlidr
virfuitScipi6ne(360,c)qui8qufi,m, n6c clariSr. — ^dui nSqud
obaides r6pStiv6runt nSquS awdlium implorftvSrunt. — S&pi-
entSm nequS panpertHs nSquS mors nSquS vinculo tor-
rent. — ^Nimius somntis n d q u S corpdri n S q u S &ntmd (dat.<, 51 6)
piodest. — Rdgo te, St oro; Stiam atquS Stiam tS r6go. —
JEdui sSmSl atquSitSr^m ctim Germfinis contendSrant. —
MiKtes ex castris SrapSrunt (SrumpSre) atquS omnem
spSm s&lutis in yirtatS pdsuSrunt.
Digitized by
Google
DISJUNCTIVE AND ADVERSATIVE CONJUNCTIONS. 197
LESSON LXXXV.
Disjunctive and Adversative Conjunctions,
(519.) I. The disjunctive conjunctions (meaning
or) are a u t, v e 1, v e, and s i v e or s e u.
Rem, 1. Ant indicates a real difference of object; e, g,,
Here, soldiers, toe must conquer or | Hie vincendum ant mdrienddxn, mi-
die/ I litSi!
When aut is used, but one of the conditions can be fulfilled,
as in the above example.
Rem. 2. y 6 1 (derived firom velld) means if you toish^ oi-
raiher, (Hence it is used for even,)
The nobles can either corrupt ot V&i ndbilSs vdl oonumpSrS moiil
correct the mortzls of the state civitatits, v 61 conlgdrd posaiml^
(t. e., tbey can do whichooer
they please). ^
Rem, 3. V3 is always affixed to another word; dud, tr6sv%
== tiDO or three.
Rem, 4. These conjimctions are frequently repeated,
r aut — aut.
Either— or, }v61 — v«l.
( 8iv6 — 8iv«.
Whether— or, \ seu — sen.
(520.) II. The adversative conjunctions express
opposition {but).
The most important are,
At, atqui, aut6m, caetSriim, s6d, v6riim {but).
Tftm6n (however); vSrfi (truly).
exercise.
(621.) Vocabulary.
To run up, aoctUTfirfi (accurr- and
aocucorr-, aocurs-, ad+curr6r6).
Very rich, perdivfiB, (divit) is (peiH-
divgs), 107.
Chance, caaila, fUi. By cJuince, cftsA
(abL).
Goodness, bttnltSa (fttb).
To pay up, persolvfire (aohr-, §6*
IfLt-).
To suffer fuU punishment, pom&g
periolvSrg.
Handsome, fonnOsus, ft, ibn.
Eloquent, f acnndtis, ft, dm.
Ulysses, Ulysies, (Ulyis) U.
R2
Digitized by
Google
198
coNjUNeriONS.
To poBtesi, pot^firft (pots«d-, pos-
■eu-).
We^ng, fletuf, ill.
Hfect, effectfia, fUi.
Sorrow, sadnaa, tristittiS, as.
OeneraUy, pleromqatt (adr.).
Joy, gaodiiim, L
Daily, qaStidianiis, ft, &n.
^ 2mn^ being, atiTmang, (i
Is (107).
Motion, XD6ttbi, ud.
Vorunu, diverans, ft, iim.
To M0MW, ii«tar» (ftv-, it-).
SomeHmes; interdun.
Fortes sunt h&ben^ n5n qui
f &ciunt, add qm prdpubant
injuri&m.
Gyges ft nana vlddbfttnr, ^ps^
antSm onmift Yiddb&t.
(522.) Examples.
(a) Those are to It esteemed
brave, not who do, but who
ward off injury.
(b) Gyges was seen by no-
body, but he himself saw
all things.
{a) S d d indicates a strong opposition ; it always stands first
in its clause, as in (a).
(b) AutSm expresses a weaker opposition than sftd. Au-
tSm and v6ro never stand first in a sentence, but ah?\rays after
obe or more words.
(523.) Translate into English.
Nostri c616rlt6r accurrerunt ; & t Germani fortlter impStum
gl&diorum exc6perunt. — ^Amici rfegis du6 tr^sv^ (519, R. 3) per-
divites sunt. — Siv6 cftsu (55, a) siv6 consilio deorum immortft-
lium, paenfts persolvSrunt. — Nonnulli, sivd f6Bcit&te {abl.)
quad&m, sivS bdnit&te naturae, rect&m vitae sScuti sunt viftm. —
Fort@8 6t magn&nlmi sunt h&bendi, non qm f &ciunt s d d qui
propulsant injuriam. — ^Non formosus ^rat, s ^ d drat f^undus
UlyssSs. — ^A-varus n6n posslddt divitifta (57, R.) sed cfivitiaB
possldent etim. — Fl3ttis plerumqud est ef^BCtus tristStiae ; inter-
diim v3ro dtiam (even) gaudii. — ^Helv^tii f^re qudtidianis
praeliis (55, a) cum Germftnis contendunt, quum a u t su'is fiui-
bus eos prdhibent, aut ipsi in eorum finlbus beUum gdrunt. —
Animantium mot^s diversus est; v61 ambulant 6t currunt»
vfil vdlant, t61 nfttant. — Corpus mSritur (dcp.), v6rtlm M-
miis nimquam mfiri^tur. — MiHtes nostri fortes fuSrunt, sdd
ftvari.
Digitized
by Google
§ 16.
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.— (LXXXVI.— XCII.)
(524.) The subjunctive mood expresses affirma-
tion douhtfullyj indefinitelyy or as conceived by the
mind; e. g., / may write; I might write; I might
have written ; if I should write ; if I had written.
Rem, — The subjundiTe has no future tense-form.
LESSON LXXXVI.
Subjunctive Present.
(525.) Forms of e s s e (to be) in subjunctive present.
Pres.
stokt
I may be.
BiB,
thou may-
est be.
•it,
ke, she, it
may be.
■imiis,
toe may he.
ye may be.
(526.) Forms of regular verbs.
(a) The'subjunctbe present adds the person-endings
m, 8, t, mus, tis, nt, for the active<t and
r, ris or re, tur, mur, mini, ntnr, for ih» passive,
to the verb-stem bj means of the foUowing connecting voweb, viz.,
(6)
Istconj., e; e. g.f tai-€-m, ain-«-r.
2dcoig^ 6a;e.g'., mdn-eft-m, m6n-e»-r.
3dconj., A; ft^., rtg4^na, r8g-«-r.
4Uicoi:^., ia; e. g., aud-Iia-m, and-ia-r.
PARADIOM. — SUBJUNCf IVE PRESENT.
AcTiTK. — IfMiy love, advise, rule, hear. ||
Stem.
Sinjular.
^I.ni. II
Sin-
mon*
6m.
Mm.
fan.
Iftm.
68.
6tB.
as.
T&8.
6t.
6ftt.
at.
ait.
fimfis.
eaihiis.
ftmCu.
I&mtls.
gtits.
6atite.
fttils.
ifttifl.
ent.
«Ant.
Ant
lant.
PASsms.—/ may he loved, advised, ruled, heard. \\
Sleio.
SinRalar. |
PluraL II
ftm-
mdn-
rfier-
aad-
6r.
6ar.
&r.
erfs or ere.
Saris or &r6.
aria or Ar6.
Tftris or ar6.
etur.
«&ttLr.
atCir.
Ifttdr.
emOr.
SamOr.
ftmfir.
iftmOr.
emini.
eau^LDL
iftminl.
entur.
eantur.
ftntfir.
lAnteir.
Digitized by
Google
200
SUBJUNCTIVE PBE8ENT*
EXEBCISE.
(527.) Vocabulary.
Value, pr^tiiim, I.
To obey, pirert (pirfi-) ; governi dot.
To despcnr, d§8p6r&re (&▼-, ftt-).
Otherwise, fHaXAr {adv.).
To kinder, impjklire (iv-, It-).
Carefully, Btfididie {ado.).
To exercise, exercdre (exercil-, ex-
ereit-).
To grieve, d51«re (d^-, dSUt-).
WotOd that, dtitnam (coi^).
To fear, mStafire (m6tii-).
Incredible, incredlbflis, e (104).
Mind {talent), ingdziniin, L
(528.) Exampks.
[The urincipftl use of the fahjimctire m Latm is in dependent len-
tenoes ; bat in this lesson we show its uses in principal sentences, in
which it occurs only when something is said without dq/initeness or eer>
tainty.]
To be ignorant, igndrtre (!▼•, at-).
To deny, n«gftre (flv-, At-).
To know, nosc6r6 (nov-, nOt-).
To afford, praebSre (pneba-, prabit-^
To make on^s self a judge, s« jndi-
cdm pra^>dr6.
To apply, to employ, adhlbSrd (Sl«k
It-),
Cautious, caotiis, S, txxL
Rashly, tSmfirt (oiv,).
Ever, onqoim {adv.).
Truly, obviously, prarsQs {ado.^.
Finally, d€nlqad {adv.).
(a) 1. No sane man can doubt
about the value of virtue.
2. May i he safe!
3. I hope you are apell
(^may you be safe).
4. May I not he safe, if
I write othenoise^hn
I think.
6. I hope my father is
alive ( = would that
my father may be
alive).
6. I wish he wovld come.
Nemo sftDus dd Tirtfitis prfttid
dab!t«t.
Sim salyiU!
Sahiis sis!
Nd s! m-salvus, si ftHtftr scrlbo
ftc senfio.
Utfnam p&ter vivat.
Utinam vdni&t.
(a) The subjunctive present is used for the English poten«
ttal, may, can^ &:c., and also to express a wish^ when the thing
wished is possible. A negative wish is expressed by n 6 pre-
fixed, as in (4).
(&) 1. Let us believe.
2. Let us obey virttLe.
3. Do not despair.
Cr3d&mus.
Virtuti p&reftmua.
Nd ddspdrea.
Digitized by
Google
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.
201
(fi) The subjuoctiTe present is used, instead of the impera
tzve, to soften a command. N 6 is used for prohibition.
(c) Who vxntld not love vir-
tue?
What can I do?
Who is ignorant ?
Quis virtutem non &met?
Quid f^iam ?
Quis ignoret?
Digitized by
Google
202
BQBJUMOTIVB MOODw
^•I-hopeHhat {utmam) ih» oommaoder is albe (=may Ihre);-—
I hope our friendft Hiay eome ! — ^May tliese things be true !r— >
May the citizens be wise.
{h) Let OS not believe this. — Do not believe these &bles. —
Let us exercise ourselves diligently. — Let us love our friends,
let us obey our parents, let us worship Qod. — Know your (own)
mind. — ^Let the soldiers take-possession-of the mountain. — Let
us not love the wicked.
(c) Who can say this ? — ^Who can love a fool ? — Who would
obey a wicked king ? — What good (man) can doubt concerning
the value of virtue 1 — ^Who can deny that aQ avaricious men
are slaves 1
LRSSON LXXXVIL
Subjunctive Perfect
(53 L) Form of esse {to be) in subjunctive perfect.
Il fuSiim,
I may
been.
havetkou
fudris,
mayest
have been.
foerit,
he^ »he, it
may have
been.
I fhdifaiilfli
wemayhave
been.
fiidiftis,
been.
yemayhave they
fuSciiit^
have been.
(532.) Forms of regular verbs.
1. The subjunctive perfect active adds the endings
firim, 6riB, 6rlt, firlmus, firltli, firlnt,
to the indie, perf. stem of the verb; «. g., &m&v-drlm, &c.
2. The subjjAnctive perfect passive b formed by combining
the perfect pisdciple with the subjunctive present of esse;
e. g,, & m S. t ii s si m, dec.
[ ^7* Deponents, of course, are formed like passives.]
3* PARADIOM, SUBJUNCTIVE PERFECT.
Acnyg.— /may haoe loved, advimd, tided, heard.
Hxxay-
mdnii-
MX-
andiv-
fiiiin.
«ris.
firit
firlmtbi.
difHs.
diint
Passivx. — Imof haoe been loved, advieed, ruled, heard.
Sing.
^ im&tfis, ft, um,
mdnitiis, ft, Urn,
reetOa, ft, tlm,
^ anditus, a, Qm,
aim.
Bit
Plur. ^
'ftiDftti, n, ft,
mdniti, ob, ft,
recti, 89, ft,
^ aaditi, a, ft, ^
BunQs.
sitia.
Digitized by
Google
SUSJUNOTIVB MOOD.
208
EXERCISE.
(533.) Vocabulary.
Health, vAletadd, (valetodin) is (3a»}.
Sot thus, itft {ad/».)
Kindness, pardon, y^nia, ».
To take captive, dLpdrd (io, cdp-,
capt-, X9»).
Patience, pi^entta, sb.
To slay, cut to pieces, caddrd (oS-
cid-, caes-, 413, JS^),
It makes no difference, it matter$
not, nSbSL rdfert
DC/** Form the subjunctive perfect active and pass-
ive of the follov^ring verbs :
Absikn, to be absent (no passive).
PrSsiim, to profit (da).
Ddsum, to be wanting (do.).
yhcikA,tocaXL
Oonfinntrd, to assert,
DicSrd, to say (dix-, diet-).
Tr&ddrd, to assert, deliver (tradid-,
tradit-).
Laadare, to pndse,
Vld«re, to see.
(534.) Examples.
(a) Do not doit. | N© fscfiris.
(a) The subjunctive perfect (as weU as the present) may be
used in prohibitions, with n@, or nihil, instead of the inoper-
ative.
Inv3nir6, to find (invdli-^ invent-).
Scribdrfi, to write.
r4c6r6 (io-, fee-, fact), to do,
L6qvl (16eu^), to speak {dep.).
Cens^rd (censd-, cens-), to think.
OppTimSr<$ (press*, press-), to re-
press, crush,
Constituere (stitii-, stitd^), to place.
Oppugntrd, to assault.
Rdvdcard, to recall, restart.
PacS tua dixdrim ; or, Vdni^
tua dixdrim.
DixSrit Epicurus.
Forsit&n &Ilquis dixdrit.
(h) By your leave I woxdd
say.
Epicurus may have said.
Perchance some one may say.
(5) The subjunctive perfeet may be used with or without an
adverb, to express a supposed case (that may be true).
(c) I think I can assert this. Hoc confirmav6rim.
You will scarcely find a man Vix ulKus gentls hdminem in-
of any nation. v 6 n 6 r i s.
(c) The subjunctive perfect (as well as present) is used to
soJUn an assertion. (Such phrases as, Probably I mighty I
think I can, I would, perhaps, &c., can be expressed in Latin
by one word in the perfect subjunctive, as above.)
Digitized by
Google
204 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.
Car ridSs?
Die* mihi c&r ride&8«
&bl faisti?
Nescio dbi fndris?
(c^ (1) Why do you laugh?
(2) Ten me why you
laugh,
{!) Where have yoif been?
(2) I do Dot know where
you have been.
The sentences marked (1) are direct interrogative sentences,
and take the indicative mood ; those marked (2) are indirect (or
subordinate) interrogative sentences, and take the subjunctive.
Hence,
{e)Rule of Syntax, — The subjunctive mood is used in all in-
direct interrogative sentences.
Ran, Sadi ■entencet mre introduced by die intenogative pronoanB
qoifl, qui* qoantoi, qaali«, oter, &c^ or die adverbs nlri, nnde, qnan-
do^ qoo, cur, num, otrom, an, ftc.
(535.) Translate into English.
(a) Qu5d dubltas, nd fScSris. — Id nd dixdris. — Nihil in-
commddd (to the injury) v&letadinis tu8B fdcSris.— Cftm im-
prdbb ftc stultis ndldcQtns sis.
(6) F&ciat hoc &Kquis. — ^Fficfirit hoc &fiquis. — ^Dixdrit
EplcQriis, Deum essd nullum. — For^tan eiim &m&v6ris. —
Forsltan lt& censuSris. — Pueriim magistri mdnudrint. —
XJrb6m hostes oppugn&vdrint.
(c) Fr&t^r (voc.), bdnft tu& vdnift dixdrim, me& sententi&
mSlidr est. — P&tientiam laud&vdrim boum (351, 2) atque
dquorum. — Ingdni& studi&qu6 oppressdris f&cUius (376)
qu&mrdvdcftvdris.
(d) Nescio ctir ride&s. — Die, ctir ftd mS non veneris.
— HelvStu lb! drunt, db! eos Cnsar constittLerit. — Magno
ctLm pgriculo (89, II.) id f^cit. — Intelfigit, quantO cilm peri-
ciilo id fecSrit. — Multi in praeUo csBsi sunt. — ^Multi in praelio
capti sunt. — ^Ubi {when) victdri& &miss& est {is lost) nihil rdfert,
qudt in praelio cssi aut in fiigft capti sint. — Die mihi
tih'i fuSris.
(536.) Translate into Latin.
(a) Do not love the wicked. — Do not hear the foolish.
* The imperative of dlc^r^ ia die, not dicA.
Digitized by
Google
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.
205
(h) Some philosophers may-have-denied the sonl to be im-
mortal. — Perhaps-yoU'have-advised the young-man.
(c) I thinfC'I-can-advise the young man. — You may easib^
Tejpress the minds of young mea.^-You cannot easily recaU the
industry (studium) of men.
(d) The mind itself knows-not what (qu&Bs) the mind is. —
Tell me tohere you were. — ^I-do-not-know why you did not come
to me. — Tell (me), were you (fuerisne) in school yesterday ? —
It makes no difference how many are taken-capdve. — The boy
-will remun (erit) there, where the master may appoint him. —
I win tell you what I have seen. — I will tell you what I have
heard. — Tell me what you have done.
LESSON LXXXVIII.
Subjunctive Imperfect and Pluperfect. — Conditional
Conjunctions and Sentences.
(537.) The subjunctive imperfect simply adds the
person-endings,
m, 8, t, mus, tis, nt, for the active,
r, ris (re), tur, mur, mini, ntur, for ihe passive,
to the present infinitive form of the verb. Thus,
(538.)
lBf.PtM.
ImperC 8abj. Act
ImperC Snbj. Pi
^•ue,tobe.
eiiem, I might be.
ftm§r6, to lave.
ftmire-m.
ftmflre-r.
r6g€r6»torule.
rSgfire-m.
rfigSre-r.
PARADIOM. SUBJUNCTIVE IMPERFECT.
L EMfan.— Jm^yfa, eovldt would, or should be.
essSm.
essds.
OM^t. ii ess£mti8. | eesetls. \ essfint.
2. Acmvm.-^I might, could, would, ifc, love, adviae, rule, hear.
Smar-
mdndr-
r6g«r-
aadir- ^
Sm.
et.
fimiig.
etiCs.
a VAMm^I might, anOd, would, ifc, be loved, adoUed, ruled, heard.
imftr* "^
mdD6r-l I
'fills or fir6.
6tttr.
smfir.
tatfir.
S
Digitized by
Google
906
BUBJmrOTIVE MOOD*
Memr-^VtM romeL e of A* eadiag ii long, «zo6pt where it oooMfl be&re
m or t final, when it u ibort of neeoMity.
(589.) (a) The subjunctive pluperfect active simply
adds the person-endings,
m, s, t, mns, tie, nt,
to the past infinUive form of the verb. Thus,
iniauB, to have been. iuiu§(i-m, I might have bern^
imaviMSy to have loved. im&viiBS-m, I might have loved,
{b) The subjunctive pluperfect passive is formed
by combining the perfect participle with the subjunct-
ive imperfect of e s s e ;
E» g^y &m&tii8 essdm (sometames with the subjunctive
pluperfect of e s s S ; e. g., & m ft t ii s f il i s a 6 m, &c.),
(c) PARADIGM. — SUBJUNCTIVE PLUPERFECT.
Inugkt^ could, would, should have been, 9fO.
faisaftm. | ftiisses. | fuisset.
i. AcrmL—Imi^la, could, ife., hmu
I faissemiis/ | itiissetis. ( faissdnt.
lot>eitadti$id,rMl^htard,
imftT- ")
mdnti-
rex-
aadiv-
I8861XL
UMOi.
iuet.
iis&ntSB.
isaetzb.
usdnt.
a PAa8iVK.--/m^Af, covld, j/c, have been laoed, advited, ruled, heard.
essSm.
ess^s.
estSt.
i^Qr.
aaditi, s, 8. 7 *
Conditional Conjunctions and Sentences.
(540.) (a) The coiiditional coDJunctions are si, if; si'n, but
if; nisi, or nl, \fnot, unless.
(5) A conditional sentence is one which is introduced by a
conditional conjunction ; e. ^., if men were good, they would be
happy.
Rem,. The sentence introduced by {fis called t^e conditional $en.
tence ; the other, the eonsequeTit sentence : ^ men were good is die
conditional ; they would be happy, the consequent
Digitized by
Google
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 207
EXE&CISB.
(541.) Vocabulary.
To diminish, mlQudre (miirii-, mX-
ntit-).
To croM over, tnuuXr^ (nreg.).
The world, orbfo ten&rjim.
To subdue, subTgert {rnhBg-, gubac^
Bub+ttg«r«).
Longer, dxatittg (adv., eompar.).
I wish thai, titiEnam (ooi4>)>
(542.) Exampks and Rules.
(a) Would that my father
were alive !
I wish he cotdd come !
UtaDam p&ter TiT^ret !
tJtinam v d n i r e t !
^^ la these exan^les (which refer to present time), th» thing wiihed
iA supposed to be impossible (the wisb is vain),
Iwiihhehad Ivoed! Utilnam vixisaet !
I wish he had come ! I IJtiiiam vdnisset !
ST lit these examples (which refer to paU time), t^ tinng wished \»
■op^posed to be impossible (the wish is vain).
(a) Bude of Syntax. — ^The imperfeet and pluperfect sub-
junctive are used to express ao imposnble swppontion^ or
a vain vnsh ; Ae imperfect, with reference tx} present or
fuXwre time ; the pluperfect,, with reference to past time.
(6) Conditional Sentences.
(1) If he has {any) money, [Si pdcuniam h&bet, d&t.
he gives (it). |
Here the man is BTq>posed to have money ; the condition expressed hy
* if" is therefore real.
(2) If he has (any) money,
he will give (it).
Si pdcuniam h&beat,
d&bit.
Here the conation is possible, if not real. The man may have money.
(3) If he had an^ money, ^e I S i p^cuniam h&bSret,
iDould give it. | d & r e t.
Here the man is supposed to have no money: the condition is unreal.
(Obsenre that it refers to present or future tivfie.)
(4) If he had had any money, I S i pdcuniam h&buisset,
he would have given it. \ d d d i s s e t.
Here the man is supposed not to haive had any money ; the condition is
therefore unreal (referring to past time). Hence,
(6) Rule of Syntax. — In conditional sentences (1), a real
Digitized by
Google
208 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.
condition 'n expressed by the indicatiTe ; (2) a pamble
condition by the present or perfect subjunctive ; (3) an
unreal or imjfossihU condition in present time by the im-
perfect subjunctive ; and (4) an unreal or impossible con-
dition in past time by the pluperfect subjunctive.
Rem. 1. In cases (3) and {4), the snbjimctive most be used in the
contequent as well as in the conditional sentence.
8. It follows that the perfect or pluperfect indicative can never be
nsedwithn. If he had come = bI y^uxb b^ t^ not tS.y%Ditcit.
(543.) Translate into English.
tjtlnam salvos essds. — Si hoc dicis, erras. — Si hdc
d i c a s, erres. — S i hoc dicdres, errftres. — S i hdc d i x -
isses, errftvisses. — Si v3nisses &d exercltum, &b impdr&-
tore visus esse s. — Frftter mihi narr&bat quid Amicus tuus
fecisset (534, <£). — Mdmdri& minuitur, nisi e&m exer-
ce&s. — Si Helv6tii flClmen transir6 conentur, Csesar ede
pr6hibdbit. — Si Helvdtii flu men transire cdn&rentur, CsBsar
eds prdhibdret. — Si Helv6tii flumen transire con&ti
e s s e n t, Caesar eds prdhibuiss6 1. — S i obsides &b Helv6tiis
Caes&ri (54) dentur, ctim iis pftcem f&ciet. — Si obsides &b
Helvdtiis Caesari d&rentur ctim iis pacem f&c^ret. — Si
obsides &b Helv6tiis CaBsari d&ti essent, cun^ iis pftcem
fdcisset. — Non stkpSr&rdmur, civds (voc.) si nostri fortds
essent. — Non stip^rftti ess^mus, civds, si fortiores
mifites nobis (dai,,, 125, II., a) fuissent. — ^Alexander totum
ftrd orbdm terrftrum subdgit. — Alexander, si diutlus vixis
set, totum orbem terr&rum siibegisset.
(544.) Translate into Latin,
I wish my father had lived longer. — lunsh you had come. —
Would'that the soldiers had been braver. — If you-would-read
this book (542, 6, 2), I would give (it) to you. — I wish the gen-
eral had led the army across the Rhine. — If you had any thing
(quid), you would willmgly give (it). — If they had had the
money, (hey would willingly have given it. — If-you-had-loved
the boy, you-umild-have advised him. — If youlove the boy,
you-unU-advise him. — Tjfthe soldiers would com^ to the army,
they-would-be-praised by the general. — If the Germans had-led
(theur) army across the Rhine, Caesar would-have-m^de an at-
tack upon (in) thfm. — Ifwe-are brave, we shall not be overcome
Digitized by
Google
SUBJUNCTIVE WITH UT, NE. 209
LESSON LXXXIX.
Digitized by
Google
210 UT, NE, EXFRBSBINa ftTEFOBE.
The general commanded tkcU '
the soldiers should keep
their stations ;
or,
The general commanded the
soldiers to keep ^ir sta-
tions. 3
Dux imp^rftvit, iit miHtes
st&tiones sufts sery&rent.
(b) I beseech you that you 1
do not do this ; I „, - « , «- .
_ >Td obsScro nft hdc f&cias.
or, I
I beseech you not to do this, j
The genera] commanded that '
the soldiers should not
desert their stations ;
or,
The general commanded the
soldiers not to desert their
stations.
Dux impdrftvit nd mill tea
st&ti5nes sufts ddsdr-
6rent.
(a) These examples show that b. purpose or aim may be ex-
pressed in English by that, in order that, or (especiaUy after
verbs of asking and comnuinding) by the infinitive. In Latin,
such sentences are expressed by u t, with the subjunctive.*
(6) An object to be provided against is introduced in English
by that not, in order that not, or by not, with the infinitive. In
Latin, such sentences are always expressed by n 6, with the
subjunctive.
(549.) Translate into English.
1. tJt.
.Edimus tit viv&mus, n5n vivlmus tit ddftmus. — Ydmo
tit disc&m. — VSm ut discdrem. — Org6t6rix persuftdSt
Castled (dat.) H t regnum o c c ti p e t. — ^In eo itindre, persua^
Castlco, cujus pftter regnum in civit&te suft multds annos (191, a)
obtinuSrat, H t regnum in cMt&te suft occupare t. — Orget-
drix persuftdet Dumnoilgi iit id6m (150) c6n6tur. — Orget-
drix persuasit Dumnoilgi 6t Iddm cdn&r@tur. — Helvdtii
persuftdent Raurftcis, uti ctim iis proficiscantur. — Helv6-
tii persuftdent Raurftcis 6t Tuling^, ti ti, oppldis suis viclsque
* Jubiri takes aocosative with infioitive.
Digitized by
Google
UT, NSy BXPB£E|8ING PURPOSE. 211
exnsfis (457), un& ctim iis proflciscantur. — CsBs&r castelUl
community ^ t Helv^tios prdhlbdre p o s s i t. — Caesar casteDa
communivit u t Helvgtios pr6hlb6re posset. — Caesar rdgat
Divitiacum H t f inem orandi f & c i a t. — Caesar rdg&vh Divitift-
cum ii t f inem orandi f ft c 6 r e t. ^ — Helv6tiis (147) Caesar im-
pdrat titi perfugfts r^ due ant, — Hely^tiis Caesar impdrftvit
tlti perftigas rSducSrent.
2. Ne.
T© obs^crftvi n 6 hoc f & c 6 r e s. — P&ter filium obs^rat n 6
quid turpiter f ft c S r e t. — Milites, n 3 ftb hoste circumv^n-
i r e n t u r, audftcitis (376) resistSre ac fortius pugn&re eoBp6-
runt*— Divitiftcus Caesftrem obsScrat, n6 quid grftviiis in frft-
trem st&tuat. — Divlti&cus, multis cum Iftcrymis (89, II.)
Caesftrem obsScrftre coepit, n3 quid grftvius in frfttrem stft tu-
ft ret. — ^Praeceptum est (perf. pres., it has been enjoined to or
tipon) Labigno, n e praelium committat, nisi Cses&ris copiae
visae sint (542, by 2). — Praeceptum ftrat Labi3no, n3 praelium
committftret, nisi Caesftris copiae yisae essent.
[Hecollect that a purpose or aim is often expressed in English by liie
infinUive ; "but in Latin ncrer— always by u t with the subjunctive for a
positive aim, by n e with the subjunctive for a negative aim.]
(550.) Translate into Latin.
The general commands the lieutenant (147) not to do (= that
he may not do) this. — The general exhorted the soldiers to make
(= that they should make) the attack diarply. — The &ther be-
seeches his daughter to make an end of praying. — Some-men
(qmdam) live to eat, not eat to Uve. — He comes to see the gen-
eral — He came to see the general. — The Helvetians persuade
the Tulin^ans to set out together with them. — The captive
beseeches the general not to decide-on any-thing at-all-severe
against (in) him (sS). — Caesar commands the Gauls (147) to
bring back {=that they should bring back) the deserters. —
The Romans, that they might not be surrounded by the Gauls,
began to fight more bravely. — The commander enjoins-it-upon
the lieutenant not to join bcUtle, — The commander enjoined it
upon the lieutenant not to join battle.
Digitized by
Google
212
SUCCESSION OP TENSES.
LESSON XC.
Succession of Tenses. — t^t expressing a Result.
(551.) (1.) We cannot say in English, ** He comes^ that he
might see the general ;" or, ** JEfc came, that he may see the gen-
eral ;" but we must say, ** He comesy that he may see the gen-
eral,'* and, ** He came, that he might see the general.*' It is
obvious that this tense of the verb in the subordinate sentence
depends upon that of the principal sentence ; and this depend-
ence is called the sitccession of tenses.
2. The tenses of the Latin verb are divided into primary
and historical.
(<,)Pfimar9, J ^"^
Fotarc
Smftbit,
hetciUlove.
PrM.PerC
ftmavit,
he?uu loved.
{b) Historical, ^^^^
Pluperfect
ftmftvSrftt,
he had loved.
PerC Aoriat
ftm&vTt,
lieloved.
Imperfect.
; &mftb&t,
s was loving.
3. The Rule for the succession of tenses then is : If there be
a primary tense in the principal sentence, there must be a pri-
mary tense in the subordinate sentence ; if a historical tense in
the principal, a historical tense in the subordinate.
[The examples in tiie preceding lesson illostrate this role, and tixwe in
the present lesson will farther confirm it]
EXER
(552.) Vocabulary,
To strive, contend, niti (nis- and
nix-), dep.
Despair, despSrfttid, (desperation)
Is (333, R.).
To run together, concnrrSre (con-
cnrr- and concttcnrr-, concurs-).
Storm, tempestas, (tempestftt) is
(293).
To rise (as a storm), coorui (coort-,
con-f-orirl).
Palisade {rampart of stakes) val-
HUn,L
CISE.
To cut or tear down, scinddrS (sdTd-,
sciss').
To begin, inoIpdrS (incdp-, incept-,
in+c5p6r6).
To afford means or facUiHes, dSiS
ftcoltitem.
Deceit, dolus, I.
Rather, migXs.
Integrity, prdbltfts, (prdblttt) is
(293).
Course, corsQs, As.
Change, commtuatio (finis, 333, B.).
Digitized by
Google
9T WITH THE SUBJUNCTIVE. 213
Svhordinate Sentences expressing a Result,
(553.) Examples and Rules.
Tant& v!s pr6blt&tis est, iSt
e&iD vSl in hostd diligft
mus.
HebrStii it& & p&txlbuB 8ui8
didicdrunt, fi t m&gis yirtQte
qu&m ddlo mtantur.
So great is the power of in-*
tegrity, that we esteem it
even in an enemy,
l^he Helvetians have been so
taught by {=have so leqm-
edfrom) their fathers, thai
they contend (or, as to con-
tend) rather vjith valour
than deceit,
(a) These examples show that a result (especiaUy after the
words such, so, so great, &c.) is expressed in English by (hat
with the indicative, or, as to with the infinitive ; in Latin, by & t
with the subjunctive.
ijb) Rule of Syntax. — Xit, signifying that, and introducing
a result, governs the subjunctive.
Rem) trt, expressing a resuU, generally follows the correlative words
thWn, tvLUtun {suchf to great); ftdSo, sic, itft («o); and verbs
signifying to accomplish, to bring to pats, &c.
(554.) Translate into English,
Impdr&tor perflcit, uti S3qu&ni dent obsidSs. — Dumnorix
perflcit, ilti Sdqu&ni dent obsides, n6 itin^re (153, a) Hel-
vdtios prohibeant (548, b). — ImpertLtor tan t ft vi (55, a) oppi-
dum oppugnat, lit desper&tio ftnimos oppldftnorum occtipet
(551, 3). — Imp6rftt5r t an t a vi oppldum oppugn&vit tt t despdr-
fttio &iu[mos oppidftnorum occupftre t. — T a n t u s timor om-
nem exercltum occup&vit, u t omniiim ftnlmos perturb&ret.
— Tantft tempestas stibito coort& est (perf aor.) Ht n&v6s
cursum t^ndrd non p o s s e n t. — Impdrfttor t a n t a m sib! (54)
jftm in Gallift auctoritfttem compftrftv^rat, ii t undique &d eum
l6gfttiones concurrSrent (551, 3). — Galli vallum scindunt. —
Gall! vallum scindSre 6t fbssam compldre incipiunt. — GalH sic
nostros contemnxmt, tit vallimi scind^re ^t fossam complSre
incipiant. — Oppidum nfttura (55, a) 16ci sic muniebfttur,
tit magnam ftd ducendum (496) bellum d ft r 6 1 f ftcultfttem. —
Anxilidrum adventu (55) magnft r6rum commutfttio facta est.
Digitized by
Google
214 auo, auiN, auoMiNUs, with subjunctive.
— Horum adventu t a n t & rdrum commut&tio iactft est, i& t nos-
tn fortius pugn&rent atque hostds r6pell6rent.
(555.) Translate into Latin,
[Beoollect that a to with the Bngluh ioflzdtiye nrnst be translated by
ut with icibjimctiTe.]
The commander broughtM-to pass that the Seqnanians gave
hostages. — The Sequamans gave hostages that they would
not prohibit the Hebretians firom (their) journey (153, a). — So-
great-a fear suddenly seizes the whole army, thai it alarms the
minds of all. — So great a tempest suddenly arises, thai the
ships can not hold their course. — The commander procures for
himself so great authority in Italy, OuU even the senators run-
together to him. — The Helvetians begin to cut*down the bridge.
— The Helvetians so despised our men, that they began to cut
down the Inidge. — ^By the approach of tiie ^duans, so great «
change was made thai the Helvetians began to fight mcHre
bravely. — The Helvetians had so learned from their fathers,
as to contend rather with valour than deceit.
LESSON XCI.
Periphrastic Conjugation, Subjunctive. — Use of quo,
quin^ quomtnUs, with the Subjunctive.
(656.) The want of a future subjunctive is supplied to some
extent by the periphrastic conjugation, fcHined by combining
the participles in r ii s and d u s witiat the subjunctive tenses of
e s s d, to be.
▲cnvx. i
Pres.
Jmperf.
P»f'
Pluperf.
ftmftturus sfm, / tnay be about to lave. |{
ftm&torfis essgm, I might be about to love. |
ftmitnrus faftiim, I may have been about to love. i
taaaturus fuigsfim, I might have been about to love. ||
PAssnrjs. 1
Pres.
Plup^.
ftmandus aim, / may be to be loved {one must love me).
toiandus essdm, I might be to be loved.
ftmandiLs faQtim, I may have been to be hved.
ftmandus fiiissgm, / might have been to be loved.
Esse ito be). |{
Pres.
fatfiras aim, I may be about to be. fl
f iitarag eagfim, I might be about to be. 1
Digitized by
Google
auo, aunfy auoMiNus, with bubjunctiye. 215
EXERCISE,
(557.) Vocabulary.
To hold back, restiviih r^tlna^ (r^-
Uxx&'t rgtent-, rg+t6n6re).
To stand in the toayf prevent, 6b-
Btftr6 (obstit-, obst&t*, oH-sUre).
To sustain, nutioidre {tSjoA-, tent-,
sab+tSnerS).
Novelty, novitfta, (ndvitftt) It (293).
To decree, ooniciBcSre (cooMdv-, con-
8Cit-).
To commit suicide, lYbl mortem ooo-
sciscSiS (= to decree deatb to
cme'f lelf ).
Cowardici, ignftvia, e.
r<? <aA:e away from, firip^rt (io-^
eripa-, £rept-); govemi ace. mod
abl
To train, educate, ddflcflri {tv-, &t-).
To deceive, faU&rS (f «feU-, fals).
It loas Ccesar's fauU, FSr Csesft-
rem stStit (=it stood throagli Ca*
sar).
7\) finish, perflcire (peif fie-, per
feet-).
Suspicion, fvploio, dnlf (333, E.).
(558.) Examples and Rules,
{a) Gaetar erects forta, that I Cvsar caiteM commiimt, qu5
A« may the more easily \ f&cllius Helydtioe prdUtb-
- keep (^ tlie Helvetians. I 6re p o s s i t.
(a) Q uo is used to express a purpose (instead of ft t), espe-
cially when a comparative enters the sentenee.
Csf&r cutellft commdnit dt poiiit {that he may, &&).
Cassar cafltell& communit qa6 f&cUiiifl poasit [that he may more
easily, &c.).
(6) (1) There is no one hut
thinks ;
or,
There is no one who does
not think,
(2) There is no one so
hrave as not to he con-
founded,
(3) It is not doubtful hut
that the soldiers vAU
fight bravely,
(4) / did not doubt that
the soldiers toould fight
hravdy,
(5) They could not be
restrained from hurl-
ing darts {=. bat that
they should huri darts).
Nemo est quln piitet.
Nemo est tam fertis qufn
perturbetur.
Ndn diibium est q u i n mifitea
fortiCtdr pugnfttQri sint.
Ndn dtibit&bam quin mIKtes
fortifter pugnfttUri es-
sent.
N5n pdtdrant rMnftri quln
teUl conjicdrent.
Digitized by
Google
Nihil impddit, quGmlnus
hdc f&ciat.
216 acjo, auiN, auoMiNus, with subjunctivb.
(b) Quid is used in the sense of *' 5t«C or ** as not,^^ nftor
negative sentences ; and in the sense of ** that not" and ** that^^*
after non dubito, non dubium est, &c. ; in the sense of
'^from" (= but that) after verbs of restraining, &c.
(c)(1) What stands in the Qnid obstat quo minus Jfi-
way of Julius being lius sit hiatus?
happy (= what stands
in the way in order
that Julius may not be
happy) 1
(2) Nothing hinders him
from doing this (= no-
thing impedes, in order
that he may not),
(o) Quomintis is used (in preference to nd) after verbs
ci hindering, prevenUng, standing in the way of Sec. (It can
general^ be rendered into English by of or from, with a parti-
ciple, as above.)
(559.) Translate into English.
(a) dud (= in order that, used instead of Q t, with comparatives),
Caesar miHtes hort&tus est iit fortes essent. — Caesar nulites
hortatus est qu6 fortiores essent. — Eo dpdre perfecto
(456) Caesar prsesldift disponit, castellft communit, qud f&cil-
ius, si Helvetii transire conentur (542, b, 2) prdhibdre possit.
—Scrips!, ut auctdilt&tem h&bdrem. — Scrips! quo in suadendo
(488) plus auctdrit&tis (186, a) h&b3rem. — ^Auxilium rdgant,
tit hostitim copias sustineant. — Subsidium rdgant, quo f&-
cilius hostium copias sustineant.
{b) anln {= but that).
Nemo est tarn fortis quin r^i n5vit&te (55, a) perturbetiir.
— -Orgdtorix mortuus est, ndqud abest suspicio qmn ipsd sibi
mortem consciv6rit. — ^Helvgtii non diibitant quin Kdm&ni
JEdius {abl,, verb of depriving) Kbertatem Srepturi sint. —
Ndti dubium est quin civSs, ub! (when) patri& in pdiiculo
ftitur& sit (534, c), fortater pugnAtari sint. — Non dubito
quin pu6rumbdn6 educAttlrus sis. — Turpfi estfalfi. — Tur-
pitis est failure. — Non dtibium est quin turpius sit failure
quam fall!. — Germftid rdHndri non potSrant quin In nostrds
tel& conjicdrent.
Digitized by
Google
aUUM WITH flUBJUKCTITB. 217
(c) dndmlnfls {:= in order that nei^,
Pdr L&bidnum st^tit qu dm in us Rdm&nl opptdum oeeupft*
rent. — Noetrorum igoavi& obst&bat qud minus hostes si&per-
ftrentur. — Non m6 impediSs quomlnns Id f &ciam. — S6n-
ectus non impddit qudminus littdrftrum Bt&di& t^neftmus.
(560.) Translate into Latin.
[Bemember the rale for the Succession of Tenses (551, 3).]
(a) and.
Csesar, having finished the work (== the work herag finidied),
exhorted the soldiers to he of a braver spirit (fortiori &Mmd). —
I ask your assistance, that I may do this the more eamly.
{b) auin.
There is no one who does not think that die wise are tHwujB
happy. — It is not doubtftd that CsBsar vfiU cross the Rhine. — I
do not doubt that pij father will come. — I was not doubting that
you had educated the boys weE.
(c) dadminfts.
Nothing hinders me from being happy. — It was the fault of
the commander that the soldiers did not fight brately. — ^The
eowardioe of die commander stood in the way of our taking-
p o aae B s ioa -of die town*
LESSON XCIL
Use of Quumy with the Subjunctive.
(561.) The conjunction quum (sometimes written cum)
has two uses : (1) to denote time simply (when, while) ; (2) to
denote a cause, or reason (sin^e). The former is called quum
temporal^ the latter quum causal*
EXEBOISE.
(562.) Vocabulary.
To contemplate, ooBtemplftri (it-),
dep.
To perceivef iaimadyertSrd (vert-,
rers-, animnm+ad+vertere).
To dday, tardtrt* ^-, tt-).
To get sight if, oonspfcfco (spex^
«?peet-).
Incessant, continuous, continent
(nent) Is (WW).
Ofrigh^fmtHVf J« («M. flf j«s).
Digitized by
Google
218
aOUM WITH SUBJUNCTIVE.
To order, jilbdr^^ does not take ut
with rabj^ bat aoc. with in! ; he
. ordered them to €noait=:^tiBAte^
expectard.
DeUructiony interit&i , ill.
To make-hastet matdiire (av-^ at-)
To announce, uontiaie {kv-, it-).
To me^, coavfoire (Ten-, vent-).
(563.) Examples and Rides,
(a) When we contemplate the\(^Xi\km coelum contemplft-
firmament, toe wonder at\ mur, Dei magoltudinem
the greatness of God. I admirftmnr.
(a) Ride of Syntax, — Quum, when used simply to express
the time (especially with the primary tenses), is followed
by the indicative.
Caesar, quum Pompeium vi-
cisset, in A^am tr&jdcit.
(6) Casar, when he had con-
quered ( = having con-
quered) Pompey, crossed
over into Asia.
(ft) Rule of Syntax. — Qnnm tentporal is followed by the
imperfect or pluperfect subjonctive, if the events de-
scribed depend on each other, and especially when the
aorist perfect is used in the principal sentence.
[In the above example, the verb tr aj e ci t, of the principal sentence,
if in the aorist perfect In all snch cases, t^ sabordinate sentence with
qnnm can be rendered by the English participle, as in the example
above, and in the two following.]
The prator, having come
(=when he had come)
into theforum^ percfived.
The commander, having got
sight of the enemy, or-
dered.
(e) Since these things are so.
Since they cannot defend
them^selves.
Although the soldiers were
retarded by rains, yet they
overcame aU (obstacles).
Praetor, quum in ffirum vS*
nisset, ftnimadvertit(p6rf.).
Impdrfttor, quum hostSs con-
spexissit, jussit.
QusB quum it& sint.
Quum sft defenddre nOn
possint.
Milites, qujim imbilbus tar-
d&rentur, t&men omnift
siiper&v@runt*
(c) Rule of Syntax. — Q u u m causal (signifying since, or
although) IS always followed by the subjunctive.
Digitized by
Google
aUUM WITH SUBJUNCTIVE. 219
(664.) Translate into English.
1. daum temporal, wit^ sabjimctiYe (563, b).
Caesar, quum id nuntintum esset, m&tQravit &b urbe
prdficisci. — Quum legio dScimH constitisset, omn^s host^s
&d eum Idcum contenderuut. — Quum Iggatus ad oppidum ac-
cessisset, puSri milliSresqu^ pacem &b Rdm&nis p3tiv3runt.
— Quum Caesar &d oppidum accessisset, oppidam p&cem
&b eo pdtierunt. — Quum imper&tor signum d 6 d i s s e t, miHtes
In hostes impStmn f gc^runt. — Caesar, quum Gallos vicisset,
in Italiam contendit (per/,), — Quum l3g&ti CaesarSm in Itiuerd
conyenissent, eos suum adventum expectare jussit.
2. duum causal (since, or aUhough), with gabjaiictive (563, c).
MiHtes, quum frigdr^ 3t imbribus tardHrentur, t&men
contanenti labors (55, a) omnia sup^raverunt. — Cic^o jurd
patdr p&triae dictus est, quum urb^m ab intdritu servasset.*
— ^i£dui, quum s3 suftque ab Helvdtiis def endure non pos-
sint, legates &d Caes&rem mittunt, rdgatum (379) auxilium.—
Quum omnes hdmines mortales sint, dtiam tu mdriSrls.
(565.) Translate into Latin.
1. da am temporal, with sabjoxictive (563, h).
The ambassadors having asked (= when the amhasBodoTB had
asked) peace of Caesar, he ordered them to await his coming.—
Caesar having ordered them (= when Ccesar had ordered them)
to await his coming, (they) obeyed. — The lieutenant, when thai
was (=had been) announced, returned to the citadel. — The
fifth legion having halted, the enemy made an attack upon
them. — The praetor, having come into the forum, saw the cap-
tives. — ^The boy, having approached the wood, heard a Yoice.
3. da am causal, with subjoxictive (563, c).
Since these things are so, let us believe (528, &, 1). — Nations,
whev^ they cannot defend themselves, ask assistance. — The
scout, though he was delayed by the cold, came to the camp.-—
Since Caesar took- away (6r!pSre) liberty from the ^duans,
they rightly feared.
* * Contracted from ■ err avisset
Digitized by
Google
«!20
&ELATIVB 8ENTBNCE8.
LESSON XCUL
Use of the Subjunctive in Relative Sentences.
(566.) The relative pronoun often takes the place of a con-
junction in introducing a sentence, and is therefore followed by
the subjunctive. The following examples illustrate some of
these uses.
(a) Yoa err because you thinks
(b) They semt men to Mek for
peace =
(c) I am not such a man at to be
delighted witli
Yoa err who think.
They sent men who should seek for
peace.
1 am not ^ who eon be delighted
wittk vices.
EXEECIBE
(567.) Vocabulary.
A herald, a prockdmer, praco, (pr»-
cdn) !s (333).
A Nervian, Nerviili, !.
It pleased, pUiooIt (with dot.).
At length, ddmnm.
Affectum, affectio, (tidn) Ti (333, B.).
To huH, ndcSre (with dot.).
To be present, SdessS (ad+^sse).
To bear, ferrt {irreg.).
Fortunate, IbrtaaitdBi ft, ttm.
A youth, ftddleiooM, (oent) is ^
and f., 25, a).
Innocence, itmttcMitia, s^
FUfor» iddneik, ft, vm (wUh dot.).
(568.) Examples and Rule.
(a) Hannibal did wrong in
wintering (= tecause he
wintered) at Capua.
M&15 fecit Hannibal, qui Ca-
pU8B hiem&vSrit {^^wko
wintered at Capua).
Here qui introduces the ground or cause of the judgment liiat Hanni-
bal erred.
{b) They send ambassadors
to say {=who may say).
They sent ambassadors to
say {^who might say).
Here qui (=St ii) introduces 9l purpose.
LSg&tos mittunt, qui die ant.
L6gS,tos mls6runt, qui died-
rent.
(c) You are_ not the man to
be ignorant.
He ordered aU (those) who
could bear arms to be
present.
Non Is ^s, qui nesci&s
(=you are not he who can
be ignorant).
Onmds (eos understood) qui
arm& ferre possent, ftdessd
jussit.
Digitized by
Google
KELATIVE 8SNTENCXS. 2^1
Ib Ihese extuBpleg, qui introdooes a nearer deflmtum of the demoa-
•tratiTe, which ia expreised or implied.
(d) Rule of Syntax, — The subjunctive is used in a relative
sentence to express a ground^ a purpose., or to give a
nearer definition of a demonstrative expressed or implied.
Rem. 1. Talis, tarn, tantns, ita, &c., maybe these demonstra*
tives, as well as is, e§, id.
2. The relative to express a purpose is very common, especially in
Caesar, and shoqld be dioroughly studied and practised.
(569.) Translate into English,
[Remember the mle for the Succession of Tenses (551, 8}.]
(a) dni, ground, cause, or reason.
Enrfts qui censeas Deum esse injustum. — Fortun&ttts
fuit Alexander, qui virtu tis suae H5merum prseconeip (225, a)
inv3n3rit. — O fortunate &ddlescens, qui tuae virtutis Hd-
m3rum praeconem i n v e n S r Is. — Nervii inctlsaverunt r^Hquds
Belgas qui s3 p5puld Rom&no (54) dSdi dissent.
(b) dvLi, purpose.
Eripiunt dJiis (153, a) qu5d &lus (54) largiantiin —
Legates &d Romanes misdrunt, qui p^t^rent psU;em. — Caesar
dqultatum praemittit, qui*vldeant qu&s In partes hostes ItSr
f&ciant (534, d), — Imp^rator misit exploratores, qui cognos-
cSrent qualis esset (534, d) nature mentis. — Caesar copifis
suas in proximum collem subduxit, gquitatumque, qui s u s -
tlneret hostium imp^tum, misit. — Ariovistus onmes copias,
quae nostros perterrerSnt, et munitidne (153, a) pr6-
hib@rent, misit. — Piacuit CaesUri tit ad Ariovistum Idgatos
mittSret (548, a), — ^Piacuit Caesari ut ad Ariovistum legates
mittSret, qui abed postularent, tit afiquem Idcum coUd-
quio (54) dlc^ret (548, a). — ^Tiim d3mum Ariovistus partem
Buarum copiarum quae castra oppugnarent misit.
{c) dui, defining a demonstrative {express or implied).
Impdrator omnes cives qui arma ferrd possent adesse
jussit. — ^Legatus p5poscit (411, a) ob^des, arma, servos, qui ad
Helvetios perfugissent. — Milites ea quae imp6rarentur
* Eqnitatam [cavalry) being anonnof mnltitade, the relative qai
MAjf be in the ploraL
T 2
Digitized by
Google
222 RELATIVE SENTENCES.
BboDter f dceront. — Ndn talis siim qui te fall am. — ^Innft-
centia est affectio tftlis &iilmi, qus ndceat ndmiiu (54).
(570.) Translate into Latin.
(a) Caesar did badly in-crossing (who crossed, perf. subj.) the
fthine. — They err who think that the soul is not immortal. —
The father censured his son for setting-out* (= who had set out,
plup. subj.) from the city.
(b) Caesar sends forward scouts, to choose (= who may choose)
a place fit for the camp. — Caesar sent ambassadors to Ariovistus
to demand (=^who should demand), — ^The general brings back
his forces to the hill, and sends forward the cavafay to sustain
(= who may sustain) the attack.
* Profidsoor.
Digitized by
Google
Digitized by
Google
224 ORATIO OBLiaUA.
(574.) Exampks and Rules.
Ariovistus dixit, 8 6 ^duis
bellamndnill&turum
esse.
(a) Ride of Syntax. — In principel sentences in oratio
obli qua, tlie accuscUive with the infinitive is used.
Rem. When they exproH a command or vitk, the sabj. is xued.
(b) Ariovistus said that he Arioyistus dixit, s6 iSduis
bellum non esse illft-
t u r u m, «{ stlpendium qudt-
cmnis pend^rent.
(a) Ariovistus said tJ^at he
vxndd not wage war upon
the ^duan$.
wovld not wage war upon
the ^duans, if they paid
the tribute yearly.
(h) In subordinate sentences in oratio obliqua, 1die sub-
junctive is always used (e. g.j p e n d e r e n t).
(e) The lieutenant denied
(hat he had crossed the
Bhine.
He denies (hat he can give.
Leg&tus, n^g&vit seRhenum
transisse.*
N6gats6 poss6 d&re.
(575.) Translate into English.
Caesar dixit sd, postquam hostds ffisi essent, castra
muniturura ess6.r— D6 d6dni& li^ione Caesar ndn d&blt&bat.
— Caesar dixit, sd dd ddclm& Idgione n6n dtiblt&re. —
Cesar dixit, sd cum sdl& d^clmft legione esse iturum.f
— Caesar dixit se cum sola dMm& Idgione, d6 qu& non dtibi-
t&ret, essd iturum. — Impdr&tor dixit, maximas n&tione«
pulsas s,iip6rfttasque esse. — HelvStiis (54) perf&cil6 drat
totiiis Galliae impdrio (ahl.) pdtiri. — Dumndrix ostendit, Hel»
vdtiis perf&cile esse, quum virtutd (55, a) omnibus
(dat,) praest&rent, tdtiiis Galfiae impSrio pdtiri. — Dumndrix
ipse Castled (54) regnum concUiatQrus drat. — Dumndrix con-
firmat se Casticd regnum conclliaturum esse. — ^Hel-
vdtiis est in &nlmd iter pdr provinciam f ^dre ; ftliud iter
h&bent nullum. — Sibi essdinftnimd (573, BP*),dicunt Hel-
vdtii, lE^nd ulld m&leficio iter pdr prdvinciam f&cdre, prop-
tdre& qudd ftliiid iter h&beant nullum. — Impdrator non
pdtest iter Helvdtus (54) pdr provinciam d&re. — Impdr&tor
* Put infin. of tranurS. ^ f Fat isfin. tilth, to go.
Digitized by
Google
ORATIO OBLiaUA. 225
ndgat 8 6, mord St exempld pdpiili Kom&ni, posse Iter Hel-
▼dtiis p6r prdyinciam d&re.
(576.) Translate into Latin.
Caesar said that he, after Pom^ey was conquered, would
cross-over into Asia. — Caesar had full confidence in
{=:did not douht concerning) Ibe fourth le^^n. — Caesar said
that he would attack the toton with the fourth legion
alone, in which he had full confidence, — Cicero said that the
greatest cities had been attacked. — The lieutenant
affirms that he will lead the army across the
Rhine, if the enemy attempt to hinder (them) (prohlbSre). —
The HeATetiamfULj that they intend (573,17) to seek
peace of Casatp
Digitized by
Google
§ 18.
IMPERSONAL VERBS. (XCV.— XCVI.)
LESSON XCV.
Impersonak. — PudeU PigeU TcedeU 4^.
(577.) Impersonal verbs are those which have no subject,
and take the pronoun it before them in English; t, g., plui t,
it rains*
(578.) (a) Some impersonals are never used in the personal
form; e»g.%pig<&U it grieves, &c.; (b) others are simply the third
person of personal verbs : e. g.<, pl&cdt, it pleases (pULced, I
please), (c) Again, the third person singular of many intraa-
sitive verbs is used impersonally in the passive: curritiir,
they run (it b run); I am envied, invidetur mihl; nun-
cifttiim est, itwastcld.
(579.) (a) The following impersonals (which e^qiress certain
feelings) take tiie axicusadve of the person and genitive of the
cause of the feeling.
FIgfit, plgutt^ U grieves,
Pildfit, pilduH ^itzham^
i oneu ashamed,
Poonltfit, poonltult, itrqxiUs,
TsBdfit, pertesum est, it wearies, ditgutts,
MliSrSt, onepities,
Yowr folly grieves me, I M€ plgdt Btaltftise tun (=t^
I grieves me of your folly),
(5) Sometimes the cause or object of the feeling is expressed
by the infinitwe, or a sentence with q u 5 d.
I am not ashamed of having done
this.
I rtjpeni of qffending you.
Ndnpiid€txneh6c fdcisse {=zit
does not shame me to have done
this),
Poenitet md qudd td offendl
(=zit repents me that I have of-
fended you).
Digitized
by Google
IMPERSONAL VERBS. 227
EXERCISE.
(580.) Vocabulary*
Indolent, ign&v-iia, S, dm.
Folly, ineptise, arum (57, B.).
To sin, pecc&r3 (ftv-, at-).
Business, udgotiiim, i.
Undertaken, suaceptfis, fi, fim (part,
of sascipgre).
To confess, f Steri (fasi-), dep.
Because, since, qaSniim (cof^*.).
Almost, pspnS {cuh,).
Some day, Sliqnandd (o^^.).
Innocent, inndcens, (iundC^nt) u
Lot, sors, (sort) Is (293). [(107).
(581.) Translate into English.
{a) Ignavum poenitebit ftHqaando igD&yiaB. — Ndn poBi^-
tet m© Eujus consilii. — Tui* m6 misfiret. — Eos inep-
tiarum poenitebat. — Poenitebat m© pecc&ti. — ^Misdret tfi
ftliorum, tui* n6c miseret, n6c pudet. — Nos misSret cft-
l&mltatis tuae. — Nunquam Caes&rem suscepti negotii
pertaesum est. — Me civitatis mo rum piget, tsedetque.
(h) Ilium poenltet quod m6 offend6rit. — Socrfttem
Ddn puduit fftteri se multas res nescire. — ^Tdldpiiduit
f&c6re. — Non poenitet m© vixisse, quoniam ndn frustrft
vixi. — Q u 6 m pcenitet peccasse, paene est iDndcens.
(582.) Translate into Latin.
(a) Thou wilt repent of thy foDy. — He will be ashamed of
his indolence. — We shpJl be ashamed of thee. — We pitied
them. — He was ashamed of us. — We shall never repent of our
industry. — The boy will some-day be ashamed of his indolence.
— Thou wilt some-day repent of thy foDy. — ^We are weary of
life. — He was ashanaed of the citizens. — I am ashamed of you
and your ignorance. — Many are grieved (at) their lot (gen.)
(= It grieves many of their lot).— ^I am not only grieved at, but
also (sed etiam) ashamed of, my folly (=It not only grieves,
but also shames me of my folly).
(li) I repebt of having-sinned. — I am ashamed of doing this.
— ^A wise man is not ashamed to confess that he is ignorant-of
many things. — I am weary of living (vivere). — I repent of hav-
ing lived in-vain. — The boy repents of having offended (quod,
with ferf. subj.) the master. — The young man is ashamed of
having lived in-vain. — The general repented of having moved
(inf.) the camp. — ^The Helvetians repented of having crossed
(inf.) the river. — ^The barbailans repented of having approached
(inf.) the rampart (use ad before the accusative).
* (?en. oft*. ,
Digitized by
Google
228
IMFKReONAL VKRBS
LESSON XCVL
Imperional Verbs, contmued.
(583.) Vocabulary.
Ought, U behooves, dportet, Hbt,
nit, kc. (with ace. and inf.).
It it becoming, ddc^t (with ace. and
inf.).
It pleases, pUcSt, placalt, &o. (with
It is of importance, it interests, in-
terest (with gen.).
It concerns, it matters, rtfert (with
gen.).
It is agreeable, Ubet» or liibet (witli
dot.).
It is allowed, lawful {one mtut), li-
cet (Ucoit and licitimi est), dot.
It happens, eontingit {dot.). AccidTt
(med rather of evil accidents).
It is expedient, exp^dit [dot.).
With mp permission, me& vdluntite
{abl, 55, a).
(584.) Examples and Rules,
(a) Boys ought to he dili-
gent.
It becomes a young man to
be m^odest.
Pudros dportet diligeotes
esse {=it behooves boys tg
be diligent).
Ddcet v^reeundum essd
&d51e8centem.
(a) Oportet and ddcet are followed by the accusative
and infinitive.
[0^* Oportet is also followed by the subjunctive.]
Majori parti plftcuit castrii
defend^re.
Pl&cuit Cass&ri tX U Ario-
vistum Idg&toa mitteret.
(6) (1) It pleased the mct^or-
ity to defend the camp.
(2) Cdesar determined
{=it pleased Casar) to
send ambassadors to
Ariovistm.
t> (5) P 1& c d t (expressing a, purpose) may be followed by tlui
dative, with (1) the infinitive^ or (2) the sijd>juiictive mAi t^
(c) I may go (= it is allowed
to me to go).
You may go.
J might have gone (^s it was
allowed to me to go).
I may he idle.
I do not choose (smU is not
agreeable to me).
Mlhiire licet.
Tibilre licet.
M&i Ire Iteuit.
Mlhi 6tia96 esse fleet.
Ndn Hbet mfiii.
Digitized by
Google
IMPERSONAL VERBS. 229
Digitized by
Google
§ 19.
IRREGULAR VERBS. (XCVIL— CII.)
LESSON XCVIL
PoS'SHm^ PoS'Si^ Pdt'Uif to be able^ (can).
(587.) Po8-siim is compounded of p 6 1 - i s, able, and the
▼erb 8 Am. The t before 8 18 changed to s; e. g., pdt-siim,
po8-8Jim ; pdt-8nnt, po8-8mit.
INDICATHTK.
Pres. Ipos-sftiiL | p6t-^i. Ipdt-est. Ipoi-giimttg. Ipdt-estis. Ipos-sunt.
Imp^ p6t-6rftm; Perf., p6t-al; Plup., p6t-adr&m; FtU., p6t-£rd; Fut.
Perf., pdt-qftro; all regular.
8UBJUNCTITS.
Pre*, pos-sim. po«-iif . poa-sit Ipoi-simAs. poi-sitits. pos-sint.
Imperf.\g<M-^6m. |po»g6a. pofl-a6t |poa-g6miis. jpoa-setig. |pog-Bent.
Perf., pdt-tt6rim ; Plup., p6t-m8»gm : regular.
1^/in.Pres., poa-sd; Per/., pdt-aiasd; Part., pdt-exui (used only~i
acyective).
EXERCISE.
(588.) Vocabulary.
Laughter, nsiii, xu, m.
To MOW, 8dl«I« (86y-, sftt-).
Good deed, act of kindneis, btefifl-
citim,i
Beap, meters (messii-, meu-).
To do good to, to ben^, prftdessd
(prOf d-, prO+sdm) ; goyemi dot.
Hang over, impend^rS.
(589.) Examples,
(a) To he very powerful.
(6) CfihewhoU of Gaul, the
Helvetians are the most
powerful.
To render, redd&re (reddfd-, red-
dlt).
If^fiuence, gratia, m.
Fraud, (nxiM, (fraad) Is (293).
Restrain, rStinere (rdtwa-, r6tent-,
rft+tfinere).
With equanimity, aeqaO anlmd {obL,
= with equable mind).
PlQiimupi posse (= to be very
much able).
Totius Crallia plaiimum Hel-
Tdtu possunt.
Digitized by
Google
(c) A very few can keep
off (many).
(d) In the rest of Gaul.
POSSE, TO BE ABLE. 231
Perpauci pr6hlbere poBsunt*
In r«Iiqii& Gallia.
[What is the rale for the Soccearion of Tensei 7 551, 3.]
[What case do the oompoondbi of sxun (prosiun, destun, &e.) gorem f
S67, b.]
Digitized by
Google
232
VBLLBt nOVLMf MALLE.
LESSON xcvni.
FeZfe, to be willing. — NollSt to be unwilling. — MoMf
to be more wiUing^ to prefer.
(592.) Nolo = non volo ; malo = magis volo.
Pret.
W
nAld.
mftld.
DOQVig.
mavis.
(a) IWDICATIVK.
vult
DonTaU.
mivult
v6lamdi.
DAldmiis.
mftlumtis.
Tultifs.
Donvultlt.
mftvuUls.
Ydloiit.
m&limt.
Bern, The ibUowing tenses are regular: Imperf., T61dbizn, ndlft-
bftm, mal6b&m{ Perf^ vdlui, n6lai, m&lai; Fvi^ VQlim,
n6Um» m&lftm; Put. Perf.,Y bluer 6, nOlaSrfl, malndrd.
i| (6) suB/UNcnvx. |{
C
Pret. ^
v6l.
n6l-
mfil.
1-
is.
ft.
mils.
itib.
int
Impeff.^
reU-
noU-
mall.
1-
es.
6t
dmos.
«ti(s.
ent
Mem. 1. Begalar are, Pei/, voluSrlm, n6ladiim, mtlnerim ; Pluperf.,
v5hiissSmi ndlnissdm, mftlnissj&m.
S. Imperative^ n6li, n6lItA ; ndlite, nOUtdtS, ntinntd. (Imperative of
▼616 and maid wai^inf .)
3. Participles, vdl-ensi ndl-ena.
4. Infimtives : Pret., vellfi, n^S, mall9 ; Pdsl^ yi^lnlsid, n^faiiaaS, ,
mftloissd.
EXERCI8B.
(598.) Vocabulary.
To be mnphf, unecetipied, vikAie
(&y-, at-), tn<m«u.
Ndghbour, fioltlmils, 8f flm (with
dot.).
Attentive, attentOs, X, tUn.
Attentively, attenW (a<io.).
Grant, eemeettien, onoeistts, tla.
Content, oontontH «, Qm (with
(594.) Exampks.
(a) If Aeyyjitk anything.
(a) .The verbs velle, noil
goveni the accusative.
To teewh ilOBd {paea. of vidMI).
To retwm, to oome ^aek, rivei^
(revers-), dep.
Old man, s&iez, (sen) Ts (108, 13L 1).
On (he Idas of April, «d Xdis Apil-
Ifii (die ISA of April).
i^M4Apiak,lB,m.(S5,«>.
/>actA^dO(!XlKft(m).
I 81 quid v^liat.
e, malle, as transitive yeriw,
Digitized by
Google
Non vult Caesar etim Idcum
vftc&rd.
VELLBy NOLLE, MALLB. 283
(6) He is mUing to hear. |Vultaudire.
(b) The verbs vell^, nolld, mall^, take the mfinitiTe
after them, as the complementary object (210).
(c) Caesar is not willmg that
that country should remain
unoccupied,
(c) The verbs T e 1 1 ^, nollS, malld, admit the accusative
with the infinitive after them.
[What is the rale for principal trentenoes in orttio obliqaat (574, a)
For tubordinate sentences 7 (574, £).]
(595.) Translate into English.
£go n5n e&dem vdlo, sdnex (225, a) quae v5lui ftddlescens.
— Si vis ftmari, ftma (imperative). — Nan vult Caesar earn
15cum v&c&re. — Noluit Caesar eum *15cum, undo Helvdtu
disceflsdrant, v&care ; n6 Germani finitimi Galliae (54) essent
(548, b). — Bdni hdmlnes, mls^ri quam impr5bi esse, mftlnnt.
-r-Fdre fihenter hdmines id qu5d vdlunt, credunt. — fdem
veil 6 dtid^m nolle, e&* firmft ftmicltift est. — Ddcllis est qui
attente vult audire. — QuSm docilem v61is f&c6re, s!miil
attentum f &ci&s oportet (584, a, |^^). — NM Caesar Kom^nis
(147) solus imp^r&re v51uiss6t (542, b), & Bruto et Cassio non
interfectus esset. — ^Ariovistus dixit se regnum m a 1 1 e (574, a)
Caesaris coneessa (55, a) qakm ^duorum b6n6ftcio habere.—
Malum us, ctim virtute, paucis (55, a) content! essd, qu&m
sine virtute muhH h&bere. — Aristid3s bdniis esse m S, 1 e b a t
quam vid^. — H^bet iracundi& hoc mali (186, a, R.) ; non vult
rfigi. — Caesar legatis respondet (574, a) di6m s© fid deliberan-
dum (489) sumpturum (esse); si quid v61int (542, i, 2) fid
Idus Aprilis revertantur (574, b). — T&mSn Caesar, iit spfitium
interced^rd posset (548, a) dum miKt^s convSnirent, l@gatis
respondit, di^m s3 ad d^Kberandum sumpturum ; s! quid v e 1 -
lent, fid Idus Aprilis r6vert6rentur. — Caesar fib HelvStiis dis-
ceddre nolebat* — Omnift Snmt f ficllifi si v 5 1 6 s (542, b) * —
Ariovistus respondet ; si quid Caesar a se v d 1 i t, ilium ad se
▼Snire 5port6re. — ^Ariovistus respondit, si qidd Caesar a s6 v el-
let, ilium fid 8^ vdnire 5port@re.
• Bi is in appowtion with lihe clause idem velle et idem nolle.
U2
Digitized by
Google
234
FBREBy TO BEAR, BRINO.
LESSON XCIX.
Fero, Ferre, Tuli, Latum, to bear^ bring.
(596.) (a) PARADIGM OF IRREGULAR FORKS.
ZNDICATIVB.
Pres. Act.
Pres. Pass.
{6t6.
fdrdr.
fen. fert.
feriTs. fertiir.
fSrimfts.
ffirimdr.
fertts.
fdrimlnL
f 6 runt,
fdruntdr.
XNTINITIVS.
Act.
Pass.
Pres.t ferrH, to bear,
Pres., ferri, to be borne.
P€ff.,tMMB6,to have
borne.
Perf., latiis essd, to
have been borne.
Fut., iStoros esBd.
Fut., f Srendum essS.
SUBJUNCTIVE.
Imperf. Act.
Imperf. Pass.
ferr-
ferr-
6m.
dr.
es..
eria (g).
et&r.
emor. I dmlni. entdr.
lAIFERATIVB.
Singular.
Active.
Passive.
2. f 6r, ferto.
2. ferre, fertdr.
3. ferto.
3. fertdr.
2. ferte, fertdte.
2. f erimlni.
3. f 6nmtd.
3. f enmtor.
(h) The remaining tenses are formed regularly from f d r «,
the present stem; tul-, the perfect stem; and l&t-, the supine
atem.
1. From f6r-,
Imperfect active and passive, f drebam, f drebftr.
Future active and passive, f dram, es ; f dr&r, ens.
Participle active and passive, fdrens, f drendiis. Oerund,
f drendi, &;c.
2. From tul-,
Indicative perfect, tiili ; pluperfect, tiildr&m ; future per^
feet, tiildr5.
Subjunctive perfect, tiilMm ; pluperfect, t^ssSm.
3. From l&t-,
Participle passive, Ifttiis : hence all the passive forms, l&ttls
sum, dr&m, dro, sim, essem, &c. ; l&turtis sum, sim, &c.
(c) The compounds are inflected in the same way ; e. g.,
inferre, to bring against ; intuH, illatum ;* inf 6ro, infers, in-
fert, &;c.
(d) Tollo, tolldrd, to raise, to take away, forms its perfect
and supine from tuli, latum, viz., sustuli, subl&tum.
* ia+lttumsillfttiizii, n being changed into 1 before I
Digitized by
Google
Digitized by
Google
296 riMMif VDUtE*
est — PdcQniam prseferre ftmicltiaB sonfidom est — ^Amiciti*
ampreferre p^cQmaB hdnestnm est — Ariovistus pdpAlo R5-
mftnd beSum Id till it — Css&ri DuncUUmn est (578, c) Ariovk-
turn p6piik> Rom&no beUum intulisse. — iEquo ftoiind f dra-
in us quicquid ndbis accidat. — Fdrenda est fortunft, pr^o-
sertiin qas &best & eulp&.*-Iinproln &d rdlupt&tem fdruntur.
— Poeta fdrunt (598, h), gigaotds beHom diis (62, R. 3) in-
t ii 1 i s s e. — Demetrius, qunm patrift pulsus esset (563, h) &d
Ptdlgmaeum rfigem sd c o n t d 1 i t. — CatUinae sdcii arm& contra
p&triam fdrdbant — Ddmos sufts Helvdtii reliqudrunt, ut
tdti (194, K. 1) Gallin beUum inf errent (548, a).
LESSON C.
Fieri, to beconut to b$ done^ to happen. — Eder e, or
E s s e, ^0 eat.
1. Fieri.
(600.) Fieri forms the passiye of f & c 6 r 6, to majc^^ to do.
The tenses are formed regularly with the endings of the 4th
conjugation, except the infinitiye and the imperfect subjunctire.
INDICATIVE.
Pre:t fi-o, fl-s, fl-t, &c Imperf.f i\h\4m, bas, &c
Fvt^ flim, fids, &c. Pwf., factiis sam* €', est, ^
Pluperf., factfts grfaa> Crito, Ac Put, Perf., factfis 6ro> gris, &c.
SUBJUNCrXTB.
Pre*., fiim, f i&a, &c. Impevf., fI6r6ni, fier^s, Ac
INFINITITS.
Pres., fieri ; Peff,, factua, &, um, esae ; Put., factum in, or futuriim
esse, or forS.
FABTICIPLES.
P,re*. wantang ; Perf., factta ; Put,, f ficienddt.
Rem, Observe that in all the fonns of this verb except fieri and
fler^m, r6s, &c., &e i is long, contraiy to the g^eneral role tliat a
vowel be£cire another is short.
2. Ed6re (ess6).
(601.) £ d 6 r 6 (or e s s d), to eat-, forms all the tenses regu-
larly Mrith the endings of the third conjugation ; but it hA9. ia
Digitized
by Google
FIERI, EDERE. > 287
addition, a few forms similar to thosii of essd, to he^ which
Digitized by
Google
288
IRE, auutE, NsauutE*
■ar, litteris (55, a) Labidni certior fid bat, omnes Belgas con
tr& pdpiihim Rdm&nam conjur&rd, obeidesque inter se d&re.—
Impdrfttor dixit, id fidri posse. — Nostrorum propter paucity
tem nihil fi6 ri pdtftrat. — Labidnos preelium commisit, ut un-
dlque und tempdrft (118, XL, c) in hostes impdt^ fidrdt.-^
Ndmo fi t c&sa (55, a) bdnfis. — Po6t& nascltur, non f i t. — Si
fatd (55, a) omni& f i u n t (542, 6, 1), nihil nos admdnSre pdtest
at cautiores f i & m n s. — Contr& vim sine vi nihil f i e r i pdtest.
— Dffigentift (55, a) omni& f i un t fftdli& (603, c).~Apud v6t6-
rds Rom&nos, ex ftgricdlis interdum fi3bant consules ; ita
Cincinn&tos consul (603, c) f actus est. — Omni& quae se*
cundCim n&tur&m fiunt, h&bend& sunt (502) in bdms.* —
Sepe qui ex paupdribus divites fiunt, divitus (a&Z., 316, h)
fill nesciunt. — V ivimus ut d d & m u s ; ndn ^ d i m u s ut vi-
v&miis. — £ddre dport^t ut vivamus, non vivSre tit fid&mus.
— ^E 8 s d (601) dportet ut vivas, non viv6re ut 6das. — PerpStu&
cur& &nimum &v&ri exest. — ^Bibd, 6s. — ^Bibite, estd.— *
iBgritado ftnimum exest.
LESSON CI.
Ire, togo. — Quire, tobeabk{can). — ^Nequire, to
be unable {cannot),
(605.) Eft, irS, ivl, ittlm, to gOy mostly follows the 4th conju*
gation ; but is irregvdar in the present tense, gerund, and su*
pine, as appears by the follovnng
PARADIGM.
TXNSC8.
SUBJUNCTIVE.
Imperf.
Fut.
Perf.
Plupt^.
FiU. Perf.
e^ is, it, imtis, itis, eont
ib&m, ibfts, ibat, kc.
ibd, ibis. &c ibunt.
ivi £>r ii, ivistt, ivXt or iit, &c.
ivgrftm, ivfirfts, &c.
iv6rd, ivgris, &c.
eftm, eas, eat, fiamSs, 6«Hs, 6ant.
irSm, ires, irSt, &c.
itords, sim, sis, stt, &c
iv6iim, iv6ris, ivfirit, &c.
iviss6m, ivissSs, ivissot, Amx.
lUPEIl.
INFINiriVK.
SUPINE.
PABTICIPI.B:.
OERUND.
i, ltd, ltd.
It^ itdte.
eontd.
Prts., ire.
Perf., ivisse or
issS.
Fut.t ituriim
essS.
itiim.
ita.
Prea., lens (eantls).
Fut., itnrfis, 5, urn.
Verbal, exmdfis, 5, um.
eundi.
eundd. Sec
* H«b«ndS sant in b$nis = should be reckoned among bteMsing^
Digitized by
Google
IRE, aUISE, NEaUIRE. 239
Jbent, 1. In tiie same maimer the oompoondi are fijnned ; i. g^ exirS,
abirS, &c. ; bat they generally drop the v in the perfect-stem; thus,
&b-ii, ab-isti, ab-iit, abissd, abissdm, &a
% Some of the compoonds obtain a tranntive force, and then take a
passive form like other transitive verbs ; e. g., prsBterird, to pa$s
by ; pnet^redr, / am passed by, &c.
(606.) Queo, / can^ I am able ; ndqueo, / cannot, I am UU'
ahle^ are conjugated like eo, I go ; but they rarely occur except
in the present tense.
EXEBOISE.
(607.) Vocabulary.
By what route? qnd Itiberd (ail,
$5, a).
To perish, pdiird (p6r+ir6).
ManfuUy, vMliter (215, 3).
2W2 me, die {imperat. ^dicSr«).
Whether-^or, ntrom— fin.
Taken away, snblitQs, i, Am {part,
pass. ofnuSerre (sab+ferre)).
Ctf Zurich, Tigurinfis, «, Urn.
To suffer, allow, pit! (pass-), d^
To fight, dgcertare (ftv-, at-).
To be sick, sgrotire (ftv-, «t-).
Light, lax, (iQc) Is (293).
To go out, exirS (ex+ir6). Takes
abL, wiih or withovi prep, dd.
To return, r6dlr6 (re+ir« j d insert-
ed for euphony).
To undergo, sabirC (sab+Ir6) ; gov-
erns aecus*
A return, returning, rSdItio, (rddl-
ti6n) is (333, IL).
Ready, prepared, pftrfttiis, i, iim
(part, of pir&rS).
To pass over, transird (trans+urS)*
Before, pne, txdv. (or prep, with abl.).
Of Canna, Cannensis, d (104).
Whither, qao, adv.
1^* Beoollect, ^Aey tP6n^ = Iv6rant or idrant.
he departed ^}Lh lit, rather tiian ftblrlt; and lo of
other compounds.
[GKve the Bale for ft t (purpose), 548, a).
(608.) Translate into English.
Helvdtii dd finlbus suis exeunt. — Orgdtorix Hebdtiis (dai.)
persuftdet, ut dd finlbus suis exeant. — Orgdtorix Helvdtiis
persuAsit, ut dd finibus suis cum omnibus copiis (property)
e X i r e n t. — Ddmum (113, III., R.) r d d e u n t. — Omni& pdri-
ctlUi siibeunt. — Helvdtii, ddmiim recKtidnis spd sublAtft
(456), pftr&tidres ad omni& pdricul& subeundft (496) drant.
— Caesar in Xsiam transiit. — Pompeius in Asiam trans-
idrat. — Ddmd (aW.) exird possunt. — -Erant omnind itandra
dud, quibus ItSndrlbus ddmd e x i r e possent. — ^dui per fines
suds Helvdtids ird piitiuntur.— Pftgils Tigurinus ddmd exi-
Digitized by
Google
240 utE, auuis, ifsauiKB.
Arat. — Hic pifos Q11118, qiram d6iiid exisiet, L. Cmsumn,
consttlem, interfecdrat, Ht Hjus exercYtam s&b jtignm misdrat.
— Helv^tii in e&m partem ibunt, tibi Csesar consHtu^rit.—
Quo Itin^re (55, a) hostSs i 6 r n n t ? — ^£5ddm Mn^re, quo hos-
tea id rant, Caesar ad eos contendit, dqult&tumque omnem
ante sd mitdt. — I bam fortd Vi& Sacrft (55, a) sicut meus est
mds. — I prse, dgO sdquar. — ^Ex pugn& CaimeDSi admddum pauci
Rdm&Dt d6mum rddifirunt. — I, qud t6fbrtan& y6d6t (534, dl).
— Quicquid trausilt tempdris (186, a, Rule) pdrilt. — Quidam
ferro (55, a) d^ert&re ficerrimd possunt, segrdtard vliifitdr non
queunt. — Sind iQcd cdlords esse ndqueunt. — Pompeius
pdriit. — Die utrum que&s &n ndque&s mScum Ir6. —
Risiis interdtira Ita rfipentd erum^dt, ut e&m ctipientds (442, e)
Idndrd ndqueftmus (553, 6, R.).
Digitized by
Google
§ 20.
DEFECTIVE VERBS.
LESSON CIL
Aioj Inquam, Novi, Memini, Caspif Odi.
(609.) A i 6, Isay, say yes, affirm^ is used in veiy few tenses.
Ind. Pres.
aio.
ids.
m. 1
aiunt 11
Ind. Imperf.
Stdj. Prei.
aiebtoL
-has.
-bat.
-bamds.
batis.
bant
fii&s.
aiat.
aiant.
Part. Pres.
aiens (aientis) used acAy as ac^ec.
(610.) Inqu&m, Isay, is used between the words of a quo-
tation.
Ind. Pres.
Ind. Imperf.
Ind. FiU.
Ind. Perf.
Subj. Pres.
inquam.
inqaiam.
inqois.
inqoies.
inqaisti.
as.
inquit.
inqniibftt
or
inqolbat.
inquiet.
inquit.
at.
inquxmus.
atib.
inquiunt 1
inquiebant.
ant.
(611.) NSvi, I know; mdmlni, I remember; coepi, I
have begun, I began ; 5 d i, J hate, are perfect forms with
present meanings. AU the tenses made on the perfect stem
exist, regularly formed.
ndvissS,
to know.
mSmlnissS,
to remember.
ccapissS, odissS,
to have begun, to hate.
INDICATIVE AND 8UBJUNCTITS.
ndv-
xnemin-
caep-
6d-
""I, isti, Xt, &c.
Srftm, 6ras, Srftt, Sec.
grd, eris, firity &c.
grim, 6ris, 6rit, &c.
Jssfim, isses, issSt, &c.
Ind. Pres., I know.
Ind. Past, I remerrAered.
Ind. Fut, I shaU begin,
Subj. Pres., / may know.
Subj. Past, I might hate.
Imperative, mginentfl, mgmentotg (the others wanting).
EF* Recollect, n 6 vi= J Anoto (not I have known) ; n 6 v e ram, I knew
(not / had known), dec; and so of the others. But coepI, n6vi, &c.,
may b« used as perf. pres.t ^: / have known, I have begun, &c.
X
Digitized by
Google
242
AlOy INaUAM, NOYI9 ETC.
EXEfiClBE.
(612.) Vocabulary.
To faU haekt to gioe way, pSdem
rtfeird (= to draw back the loot).
Young, raw, inexperienced, tiro, (ti-
rto) it (107).
8uHy, f erteAlAf, i, ftm.
Ludue Variue, L. Variaa, I.
Forgetful, immemor, (immSnior) !•
(107) ; governa genit.
Calmly, fuieay, tranqninitte (tras-
qoiU-Qa, 215, IL, a).
(613.) Examples.
(a) He eahcrU them U> r^
member,
{b) AriHidc$f when a$ked
v;kat VHU ju9^ i«pliod,
** Not to covet what belongs
to othen:'
Cruelty, snrltiS, «.
Demonax, Dem5nax, (ic) is (a phi-
kNMypher of Hadrian's time).
To pkOoMopkixe, pUldadphari {dep.).
In no way, by no wteans, nollO mddo
(««.).
Conscious, oodmomm, i, iim (with dot.
of penoo, gen, of tbing).
Lioy, Llyiiu, L
Horlftlttr ede ut m«m!ix6-
rint.
Aristidea inteir6g&ta8 quid
ju»tam 0S8et? ««Ali«a&,"
in quit, **ndii coiicnpi8e6r«(*'
(= •* Not to coY^t," said hsi,
"what," &c.).
BT Inquam is used in quoting the yery toords of another
(oratio recta), and is alwaja placed among the words qooited
(as *^said he^* in Eng^h). Ait is used generally in quoting
the MUM, not the exact wmrds of another (or at 10 obliqua).
(e) He began to btdld the
city.
The city began to be bvUt.
Urbdm iBcB[f!cAre c as p i t.
Urbs sdfficftrl coeptft est.
1^* If a passive infinitiye is used with the word begin^ you
must employ the passive form, oosptus sum, instead of coepi}
cospttis eram, instead of cosperam, ice.
(614.) Translate into English.
MiKtea, vulndnbu* ddfessl, pddem rdferre ooepenrnt.— ^
''Quid to,'* in quit LaM^nus, ''miles Ifro (voc.) tarn f^&rocfl-
Ins ds7*' Turn milea: '*Ndn sum," in quit, «'tiro, Labidnd,
add dd ddciml^ l^dnfi v^terftnus.*' — ^HelydtS nostroa l&oessdre
ccepdrunt. — Host@s, qui in montem s6se r6c6pdrant, prselium
r^dintegr^e coepSrunt. — Cssar dicit (574, a). Id fieri possd,
si .Sdul ftidtimfinua ftgros pdpulftri c(Bp«rint ($749 b).^
Digitized by
Google
AIO, INaUAM, NOVI, MEMINI, ETC. *243
IM^tes in mQrum l&p!des j&cdre c ob p 3 r u n t. -» Undique in
mUrum l&pides j&ci (613, c, ^*) ccepti sunt. — Dux militSs
hort&tur ut vdtdris gloriae m^minerint. — Ldgati dixdrunt sd
portus {accus. pi.) insulasque n 5 v i s s d. — Multi td oddrunt,
81 td solum &m&s. — German! siiperbiam L. Varii 6t ssevitiam
5 diss d ccepdrant. — Omn3s immdmdrem bdneficii dde-
run t. — ^TuUus Hostilius, ut Livius a i t, f dr5cior dtiam RomMd
(360, c) fuit. — Socr&t^ interrdg&tus qmn&m hSmines tranquil-
Eter vivfirent (634, e)1 "Qui," in quit, "nulKus turpitudi-
nis siU conscii sunt." — ^Demonax interrdgfttus, quando coepisset
(534, e) pliilds5ph&n ? "Turn," in quit, "cum cognoscdre
meipsnm (159) cos pi." — ^Hannibal Romftnos nc dddrat, ut
in gr&tiam cum ilEs rddire nuUo mdd5 (55, a) posset (553, b, R.).
— ^Is miser est, quem omnds bdni 5derunt. — Ndvimus
Aristidis juslStiam, ndyimus Socr&tis s&pientiam. — N6ii
ftmftbimus bdndtBuSres, si ndn dddrimus m&lds.
Digitized by
Google
Digitized by
Google
PART I I L
SUMMARY OF ETYMOLOGY.
X2
Digitized by
Google
Digitized by
Google
SUMMARY OP ETYMOLOGY.
§ 1. LETTERS, QUANTITY, &c.
(615.) 1. The letbem tare the lame u in Englirii, with t^M omiMum of w.
2. Six are voioels, «» e» i, o, n, y : tiie rennuning idneteen ard consmumti.
3. The oonaonants are divided into
(a) Liquids, I, m, n, r ;
(b) Spirants, h, a, j ;
{c) Mutes ; the remaining oonsonanta, among which there are
(1) 6-BoandB, c, g (ch) ; q ;
(2) p-sonnds, b, p (ph) ;
(3) t-sonnds, d, t (th) ;
(4) Doable oonsonanta, x, z.
4. The diphthong! are» an, en, ae, oe (rare» ei, ei, viV
(616.) GENERAL RULES Of QUANTITY.
(1) A vowel befiore another is short ; e. g., via.
(2) A vowel before two consonants, or a double one, is long ijf posi-
tion ; e. g., amant.
[As a mute followed by a liqaid causes some exceptions to tiiis role*
we shall mark the quantity, hi that case, doubtful ; thus, i^]
(3) AB gphth ongs are long ; e. g., mensS, aUrum.
(4) Contracted syllables are loi^; e, g^ cOgo (obfligo);
Digitized by
Google
§ 2. NOUN.
(617.) 1. The noun if the name of any object (penon or tlungr). Nomw
are proper (13, a), coM«Mm (13, 6), or abUraet (13, c).
2. There are tkrte genders, moieuHne, fiaUmnet and 4i«tc^ .* fvw nima*
beis, singular and plural : six cases, lUMnifMi^tt^ geniiive, dative, aecuus"
five, voeatioet and abloHve : nndjive declensions.
3. GENERAL RULES OF GENDER.
Males, rivers, winds, and numnt(xins most we find
Widi months and no^icm* Masculine declined ;
Bjit females, cities, countries, trees we name»
As Feminine ; most islands, too, the same.
Common are such as botk the genders take»
And Neuter all words nndechned we make.
[There are many exceptions from these rales, which must be learned
bj obsenration.]
First Declension. — {Genitive-ending ae.)
(618.)
case-endings.
h
Nona., Vog.
Gen.
Dat.
AH II
Sing.
II Plur.
ae.
ftriim.
n.
is.
im.
is.
t
Bern, 1. QtMsn/*^.— Final syllables all long bat i, mom, and voc ;
im, ace. ; and dm, gen. plur.
9. Oauier.— Noans of first dedenskm are/antmjie; except names of
male beings, &c.
Second Declension. — {Genitive-ending I.)
(619.) Masculine noons of second declension have nominatiye-enduig
iis ; neater noans» dm.
(a) CASE-ENDUfGS, MASCT7LINE8.
r —
Nom.
Gen.
DaL
Ace
Toe
Sing.
1 Plur.
As.
L
L
drfim.
6.
u.
6S.
6.
I.
6.
(d) CASB-ENDIKGS, NEUTERS.
ll -o.
N., A., V.
Gen.
DaL. AbL II
1 11^:
Am.
i.
L
flrjim.
t 1
Digitized by
Google
NOUN.
249
Rem. 1. QMmtUy.-^8hort final fyllaUei, lis, «, «m, «.
I/m^ " 1,6, ig, df.
51. Gender, ^~Il few nomui are feminine in tL a, and a few neater (aea
63, B. 1).
3. Stemt in r. — (I) All noons whose stems end in r, reject the ending
iis in nom. and S in voc. ; e* g,^ field, jnom., Sgdr (not Sgdr-tts) ; toc.,
ftgdr (not SgSr-A). (2) Most which have d in nom. drop it in the
remaining cases ; e. g^ nom., Igfir ; gen., flgri (not igdr-i).
4. Exeeptiom to Cate^ndinga. — (1) Proper names in ins, with
filins, genias, mens, have voc. in i ; e. g., Qeorg-% fil-l, ml. (2)
Deds has voc, detts, nom. plnr., dii, dat and abL plnr., diXs. (3)
A few take Urn in gen. plnr., instead of 6r ilm ; e. g,, sestertiihn.
Third Declension. — {Genitive-ending Is.)
(690.) (a) CASZ-BVDUIGS, MASCULINES AND rEMININES.
1
N<»i.,Voc
Ora.
Dat
Ace
— sr-|
1 ^:
es.
Is.
ttm (Imn).
1.
ib«s.
Sm (Im).
6s.
5,S:
(b) CA8B-BNBINGS, NEX7TEB3.
N..A.,V.
Oen.
Dat
AbL
1 Plnr.
iW
is.
ihSs.
UL
Mem, 1. QHaniity.-^T'uul syllables all short bnt I and 6 s.
9; Euphonic Rules, — (a) o-soand+s=:z: arc-s=:aix; leg-ssslex.
{b) tHWond before sis dropped: laQd-s=laxis; mont-ssmons.
3. Rulee of Gender from the Formation cf the Nominative,
[Learn these fiom 355.]
4. PeeuUar Catetnding8.-^1) Ace. in Xm : (a) commonly In
Febils, pnppls, pnlvls,
S6cfiris, restls, tonls :
(b) aZwajfsin
Srtls. tossls,
vis, amossXs.
(9) AbL in 1 : (a) sometimes in those which take Im in aoc wttk
IgnXs, dvSi : {b) always in vis ; and in neuters whose nom. ends
in il, ftr, or 6.
(3) Gen. plnr. inm i (a) in all which take I in abL sing. ; {b) in
monosyllables whose stems end in two consonants (e. g,, mont«,
mont-Ittm); (c) In all which insert a vowel before adding s in
nom. (e. g,, nftv-I-s, ntv-Ilim).
Digitized by
Google
3W
NOQN.
(631.) MasouIiUib Dominathre-eiiding fti ; natter naounatiTQ-endlD^ €.
(a) CASB-Bin>IN08, MASCULINES.
Il Noiiv,Toa. Gen.
Dat.
Ace AbL ll
Sing. fts. us.
|] Phir. Ak fltSm.
ibiis.
dm. A.
^ ibds. 1
{h) CAMhKIH>IV«9, SBVTIBS.
-^ — ^
Bk>ninAoe.,Voc
'iXL^Aii.
Sins.
Hot.
]^^ — =.-=
uiim.
Ibis.
iZbfi. 1. QiMMietljr;--^s Vmgi exoept is bom. Bingi, omI dsfc nd abL
plnr. ; A and i long alwayi.
8. Oenden,— Only the following noons are fernhdnat
AcQs, m&nus, ttlbiis,
INMuAs, poftfcufft <ifuf IcRUh
3. Peculiar Ceu&andmg.—The Mowii^ take A^bAs k dat and abL
pior., instead of lb As :
ArcAs, icAs, portAs, vdtA*
SicoSy^UiaAs* actAs,
SpAcAs» qneroAs, obo pficA».
THbia toa, and paitAs»
4. DAmAs, house, is thus decUned :
Smgf
Fhir.
doia-As,
ciD!m>uS*
-Ai.
.!bA«.
"Am.
? -As (ronrfy).
•A»
-Ms.
06s. The genitLve d Ami is used only in the sense of at hornet o^ my
Fifth DedetmMnLr-^ G e miiM' ^uUng ei.)
(622.) There are bat few noons of this declensi<m : aft ftmihine except
d!6s, day, and merXdIds, midday; and even dfAs is feminine in singo-
lar when it means % fixed day.
(623.)
CABE-ENDINGS.
Nom., Voc.
Geo.
D«t.
Ace
AbL
Smg.
Hnr.
6S.
ds.
erAm.
AT.
ebAs.
Am.
As.
, A.
AbAs.
Bffn, 1, Quantity. — ^Tbe e in el is ^on^ when a vowdLgfcanda before
it, as cU-A-i ; short when a consonant^. as fid.A-i. .
S. The genitive, dative, and ablative plural are wanting in all noons
nf this declension except rAs, dIAs, spAciAs.
Digitized by
Google
§3. ADJECTIVE.
(624.) The adjective exproMei a qulky or property belongkig to an
object ; e. g,^ good, Mmali, lokiU, 4tc. In LaiCin, t^ectvreB ace divided
into tbree clMses, according to their endinga.
I. cLAis I. (a a, a, urn).
(625.) These take theymtmne-ending of first declension of x
culine and neuter endings of the second.
(1.) CASK-BirDINOa.
SINOUI.AK, 1
Mmc.
Fern.
Neut.
M«K.
Fein.
N.<.t. \
N.
ds.
i.
jhn.
N".
I.
m.
i.
G.
L
e.
I.
a
dr&m.
arim.
ardm.
D.
6.
e.
6.
D.
Is.
la.
fli;
A.
iim.
am.
ftm.
A.
68.
as.
ft.
V.
«.
i.
lira.
V.
1.
OB.
i.
A.
6.
a.
d.
A.
IS.
IS.
la.
(2.) Stems in er. — ^Adjectives whose stem ends in er reject tts and 6
in nom. and voc
(a) Most of them idao drop ^ in (Sie nora. in the odier easea ,* e. g^
beautiful^ pnlchdr.
Xoob Fakhdr, pcddirt^ pnlchrflnfc
Oeuw Palchri, pidchras, polchn, &c
(&) But aspdr, Hk^r, liMr* n^Mr,. pro^dTr tftufir, retain tbe 6 ; e. ^.,
Nom. Mis6r, misSrS, ndsSn&m.
B%a. Misdri, ndsSra, misdri, &c.
(3.) Peculiar Case-endings. — Some a4)ectives, numerals, and a^eo-
tive pronouns have gen., itta, and dat, I; e. g., Uniis, nniUs, hqL
[They are dnns, uitHM, b6Ms, nidKia, nfifia, tiSfis, altdr, ttSit, nentdr,
JlterquS.]
2. CLASS II. {T^oo Endings).
(626.) Adjectives of the second class have Is in the nominative angular
for maseoluie and feminine ending, and £ fin: neuter.
(1.) CASB-EKDINOa.
smoutAM.
PLUKAL. ll
Hue;
r«iii.
N«vt
MaM.
Fem.
Veat
N.,V.
la.
Is.
«.
N.,V.
«8.
«a.
fft.
G.
la.
Is.
la.
G.
ram.
Ifim.
lam.
D.
I.
i
L
D.
Ibtis.
Ibiis.
Ibils.
Ace.
•m.
«m.
6.
Ace.
68.
fis.
».
AbL
I.
I
I
Abl.
Xbiis.
ibtla.
IbOs.
(2.) Sonw adjectives oTliiis dass take 6r for the ending of the nonk
i&g. miOM. instead of la ; e. ^ ., tcdr, ieifr, fere.
Digitized by
Google
253
ADJECTIVE.
(3.) The aUotiTe haa 6 initead of i in jardnXf, you£k; m^lVitt,
adile. The genitiye plural haa iim instead of ium in cfilfir,
Moift.
3. CLAsa III. {One Ending).
(637.) (1.) Adjectiyea of the third diut have hat one ending in the ncmi-
inative for all three gendera ; e. g., happy, fdlix (m., £, n.) ; bold,
and ax (m., t, n.). Participlea in ns fall under this doss.
(3.) The case-endinga are tiioae of noons of ttaid dedension (see par-
adigm, 108). They have abL 1 generally, bat 6 in pauper, senex,
and a few odiers (108, R. 1); neut plur., IS; gen. plur., iftm.
y^tOs has nom. plur., Tdter-fi, gen. plur., vdtdr^m.
For participles, abL, 6 ) .
" adjectires, abL, I 5 "
4. COMPARISOV OF ADJECTHrxS.
(638.) Comparative-endmgf I6r i iuperkaive,i»»lmi^n.
Brave, fort-is, fort-id r, fort-is simils.
Hard, ddr-iis, ddr-ittr, dar4ssimfts.
Rem, The comparative is declined (after third declension of noona)
dius:
Nom. Dtri5r, dflri5r, dibri&s.
Gen. Dflri6r-is, dflrioris, dfbrioris, &c. (See 358.)
(629.) Acyectives whose stems end in r have rimiis for ivperiative'eod*
ing (instead of isidmiis) ; e,g.,
WiB&r, mXs6r-ittr, ndsernrimus.
Pulchdr, pulchr-i6r, polcher-rimiis.
(630.) Seyeral a4jectiTes whose stem ends in 1 have llmfts for tvpsria-
^»oe-ending; e.g.,
ttcXL'ldT, f^lcfl-llmiis.
Ficil-is,
They are
Similis, dissimilis, and HkSOa ;
HdmiHs, diflRcOiB, and grfidOis.
5. IRBIOULAB COMPARISOir.
(631.)
Irregulars.
r Good,
bdniis.
meti5r.
ootiunus.
1 ^^•
mfilds.
p©j<>r.
pessimtis.
Great.
magntls.
xnajdr. ^
max^tls.
Much,
multns.
Jplfis (n.smg.).
^plur68,ftgL).
plfiiimua.
SmaU,
parviis.
min6r.
TOcSlSxtoSLB.
Old.
stoex.
Bdnidr.
VHmling.\
loarUing)
extrSmuiB.
Young.
jjiv6i^.
jani6r.
Owtward.
extdrOs.
exterittr.
Bdow.
inf^rns.
inftridr.
SinHmus.
/imiis.
Above.
siip^rds.
sttperittr.
sapremiis.
I siimmiis.
Hind.
postfirfts.
p08t6ri6r.
postrfimda.
Digitized by
Google
COMPARISON or ADJECTIVES.
253
(633.) DefecUvet. — {Comparative and Superlative formed from a Prepo-
sUion, Adverb, or Obsolete Word.]
(on this side, dtra.)
[within, intra.)
{beyond, ultra.)
{near, pr6pe.)
{bad, deter.)
nearer, citSrldr.
inner, intdridr.
further, nltfiri5r.
nearer, prdpiOr.
worse, deteridr.
former, priCr.
swifter, dcidr.
nearest, dtimfis.
inmost, mtibnds.
worst, ddtenimuB.
^rst, plimiis.
swiftest, acisslmtigi.
_^ . , . « ( ^tidr, , c dltissimtlf .
Sem. 1. Steh, diyes ; rteher, \ ^^5^ ; ''*'^*' \ divItUsimfii.
[Catar nBes the shorter form.]
9. Compound a4JectiTe8 in diciis, ficiifl, v5liiB, add entittr for tiia
eomparative and entissimiifl for the superU^tvoe ; e. g.,
Bdn^Tol-iifl, bdndyfil-entittr, bdndyfil-entisBimiii.
S. A4}ectiTea wboae stem enda in a vowd prefix to the potitwe
mSgis, mors, for the eomparatioe, and maximfi, most, fat tiia
Pkwi , pma, mSgIs i^iifl, mazimfi ^CQa.
Y
Digitized by
Google
§ 4. NUMEBALS.
(63^) NVMBKALS WB diTided into tke foOowiflg
flnt three «re a^ectives, die firarth adverbf.
diMti, of wbtch tho
CARDINAL.
ORDINAL.
DISTRIBOTIVI.
▲DYSRBLAL.
One, two, 4«.
Pirx. second, 4c
Onehfoiu,^
OnceiWiee.^
1
Un&s.
Primfta.
^T^
S«m«L
2
Dud.
Bto.
Tr6a.
Tertifta.
Tina,
T«r.
QMttoSr.
Quartos.
QnAtfimL
Quftt«r.
QoinquA.
QnintOs.
OolDL
Qolnqalta
SexT
Sext&8.
S«id.
S6xj»a.
Sept&n.
Septlm&a.
SeptenX.
Siptttfl.
Octa.
OctftTlto.
Oct6nL
Octite.
9
NdT&n.
NtoOs.
NoT«nL
NftyKa.
10
D»e«m.
D«clmfta.
MM.
D«e»k
11
Und«cim.
UnddcIm&iL
fhid«iil
Ondteiia.
12
Duddddm.
DuddScfmtU.
DllMtol.
D&&d6cle8.
13
Tr«dteim. [im.
Tertias.
Tftml- 1
Tr6dfiffi[«s.
14
Quattuordte*
Quart&8-
QufttSmX-
15
Quinddciin.
Quint&s-
QuIIl^
Qtdndficids.
18
Sexdeclm.
SexMfl-
'dBdbxAB.
seni-
dtoL
SSdfidfla.
17
Septeodficiiit.
Septiinftfl*
Septtef.
DMIte&aSptlea.
18
Octodficim.
Octavfta.
Octfioi-
DUddbnOiB.
19
Ndveraddam.
N6n&B-
N6V&1I. .
TTndevTdr«8.
ao
VTgintt.
Vicfislmtta.
VIcfint
Vldfes.
30
SJlS^ti
Ttlctelmua.
Tricfiid.
Triclgs.
40
QuAdrigMtmfii.
Quidr&gi«i.
50
Quinqu&gintL
QuXnqn&gifinL
Qulnqu&«^
60
SexAginttL
Sez&gftsimas.
SdzAgiid.
S6xftgI68.
70
Septu&gintL
S6pt(i&gf6fl.
80
Octdgintt
Octdg68im&8.
Oct6g6iiL
Oct6gI68.
90
NtoAgmta.
NOnftgfisImas.
Ndo&g«iiL
NdnfigiSs.
100
Centum.
CentMmOs.
CfinteiiL
C«nti68.
200
D¢L
D¢finL
D&c«nti[68.
300
Trtksentt.
Tr6cent68lm&a.
TrficfinttoL
Trftctotiga.
400
QuAdringentl
500
QuingentL
QumgentteimOa.
QuIng6nt«nL
Quingtoties.
600
Sexcentf.
S6zctat«nL
S6zc6nti68.
700
SepDngentL
SeptingftnttaL
800
Octingentf.
Octingeziate.
900
Noningentt.
N(mg6iit«iiL
NOngfinties.
1000
Mm«.
Milldslmas.
MmenL
Mimes.
For tlie dedenaion of anai, dao, and trea, aee 194.
Dacenti, and all tlie compoiiiids of centi, are declined like the plural
ofbonaa.
Mil Ha, thousands, the plural of mille, is declined like a neater noon
of the tliird dedenaion.
Ordinal numbers are declined like bonus.
DistrUnUiv4s, like the plural c^ bonua.
All the reat are undeclinable.
In the combination of cardinal numbers, fiom twenty to one hundred,
tibe smaller with et, or the larger without et, precedes ; as quattuor et
Tiginti, or viginti quattuor. Above one hundred tke larger number
precedes, with or without et; as centum et unus, or centum uaui.
Digitized
^y Google
§ 6. PRONOUN.
(634.) The pronoun, is a nWtitate fiv the noun ; e.f^ke, tke^ it, may
be labstitatefl for man, woman, book,
(635.) (a) Subitaniive Personal, to called becatme tmed as MubatantiTeB,
not as adyecthrcs.
8WGOT.AB.
"~
FLUKAL. 1
N.
o.
D.
Ace., AW.
v., A.
Gen.
Dat.. AbL
/.
6g6.
m6i
mihL
md.
m.
BM.
notitrJiBSt M*
DOBtrL
n«bfs.
Thau.
to.
tfiL
tift)L
td.
You,
TdC
ve8tri&in,or
v6bui.
Him, I
—
siil.
sibi
8&
Them,
veitrL 1 II
(came a« giag;)
{b) Adjective Personal, or Possessive (derived from the above).
Mifie.
Thine.
His, hers, its,
m6fiB, S, tun (yog., xm).
auus, i, Urn,
Ours.
Yours.
Theirs.
nost^r, BOfltrS, noBtrOm..
vestdr, veBtttt, vefltrOm.
saas, siii» sJltefk
2. DIMONflTRATIYS PRONOUNS.
^36.) 1%e dmiofw^rafRfe jMviumns are so called because they serve to
point emtua efafjeot ; e. ^., this, Aat, these, those, &c
(1.) fs, (Sa, ltd, this, that (he, she, it), often antecedent of qaL
Sing.
Phnr.
Nom.
is, an, id.
fi, 6k, 6&
Oea.
djds.
66riim, CarOm, ftprttm.
iis, or 6is.
6am, dim, id.
66s, 6as, 6&.
AbL
65, Sfl, 66.
Ss, (>r 6Is.
(Jl.) id0a, 6&d6m» td6m»^ very<af?te^componBdiBdof Is and d6ni.
Declined like is with dem added; thos, €jasdem, eid6m»
eunddm {pat eumdem), &c
(3.) Hie, hflBC, hde, Mtf, points oat an object present to the speaker,
and is caUed the demonstratioe of thBjirsi penoiir (It ia dso used
for he, she, it.)
Sin^ltte, hne,
h6c.
hi, hsB,
hflBC.
Phn*.
biius.
h6rdm, hardm, h6-
Bat.
Iniic
his.
baDByfaoc^
Ace
hdc
hos, h&s,
hcBO.
AbL
hfic,
hoe.
his.
(4.) Ist6^ istS, ist&d, this, that, points out an otideet preaant to the
person spoken to, and is called the demonstrative of saoaml peiBon.
Digitized by
Google
256 PKONOUN8, KELATIYE AND INTERROGATIVE.
Horn.
0^
Dat.
▲cc
AM. i
Sing. vt6, vU, iftiiii.
iiti.
iituxn, iitiin.
i»t6, uti.g
iitdd.
s.
iitfid.
iitA. n
PlQr.
u^iMtm,
iftdrum, iitlrfim, if-
iitis.
ist68, iitSa,
i8tte,i8tis,
ut&.
tOrftm.
iiti.
istis. H
^^Iflte ii often used to expreu oontempt
(5.) II 16, illi, illiid, point! oat an object remote from the tpeaker
{that, the former, opposed to hie), and if called demomtraiwe of
third i>eraoiL (It ia often naed ibr he, the, it,)
^^ Declined UuDogboat lik« istfi, iitS, istild.
(6.) Ipad, ipaSf ipi&m, te^, ia added to other pronoona, m€, t6, b9,
&C., and expreaaea mytelf, thyself, himseif, &c^ aceocdinglj.
^^ Declined like iatd, except that neater ia ipaiim (not ipadd).
3. HXLATIYX PBOiroVHa.
(637.) The rdtUioe pronoun {who, which, what) ia lo called becanae it
commonly refera to lome other word called the antecedent.
(1.) da!, qasB, qattd, who, whidi, what.
Phur.
qai,qo8B,
qadd.
qoi, qae,
qasB.
cojua.
Qaftrum* qaflrum,
qa6rum.
coi.
qoIbOa.
qadm, qaim,
qadd.
qada, qaAa,
qa».
qa6, qaa,
qad.
qaibua.
(2.) doicanqae, qaacanqad, qoodcanqad {whoever, whichever,
whatever), declined like qai, qasB, qa5d, with canqae added.
(3.) daia qaia {whoever, whatever), aaed without a aabatantiTe. The
following caaes only occar, and of these only qaiaqaia and qaio-
q a i d commonly.
Plor.
qaia<}oia (nL, £),
cfoicqaid jn.).
qfliqui (m., t).
q<:dbuaqi^-
b(!i8.
qaemqadm (m.,£),
qaidqold (n.).
qadqad, qaft-
qat, qa6qa&.
4. INTBBROOATIYX PROHOUNa.
f (638.) The interrogoitwe pronouns {who f which 7 what f) are oaed in
aaking qoestiona.
(1.) daia, qae, qaXd {whol whieh7 whati), ia declined predaety
Uke the relative qal, except #at in nom. aing. maac it haa qali,
and in nom. and ace. aing. neat, qald. [dai, qasB, qa5d, ia alao
oaed interrogatiTely, aa an adjective (172).]
(9.) daianftm, qaen&m, qaidnftm, ia more emphatic than qaii.
(Pray, wh(xt are yoa doing T qaidnftm igis ?) It ia declined Uke
qnla, qa», qald.
Digitized by
Google
PRONOUNS, INDEFINITE AND CORRELATIVE. 257
5. INDEFINITE PKONOUNS.
(639.) The indefinite pronouns denote an object in a general way, witb-
cmt reference to a particular individual {any one, tome one, &c.).
. , ^ . , „ , ^ ( qnoddfim, used as an adjecHve, )
(1.) a».d»m, qu«d«m, \ q„id j^ „ed M a nZ, i" '^
tain (one) ; plnr., some. Declined like qui ; but takes n generally
before d instead of m ; e. ff.,
Digitized by
Google
§ 6. VERBS.
(641.) Thi mtI 4mskr9B fooMtiifag of A penon or dung: tb6 ea^
Himi tht fOMQ idMi Imt daaghttr.
1. CLUIKI or TXRB8.
(642.) Yerbt tre oe^n^e^ poMtve^ or deponent,
(1.) Active verbf expreii adion : (a) ei&er trantUiotLy, retjalring an
object ; e. g., the qaeen ^ovet {whom 7) her daxighter ; or (^) intrai^
ntivdyt ^^ reqairiag an object ; the eagle ./Ke*.
(S.) Pa$9fve rerbf express tiie fvoemn^ or tmffering ef an iustion ;
lamloted; T W€U pumthed.
Obviously vdnnuiHve veibs have no passive inrm. We cannot
say, / am danced, I am slepi.
(3.) Deponent verbs have the passive fbrm, bat an a s ft 'ae itg^iicatiop.
2. PARTS OF THE VERB.
(643.) The verb Is divided into^
{a) The ind^niU verb^ including certain parts which do not refer to
a defimte person or time.
{b) The finite verb^ inclnding the parts which always do so refer.
Indefinite Verb.
(644.) (tf) l%e iiul^mfe rerb indodeS)
(1.) The infiimtkfe, which expresses the aetien of tiie veA wifiioat
relation to a defimte person, and partakes also of the nature of a
noon ; e, g,, to lemm ; to love m pleasant.
(2.) The parHcipU, which expresses the action of the verb nnder the
fimn of an a4jective ; loving, blooming.
(3.) The gerund, which expresses the action of the verb under the
fimn of the nonn, in all cases bat the nominative, and supplies ob-
lique cases to the infinitive.
(4.) The gerundive, which ex pi ^e ss es tlM aotioB of the yerb as neces-
Sfory or eoN^HMM^ undef the form of an a^^eetive^ in aft oaaes and
gttidenk
(5.) The supine, which also expresses the action of the vtA in tha
finrm of two cases (ace. and abl.) of the noun.
Fimte Verb.
(645.) (6) Hhe finite verb includes those parts' wHch express the
(1.) Different varieties of affirmation, viz., the mooits.
(2.) Different times at which the action of the rerb takes pTace^ viv.,
tiie tenses.
(3.) Different relations of the verb to persons <3ft things, tli., the nuM"
hers and persons.
Digitized by
Google
fA&TS or TBS rilflTB VllB. %5Q
(1.) Th§ Mooi9.
(046.) Tbe¥eib«spraBi6i4^lrfMrtM>fft; tbeMOMiief fli*ir«A aMmed
to Ttrjr file character of &e alBrmatlon.
(1.) By the indicative, affirmatioii of Kfaet is expreaatd ; «. g^ IwrOe,
I did not write.
(3.) By tb« <i«^fi£<iM^ affiimatkm ia expreaaed donA^mOf, cemtii^
gently, or ind^nitely; €,$.,! may write, UlBh^mld write, periu^
aome {may) think.
(3.) By die imperative, afflnnation ia ezpieaaed aa an ir^netion or
fTi^Met^ ; e> |^-> tmte:.
(2.) The Tenses.
(047.) Time may be paat» preaent, or fdtnre, az^ the verb haa tiierelbre
three texuies to expreaa theae. But action may be repreaented aa going
tm or SM completed, eWier in paat, preaeot^ or fiitiire time, and therefore
two forma are required for each, making ns in alL
/ lot^, or am
loving.
Ihavelovet
(Perffect.)
/ shall love, or be loving.
(Future.)
I shall have loved. {Wu-
tore Perfect)
Action going on,
or imperfect.
iction completed,
at perfect.
I was loving.
(Xmpeiiect.)
/ Juia loved.
(Pluperfect.)
Eem. 1. The Latin usea its perfect form in two ways : (1) like the
English perfect^ to express action complete in present time ; e. g.,
imftvl, I have loved: (2) like the English imperfect, to express ac>
tion indeinitely in past time ; e. g., taoHn, I loved. This is called
the perfect aorist. [The latter use is by far the most common.
This distinction should be thoroughly miderstood.]
8. The siU^jv/netive mood haa no futore (it «ses the peripfarastio
fonn 661).
3. The preaent, perfSect^ and fixture are called primary teases, refer-
jmg, aa they do, eititer to p r ea ent or fiiture time ; the is:q>erfect,
perfect aorist, and pluperfect are called historical tenses, referring,
aa they do, to past time.
(3.) Numbers and Persons,
(648.) As there may be more than one person engaged hi an action, the
rerb haa two numbers, singular and pluraL These persons must be either
T, thou, we, ye, or some other person or thing ; therefore the verb haa
three persons, Itit, Sd, and 3d, which are denoted in Latin by different
endings..
3. CONJUOATION.
(S49.) CoBiiugatiien is the in^flediim (21, &.) of a yezb tiiraogh all ite
parts. There are in LnJtnafour coi^agaticms of yeibs, distin g uished by the
ending eft^m&utiTe; ttoat
u % 9. ^
-tr*. 4r«. -*r«. 4r«.
Digitized by
Google
260
FAMLADlfiU OF E S 8 E, TO BE.
4. TBS AWOLUXT OK IVBfTijrTrrX TXBB xssI, to be.
(650.) [B«&re moeeding to the ccM gu gBtiooB, we mnst gire the fixms
of eifld, to he, called an auxiliary, because it is used in fimning^ some oC
tbe parts of the verb ; and tubUantive, because it is the verb expressing^
simple eadstence.]
1. IKDICATITE.
▲CnON UfCOWfXMXK.
8ingal«r.
Present
Imperil
Future.
sfinit
lam,
IW€U.
6rd,
I shall be.
68,
tkouari,
tiumwasL
6riM,
heu.
«nt,
he vat.
grit,
he,^c.
sihniis,
wecare.
Srfmus,
vte toere*
Siimas,
estib,
ye art.
irtHs,
SrMs,
sunt,
they are.
eran^
Srun^
▲CnON COBKPLXTKD.
Siiyular.
Pexfect.
PlaperC
PutPerf.
m,
I have
been.
fuSrfim,
/ had
been.
fu6rd,
/ thaU
have been.
foisti,
thouhast
been.
ftiSras,
thou
had8t,SfC.
fhSrls,
thou
hehat
been.
ftiSrlt,
hehad
been.
fuerit»
IheshaO,
shaltt 4*g'l 4'g'
fu&nus, Ifms^,
foehiwe I vehave
been. been.
fuSiAmiis, nuSratls,
toe A^Mi I ye had
been. t been.
fuSrimus, IfliMtib,
we shall, ye shall,
4'C. 1 4*g-
f&Snmt,
theyhave
been.
itieran^
theyhad
been.
fderinty
theyshaU,
2. SUBJUNCTIYS.
XNCOMPI.KTS.
Sioculftr.
Present.
Imper£
sii%
I may be.
essem,
J might
be.
81S,
^A^, 4*g*
essds,
1kou,Sfe.
sit,
essSt,
A€^4-c.
simus,
gssdmus.
sitib,
ye.Sre.
essetis,
Sf«, 4-g-
sint,
iheytSf'C.
esBcnt,
ihey,Sre.
couplStxd.
Siiyihrr'
Perfect.
Plnperf.
fuSiim,
I may
have been.
fuissfim,
/ might
have been.
meris,
tihou,S^e.
ftiisses,
thoUtSrc.
mAt,
he,^e.
fuissSt,
hi,8re.
fuSilmus,
we, iS^e.
fuissSmus,
we, 4*c-
fuSritis,
ye, Src.
fuissdtifs,
ye, Src.
ftiSrint,
ih4iy, 8^0.
ftiissent,
they,^t.
3. UfPEBATIVS.
Singular.
2. Ss, estd, be ihou.
3. estd, let him be.
2. estS, estOtS, be ye.
3. Bontd, lest them be.
4. INFINITIVE.
BssS, to be. fbissS, to have been, futfiriis, X, um, esse, to be about to be.
5. PARTICIPLE.
^ Present
Onhr in compoonds ; absens, absent
(from absom) ; pnesens, present
(fromprcBPm).
FutorOs, ft, Qm, one who will be.
Digitized by
Google
PARADIGMS OF REGULAR VERBS. 261
5. PARADIGMS or RXOULAR VERBS.
(651.) (1.) Verlhstem.— The stem of any verb is found by striking off
Hie infinitive-endiDg ; e. g., of ftm-firS, xn6n-«rS, rSg-SrS, and aud-irS the
Btema are ftm-, m5n-, rSg-, and-, respectively.*
(2.) Tense-8te7n,—Baxih tense has its own tense-stem, consisting of the
Terb-stezn with or withont some additions. Thns, in the first coxgngation :
Pres, tense-stem = verb-stem = am-.
iTvperf, tense-stem = veii>-stem +ab = amab-.
Perf. tense-stem = verb-stem +av == amav*.
[In the annexed paradigms the tense-stems are shown npon the left-
band side. Observe that the perfect tense-stem serves also tor the stem
of 'tiie plaperfect and fhtore perfect tenses.]
(3.) Tense^ndmg. — ^Bach tense has its own endings, which, added to
the tense-stem, give the person-forms. Thns :
Imperfect-stem im&b- -Hm= amab am, 1st person.
amab- +&s = am abas, 2d person,t &c.
(4.) The perfect, pluperfect, and fatnre perfect of the passive voice are
fonned by means of the past participle and forms of es sS ; thns :
ftm&tuB snm, ftmattLs eram, &matus Sro.
[No fartber explanation of the paradigm is necessary. The student
should learn the modes of formation, and the tense-endings for each tense,
apart from the stems am-, mon-, &c., and unite them afterward wiA those
or any other stems.]
* In resdity, tiie crade-forms are ama-, mone-, andi- (the three pure
conjugations), and rSg- (the consonant conjugation). But the changes df
die mide-form in inflection fonn too great a difficulty for beginners ; we
therefore present the stem as the language affi)rds it to us, without going
into a nicer analysis.
t Farther, the person-ending forms part of the tense-ending. From the
paradigm (active), it will be seen that in every tense except the i>erfect
the endings are
o, or m, s, t, mus, tis, nt.
These endings are added to the tense-stem, either durectly, as am-o, or by
means of a connecting-vowel, as reg-i-s, or of a fleuon syllable and con-
necting-vowel, as amav-er-a-s.
Digitized by
Google
363 PAEADIOlfB FOm THB FOUK OOHJUOATIONS.
FA&ADiem FOK
ACTIVE.
(658.)
IVDICATIYS MOOD.
PaBtBR, Ilgmmr mm ImriH^, tk^m mt hndi^ ^
mdn-
6.
U,
it
ft.
It
imOf.
imi&s.
fttib.
iHi.
Itif.
ast.
ent.
unt.
itmt
Ikpxbfxot, Jwa§ loving, o^ivuiii^, nfj«>v, hearing, i/c
ftm-&b-
mdn-^b-
aad-idb-
»«m.
it
fttib.
FTmB, JaUtt mr taiU lov$, adn$$, ruU, k&ar, i/c
ftm4b-
mdn-^b-
r6g-
aod-l.
hfim.
It
St
bnflB.
emiSa.
Ttb.
«nt
ent
PBBVBGTf/iWNMfovMi. (PsanBCT AomxiT, 1 2oM^)
rex-
and-iv-
iifi.
Imili.
iatiEa.
€nint or
art.
PLtnramFxoT, Ihad loved, tfc
ftm-ftv-
moD-tt-
rex-
aad-lT-
» Mbn.
arftt
«rit.
irfeiAi.
iittib.
im-av-
mdn-ii-
rex-
and-iY-
FuTUma Pxarxcr, IthM haoe loved, ^
M.
«xli.
Mt
^AoAb.
«lftX8.
drint
(653.)
IMPERATIVB MOOD.
9d Brnpilar.
8d 8in(pilar«
3d PlanL
r«g-
aod-
a,fttd.
6, ltd.
§td.
ate, atdte.
«tA.
etd, etfttd.
It«.
itfi, itfite.
itfl.
ftfi, It6t6.
antd.
entd.
untd.
iimtd.
Digitized by
Google
FAitAAiqH^ FOR THQ FOUR CONJUOATIONQ. S68
THE TOVK COirJITGATIONS.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
PiasgNT, lam lottd, ifc
aud-
6r.
Sdr.
dr.
i6r.
jftris.
>§r6.
►6r«.
[Ms.
atur.
amur.
etur.
dmur.
ftur.
Im&r.
itur.
imOr.
flmtnT-
ft mifnT-
imsni.
ftntur.
entnr.
nntCbr.
iimtiir.
Ikpkbfxct, Iwa§ loved, 4c.
mdn-db-
r6g-fib-
aad-ieb-
(aiiB.
itOr.
>.mifnf.
antOr.
FuTumx, Ishdttbehved, ifC
ain-§b-
mdn-db-
aad-^
► or.
!ar.
firia.
«rg.
itfir.
etiir.
imtir.
dmiir.
Xmlid.
6wSxiSL
nBliir.
entnr.
Pektxct, JAom (ms loved; 4«.
Smattls.*
mdnitas*
recttts.*
andituB.
or
ioiatL
fmt
aumds,
<>r
folmiia.
estiCa,
or
fiiiatib.
annt^
PLXTPXsncT, JAod freen fovoi, ^e.
ftmatOs.
xndnittta.*
rectSa.*
aaditfis.*
<■ SrSziLt
Srfia.
Sr&t
fir&mtUi.
eratite.
erant
FvTwa PsBTSCT, i tkatt have been loved, 4c
ttmattts.
mdnitda.*
reetda.*
andittta.^
«r04
«llB.
firlt
Srimiia.
diiOa.
IMPXRATITB MOOD.
ennit*
8d Singular.
3d Singalar. |
3d PlaraL
ftm-
mttn-
and-
&rd, atdr.
6r6, etdr.
6rfi,a:6r.
ir6, itdr.
at6r.
etdr.
itdr.
it6r.
finubl, imXndr.
dmin^ dm&idr.
rniYp f , unindr.
antor.
entdr.
UDtdr.
iimtdr.
* The participle mnat be inflected in gender and munber to a^pfee with
tbe anbject
t Somatjaaeg fneraBL^fqeraa, Ico.
t Som^twmea faero, f&ena, ftc
Digitized by
Google
864 rAKADiom for ths fouk conjdoationb.
(654.)
8UBJUNCTIYX MOOD.
P>«8Kirr, I may love, ifC
m5n-e>
aod-i-
^Im.
it
€mOf.
etls.
itii.
fint.
•nt.
iMPKmracT, I might looe, t/e.
&m-ir-
mdn-dr-
aad-ir-
» Sm.
«t
ftnif.
etifl.
ent
Pkefkct, Jmay A<w>e toge<i, ^^^
Sm-lT-
mon-ii-
rdz-
and-hr-
* %Aoi,
«iif.
drit
Siimfti.
«ritita.
firint
pLtrPMtFacT, J»t^*< JUww toge<i, ^
ftmlT-
rex-
and-Ir-
' Iu£m.
ISSfiB.
18f«t
isa€tito.
iMent
(655.)
INFINITITE.
Pb«8«wt [to tope or >e fewwy, ^c-]'
im-lrS,
m5ii-6r6,
3.
and-irS.
PgRFgcT [to A<w>e toped; ^].
Smtv-iud,
m5nu-lM6,
8.
rez-iisS,
4.
aodiV-Ii8&
FuTUBX [CO he about to love, 4c].
1. 8. 3. 4.
SmitdrOB essS, mfioItArfis ess6, rectOrik essd, andlMriifl essfi.
(656.)
PARTICIPLES.
PMi8«NT [top<»y, a<feifwy, nttey, AeaH^^].
Sm-Anfl,
s.
mon-ens,
s.
rSg-Sns,
4.
aad-26iui.
Pkbtkct [Aaoiny toge<i, advieed, ruled, heard].
Wanting ; iropplied by abL abgoL, or by qnpm with sabj.
FuTUBg [about to love, adviee, rule, hear].
imatdrtti.
s.
xnSnXtflrfis,
reotttrfis,
4.
anditOrSs.
(g57.)
OBRUITD AND
QERUWDfl ; faalindi, manendi,
3. 4.
regendl, audiendl.
(658.)
SvPiNiinvm: im&tum,
*' n: imattl»
monltdnif
moitftu,
8.^
rectunif
recto,
andftfim.
anditO.
Digitized by
Google
PARADIGMS FOK THB FOUS CONJUGATIONS. 265
PASSIVE.
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.
PBBSgNT, I may be loved, Sfc
mon-e-
6r.
j eris.
j firis.
etur.
fttur.
6mdr.
Amor.
6minL
flTniinT.
SntJir.
flnttir.
iMPEBFgCT, Imiglu he Iffoedf fye.
fim-ftr-
mdn-er-
r6g-6r.
audlr-
'6r.
jerifs.
t6r6.
€tfir.
6mixri
emini.
totiir.
PgRFKOT, Imojf have been laved, ifc
Sm&tiis.
monitns.
rectos,
audltiia.
aim.*
81S.
Bit.
lizxnu.
Bitls.
•int.
PLUPaaygcT, Imig'ht have been loved, JfC
<m§tus.
mdnltds.
recttls.
auditQs.
> essdixLt
essds.
es86t
essemus.
efsGtlB.
eisent.
INFINITIVE.
Pbbsbnt [to be (J>emg) loved, ifc].
Sm-iri,
8.
P6g-i,
aad-iri.
Perfeot [to have been loved, ^].
fimfltds ,ess6^ xndnltiia essfi, rectus ess8, andit^ essS.
FuTPBB [to fee aftottf to &g toped, ^].
Smftfciimiii,
mfinltOm fri,
3.
rectilmiri,
aadltOmlri.
participles.
Pbbsent and PBBygQT [tope<^ beingr loved, hcaing been loved, ^].
1. 9. 3. 4.
Smatfig, mOnftfts, rectflg, andMs.
GERUNDIVE.
!• 8- *• «^ a^
qERUNDiVEt imandils, mOnendilg, rCgendttg, anfflCndttg.
* Sometimei fiierixn.
f Sometimes ftiissem.
Digitized by
Google
206
VEKB8 IN lO AND DEPONENTS.
6. YXRBS IN id or THE THIRD CONJUOATIOIT.
(659.) Some verbf of the third coiyiigation assume ! before the person-
ending in some of the tenses, as shown in the following paradigm of c&p*
INDICATIVE.
Pres.
Imperf
Put.
cip-
c«p-Mb-
cap-i-
16.
ftm.
Sm.
imds.
amds.
dmils.
itis.
fttis.
etis.
i-Ant.
ant.
ent
SUBJUNCnVI.
Pres. I cap-I- 1 im.
I ftt I ftrnQs. I atis. I ant.
INDICATIVE.
Pres.
Imperf
c4p-
c«p-!-€b-
c«p-i-
i^r.
It.
«r.
«ris.
Sris.
eris.
itOr.
fitdr.
etar.
Imiir.
amiir.
Smflr.
AmTni.
gmini.
I-nntor.
ftntur.
entor.
aUB/UNCTIVE.
Pres. I cap-I- I ftr. | aria. | &tur. \ amur. j amini. | antOr.
IXPEBATIVE.
3d Plar. Active, cftp-T-nntJ^.
3d Pltir. Pass., cftp-I-antCr.
PAETICIFLES.
Pres. Active, cftp-i-ens.
Fat. Pass., cip-i-endas.
QlRUND, c&p-i-€nd-i, 6, &c.
7. DEPONENT VERBS.
(660.) (1.) Deponent verbs have the passive form with active significa-
tion. Am the endings are the same as those of the passives (Paradigm,
p. 263, 5S65), we need not repeat them.
(3.) Bat deponents have three active participles, while other verbs have
hut two: thus,
Pres., exkortingf Perf., having exhorted, Fut, about to exhort,
hort-ans. * hort-ftt&s. hortftt-firus.
(3.) Also, all transitive deponents have the verbal a4jective in d a s ;
e* g; hortandus, one that should be exhorted: intransitive deponents
have it only in the neuter; e. g., morienddm est, one must die.
8. PERIPHRASTIC CONJUGATION.
(661.) Bj means of the tenses of ess S, combined with the future parti-
ciple in r u s, and the verbal in du s, the periphrastic c(»^ugation is form-
ed; e.g.f imatArds sum, lam abottt to love, I intend to love j ftman-
dtts stLm,Jamto be loved, I must be loved, one must love me ; and so
through all the tenses and persons. The deponent verbs employ diis per-
iphrastic ootgugation also.
Digitized by
Google
Formation of peefect-stem.
267
1. WITH PARTICIPLE IN rilg.
INDICATIVE.
SUBJUNCTIVE.
im&tards,
fstm, 6b, est, &xi.
6rim, Srfts, &c.
fai, faisti, &c.
faer&m, fiiSrAs, &c.
\^6t6, 6ris, &c.
fBun, sis, sit, &c.
Smatdrds, J essdm, essds, &c
i^foissSm.
INFINITIVE.
Pres., imatdras essd, to be about (or intending^) to love,
Fext, ftmAtariis fiiissS, to have been about to love.
Tut, imaturns f6r6, to intend to love kerw^Jer,
2. WITH VERBAL IN dill.
INDICATTVB.
SUBJUNCTIVE.
(Slim.
Srftm.
fai
fadrftm.
6rd.
&mandils, «, urn, if^l^^
l^foissdm.
iNriNmvs.
Pres., Smandtls, ft, tLm, ess6, ought to be loved.
Perf., imandtis, H, am, imss6, ought to htwe been loved.
Fnt, imandiis, &, ttm, forC, ought to be loved hereafter.
9. ON THE FORMATION OF THE PERFECT-STEM.
(662.) In the paradigms, the perfect-stems are formed by adding to the
verb-stem in the 1st conj. &y- (Sm-av-); in the Sd, ii (m5n-ii-) ; in the 3d,
• (reg-s); in the 4th, It- (and-iv-). Bat, altboagfa most Latin verbs
fbnn die per£-stem thas, many use different endings, which are exhibited
in the following classification:
I. FIRST CONJUGATION.
(663.) Foot ways of forming the perfect-stem :
L By adding &v to the verb-stem : ftm-§r6— fim-tv-L
n. " ft " cr6p-ar6— cr6p-ft-L
in. By redaplicating the first consonant : d-ttr6 — dSd-L
rV. By lengthening the stem-vowel: jftv-firS— jflv-L
n. SECOND CONJUGATION.
Five ways :
L By adding u to the verb-stem :
n. " 6v
m. ^ " s
rV. By reduplication :
V. By lengtiiening the stem-vowel :
m6n-dr6 — ^ni5n-ft-I«
dSl-er«— del-6v-i.
alg-€»— al(g).s-L
morderd — ^md-mord-L
cSv-6rd — C4V-L
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
rOEMATIOV OF PBftPBCTHITBl^
IIL THIBD COHJUOATIOir.
Biz wayi:
L By addBngitotfaeTeiiHrtem: ■crib- Btg Milp ■ I .
n. " XI «• 81-ei«— il-tt-L
UL " vori7 " c^rn-*!*— «*v-L
IV. By reiopUsatioD : cnrr-^rt— ctt-corr-I.
y. Sy leogtlieidag the stem-^ewel : ftm-^ rH i imi
▼L By ivesentiDg the simple veib-ftem : ica-Crft— ieu-i.
ly. rOURTB COHJVOATIOir.
Wt6 wtyi:
L By adding iv to tlie jfxb-ftem : aad-ir6, and-ir-L
IL " « " ip^'OH, l^r-ft-t
m. *♦ a " falclrt, fU(c)-fl-L
rV. By lengUiening tiie atem-vowel : vfin-lrd, ven-L
V. By presenting the simple Teiinitem t oomi>dr-ur6, oamp&r-h,
[In the foDowing lists, the verbs are arranged aooording to the abore
dassifcyatiwi, and the sapines also eiTen. When any peoiliarity exists
fn the ecwqMBBds, it is stated. Of Class L (which embraces most of the
roles in the language), ODtv one example is giyen in each oonjueation, as
the student is famiuar with its form ; Dat under ^ remaining beads a^
^e verbs in wwnmnn «se are mentioiied.]
10. LIST OF VEBSa
(664.) yiRST CONJUGATIOH.
L Petfectstem adds trtothe Verlhttem,
Toiptf^ im-4r |bn-are, &n-&v-^ |£mrA-tJiiEu
n. /W/baNtoii addi ttotke Verb-tkm.
Screak, cr6p-e, erSp-arS, crSp-^ cr6p-l*tiiB.
Lie down, cftb-o, cfib-ar6, ettb-il-I, ctb-I44m.
go the compoonds; ^ ^., accdbtf, accCLbarS, aodibai, acciiblt&n.
Some compoonds, however, which take m before b, follow tlie 3d
oo^j. ; e, g., accombd, aoooinbCiiB, acottbol, accttlnftfim.
TotamCt ddm-o, d6m-ard, ddm-fi-i; d5m-T-tflm.
Torvi. ftfc* &Mn, m^.% \^^^^
To gutter, nic-o, m!c-lr6, m!c-tt-L
Toguthforih, tadc-o, 6mlc-ar8, fimic-ti-v findo-ft-tdin.
Tofdd, pHc-o, plic-flr6, plic-fi-I, pUc-I-tOm.
PBc-d is osed only in composition: sopplibd, dnj^feft, molttplXc^ have
ftvl, itfim; exi^d, to explain, ivl, atum; to ui^old, i&, ftdm.
To cut, s6c-o, s6c-ftre, s6c-fi-I, sec-t-Uxn.
To sounds son-o^ s5n-ar6, sdn-o-I, 85n-I-tfim.
To thunder, tdn^, ton-Ar6, t6n-fi-i, tdn-i-tOm.
Tofarbid, vfitH), v6t-«r8, vfit-fi-i, vfit-T^iim.
Digitized by dOOQ IC
LIdt of Vt:ftfia» ftCOOIID OOKIUQATIOlf •
UL Petfectsteni yedvplicates thejint Contonant with e.
To give, d-o, d-ftrd, ddd-I, dS-tiim.
So, also, tbofe oompoandi o£ whicli the first part is a word of two iji*
labki ; e.ff^ circomdd, circ!imdir6> droomd^di, eirciimditam, to tui^
round ; but the ootaponnda with monoeyllablet follow the 3d ooq|. }
e. g,, addd> adddrd, ad^idi, additOm, to add.
To stoMd, Bto, st-&r6, stdt-i, st-ft-tiim.
The tiompoimda have in the perfect ■ td ti when tfae first part is «
dwtyUabU; e» g., circomstd, circomstdtl ; hat stiti when it if a
monosyUaUe ; e. g., adstd, adstili.
TooMiiti,
To wash,
(665.)
rv. Perfece-ttem lengthens the Stem^owel.
j4v-o, jiit-ar6, j4v-i, ju-tOm.
i ISri-tiinL
Iftv-o, lftt-te«, Iftv-i, . < Un-tttxn.
(lA-tiSm.
ilteONI) COVJUGATtOV.
L Petfeot-stem adds iSitothe Verb-stem.
To admonish, mte-eo^ In5n-€r6, mSn-ii-i, mOn-T-tSm.
IL Perfeet-sUm. adds %rtoihe Verlhstem,
To blot out,
m-eo.
d§l-gr6,
d6l-€T-I.
dSl-d-tiim.
To weep,
fi-eo,
fi-€r6,
fi-ev-i,
fi^-tftm.
To spin,
n-eo,
n-€r6,
n-€v-i.
n-S-tiUn.
TofUup,
compl-eov
oompl-§rd»
oompl-€y-i,
compl-^tiim.
ToaboUsh,
&b51-eo,
4b61-€r6,
ftbdl-Svi,
&bdl-i-t&n.
The primitiTes 51eo and pleo are obsolete: like compI^O vxt con-
jugated impleo, expleo ; like aboleo, addeo, and eexdi^o,
UL Perfed-stem adds Bio the Vet^steth,
Euphonic RuUs.
1. At^ioiOkdbeforesif dfOpped; e.^^ar(d)-8iaB an-L
3. AeHNniiid4-a = x; t.g., aiig*aia= anx-i.
3. Bat a c-soond after 1 er r, befinre u, if droppedf e*gu fal{g)'tla
fala^i
To
skiver \ , ,.
«%•«»,
to hMt, afd-do»
U^t4ft%,
To increase, aag-eo,
aag-erfi,
Tobebright, ta^-to,
ib]g.er«,
Z2
5 al-i-i
I (alg-s-i).
iar-si
(ard-s-i).
< aux-I
I <augw^!).
€ fol-s-i
X (ftOg-s-i).
>aac-tjiin.
Digitized by
Google
270
LIST OF VERB8| SECOND CONJUGATION.
To sHck, hsr-eo,
To indulge, indvUg-to,
To command, jub-eo,
To remaint mXn-eo,
Toiutuage,
TomWc,
To laugh,
Toadvite,
Tounpe,
To nodi,
Totwitt,
To press,
To shine,
Tomou/m,
mnlc-eo,
nralg-eo,
ifd-eo,
snftd-eo,
terg-eo^
torg-eo,
tor<]xi-60|
urg-eo,
lac-eo,
teg-eo,
indnlg-drfi,
m&n-drfi,
mnlc-drd,
xiiQlg>4r6f
rid-dre,
saad-6r6.
\ (hacr-s-i).
iindol-s-I >
(indulg-g-i), 5
indol-tSm.
indol-s-I
(indalg-s-i]
jiifl-ff-i(jalHi-I), jas-Biim.
man-ff-i, man-siim.
mol-fl-I
(mnlc-B-i),
inal-8-i
(mulg-€.i),
rl-fl-i (rid-8-i), zf-Bnm.
inol-siiin.
taig-6r6,
iirg-€r6,
lac-dr6,
lag-ei«,
\ (soad-ff-i),
< ter-s-I
I (terg-a-1),
( tar-s-i
I (targ-a-i).
tor-s-i
(torqa-fl-l),
ur-«-i (urg-s-i).
lux-i (Iflc-B-!).
hix-i (Ing-B-i).
>sii&-iilin.
ter-siiiiL
\ tor-s-i 7
I (torqa-B-l), 5
tor-tOm.
rV. FerfedrtUim, reduplicates fint ComonarU and Vowel,
To bite, mord-eo, mard-&6, mtoiord-i, znoMriim.
To hang, peiM-fio, pend-€r3, p6pend-I, pen-stun.
To betroth, spond-edv spond-€r6, sp5pond-l, spon-snm.
To shear, tond-eo, tond-Srd, tdtond-i, ton-s&n.
The compounds of these verbs drop the reduplication ; e. g-, re-spondl
(not re-spopondl).
V. Perfect-stem lengthens the 8temrVov>eL
cfty-«r6,
far.€r6,
fbT-€r6,
m6v-€r6,
pftv-er6,
sM-«r6,
In the same manner are conjugated the compounds with dissyllables ;
e. g., circumsfideo, circumsfidfirfi, circums6di» drcumsessdm, to sit
around ; but those with monosyllables change 6 of the stem into I;
e. g., assideo, assiderS, assSdi, assessiim, to sit b^.
To see, Tid-eo, Tid-fir6, vid-I, Ti-sfim.
To vow, vOy-eo^ y^Y-it^, v6v-i, yO-tfim.
To take care.
c5y-eo,
Tofavour,
fftv-eo.
To cherish.
ftv-eo,
To move,
m6v-eo,
To dread.
pfty-eo,
To sit.
sSd-eo,
c&v-i,
cau-tiim*
fty-I,
fau-tiSm.
foy-i.
{5-tdm.
m6y-i,
mo-tfim.
p§v-i.
sed-I,
ses-s&n.
Digitized by
Google
LIST OF VEEBS, THIBD CONJUGATION.
271
566.) THIRD CONJUGATION.
L Perfeet-Uem adds a to ike Verb-stem,
Euphonic Rules,
t, h before s = p ; eg., icrib-sl = scrip-ffu
2. (WKxmd +8=x ; e. ^^ ciQg-€i=ciiix^L
[c» g, h, qn, are regarded as c-soonds.]
3. t-soond (d or t) before s is dropped ; e. g., claad-s-i=: claos-I.
«. m bf^ore s is either changed into b» or p is interposed (prem-s-is:
•pre^^t; oom-8-i=:comp-s-I).
Towritt,
To bind,
To carry ^
To cook,
To shut.
BCiib-o,
cing-o,
v€h-o,
c6qu-o,
sciib-€re,
cing-drd,
v6h-6r6,
c5qa-6r6,
C scrip-s-i
dand-o^ cland-SrS,
(scrib-s-i), 5»«^P-««»-
cinzl (cing-s-I), cinc-tum.
vexl (vch-s-i), vec-tflm.
ooxl (coqa-s-I), coc-tum.
w 1 J -\ Jclau-siSm.
( (claad-s-i), 5
An in the compounds is changed into A ; e.g., inclAdo, inclOddrS, in-
dflsl, indusiim, to shut in.
To give way, cSd-o, cdd-drd, cessi (ced-s-f), ces-s&n.
To scatter, sparg-o^ sparg-drS, J par-"- Sspar-siSm.
In the compounds a is changed into e; eg., aspergo, aspergdrb,
asper-s-i, aspersom, to besprinkle.
To adorn, cdm-o, cdm-drS, com-ps-i, com-p-tOm.
To press, pr6m-o^ prSm-Sre,
l^"^"' ., Jpres-sto.
i (prem-s-i), > *^
In the componnds 6 is changed into i ; eg., comprimo, compximfiri^
compress^ compressOm, to press together.
To carry, g6r-o, g6r-6r6, gess-I (g6r-s-I), ges-ttlm.
n. Petfeet-stem adAs u to the Verb-stem,
(a) Withoat change of Verb-stem.
Tonowrith,
ffl^
11^,
ti-n-f,
ii-r-tiim.
Totm,
c61a
c6l^r«,
cOl-u-i,
cfll-tiim.
To ask advice, oonsiU-o^
consm-6r6,
consfil-n-i,
consul-tiim.
To knead.
depso.
deps-€re,
deps-n-I,
deps-tfim.
To murmur.
frSm-o,
fr6m-€re,
. fir6m-n-^
frem-I-tum.
To groan.
gem-o^
g6m-«r6.
g6m-n-I,
gSm-i-tfim.
To grind,
m6l-o^
m6l-€r€,
mdl-u-I,
mdl-I-ttlm.
To conceal,
ocdil-o,
oocdl-SrS,
occfil-n-i.
occul-tiim.
To grind.
pins-Oi
pin8-«r«.
pins-a-I,
pins-i-tum.
To snatch,
rtlp-io,
rt^-firi,
rtp-u-I,
rap-ttUn*
To join to-
getker,
1 sfir-o,
•fSr-Bt^,
i«Ml.!,
ser-tfim.
Digitized by
Google
273 udT OF TKiBs, TBntu eonsvGATSon.
To weave.
tex-o,
UfX-fM, tex-^-J,
tez-t&n.
TotrembU,
trfmo,
trtm^rS, trim^-L
To vomit,
vdm-o^
(»> wail dupq;e of TertKrtera.
▼6m-X-tJiin.
To beget.
gigiw),
gign-«if , g«ii-n-i.
gfo-I^&ti.
To reap.
vato.
Bi6t«ri, mess-m-I,
mes-fftm.
To place.
p*n-o.
pto-€r6, pAi-u i.
pdft-i-tdm.
[For ooiqxyuids of cnmbSrt, lee 664, IL]
•nL Perfeet-ttem adds r or Iy to the Verh-stem.
(c) Adds T, aad leagtiieBt Sfiem-Towel if ahort
^*"^P?^^ J cenwv ceni-€r6, crft-v-I, crft-tum.
perceive, j
The perfect and rapine of cemo are fofond ooly in the compoandB
e. g^ dftcemo, dteemSrS, decrSvT, dScretfim, to decree.
To grow, creic-o, cresc-SrC, cr6-T-i, crS-tfim.
To smear, lin-o, Iln-€r&, Id-y-i, or U-v-i, H-tiim.
Toibunr, nosc-Or &06c-€r8, nft-v-I, n&-tmn.
So, abo, the oomponndf inter, ig, per, pr»-no8oo, have 6tI, dtom ; hot
cog, ag; praecog, reoog-nosco, have 6y!, ItOm f e. g., agndeco, agnoic-
.firO, agn^yri, agnitfim, to perceive*
To feed, paac-o^ pasc-SrS, pft-^-I, pas-tfink
To rest, qoiesC-o, qatesc-^rS, quiS-v-i, qnid-ttim.
To decide, scisc-o, scisc-erS, acl-y-l, sct-ittim.
To sow, s6r-o, sSr-^rS, B6-y4, Bi-tam.
The comfKnmds have the sapin* in itom -, e. g., oaoe^io, qoaaSiMt
conadyl, consMm, to plant.
To allow, tXxK), ^-^rS, if-v-I, Ikt^ftm.
To despise, apem-c), I]>em-Sr6, 8][>r6-y-l^ lpr§4<i]l!i.
To strew, ateniA ttem-ftr^ ltr*-T-i, strft-tim.
To become f
aceuetom- > raeic-o^ raesc-6r<(, sad-v-l, aaft-tdm.
^ s
(I) VmtocMtom addl It.
To<tMr»mo», arcesf-o, aicewiSrS, axYsess-ir-S, arcess-i-tihb.
In the fame manner, capesio, iSEu:esso, incesso, laceaso.
To seek, i
strive of- > p€t^ pSt-SrS, pSt-Iv-T, pSt-i-tttm.
To seek, qomt-o, qiMBi^rS, qa«i-lT-^ quBS-I-tfinL
The consponndfl change of the item into f ; e^g., oonqtinv cci^
qidriri, oonqniaiv^ oimqaisittev to eatan^ne.
Digitized by dOOQ IC
UST OF VEftBS, TOmD CXmilTOATIOir. 379
IV. Peffitt^itetn reduptktOts ^^Jlrti Coitiomnt6,
Some of these present Towel-changes, which most be carefolfy obseired.
.(a) "Wlien the first vcrtrel is i, o^ «, the fiiM; t oaumuB b ii tedaplica^ with
tiiat vowel ; (b) in other Terbs with e ; {c) the compoondfl of dSre, to give,
withi
(a) First V owd i, o^ or tu
To runt corr-o, carr-cr6, cfi-cnrr-i, car-sii^
Most of lihe compounds hare the perfect both With and witihdat thd
reduplication; eg., accorro, acdnrrSrS, aocnrri and accfictuii, ao-
cursmn, \o run to.
Toleafnt disc-o, . 4isc-6r6, dl-dic-L
Tlie bcnfipoondfl iSso r«daplicate; e. ^^ perdisdi^ fmdl^cS, «» liMhl
Toweighf pend-o, pend-^r^, p6-pend-t pen-^nm.
The componnds do not redaplicate ; e. g., appendd, append&rd, ap-
pencB, ftppensibn, to hang to.
To demand, posc^ posb^im pb-poBc-i.
The edJoe^oonds redoplldate ; e. g^, tftposcdrd, rAp^jpidsci, to StmutiM
back again.
Tojnickt pnng-Of pmig-fire^ pii-pfig-i, pnnc-tttm.
Co mpo tindii have pert pmnxL
To beat, tmid-o, timd-dr8, tfi-tftd-i, tui-siim.
Compouids have supine tusnm; e. g., contondfird, oontOsiim, to
crush.
gi) Other Verbs redi^Bcate with e,
TbftiO, e&d-o, c8d'6r&, cd-dd^, dft-diiin.
To cut, C8Bd-o, 0Ad-«r#f eS-oId^, isa-iidm.
The xotnpoands hav^ oidi, dstlnii e.g*, occldfo^ od^di; ooobijBik, IS^
Toting, dtai-o, cSn-Sr6» €d-cln-l, caitlfttiB.
The compounds have oIdqI ; c^^ ilcitei&Srft, sucdhui, to ting to.
To cheat, fall-o^ fall-&e, fg-fefl-i, fal-siliii.
Tobdtgi^ pfing-o, p(tt%i«i«, . ptt-l«fe^ puBhiSfs^
The compoonA hihre pingft, pSgi, paotdtti ; eg., cottipin^firS, cttoqpflglr
coxhpadtfim, to fatten togedt^.
par-s^im.
pftr-tOikL
To tpare, pa«M),
pa«>€r6,
pS-perc-I,
To bring fot0i,i^-io.
p«r^,
pS-pfir-i,
To drifts, p^n^H
peU*6r*,
p».p«-i
TotowX, ttag-o.
■ ■■H fUVy
te^-i,
Digitized by
Google
d74
UST OF VERBS, THIRD CONJUGATION.
The oo mp o an di hmve tingo, trngfeS, t|gl,
attigi, BXtmciAm, to reach.
e. g,, al
(<) OompcmadMetd*rs,Tpdv^ac^wmi,
TolUde.
ab^
abd-drt,
ab^d-i.
ab^dl-ttim.
To add.
ad^
■dd-drfi,
ad-did-I,
ad-^tAm.
To lay up,
oon-do,
oon-d-«r«
con-didi,
con-di-tdiii.
To believe.
crd-do»
crfid-«rfi.
cr6-dld-l.
cre-di-t&m.
Toturrender,
dd^o,
dSd-«T«,
de-dJdi,
d«-dl-tiim.
To publish.
6-do,
fid^rfi.
6-dIdI,
6-dt-tam.
To put in,
in-do.
iiid-«r«.
in^d-i.
in-<H-tdm.
To oppose.
ob^
obd-ex«.
obHiid-i,
ob-di-tiim.
To destroy.
per-do,
perd-firt,
per-dld-i,
per-^-tttm.
To betray,
prt^
pio-^d-i,
pro-dl-tftm.
To restore.
red-do,
redd-€i«,
red-did-i.
red-di-tdm.
To deliver.
trt-do.
trad-6rfi,
tra-didi,
tra-dX-tiini«
Tosdl,
▼en-do,
vend.€r6,
ven-did-i,
▼en-di-tiinL
V. Perfect-item lengthens the Stem-vowd of the Verb.
(c) Without Vowel-ehttigea.
6m-i,
eiiirtQin.
<M-I,
foi-siim.
08%
ffig-I-Wm.
fod-1.
fu-stim.
Ug-i.
lec-t&m.
To take, Sm-o, Sm-dr§,
CoD^xrandfl, oodmo, adXmA, eximd.
To dig, fM-io, f&d-dr^
Tojly, fiig-io, ffig-firt.
To pour, fond-o, fimd-dr^,
To read, l6g-o, l6g-6rfi,
The compounds with per, prae, re, and sab retain S ; e. g., peiidg6r6»
peilSgi, perlectdm, to read through ; bat those with col, de, e, se,
change 6 into i ; e.g., coUigdrS, collGgi, coUectfim, to coUect : three,
diUgo, I love; intelligo, / understand; neglSgo, I neglect, have
exi, ectdm ; e. g,, dUlgdrd, dilexi, dilectam.
To leave, linqa-o, linqa-Sr^, Hqa-I,
To burst, rom|>-o, ramp-Srfi, rdp-!.
To conquer, vinc-o, vinc-€r6, vic-i,
(p) With Vowetchange.
To drive, ftg-o, fig-^S, 6g-i,
Three of the compoonds retain ft, circomftgo, perigo, sfttttgo : two on-
dergo contraction, cdgo (con + Sgo), dego (de + igo): compoonds
with ab, amb, ad, ex, prod, sab, change & into i ; e. g., SbigftriS^
&b€gi, abacttim, to drive atoay.
To take, c&p-io, cSp-drS, cSp-i, cap-tiim.
All the compoands change S into T, and have sapine cept&n; & g^
mocSp'ISita, acc^pi, acceptiim, to receive.
Uc-tiim.
rap-tdm.
▼lo-tfim.
ac-ttim.
Digitized by
Google
LIST OF VERBS, THIRD CONJUGATION.
275
To make,
To do,
f ac-io,
fSc-«rfi,
fec-^
fac-tiim.
1. Compoands with Terbfl retain ft; e. ^., l&befic«r6, lib«f€<^ labe-
factiiin, to fpeaken.
2. Cknnpoimds with prepositioiiB change & into X; cg^ afficfird, aff edi;
affectiim, to affect.
To break, frang-o, frang-drd, frdg-i, firac-tdm.
CompooncLi change a into i ; e. ^., refringSr6, refr^g^ refractibn, U
break open.
To cast, jSc-io, j8c-Sr6, jee-!^ jao-tdm.
Compoands ab, ad, de, e, in, ob, re, tftuu, all change ft into h e,gn
ab|Ecftr6, abjed, abjectdm, to throw away.
VL The Perfect-stem presents the simple Verb^tem.
(a) Steins ending in tt or v.
Torrfuse,
abnn-o.
abna-€r6.
abna-L
To sharpen.
ftcao.
aca-€r6.
ficu-I,
acfl-tfim.
To show.
arga-o.
arga-fir6.
arga-i,
To agree.
congra-o,
congra-drd.
congro-i.
To put off,
exa-o,
exu-6r6.
exu-i,
extutiim.
Toputon,
indu-o.
mda-erS,
indu-i.
indd-ttim.
To imbue.
imba-o.
imba-erd.
imba-i.
imbd-ttLm.
To pay,
lu-o,
lu-firg,
lu-i.
Ifl-tiim.
To/ear,
m6ta-o,
meta^re.
mfita-i.
To lessen,
mlna-o,
jxunvL-iT^,
mTna-i,
minfl-tftm.
Tomsk,
ra-o.
ra-dr6.
ru-T,
rtt-tinL
To loose.
soly-o.
8olv.er6,
soiv-i.
solu-tvim.
TospU,
spa-o,
spu-€r6,
spuT,
spatfim.
To place,
stfttao.
stata-i,
statd-tftm.
To sneeze.
stema-o»
stema-di6.
stema-i,
stema-tftm.
To sew.
sa-o.
sa-«rft.
sn-T,
su-tum.
To give.
ti:lba-o,
trn>a-6T«,
trlba-i.
triba-tftm.
To roll.
Tolv-o,
TOlT-*rg.
Tolv-I,
volii-tum.
(Jb>) Consonant-stems.
To weigh.
append-o,
append-$r6.
append-i;
appen-ffim.
So, also, the other compounds of pendo.
To attend.
attend-o»
attend-8r«,
Attend-I,
attenniibik
So, also, the other compoands of tendo.
To dHnk,
brtw),
blb^rft*
bib-i.
Mbl-tum.
Toforge,
cud-o.
cAd-ftre,
cdd-I,
ofl-sflm.
To eat.
edo.
«d-€rS,
fid-i,
«-sftm.
To lick.
lamb-o.
lamb-ei«.
lamb4.
To chew.
mand-o.
mand-SrC,
mand'i,
man^flm.
To spread.
pandK),
pand-6r6,
pand-i.
paswriim.
Digitized by
Google
f 70 LIBT OF TBBB8, FOUIITH CONJlTGATIOlf.
To take, pr^eDd-o^ prShend-Sii, prSbend-i, prSheiMrifan.
ToMcraich, mOh-o, scib-^re, scib-i.
Todmb, feand-Oy scand-^rS, icnd-L leaiMttin.
Compoanda (a, e, do, oon, in) change ft into S ; ^. g^ aacendo.
Tasinkdownf ald-o, BSd-«r§, tld-I.
The oompoanda take the peril and aiq>ine from g(ide6 ; e. g,, oonal
d€r«, eonaddi, contest^ to wU togntker,
Tokiu, Btild^ atrld-M, 0liid-i .^
Totem, vert-o, Tert-«r6, veit-i, teivsim.
DeYvrlo, prsrerto, and r^rerto art alR> naed in Hm paaaire ftina aa
depoaeata) e. gn rtKecMr, Whrefli, reveraia, afim, Jtem iodfc.
ToirttfA, verr-o, Terr-«r«, rerr-% ver-sttof.
To pluck, yell-o, veU-Sre, vell-^ Yid-aOm.
Compoanda of cendA and fendd belong here, viz.,
To hum, incend-o, incend-toO, incend-l, inoen-attm.
To defend, dftfend-o, d«fend-«r«, defend-l, d«fen-flda.
(667.) VOITETH COWJlJaATIOH.
L Perfect-stem addsiv to ike Verb-Ueik,
{Ohs.) Thia daaa oontaina moat of the veiba of the fourth cot^jnga^ott;
tiie following alone haa a peculiar anpine :
Tolmry, adp^l-io, a6pdl-ire, a6p6l-!y-!, aSpnl-tftm.
n. Perfect'Stem adds u to the Verb-stem,
Todothe, imic-io, intfc-ir6, indc-u-i, fimic-tttBo.
Tooptt%, &pdr-io, ftp6r-xr^ ftpSr-a-i, Sper-ti&m.*
To cover, 5pdr-io, 5pSr-ir6, 5p6r-a-i, 5per-tdm.
To leap, afli-io, afl-trd, afil-u-i, aal-tOm.
Caaopoiutda change i ioto I; e. ^., dAlIird, dSalltd, dtenltOtt^ ift? Hscip
down.
m. Perfkt-stem adds Bio the Verb^steth.
To cram, farc-io^ faiO^rS, } ,!f " "* .» > farc-tum.
¥h6 cdmpbnnds dian^ k into e ; e. g., confercire, oonfers!, eon^n&lb,
to/Ulup,
Toprifp,
folc-io.
tolc-ire,
To draw.
hanr-io^
hanr-ire,
To decree,
aanc-io,
aanc-irfi.
l^ii), jfol-t<^
hana-tttm.
( han-B-i
\ (hanr-8-i),
kanx-i i^ 8anc-!-taih ^t^
(aanc-ff-i), ) Banc-tdm.
* T^p^nanonnda of par-j^ which begin with a yoweihave \v^ artdnH,
aa in ClfuiB ll. ; thoaa Begmning with a obnaonant li'ave i, ertfim, as m
Claas V.
Digitized by
Google
hmr OF IKiPONENT VEKBB, 277
Topaick, laic-io^ iarc-Iri, > J*'**^.") J»«f-tfiin.
To fed, sent-ia ■ent-irt, < , «*--\ Jien-ium.
Instead cif ittsentid, agsenliJ^, deponent is lODre oommon.
ToKSSgt:^ Ht^, l§p>1r«^ «ip-i^ M^Mttm
To bind, yino-io, vinc-ir6, } /vi*ys*S> /vino-tttm.
rV. Peifect-stem lengthens the SienHfowd.
Contains bat kHingle simple l^rtk
To come, vdn-io, vto-ire, vSn-i, Ten-tOm.
V. Perfect'Uem takes the simple Verh-stim,
Toaeeertcwi, coikp6r-io, compfir-Ir6, compdr-i, oomper^lffitt.*'
(S68.) DBPdim^ VEEBfib
vnuT c6ir.7iTeAttov.
TVexAori, hort-6r, hort-ftii, bort-tt-tts.
The deponents of the first ccn^jiigation are the inoft niuneioiA, "bt^ io^
Ibnned like hort$r, vrith it^ at&s.
SECOND CONJUGATION.
To acknowledge, Hkb-eSr, fS^eri, fas-siis.
The 46dMfii%nds make ffMBit, tesstLs ; e.g,, toatlMfr, connten, og»
tdms9L»,tovonfess: ^Mfiddthu no pfltrtielpfo.
ToW,
l!c^5r.
liceri.
Bc-it4s.
To heal.
mM-e6r,
mdd-en.
Todeservet
mdr-edr,
m6r-«r3.
m6r-I^ns.
TopUy,
misdr-efir,
vHafyt-m,
; miser-Jt-ns, ©r
1 miser-tiis.
To think,
r-efir.
r^ri.
rft-ttis.
To look upon.
ta^&V
ttt-iH;
; tu-it-fts, or
[tfl-tus.
Tofeair,
▼dr-e<^y
v«r-6ri.
v6r-It-iii.
tHIRl) CONJUOATlbN.
To devise.
comminisc-^r.
oomminiso4,
cammen-tfik
lajtamHoae,
to remem^/ has no
perfect.
Toobta^
«dipisc-6r,
ttdipisc-i,
idep^Mt.
Tohe^mti,
ddfetucfl^,
ddfetisc^
- ■, , -h.-r.
« lto« note, p. 276.
A
A
Digitized by
Google
278
LIST OF DEPONENT VERBBi
Toawaie,
expergiM-4r,
experguc-I,
expeirwMfii.
Toen^oy,
fra-te,
fira-i,
i frac-t&B aiu2
To perform.
fin»fir-«r,
fimg-i,
fanc-teLM.
Toprvceed,
grid-iftr,
grld-l
gres-iiSa.
; e,g^ aggrtdi, aggrewdfl, <a auaU
To he angry.
inae^,
frMO-L
TofaO,
Iftb^,
ltf)-i.
lap-tiis.
Toipeak,
Idqu^.
Idqa-i,
I6cil-ta«.
To die.
mte-iOr,
m5ri.
mor-tatis.
To obtain.
naxiciic-dr.
nancisc-i.
naC'tila.
To be bom,
Baflc-dr,
naic-v
n&tiu.
To lean upon.
''jm-t.«r.
nit-I,
< ni-sas, or
^nix-iU.
Toforget,
ObUvuc-«r,
oUiviic-i,
(d>li-tas.
To bargain.
piciflc^r.
piciac-I,
pac-tOfl.
Tofeed,
PMO^,
pMC-^
pas-toa.
Thii yerb ia the paaaiye ctf paaofird, to give food.
To mffer, pit-idr, piti,
Perpdtiar, peipeaatta, to endure, changei i into 6.
paa-sns.
(From plectA* to Unne.)
To embrace.
•mplect^.
amplecC-i,
amplez-iia.
compl0Ct-6r,
oomplect-]«
complex-iia.
To $et out.
pWfidac-dr,
pr6ficisc-i.
prdfec-tJia.
To complain.
qner-6T,
qu6r-I.
qaes-toa.
TogHn,
ring-«r,
ring-L
TofoUow,
Bfiqu-or,
Bfiqn-I.
adcd-tOs.
To revenge,
nldac-te.
nkiac-i,
ol-toa.
Touee,
tU>r,
uH
u-sos.
rOUKTH
OOHJUOATIOK.
Toauent,
a88ent-i5r,
auent-ui
aaaen-siis.
Toflatter,
blandidr,
Uandiri,
bland-itriia.
To try.
exp8r-i6r,
expSr-iri,
experttia.
To bestow money,
larg-iftr,
larg-M,
larg'it-Oa.
To lie.
ment-iOr,
mentiri,
ment-it-tia.
To measure.
ToSt-ioT,
mSt-iri,
men-aaa.
To move a mast.
xn6l-i6r,
mOl-M,
m6l-i^a8.
2'ou)aitforr ,.
opp&r-idr.
oppdr-M,
opper-toa. ,
To begin.
ordriSr,
ord-iri.
or-ada.
Digitized by
Google
INCHOATIVE AND IRRE6ULAE VERBS.
279
TontCf
To divide,
To possess
myself
To cast lots,
tess \
to-ifir,
ftr-iri,
ortilfl.
part-idr,
part-iri,
part-it-tw.
p5t-i5r,
pot-iri,
pdWt-tti.
8ort-i5r,
sortiri.
lort-it-tLk
(669.) INCHOATIVB VERBS.
Inchoatiyes are Terbs derived from noons, acyectiyes, or other verbi,
expressing a beginning or becoming of the act (H* state denoted by the
primitive. Their stems always end in sc, and they all follow the form of
the 3d coi^. ; e. g.,
From pner, boy, we have paerasc-dr6, to become a boy {again),
** m&tor-ds, ripe, we have mfttdresc-fire, to become ripe,
*' dorm-ir6, to sleep, we have obdormisc-dre, tofaU asleep,
(1.) It is enoogh to observe on those derived from adjectives and wmnM
that Ihey either haoe no perfect, or else'form it in uL
(53.) As to those derived £rom verbs,
(a) Most are from verbs in the second oo^jogation, and form their
perfect-stem by adding n to the stem, rejecting sc ; or, in other
words, their perfl-stem is the same as that of the simple verb firam
which they are derived ; e. g.,
To become gray, canesc-^r6 (canSrd), cann-L
To grow sour, acesc-drS (acdre), aca-L
{b) Those derived from verbs of the other coi^ogations take the pei^
fects of the simple verbs from which they are derived.
To grow old, invfiterasc-6r6 {inveterdrS), inveterftv-i, inveterft-tom.
Tocometolife,r^rMv>^T(i{mvirS), rSvix-i, rdvic-tnuh
To faU asleep, oh^ortojAC-^rli [dormxrS), obdomuv-i, obdomu-tam
11. niRBGULAIl VEEBS.*
(670.)
INFINITIVE MOOD.
Tenses for Incomplete Action,
yr went t^id Imperfect.
1. possfi, to be able.
2. veils, to betoilline.
3. noUS, to be unwilling,
4. mall^, to be more toMing,
5. 6d6r6, or essS, to eat,
6. ferrg, to bear.
7. fieri, to become.
8. fern, to be borne.
Tenses for Complete Action.
Peifect and Plupertect
potoissS, to have been able.
volnissS, to have been willing.
nOloissS, to have been unwiuing.
m&IoissS, to have been more willing.
ddissS, to have eaten.
tulissfi, to have borne, or suffered.
factum esse, to have been made, or
done.
Ifttdm essS, to have been borne.
* See note, next page.
Digitized by
Google
UtftSOITLAm TftAM.
(671.) INDICATIVE MOOD. [
PmESiNT, lam able, ifc
PKmrscT, /Aooe frem oUi^ 4c
l.poirtm,* pdtds, pdtert,
l.pdta-i, isti. It,
possam^ pdtettif, possnnt.
p6tu-imils, istfs, erontorerft.
2. v6W, vis, volt,
2.v61a-i, isti. it,
volQmiif, vultito, volirnt
volu-imfts, istis, enint<>r6rS.
3. n6ld, nonvifl, nanvolt,
3.B«la.i, isti, it.
ndldmtis, nonvaltis, ndlunt
ndlu-Imus, istis, erant<>rerd.
A.mM, mftvii, mftvoH,
4.inthi-i, is^ it.
mAl^muBf mAvultiS) xnftlant.
maln-Imnfl, istlDi, erontorere.
5. Sdd, edis or 6s, «dlt or est,
S.edi, isti. It,
Sdimtta, «cfi[ti!s<>rettirs; ddont.
ed-imtts, istis, eraiitor«i«.
6. f €rd, fers, fert.
6. tttl-i, isti, %
fdrimiis, fertis, fSnmt.
tal-imds, istis, emntorere.
7. fkctos feibn, es, est.
7.no,t fto, fit.
funds, fMs, flout.
factisomts, estis, sunt
8. f 6r6r, ferris or ferre ; fertur,
8. Ifttns sum, es, est.
iirttoAr, f&imii^ ftrtttitilr.
l&tisiimas, edtis, sttnt
PLUFXtrsoT, IhadHmMt^iic
l.pdt-firtm, «r§f, «rti|,
1. potn-enun, eiwB, gnl^
p6t-dr&mds, drfttite, 6rant
p6ta-6rftmiis, gr&tis, grant
'^. vdl-ehftm, «bAs, ebftt,
8. voiU-erun, eraB, grS^
▼61-gUmas, fibAtls, ebant
vdla-gramns, grAtis» 6nuit
3. n6l-6bam, Sbas, 6b&t,
3. nola-grSm, grfls, grSt,
ti6l-6b«iii«B, fibfttfe, ebant.
Holn-erfimus, 6rfiti!B, grant
4.iiiftl-«biii], dbfls, dbit,
4.ini]a-eriiii» gifts, grtt.
mftl-ebflmos, dbfttis, ebant
5. gd-ebftm, fibfts, abftt.
5. ed-gfjlm, eras, grtt
6d-ebamu», Sbtttis, €baiife.
ed-gramfii, er«&, grant
6.f6r-ebftm, dbis, abii,
6. tnl^rSm, graa, &&t
fdrdbAmds, ebatis, ebant
tolgrftnids, gratis, grant
7.fi-«aMtai, «b§a, ebtt
7. facttts gram, grfls, grilt.
n-ebftmus, ebfttis, ebant
fkctierftm&i,erAti», dralit
8. f«r-6bfir, 6barisor6, eb§tur.
8. Ifttns grfim, gras, grftt,
latigrtmds, grafiii, eradt
FUTUIOB,
lBk4MoxtnUb9*bU,ifC
lOuMotiomhavebtenable,^
i. pot-6r*, grfs, grit.
1. pdtu-grd, gris, gritt.
pot-drimtis, Sritis, Sront
pdtn-grimiis, gritis/ 6rint
2.T6l-am, es, «t.
^.Vdhi-ertJ, . gris, grit.
vdlemus, etis, ent
vdla-grimiLs, gritis, grint
3. n6l ftm, es, 6t,
3. nolu-grfi, gris, grit,
ndl-emas, etis, ent
neln-grimtis, gritis, grint
4.mal-am, es, 6t,
4. m$la-grd, gris, grit,
mal-emtis, etis, ent
mahi-grimus, gritis, grint
5.6d-ftm, es, et,
5.ed-6rd, eris, . erit,
ed-emfifl, Ids, ent
ed-grimiis, gritis, drint.
6.f6r-am, tfs, 6t,
6. tfil-gr«, gris, erit,
fer-emtts, etfs, ietit
tfil-grimtui, gritis, Srint
7. fi-am, 68, «t,
7. factas grfi, gris. giit^
factigrimus, 6««8, grint
fi-emus, etfs, ent
8. fer-ftr, eris or erg, etfir,
8.1atiisgr«, gris, grit,
f6r-6mtlr, gminl, enttlr.
lattgrimfis, gritis, grint
*As maay of these verbs areneaify r elated to each other, it seems nn-
Beeeasafy to -separate tiieirftnrms of inftection. TBie comsBpoildent awii^
oers will be sufficient direction kk tflusing tSftc several tenses of each verb,
▼owto- S^'JiSr!!* •^^.fi^®'^"^ "^* (24, o), has i long throughoat, btfim
Digitized by
Google
IftKBGULAE YIRBB.
281
(672.) IHPERATIYS MOOD.
NoTK."PoMtim, volo, ituUo, hare no imperative mood. U
3. ndli, or ndKtd, be thou unwUinff.
7. f i, or fitd, become thou. H
ndUtg, or noKtdtg, be ye, ^e.
f itft, or f itotft : 3. f inntft.
5. Add, 6ditd, or H, estd, ai< Mou.
8. f errft, or fertftr, be thou borne.
editd, ddftotSi 3. edtmtd.
fftrioani, or fftrixnindr: 3. fftron-
6. f 6r, <>r fertd, betxr thou.
t6t.
ferW, or fertdW : 3. f finmtd.
(673.) StrBJUHCTITE MOOD. ||
PSBTBCT, I may have been able, ifO.
1. poBS-Im, ig, it,
l.pftta-£nm, ftria, ftrit,
poss-imtii, itft, int.
pdttL-ftr&ntbi, ftiitSi, ftrint
2. v6l-im, !g, It,
2.T6ln-6rim, ftria, ftrit,
vftln-ftrimfia, ftrltlil, ftrint
▼a-imfts, itii, int
3. nOWm, is, it,
3. nftln-ftrim, ftria. ftrit,
ndliiftrimikr, ftritft, ftrint
ndl-iiiiue, itite, int.
4. mftl-fctt, i«, it,
4. mfiln-ftrim, ftria, ftrit,
mala-ftrimftt, ftriOb, ftrint
mftl-fiEnofl, itifs, ittt
5. dd.&m, fts, ftt,
ed-flmihi, fttif, ant
5. ftd-ftrim, ftria, ftrit.
ftd-ftrimtbl, ftritlii, ftrint
e.fSr-fim, fts, &t,
6. tdl-ftrim, ftria, ftrit.
f er-Am&i, ttk> ant
tdl-ftrimiia, ftritia, ftrint
7.fi-tai, «s, tt,
7. factoa aim, aia, ait.
fiamos, fttis, ant
factiaimaa, ' aitia, aint
8. f 6r-«r, ftris or flrB, fttfir,
8. l&tda sim, aia, fiit,
f6r-4mur, aminl, antttr.
l&ti simua, aitib, sint
IMPXBFXOT, Imight be able, ire.
Plupsbf., Imight have been able, 4c
l.P08S-«m, fie, 6t
Lpftta-issftm, iaaea, iaaftt.
pos8-€mili, etiOi, ent
pdtaiaaftmoa, iaafttia, iaaent
2.vdi.^m, «(r, ftt,
2. T^UQ-iaaftm, iaaea, iasftt,
vell-«mii8, «tls, ent
vola-issftmiis, iaaetia, issent
3. noll-«m, fts, ftt,
3. nola-issftm, iasfta, issftt.
noll-ftm&i, fttis, ent
ndla-isaftmfla, iaaetiEa, iaaent. ,
4. mall-ftm, fta, ftt,
4. mftlti-iaaftm, issfta, issftt.
mall-ftmila, fttis, ent
5. ftdftr-ftmor esaftm ; ftf , ftt.
5. ftdiasftm, iasfta, issftt.
ftdftr-ftmufl^ fttiDi, ent.
ftd.iasemiis, issetiOi, issent
6. ferr-ftm. fta, ftt.
6. tol-issftm, issfts, issftt.
ferr-ftmiia, etib, ent
tOl-issftmiSs, isset^s, issent
7.fi6r-ftm, fta, ftt.
7. factcis essftm, esses, essftt,
fiftr-ftm&h etite, ent.
fact! essftmfls, essetifs, essent
8. ferr-ftr, ftria or ftrft, fttfir.
8. l&tns essftm, essfts, essftt.
ferr-emdr, ftn^ou, entdr.
Iftliessemds, eaae^ eaaent
(674.) GXRUNDS. |
2. Tftlendi, vDlendO, volendtUQ, of I
4. milendl, malendd, malendttm.
" " " moremlUng.
inert i» eeOiing, to eat
6. fftrendi, fftrendd, ft^enddm, qfbt
taring, vn bearing, to bear.
(675.) nxm
tnta.
Accusative. 5. ftanm, to eat. 1
Ablative, ftsfl, to be eaten^ to eat, ;
€,Uam,tobear, \
IfttA, to be borne.
A a2
Digitized by
Google
282 DEFECTIVE VERBS.
(676.) PARTICIPLES.
I
Active. 1. potent, being abie.
2. vdlens, " unUinf^.
3. ndlenf, " unwiUinr.
4. mtleiis, *' more willing.
5. ddens, eating. 6sAnu, about to eoL
6. f Srens, beanng. latdras, about to bear*
7. fi&cieDdds, to be made or i<me.
8. ferendOa, to be borne.
Paeeive. 7. facttis, ^'«i<' or having been made or done.
8. lAtOs, 6etn^ (»* having been borne or enffiered.
(677.) Bo, I go.
E6, 1 go, is coiyagated like otuiio, except in the following tenaes :
8iugal«r. FhiraL
Imp. Ind. Pre*, ed, is, It ImOs, itlM, eont
Pott. Ib&m, Ibas, Xbftt ibftmos, ib§tiuB, ibanL
Fut. ib6, iMs, ibit ibimfis, ihiGB, ibnnt
Imperative. I, or itd. it6, or itdtd. 3. enntd.
Imp. Pot. Pre*, eftm, eas, efit. e&miis, efttito, eant.
Gerundt. eondi, evmdO, enndtbn.
Particips. Pre*, iens (jg^^n. eontiCs), going. Fut. itOros, about to go.
Supines. !tam, Itii.
Bern. In Uke manner, the compounds of eo are formed: also, queo, to be
able, and nSqneo, to he unable ; except that these two hare no baper-
. atire mood or gemnds.
J
12. DEPBCnVE VBB3S
(678.) Are those which have only some particular tenses and moods ;
M, aio, / Bay ; anslm, / dare ; avd, hail ! &c
(1.) Aio, I say.
==:
Ind. Pres.
Imperfect.
Imperative.
Subj. Pres,
Participle.
Singolar. PlareL
aio. &is, ftit
ai-ebam, fib&s, dbU. fibamiis, Sb&tis,
§t
ftias, ftlSt
•iens.
§innt
«bant
iiant
(2.) Axiaim,! dare. ||
Ind. Pres.
auslm, ausls, aoslt
ansint ||
{3.)Av6,haa/ II
Imperative.
Infinitive.
ftvS, or ftveto. ivitd, or tvdtotS.
&vdr«.
(4.) SalY6, Ood save you 1 \
Imperative.
Infinitive.
Ind. Fut.
salve, or salvetd. salvetS, or
salvfire.
■alvebls.
salvetdte.
Digitized by
Google
IMPERSONAL VERBS.
283
(5.) C&do, give me.
Imperative.
Singular.
C6d6.
Plural
cd^te.
(6.) Faxo, or faxim {{or faciam), I wiU or
may doit.
Ind. Pres.
fax-o, or fax-Im, is, It. imds,
itis.
int.
(7.) axuBs6,Ipray. ||
Ind. Pres.
Infinitive.
Particijde.
qV8Bs-d, is, rt ilmiis.
qaaes6r6.
quaesens.
(8.) Inqufim, iTT Inquid, / «ay. {
Imjjf.Ind,Pre8,vaq^A6tOrimt !s, it fains.
Past. inqniebat.
Put. mqavU, inqaidt
Perf. Ind. Pres. ioquisti.
I Imperative, inqad, inqmtd.
II Participle. inqoions.
inqi^td.
innt
inmiie-
[bant.
(9.) These verbs,
N6v-i, I know;
MSmin-i, I remember ;
Coep-i, / begin ;
Od-I, I hate,
have file forma of flie perfect tenses combined with the meanings of the
imperfect Nosco, the present of nOvi, is in nse, and denotes to learnt
whence ndvl expresses the actual knowledge which is the result of
past learning.
f^'
isti, &c. {Pres.)
N6v-
6r«m,
firfts, kc. {Past.)
Memih-
6rfl,
6ris, &c. {Fut.)
6rls. &:c. Sul^. Pres.)
CcBp-
firim,
Od-
issdm,
issd,
issds, 6cc. {Sulfj. Past.)
{Infinitive.)
Mementd, mement6tg.
{Imperative.)
13. IMPERSONAL VBitBS
(679.) Are those which have no subject, and take the pnmonn it before
tiiem in English ; e. ^., plait, a^ rains.
1. Lnpersonals never used personally.
Vbkt, Ubalt, it pleases.
llcfit, licuit, or > one nu ^ .
Ucltom est, litis lawful.
*ntfs6r6t, one pities.
*plg6t, it grieves {one).
*pcBnIt6t poenTtnit it repents.
rfifert, it concerns.
* Those marked * take aec. of person and gen. of the thing (or object of
tbefeeUng).
Digitized by
Google
284
IMPBESONAL YB&BS.
f . Impexionali lo me tim es uted personally m tiiird penon iiingqliir or
plnraL
'^^ 1*%*^-
]
gnmdinit,
loceftclt.
U kails,
ii grows lifflU,
ningTt, U snows.
plnit, U rains.
tdkiAt, it thunders.
▼etpgrticft^ U grows dark.
3. Penonal Terbf med
golar.
ii imperaoiiili in Uuid penon sui>
acctdit, it happens.
fit.
it happens,
it concerns.
accddlt,*^ U is added.
interest.
appirtt, it amaeats.
attibet, it belongs iih
jivit,
istst,
it is pleasant,
i U is uniHumn, eoH-
} cealed.
consttt. i^^*!f!!3'
^^ ^ •/ M agreed upon.
HquftlV
it is clear.
P«et,
it is plain, open.
oontingit, it kaj^ens.
pifiodt,
it pleases {Tft$okf^,
oonvenit, ii suits, agrees.
d^ectit» Uisddti^upid.
prwstat,
rett»,
it abetter,
it remains.
dSc^t, it is becoming.
deddcSt,. it is unbecoming.
■diet.
iiM>UM^
evSidt, it turns out.
sttt,
it is resolved.
expddit, it is expedient.
siiffictt.
it suffices.
(Dhaveleisurt.
ezc!dit,t it has escaped m/e.
v«c«t,
Rem. Theie may be nied in the different temei of in^o. Mid iol^
4. The tfaiid |>enon lingalar bf nnny intraiiii^ft verbi il oied iii*^
personally in the passive; e. g., onrrlttlr, they run (it il ran bf
tliem); png^nfttttm est. they fought fjt was ftmght by them).
Those which govern the dative, govern it alio in the in^rsonal
form; e.^.. /am ertrtedy ml hi invIdetQr.
*AccedIt <{Uo6. {or ^t)^=i moreover.
ft. e.. dd mSmdrii e:t.cldilt=iit has slipped from my memory— 4$
fbrgoUen,
Digitized by
Google
§7, ADVERB.
Thu Mdyexk gvaMes a verb, ^joctive, or another adverb.
'^ I. Derivaiiv$ Aiocrhs,
(680.) Derwativ^ ad^oerba [a] 9x9 nearly all forqaed ftom adjectipM or
parUcipUf, by adding 6 or 1 1 fi r to their stems :
1. Add d to stem of adjectives in 4 s, i, tl m ; e. g.^
clar-tls, t2ZtM^runM. cltr-^tiUiLstriously.
Rem. BdntLs makes b 41 ntt,«0s2l; andmfiltls (6a<Z) ; 'm ft 1 6, hadXy.
AH others end in d {}ong),
8. Add It 4 r to the stem of adjectives of 2d or 3d class ; e. g.,
hv^Y 'In, brief. hr^Y-it^T, briejly,
f 6 r o X (feroc-s), JU^. f d r 5 c - ! 1 6 r, fiercdy.
Mem. 1. Qibose which end in ns do not take the connecting vowel I;
a.r'»
prtidens, ^^ruiml. ^^rtden-t (ir, prudently.
2. Anda^, bold, makes aTjidac-tdr, boldly,
{b) A few are fonned fiom nomis, by adding tus or tim to the stem
by means of a connectmg vowel ; e. g,,
«0|l-4m, Aeoven. oafl-l-ttB,flnom heaven.
fund- 1§, bottom, {und-l-tts,from the bottom, totally.
gre9L(greg-0),^f^. gr$g-&-tln]» (jr^^f.
(c) Cases of adjectives, especially in the neuter, are often nsed as ad*
verbs; e. g., dulc6, tweetly, ftilB 6, falsely, &c.
II. Primitive Adverbe,
(681.) Primitioe adverbs are such as cannot conveniently be classed
■niQOg the derivatives above mentioned. The most common are arranged
io tbe following lists :
Digitized by
Google
286
ADVEKB8.
1. ADTSRBS OP PLACS (firofold).
(1.) In a Place.
Idblf
hie,
ilHc,
lUtic,
liht
intdc,
there, where you are,
wiihin.
wiihout.
AbiqoS,
nasqaiaa,
lUciibt
iUbi,
Ablyif,
everw9Met9»
nowhere.
somewhere.
eUewhere.
{anywhere {you
tn the $ame ptaee.
(8.) To a Placebo, ue).
qnftf
jhdc,
ifltflc,
intrO,
whither?
thitha-,
{ thither, to where you
\ are,
to within.
fteis,
9X\6,
allaod,
eMSnUf
towithouL
to that place,
to anot^placA
to the same place.
(3.) Towards a Place,
qoonmxi,
veraiii,
soraiiin,
deoriiim.
whitherward T
towards,
upwaird,
downward.
rStroraiim, backward.
dextroniini, to the right hand,
sunsteanijan, to the Igl hand.
(4.) From a Place— (ne, nde).
hinc,
illic,
istinc,
indS,
whence?
hence.
thence.
[ thence, from where
\ you are,
thence.
aliondS,
iUcondS,
sIcoDdd,
supemS,
imemS,
from dsewhere,
from some place,
^from any place,
on both sides,
from above,
frombdow.
(5.) Through or by a Place.
qut?
hac,
which way t
this way,
that way.
istfto,
that way, by you,
another way.
Digitized by
Google
"V
ADVERBS.
2. ADVERBS OF TIME (thr^
(1.) Being in time, either.
■ J ■ \ *>i
nimc,
hddid,
time,
turn,
hfirf,
dddum,
pnddm,
pridie,
nupdr,
jamjam,
mox,
statim,
1. Present,
now.
to-day.
9. Pa««.
Ithen.
> heretofore.
the day before,
lately.
3. Future,
{Very Near.)
*> j^resently,
> tmmeddatcly.
J by-and-by.
protinos,
mico,
cr&s,
postridie,
perendie,
nondrun,
qaando 7
fdiquandd,
nonnaiiquSiD
interdom,
sempdr,
nnnqaSm,
intSrim,
intSreft,
qaotidid.
instantly,
straightway.
(Remote.)
UMnorrow.
the day after,
two days hence,
not yet.
Indefinite,
when?
> sometimes.
always,
never.
\ in the mean time.
daily.
lamdiA?
qaai
dill,
tamdid,
how long?
long.
so long.
(2.) Continuance of Time.
jamdin, ^
jamddddm, > long ago.
jampridSm, }
(3.) Vicissitude, or Rqoetition of Time.
qadtiSs 7
■aepd,
t6tids,
a]i<p5tids,
vicuslm,
itdrfim,
1. Ind^nite,
how often?
often,
so of ten.
for several times,
oy turns,
again,
a second time.
snbindd, immediately after.
identiddm, several times.
2. Definite, or in Number,
8?m£I, once,
bis, twice,
t6r, thrice.
qaatSr, four times.
3. ADTERBS OF ORDER.
indS, tfien. deinceps, successively, primo,* -iiin,t first.
deindS, thereafter. d§imd, anew, secandd,t secondly.)
dehinc, henc^orth. denlquS, finally, &c.
porr6, moreover. (poetr6m6,t lastly.
4. ADVERBS OF QUALITY, MANNER, &C.
Xded,
SO, and therefore.
nempS, truly.
adrnddiim, very, greatly.
nimitm, too much.
in.
whether? or else?
n6n, not.
CAT,
"^tnf^
niim ? whether ?
dSmdniy
omnm5, at all, in general
6tiam,
Itkewtse, yes.
fere.
almost.
aitiuB, enough.
8lc, so, thus.
haad,
not.
immd.
yes, truly,
so, thus.
BcilicSt, namely.
TldeKdtt, namely.
vix, scarcay.
mftgls.
more.
»*' .
not.
\
• Prime = at first', primiim ^ first, t« the first place.
t These faU uider (680, c).
Digitized by
Google
§ 8. PREPOSITION.
(€82.) 1. pBXPQfiTiOHf gorerning tlie ooeuMtftpe**
Ants, ftpftd, &4, adreniii,
CiFcfiiBy ciici, atrft, oil,
Brgt» contra, intfir, extri,
Infrt, intrS, jaxU, 6b,
P6n&B, pdnfi, pott, and pnstdiv
PrdpS, propter, p6r, sScandfim,
SAprft, veniis, oltrl, tram.
[V eriiia is placed txfiter the noon whiish it gorcms.]
8. QoTernlog the ablative:
Absqad, i, 8b, aba, and de.
06rtiii» dim, cQm, ex, and A.
Tjlteiilff, ibie, pr6, and pre.
3. GoTerning bodi aceutatioe and qhUOwet
Id, flftb, adpSr, fiibtfir
Digitized by
Google
§ 9. CONJUNCTION.
(683.) Conjunctions connect words and sentences. They may be di-
vided into tiie following classes :
L Copttlative, which simply unite sentences together (and) : they ar«
dt, atqnd or ac, qa6, neqad or njlc, necnon, dtiftm, qa5-
qu6, with the adverbials itfim and Itidfim.
II. Ditjuncttve, which connect unlike propositions (or) : they are aat»
vSl, the suffix vS, and si vd or seu; (either — or): aut — aut^vdl—
v61; (whether — or): siv6 — siv6.
III. Comparative (as, like, as if, Sec): they are fit, sicfit, vfilfit,
profit, cen, quftm, tamqudm, quftst utsi, acsi, together
with &c and atqu^, when they mean as.
JV, Adversative, expressing opposition of thought (but) : they are sSd,
autSm, vdrd, &t and its compounds, tftmSn (and its compounds
with at sed and verum), and ceterum.
V. Concessive, expr^siug something granted (although, even if) : they
are etsi, etiamsi, t&metsi, quamqu&m, quamvis, quan-
tumvis, quamlibSt, iTc^t, with fit and quum, when they
mean although.
VT. Conditional, expressing a condition (if, if only, if but) : they are
si, sin, ni or nisi, simdd5, dummodo, mddone, and some
times d u m and m 6 d 5 used alone.
Vn. Conclusive, expressing a concltision or inference (therefore) : they
are ergo, igitfir, Itftque, e6, ided, idcircG, proindS, prop-
tSrefl, and the relatives (wherefore) quaproptSr, quar€, qua-
mobrSm, quocircft, unde.
Vin. Causal, expressing a cause or reason (for, became): nftm»
namqud, Snlm, dtSnim, quift, qu6d, qu5niftm, quippi,
quum, quandd, quanddquidSm, siquiddm.
IX. Final, expressing a purpose or aim (in order that, in order that
not): fit or fiti, quo, ng, utne, ngv6, neu, quin, quftml-
nfis.
X. Temporal, expressing a relation of time (when, as soon as, after
that, just as): quum, fit, fib!, postquftm, antfiqufim, pri*
usquim, quandd, simfil, simfiUc, dfim, usqufi dfinv'^d-
n6c, quoftd.
XL Jnterrogaiive, used in asking questions: nfim, utrttm, ftn. nS
(MiffisO.
Bb
Digitized by
Google
§ 10. INTERJECTION.
(684.) Ihterjxctiors are timply signi of emotion.
1 •»-
oA/
YOm,
hem! howl
OMMMf/
6h,
huzza 1
ohl dUul
eocAm,
teekimf
pip«,
O strange 1 good 1
eO,
lof
pro^
abul
hei,hefl.
alatl
v»,
woe!
tA.
Orare!
Digitized by
Google
PART IV.
SUMMARY OF SYNTAX.
Digitized by
Google
Digitized by
Google
SYNTAX.
INTRODUCTION.
(685.) A proposition u a thouglit expressed in words i eg., the rose
hlooms ; the rose is beautiful,
(686.) A simple sentence consists of a single pn>posit4on ; e. g., the mes-
tenger was sent ; the svnfl messenger arrived.
(687.) A compound sentence is one made up of two or more propositions ;
e. gt tihe messenger, wJio had been sent, arrived.
(688.) Stntax treats of the use of words in the formation of sentences,
and of the relation of sentences to each other. We speak first,
PART I.
OF SIMPLE SENTENCES.
I. SUBJECT AND PREDICATE.
^ 1. Definition of Subject and Predicate.
(689.) Every sentence (c g., the eagle JUes) consists of two parts, the
eubject (e. g., eagle) and the predicate {e. g.,JUes).
(a) The subject is that of which anything is declared, and is generally (1)
a noun, or (2) some word nsed instead of a noon.
1. The eagle flies. Here the nonn eagle is tiie subject.
2. To err \m human. Here the infinitive to err is used as a noon,
and fiarms the subject.
(b) The predicate is that which is declared of the subject, and is gener-
ally either (1) a verb, (2) an adjective or participle, or (3) a noun, con-
nected with the subject by some form of the verb to be.
1. The eagle ^tes. Here the verb^iies is the predicate.
Si. To err is human. Here the adjective human is the predicate.
3. John is a man. Here the noun man is the predicate.
^ 2. Agreement.
(690.) Rule I. The verb of the predicate agrees with the
subject in number and person.
The trees are green. I Arbores virent.
Art thou happy ? I Esne tubeatus?
Rem. 1. If the snbj. consists of two or more singular nouns denoting
persons, the verb is generally in the plural
Bb3
Digitized by
Google
294 SUBJECT AND PREDICATE.
8. A eoBsetwe noon fometimet baf a plonl rerb.
The crowd ru$ket, \ Torba rannt.
[This coDitmctkHi ii not xued by Cicero, and seldoiii, if at all, by
Cmar.]
3. A phiral verb is sometimQa iwed with uterqae and qniaqne.
Eatk cf tkem leads his army oat i Uterqoe eonim ex castris exercitom
of the camp. I edmoniit.
4. The verb agrees with the first person rather than the second ; the
second rather than the third.
If yoK and Tollia arv im22, Cicero I Si ta et ToIUa raletis, ego et
•ndlarevfdL I Cicero Tale mas.
(691.) An adjective may stand eidier
(1.) As predicate ; e./^.» the man is happy;
(2.) As modifying the subject ; e, g., the good man is happy;
(3.) As modifying the predicate ; e. g., the good n^an is a hippy man.
In either cMe we have
Rule II. Adjectiyes agree with the nouns to which they
refer in gender, number, and case.
[This role api^ies to all adjectives, pronoans, and participles.]
Rtm, If there be two or more noons denoting person$t the most wor-
thy* gender prevails ; \lthingSt the neater is osed.
My father and mother are dead, I Pater mihi et mater mo rtai sont.
Labour and enjoyment are united, I Labor volaptasqae jancta sont.
(692.) Rule III. If the predicate be a noun, it takes the
case of the subject.
ffwma woe muM king. | Noma rex oreabator.
^ 3. Apposition.
(693.) A noon may stand
(a) In the sal:^ect» denoting (ih« same person or thiiig with the snb-
ject-noun ; e. g.t the general, a brave man, led the army.
[b) In the predicate, denoting the same person or thing with 'a noon
in the predicate ; e. g,, we have sent the consol, a brave m/in.
Noons thos expressing the same person or thing, whether in the sob-
ject or predicate, are said to be in apposition with each other ; and in
either case we have
Rule IV. Nouns in apposition with iMich other agree in
case.
. * The moBcuUne is said to be more wordiy than the fminine; the/an-
tntne than the nacter. ^ ./ j
Digitized by VjOOQIC
GENITIVE CASE. 205
The commander, a brave man, led
the army.
We sent the consult a brave man.
Imp era tor, vir fortif, exerci-
tam dnxit.
Consalem, Tiram fortem, mifli-
mus.
Rem. 1. A ooiin in appoiition with two or more Domn if oooamonly
pot in the pluraL
M. Antony and C. Crauoi, tr^ I tL Antomu, C. Cnuuns, tribnni
unes of the people. | plebis.
2. A noun in apposition with the name of a town may be pat in the
ablative, with or without the preposition in.
At Rome, the chief rt^y of Italy. | RomsB, (in) prima urbe Italisa.
II. USE OF CASKS. ^
^ 4. Nominative.
(694.) SubjectmomincUive. — ^The subject of a proposition takes the nom-
inative case, and is called the subject-nominative.
(2.) Predicate-nominative. — The predicate-nominative (692) is always
connected with the subject by esse, to be, or Ktrnta verb expressing aa
incomplete idea.
Item. Of this class of verbs are to appear^ ap par ere, videri; to
become, fieri, evadere, existere; to be named, dici, ap-
pellari,nominari; to be esteemed, existimari, haberi,&c.
Ariovistus was called king by the Ariovistus a lenata rex appel-
eenate, \ latus est.
^ 5. Genitive.
(695.) Rule V. The genitive answers the questions %oh4>8e 7
of whom? of what? e.g.,, the love of glory ^ amor glorie;
Cicero'' 8 orations^ Ciceronis orationes.
Rem. The genitive is subjective when it denotes that which does
something, or to which a thing belongs ; e. g., Ciceronis oratio-
nes. It is olgective when it denotes that which is affected by the
action or feeling spoken of; e. g., amor glorias : ihe taking of the
town, expugnatio urbis.
(696.) Rule VI. Oenitive of Quality, — The genitive (with
an adjective, or pronoun of quality, number, &c.) is used to ex-
press the quality of a thing.
A man of great bravery. I Vir magnsB virtutis.
A ditch of fifteen feet. I Fossa quindecim pedum.
Rem. 1. The ablative is also used in the same way (724).
2. If the two nouns are connected, not immediately, but by another
part of speech, the accusative must be used: fi>ssi^ quindecim
pedes lata.
Digitized by
Google
296 GENITIVE GA8E.
(697.) Rule VII. Partitive-genitive, — The geoitive is used
to express the whole of which anything is a part. Hence,
(a) With oompurativef and snperlatiTei :
The more learned of the two broth-
ers*
The most learned of the Romans.
Doctiorfratram dnorum.
DoctiMimiu Romanorum.
(b) With all words expressing number or quantity, whether adjectives,
pronouns, numerals, or adverhs ; e. g., many cf the soldiers, m a 1 1 i
militam; which of you 1 quis TestrnmT the last of the Romans,
altimas B/Omanornm; enough eloquence, satis eloquentis;
where ^^ny^hiX^Kct) of the world 1 nbinam gentium?
Rem. This role includes the neuters tantum, quantum, ali-
quantum, quid, aliquid, &c.
(698.) Rule VIII. Genitive of Menial Affeed&m The
genitive is used with verbs and adjectives expressing certain
operations of the mind or feelings, to denote the object thereof.
(a) Operations of the mind.
1. Adjectives of knowledge and ignorance, remembering and/oyv
getting, certainty and doubt.
Beneficii memcn*.
B ventus befUi non erat ignanis.
Mindful of a kindness.
He was not ignorant of the re-
sult of the war.
2. Verbs of remembering and forgetting (recordor, memini, reminis*
cor, obliviscor).
Tb remember past events.
He exhorts the ^duans to for-
get their disputes.
Meminisse proeteritorum.
Cohortatur ^duos ut controver-
si arum obUviscantur.
[The thing remembered is often put in the accusative.]
{b) Operations of the feelings,
1. Adjectives expressing desire or averston, patience or impeUienee^
appetite or passion. Participles used as adjectives fall under this
rule.
Desirous of praise. I Avidus 1 a u d i s.
A lover of {^one loving) virtue, I Amans virtutis.
2. Verbs.
(a) Those expressing pity, viz., miseresco, misereor.
I pity the unfortunate. \ Miseresco infeliciuoa.
{b) The impersonals pudet, piget, pcdnitet, tttdet, miseret (shmmi^
August, repentance, loathing, pity).
Digitized by
Google
GENITIVE pASE. 297.
J am not only sorry for my fol-
ly , but ashamed of it.
1 am toeary of my life.
Me non Boltim posnitet f tnlti-
t i 83 mese, led etiam p n d e t.
Me tasdet vitas.
Rem, 1. Observe that the person feeling is expressed by the accusa-
tive.
2. The cause of feeling may be a verb, or part of a sentence, instead
of a noon in the genitive.
/ am not sorry (= it does not re- 1 Non posnitet me vixisse*
pent me) that I have lived. \
(699.) Rule IX. Genitive of Participation. — The genitive
is used with adjectives and participles expressing (1) plenty or
wantj (2) power or weaknessj (3) sharing or its opposite, (4)
likeness or unlikeness*
(1.) Full of wrath.
(2.) Master of on^s faculties.
(3 ) He is like his brother.
(4.) Man is a sharer of reason.
Plenos ircB.
Compos mentis.
Similis est fr atria.
Homo particeps est rationis.
Hem. 1. Those o£ plenty and want take also ablative (716, B. 4).
^ 2. Those of likeness and unlikeness take also the dative (704, 4).
(700.) Rule X. Genitive of Value, — The genitive of cer-
tain adjectives is used with verbs of valuing, esteeming, buying,
selling, &c., to denote the price or value.
TTie poor man estimates riches at I Pauper divitias magni asstimat.
a great value. I
Rem. 1. Snch genitives are magni, permagni, plaris, maximi,
minoris, and others.
2. If the price be a noxm, tiie ablative is used (719). Also, the
ablatives magno, permagno, plnrimo, parvo, minimo, nihi<
lo, are often used.
(701.) Rule XI. Genitive of Crime, — The genitive is used
with verbs of accusing, condemning, acquitting, 6cc., to denote
the crime or offence charged.
Proditionis accosare.
Praetor reun criminis absolvit
To accrue of treachery.
The judge acquitted the prisoner
of the crime.
(702.) Rule XII. Genitive of Property, — The genitive is
used widi esse to denote (1) that to which something belongs ;
(2) that to which sometiiing is peculiar.
(1.) This book belongs to my father. 1 Hie liber est mei patris.
(2.) It is peculiar to the brave to I Fortium est dolorem fbrtiter pati.
endure pain ipOh fortitude. \
Digitized by
Google
2M
OATIVB CA0S*
» Che fefltfiraig ooostractiMif t
Iti
cf a wiie man ^ eit lapientifl.
Btm. 1. UBdartiiislaathMd<
tlie property
peealiarity
doty
marii
ofaancterietio
i. Obeerre earefiiUy, tiiat iDStead of the gen^ye of the penonal pro-
noanf (mei, toi. &c.), the neuter poMewiTef (mennv tanm,
■mum, not tram, Teitrnm) are used; €.g^it i* my duty, &c.;
eit menm. Sec
(703.) Rdle XIII. The gemtive is used with the impersonal
interest {it concerns), to express the person concerned.
It concern* my brother. I Mei fratrii interest
It concerns the ttate. \ Reipnblicas interest
Rem. Bnt imtead of the genitiTes of the personal pronouns (mei,
tni, Jtc.), the posfessive forms m e a, to a, &c., are always used ;
and with them the impersonal refert has the same force as in-
terest
It concerns you.
It is of great importance to me to
seeyou.
Tna interest (not tni interest).
Magni me a refert nt te videam.
^ 6. Dative.
(704.) Rule XIV. The dative case is used to expnM the
person or thing to or far whom (or which), to or fir whose advan^
tage or disadvantage anything is done or tends.
^^ Abnost evezy instance in which the dative occurs may be ex-
plained by a proper application of this role. For the sake of foller
illustration, however, we add the following heads :
(1.) Dative of Remote Object. — ^The dative is used to express the remote
object,
(a) With tran»iJbine verbs governing also a iireet object.
I send you a book, Mitto tibi Ubrum.
Fisistratus conquered the Mega- Pisistratns sibi Megarensei Ticit
rensesfor himsdf.
Rem, The aoeusative if often omitted, and the dative alone appears
with the verb ; e. g,, I persuade you, tibi suadeo ; he told the gen-
eral, nuntiavit imperatorU
(b) With intransitive verbs expressing an aiction done to or for aome
person or thing.
I have leisure for philosophy. | Yaco philoiop&iff-
Digitized by
Google
DATIVE CASE. 299
(2.) On the same principle {advantage or disadMiniage), the dtdve ii
used with verba of the following^ meanings, vis. :
Envy, profit, please, displease, obey,
Help, hurt, resist, excel, or disobey.
Command, indulge, be angry, spare, upbraid.
Marry, heal, favour, meet, trust, and persuade.
Rem. 1. Javo, laedo, delecto, offendo, rego, gubernov govern die aoca-
sative.
2. Impero, credo, minor, comminor, are also used transitively, widi
accusative and dative.
(9.) Dative with Compound Verbs. — ^The dative is used with mvst verbs
compounded with ad, con, in, inter, ob, pros, sab; and with many of
those compounded with ab, ante, de, e, post, pre, re, super.
Rem. These verbs govern the dative when tiiey acquire a meaning
from the prepositkm which calls for the dative ; e. g„ to join, j u n g e r e,
takes accusative; but to join to, adjungere, takes dative also.
When they are transitive, they take both accusative and dative ;
but when intransitive, the dative only.
To prefer unknown m^n to known. \lgnotoB notis anteferre.
Vices creep upon us. I Vitia nobis obrepunt
(4.) So, also, the dative is used with adjectives expressing advantage,
likeness, usefulness, Jitness, facility, nearness to, and flieir opposite*.
Be kind to alL
Hurtful to the body,
A piaoefUfor ambush.
They are neighbours to the Ger-
mans.
Cunctis esto benignos.
Corpori pemiciosum.
Locus insidiis aptus.
Proximi sunt Germ an is.
Rem. 1. Adjectives ^f likeness or unlikeness may take the genitive
(699, 3).
3. Those oifUness and unfitness often take the accusative with ad ;
e, g., locus ad insidias aptus.
(705.) Rule XV. Dative of Possession, — The dative is used
with esse to express the person who has or possesses some-
thing.
/ have a book. | Est mihi liber (= habeo librum).
Rem, 1. I have a name = est mihi nomen ; but if the name be ex-
pressed, it may be put either in nominative or dative ; e. g., my
name is LaUus = mihi est nomen L nlius (or L selio).
2. The possessor is expressed by the dative when the mind refers
chiefly to the possession (e. g., I have a book = est mihi liber) ;
but by the genitive when the mind refers chiefly to the possessor
{e. g., this ^ook is my father's = liic liber est mei patris).
Digitized by
Google
300 ACCUSATIVE CASE.
(706.) Rule XVI. Dative of the End {Double Dative).— Two
datives are used with esse, and with verbs of giving , coming,
sending, imptUing ; one to express the person, the other the
object or end*
The Boians were (for) a protection
to ike rear,
PatLtanias ccane to aid (for an aid
to) the Atheniaru.
Boii novistimit prsesidio enuat.
Pansaniafl venit Atheniensibas
auxilio.
Rem, The verbs used with doable dative are esse, dare, dacere,
tribaere, vertere, accipere, relinquere, deiigere, mit-
tere, venire, habere.
[The dative is used with gerundives, for which see 737, b.]
^ 7. Accusative.
(707.) The accusative is the case of the direct object, and
answers the questions whom 7 what 7 to whai place ?
^^ Under this general statement we make three heads : (1) the ao-
cosative with verbs ; (S) the accasative with prepositions ; (3) the
aocosative according to the usage of the language.
I. Accusative with Verbi.
(708.) Rule XVIL Accusative of the Direct ObjecL— The
accusative is used with -transitive verbs, to express the dired
object.
Casar recaUs the lieutenant. | Caesar legatnm revocat
Rem. 1. Some verbs are rued both transitively and intransitively;
the use of these most be learned by practice.
S. Some intransitive* (especially those of niotion), compoonded with
prepositions, acquire a transitive force easily recognised from their
meaning; thus : to go, ire ; to go across, transire, whidi takes
tiie accusative.
3. Some intransitives take an accasative of a noun from the same
root with themselves ; e. g., to live a life, viverevitam.
(709.) Rule XVIII. Accusative with Impersonals. — The
accusative of the person affected is used with the impersonals
pudet, piget, taedet, miseret, poenitet.
I am tired of life. | Tffldet me vita.
Rem. Decet and its compounds (which admit a personal sut^ject), tho
juvat and delectat, take the accusative.
Anger becomes wild beasts. \ Decet ira feras. -
(710.) Rule XIX. DoubU Accusative,
{a) Two accusatives, one of the person, the other of Iha
Digitized by
Google
ACCUSATIVE CASE. 3Q1
tlnng, are used with verbs of teaching, concealing, asking, or
entreating, and also with those verbs whose passives have a
double DomiDative (694, 2, R.).
dais mnsicam docnit Bpami-
nondam.
Nihil te celo.
Hoc te vehementer rogo.
Avaritia homines coscos reddit.
(1.) Who taught Epaminondas
music 7
(2.) I conceal nothing from jfou.
(3.) I axk this of you earnestly.
(4.) Avarice renders men blind.
Rem. 1. With verbs of asking, demanding, the ablative with a prep-
08iti(xi is used instead of one of the accosatives.
• jH^ ambcKsadors were asking \Lega,ti pacem a Cabs are posce-
peace of CcBsar. I bant.
2. Petere and postnlare always take the ablative with ab; and
quaerere, the ablative with ab, de, or ex.
(6) Two accusatives are used also with verbs compounded
with trans.
CcBsar led Ike army acrost M« I CaBsar exercitum Bhennm
Rhine. \ transdoxit
** The trans is often repeated; e.g., Caesar exercitom trans Rhennm
transdnxit
Rem. 1. In the passive constmction of verbs which take a double ac-
cusative, the person takes the nominative, bat the thing generally
remains in the accusative.
I t04zs 4zsked my opinion.
The muUitude is led across the
Rhine.
2. But with verbs of demanding the ablative with a preposition is
generally used.
Money is demanded of me, | Pecunia a me poscitur.
n. Accusative with Prepositions.
(711.) Rule XX. The accusative is used with the preposi-
tioiis ad, apud, ante, adversus, cis, citra, circa, circum,
circiter, contra, erga, extra, infra, inter, intra, juxta,
ob, penes, per, pone, post, prseter, prope, propter, se-
cundum, supra, trans, versus, ultra. Also, with in and
Bub, when motion is expressed ; with super, when it means
over, and with subter nearly always.
HL Accusative according to the Usage ojthe Language.
(712.) Rule XXI. Accusative of Measure. — The accusative
is used in answer to the questions how far? how de^f how
Cc
Egorogatus sum sententiam.
Multitude Rhenum transducitur.
Digitized by
Google
802 ABLATIVB CASE.
ti^ick? how hroad? h&w old? how long? (whether of time or
distance).
The city w imo miles qff.
The ditch is ten feet wide {deep, or
longr).
Only one hour,
T^oenty years old.
Urbf duo millia abest.
Fossa decern pedes lata (alta,
longa).
U n a m modo h o r a Qu
Vig^inti annos natos.
Rem. 1. How far T is sometimes answered by the ablative.
Six miles from desat's Camp, I Millibas passumn sex a Cesaria
I castris.
S. For time how long, the accusative with per is sometimes ased, and
sometimes the ablative alone.
Through the whole night, I P e r totam noctem.
Ek was absent six months. | Sex mens ibns abfnit
(713.) RuLB XXII. Accusative of Direction^ Whither? —
The accusative is used with Dsmes of toions and small islands^
in answer to the question, whither ?
To set ovifor Athens. \ Athenas proficisci.
Rem. 1. With names of countries or large islands the preposit^opfi
in, ad, most be used.
He crossed into Europe, | In finropam tn^edt.
2. Domos and ms fi}Uow tiiis role.
To go Jiome, I Ire domam.
/ will go into ^ country. I Rus ibo.
(714.) Greek Accusative, — ^The accusatiTe is used to express a special
limitation.
Naked as to his limbs. i Nados membra.
For the most part {men) say so, \ Maximam partem ita dicnnt
Rem. This is a Greek usage, common in Latin poetry, bat not in
prose.
(715.) Exclamatioju.-'The accusative is used in exclamations, either
with or without an inteijection.
Miserable me I I Me miierum.
Behold, four altars ! | En quattuor aras.
[For tiie accusative with the infinitive, see 751.]
^ 8. Ablative.
(716.) Rule XXIJI. General Rulc-^The ablative is used
to mtpress the (1) cause ; (2) manner i (3) m^ns, PHttenal, or
iHstrum^nt ; (4) supply.
Digitized by
Google
ABLATIVE CAS9. 308
1. Cause. — ^The ablative of caaie is used with passive verbs, and with
the participles n a tas, genitns, ortus, contentns.
The world, is illumhuited by the
sun.
X am eonteni vnth my lot,
O thou, bam of a goddess !
Sole mondns illostrator.
Sorte mea conteotos som.
Kate Deal
O^ If the caase be a person (or a thing personified) ^ a or ab must be
used with passive verbs.
The world was built by Ood. | A Deo miiDdas fedificatns est.
8. Mawner.^ia) This ablative generally ocoors in noons denoting man-
ner; e. g., mos, modus, ratio, Arc.
In this way I wrote. | Hoc mo do scripsL
{b) With other noons, com is generally used, onless w adjective ii
joined with the noun.
He hears with pieasure. I Cum voluptate audit.
He bears the injury with firmness. jJEquo animo fert injuriam.
3. Means, Material, Instrument. — Ablative without a preposition.
To travel by horse* carriage, ships.
Bulls defend themselves with their
horns.
Equo, curru, navibus, vehi.
Cornibus tauri se tutantur.
GP* If the instrument or means be a person, per or propter u
used, with ^e i^»asatiTe^
I was freed by you, \ Per te liberatos sum.
4. Supply.-<--As supply may be'either abundant or defective, t^e abla-
tive is used with verbs and adjectives of abounding, wanting, filling,
emptyiTig, 3x. ; e. g., abundare, egere, carere, inops, refertus,
prsBditus, &c.
Germania fluminibus a bund at.
Mens est prssdita motu sempi-
temo.
Germany abounds in rivers.
The mind it endowed with per-
petual activity.
(717.) Rule XXIV . The aUative of the thing needed^ and
the dative of the person^ are used with opus est {(here is
need).
We have need of a leader, | Due e nobis opus est
Rem, If opus est be used personally, the thing needed is put in tiM
nominative as subject.
Leaders are nectary for us, | Duces nobis opus sunt
(718.) Rule XXV. The ablative is used with the depo-
nents utor, Iruof » fungor, potior, vescor.
To make UH of advice. I Consillo uti.
They were enjoying peace. ] P ac e fruebantur.
Digitized by dOOQ IC
304 ABLATITE CASE.
Bxm. Potior i« used also witli die geiutire
To obtain possession of aU GauL \ Totiai Galliae potiri.
(719.) Rule XXVI. Ablative of Price. — The abkitiTe is
used with Yorbs of buying, selling, valuing, 6cc. ; also with
the adjectives dignus and indignus, to express the price or
value.
He sold his country for goid. Patriam auro vendidit.
Worthy of hatred. O di o dignoa.
That hattU cost the Hood of Maltomm sanguine ea victefia
many. atetit
^p* If the price or vahie be an adjective, it is generally pat in the
genitive (700).
(720.) Rule XXVII. Ablative of Limitatim.—The abk-
tive is used to denote the limitation generally expressed in
£nglish by cls to, in respect of, in regard to.
Older (i e., greater in age). Majqr n atn.
Skilled in the law. Jure peritos.
In ejection a son. J Pietate filioa.
(721.) Rule XXVIII. Ablative of S^araOon.— The aUa-
tive is used with verbs of removing, freeing, depriving, and tiie
like.
Casar removed his camp from the
spot.
The trees are stripped of leaves.
CflBsarcaatra loco movit
Arbores foil i a nodantor.
Rem. Many of these verbs also take the prepositions a, a b, d e, e x.
(722.) Rule XXIX. Ablative of Q^aUty.— The ablative is
used (with an adjective of quality) to express that one thing is
a quality or property of another.
Casartoas a man of consummate CaBsar snmmo fait ingenio.
talent,
AgesHaus was a man of low stat- Agesilaas statara fait humili
tire.
Rem, The genitive is also thas osed (696).
(723.) Rule XXX. Ablative of Comparison, — The ablative
is used with the comparative degree (quam being omitted) to
express the object witii which anotiier is compared.
Cicero was more doquent <^n I Cicero fait eloqaentior Horf-#B-
Hortensius. I sio.
Digitized by
Google
ABLATIVE. 305
(724.) Rui^E XXXI. Ablative of Measure.—The aWativie of
measure is used,
(a) With comparatives and superlatives, to express the meas-
ure of excess or defect.
(h) To express the measure of time before or after any
event.
Much greater. M a 1 1 o major.
ThemUtocUa lived many year* be- Tbemistocles permnltis annit
fore Demosthenes. ante fait qaam Demosthenes.
. (725.) Rule XXXII. Ablative of Time When.— The abla-
tive is used to express the point of time at which anything
occurs.
On the sixth day. | Sexto die.
Rem. The time toitJ^in which anything occors is expressed by the ab-
lative with or without in or d e.
T^^thin ten years. iDecemannis.
Within those days. |ln his diebus.
(726.) Rule XXXIII. Ablative of Place.
(a) The place whence is expressed by the ablative.
He departed from Corinth. \ Corintho profectus est
(fc) The place where is expressed by the ablative, if the noun
be of the third declension or plural number.
Alexander died at Babylon. I Alexander B abylone mortaus est.
At Athens. { A t h en i s.
Sem. If the nomi be of the 1st or 2d declension singular, the genitive
is used.
At Rome. At Corinth. jUomaD. CorinthL
(Domi follows this rale.)
(727.) The ablative is used with the following prepositions,
▼iz. :
Absque, a, ab, abs, and de.
Coram, clam, cum, ex, and e,
Tenus, sine, pro, and pra.
Also with i n and sub (implying rest, not motion), and super, when it
means upon. S u b t e r is sometimes, also, used with ablative.
(728.) Rule XXXIV. Ablative with Compound Verhs.^
The ablative b used with some verbs compounded with a (ab,
a b s), d e, e (e x), and super.
Cc2
Digitized by
Google
806
INFINITIVE.
To be absent from the city, U r b e abeue.
Caesar resolved to desist from btU- Caesar praolio sapenedero flap
tie. tait.
Rem. The preposition is sometimes repeated.
To depart from life (= to die). | Exire de vita.
[For the Ablative Absohite, see 750.]
(729.) Verbs followed by genitive, dative, or ablative, where toe use no
preposition, and should therefore be likely to pat the accusative. (Those
with asterisks take also an accusative cX the thing, tfaoogfa some of them
only when die accusative is a neuter pronoun.)*
obtain,
forget,
rememhcT,
recollect,
require,
need,
potior {abl.).
( misereor.
\ miseresco.
oblivisoor [aec.).
memini [aec).
recordor {ace).
remioiscor (acc^.
abuse,
revUe,
advise,
answer,
believe,
command,
commission,
charge,
congratulate,
displease,
direct,
envy.
favour,
fUdter,
give,
helv,
aia,
assist,
succour,
heal,
cure.
>maledico.
*suadeo.
^respondeo.
credo.
*impero.
V *mando.
*^fratulor.
displiceo.
•praecipio.
•mvideo.
faveo.
adulor (ace.).
*do.
? auxilior.
i opitulor.
< subvenio.
/succurro.
> medeor.
hurt,
indulge,
marry,
obey,
pardon,
permit,
persuade,
please,
resist,
oppose,
rival,
satisfy,
spare,
suit,
threaten,
trust.
nocea
*indulgeo.
nnbo.
rpareo.
< obedio.
(.obtemp^o.
*igno8ca
*permitto.
'persuadeo.
placeo.
7 resisto,
{repuffno.
flBmoIor (ace.).
satisfodo.
parco. ^
convenio.
J "minor.
/ *minitor.
abuse,
discharge,
perform,
enjoy,
obtain,
require,
need,
want,
use,
want,
am without.
abutor.
Vfang<»^.
fnior.
potior {gen^.
Ul. USE OF THE INDEFINITE VERB.
^ 9. Infinitive.
(730.) Rule XXXV. Infinitive as SvJ)ject.^The infinidve
b used as the subject of a verb, and is then regarded as a UBWr
ter noun.
To love (= loving) is pleasant, \ Jucundum est a m ar e.
Digitized by
Google
?A|lTIC|P|iC. 807
(731.) Rule XXXVI. Infinitive as Complementary Object.
— The infinitive is used (exactly as in English) to complete the
imperfect ideas expressed by certain words.
J toi$h Uf learn, | Capio discere.
Worthy to be loved. \ Digznis am ar i
Rem. 1. The complementary InfinitiTe occurs after verb» denoting to
wukt to be able, to be accuitomed, ought (debere), to haeteUf &c ;
after the adjectives dignus, indignus, attdax, &c.
2. Observe IhuX this oonstruction. which occurs after aU verbs in
English, can only stand in Latin after tiiose expressing imperfect
ideas, as above stated. A purpose cannot be expressed in Latin,
as in English, by the simple infinitive ; e. g.,he comes to ham ==
venit ut disca^ m^^venit discere.
(732.) Historical Infinitive. — In animated narrative the in-
finitive is sometimes used for the indicative.
77te Romans hastened,madef^ady, I Bomani festinare, parare, &o.
(This constmction is quite common in Sallust.)
[For Accusative with Infinitive, see 751.]
^ 10. Participle.
(733.) Rule XXXVII. The participle agrees with its nomi
in gender, case, and number, and the active participle govern*
the same case as its verb.
The honoured man.
The blooming rose.
I saw him reading a book.
Vir laudatus.
Rosa florens.
Enm legentem librum vidL
(734.) The participle future active is used to express a jpwr-
pose (where in English we should use to, in order to, with the
infinitive).
Alexander goes to Jupiter Amman,
in order to inquire concerning
his descent.
(735.) The passive participle is often used to supply the
place of a noun.
After Tarentum taken (= after
the taking of Tarentom).
Alexander ad Jovem Ammonem
pergit, consul turns de origine
sua.
Post Tarentom captum.
Aburbe condita.
Prom the city buHt (=:from the,
building of the city).
[For Participle in Subordinate Sentences, see 749.]
Digitized by
Google
808 GERUND AND GERUNDIVE.
^11. Gerund.
(736.) Rule XXXVIII. As the infinitive is used as a nomi
in the nomiDative or accusative, so the gerund is used in the
remaining cases, and governs the same case as its verb.
Nom. Writing is useful.
Gen. The art cf writing is osefiil.
Dat Paper is asefal/&r writing.
. CI learn writing.
' \ I learn during writing.
Scribere est utile.
Ars scribendi estotiHs.
Charta scribendo estntilis.
Scribere disco.
Inter scribendam disco.
Scribendo discimos.
AbL "We learn by writing.
Rem. 1. With a preposition the gerond in the accasative most be
used, not the infinitive: ad (inter, ob) scribendam, not ad
(inter, ob) scribere.
a. The general rules for the ose of cases of nonns (695-728) apply to
the cases of the infinitive and gerond, as above given.
Spocial Remark, The gerond is not osed in the dtttive or accutative
with an active government ; e. g., we can say scribendi episto-
las, cf writing letters, or scribendo epistolas, by writing letters,
bot not charta otilis est scribendo (dat.) epistolas^ nor charta
otilis est ad scribendom literas. In these la«t cases ^e ge-
rundive must be osed (738).
^ 12. The Gerundive^ or Verbal in dus, da, dom.
(737.) Rule XXXIX. (a) The gerundive in the nomina-
tive neuter (dum) is used with the tenses of esse, to denote
that an action should or must be done ; and these may govern
the case of the verb.
{One) must write, \ Scribendam est
(&) The person hj whom the action should or must be done
is put in the dative.
/ must write. I Scribendam est m i h i.
Caius must write, Scribendam est C ai o.
One must use reason, I Ratione atendom est.
(738.) Rule XL. (a) The gerundive is used with esse, in
all cases and genders, as a verbal adjective, agreeing with the
noun, to express necessity or worthiness.
I am to be loved; she is to be , Amandas som; amanda est,
loved^ SfC. I &c
(6) When the person is specified, it must be put in the da-
tive.
Digitized by
Google
SUPINE. 309
/ must love TuUia.
AU thingt were to be done by C<t-
sar at one time.
Tallia mihi amanda est
Cssari omnia imo tempore
erant agenda.
Rem. a or ab wHh ablative is sometimes used instead of the dative.
My eau$e must be managed by the \ A, consnlibus mea causa sas-
constUs. (cipienda est.
(739.) Rule XLI. The gerundiTe is used (to express cou"
tinned action) as a verbal adjective, in all genders and cases
(but the nominative) agreeing with the noun, instead of the
gerund governing the noun ; c. g..
Gen. Of writing a letter,
ScribendsB epistolsBi ipsteadof ■cribendi epistdam.
Datr-lTo or for writing letters.
Scribendis epistolis, instead of scribendo epistolas.
Ace. 7\f write a letter.
Ad Bcribendam epistolam, instead of ad acribendam epis*
tolam.
AbL By, 4rc.f writing a letter.
Scribe'nda e pis tola, instead of scribendo epistolam.
Rem. As observed in (736), the genmdive must be used for the dative
or accusative of tlie genmd when it has an active government It
may be used for it in any other case, nliiess the object of the ge-
nmd is a neuter adjective or pronoun ; e. g., of learning the true =
vera discendi, not veromm discendorom; t^ hearing t^ =
hoc audiendi, not hujus audiendi.
^13. Supines.
(740.) Rule XLII. (1.) The supine in um is used with
verbs of motion, to express the design of the motion, and gov-
ems the same case as its verb.
/ come to ask you. | Venio te rogatum.
(2.) The supine in u is used,
(a) With adjectives, to show in what reject they are
used; e.g.,
Pleasant as to taste. | Dulce gustatu.
(b) With the nouns fas, nefas, opus, in the same sense :
fas est dictu.
PART II.
OF COMPOUND SENTENCES.
(741.) A compound sentence is one made up of two or more sipiple sen-
tences. The sentences thus combined are either oo^irdinate or subordinate.
Digitized by dOOQ IC
810 SENTENCES.
I. CO-ORl>IllATI SINTXHCXl.
^ 14. Classes of Co-wdinaU Sentences.
(742.) Co-ordinate senteocei are united together, bat yet iiuUpendent
of each other :* co-ordination is either,
(a) Copulative ; e, g., Hitf father has abindoiidd hittk, and hli foenda
have deserted him, and the son remains.
{h) Di^neiifi>ei e. g^ Bitfier hia fktfaer has abaBdoned, or his ftittids
have deserted hinL
(^ Mversative; e. g^ His father has abandoned him, hU his friends
have not
{d) Ctmsal; e^g^Ws friends will abandon him, for his Either has
done so.
(e) CoHdtttwe; e, g., His fkther has abandMed him, Aettfdtt his
friends will desert him.
n. SVBORDlHATk SkNTtNCKS.
^16. Classes of Subordinate Sentences,
(743.) Subordinate sentences are so onited to otfieni (called fr ind pat
sentences) as to be dependent upon them.
The messenger, who was eetd, an- I Nontinsy qui missns est» nmi>
nounced. I tiavit
Here the messenger announced is the principal Senteacet whewm sent,
the sabor£nate sentence.*
(744.) Subordinate sentences lure of five classes t
A. Participial ientences.
B. Accueatioe with iK/initioe.
C. Conjunctive sentences^ i. e., such as are iatrodnced by a co^juoo-
tion or adverb of time.
t). Relative sentences, ». &» such iui 1^6 Uittodueft^ by a ftlitttb
word.
B. Interrogativs sentences, i, &, such as are tntrodoc^ by an iBtte«>
rogative word.
We shall treat these in order, prennsing a few remarks upe» the use d
ike mdods and tenses, which must be thoroughly understood.
^ 16. The Moods.
(745.) The verb expresses aiBrmation. The moods of the verb are used
to vary the character of the affihnation.
* It must be obvious that aU co-ordinate sentences are, for gravmiatical
purines, i^nc^M/ sentences. Moreovel', l&e doctrines and rales applied
to simple sentences (Part I.) are applicable to all principal sentences : it is
only in subordinate sentekides that diffictilty ti likely to occur. The pupil
should, therefore, obtain as accurate a knowledge as possible of the vari-
ous kinds of subordinate sentences, and the di£ret-ettt modes of alBrtnlitkn
wMeh th«y eft^fess» as it is upen these Aat theif lyntMk depends.
Digitized by
Google
PARtlCIPIAL BENTlSNCES. ftll
1. B^ thft inditeafve, ridfin&fttkHi df d fad ill Expressed i eg., I finite,
I did not write*
^, dy tbe i'Aljvinttvoe, adlrm&tton is e&prestod doubifuUp, contingently,
or indefinitely ; e. g., / ina^ fori^e, tf / should write, pethaps some
(may) think.
3. By the imperative, aiBrmation is expressed as an injunction or r^-
quisst ; e. g., toHte.
(746.) It most be obvioos diat in principal sentences the iiidicatava
mood chiefly occurs, and in subordinate sentences the snbjunctire, as af-
firmations of fact are made more freqaftitly iA the former than in the lat-
ter. But,
(a) The subjunctive is used (of course), even in principal sentenceSy
when the affirmation is doubtful, contingent, or indefinj^ (745, 3).
(fi) The indicative is used, even in subordinate sentences, when the af-
firmation is positive.
True firiendships are everlasting, I Vers amicitis ■enqotems sunt^
became nature cannot be changA quia naturamutarioon potest.
ed, I
^ 17. The Tenses.
(a) DZVISION.
(747.) The tenses are either primary or historical ^647, R. 3),
PreMot. Fntnre. Pre*. PerC
. . p . 5 <^ii^<^^ amabit; amavit,
W armory, ^j^j^^ j^^^^j^^ kghaslovid.
Imp«rf«et
Imp«rf«et Pluperftot. PerCAoriit.
amtiverat, amavit»
he had lOved. he loved.
Qi) snocKSSioN of txnsxs.
(748.) Rule XL III. If there be a primary tense in the
{principal sentence, there must be a primary tense in the sub-
ordinate ; if an historical tense in the principal, an hittnrical in
the subordinaM.
8abordiiiat&
/ know irhAi ybtl €trt doing.
I foeu knowing what you were doing,
I have learned what you are doing.
I tiartad ^hftt you were doing.
PriviptL
Bcid, quid agas.
Soiebam, quid ageres.
Cognovi, quid agas.
Cognovi, quid ageres
(A.) ^ 1,8. Participial Sentences.
[The participle is used to abridge discourse, instead of a relative, ad«
verb, or coi^unctidh vrith a verb. Thus (1), Tarquin, when he was expeUed
* Of cotmid thd eution m&y be eitbdi* positive or nega^ve, without a^
fecting the affirmation.
Digitized by
Google
812
ACCU8ATIVB WITH INFINITIVE.
frtm Romf es Tanioiii, expdhd from Eom^ (9) Cmv, when ^ work
woijinisked, departed = Cm—r, the work having been ^nieked, depwted
These are abridged ■obordinate aenteDcea, (1) being called the eom^
juneUve participial oooatraction, and (2) the ablative abaolate.]
(749.) Conjunctive Participial Construction. — The participle
in a subordinate sentence wfdch has for its subject the subject or
object of the principal sentence, agrees with this last in gender,
number, and case.
Ariatidei, lehen he was expdled
from his counirp, fled to Lace-
Aristides, p atria pulsus, Lace-
dsmonem fugit.
SP* Observe, in this example, that Aristides is the subject of
bodi the principal and the sabordinate sentence, and pulsus
agrees with Aristides in gender, number, and case. In Eng-
lish sudi sentences are generally expressed by an adverb or
conjunction with a verb.
(750.) Rule XLIV. Ablative Absolute. — ^If the subordinate
sentence contains a noun and participle independent of the sub'
ject of the leading sentence, both noun and participle are placed
in the ablative. (This construction is called the ablative ahso'
luU.)
When Tarquin was reigning,
Pydiagoras came into Italy.
AH things having been provided,
they appoint a day.
Pythagoras, Tarquinio regnan-
te, in Italiam venit
Omnibus rebus comparatia,
diem dicunt
Hem. Nouns, adjectives, and pronouns are often used in the ablative
absolute widiout a participle.
Under the guidance of Nature Natura duce.
(= Nature being guide).
In the consulship of Manlius, J MiiuHo consule.
(B.) ^19. Accusative toith Infinitive.
(751.) Rule XLV. Many subordinate sentences, which in
English are introduced hj the conjunction that (especiallj after
verbs of thinking, saying, "knowing, &:c.), are expressed in
Latin by the accusaJtive with the infinitive.
They said that they did not fear Dicebant non se hostem vererL
the enemy.
"Be koawM that Cicero is eloquent. Scit Ciceronem esse eloqoeii-
Digitized by
Google
8UBJUK0TXVS WITH UT, NE, QJJlNf QUO, aUOMimiS. 813
Rem. 1. Observe that the tuhject of the sentexice tirai raboidinaied
if pat in the accofative, and the predicaU in the infinittve. If ttio
predicate contain an adjective, it most agree with the sabjeok
I percehre ^uxi ike vktter is cold. \ Sentio aqaam f r i gi d am esse.
6. The accnsative with infinitive occurs chieily,
(a) After yerba sentiendi et dicendi {tkifiking', feding,
perceiving, knowing, saying, announcing, wiUing, forbidding,
&c.).
ip) Ahat sKKh. expressions as apparet {it is evident), constat
{it is known), opus est, oportet, necesse est^ jnstnm
e s t (i^ w necessary, right, jttst, &c.}. In this ca«e the accasatxvo
with infinitive becomes the subject of the entire sentence.
It i» 'known to b31 that the Romans (Constat inter omnes Ho man oi
were very bratve. \ faiase fortissimos.
|gP*Opt>rtet and neeesse est may tak^ liie snbjxmctive, in-
stead (tf the accusative widi infinitive.
'We ought ( = it behooves us) to I O portet nos virtuti studere ; oiF
practice virtue. \ Virtuti studeamua oportet
(.0.) ^ 20. Cowjunetive Sentenees.
Relation of Conjunctions to the Moods.
(752.) From what has been said (745, 746), it is obvious, that as the
moods express ^e varieties of affirmation, and as the conjunctions are
used to indicate different relations of Ui^oght (as positive, conditional,
causal, Sec), there must be a close connexion between the use of the con-
junctions and that of t^e moods. It must be borne in mind, however, that
the nature of the afimuxtion (except, perhaps, in purely idiomatic ex-
pressions) decides both the mood and the oonjnnctkm that shi^ be wed.
It cannot properly be said, therefore, that the conjunctions govern the
moods ; but, for convenience' sake, we treat them together.^
GENERAL RULE.
(75^3.) The subjunctive is used in all subordinate sentences
in y^<^ affinoatioQ is expressed as dependent upon son^ pre-
vious affirmation, either 9» pwrp^ae^ aim, consequenee, eoTuHtian,
or imagvnar^ eomparis$9k.
SPECIAL RULES.
1. Final Conjunctions, u^ ne, quin, quo, quominus.
(754.) RuiiE XL VI. The subjunctive* is used in sentencea
expressing a pwpose or a coiuequence, introduced by tb^ fai»!k
conjunctions ut, ne, quin, quo, quominas*
Dd
Digitized by
Google
314 BUBJUNOTIVB IN CONDITIONAL SENTENCES.
1. Ut, ne, expressing jnifpote.
I did not write tiiat in order to
inttruetyou.
I beseech yoa not to do this,
S. Vt, expressing comequenee.
The soldiers went with ticdk vio-
lence that the enemy betook
themselves to flight.
(3.) duo is osed to express a purpose, instead of nt, especially when
a comparative enters into the sentence.
Ea non at te institnerem
scripsL
Te obsecro ne hoc facias.
Eo impeta miEtes iemnt, at bostes
se fioige mandarent.
Cesar erects fints. that he may
the more easily keep off the
Helvetians.
Caesar castella conmmnit, qao fa-
cilias Helvetios prohibere pos-
sit
(4.) duin is ased in the sense of " bat that" {as not, &c.) after negtk-
txoe sentences, and after non dubito, non dubiam es^ dec
T\ere is no one but thinks.
It is not doubtful but that the
soldiers vnUJight bravely.
Nemo est qain patet
Non dabiom est qain milites Ibr-
titer pagnatari sint
(5.) daominas is ased (in preference to ne) after verbs of hinder-
ing, preventing, standing in Ike way of, &c. (It can generally be
rendered in English by "of" or "from" with a participle.)
Nothing hinders Yarn from doing I Nihil impedit qaominas hoc fa-
this. I ciat.
Jk Conditional Conjunctions, si, nisi, dam, dommodo, moda
(755.) Rule XLYII. ConditioDal coDJmictioiis take the in-
dicative if the condition is expressed as real or certain ; the
subjunctire, where it is not.
If he has any money, he will give S i peconiam h ab e at, dabit.
it (it is uncertain whether he
has any).
Rem. 1. If liie condition is represented as impossible or unreal, (1) die
imperfect sabjanctive mast be ased for present or fbctare time ;
(2) the pluperfect sabjanctive for past time.
(1) Ifhe had any money, he wovld Si peconiam haberet, daret.
give it (bat he has none).
(9) If he had had any money, he
woald have given it.
Rem.2. As dam, dammodo, modo, in the sense of provided
that, can never express a real, existing condition, they always
take the sabjanctive.
Si pecaniam habaissi^ dedis-
set.
Digitized by
Google
SUBJUNCTIVE WITH UUUM. 815
3. Cimeestive Conjunctions (683, 5).
(756.) The concessive conjunctions take the indicative when they intro-
duce a definite statement of fact, hat the snhjnnctiTe when loiiietiiin; is
expressed as possible, not actual. Etsi, qnamqaam, and tametsi
are used principally in the former sense ; in the latter, etiamsi soore
comnM^nly, and licet and q u a m v i s* nearly always. Hence,
HuLE XL VIII. Licet and q u a m v i s {although) are al-
ways followed by the subjunctive ; etiamsi, generally.
Veritas licet nollam defens<H%m
obtineat
Sapiens dolorem patienter tolerat,
qaamvis acerims sit
Though truth should obtain no
defender.
The wise man ^ttdxires pain pa-
tiently, even though it be griev-
oos.
Item. The comparative coi^jimctions, when osed concessively, velat^
quasi, acsi, tanquamsi, &c. (meaning as if,as though), al-
ways take the subjunctive, for the reason given (756) for licet and
quamvis.
duid testibus utor, quasi res dn-
bia sit?
Why do I use witnesses, as
though the matter were doubt-
ful?
4. Temporal Conjunctions.
(757.) Temporal conjunctions (when, after that, a$ soon aSf
just as, dec.) of course generally take the indicative.
After Caesar drew up the line of
battle.
Every animal, as soon bm it is
bom.
Postquam Caesar aciem in-
struxit.
Omne animal, simulac ortum
est
SPECIAL REMABKS.
(A.) Q n n m has two uses : temporal and cattsal.
(a) TemfcrdL
1. As a pure particle of time, q u u m takes the indicatiye.
2. In historical narrative (especially where the jnincipal clause hat
the indicative perfect) quum temporal is followed by the sub'
junctive imperfect or pluperfect.
"WhenCasar had conquered Pom- I CsBsar, quum Pompeium vicis«
pey, he cnMSsed over into Italy. I s et, in Italiam tr aj eci t
[In many such cases, the action introduced by when is in some sense
tbe cause of the action in the principal sentence.]
* dnunvis is used by the later writers in the sense of qnamquam, with
the indicative.
Digitized by
Google
819 R£LATIVB aSNTENCES.
(b) damn causal, expnuing the relatkm of eause and ^eet {nnetk
b^eaute^ aWumgk), obvionaly raqpiirea the ntif^ncUve.
Sino« tkem tkingi art <o, | das cum ita aint
Henc9,
Rule XLIX* Qliuin catual is always followed by th^
sabluDctive ; and qnum Unyporal by the imperfect or pluper-
fect subjunctive, when the aorist perfect indicative is used vx
the principal sentence.
(B.) Antequaiu a^d prlusquam are used,
1. To ezpreaa aimple pHoritjf of one adion to another, and here the
indicative ia obviooaly raqaired.
AU these ihingt were done h^oreSHma omnia ante facta aunt
Verree touched liaiy, I qvam Yerrea ItaHam attig^it.
^. To express a con^ieanoA between one aptio^i and anotjier, a^d here
the tubjunctive is obviously required.
Before C^ar attempted anytidn^^
he orders Divitiacus to. be sum-
moned.
CflBsar; p r i a s qn a m qcdcUniism
conaretur, Divitiacom ^ se
vocari jnbet
3. To introdoce a general or indefinite statement, requiring, of conne,
the suljunctUfe.
TJfe^ ti^rngtesf t^eafen^ ^^fini*. i^|7emp«ataa imnalw^ ^utei^uam
rises. I f^or^.
(C.J Pui^, (JloneCi qupad, in tiiie sens!^ of vmi^i t^e, the
subjunctive when tl:^ a^p^nuation is expressed as pq$sihle or
fotuia-
He vas unwilling to leave Me I Dam Mib veniret^ locom relin-
spot until Milo came, I quere noluit.
[For uiterrogatiyes, see i,^-}
(D.) i 21. Rel^Uive Sentences.
(758.) Ja Ika oranpannd sentence, '^the messenger, wko^was sent, an-
Bflnn o ed,**. the daiise " the messenger annoonced" is the prkKsipal sen*
tonce; and the clause "who wtu senf'the relatiye sentence. The word
** messenger'* is the antecedent of the relative "whoJ*
1. Agreement.
(759.) RuiiE L. The relative pronoun agrees with its
antecedent in gender and number ; but its case depends upoa
th^ constructlpn. of the relative sentence.
2%^6rM^t<;AicArtmz4 a<G^e9i|0i;a|Ponteni, qui euat ad QeBevim,
he ordera to be cot down. | jnbet rescindL
\
Digitized by
Google
RfiLAtlTE BBNTBNOES. 317
0%tatk bod Isr&t ptigniB!, ^u6 Gter-
mam le exercaerant
Tiiifl W&i ft kln^ of fighting i&
which the Oermans had exer-
Bmi TBd Verb tii tii€ r^lttiird sentence takes tlie person of tHe ibte-
cedent
We who write. | Nbsqmscribimitfl.
2. The Moods in Relative Sentences,
(760.) (a) The indicative mood occurs in the relative sen-
tence only when it states a fact distinctly^ with reference to a
partionlmr sutyect.
The messetiffer who was sent. \ Nontitis qui inisstis 6st
(i) But qui is used in Latin very conunonly (1) to avoid the
use of a conjunction, and (^) to introduce indefinite statements,
or the words or opinions of another ; and in such cases is al-
ways followed by the subjunctive.
(761.) Rule LI. The sidjunctive is used in rektive ftenten-
ces expressing the purpose^ resulti or ground of the princitAd
sentence.
1. Pitrpose (qui = ut with deffionstratiye).
TUtiy geikt sinbluHiadbifti to kuHfor I Misehmt le^kto^, ^ai ptcem pd^t-
(r= who ihotdd sue for) peace. | e # e n t (?= at ii pasoem peieMt),
2» Mentk ^ni == irt after is} tain^ ftalii^ dignnt, ita^ ^tc.).
T am not the man to do thii (== 1
am not anch who caa do).
PoUio is worthy of our love (=
wordiy, whom we maof love).
Non is sum qui hoc faci&&
Dignus est PoUio^ qud& diliga-
muB.
3. Ground or cause (qui =: cur or quod).
Sfhis qui c^hoMemt^
Male fecit Hannibal qui Omfvm
hiemarit.
You err, who think ^ because pm
think) —
Hannibal did wrong in wintering
(= because he wintered) at Ca-
puar
(762.) ilniiE LII. The subjunctive is used in relative ietb-
tences containmg ind^niU statementif especially after the
words (here arty there can befoundf there is no one, 6cc.
Ther0 tarn Hhostlwho mfi
I have nottiiBg ^a%ir^i» mecuse
(=: no reooA t» bUnte) old •g«;r
SiiBt <|ui di«'aat
mtA hKbeo ^ttod iiidta«^itt Mi
BecMteBh
Rem. When ^ MMMO failMaced 1^^ AM i^MSrt^ bxprSmi^
Dd2
Digitized by
Google
318 INTCEEOGATIVE SENTENCES.
•entimeiito of another (rather tium of Ae writer), the lat^jancthre if
used.
Helvetii conBtitaenmt ea qua ad
proficiacendnm pertinerent
comparare.
The Hehetians determined to get
tog§ther those tkingt whUk
(they thought) belonged to
marching (were neceiiaxy for
■ettiog out).
^ 22. Interrogative Sentences.
1. QvesiioTU.
(763.) dneatioiui are often expfeiied in EngHah withoat any interrog-
ative word ; e. g., Is Coins writing ? bat in the Latin, almost invaria-
bly, an interrogative word is used. These are either (a) interrogative
particles, {b) interrogative pronoons, or {c) interrogative adverbs or con-
Junctions,
(a) Interrogative Partidesr ue, uonne, uum, utrum, an.
(1.) Ne simply asks for information.
Is Caius writing ? | Scribitne Cains?
(3.) Nonne expects ^e answer tes.
Do you not think the wise man I Nonne putas sapientem beatum
happy? I esse?
(3.) Num expects the answer no.
Do you think the fool happy ? | N um putas Btultum esse beatom f
(4.) Utrum is used in double questions, with an {whether^-or).
(Whether) is that your fault or I Utrum eavestra an nostra culpa
ours? I est?
{b) Interrogative Pronouns: quis, qui, qualis, quantus, ec-
quis, &c
Who taught Epaminondas tnu- | Cluis Epaminondam musicam do-
ne? &o. I cuit?
(c) Interrogettive Adverbs or Conjunctions: quare, cur, quando^
ubi, quomodo, &c.
(764.) Qnestions are eitlier direct or indirect : direct^ when they are
not dependent on any word or sentence going before ; e. g., Is Casus wri-
ting ? Indirect, when they are so dependent ; e. g,, TeU me ^ Cenus is
writing.
S. Use of the Moods in Questions,
(a) Direa,
(765.) In direct questions the indieatioe is used wben the questioii ii pot
positively, and the subjunctive when it is put doubtfully ; e. g,,
(Positive.) What are you doing ? [ auid a g i s ? {Indie,)
(XyoatiOoL) Whatoanwedot iOuidagamus?
Digitized by
Google
OEATIO OBLiaUA. 319
(6) IndxrecL
(766.) Rule LIII. In indirect questions the suhjunctive is
always used.
I do not kxM>w what book yoa are
reading.
Tell me tohai yoa are doingf.
Nescio quern libmm leg as.
Die, quid agas.
^ 23. Oratio Obliqua,
"L Nature cf Oratio Obliqua,
{767.) When any one relates the words or opinions of another, he may
do it in two ways :
(a) He may represent him as speaking in the Jir»t person, and give his
words preciflely as (hey were uttered; e. g., Ariovistus said, "Iluwe
crossed the Rhine^' — ^Aribvistos dixit, Rhenum transii. This is
called oratio recta, direct discourse.
{b) He may st€ae the substance of what the speaker said in narrative
fiyrm ; e,g., Ariovistus said that he had crossed the Shine—AnoviBtaa
dixit se Rhenum transisse. This is called oratio obliqua,
indirect discourse,
2. The Moods in the Oratio Obliqua,
(768.) The sentences introduced in die oratio obliqua are either prtno-
pal or subordinate ; e. g., Ariovistus said that he would not wage war on
tiie JEduans if they paid the tribute yearly. Here the sentence ihat he
would not wage war upon the JEduaru is a principal sentence, and if
they paid the tribute yearly is a subordinate sentence.
(769.) Rule LIV. {a) Principal sentences in the orcUio ohli"
qua are expressed by the accusative with the infinitive ; e, g*^
Ariovistus dixit, se Mdma helium non esse illaturum.
Sesn. If the principal sentence contains a command or wish, it is ex*
pressed by the subjunctive j e, g.,
The leader said that the troops I Dux dixit, milites sus saluti con*
should comuU their own safety, \ sulerent
(h) Subordinate sentences in oratio obliqua always take the
subjunctive ; e. g,,, Ariovistus dixit, se ^duis beUum non esse
illaturum, si stipendium quotannis penderent (if
iheypaid Oie tribute yearly).
Digitized by
Google
Digitized by
Google
APPENDICES
Digitized by
Google
Digitized by
Google
APPENDIX L
OF PROSODY.
^ 1. Quantity.
[Thi rules of quantity in Lesson XLIL ihoold be reyiewed, and tb*
following additional roles learned.] x
1. Penults,
(770.) DissTLLABic SUPINES lengthen the pennlt; e,g., viBum,
Rem, The foUowing are short, viz. :
D&tom, rfttom, s&tom, sti^om, Itom,
Citom, Htam» sitnm, riitam, qnltnm.
(771.) Ebduplicatkd perfects shorten botli pennlt and antepenalt,
e,g,, cficidi, didici
Ren^ Pemilt is long in cecidi (cedfire) and pfipddi (pddfire).
(772.) In ADJEcrnrK penults observe the foUowing :
1. Short Penults: -ftcns, -lens, -Idns, Imns ; & ^., JEgyptiScns, mo-
dScos, cnpldus, legitiEmns.
Exceptions, — ^Merftcns, opicns, amicus, afirlcas, anticos, posticus,
mendicus, umbilicus, fidus, infidus, bimus, trimus (of two, three
years, &c.), matrimus, opimus, patrimus, imus, primus.
8. Long Penults: -alis, -anus, tldus, Atus, with all before -rus,
-Tus, -sus ; e,g., dotalis, montflnus, percrfidus, astfltus, avarus, sin-
cdms, delims, decdrus, octavus, sestiyus, famOsus.
Eax^-Jjo&n, postfiri, barb8ms, opipfinu.
3. Penults sometimes long, sometimes short: -ilis, -inus.
{cij -ilis, finom verbs, is short ; fiom nouns, kmg; e. g,, fadlis {short) ;
civilis (long), BxiUa, subtiUs, and the names of months (Aprilis,
Ac), are long.
{b) 4nu8, fiom noune denoting time or material, is short; finom
other worda, long ; & g,, craatiDras, elephantbma (short) ; canihus,
LatSnus (long),
8. Compound Words.
(773.) Compound words generally retain the quantity of the simple
words; «.g., per-hU go = perl dgx>; per+Ugi = perUgi.
Digitized by
Google
324 AFFBNDIX I. PEOSODY.
Rewi. I. A chugs of TDweli doM not affect the rale ; o+lego =
ellga
S. DejiTOp pejCro (jAro) ; maledlcaf, &c. (dioo) ; cognltaiii, mgnlfcam
(nOCom), are tbort^ thoagfa Ae aimple wordi are long.
(774.) i. •, di, dl, pr<H Be,m OQuposilioii ate Ipog, bat r6 u abort
Exc — Dirimo, diaertaa, rtfert. Pro if abort in Greek words, and in
the oompoiinda of oaUor hmmm, tei fateor, festoi, fogio, fimdo^
nepoa, nepda, torma ; alao in prSficiaoor. In prftpago, prftpino^ it
iadonbtfiiL*
C775.) If thtlrit part of a conqioond word end in a» it ii generally kmg ;
if in e^ i or v, generally abort ; e. gr.^ trBdnoo, trido (contracted from trans) ;
tilMal^ ajjflwlaf ^vaMlpa^
^ 8. Rhythm^ Artis, Thesis, Verse, Feet.
(776.) (a) By Rhythm we mean a regular alternation of eleratiana
(■treaa) aad depreMioaa of t^ Toice. In poetry tills alternation feUowa
certain fixed laws.
(b) The effiMt of T«MbgFi*kW»8iraaB is laid «pe» one syllable is called
letuit or rfaytfamical aooant. A.syHriri» to^ raised tgF the ictus stands in
tiM Jrsis. The sjpUabb ar syllaUea: q» wMob t]M toia* nam or Mtka
are said to be in the Thesis,
(c) AfMisfinMd by the vioB^of arais apd tfaeaii. AeomUftatian
of feet Conns a Ver$e.
Thus, in the line vl sSrS m^ntfis, the ictos falls on the ^Uibles
marked with the accent ; vis and mdn, therefore, are in the arsia,
sfir6 and t6s in the thesis. The union of arsis and thesis in
wlB9tB feima m* ftett i» «Am^ in mdntds. The oombinatioii of
these t«M> fbet ibnw tiie ▼erse
▼Ta«T« m«ttt6s.
(d^ KDasftyl is a froft ooBpMed of mm king tylaU* (cnlii^ ud-two
dKitt sgrttatte* ifkisms^i eugn tUMt^i a Sp mt iH ^d tisa kmg. (nflris and
thesis) ; e. g,, mdat^it
9 9.' 9ti0tntfig.
(777.) ScAimiva is. the iiifteieiing of * yaM» ittter ik» ft^e wMdi eom-
poae^iU Obsfrve the fiilk>wiag points jnsflanwing r
1. SymaUepka caleeff a^^vovPEsdai'tiie- eed-efa w«d wfien flie next
word begins with a Towel or h ; e.g,, insteadef^ re-glsc ad, we
reader agin' atd) instead cf a(»%it<i hkm^s %Aqn* Inih^
& JScO^iw «i**^«« ^M^MiilMnMmelbeftia^ll ■! fte e^
* The following lines contain Hreiexoeplioas :
At rape qun fnndo, ingio, neptiaque, neposqne,
Bt cello, rari, fateor, fairamqixe, ferstamcrae ;
Atqne pracusrpioikneeor, cumque prop^eta, piofotto.
Digitized by
Google
APPENDIX I. ^PROSODY. 325
when the next begini with a Towel; e. g., inftead of ignAtnm
eit, weread igudf eat
3. The lait lyllable of a word ending with a cooionant if always
long if the next word hegina with fcconamnant; e.i^., manibua
tremor; here bflfl (natnraOy ibort) it made long.
4. Syiutresis contracts. two lyUaJblea into one; e. g., anriiS into
anrea (prononnced auiya).
& DuBTtsis divides one sjlkUe-iolo twoi e. gn picte, pictaii
^ 4i Hexameter Verse,
(pt.) {&) "BxXAXETZti verse is so cafldd because it^M eix meaeures,
of a foot each. The first /o«r f^et may he eitlfer dactyls or spondees ; the
Jiftk is regolariy a dactyl, the tixth a spondee.
|s^ kgW futerS' IfOglt irrOpft- rm» t^pili.D
^hftn* |dteB.».|^jtt'lMsvenft4vlb*d5.|l«f«iib||
Rem. 1. Sbmetifnes a spondee is fbond in the 5t}r plsce, especially
when anything grave or sdtom is expressed. The line is then
CBHed ipondaic.
5. T}ie final syllable of a verse is always reckoned langt e.gift%m^
in dolorem.
{h) C^uura is the separation^ by the end of a word, of syllables enter-
ing into a fbot*^ If the feet of a verse be marlted off like bars in nrasic^
wrhenever a bar falls in the middle of a word. there is a casnra ; & g.^ the
ibHowing hexameter has^ve ciesuras :
lUe la- 1 tfls niv6- 1 flm mOl- 1 H fial- 1 tfis, hyi- 1 cinth6.
(c) The casural pcnut^ in. hexameter verse is a pause or rest of the
Toice on a ciesnral syllable, designed to give harmony to the entire verse.
(1.) The' most, appiovedxasaral pause {ike heroic) falls on ihe arsis of
the Mrdfoot^ as in the following eysmpjles : .
Safilgiiti int6r«- I a R flie¥t i in«pft I riUld I tftnpfls.
ZH»l£. |t«ai«T6|ib»Hm0l^| UiU |>taa.hjHI*| cBB&o.
(9t) Ktet in excellence is the coBsnral pause in the thesis of th6 third
foot, or in the arsis of tfae^foor^ Occorring in oAer placei» H
mars the harmony nfl A»Tem.
Digitized by
Google
APPENDIX 11.
(779.) 6BSBK NOUN&
Ui DeeLiJtiM^uM^ta, w^ »» te» «, & Yoa WNnetimM 4 and dL
|,Pte«ldp-«, M, •» to, «, &
(Del-df, i, o^ vm,or6n, e, a
Orph-euf, ei eo, eiiin,pr6|, eu. eo.
(or, N. eoA, G. eof, D. «i (ei), Aoc. M poeticd.)
Atli-4«, 6, 6, Ao.orA, df, 6. (In Greek, Ci»f.)
'Poea-is, in, H im> ^i<t i I es, edn OCbns mo^/wimQ.
J 5
U DteLi
(eoi.)5 (in.))
Ner6-ii,
G. Ner«id-ii, H em, 7 (Neifl), S. | ef, am, iboi, ei. >
(«■.) 5 (i,) 5 (*i.) I
Perid-ei, it, H em, > ^ .^e.
i. J o«. 5 0, 5
.Pid-A, fli, 0, fi, <^ I (alMf <^nui, Ac)
06f. Kenten in a, gen. itii, hare dmt plor. In tUii ; thna : poemt, dat.
plnr. poemitif, not poematfimi.
(780.) EXAMPLES OF PATRONYMICS
(or NAMXI FEOM ▲ FATHIR OR ANCXITOR).
An«u, Ancfalaef, Tyndirog, Theaens, Adu(«ntii).
Ma$e. jEneddei, Anekitiddei, Tyndmides, TkeOdes* AtlatUidet,
AOaniiadm.
ita. {jEnSii,) An^iiioi, Tynddrii, Tke$SU, AOarUU,
AOaiUiai.
(781.) EXAMPLES OF NAMES
(dkritid from oni'i town or natitk covntrt).
Mate, Pena» Cres, Troi, Thnx, Laoo (Laoon), Pbcsniz.
Fern, PwU, Cretttt, Troat, Tknifo, Lacmna, Phcenma,
Cretis, Tkre$${L
Bomtnofl Clonniu Atbenienni Abderft«g (/«»., AbderUi$),
{R&wum), {qfCliuktm), {anAiheman). (qfAbdera),
Mileiiiu Arpinas
(ofMUdus), (ofArjwmm),
* For ThetHdet. Hence idet oomei from nom. in mu.
Digitized by
Google
APPENDIX III.
(788.) THS CALENDAR.
(1.) Thx Boman months had the aame nimiber of dayf M cmn, but
were differently divided.
1. The KdUndt weace the Itt day of the month.
U,TheNone$ " 5^ or 7^ day of the month.
3. The/ief " 13/;& or 1»A day of the mmitfa.
I^T We make in Marehf July, October, May,
The Nones the tevenih, the Ides iSb^ffteenik day.
In all the other months fihe 5th and 13th were nsed.
(2.) The names of the mondis are used as adjectires agreeing wilb
Kalenda, Nona, and Idas.
The Ut 0f January, | Kalendis Jannariis.
The l^ of June, I Nonis Jnniis.
The nth of September, \ Idibns Septembribns.
(3.) (a) Instead of beginning at the 1st of the month and nombering the
days regularly 2d, Sd, ho,, as we do» the Romans counted them backward
fiom the Kalends, Nones, and Ides. Thus, the 2d of January was called
the Aik day before the Nonee of January, quarto (die ante) Nonas
Jannftrias; the 3d, tertio Nonas; the 4th, pridie Nonas; the
5tli, Nonis.
{b) From the abore cases it will be seen that the day with which the
reckoning commences is inchided (except pridie), t. e., the 2<i day befixre
the Nones is tertio Nonas ; tiie 3d day before, quarto Nonas, &c.
Thel^&ofOetdber,
The 3d of June,
Tertio (die ante) Idus Octo-
bres.
Tertio (die tfite) Nonas Jn-
nias.
(c) Special care most be taken, In designatmg any day between the
Xdet of one montii and the Kaiende of another, to ensure oonrectness.
Thus, nL (die ante) Kalend. Januar. wiU be December 30; but IIL KaL
liiiass29th April, inasmooh as December has 31 days and April but 30.
do m. KaL Martias = 97th Vebmary.
Digitized by
Google
328
APPENDIX III.— CALENDAR.
(4.) The foDowing table, ezMbitm^ the ooiTespoiidence between tfaa
Roman calendar and oars, can now be readily understood :
(5.) !rAe5A<Zayi^orvt^£:afen<2(of4pra (for instance) may Be ex-
pressed in three wayji t
{a^Die q liin to «Btt«^ R^d^a^Wf' A^lf H I )ri^
{^ aiui[totK»U4rdi»# AfiPflnii.
(e) Ante diem q-aintam-Kalendai Arpx41«i»} oty tUMfi-
atdd,a.d.V:*:atApr.
Digitized by
Google
APPENDIX IV.
ABBREVIATIONS.
(783.) Thi ibUowing abbreviatioiifl of words occur in Latin anthon t
(a) HAMZ8.
A. Anlxu.
Ap. Appius.
C. Cains.
CL ClancUns.
Cn. Gnsus.
D. Decimns.
D. Dechis.
L. Lncins.
^d. JEdilia.
Ajig. Augustus.
^fo' }Mend«.
Cos. ConsuL
Coss. Consules.
B. Divus.
Bes. Designatns.
Bq. Bom. Eques Bo-
manus.
F. Filius.
{c)
A. Anno.
A. C. Anno cnrrente.
A. pr. Anno praeterito.
A. M. Anno mundL
A. Chr. Anno Christi.
A. D. Anno Domini
A. U. C. Anno urbis oondits.
B. D. Bono dedit
B. D. B. Bono dedit dicavit
B. B. C. q. Bedit dicayit oonsecra-
vitque.
B. M. Biis Manibus.
L. 8. Loco sigillL
M. 8. Mannscriptus.
P. 8. Postscriptum.
Q^B.B.V. dnod Beus bene vertat
B. V. B. E. E. V. 8i vales bene est
egoTaleo.
E
M'. Manina.
M. Marcus.
Mam. Mamercus.
M. T. C. Marcus Tulli-
us Cicero.
N. Numerius.
P. Publius.
U. duintus.
PUBLIC EXPRXS8ION8.
Id. Idus.
Imp. Imperator.
Impp. Imperatores.
Non. NonsB.
O. M. Optimus Maxi-
mus.
P. 0. Patres Con-
scripti.
PL Plebis.
Pop. Populus.
p. JGL Populus Bom.
OTHXR ABBBKYIATIONS.
Sept Septimiufl.
Serr. Senrius.
Sextus.
Spurius.
Titus.
Bex.
T.
Ti.
4*^1 Tiberius.
TulL Tullius.
Pr. Praetor.
PrsBfl Pmfectus.
Pont. Max. Pontifez
Besp. Bespublica.
S. Senatns.
8. C. Senatus consul-
tum.
8. P. O. R. Senatus po-
pulusque Bxmi.
Tr. Tribunus.
8.
8. P. B.
c
c£
e. g.
I. e.
Lc
pag. m.
q. d.
q.L
sdL
seq.
V.
▼..g.
vu.
vid.
e2
Salutem.
Salutem didt pli
caput,
confer.
exempli gratift.
id est
loco citato,
pagina mea.
quasi dicat
quantum Hbet
quantum sui&cit
scilicet
sequens.
yerbi gratia.
videUoet
vide.
Digitized by
Google
Digitized by
Google
WORD-BUILDING
READING LESSONS.
Digitized by
Google i
Digitized by
Google
WORD-BUILDING.
(784.) 1. Thi generic meaning of a word i» contained in ilt r^ci ; die
t/ptafie meaning' k gfenen^ given by its emd^img. Tbaa, in aU til* worda
am-o (Jiave), am-ov {hve), am-fttor (a^ooarV am-iaaa (friend), we
find the aavie generiO idea (^m?^) expressed by the root am -, while the
Bpecifie meaningf, J love (y^h), love (noim), lover {voaii^, friend (adjective
VOOnj, ^lpe gjivenjby tii^ endings o, or, 5 tor, lens, respectively.
2. The meanings of words are farther modified by certain pr^fixee ;
tf. ^f ir e {to go)f a,mb-iro {to go round).
X Affam, wDids. may be compoondad with each other, and form new
'Vfxodf ; e. g., with agr- (the stem of ager,/e2(2), and col- (the stem of
colore, totiU), we form agricol-a, a tiller of the Jield = a farmer.
Thus ther^i are threte mpdes of forming words : by ti^ffixeif ]»re/ixes, and
eompo8ifiQ3n. We treat them in order.
(l.) WORD-BUIL9I]f« BT 8l»FFIXS8«
(A.) Noun9.
(785.) First Declension.
1. The ending -a, snffixed to verb-stems, expresses an agent or
doer.
s.crib-^^ writer, from scrib-dre, to write.
perffig-a» deserter, from perfiig-6re, to desert.
9. -ia, -itia, witliacyectiTa-stoamm tLdit^foesHoAmeeinditioj^
itg]itav^i%. cpwardice, fBom ignav-ns, coienrdly.
prndent-ia, pnidence, from priiden(t)-% j^rikZen^.
trist-itia, sadness, from trist-is, sacL.
victor-ia, victory, from viot-or, vietorioiu
9, -Htk, with supine-stems, the action or concUtion ef ih» verb.
p i c t - n r a, painting ; pingSre (p i c t -), to paint.
prnfect-nra, prefectship; pnsficSre (prsBfeot-), to. place over,
(786.) Second Declension.
1. ^ns, -ins, with verb-stems, foim nonna denoting tibe agent or ihe
OOliPft of ti»e verb.
secv-Lr% toaerefc
fln(v)-6re, to;^.
coqn-fire, to cook.
■ erv^ms^
flav-ins* river
ooqn-Uii, cook
lud-ui, tpoHi lud.«re. ipfiay.
Digitized by dOOQ IC
334 WORD-BITILDING.
S. -am, -ium, with Teib-steinf, gives a retttlt of tiie action of tlis
V0xb.
Jng-uni, yoAe, Jung-ere, tojom.
vad-nm, fard; vad-6re, to go,
incend-iam, ^ri0; inoend-Sre, to bum.
3. -ium, with noun-stemfl, (a) an q^Eee^ or (5) an aM60i&2fl(^c of men
ezarcif ing an office or fanctioD.
(a) sacerdot'inm, ^^fioeof aacerdoa.
minister-ium, ojice of miniBter.
{b) colleg-iam, €U8emMage of ooU eg m,
conviy-ium, iusembUigeof cony ir 9,
4. -mentum, with yerb-fltema, the meant of doing what the veib
expreaaea.
teg-n-mentnm, coveringt teg-Sre, tocover*
adju-mentnm, €tid; adjuy-tre, toauiML
5. -ulam, -bulum, -cnlum, with yerb-atema, means or tna^m-
ment,
jac-nlnm, * javdin; jac-Sre. to hurl,
▼enab-ulnm, hunting-spear; yen-ari, tohunt,
yehi-culiim, earriage; yeh-dre, to carry.
Bern, onlnm ailao Bome^/aei^--the place where ! «.^^ ccBna-culnm,
cubi-cnlam. ^
6. -cru m, -atrum, with yerb-atema, |»Z0ce or thing prepared for any
purpoae.
laya-crnm, bathj lay-are, towash,
clana-trnm, lock; eland-fire, to shut,
(787.) Diminutives of First and Second Dedensions.
In a, -la, -Inm, w^ nonn-atema, form diminntiye nonna, of maacift-
line, feminine, and neater gendera.
(a) Connecting yowela i, o, u, the latter aometimea with c.
fili-o-lua, fili-o-la, little son, daughter — (filina); frater-
cnlna (frater) ; opna-calnm (opna).
{b) Sometimea 1 ia doubled: lap-iUna (lapia); codic-illaf
(oodex, codicia) ; a a c - e lln m (aacrom).
(768.) Third Dedension,
1. -tfi a, -tua (with or without i aa connecting vowel), fimn, with ad>
jectiye-atema, abatract nonna denoting quality, &c.
bon-i-taa, goodness; bon-na, good.
Digitized by
Google
WORD-BUILDINO. 335
t. (a) -or, wi& yerb-atema, the ttction or condition of the veib.
pav-or, fear} pav-«re, to/ear.
am-or, love; am-&r6> tokwe.
(b) -or, Willi lopine-stems, the agent or doer,
doct-or, teacher f doc-dre (doct-)» to teach.
monit-or, adviser; mon-«re (monrt-), to etdoite.
3. -io» with tapme-Bt&aaa, the action dike yerb, eipecially tite doing
of it.
act-io, action; ag-dre (act-), to act, do..
cant-io, caution; cav-6re (eant-), to take care.
4. -tddo, with a^jectiye-stems, the abstract quality.
fort-i-tudo^ bravery; fort-ia, braive,
(789.) Fourth Dedeneion,
Moat noana of tiie 4th dedenaioii are abttracfai finmed fimn verb-
atema or aupine-atema.
na-ua, use; nfi (ua-), touse,
mdt-na, motion; m6y-€re (mOt-), tovkove.
(790.) Fifth Declension.
1. -ea, -iea, -ities, with yeib or adjectiyeHitema, a propertyt oper^
ation, quality, dec.
fid-ea (fid-dre) ; aer-iea (aer-Are) ; fae-iei (fac-ftre) ; dur-
itiea (dnr-oa); mund-itiea (mnnd-iia).
2. [Thoae in -itiea ooexiat with othera in -itia (784, 2) ; e. g,,
manditia, daritia, &c.]
(B.) Adjectives.
(791.) First Class, oa, a, nm.
1. 'U», quality in general (ooexiating with yerb and nonn atema).
alb-na, white; alb-&re, iilb-iimen.
onry-na, curved; cury-ftre, cnry-amen.
dnr-na, hard; dnr-fire, dur-itiea,
yiy-ua, alive; yiv-gre, yit-a.
jL -Idaa and vlub, chiefly with atema of intranaittye yerba, the
quality of the yerb, witboat addition,
turg-idua, swelling; targ-«re, tosweU.
cal-idna, warm; cal-Ore, to be warm,
noc-nna, hurtful; noc-Sre, tohurt.
3. -b n n d a a, with yerb-atema, force of preaent participle, intenaified.
h.m%it9i-hxinATLn,full of hesitation; \mmitr%xe, to hesitate.
1 a c r y m a - b n n d n a, «M(9»9i^ jiraf«#e2jr ; 1 a c r y m - i r e, to tcreqp.
Digitized by
Google
3M WO&D-IUILDINO.
4. •««ndiii»MaM at basdas, goMnllj with &• adiHtinnii idtt of
ira-omAdni, jwt iww ffff ; ir«-sc-i, ta^ttomgiy.
▼ ere-cnndui, baaJ^Ml, verd-ri, tofear,
& -icuf, with DOQiHiteiiii, bdonging or rdating to a thiag.
clasa-icua, Uhmgimg to ajleei i class-ii^ ,^bee.
ciy-icQS, civie; civ-is, diizen,
6. -ens, -aceus, -iciua, with noim-stemfl, material or origin,
f^rr^ena, cfiron; ferr-um, tnm.
cbart-aceus, of paper; chart-a, jn^mt.
7. 4 BUS, with noim-atenii, nmUarityt quaUty, or materiaL
as i n-in a 8, asinine, Zi^ an om; asin-ns, anau,
mar-inns, marine} mar-e, iheiea.
crystall-inns, crystalline; orystall-n»» ayttmL
a. •«Bns» wilb MMM of t«wa» apdteg in a ot as, tkmatio^ot snch
place.
&om-anns, •i2o«um; B.oma« Some,
•i ^sms, 4aMtm% with Boon-steai% fntnet; ab mmd tm m (like tlio
English H)ns).
fam-osii«» famous; fam-a, /ame.
vino-lentns, c^runi^; yin-anoi, wine.
i7t2.). iSStooMi CIaM» is, Mk «k
1. 4s, quality in ganeiai ^w i ai s tl ii g ownmnriy wiA tteon and veib
finms).
lev-is, Zt^^; lev-Arc, lev-it%s.
9. -His, -bilis, with verb-stems, the quality of the verb, or tiie
capacity of it, in two senses, [a) izcHve and {b) passive.
(a) terri-bilis, exciting terror ; terr-fire, toterr^ifL
(d> dttc-ilis^ <io«29; dao-dre^ tottadL
am&b-ilis, amdaMe; am-ftre^ to love.
3. 4Us: (i Zpn^, with noon-stems, helongimg €ft relating^ ta a thing.
civ -Hi 8, bdonging to a citizen, civil ; cir-is, citizen,
ho s t-i li s, Ao«^i2e; hos-ti s, en«my.
{O bwjn iii that iliw, wtA volHiteaBt is Aort; with Doai-st«ia% long,}
4. -Ali B, -&r i 8, with noon-stems, of or bdbwging to.
conviv-tlis, convivial; conviv-a.
caplt-alis, capital; caput; head,
consul-ftris, consular; consnL
iw -enais, witfanamesoftowns— a«Kif(w«(^s«Ghtiyfm.
Gann^encfai, an i n k abi iant of C annsa.
Arittin-en4us, €m inkciMunt of Ariminvim,
Digitized by
Google
WORD-BUILDING. 337
(793.) Third Class, one ending.
•ax, with verb-stems, the tendency of liie verb^ geBorally in a bad
■ense.
pngn-ax, pugnacious; pngn*re, toJigkL
rap<ax, rapacious; rap-6re, to sdze,
(C.) Verbs.
(794.) First Conjugation,
1. -are, generally a transitive ending, -vcith noon-stems.
numer-are, to count; namer-as, number.
nomin-are, tonatnc; nomen (nomin-is), name.
2. PREquENTATivE verbs, expressing a repetition or increase of the
action of the original verb, are formed by the endings -are and
•itare; thos:
(a) -are, added to snpine-stems.
cnrs-Sre, to run to and fro; carr^re {cnr a -urn), torun,
dormit-are, to be sleepy; dom^e (dormit-nm), to sleep,
ip) -I tare, added to verb-stems,
rog-itare, to ask often; rog-are, to ask.
vol-Itare, to fly to and fro; vol-are» to fly.
3. -ar^ deponent-ending, with nomi-stems, is much used for express-
ing " to beihat which, or of the character that,** the noun indicates.
/./^».vl■ «,; i to €Utend as com- I , ■ -^ • \
comit-ari, ^ natUon- > comes (com it-is), coinpanttwi.
domin-ari, to rule as master ; diO-min-iLB, master.
(795.) Second Conjugation.
•€re, frequently an intransitive endings with noon and adjective stems,
alb-ere, tobe white; alb-ns, white. ^
luc-ere, to shine; lax (Inc-is), light.
(796.) Third Conjugation.
Inchoative verbs express the beginning or increase of the action of
the verb from which they are derived. They are formed by adding
sc to the verb-stem, with the connecting-vowels a, e, or i. Most of
them are formed on stems of verbs of second conjugation,
pallesc-fire, to grow pale; pall-Sre, to be pale.
labasc-dre, to totter; lab-are, to waver.
(797.) Fourth Conjugation,
Pesidxrative verbs express a desire of that which is implied in tiie
primitive, and are formed by adding -nrlre to snpme-stems.
e s - £i r Ire, to want to eat ; ed«re (es -urn), to eat.
Fp
Digitized
by Google
888 WORD-BUILDING.
(ll.) WORD-BUILDINO BT PREFIXES.
(T98.) Under thia head we place only tlie inseparable preposUions {
▼iz., amb-, dis- (di-), re-, se.
1. Amh- = about, around, on ho0i Hdef ; e. g.t amb>tre, to go
round (amb+fare).
^^ Before /> the 6 is dropped ; e. g., am-plector : before CHKKmdB
amb is changed into an ; e. g., an-ceps, an-qnira
2. D i s (d i) = asunder ; e. ^., di s - j a n g 6 r e, to dujoin (dis+jnng6re).
^^ Di is nsed before d, g, l,m; e. g., digerere, &c Before/ the
8 is assimilated; e.g., differre (dis+forre)>
3. B, 6 = back, again, away, unr ; e. ^., r 6 p e ] 1 e r e, dnve-b<zck (re+
pellere) ; r€fic6re, r^ (rt+facere).
^^ Before vowels, d is inserted ; e. ^., rS d-ir e (re+ire).
[Re long occun only in rSfert]
4. &6 = a8ide; e.g., gedncdre, lead cutrof, seduoe (od-fdncere) ;
flfipondre, lay atide (sd-fponere).
(ill.) WORD-BUILDIire BT COItPOBfriOF.
I. PrepOBiHons in Composition ^toUh other Words.
(799.) J^* Most prepositions are used to form compoond Words, and
generally modify their meaning in a way easily understood; e. g., s tlir e,
to standi pre stare, to stand before, to exod. We z»tice here only
those which present some pecoliarities.
1. a, ab, abs — away, from, {a) a is used before m and v; e. g.,
a-Bsittere, to send away, lose; a^yertere, turn away. (5) au \b
used before ferre andfugdre: anferre, anfngdre. (c) a«, be-
fore p or i|;7.' asperto, asi)ernor.
8. ftd ox <o. («) Assimilated before consonants, esKcept d, j, 9, m ; e. g.,
arripSre, assurgftre, addncdre, 6co. (b) d dro|^>ed before
gn; e.g., agnoscSre, agnatus.
3. con (a variation of cum) = witk. (a) co before k and voweLi ; e. g.,
co-ortus, co-hibere. {b) com before b, p:* com-burttre,
Com-pelldre. (c) Assimilated before 4 9n> r.* col -ligdre, com-
morSre, cor-ripfire.
4. e or ex = out of. (a) Assimilated before /; e. g., effero (ex-H
fero). {b) e before liquids and b, d, g, v.
Digitized by
Google
WORD-BUILDING. 339
(h) Changed into Im before b, p; e.g., imbibdre (in+bibere);
impont^re (inH-ponere).
6. ob = against; e. g., obtrnddre (ob + tradere), thrust against,
17* Assimilated befbre Cff,p; e. g^ oo-cidere (ob+cadere) ;
of-ferre, op-ponSre.
7. j^ro = forth, forroard ; e. g., projicfire (ppo+jacere), cast forth.
EP* Before vowels, d is inserted ; e. ^., prod-ess e (pro+esse).
8. prm^b^bre; e, g., precidSre (pne+cedenX ^ fff b^fort, to
surpass,
9. Buh = undert from under; e,g,, sabdacdre^ to draw from under,
(a) Generally assinulated; e. g,t anm-moyOre, sup-ponerey Ac
{b) Sometimes sns-; e, g^ sas-cip6re, sns-tinSre, &c.
10. trans = across, over; e. g., transdacere, to lead across,
B^ Trft, instead of trans, occurs in trtdere, tr&ducSre, tr&-
jicdre.
(800.) XL Adverbs in Composition vUh other Words.
1. ne, Yd, have a privative force; e, g., nefas, wicked (ne+fai);
y 6s anus, insane (vS+sftnos).
2. benS, weU; malS, ill; satis, enough; e. g., beneficinm, a
good deed; maleficiam, an evU deed; satisfacSre, to satisfy
(ss to do enongfa).
3. bis (and other numerals), ttoiee (tMce), icct bicorpor, two4>od-
ied (bis-foorp^ns).
(801.) m. Nouns and ABjeetives in ComposiHoH wt^ oAer Words.
J^f^ When a noah or adjective is compounded with anoliher word,
the oooaecting vowel is always short t.
ttgrI-cola(agr-+ool-), ahmshaniman.
arti-fex (artH-&o-^ an artificer.
(802.) rV. Verbs in Composition with other Words,
None occur, except In composition with facer e ; e.g., cftlefacero
(calere+ftcere)) to make hot; patefaoete (pat«re*ffiiioere)> to
lay open.
{ py Observe that the vowel a in f acere remains vaohanged.]
(803.) V. Comm^on Vowd-ckanges in Composition.
1. a into t; e. g., arrlpgre (ad+rapere), conflcSre (con-f-fa-
cere), constitaSre (con+>tataere), &c.
3. a into e (more rarely) { e. g., asoeudSre (a,d+>candere).
3. « into t (not always) ; e. g., collig«re (con+legere), absti-
nfire (abs+tenere), &c
4. « into i; e. g., occidfire («b+o»dere)^ riquir«r« (r«+
qusBrere).
Digitized by
Google
READING LESSONS.
Gallia est onmii dtnn^ in partes tres. — ^Belgss anam inco-
lunt ;* Aqmtani alteram ; CeltsB tertiam. — ^Hi, ipsorum* finguft'
Celts ^ appellantur ;* nostra* linguA, Galli.^
Gallia est omnis divisa in partes tres ; q-u ar u m unam inco-
lunt BelgsB, alteram Aquitani, tertiam qui^ ipsormn linguft
Celtae, nostra Galli appeUantor.
Hi omnes inter se differant.^ — Lingua, institiitis,^ le^bus dif-
feront. — Garumna* flumeo Gallos ab Aquitanis dividit. — Ma-
trdna flumen Gallos a Belgis dividit. — Horum omnimn^^ fortis-
simi smit Belgse. — Ab humanitate^^ Provinciae longe absmit.^'—
A cultu^' ProTinciaB longiBsime absimt. — Minime ad eos merca-
tores^^ commeant. — Qusedam^ animos efieminant.^^^ — Qusedam
ad effeminandos animos pertinent.^'
Hi omnes lingua, institutis, legibus, inter se differunt. — Gallos
ab Aquitanis Grarumna flumen, a Belgis Matr5na e t Sequ&na
dividit. — Horum omnium fortissimi sunt Belgs, propterea
quod a cultu at que humanitate Provinciae longissime ab-
sunt, minime que ad eos mercatores saepe commeant, atque
ea, q u as ad effeminandos animos pertinent,^^ important.^
Proximi sunt Germanis.^ — Germani trans BJienmn incohmt
— ^Belgae cum Germanis continenter^^ bellum gerunt.
I 435, c— a in-fcolere.— s 716.^* 694, 2, R.—^ ad-j-pellare f obsolete),
799, 2, a.— « 167, d, 4.-7 799, ^•.—8 786, 2, institaere = in-fstataere,
803, 1.— 9 225, a.— »o 697, a.—" 788, 1 (humanuB), homanitas = refinement.
— 1« ab-j-sam, 799, 1. — ^ cultas (civilization), from colere (colt-), 789.—
i< mercator, from mercari (mercat-), 788, 2, b. — 1«> Some things. — ^6 eff^minare
(to make geminate), ex-|-i^minare, 799, 4, a : fdminare, from f^mina fw(m-
an), 794, 1.— it tend to make minds geminate, 739.-^8 per-j-tenere, 803»
3.— 19 in-f-portare, 799, 5, ft.— » 704, 4.— ai from oontineiui (oon-j-tenere),
215, 2, b.
* Ipsorum and nostra precede lingni, instead of following it^ because of.
P9td to each olbtr, and therefore mfkatic.
Digitized by
Google
READING LESSONS. S41
Proximi sunt Germanis, qui trans Rhennm mcdiint, qui
b u 8 c u m ^ contiiieDter bellum gemnt.
II.
Helvetii quoque^ reliquos* G^os virtute' prsecedunt.^ — Fere
quotddianis praeliis cum Germams contendunt. — ^Aut^ suis finibus
Germanos prohibent,^ aut ipsi in eorum finibus bellum gerunt.
Qua^ de causa^ Helvetii quoque reliquos GaUos virtute
praecedunt, q u o d » fere quotidianis praeliis cum Germanis con-
tendunt, quum aut suis finibus eos prohibent, aut ipsi in eorum
finibus bellum gerunt.
Galli unam partem obtinent.*o — ^Unam partem Gallos" obti-
nere dictum est.*^ — "EH pars initium capit a flumine Khdd&no.
— Continetur Garumnft flumine,^ Oceano,^' finibus" Belgarum.
— ^Attingit^* ab Sequ&nis flumen Khenum. — Vergit ad Septen-
triones. — ^Belgse ab extremis^* Galliae finibus oriuntur. — Perti-
nent^* ad inferiorem partem fiuminis Rheni. — Spectant* in
Septentriones et orientem^^ solem.
Eorum una pars, quam^^ Gallos obtinere dictum est, ini-
tium capit a fiumine Rhodano; continetur^^ Gkirumna flumine,
Oceano, finibus Belgarum; attingit etiam ab^ Sequanis et
Helvetiis flumen Rhenum; vergit ad Septentriones. — Belgas
ab extremis GaUiae finibus oriuntur; pertinent ad inferiorem
partem fluminis Rheni ; spectant in Septentriones et orientem
Bolem.
Aquitania a Gbrunma flumine ad Pyrenaeos montes pertinet.
— ^Una pars Oceani est ad^ Hispaniam. — Aquitania ad earn
« 125, IL, b,
1 duo que never begins a sentence. — ^ fix)m relinqaere (reliqii-)* 791, 1.
—J 718, in valour.—^ 799, 8.— » 519, R. 4.-6 721.— » 89, II.— » aua de cau-
sa =/<>r vhich reason,—^ becawe.-^^^ ob-f-tenere, 803, 3.— ii 751.— 1« 751,
J2. 2^—13 716.— 14 ad-f-tangere, 799, 2, a, 803, 1.— !« 78, II., b.—^^ Pertinent
zrsthey extendi per-ftenere.— " 438, a.— is 759.— 19 U bounded.— » on tha
side off or near.
* Spectant in Septentriones, &,t.x tkeylook huoihe north and ihs ri$iit^ m»i
i. e^ vieif He in a N.E. direction.
Fp2
Digitized by
Google
342 EBADiNa LKsaoife.
ptvtom OeMtti. qam Mt ad HispaaiRiKit pertmet— Speetak inter
occasum*^ wAis et Septentriooea.
Aquitania a Granmma flumine ad Pyrenaeos moDtes, et earn
partem Oceam, quae est ad Hispaniam, pertinet; spectat* in-
ter occasmn solis et Septentrioses.
III.
Orgetorix nobilis fait, — Apud Helvetioa nobilissimiia luit
Orgetorix. — Apud Helvetios long6 ditissimas^ fuit Orgetorix. —
Is regni cupiditate' inductus conjurationem^ nobiUtatis^ fecit. —
Is civitati^ persuadet, ut de fiuibus auis exeant.^ — De finibus suis
exeunt. — ^PerfacUe erat totius Gallias imperio' potiri — Perfacile
esse^ (dixit), quum virtute omnibus prs^starent,^ totiua GaUiaa
imperio potiri.
Apud Helvetios longe nobiUssimus e t ditissim^s fiiit Oi^geU
orix. — Is, Marco Messalft et Marco Pisone cona^l*
ibu8,^<> regni cupiditate inductus, conjurationem nobilitatis fecit;
et civitati persuasit, ut de finibus suis cum omnibua oopiia
exirent:^^ perfiicile esae (dixit), quum virtute omnibus prs^-
tarent, totius GaUisd imperio potirL
Id &cUe eis pQrBiiadet.^*-^Id hoc facilius eis persuasit. — Un-
dique aaturft loci^ Heketii coiitinentar.''«^Un& ex parte ccmti-
nentur flumine Rheno latissimo atque akassimo. — Altera ex
parte continentur monte Jur& altissimo; tertift ex parte laen
Lemanno et flumine Rhodano. — Flumen Khenus agrum Hel-
vetinm a Qermanis diyidit.^->Mon8 Jur& est inter Sequaaea et
Hehetbs.-^^lnmeB Khodaima proi^inciam sestram ab Heke-
ttis dividit.
*L 78d, torn occidore, obrf^oi^dere.
1 371, R. 1.— » fttim ciipdd-w, by 788, 1,--* 788, 3^ «?oM4wwfe^-* TO8, 1.
— s 704, 2: he pertuadoB the. ftate ; i. e.^ the eUizetu.-'^ ut ejmwlb^tago
Ota of: anb^ prea., 754 (ex+ire).— ? ibl., 7X8.-^ Tbe tenteom pen^odii
use, iLc^ ifl ia orat, obliqua; 769, a, gppUeii.— » 798, 8-— "> 458, 6.-^1 Why
ifl exirent in subj. imperf.? 748. — ^s saadere, to recommend} penpuaderf^
reconuaetid thonmgbly, L e., persuade,-^^ by the nature of tie country,
* It looJu between the setting of the tun and the northf i. Ot i« 4 N^W^ d(ntGf90n»
Digitized by
Google
mBAOlNO LBSBONS. 343
Id hoc ftieitius eis perstiadet, quod undiqae loci naturft He]-
votii Gontineatur ; una ex parte, flumine Kheno latissimo atque
altissimo, qui agrum Helvetium a Germanis dividit ; alterft ex
paito, moBite JurU attiasimo, qui est inter Sequanos et Helve-
tio9; tertil^ lacu Lemanno et flumine Rhodano, qui provin-
ciam Qostrwn ab Helvetiis dividit.
Minus latd vagantur.-^His rebus 0t,^ ut mnva late vagen<!>
tur."^ — ^Bellum inferunt.^* — ^BeHum jnferre" possunt.-*- Minus
facile helium finitimis^ inferre pessunti — ^His rebus fit, ut minus
facile bellum finitimis inferre possent. — Magno d(^re affieie-
bantur.^^ — ^Bellandi*° erant cupidi.**
His rebus fiebat, ut et minus late vagarentur, et minus
facile finitimis bellum inferre possii^ — Quit de causa, homines
beflandi cupidi oMigno dok»e afficiebantur.
Pro^ muHittt^mo* hominum, angustoa habebant fines.^-Pro
gloria^ belli atque fortitudinis,' angustos habebant fines. — An-*
gustos se^ fines habere arbitrabantur.^^--Hi (i. «., fines) miUia
passuum ducenta (CO.) patehant.^-— Hi in longitudinem' miBia'
paasuum ducenta et quadra^nta (XL.) patebant.
Pi'o multitudine autem* hominum, et pro glo)»ia b^
atque fortitudinis, angustos se fines habere arbitrablintur, qui
in longitudinem miUia passuum CCXL., in latitudinent
oen(uBi et ootD^ta (CLXXX.) patebant.
Ducti sunt. — Adducti^ sunt* — Moti sunt. — ^Permoti*°' sunt. —
Auctoritate^^ Orgetorigis adducti et permoti simt. — Quaedam ad
proficiscendum^2 pertinent. — Constituerunt^ ea comparare.^'* —
Constituerunt jumenta et carros emere.^'^-'-Constituerunt se-
1* By these circumstances it is brought about.-^'^ 754, 2.-—*^ in+fei^©' —
" 731.— 18 704, 3.— w nd+facer©, 7»d, 2; 803, 1,— » 736-— 3i oiipftroy 7»t, 2.
1 For, or, in, view af.^~^ mvlt^oBt 788, 4.— » 7^futationfi>r toot and cour-
H^e.— * 471.— » from «pbit-er, l^ 794, 3.-^ €xUnded.^f 712.— 8 522, ft.—
» Ihwjti sunt= they tetre led : adducti iunts ihey were led to, i. e., «^y
were induced.— -"^^ Moti sunt = they were moved : permoti Bxmt=iihey were
thor(nighly mov^d, I e., prevailed upon.—^^ 788, \.-~^ 487.— 1» oon+ftata-
ere, 803, 1.—" con+parare, 799, 3, 6.— i* 731.
Digitized by
Google
344 EEADING LB880N8L
mentet magnas facere,^ ut in itmere copia framenti snppet-
eret.^^ — Cum prozimis ciritatibiis pacem et amicitiam^ co]>
firmant.
His rebus adducti, et auctoritate Orgetorigis permoti,
constitaeraiit, ea, qu»^ ad proficisoendmn pertindreiit, com-
parare; jamentoram et camSram quam maximum nu-
merum^ coemere;^ sementes quam maximas^ facere, ut
in itinere copia frumenti suppeteret ; cum proximis ciritatibus
pacem et amicitiam confirmare.
Biennium Helvetiia^ satis erat. — ^Biennium sibi*^ Helvetii satis
esse duxerunt.'^ — Ad eas res conficiendas^ biennium satis erat.
— Profectionem^ legeconfirmant.^ — In tertium annum profec-
tionem lege confirmant. — Ad eas res conficiendaE^ Orgetorix
deligitur.^ — Is sibi legationem^ suscepit.^^ — ^In eo itinere per-
suadet Castico. — Casticus Catamantalddis erat filius, Sequ&nus.
—Pater Castici regnum in Sequanis multos annas'^ obtinuerat.
— Pater Castici a senatu popuM Romani amicus appellatus erat.
— Orgetorix Castico persuadet, ut regnum in dvitate sua oceu-
paret.^
Ad eas res confici^idas biennium sibi satis esse duxerunt;
in tertium annum profectionem lege confirmant. Ad eas res
conficiendas OrgetcMix deligitur. Is sibi legationem ad c i vi-
ta t e s suscepit. In eo itinere persuadet Castico, Catamentale-
dis filio, Sequano, cujus pater regnum in Sequanis multos
annos obtinuerat, eta senatu populi Komani amieus appellatus
erat, ut regnum in civitate sua occuparet, quod^ pater ante
habuerat.
V.
Item Dumnori^ persuadet. — Dunmorix erat ^duus. —
Dumnorix erat frater Divitiaci. — Bumnorix principatum^ in
16 to make great towingt, i. e., to sow muck land. — ^f Sub+petere, 799,
fl, €1, neuter; BVLppeteaeet=^ might be in store: nibjtmc. by 754, 1.— !« 785, 2.
— ^9 759, Rem,--so j^ great a number as possible.— ^^ oon+emere, to buy
together, to buy up, 799» 3.—^ Am great sowings as possible. — ^ 704."
** reckoned.— » 496, J.— » 788, 3.-37 They Jut the departure by a law.^
« de+legere, 803, 3.—* 799, 9, *.— » 712,^M 754.—* 759.
> chief power, from princeps.
Digitized by
Google
READING LESSONS. 345
civitate obtinebat. — Dumnorix plebi' acceptos' erat. — Dnm-
norigi, ut idem conaretur persuadet,* eique filiam suam in
matrimoniuin dat.
Itemque Dumnorigi ^duo, fratri Divitiaci, qui eo tem-
pore^ pnncipatum in civitate obtinebat, ac maxim3<^ plebi ac-
ceptus erat, ut idem conaretur persuadet, eique filiam suam in
matiimonium dat.
PerfacOe &ctu^ erat conata perficere.^ — Ipse suae civitatis
imperium obtenturus erat. — ^Totius^ Gallise plurimum Helvetii
possunt. — ^Non est dubium quin plurimum Helvetii possint.^ —
Ipse illis regnum conciliatnrus^o erat. — ^Ipse, suis copiis suoque
exercitu, illis regnum conciliaturus erat^
{Oblique Narration, 769.) "Perfacile factu esse," illis
pro bat, ** conata perficere, propterea quod ipse suas
civitatis imperium obtenturus esset; non esse dubium, quin
totius Gallia^ plurimum Helvetii possent;" ** Se, suis copiis
suoque exercitu, illis regna conciliaturum," confirmat.
Helvetii jam^^ se^ ad eam rem paratos esse arbitrantur. —
Oppida sua omnia, numero ad duodecim,^ incendunt. — Vices
sues ad quadringentos incendimt. — Reliqua^^ privata sedificia^^
incendunt. — FrumenWn secum portaturi erant. — Frumentum
omne comburunt. — Domum^^ reditionis^^ spes sublata^^ est.—
Paratiores ad omnia pericula subeunda^^ ^rant.
U b i ^ jam se ad eam rem paratos esse arbitrati sunt, oppida
sua omnia, numero ad duodecim, vices ad quadringentos, reliqua
privata aedificia incendunt; frumentum omne, praeter quod
secum portaturi erant, comburunt, u t, domum reditionis spe^^
sublata,'^ paratiores ad omnia pericula subeunda e 8i» e n t.^
— . ^^^ .
3 702, was (Kceptable to the common people (a £ELVOiirite). — 3 ad+capere,
803, 1. — ^ 725.-5 376. — c 380. It was a very easy thing to do. — "* to aC'
complisk, per + facere, 803, 1. — b Qf the whole of Oaul, the Helvetians
are the most powerftd.-^ 754, 4.— lo 446.—" jam = oi /<m^.— la 751.— 13 in
nwmher (amonnting) to twelve. — i* relinqnere. — ^'* 801, SBdes + facere.—
w 713, Rem. 2.— 17 788, 3. — w sab-ffero.— 19 Bub+ire, gerundive, 739.—
M when.-^^ 750.— s» 754.
* CfiBBur ofben lues the historical present, ai in tliis fawtance, initead of the per-
fectaoriflt If persuadet were used reafly as tbe preaent^ then conaretur
wouM have to be c one tur, by 748 ; but, as the historical presenl^ it requires a
past tense In the subordinate sentence'
Digitized by
Google
VL
Omnibot rebiis* ai protfc
^■a<be ad ripam RkodmBi
pcTvpoit. *^ D^ tjus advvaCaF Hfllwtii
Lefstos ad evm mfttwH- — H e i i ctii a eat
maleficio^ iter
C«9ari ^««m id mmtmmam caaat»^ eoa per
I pudkiwi , et qaam
vlteriorem cqb-
Ubi de «9aa •dfrat« Hel-
ad aiafli nttuBt,^ qui diea-
I, — <r» »— ^ w» ■ ^».w. tdU mmlffirio iUrperpmma^
€iam facert^ proptaraa qmod €kimd iUr h m h eamt nutbim;
ngmrc, itf 9M wohmtaU id wMJaeere ImmL"
maximla potaat
teiidit, et ad
▼edi tcitkii es facti
Camn, caawil, ab Hehratiia oodaiia ersL — £xer-
— awrab Ilel fe tMi prfw*^ eiat, et aob jogmn
E& Caesar me m oi U" teaebat. — C o pcede Ddum'* oc
Facaha^ per pnmnciam itinens fuaen^ dod dftta est. —
' TA^<W*'*«'- — ' oao+renire ; subj. pra^ 766.— » 789, 5. — * 750. — » iter
bctg^=to wuMkejourwtf = to aiondL — • 731- — ' 751. — 8 ^dveiiire (ftdTent-]^
789.— » 468, h.—» 800, 2.—" 754.— « 757, A. 2.— » histoncal present.
— '* 761, 1- — ^ oWiqae namtiaa. — >• exercere, 789. — '^ peDere. — w me-
iBsril t en eb st, hdd t» ig w oi j, i e., tvjmmJ mnJL^-^ 737 (esse undsfstood,
904, a).— 9" power of wtof^iMg tkromgky or ^lenmmim to wrct Mi'si^A
ftcolUB, 788, 1, from iKnMs, lacio.— » 496.
Digitized by
Google
^^ ^!^^^VK
READING Ldla^NS: " * * -v ^ ^^ j
Homines inimico^ aoimo ab
perant.
Caesar, quod memoria tenebat, L. Cassium consulem occi-
sum, exercitum q u e ejus ab Helvetiis pulsum et sub jugum
missum, concedendum non putabat ; n e q u e,'' homines inim-
ico animo, data facultate per provinciam itineris faciendi, tern-
perataros ab injuria^ ^et maleficio, existimabat.
VII.
Hujus legationis Divico prioceps fuit. — Divico, bello Cassi-
ano,* dux Helvetiorum fuerat. — ^Is ita cum Caesare egit.' — Hel-
vetii in earn partem ibunt, atque ibi erunt, ubi Caesar constitu*
erit.' — Caesar veteris incommodi* reminiscitur.* — Caesar pristinae
virtutis^ Helvetiorum reminiscitur.
(Oblique Narration^ present time J) Is ita cum Caesare
a g i t : " iSi pacem populus Romanus cum Helvetiis facia ^,*
in earn partem ituros^ atque ibi futures^ Helvetios, ubi eos
Ciesar con&tituerit atque esse voluerit; sin bello per^
sequi persevere t,^^ reminiscatur^^ et veteris incommodi
populi Romani et pristine virtutis Helvetiorum,
Hujus legationis Divico princeps fiiit, qui bello Cassiano dux
Helvetiorum fuerat. Is ita cum Ciesare e git (obi. narr., paU
time) : *♦ Si pacem populus Romanus cum Helvetiis fa ceret^
in earn partem ituroa^ atque ibifuturos Helvetios, ubi Casar eos
constituisset aique esse voluisset; sin bello persequi
perseveraret, reminisceretur et veteris incommodi
populi Romani et pristine virtutis Helvetiorum,^^
« 722.— » neqae existimabat = nor did he think.— ^ outrage.
^ In the Cassian war, i. e., in which Cassias had been the Roman gen-
eral.—'i ffe treated with Camar as follows.-^ 803, 1 ; subj. by 766.— < in-
commodmn, disaster, in-fcommodtiB, 799, 5 ; con+modas, 799, 3, c ; gem-
tive by 698, a, 2. — 6 rg+miniscor, stem of memini, weno.— » vir, gen., 699,
a, 2. — T Observe carefully the tenses in this and the following paragraph.
— B IftheRanum people will make peace.-* 484, ».— lo M8, *.— »» ««8, b.
Digitized by
Google
348 READING LESSONS.
His Cssar ita^* respoodet. — CsBtftri nihil dnbitmtidms" dator.'^
— Leg&ti Hehretii quasdam res commemoraTdrunt.^ — ^Eas res
Cssar in memoria tenet.^ — £o'^ Cssari minus dubitationis
datur, qnod eas res, quas legati Helvetii commemoraverunt, in
memoria tenet. — Eas res graviter" fert.** — Eoe res non merito*>
popilH Rom&ni acciderunt." — Eas res graviter fert, quod non
merito populi Romani acciderunt. — Eo^ gravius fert, quo^
minus merito Populi Romani acciderunt.
His Caesar ita responded* (oblique narroHont present
time) : ^*Eo stbi minus dubitationis dari^ quod eas resj qtuts
legati Helvetii commemoravirint, memoria ieneat:
atque eo gravius ferre^ quo mintLS merito populi Bom^ini
accidirinL**
His Caesar ita respondit (oblique narration, past time) :
** Eo sibi miniu c^l^bitationis dari, qw>d eas res, quas legati
Helvetii commemor assent, memoria tenlret: atque eo
gravius ferre, quo minus merito popuU Momani acct-
diisenU**
vm.
Helvetii postdro die^ castra ex eo loco movent. — Idem' Caesar
fiicit. — Quas in partes' hostes iter faciunt ?^— Equitfttum^ omnem
prsemittit.^ — Hi videbunt, quas in partes hostes iter faciant.^ —
Equitatus ex omni Provincia et ^duis atque eorum sociis coac-
tus* erat. — Hunc equitatum praemittit, qui videant," quas in
partes hostes iter faciant.^ — Hi cupidius^^* novissimum^^ agmen
inseqtfimtur.^' — Cum equitfttu Helvetidrum proelium commit-
w as foOowt.—'^^ 788, 3, dnbitare (dubita*.).-J* To C^ar nothing of
doubt is given = Ceesar has no doubt. — ^^ con + memorare (memor). —
i« holds in memory, i. e., remembers.^-^'^ On this aoconnt Casar heu less
douht, because. — ^« 215, 2, a. — *» ferre graviter = to bear heavily, to be in-
dignant at.—^ 7] 6.— 31 acddere = ad+cSdere, 803, 1, to happen. — « By
so much. — 33 ify how much. — ^ Observe the moods and tenses carefi2% in
tills and the following paragraph of oblique narration.
1 725. — 3 150. — * Into what parts (of the ooontiy) 7 — ^ 765. — * Sqiutare
(eqaitat-). 789.—^ 795, 8.— ^ 766.-8 had been collected ; oogere = oan+ag-
ere. — 9 who may see, i. e., to see, 761, 1.— "> too eagerly, adv., 376. — ^^ novis*
simom agmen s the newest rank, i. e., the rear rank. — ^^ in+se<|Qi.
Digitized by
Google
READING LESSONS. 349
tout. — Alieno^ loco pitBlinm committnnt. — Panel de nostra
cadunt.
Postero die castra ex eo loco movent: idem Caesar facit;
equitatumqne omnem ad numdrum quattuor millium,
quern ex omni provincia et iCduis atque eorum sociis coactum
h a b 3 b a t, praemittit, qui videant quas in partes hostes iter iaci-
ant. — Qui, cupidius novissimum agmen insecuti/'* alieno loco
cum equitatu Helvetiorum proBlium committnnt, et pauci de
nostris cadunt.
Hoc prcelio sublati" sunt Helvetii. — Quingentis equitibus
tantam mnltitudlnem equitum propnl^rant.^^ — ^Audacius^^ sub-
8ist6re*« ccepSrunt. — Nonnunqoam^^ et** prcetio^^ nostros laces-
s^re coeperunt. — Caesar sues a proelio continebat.** — Hostem
rapinis,*' pabulationibnsqne prohib6re»* Tolebat. — Hoc satis
habebat in praesentia.^
Quo proelio sublati Helvetii, quod quingentis equitibus
tantam multitudinem equitum propulerant, audacius subsistere,
nonnunquam et novissimo agn^ne proelio nostros lacessere coep-
erunt. — Caesar sues a proelio continebat, ac satis habebat in
praesentia hostem rapinis pabulationibusque^ prohibere.
IX.
Multa^ antdhac tacndraf Liscus. — Haec oratijhie' Caes&ris
adductus proponit^. — Sunt nonnuUi,'^ quorum auctoiitas apud
plebem plurlmum^ valet.— Hi priv&tim^ plus possunt? quam ipsi
i* In apUux ncft tiieirownt 1. e., on disadvantageous ground. — ^* 451, c. —
IB gdb+latiu, irreg. perf. of toUere : the Helvetians were elated. — ^^ they had
driven qff, pro4T»ellere. — i^ 376. — 18 to halt, sab-Hristere ; inf., 731. — i^ non
-f-nanqoam, not never, i. e., sometimes. — ^ also. — ^ by an assault. — ^ to
hold together, i. e., to restrain. — 33 721, from plunder and from foraging
parties. — S4 pro-Hbabere. — ^ aoc. pi. of prmenf ; in inrsaientia (tempora),
for the present. — » 517^ «,
I Many things, before this, Liseus had kept seer^.—^ tacere, intrans =
to be sUent ; trans = to keep secret.-^ 788, 3, orare (ortt).— * prtH-p<mere,
to set before, to relate. — ^ non+nolliu, not none, i. e., some. — ^ phmmom
▼alet = aoails very much (has very great weightj.^^ 915, 3. — » plus poa-
gnnfc = can more, i. e., have more power.
Ga
Digitized by
Google
8M KIADING LBSSOMS.
magirtr&tiis.* — ^Hi seditiasa^ atqae impFdba^ onUwne muItitQ*
dinem deterrent.^^^ — Fmmentam non confdmnt.*' — Hi moltltu*
dinem deterrent, ne frumentam conferant.^^ — Ipsi quidem prin-
cip&tum GrallisB obtindre non possunt. — Satius^^ eat Gallorum
quam Romandram impwia perfeire.^'
Si Helvetios superavdrint^^ Rom&iii, una^ emu refiqua Gallia
^duis libert&tem eripient.^^ — Dubitare non debent, qain Koma-
ni iBlduia Ubertatem aint erept&ri.3<> — Sati^s eat ai jam principa-.
turn Galliae obtinere non possint, Gallorum quam Komanorum
imperia perferre.
Tum demum Liscua,^ oratione CaBsaris adduetua, quod aQtea
tacuerat pri^nit.— (Oo^ obUpm) i ** E^sae nonnuUos, qw>rum
auctoritas apud plebem plurimum valeat; qui pHvatim plus
posaint quam ipai magistratus; hos seditioaa atque improba
oratione multitudinem deterr^re, ne firumentum conferant,
quod prsstare debeant. Si jam principatum Gallic obtinere
non possint, Gallorura quam Romanorum imperia perferre
satius esse, n e q u e dubitare debere, quin si Helvetios super-
averint Roman!, una cum reliqua Crallia i£duis libertatem aint
erepturi."
X.
Hac oratione Lisci, Dumndrix, Divitiaci frater, designabatur.^
—Id Caesar senti@bat.' — Pluribus praesentibus' eas res jactari*
nolebat.—^Celeriter^ concilium d|mittit ; J^ii^um retlnet, —
Quaerit,^ ex solo,^ ea qua^ in oonventuB di^rat* — ^Pioit Uberius^
atque audacius,^ — £&dem secrSto^® ab aliia q^usrit. — ^Repfirit"
esse vera.
« Th^magistrtUet tkemaehet.-^^ 7»1, 9 (•edi(ao).^^i in-HnrobaB, 799, 5.—
18 de+ten*re.— J3 con+ferre, contribute.—^* ne oooferant, that they may
not contribute^ i. e., deter them/rem coxtribiuting, 546, h. — ^ Satiiu, eom^
por. of satia, 376: it U better. — !• per+ferref to endure.-^'' 542, ft, 3.-!-
iB they win wrest liberty from the^duans, together with the reet ofQauL —
w 6+raper6, 803, 1.— so 754, 4.— ai Then, jinaUyf then, andnottiU then).
1 wcu alluded to^ de+signare.-'-* woe aware of. — » 750, many being
present, i. e., in the presence cf many. — ^ 794, 2, a; from j acio (jact-) :
jactare s: to toss to and fro ; hence, to discuss. — ^ 215, 2. — ^ He inquires
into.—i ex golo = ofhimahne.-** 78^.^^ 376.^^9 preo^tOy^^^ Hejhsde
(the statements J are true.
Digitized by
Google
BEADING UBSSOKB. 351
Ipse est Bumodrix,^ summa auclacia," magna apad plebem
propter liberalitatem gratia,^^ cupldus rerum^^ noT&nmi. — Com"
pltires aDno9^^ portoria^^ reliqu^ue omnia ^duorum vectigalia
habet,— Haec vectigalia parvo pretio^* redemta sunt.^^ — Vecti-
galia^ parvo predo redemta habet, propterea quod^ illo^ licente,*^
contra lic^ri^ audet nemo. — His rebus suam rem familitrem
auxit. — ^His rebus facuHates^ ad largiendum^ magnss compar*
ftvit. — Magnum numerum equitatus suo sumptn^ semper alit.-^
Magnum numerum eqmtatus semper ebrcnm se habe!t.--T.^on
aolum domi,^ sed etiam apud finitunas oiYitates largitei^ peCest
Csesar hao oratione Lisci Dumnodgem, Diyiliaoi fratrem*
design&ri sentiebat : sed, quod pluribus prsssentibus eas res
jactari nolebat* oeleriter eoncUium dimittit, Liscum retinet:
quaerit, ex solo, ea quae in oonventu dixerat* Dicit fiberius
atque audaeius. Eadem secoreto ab aliis quaBrit ; repent esse
▼era : ** Ipsum esse Dumnorigem, summa audacia, magna apud
plebem propter liberalitatem gratia, cupidum rerum novarum :
complures annos portoria reliquaque omnia iBduorum vectigalia
parvo pretio redemta habere, propterea quod illo licente contra
liceri audeat nemo. His rebus e t suam rem famOiarem aux-
isse, et facultates ad largiendum magnas comparasse : magnum
numerum equitatiis suo sumtu semper al^re et circum se
habere : n e q u e solum domi, sed etiam apud finitimas civitates
krgiter posse.'*
XI.
Ad has suspiciones certissimae res* accedebant. — Pumn5rix
per fines SequanSrum Helvetios transdux6rat,' — Obsides inter
eos dandos' curav^rat. — Ea omnia jussu^ CaBs&ris fec^rat. — £a
13 Dumnorix is the very person, (a man) of the highest audacity, Ae.-*
13 722.— 1* if^uence.—^^ 698, i.— i^ 712.— 17 transit dutieSf custom duties,
— !• 719. — 19 were contracted for. — «> vectigalia . . . habel^ he holds ike
taxes contracted for at a low price ; i. e., holds them under a very favour-
able contract. — ** 456, a, when he bids. — » liceor, Uc6ri, to bid. — ^ 731.
—8* Means for making largesses. — 36 439. — ae gao sximpta, at his own
expense. Somptas, 789, from aumere.— *'' 726, R., at home.—^ largiter
potest, he can largely, i. e., he has extensive power.
1 certiB8im» res = most certain (or undoubted) faxts. — accedebant =
were added ; ad+cectere, intransitive.—* t»M+dw««.-^ 504, a.— * 789 ;
from jabere (joss*) : by ike command, 710.
Digitized by
Google
READING LESSONS.
omnia injoMu'^ CsMaris etfi eivitatis fecerat. — Ea omnia inscien-
tibas ipsis' fecerat. — ^£a omnia n o n m o d o injussu Caesaris et
ciritatis, sed etiam inscientibus ipsis fecerat. — A magistratu^
^dudrum accusab&tor. — Satis est caussse,* quare in eum ani-
madvertat.^<> — Satis est causses, qoare in eum civit&tem animad-
vertdre jnbeat. — Satis erat caussae, quare in eum aut ipse ani*
madvertdret, aut civitatem animadvertere jubdret. — Satis esse*^
causssB arbitrab&tur.
Quibus rebus cognitis," quum^' ad has suspiciones
certissirosB res acceddrent— -q nod per fines Sequanorum Hel-
vetios transduxisset^^— quod obsides inter eos dandos curasset
— q u o d ea omnia non modo injussu suo et civitatis, sed etiam
inscientibus ipsis, fecisset — q u o d a magistititu iBduorum accn-
•ardtur; satis esse caussae arbitrabatur, quare in eum aut ipse
animadverteret, aut civitatem animadvertere juberet.
His omnibus rebus^* imum repugnabat.^^ — Divitiaci fratris*^
summum in populum RomS,num studium^^ cognoverat Caesar.
— Divitiaci summam in se voluntatem cognoverat. — Divitiaci
egregiam fidem, justitiam,*^ temperantiam,^^ cognoverat. — Dum-
noilgis supplicio^ Divitiaci animum offendet. — Ne^ Divitiaci
animum offendat, ver3tur.' — Ne^ Divitiaci animum offenddret,
verebatur.
His omnibus rebus unum repugnabat, quod Divitiaci fratris
summum in populum Romanum studium, summam in se vol-
imtatem, egregiam fidem, justitiam, temperantiam cognoverat :
nam ne ejus suppUcio Divitiaci animum off enderet, verebatur.
B without the command ; in+jossa. — ^ The Engiiib idiom demands or
instead of and : toithout the command of Casar or the state. — ^ themselves
not knowing it, i. e., without the knowledge of Caesar and the ^duan
government. — » By a magistrate, 93, II., b. — » 697, b. — ^^ in emn animad-
vertere, to animadvert -upon him, i. e., to punish him. — ^^ 751, jR. 2. —
w Cloibus rebus cognitis = Which things being knmon by inquiry ^ i. e.,
after he had inquired into these things. — ^^ Since f seeing thatj, 757, A, b.
— ^* transduxisset, carasset, &c., are snbjanctives, because they express,
not Caesar's own sentiments or knowledge, but what he had heard from
others : certissima res accederent. — ** 704, To all these considerations otic
(thing) opposed itself — ^^ re+pugnare. — '^'^ Of his brotfter Dvoitiacus, i. ©.,
the brother of Dumnori^. — 1« zeal. — i* 785, 2.— ao By the punishment of
Dumnorix he will hurt the feelings of Divitiacus. — ^^ veretur ne . . . he
fears that he shall.—^ verebatur ne . . . he feared that he should.
READING LESSONS. 353
XII.
Cssar gravlter* in' Dtimnorigem statuet. — Divitiacus CaesH-
rem complectitur. — Divitiacus multis' cum lacrymis Caesarem
complectitur. — ^ObsecrEre incipit ne"* quid gravius* in' fratrem
statuat. — Scit Divitiacus ilia esse vera. — Nemo ex eo^ plus
quam Divitiacus doloris^ capit. — Divitiacus gratia® plurimum
domi atque in reliqua Gallia poterat. — Dumndrix minimum'
propter adolescentiam poterat. — Dumnorix per Divitiacum
crevit.^o — His opibus" ac neiTis*' ad minuendam^^ gratiam Divit-
iaci utitur. — His opibus ad pemiciem*'* Divitiaci utitur. — Qui-
bus opibus ac nervis non solum ad minuendam gratiam, sed
pene ad pemiciem Divitiaci utitur. — Divitiacus tamen et^*
amore fratemo et existimatione^^ vulgi commovetur." — Divit-
iacus summum locum amicitiae apud Caesarem tenet. — ^Nemo
existimS,bit non ejus voluntate factum.^® — Ex hac re totius Gal-
fias aMmi a Divitiaco av6rtentur.^^
(Direct Narration, Present TimeJ^) Scit Divitiacus ilia <
▼era, nee quisquam ex eo plus quam ipse dolons capit,
propterea quod, quum ipse gratis, plurimum domi atque
in reliqua Gallia, iUe minimum propter adolescentiam posset,
per se crevit; quibus opibus ac nervis non solum ad minuendam
gratiam, sed pene a4 pemiciem ipsius utitur. Divitiacus tamen
et amore fratemo et existimatione vulgi commovetur, quod,
si«* quid fratri a Caesare acciderit, quum^* ipse
t a 1 e m locum amicitiae apud eum teneat, nemo existimabit non
1 graviter Bt9taet=wiU decide severtly. — * against. — ^ 89, II. — ^ 548, a.
s quid grayins = anything more severe (fhan usualj : anything at all se-
vere. — * from hinif i. e., Bnxmiorix. — "^ pin* dobris, more pain, 697. — » by
his ti^ftfuence (popiilarity).— » miniTniim poterat = ^<2 very little power. —
'0 crescere: grew (in power). — ^^ resources. — *« sinews, abl. by 716.—
18 739, for diminishing the it^fiuence of Divitiacus. — i* 790, 1. — ** 517, c.
— 16 exlBtim&re, 788, 3 : existimatione vnlgi ^ by the opinion of the public.
— ^^7 con+mov6re ; canmioy&tm=: is strongly moved. — *® No one will think
it was not done loith his (Divitiacns's) consent. — ^^ a+vertere : the affec-
tions ofaU Oaul wiU be turned away from Am.— » Obsenre carefally
the moods and tenses in the foBowing paragraphs of direct and obliqae
narraticm.— »i if anything happen to kis brother from Casar.-^ qaum
ipse teneat, seeing that he himself holds.
Go2
Digitized by
Google
354 READING LEflSOKS.
ejus ToluntBte factam; qua ex re fiet^ uti totins GaUis
animi ab eo avertantur.'*
{Direct Narration^ Past Time,) Sciebat Divitiacus ilia (
vei-a, nee quisquam ex eo plus quam ipse doloris capiebat, prop-
ter ea quod, quum ipse gratia plurimum domi atque in reliqua
Gallia, ille minimum propter adolescentiam possett per se crev-
drat; quibus opibus ac nervis non solum ad minuendam grati-
am, sed psene ad perniciem ipsius utebatur. Divitiacus tamen
et amore fraterno et existimatione vulgi commovebatur, quod si
quid fratri a Caesare gravius accidisset, quum ipse talem locum
amicitiae apud eum teneret, nemo erat existimaturus non ejus
voluntate factum, qua ex re futurum erat uti totius Galliae
animi ab eo averterentur.
Divitiacus, multis cum kcrymis Caesarem complexus obse-
crare incipit {phliqv^ narration^ present time)^ ** Ne quid gravius
in fratrem statuat ; scire se, iUa esse vera, nee quemquam ex eo
plus quam se doloris capdre, propterea quod, quum ipse gratia
plurimum domi atque in reliqua Gallia, ille minimum propter
adolescentiam posset, per se crevdrit; quibus opibus ac nervis
non solum ad minuendam gratiam,<sed paene ad perniciem suam
nt&tur : sese tamen et amore fratemo et existimatione vulgi
commovfiri, quod, si quid ei gravius a Caesare acciddrit, quum
ipse earn locum amicitiae apud eum teneat, nemlnem existima-
turum non sua voluntate factum ; qua ex re futurum uti totius
Gallias animi a se avertantur.*'
Divitiacus multis cum lacrymis, Caesaren^ complexus, obse-
crare coepit {oblique narration, past time), " Ne quid gravius in
fratrem statudret; scire se, ilia esse vera, nee quemquam ex
eo plus quam se doloris capere, propterea quod, quum ipse
gratia plurimum domi atque in reliqua Gallia, ille miniinum
propter adolescentiam posset, per se crevisset; quibus opibua
ae nervis non solum ad minuendam gratiam, sed paene ad per-
niciem suam uteretur : sese tamen et amore fratemo et exist-
imatione vulgi commoveri, quod si quid ei a Caesare gravius
accidisset, quum ipse eum locum amicitiae apud eum teneret,
neminem existimaturum non sua voluptate factum ; qua ex re
futurum, uti totius Gallie animi a se averterentur."
*3 from which thing U vfiU retullr-^ 754. S.
Digitized by
Google
LATIN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY.
Digitized by
Google
864
LATIH-BH0LI6H VOCABULAEY.
DiBert-vi, t, tan, Jkieni, doquent.
DuipHc-«re (diipHca-, diipUcit-, dil
-f plaoere), to dupieme, with dat.
Disp(m-«ro (diapotii-, diipotit-. dii-f-
ponere), to place ti» dijferent di-
rtetioni, arrange, di$po$e,
Ditpot^ra (tr-, i*-), to dispute, di$-
euu.
Diuent-ire (difieni-, fliMem-, dirf
sendre, 4S7, UL), to differ in
opinion, diueni.
Ditter-«re (diMem-, aMert*, 407), to
treat of, discuss,
mamAr-er^ (dtN^-, diMolat-, dirh
Bolyere), to dissolve.
Piflt-tte, <o ^ liMidN^, or apari (di+
itare).
Distriba-ere (diattibo-, HtHribSA-), to
divide or distriimte among, 4«a.
DitiMinrag, iapeii of difM.
Ditt, «dy^ Iwv' campvn dkaAuB,
longer,
Diverf-QB, % mn, differtnt*
Divaf, (divtt) it, 371, B- 1, r<<^
Divioo, (Divicdn) it, Divioo, proper
]>ivid-«re (dhiiw, ditii-), to divide,
Divin-iui, a, mn, divine.
DiTitia<HW, i. mvUiacus, ptop^r
TMSM.
Divitie, arom, 57, R., rtcAe», veaHk.
Doc-^n (docn-, doct-), to <«icA.
Bocilis, is, e, 104, docHe, ieaekaiU,
I)o1-ere (ddla-, dolh-), to grieve.
Dolor, (dol6r) is, 319, grief, pain.
l)ol-as, \, frond, deceit.
Dom-ftre (domtt-, dolni^, 387, It.), to
subdue.
Domicili-mn, i, dwelling.
]>omiii-iu, i, master, of house or
slaved.
Dom-us, i and ns, 112, 3, house,
fame; domi, at home; domxiin, to
on^s house.
1>orm-Ire (dormiv-, dormlt-), to sleep.
Draco, (dracOn) is, 331, dragon.
Dmides, am, Druids, priMtf of lb*
dent Britain.
Dobit-ftre (av-, a^), to doubt, kui-
tote.
Dnbitatio^ (dabitati6n) is, 333, B.^
doubt.
Dobi-os, a, tun, doubtfuL
Doc^re (dax-, duct-), to lead*
Dnkis, is, o, 104, sioeet.
Dnm, coiij., ufkiJ^, so long oi, nmtO,
Domnorix, (DHmHodn) ith Duii^>l^
rix, proper name.-
lywi, two, 194.
Dnodecim, indecL, twdve*
Duplic^ftre (at--, a*-), ta double.
Dttr-Are (av-, at-), iiitratii., to eMtare;
last; tnia., to harden*
Ditr-ns, a, mn, hard.
Dax» (due) is, kadet, guiiA, earn-
mander.
B or ex, preji. with abl, cwl of,
from.
Ecquis, interrog. pron., Vl8, i, Utif
one?
Bld-6W, or 6H6 (ed-, (81-, 601), to eat.
Educ-Are (av-, at-), to train, educate.
Bduc-«re (edux-, edtict-), to lead out.
Effect-US, us, effect.
Bffemin-ftre (av-, a^, ei-f-feniina), t9
geminate, make womaniih.
Ego, /, 120.
Bgregi-us, a, mn, excellent, teUiOrh
able.
Eleganji, (elegant) is, 107, degdiU.
Eloquens, (eloquent) U, 107, do
quent.
Em-6re (em-, empt-), to buy.
Emic-&re (emictt-), 367, H, to shiim
cfrjlash forth.
Ehim, coiy.,ybf, 442, e.
Enunti-are (av-, at-), to dividge.
Eo, adv., there, to thatplade, on ^at
account, by so much.
Eodem, adv., to the same fiaee.
Digitized by
Google
liATIN-BNOUlBH VOCABUI^AEY,
365
ji;piftol-«, », k^er,
Eques, (equit) is, Jiorse soldier*
Eqaester, tiis, tre, 428, a, belonging
to cavalry. Eqaestri prtalio, in a
battle of cavalry.
Equit-ire (ay-, at-), to ride on hor*^
back.
Itquitat-as, ds, cavalry.
Eqn-os, i, horse.
Erip-Sre (eripu-, erept, e+rapore)* to
take awayfromt snatch away.
Err-ftre (av-, at-,) to err, wander,
Erump-Sre (erfip-, erapt-), to burst
forth, sally out.
Esse, to be, 650; esse, to eat, $ee
edere.
Et, coDJ., and* Et — et, both — aud.
Etenim, oonj., for. .
Etiam, coi\j., also, even.
Etsi. conj., although,
Enrop-a, m, Europe,
Evoc-are (av-, fit-, e+vocare), to caU
out.
Ex, prep, with abL See E.
Exced-dre (excess-, excess-, ex+ce-
dere), to go away, depart out of.
Exdam-ftre (av-, a^), to cry out.
Excip-6re (excep-, except-, ex+ca-
per^), to receive.
Bxcit-ftre (av-, at-), to raise, kindle,
excite.
Excasatio, (excnsation) is, 333, It^
excuse.
Exe-dere (exed-, exes-, ex+edere),
to eat up, consume, corrode,
Exempl-Tim, i, example.
Exerc-ere (ea^ercu-, exercit-), to ex-
ercise, practice.
Exercit-ns, us, army.
Exig^-os, a, Tim, smaU,
Ex-Ire (exiv- and exi-, exit-), to go
out, depart,
Existim-Sre (av-, at-), to think, judge.
Existimatio, (existimatidn) is, 333,
B'M opinion,
Expec^are (av-, at-), to wai^fots
H
Expedit, impen., 583, \t is expedient,
Expeditio, (expedition) is, 333, B*.,
military expedition,
ExpeU-ere (expal-, expnls-, ex+po^*
lere), to expd, drive out.
Expert, (expert) is, 107, devoid of,
with gen. or aU., 336.
Expet-dre (expetiv-, expetxt-), t0
covet, desire eamettly,
Explorator, (exploratdr) is, 319, scout,
Expon-dre (exposn-, exposit-, ex+
ponere), to place out, set forth, es>
plairu
Expugn-flre (av-, at-, ex-l-pQgiuure),
to take by storm.
Extra, prep, with accos., outside of,
without,
£xtrem-ns, a, lun, snperL of extems*
370, the last, outermost.
Exor-dre (exuss-, exost^, «x+ur«Pe),
to bum up*
F.
Faber, bri, artificer, workman*
Fabnl-a, aa, fable, story.
Fac-ere (io, fee-, fact-), to make, do,
Facild, adv., casUy,
Facilis, is, e, 104, easy.
Facnltas, (facultat) is, 293, power of
doing ; hence means, resources.
Facnnd-us, a, nm, eloquent,
FaJl-ere (fefeU-, fals-), to deceive,
Fam-a, 8b, rumour, fame.
Fames, (fam) is, 300, hunger.
Famili-a, m,famxly, gang of slaves,
Familiaris, e, belonging to the fami-
lia. Bes fainiliaris, property.
Fat-6ri (fass-), dep., to confess,
Fat-nm, \,fate,
Fav-ere (fav-, feut-, 395, v.), to fa\
vour.
Felix, (fellc) is, 104, happy.
Femin-a, 8B, woman,
Fer-a, », wild beast.
Fere, adv., almost.
Ferre (tnl-, lat-, 596), to bear*
h2
Digitized by
Google
866
LATIN-ENGLISH VOCAPULARY,
FexDcnl-iu, a, mn, tuHy.
Ferox, (fer6c) is, lQ7,Jieree,
Ferr-om, i, iron,
Feitm-are (av-, at-), to Juuteiu
Fid-et, e\,faitJL
Fieri (fact-), 600, used as pass, of fa-
cere ; to be made, to become,
Fignr-a, m^Jigure,
Fili-a, », daughter, dat and abL pL
filiabas.
Fili-us, i, son, 62, R., S.
Fin-is, (fin) is, m., end, boundary;
fines, boundaries, territories,
Finitim-os, a, mn, neighbouring,
Firm-ns, a, mn, strong, Jirm,
Fit, it happens, pres. indie, of fio,
fiert
Flagiti-nm, i, disgraceful crime, in-
famy,
Flamm-a, m,JUime,
Fl-ere (flcv-, fl6^, 395. XL), to weep.
Flet-ns, As, weeping,
Flos, (flOr) is, 331, b,Jlower.
Flaet-ns, ds, wave,
Flomen, (flomin) is, 344, a, river,
FlQTi-ns, i, river,
FoBdas, (fisder) is, 344, b, treaty,
league,
Foli-run, i, leaf,
Fons, (fimt) is, m., 293, "EL, fountain.
ForiB, (for) is, 300, door; used most-
ly in plnr., fores.
Form-a, ft, form,
Formid-ire (av-, at-), to fear, be
afraid of.
Formos-ns, a, am, haiidsomie,
Forsitan, adv., perhaps.
Forte, adv., by chance.
Fort-is, is, e, 107, brane,
Fortiter, 215, 2, b, bravely,
Fortitado, (fortitodin) is, 339, forti-
tude, courage.
Forton-a, m, fortune,
I Fortnnat-us, a, urn, fortunate,
For-um, i, forum.
Fossa, «, ditch.
Fmn-un, i, bridie, 396; pi., fntsei
andfrsna.
Frater, (fratr) is, brother,
Fratem-ns, a, xan, fraiemcU,
Fr^ns, (fraad) is, ^183, fraud,
Frigos, (frigdr) is, 344, b, cold,
Fnict-ns, ta, fruit,
Frament-iri (fnimentat-), dep., to
coUectcom,
Framentmm, \,com,
Frastra, adv.. in vctin,
Fng-a, m, fight
Fag-«re (av-, a^), to rout, put to
fight.
Fog-ax, (fugac) is, 107, fugitive,
feeting.
Fug-«re (io, fiig-, fogit), to fee.
Folgnr, (falgdr) is, 325, lightning.
Fnnd-ere {fid-, fSa-), to pour out, to
overthrow, discomfit.
Fnnditor, (fonditdr) is, 319, slinger,
Fatmr-Qs, a, run, future.
G.
Gkdb-a, ss, Oalba.
Galli-a, as, GavL
Gallin-a, oe, Jien.
Gall-OS, i, a OauL
Garomn-a, as, Oaronne (river).
Gaod-ere (gavisos som), to r^oice.
Gaodi-om, i,joy.
Ghener, i, son-in-law,
Genev-a, w, Geneva.
Gens, (gent) is, 293, nation.
Genos, (gener) is, 344, b, race, doss,
Ger-€re (gess-, gest-), to carry on;
gerere bellom, to carry on war.
GI«rman-os, i, a German,
Gladi-os, i, sword,
Glori-a, qb, glory,
OrtBc-xM, a, om, Cheek.
Ghrando, (grandin) is, 339, hail
Grati-a, ss, influence, favour, popu-
larity,
Gratol-sri (gratolat-), dep., to eon
gratulate.
Digitized by
Google
LATIN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY.
367
Grat-as, a, um, agreeable.
Gravis, is, e, heavy, severe,
Graviter, adv., heavily, disagreea-
ble ; graviter fert, he is indignant
a*.
Grregatim, adv., injlocks,
. Gabem-Are (av-, at-), to steer, direct,
govern.
Gabemator, (gnbematOr) is, 319, pi-
lot, governor,
H.
Hab-ere (habu-, habit-), to have, hold,
esteem,
Hannibal, (Haxmib&l) is, Hannibal,
Hand, adv., not.
Helveti-ns, i, a Hdvetian.
Herb-a, ae, herb.
Hercyni-us. a, um, Hercynian; Her-
cynia sylva, the Hercynian forest.
Heri, adv., yesterday.
Hibem-a, omm, winter-quarters.
Hiberni-a, sb, Ireland.
Hie, hflBC, hoc, this, 156.
Hiem-are (av-, at-), to winter.
Hiems, (hiemj is, 293, winter.
Hirando, (hirundin) is, 339, swallow.
Hispani-a, bb, Spain.
Hispan-us, i, a Spaniard.
Histori-a, bb, history.
Hodie, adv., to-day.
Homer-as, i. Homer.
Homo, (homin) is, m., man.
Honest-e, adv., honourably.
Honest-as, a, nm, honourable.
Honor, (hon6r) is, 319, honour.
Hor-a, 8B, hour.
Horati-us, i, Horace.
Hort-ari (hortftt-), to exhort, dep.
Hort-ns, i, garden.
Hospes, (hospit) is, c, guest, host.
Hostis, (host) is, c, enemy.
Human-US, a, nm, human.
Humanitas, (humanitftt) is, 293, cul-
tivation, refinement, humanity,
Hnmilis, is, e, 107, low.
Ibi, adv., there.
Idem, eadem, idem, the same, 150.
Idone-ns, a, nm,^, suitable.
Idas, idmim (4th deden.), the Ides.
112,2.
Ignavi-a, bb, indolence, cowardice.
Ignav-ns, a, mn, indolent, cowardly.
Ignis, (ign) is, m., 302, R.,Jire.
Ignomini-a, 8b, disgrace, ignominy,
Ignor-are (av-, at-), to be ignorant.
IgDoratio, (ignoratidn) is, 333, B*.,
igTiorance,
Die, iUa, illnd, this, that, 158.
Imago, (imagin) is, 339, image.
Imber, (imbr) is, 320, shower of rain,
Immemor, (immemor) is, 107, «»•
mindful, with gen.
Immens-ns, a, van, immense.
Immortalis, is, e, 104, immortaZ.
Impediment-um, i, hinderance; im-
pedimenta, pi., the baggage of an
army,
Imped-ire (iv-, i^), to hinder, tm-
pede.
Impend-dre, to hang over.
Imper-are (av-, at-), to command,
with dat.
Imperator, (imperatOr) is, 319, eom^
mander, general.
Imperi-um, i, command.
Impetr-are (av-, at-), to accomplish,
^ect, obtain.
Impet-us, us, onset, attach ; impetom
facere, to make an attack.
Impie, adv., 215, 1, impiously.
Impi-us, a, um, impious.
Impl-ere (implfiv-, implet-), tofiU up.
Implor-ftre (av-, at-), to ifi^date.
Impon-€re (imposu-, im^sit-, iii+
ponere, 407), to place in or upon.
Import are (av-, at-), to bring in,
import.
Improb-us, a, um, wicked, dishonest.
In, prep, with ace., into, against,
with abL, in, among.
Digitized by
Google
d68
LATIN-BN6U8H VOCABUI*ARY.
Incend-dre (incend-* incena-), to $et
jirt to, to bum.
Incert-os, a, nin, doubtful, nnctr-
tain,
locip-dre (io, incX^p-, incept-), to i*-
gin,
Incol-a, 0, inhMt€mt,
Incol-^re (incola-, incull-), dveU in,
inhabit
Inoommod-um, i, inconcenienee.
Incredibilif, is, e, 104, incredible.
Increp-ftre (increpa-, ixKarepit-, 390),
to chide.
Incusftre (ay> at-), to blame.
Inde, adv., thence.
Indicium, i, private information.
Indign-tu, a, um, unworthy.
Indnc-dre (indux-, indact-), to lead
to, induce.
Indolg-^re (indnls-, indnk-), with
dat., to indulge.
Ineptioe, arom, 57, "SL, folly.
Inerti-a, », idlenesi.
Infans, (infant) is, c, infant; (in+
fari, that cannot tpeak).
Inferior, (inferidr) is, comp. of inie-
rns, 370, inferior, lower.
Inferre (intol-, illat-, inrKerre), to
bring upon; belhiin alicui ioferre,
to wage war upon any one.
Ingeni-om, i, talent.
Ingens, (ingent) is, 107, great, enor-
mous.
Inimiciti-a, m, enmity.
Inimic-ns, a, nm, hostile, unfriendly,
with dat.
Initi-om, i, beginning.
Injuri-a, IB, injury, outrage.
Ii^astns, a, am, wyust.
Innocens, (innocent) is, 107, inno-
cent^
Innocenti-a, s, innocence.
Innomerabilis, is, e, 104, innumer-
able.
Inops, (inop) is, 107, poor.
Inquam, / say ; inquit, says he, 610.
Insdens, (inscient) ib, 107, not know^
ing.
Insect'tuB, i, vutet.
Inseqn-i (insecnt-), dep^ to pfuxpne.
Insidi-a, aronv 57, B^, Mnare*, ami-
bush.
Instig-are (av-, at-), to inUigate.
Institat-nm, i, purpose, pia^.
Instnk-Sre (instrox-, instroct-, in+
stroere), to draw up in battle or-
Insnl-a, m, island.
Intellig-ere (intellez-, intellect), to
perceive, understand.
Intent-OS, a, am, intenf, bent upon.
Inter, prep, with aocns., between,
among.
Interced-^re (intercesa-t intexcess-)»
iointarvene.
Inteidio, ady., by day.
Interdun, adv., sometimes.
Inter-esse (interfo), to be among, to
differ; nihil interest, it makes no
difference.
Interfector, ( interfpctAr ) ii, 31%
slayer.
Interfic-dr« (interftc-, intellect-, inr
ter+-facere), to slay, kill.
Interim, adv., t» the wfian whUe,
Interitos, As, perishing, destruction^
death.
Interregn-om, i, interreign.
Interrog-ftre (av-, &t-)» to ask, inter'
rogate.
Inta-eri (intnit-), dep., to look upon*
Inven-ire (invfo-, invent-)* to find,
discover.
Invoc-&re (av-, at-), to call upon, tn-
voke.
Ipse, a, nm, 159, self.
Ir-a, 86, anger.
Iracondi-a, «, wrathfulness, wraih.
Ire (iv-, Xt-), 605, to go.
Imimp-6re (irrup-, irropt-, in-hmm
pere), to break into.
Is, ea, id, this, that, he, she, it, 153.
Digitized by
Google
LATIN-KNQUSH YQCABULAUT*
Iste, % ad, thai, 157.
Ita, ftthr^ #0^ thM$.
Itali-a, a», Ji^y*
Ifcei^ (itiiMr) ii^ o., jaumejf, wajf,
march.
Jac-Sre ( jdc-, jact-)i ^ catt, hurl,
Jact-Are (av-, a^), to discutt.
Jacnl-am, i, dart.
Jam, adv., now, alread^^
Jan-US, i, Janus.
Jnb-dre ( joss-, juss-), to order.
Jacnnd-iu, a, urn, pleasant.
Judex, (judic) ii, 306, judge.
Jadic^e (av-, at-}, to judge.
Jadici-nm, i, trial, judgment.
Jugortb-a, m, Jugurtha.
Jog-om, i, yoke.
Joment-um, i, beast of burden.
Jung-Sre ( jtmx-, junct-), to join.
Jwao, (Junon) u, f., Jwno (goddess).
Japiter, Jems, 351, Jupiter.
Jur-a, e. Jura (mountam east of
Gaul).
Jor-ftre (av-, at-), to svear.
Jos, ( jur) is, 344, laiw, right.
Juss-us, iM, command.
Justiti-a, 0, justice.
Just-US,, a, um,just.
Juv-ftre ( juv-, jut-), to help.
JuYenis, is, a yotUh.
Juventus, ( juyeutat) is, 293, youth.
Juxta, prep, with aoo., near.
K.
Kalend-ae, arum. Kalends.
L.
LaUems, i, Labienus, oom of C»-
gar's lieutenant-generals.
Labor, (labOr) b, 319, labowr, toil
Labor-are (&▼-, U-), to labour,
Lac, (lact) is, 346, 2, milk.
Lacesf-dre (iy-> it-^ 406, in., b), to
provoke, harass.
Laorym-a, 0, tear.
Lac-US, us, lake.
Lapis, (lapid) is, 895, 3, $tome»
Larg-iri ^-), dep., to give largess,
to bribe, 515.
Larg-iter, adv., 215, 2, b, largely!
largiter potest, he ean largely,
L e.,heis quite powerful.
Lat-6, adv., 315, 1, widely (lat-us,
wide),
Latin-US, a, um, Latin.
Latitude, (latitodin) is, 340, bretuUh
{bom latus, broad).
Latins, adv., more widely (oomptr
of latd, 376).
Latro, (latron) is, 331, a, robber*
Lat'US, a, um, broad, wide.
Laud-are (av-, at-), to praise.
Laus, (laud) is, 293, praise.
Legatio, (legation) is, 333, Bn, ess-
bassy.
Legat-us, i, lieutenant, ambassador.
L6g-dre (ISg-, lect-, 416, a), to read.
Legio, (legion) is, 333, B^, legion.
Lemann-us, i. Lake Leman, or Ge-
neva,
Leo, (leon) is, 333, lion,
Lepus, (lep5r) is, m., 345, 4, hare.
Lev-are (av-, at-), to lighten, aUe
viate.
Lex, (leg-) is, 293, law.
Libenter, adv., willingly, gladly.
Liber, libri, 64, book.
Liberalitas, (lib^ralitet) is, 993, lib
erality.
Liber-e, 215, 1, freely (fixm Uber,
free).
Liber-i, omm, 65, R., cMUren.
Liber-tas, (libertat) is, 293, freedom,
liberty.
Libet, 583, Ubebat^ libuit, or libitum
est, impers., it is agreeable, it
pleases, it suits.
Lic-€ri (licit), dep., to bid money, to
qferaprice.
Licet, licuit, licitum est, it is allow-
ed,itis lawful, one must, 583.
Digitized by
Google.
870
LATIN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY.
LiU-Qm, i, Uly.
Linga-a, a, language,
Litter-a, m, a letter (aa of the alpha-
bet) ; litter-«, aram (pL), a letter,
i. e., an epUtle.
Littoa, (littor) ia, 344, b, shore,
Livi-iii, i, Livy, a Homan historian.
Loc-os, i and a, 309, pleux,
Long-d, adv., 215, 1, far, long : (kmg-
w.)
Longitado, (longitodin) is, 339,
length: (longoa.)
Long'Oa, a, am, long,
Loqa-i (locdt-), dep., to epeak.
Labet. See libet.
Luct-uB, fifl, grief.
Lad-«re (Ins-, Ids-, 401, 3, b), to
play.
Lud-U8, i, eport, game, piMf,
Lnn-a, ss, moon.
Lnp-iis, i, wolf.
Lux, (hic) is, 293, light,
Macol-are (av-, at-), to stain,
Magis, adv., vmore.
Magister, tri (64), m4ister, teacher,
Magistrat-os, ds, a magistrate.
Magnanimms, a, nm (magn-us+ani-
mus ), high-spirited, magnani-
mow.
Magnitado, (magnitodin) is (340),
extent, greatness,
Magnus, a, um, great; comp., ma-
jor, greater,
Male, adv. (215, 1, R.), badly.
Maleficinm, i (800, 2), evil deed,
crime,
Malle (592), to be more willing, to
prefer ; perf., maloi.
MiQom, i; evil, misfortwie,
Man-6re (mans-, mans-)^ 665, HE.,
to remain.
Mantis, us (f., 112, 2), hand, band
of soldiers.
Mare, (mar) is (314), sea.
MassUia, se, MarseiUet,
Mater, (matr) is (f., 25, 2), mother.
Matrimonium, i, m^itrimony.
Mationa, e, the Mame, a river of
GauL
Matur-flre (av-, at-), to hasten,
Mazim-e (adv., 376), most, most
greatly, in the highest degree.
Maxim-US, a, um (sup. of magnns,
370), greatest.
Me {ace. and abl. of ego, J), me;
mecum, tot^ me (125, II., b),
Medicin-a, ss, medicine.
Mediterrane-us, a, um, MediterrO'
nean (medi-us+terr-a).
Medi-us, a, um, middle.
Meli-us, adv. (376), better.
Memini (defect., 611), J remember;
meminisse, to remember.
Memori-a, 83, memory ; memoilA te-
nere, to hold in memory, to rv-
member.
Mens, (ment) is, f., mind.
Mercat5r, (mercator) is (319), mer-
chant,
Meridi-es, ei (m., 115), mid-day,
noon.
Merit-um, i, merit, desert,
Metall-xmi, i, metal.
Met-€re (messu-, mess-, 666, IL, b),
to reap,
Met-iri (mens-), dep., to measure.
Metu-6re (metu-, 666, VL, a), to fear.
Me-us, a, um (122), my, mine.
Mic-ftre (micu-, 664, II.), to glitter,
shine.
Migr-&re (av-, at-), to migrate.
Miles, (milit) is, soldier.
MiUe (sing, inded, pL miUia, ium),
thousand.
Minerv-a, ib, Minerva.
Minim-US, a, um, least {superL of
parvus, 370).
Minor (minus), 358, less (compar. of
parvus, 370).
Minu-dre (minu-, minclt-), to diminieh.
LATIN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY.
371
Mirabil-is, is, e, wonderful
Mirific-os, a, um, causing wander,
astonishing (mir-us+facere).
Miser, a, um (77, J), miserable,
wretched.
Miseret (impers., 579, a), oTie pities ;
me miseret, I pity.
Mitig-ftre (av-, at-), to mitigate.
Mitt-6re (mis-, miss-, 401, 3, h), to
send.
Mod-US, i, meeisure, manner.
Moania, ium (used only in pi.), watts.
McBror, (moerdr) is (319), sadness.
Mon-dre (monu-, monit-), to advise,
warn, remind.
MonstT'&re (av-, at-), to show.
Mord-6re (momord-, mors-, 395, IV.),
to bite, champ.
Mor-i, and mor-Iri (mort-), dep., to
die.
Mortal-is, is, e, mortal.
Mors, (mort) is, 293, death.
Mos, (mor) is, 331, 1, b, custom, man-
ner.
Mot-US, as, motion, moving.
Mov-ere (mdv-, mOt-, 395, V.), to
move.
Mulier, (mulier) is, (f.), woman.
Mnltitudo, (multitudin) is, 340, mul-
titude.
Mult-US, a, xmi, much, many.
Mund-us, i, world.
Mun-ire (iv-, it), to fortify.
Munitio, (monition) is, 333, 'BL, forti-
fication.
Mnnus, (muner) is, 344, 3, b, office,
Mums, i, walU
Mut-are (&v-, at-), to change,
N.
Nam, coi\|.,/or.
Nasc-i (nat-), dep., to be bom, spring
from.
Nat-are (av-, at-), to swim.
Naut-a, 89 (m.), sailor.
Natio, (natidn) is, 333, R., nation.
Natur-a, aj, nature.
Naval-e, (naval) is, 314, a dock-yard:
Navigatio, (navigatidn) yh 333, B.,
navigation, voyage.
Nav-is, (nav) is, 300, ship.
N6, interrogative particle, 135, n., a.
Ne, adv., not, -used imperatively,
634, a; oHg., that not, 548, b.
Nee, coiy., nor. .*- '
Neg-are (av-, at), to deny, refuse.
Neglig-6re (negiex-, neglect^ 666,
v., a), to neglect.
Negligens, (negligent) is, 107, neg-
ligent.
Negoti-xmi, i, matter, business.
Nemo, (nemin) is, c, no one,
Neque, conj., neither, nor, 515.
Nequidem, adv., not even, 217; al-
ways separated by the wordi
vehich have the emphasis ; e. g.,
ne Socrates quidem, not even Soc-
rates.
Nervi-us, i, a Nervian (people of
Gaul).
Nerv-us, i, a sinew.
Nesc-ire (iv-, it-), to be ignorant, not
to know (ne-|-scire).
Neuter, tra, trum, 194, 1, neither of
the two.
Nidific-are (av-, at-), to build a nest
(nidus+facere).
Niger, nigra, nigrum, 77, a, black.
Nihil, n., indecL, nothing.
Nimi-us, a, um, too much.
Nit-i (nis- and nix-), dep., to strive.
Nisi, conj., unless, if not.
Nobilis, is, e, noble, illustrious.
Nobilitas, (nobilitat) is, 293, nobil-
ity.
Noc-€re (nocii-, nodft-), to hurt, with
dat
Noctu, adv., by night.
Nolle, nolai, to be unwilling, 592.
Nomen, (nomin) is, 344, a, name.
Ndn, adv., not.
Digitized by
Google
372
LATIN-£NGLISH VOC4^BULAEY.
Nonne, intefrogative particle (ex-
pects answer yes).
Nonnulliii, a, jun, tome; nonnulli,
gome {persons),
Koonanquam, adv^., sometimes.
Non-US, a, niUf ninth.
Nos, toe, 120.
NcMSO-Sre (nOv-, ndt-), to learn, know.
Noster, tra, tram, 122, our.
N6v-i (gen. of novas), news, 174 (vo-
cab.).
K6y-i, defective, / know, 611 *, no-
visse, to know.
Novissimas, a, am (saperl of no-
vas), newest, latest; noviisimam
agmen, Me rear-rank.
Novitas, (novitat) is, ^3, novdty
(novas).
Kov-as, a, am, new.
Nox, (noct) is, 293, night.
Nub-es, (nab) is, 300, doud.
Nad-as, a, am, naked.
KuHas, a, um, gen. nallios, dat.
nalli, 194, 1, no one, none.
Occidens, (Occident) is, m. (sol im-
derstood), west.
Ocd[d-6re (ocdd-, occiB-, 6b + ca-
dere), to fail, set, die.
OccAd-6re (oocid-, occis-, ob-hcsa-
dere), to slay, kiU.
Oocap-are (av-, St-), to seize, takf
possession of.
Oceanos, i, ocean.
Octavas, a, am, eighth.
Octoginta (indecl), eighty.
Octoni, SB, a, eight each, eight at a
time, X»7.
Ocal-as, i, eye.
Odi (defect., 611), I hate; odisfe» to
hate.
Odi-am» i, hatred,
Offend-6re (offend-, ^ieos-, ol>-f fen^
dere), to qffend.
Olim, adv., once upon a time, for-
merly.
Omnino, adv., altogether, in all.
Onyiis, is, e, all, every, the whole;
omnis res, the whole affair.
Qroer-a, to, toil, labour.
JVportet (impers.,
Nam (interrog. particle), wJ^e^ier Opas, (oner) is, 344, b, burden, load.
(expects the answer no, 174).
Kama, e (m.), Numa.
Namer-as, i, number.
Nanti-ftre (&v-, fit-), to announce.
Nunti-as, i, a messet^er.
Kanqaam, adv., never.
KaptisB, ftram, 57, R., a marriage.
Katrix, (natric) is, 293, nurse.
O.
Ob (prep, widi ace.), on account of.
Obaeratas, a, tun, a debtor.
Obscor-ftre (ftv-, at-), to obscure.
Obsecr-ftre (av-, ftt-), to beseech.
Obses, (obsid) is (c), hostage.
Obstring-dre (obstrinx-, obstriot-), to
bind: ob+stringere.
Obtin-dre (obtina-, obtent*), to hold,
maintain :^ ob+tendre.
Occas-as, tls, setting, e. g.,o{ the fiun;
oocasA Bolis, sunset, 118, II., c.
583), oportebat,
oportait, it behooves, one ought.
Oppidan-os. a, am, of or belonging
to a town, a townsman.
Oppid-am, i, a town.
Opprim-6re (oppress-, oppress-, ob
+premere), to repress, crush.
Oppugn-are (av-, at-), to attack, be-
siege (ob+pagnare).
Ops, opis, 299, power; opes, resour-
ces, means.
Optim-as, a, am, best {superL of
bonas).
Opolens, (opalent) is, 107, rick, opu-
lent.
Oj^ps, (oper) is, 344, b, work.
Oiracol-om, i, orade.
Or-ftre (ftv-, ftt-), to pray, beg, besee^
Oratio,^OEati6n) is, 333, &., onOstm,
speech.
LATIN-BNGLW^ VOCABULARY*
378
OiBtor, (orat<hr) u, 319, oraior.
Orb-is, (orb) is (ml, 302, IL), orb, dr-
cle ; orbis tei^anuD, the world.
Ordo, (ordin) is (m., 340, exc.)» order.
Qngetorix, (Orgetorig^) is, Orgetorix,
a Helvetian cbieftain.
Origo, (origin) is, 339, origin.
Or^uri (ort-), d«p., to rite.
Orn-are (ftv-, at-), to adorn.
Onmtas, i^ xxm, adorned, part, of ^r-
nare. .
Ostend-fire. (ostwid-, Ofteoi-, ob+
tendjare)^;^ thaip,
p«t«n9i^^-^,4^), ta va/unU
."'^- ■■ P.
Pabtdatio, (pabalation) ii^ 3^3, &.,
foddering, foraging.
P»ne, adv., almost
Pag-os, i, village, canton.
Pains, (palod) is, 993, inonA.
Par-&re (ftv-, ftt-)^ to Tprepcare.
Parat-iu, a,^ uq, prepared, ready
(part. pass, of parare).
Parc-«re (pop^rc-, pan- and parcit-,
666, IV., b), to spare, with dot
Par-dre (pam-), wi& dat., ^ obey.
Pars, (part) is, 293, part
PariiiBOoi-a, e, pareimony, frugal.
Parv-ns, a, vm, mmeZZ, httle.
Pastor, (pastdr) is, 319^ shepherd.
Pater^ (patr) is,/a^A€r; patres, urn,
patricians of Homo.
Pat-6re (patd-), to be open, extend,
Pat-i, (pass-), dep., to staffer.
Patienter, adv., 215, 3, b, patiently.
Patientipa, e, patienee, endurance.
Paocitas, (pancitat) is, ii93, fewness.
Pauci, », n,feto.
Panllisper, adv., for a little while.
Panllo, adv., a little; paoUo longios,
a Utile too far.
Banpv, (pauper) is, 107, poor.
Paopertas, (paapertat) is, 993, pov-
erty.
I
Pax, (pac) is, ^Z,peaee,
^6Qc-^Q (ftv-, at-), tQ em.
Pecoat-nm, i, sin.
Fecuai-a, m, money.
Pedes, (pedit) is, Z06, foot-soldier,
PeU-«re (pepnl-. puis-, 411, b), Uf
drive, rout, expel, drfeai.
Fellis, (pell) is, 300, hide, skin.
Pend-«re (pepend-, pens-, 66«, IV.,
a), to weigh, pay,
Pene, adv., almost.
Peninsula, e, peninsula (pene+in-
sula).
Per (prtp, with accos.), through,
during.
Perdivea» (peidivit-) ia, 107, very
rich.
Ferdnc-6re (peidu^-, perduct-, pei^
ducere), to lead through, bring
along.
Perfacilis, is, e, very eaey.
Perferre (pertul-, perlftt-, perfferre),
to convey, bear through.
Perfic-dre (perfoc-, perfect-, peH- fib-
cere), to accomplish, Jinishj bring
to pass.
Perfring-Sre (perfreg-, peifiraot-, per
H-firangere), to break through.
Perfog-a, », deserter.
Perg-6re( (pen-ex-, pereect-), to go
on, go straight,
Pericul-um, i, danger,
Per-ire (peri-, perit-, per+ire), fa
perish.
Peritus, a, urn, skilful, skilled in
(with gen*).
Penni^v-^e (permOv-, permit-), to
move thoroughly, to induce,
Pemici^, ei, destruction,
Perpauci, 8B, a, very few,
Perpetu-ua. a, um, perpehud.
Perrump-«re (perrup-, permpt-, per
-f nm^^re), to break through,
Pers-a, m, a Persian.
Penequ-i (persecdt-, per+Mqoi),
dep., to follow cffter, pureue.
1
Digitized by
Google
874
LATIN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY.
Peraever-are (tv-, it-), to penevere.
Perioly-^re (penoly-, penolut-, per
-Holvere), to pay up, pay in full ;
poBnsB penolvere, to 9t{fer fuU
punukment,
Perapic-^re (perapex-, perapect-), to
observe, get Hgkt of, see plainly.
Penraad-dFe (peraaas-, penuas-), to
persuade, convince.
Perterr-ere (pertemi-, pertenit-), to
frighten thoroughly.
PertTn-«re {pertina-, peH-tenere), to
reach, belotig to, extend to.
Pertarb-&re (av-, at-), to disturb, con-
found.
Penrdn-ire (vSn-, rent-), to arrive at,
come to.
Pes, (ped) is (m., 295, 3), foot ; pe-
dem referre, to draw b€uk the
foot, to retreat.
Pet-Sre (petiv-, petit-), to seek, aim
at, strive after.
Petr-a, as, rotk.
Phalanx, (phalang) is, 293, phalanx.
Pharsalas, i, Pharsalus, a town in
Thessaly.
Philosoph-Ari (&t-), dep., to phUoso-
phize.
Piget (impeni., 579, a), pignit, it
grieves, pains, disgusts ; I am
Pil-om, \, javelin. [grieved at.
Pisc-is, (pise) is (m., 302, IL),^«A.
Pius, a, am, pious.
Plac-gre (placU-, placit-), to please
(with dat).
Placet (impers., 584, a), placoit, it
pkcues; Csesari placoit, C<Bsar
determined.
Placid-OS, a, om, calm, placid.
Plant-a, ae, plant.
Plan-OS, a, om, lev^, plain.
Plato, (Platdn) is, Plato.
Plebs, (pl€b) is, 293, common people.
Plen-os. a, om,/tt2Z.
Pleriqoe, plersaqoe, pleraqoe, most,
the greater part.
Pleromqoe, ady.,/or the most pari.
Plom-a, m, feather.
Plorim-os, a, om (soperL of moltos),
most, very many.
Plorimom, adv., very much, in the
highest degree. .
Pocol-om, i, cup.
PoBn-a, 8B, punishm^t; poenas per-
solrere, pay the full penalty.
Posnitet (impers., 579), poenitoit, U
repents ; me pcsnitet, / repenL
Poet-a, IB (m.), poeL
Pompeios, i, Pompey.
Pon-«re (posd-, posit-), to plaee,
castra ponere, to pilch the camp:
Pons, (pont) is (m., 295, 1), bridge.
Popol-ftri (at-), dep., to plunder, lay
waste.
Popol-os, i, people.
Port-a, le, gate.
Port-Are (ftv-, at-), to carry.
Port-tis, ds, harbour.
Portori-om, i, tor, customs duty.
Posc-dre (pqposo-, 411, a), to demand
(admits two accosatives).
Posse, potoi, to be eUde, can, 587.
Possessio, (possessidn) is, 333, B*.,
]9ossession.
Possid-Sre (poMdd-, possess^), <•
possess.
Post, prep, with ace., after, bdUnd.
Postea, adv., afterward.
Poster-osv a, om, after i postero die,
(m the day after, on the next day.
Postqoam, adv., after that.
Postol are (avr, at-), to demand.
Potens, (potent) is, 107, powerfuL
Potestas, (potestat) is, 293, power.
Pot-iri (i^), dep., with gen. or abL,
to acquire, get possession cf.
PrsB (prep, with abl.), b^ore.
Praeb-ere (pnebo-, prsabit-), to <^
f(n'd.
Praeced-ere (cess-, cess-), to go be-
fore, exceL
PrsBceps, (prsBcipit) is, 107, headlong.
Digitized by
Google
LATIN-ENOLISH VOCABULARY.
375
PraBceptor, (pmceptdr) ii, a teadier,
preceptor,
Pnecept-om, i, precept
Pr»cip-gre (c6p-, cept-, pra+ca-
pere), to command^ engoin.
PrsBclar-tui, a, urn, iUustrious.
Pneco, (praecon) is, herald,
Pned-a, 8B, booty, prey*
Pr»d-Ari (at-), dep., to plunder, get
booty.
PraBdic-are (ftv-, at-), to declare,
Predo, (priBddn) is, pirate.
Praeesse, ppsfoi, to be over, com-
mand (pr»+eMe), with dat.
Praeferre (t»5l-, lat-), to prefer.
Prasfic-^re (Ific-, feet-, inrao-Kacere),
to place over.
Praemitt-ere (mis-, mias-), to tend be-
fore.
Pnemi-um, i, reward.
PrsBnunti-a, or premmcia, ae, har-
binger.
PnBsertim, adv., especially.
Pnesidi-um, i, garrison, defence.
Praestans, (pneatant) is, 107, excel-
lent.
Praest-ftre (stitt-, stitt-), to stand be-
fore, excel.
Pmter, prep, with ace., besides, ex-
cept.
Praeter-iro (iv- and I-, It-, priBteH-
ire, 605, 2), to pass by.
Praetor, (praetdr) is, apratar (Roman
magistrate).
Preti-nm, i, price, reward,
Prex, (pree) is, 293, prayer.
Primus, a, van, first.
Princeps, (prineip) is, 107, cAtef (used
only as a nonn).
Prindpat-fis, As, chieftainship, chief
authority.
Principi-nm, i, beginning, principle.
PristZa-QS, a, mn, ancient, former,
Privatim, adv., privately.
Privat-ns, a, nm, private.
Priosqaam, adr^ btfore that.
Pro (prep, with abL), before, for, in
view of.
Prob-§re (ftv-, it-), to prove,
Prob-itas, (probitat) is, 293. honesty.
Prob-os, a, am, honest.
Proced-€re (eess-, cess-, 401, 3, b), to
advance, go forward,
Procell-a, ae, tempest.
Procnrrwfire (eurr-, cars-, pro+car-
rere), to run forward.
Prod-esse (pro-^esse), to profit, vnth
dat.
Prceliam, i, battle, fight.
Pr^fectio, (profectidn) is, 333, R.,
setting out, departure,
Proficisc-i (profeet-), dep., to set out,
depart.
Prohib*6re (prohiba-, prohibit-, pro+
habere), to reetrain, keep off.
Projic-6re (j€c-, ject-, pro+jacere),
to throw forward, throw,
Prope (prep, with ace.), near, nigh
to; propios, nearer j prozime,
nearest,
Propell-fire (pal-, pals-, pro + pel-
lere), drive on, drive away.
Proper-ire (ftv-, at-), htuten.
Propinqoos, a, am, near to, related
to ; propinqaos (osed as noan), a
relation.
Propias. See prope.
Propon-«re (posa-, posit-, pro+po-
nere), to set before, propose.
Propter (prep, with^ accos.), on ac-
count of,
Propterea, adv., therefore i propte-
rea qaod, because, for the reason
that.
Propols-ftre (av-, ftt-), to ward qff,
emert, repd,
Prorsas, adv^ straight on, truly, pre-
cisdy.
Prosequi (proseca^), dep., to pursue,
Proverbi-am, i, proverb,
Providenti-a, m, Providenee (pro+
yiddre).
Digitized by
Google
876
liATIN-ENOLISH VOCABULARY.
Provinci-ay ti^provtnec*
Proxim-us, a, nm (saperL, 371), ntxi,
nearest.
PtolenuBiu, i, Ptolemy.
Padet (impera., 579, a), piidint» it
ihames, one it aaihamed.
Paell-a, ee, gid.
Paer, i, boy.
Pugn-are (av-. At-), to fight.
Polvis, (polver) u, 331, d, ^^u$t.
Pan-ire (iv-, it-), to punisk.
Pot-ftre (&y-, &t-), to suppose, think,
reckon.
PyrensBi (montea), the Pyrenees,
moontaina between Gaol and
Spain.
a.
Claadringenti, as, %four hunifrei^
Ctasr-Sre (qa»aiT-, qiUBsit-), to $e^
ask, inquire into.
aoalis, is, e, of what kind; talia—
qualiB, such — as, 184.
Ctoam, coxg., than.
dnanidin, adv., how long.
Claamvis, cox\j., although.
daando, adv^ when.
dnantas, a, tun, how great, 184.
daantoscunqne, -aconque, -nmcun-
que, however great, 184.
dnaai, adv., as if.
daatem-i, qb, 9^ four apiece, four at
a time, 189.
daattuor, mdecl,,four.
due, conj., and, 517, a.
daeo, I am able, 606.
dner-i (quest-), to complain.
dui, qoe, qaod, who, which, what,
164.
daia, cox^., because.
Q,aid, nent. of qois, qsed interrog.,
what ? as adv., why 1
daicimqne, whosoeiveTt 164, IL
daidam, qanedaznt qnoddam, or qoid-
danm, a certain one; plnr>i 9ome,
178, 1.
dmdem, adv., indeed.
doilibet, qoaslibet, qnodUbet, ONjr
one, any you please, 178, S.
dnin, coi^j., but that, that not, 558, &
doindeoim, indecL,^i£ee«».
dningent-i, m, SL,five hundred,
dninqne, inded.,^oc.
dnint-as, a, ma, fifth.
doire, to be able, 606.
dais, quae, qnid, intenogf., who,
which, what? 170.
dnisnam, qoaoam, qoidnam 7 pray
who? what? 171.
doispiam, qnsspiam, qoodpiaa, quid
piam, somebody, some, 178, i,
daisqnam, qoioqnam, or gnodqnam,
any, any one, 178, 3.
dnisque, qoaeqae, qnodqae, quid*
que, eeuA,, every one, 178, 6.
doisquis, whoever, «oAa#eo«r, 637, 3.
doivis, any one you please, 176, S.
dad, adv., whither, in which direc'
tion?
dad, coi\}., to the end ihat^ that, so
that, 558, a.
duod, conj., because.
daod, rel. pron. neut. of qui.
duominus, that the less, that not, af-
ter verbs of hindering, dec, 558, e»
dnondam, adv., formerly, ai one
tim^.
dooQiam, coi^j., since, because.
duoque, co^j., also.
daot, so many, how many 1 184.
dnotannis, adv., yearly.
daotidian-us, a, mn, daily*
doot-us, a, um, what on$ ? quota
bora, iphat o^dock ?
duum, co^j., whcTi, since, 561.
K.
BApin-a, », rapine, plunder.
BAtio, (ratkni) is, 333,' &., reasonj
manner, plan.
Bauzacus, i, a Mauraeian, pec^la of
Gaul. *
Digitized by
Google
LAflH-BMGLlSH VOCABULABT.
877
BebeSio, (rebdliaa) is, 333, IL, t«-
2eoed-«re (oeu-, omi-, 401, 3, b), to
give way, retreat.
B«cip-6re (cdp-, cept^ rH^capcre,
io, 4X6, 0, 199), to receive back,
take back; se recipere, <# take
one? 9 te^ hock, to go back.
} Kert-e, adv., 315, 1, rightly.
Eedd-^e (reddid-, reddit-, re+dave),
666, rV., c), give back, return, re-
store.
Itedinteg[r-§r8 (ftv-, M-), to renmo.
Kedim-^re (red6m*, redempt-, re+
emere), to buy back, redeem, farm
(as revenaes).
I Beditdo, (reditidn) is, 333, R., return
(redire).
Bednc-^re (dux-, daot-, re-hducere),
to ^^^t bring back.
Befenre (retol-, relat-, re+ferre), to
bring back, to draw back ; pedem
referre, to retreat.
Befert, it matters, it concerns, U in-
terests, 584, d.
Befic-Sre (fBc-, feet-, re-Hkoere), to
^ renew, rebuild,
Beg-dre (rex-, rect-) to rule.
Begin-a, ib, queen,
Begn-Are (av-, at-), to reign.
Begn-mn, i, kingdom, royal power.
Belinqa-%re (reliqa-, relict-), to leave.
Beliqui-fB, anun, 57, B, remains,
remnaiU.
BeUqa-us, a, am, remaining.
Beminisc-i (dep.), to remember (with
gen.).
Bem6v-ere (remdr-, rem6t-), to re-
move.
Benonti-flre (av-, at-), to bring back
word, report.
Bepell-dre (repul-, repnls-, re+pel-
[ lere), to repel, drive bade.
' Bepente, adv., suddenly.
Bepentin-ns, a, am, sudden ; repen-
tina res, the stidden occurrence.
Beper-Ire (reper-, repert-, 427, V.),
to find OHt, to discover.
Bepet-«re (repetiv- and repeti-, re-
petit-), to demand back, to ask
again.
Bepugn-Are (av-, at. re+pognaw),
to oppose, resist.
Bes, rei, thing; rem ©oTae (pL), *»p-
olution ; res familiaris, private
property.
Bescind-dre (rascidr, reseiss-), to cut
down, to cut in pieces.
Besist-£r» (restitt-, restit-), 390, in-
trans., to halt, stop; with dat, to
resist,
Bespond-^re (raspood-, irespoas-, 665,
IV.), to answer.
BespablicH^ veipaUicaB, 351, 3, f-
pubUc, state.
Bet-e, (ret) is, 313, net,
Betin-Qre (retimi-, ratent-, re-fto-
nere), to restrain, hold back, re-
tain.
Bevert-€re (revert-, rovem-, 498), to
turn back, return.
Bevert-i (revere-), dep., to return,
Bevoc-are (av-, at-), to cdU back, r»
call
Bex, (reg) is (m.), king
Bhen-os, i, Rhine (river).
Bhetoric-a, sb, rhetoric
Rhodan-us, i, Rhone (river).
Bid-Sre (rls-, ris-), to laugh,
Bip-a, m, bank of a rher.
Bis-os, fls, laughter,
Bobar, (robor) is, 344, a, strengik
Bog-Are (av-, at-), to ask.
Boman-os, a, am, Roman; Boma-
nus (osed as noon), a Raman,
Bomtd-os, i, Romulus,
Bos-a, SB, a rose.
Bot-a, », wheel.
Baber, bra, bram, 77, a, red,
Bamor, (nundr) is, 319, rumour, re*
port.
Bursas, adv., backward, again.
Ii2
Digitized by
Google
878
LATIN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY.
8.
Bacer, crtt cnmif 77, <i, Mierei. Mods
Sacer, the Saertd Mounts ■•€»,
onim, Moeredritet.
Baepe, adv^ often.
6«viti-a, m, cruelty.
Sagittari-ua, i, tnreker.
Sagant-mn, i, Sagunium, a town in
Spain.
Salt-&re (ar-, at-), to dance,
Baloa, (salut) ia, 293, $<tfety.
6alv-as, a. nm, safe,
8an-ftre (av-, at-), to heal, cure.
Sanct-na, a, um, usered,
Bangais, (sangnin) is (sl), blood.
Bapiens, (aapient) if, 107, m$e, a
vise man.
Bapienter, 215, 2, b, witely.
Bapienti-a, as, wUdom,
Batia, adv., enough.
Batina, oomp. of satia ; aathu eat, it
u better.
Bcbol-a, ae, tchooL
Bcienti-a, m, science, knowledge.
Bcind-dre (add-, adaa-), to cut, cut
down.
Sdpio, (Scipidn) is, Scipio.
Bc-ire (sciv-, scit-), to know.
Bcrib-^re (scrips-, script-), to write.
Bcriptor, (scriptAr) is, 319, writer.
Be, ace. of soi, 142.
Bec«d-6re (secess-, secess-), to se-
cede.
Becret6, adv., secretly, privatdy.
Becund-us, a, mn, second, faUowing.
Bed, buL
Bed-dre (86d-» sess-, 394, Y.), to sit,
sit down.
Beditios^is, a, nm, seditious.
Bemel, adv., once; semel atqae ifee-
ram, once and again.
Bementis, (sement) is, a sowing (of
corn).
Semper, adv., always.
Bempitern-us, a, nm, eternal.
Benat-us, ds, senate.
Benex, (sen) is, 107, old, old main.
Senectos, (senectdt) is, 293, oid age.
Sen-i, fB,SL, six each, six at a time^
distrib., 189.
Sententi-a, e, opinion.
Bent-ire {senB-, sens-), to feel, think,
percewe.
Bepar-are (av-, at-), to separate,
Septem, indecL, seven.
September, bris (m.), September.
Septentrion-es, urn, the north, the
seven stars composing Ursa Migor.
Beptim-ns, a, am, seventh.
Beptaaginta, indecL, seventy.
Bequan-a, e, Seine (river).
Beqaan-as, i, Sequanian (people of
Gkol).
3eqa-i (secat-), dep., to follow.
Ser-£re (s€v-, s&t-), to sow, plant,
Sermo, (sermon) is, 331, speech.
Serv-are (av-, at-), to keep, preserve.
Serv-as, i, slave.
Beveritas, (severitat) is, 293, sever-
ity.
Bex, indecL, six.
Sext-as, a, am, sixth.
Si, conj., if.
Sic, adv., so, thus.
Bicat, conj., so as, just as.
Sidas, (sider) is, 344, b, star, con-.
stdUUion.
Sign-am, i, standard, signaL
Simil-is, is, e, 104, Uke (with gen. or
dat).
Simal, adv., together, at the same
time; simolac, simalatqae, as soon
as.
Bin, conj., but if
Sine, prep, with abl, without.
Sitis, (sit) is, 300, thirst
Socer, i, 65, R., father^n-law.
Societas, (societftt) is, 293, society,
fellowship.
Soci-as, i, companion, ally.
Socrates, (Socrat) is, Socrates,
Bdl, (Sol) is. the Sun.
Digitized by
Google
LATI1V-EN6LISH VOCABULAEY.
379
Bdlmn, adv., otdy; ncm solum — sed
etiam, not only — but also.
Bdl-os, a, um, gen. soliafl, 194, R. 1,
alone.
Somn-os, i, sleep,
Sordid-US, a, um, sordid, mean,
Soror, (sordr) is, sister,
Bors, (sort) is, 293, lot.
BpsLd-xunHf i, space, opportunity ; spa-
timn anna capiendi time for to-
king up arms, 492, a.
Speci-es, ei, appearance.
Spect-are (av-, at-), to look, look at,
Bpes, ei, hope.
Splendid-OS, a, mn, brUUant, splen-
did.
Splendor, (splendor) is, 319, splen-
dour, glare.
St-ftre (stet-, Stat-, 387, m.), to stand.
Btatim, adv., immediately,
Statio, (station) is, 333, IL, station,
post.
6tata-6re (stata-, stat^), to appoint,
Jix, decide.
Stell-a, 88, star.
Stipendi-nm, i, tribute, tax.
Stipendiari-os, a, nm, tributary,
Stoicns, i, a Stoic,
String-dre (strinx-, strict-), to draw
(as a sword).
Stadiose, 215, 1, zealously, studi-
ously,
Stndi-om, i, zeal, study, desire,
Stnltiti-a, m, folly,
Stolt-ns, a, am, foolish ; stoltas, a
fool.
Soad-ere (snas-, suas-), to advise, to
persuade,
Baay-is, is, e, 104, sveet.
Bab, prep, with ace., up to, under;
with abL, under,
Sabesse (sab+esse), to be under, to
be near.
Babig-6re (sabfig-, sabact-, sab +
agere), to subdue.
Bob-ire (iv-, it-), to go under, to un-
dergo ; ad pericola sabeonda,/or
undergoing perils,
Sabito, adv., suddenly,
Sabjic-«re (sobjdc-, sobject-, sob +
jacere), to throw under, to throw
up.
Soblatas, a, am, part of toUere, eUi-
ted, piaffed up,
Sobsist-Sre (sobstTt-), to stand still,
to halt,
Sabsidi-om, i, assistance, a reserve
of troops,
Soev-ns, i, a Suevian (people of
Germany).
Sofferre (sostdl-, sobUt-, sob+ferre)
to bear, sustain.
Soi, reflex, pron., 142, himsdf, her*
self, &c.
Sxmi, I am. {See esse.)
Sam-€re (somps-, sompt-, 401, 4, b),
to take,
Bomm-os, a, om (soperl. of soperas,
370), highest, top of a thing ; in
sammo monte, on the top of the
mountain.
Sompt-os, lis, expense ; somptfl so5,
at his oton expense.
Soper-are (av-, at-), to overcome.
Soperior, oris (compar. of soperas,
370), higher.
Soppet-^re (soppetiv- and soppetit-,
suppel^t-), to be at hand, to be in
store,
Sopplici-om, i, puni^ment,
Soscip-^re (soscSp-, soscept-, sob-f-
capere), to undertake,
Sospicio, (sospicion) is, 333, "Bl, sus-
picion,
Sastin-€re (sostina-, sostent-, fob-f-
tenSre), to sustain.
Boos, a, om, one^s own, 143.
Tac-dre (taoo-, tacit-), intrans., to te
silent; trans., to keep secret,
Tfodet, pertflBsom est (Impers., 576),
Digitized by
Google
380
LATfN-ENOXilSH YOOABUMRY.
it teeariet, it ii»gust$ ; ma tiidet,
/ am disgusted.
Talis, is, e, 184, such,
Twn, adv., so,
Tamen, coiy., nevertheless
Tang-fire ( tetig-, tact-, 411), to
touch.
Tanquam, adv., eu, like.
Taotom, so mttch (neat of tantas) ;
tantom aori, so much gold, 186.
Tant-os, a, om, 184, so great,
Tard-§re (av-, at-), to delay.
Taor-us, i, bt^.
Tel-um, i, weapon, dart.
Temere, adv., rashly.
Temeritas, (temeritftt) is, 293, rash-
ness.
Temper-are (av-, at-), to r^rain
from; ab injuria tempeyare, to
refrain from outrage.
Temperanti-a, se, temperance,
Tempestas, (temp^t&t) is, 293, storifn,
tempest.
Tempi-am, i, temple; templom de
marmore, temple of marUet nuir-
ble temple.
TeiBil)as, (tempdr) is, 344, b, tim^
Tenax, (tenic) Is, 107, temitious,
firm.
Tener, a, um, 77, b, tender.
Ten-ere (tenu-,tent-), to hold.
Terg-ui^, i, bach.
Tend, ae, a (distrib., 189), three apiece,
three at a time.
Terra, ae, earth i ten^. mvique, ^J
land and sea.
Terr-Sre (term-, territ-), to terrify.
Terti-ns, a, tun, third.
Tiberi-os, i, Tiberius.
Themistocles, (Themistocl) is, The-
mistocles.
Tigurinus pagus. The canton of Zu-
rich.
Tim-€re (timu-), to fear. ,
Timid-ofl, a, nm, timid. ^
Timor, (timor) if, 319, /e<w.
Tiro, (tiron) is, 1Q7, ineaeperieMed,
raw.
Toler-Are (av-, at-), to endure.
ToU-fire (snstftlr, sablftfe-), to lift up,
take away. .
Tot, so many, 184.
Tot-US, a, um, gen. ;i!i, 194, |U I,
whole, till.
Trabs, (trab) is, beam, 283.
Trad-€re (tradid-, tradit-), to surrtn-
der.
TraguJ-a, as, a dart (used by tbe
Gauls).
Trab-6re (tnw-, trac^, 401, 8), ta
draw.
Trajic-6re (tngic-, tnyect-), traiudt.,
to throw or convey over ; intoaiis.,
to cross over^
Tranquill-iter, adv., calmly, <ra»-
quiUy (215, 2, tranqmllos, trem-
quil),
Transduc-I^ (transdox-, fcranadoct*)
to lead across.
Trans-ire (iv-, it-), to eros$ or pats
over.
Transn-Are (av-. At*), to itom aeros$,
Tredecim, indecl., thirteem.
Tres, tria, 194, three.
Tribun-us, i, tribune.
Tngmt% thirty.
Triplex, (triplic) is, 107, tr^ale, three-
fold.
Tripartita, adv., in three dioisiant.
IVistiti-a, DB, sadness.
Tti, thou, 130.
TuUni Hostiliufl, TuUus BostUiue.
Tom, adv., theii.
Turbo, (turbin) ia (m., 840), vAvi-
wind.
Turp-is, is, e, 104, base.
Turpiter, adv., 215, 2, a, ha^eiy,
Turris, (turr) is, 302, tower.
Tut-us, a» nm, stzfe.
Tu-us, a, am, thy, thine, 134.
LAtm-BNOLtdH VOOABULAftT.
d8i
u.
Ubi, adv., ioh^fti ipkek,
Ufnnamf wJm-e in ths i$&rld 1 197^ eL
U11-1UI, a, mn, gen. ios, 194, 1, Onf.
VltenoT, iOB ^mpw^ of iiltr% 371),
farther,
TTltrd, adr^ tffoiu^s own iMOfA.
UlyMes, (Ulyss) is, Ulygses.
Umbr-a, ae, shade, shadow*
Una, adv., iogdhet.
Unde, adv., whence.
UndeciiB^ l&dee)., e2^«in.
UndicpM, adv^/^0«i m Mu.
Univera-os, a, mn, universal, the
whole.
Unqoam, adv., ever,
Un-os, a, mn, ge^ muas, 194, one.
Uniuqaigqae, 178, 6, each one.
Urbs, (orb) is, 293, city.
Usque, adv., as far as ; asqae ad,
even vpto. '
Ut, or nti, coi^., ibdi, 546.
Uter, atra, atrom, 194, which of the
two.
Ut-i (fls-), dep. (with abL, 316, IL), to
use, employ.
Util-is, is, e, 104, useful.
Utinam, coi^)., would that, O that,
528.
Utmin, ccmj., whether; atrom — an,
whether — or.
Uxor, (oxdr) is (f.), wife.
Vac-Are (av-, at-j, to be empty, to re-
main unoccupied.
Yag-ftri (vagftt-), dep., to wander.
Yal-^e (valti-), to avail; plurimum
valet, is most powerful.
Valid-OS, a, nm, strong.
Valde, adv., greatly, very much.
Yaletado, (valetadin) is, 339, health.
Vall-um, i, rampart.
Vast-fire (av-, at-), to lay waste.
Vast-OS, a, om, vast. [ute,
Vectigal, (vectigftl) is, 325, tax, trib-
Veh-^re (vex-, ved-), to corrf, drive,
Vehementer, adv., v^temently, 215,
2,*.
Vel^ oot^., or, 519, 8.
Velle, vohii, 592, to wish, to be able.
Veknt, (vetee) \», 107, swift.
Venator, (venatOr) is^ hmnttr*
Vener-ftri (at-), dep., to redtrt, to
veneratif.
Venetos, a, om, VeneiiafL
Veni-a, to, pardon.
V6n-Ire (v6n-, vent^, 42d, IV.), Uf
come,
Vent-OS, 1, mnd,
Ver, (ver) is, n., 325, spring,
Verber-ftre (ftv-, it-), to flog,
Verb-om, i, word.
Ver-€re (verft-), dep., to fear.
Verg-«re (vers), to incline, tend.
Vero, <xfy., but, truly, certainly, 173.
Verryr (Verr) is, Verres.
Vewre (vert-, vers-, 421, b), to turn,
YM-us, a, om, true.
'ersuB, prep, with ace., towards.
ester, tra, tram, your, 134.
Veteran-OS, a, um, veteran.
Vetos, (veter) is, 108, B*. 2, old.
Vexill-om, i, standard.
Vi-a, SB, way; Via Bacra, the Sacred
Way, a street in Bx>me.
Victori-a, m, victory.
Vic-OS, i, village.
Vid-Sre (vid-, vis-, 394, V.), to sees
videri, pass., to seem, appear,
Vigilanti-a, ib, vigilance.
Vigil-ftre (av-, at-), to watch,
Vigili-a, ae, watch ; de tertia vigilia,
about or after the third watch.
Viginti, indecU twenty.
Vil-is, is, e, 104, cheap, vile.
Vinc-*re (vie-, vict-), to conquer.
Vincol-om, i, bond.
Vindex, (vindic) is, avenger.
Vin-om, i, wine.
Viol-fire (av, at-), to violate, lay wast^.
Vir, i, man.
Digitized by
Google
382
LATIN-BNOLISH VOCABULARY^
VirgiH-ni, i, VirgiL
Virgo, (virgin) ia, 339, virgin,
Viriliter, adv., manlyf courageously.
Virttbi, (virtftt) ii, 293, valour, vir-
tue.
YiMf vim, vi, 301, 3, girength, force ;
pL, viref f inm.
Vit-a, ae, life.
Vit-are (av-, at-), to shun, avoid,
Viti-um, i, vice.
Viv-€re (vix-, vict-), to live.
Vix, adv., scaarcdy.
Voc-are (av-, at-), to call
Vol-«re (av-, at-), tojly.
Volo, / toish. {See veUe.)
Voluntas, (volonttt) Uh 293, loiH
unsh.
Vc^ptai> (volaptftt) is, 293, pUas-
ure.
Volv-«re (volv-, volat-), to roU.
Voa, you, 130.
Vox, (voc) if, 293, voice.
Vnlg-ns, i, n., 63, K. I, the common
people.
Vulner-ire (av-, at-), to wound.
Vuhnis, (vvlner) i«, 344, b, wound.
ENGLISH-LATIN VOCABULARY.
Digitized by
Google
Digitized by
Google
ENGLISH-LATIN VOCABULARY.
AbiUiy, facnltas, (facoltat) is, 293.
AMe (to be), poese, qnire (qaeo).
Abode, domicifimn, i
Abtmnd, abtmdlre.
About, circiter (conceming) ; de, abl.
Abrogate, abrogflre.
Absent (to be), abesse.
Abstain from, abitindre (abstinn-,
abstent-).
Accuse, uMmsftre.
Accustomed (to be), conraescSre
(suev-, Buet-).
Acquit, absobere, 421, a.
Act, agere.
Act ef kindness, beneficiiun, L
Add, addere, 411, c.
Admire, mirftri, admiriri (dep.)*
Admonish, mondre.
Adore, adorftre.
Adorn, ornfire.
Adoice, consiliiun, L
Advise, mondre, admondre.
^duan, MdwoB, i.
Afair, rei, 117.
Affectum, afiTectio, 333, B.
Affirm, bonfirmftre.
Aff<yrd, prsBbSre, 527.
After, post (with aocus.) ; de (with
abL).
After that, postqaam.
Again, mrsus ; iterom, ado.
Against, contra ; adversns (with ac-
cns.); against Cicero, in Oioero-
nem.
Age (time of life), BBtas, (aetat) is, 293.
Agree, consentire, 427, III.
Agreeable, gratus, a, nm (with dat) ;
it is agreeable, Hbet, or Inbet, 583.
K
Aid, aoxiliom, i; to aid, a^juyare,
390.
Alarm, perlurbftre.
AU, omnis, e; cimctas, a, nm; in aU,
adv., omnino.
AUofoed (it is), licet, 583.
Ally, socins, i
Almost, fere ; pene, adv.
Alone, sofais, 194, IL 1 ; omu.
Already, jam, adv.
Also, etiam, adv.
Altogether, omnino^ adv.
Although, quamvis, coi\j.
Always, semper.
Ambassador, legatns , i.
Ambush, insidiss, 57, IL
Amiable, amabilis, e, 104.
Among, inter (with ace.).
Ancients (the), veteres; pL of vetas,
old.
And, et, qae, ac, atqae; and not^
neqae.
Anger, ira, sb.
Animal, animal, 325.
Announce, nnntiflre.
Answer, responddre.
Antony, Antonios, i.
Any, uUns, a, nm, 194, IL 1; any
one, any you please, &c. See 178.
Apart (to be), dist&re.
Apiece, nse the distrib. numerals, 189.
Apply, adhibSre (n-, it-).
Appoint, oonstitaere, 421, a.
Approach, adventtis, lis ; to ap-^
proach, appropinqnflre : accedSre.
Archer, Sagittarius, i.
Arise (as a storm), coorxri (ooort-),
dep.
Arm, aimftre.
K
Digitized by
Google
386
ENGLISH-LATIN VOCABULARY.
Amtt, arma, orum.
Army, exercitos, us.
Arrange, disponfire, 406, b.
Arrival, adventoB, ns.
Arrive at, pervonire, 427, IV.
Art, ars, (art) is, 293.
Artificer, faber, fabri, 77, a.
Am, ooiy., xjA, a$,cf what kind, qaa-
lis, 184 ; as far as to, usqae } as
soon as, simolatqae.
Ashamed (one is), pad^t, 579.
Ask, rogftre, postulfire.
Assemble, conveiure, 427, IV.
Assist, adjuvftre, 390.
Assistance, aoxiliam, i
Association, societafl, (sodet&t) is.
Assure, confirm&re. [293.
At, ad, apod; at home, domi; at
length, denram.
Athenian, Atheniensis, is.
Athens, Athense, aroin.
Attack (notm), impetus, is; (verl^,
oppognare.
Austeritjt, sereritas, (severit&t) is,
293.
AwpUiwries, auxilift, Dram.
Avail, valgre. -
Avaricious, avaros, L
Avoid, vitare.
Await, expectflre.
B.
Back, tergom, i
Badly, male, adv-^ 21^, E.
Band (of meo), mamis, os.
Barbarian, barbama, i.
Base, turpis, e, 104; basely torpi-
ter» 215, 2, a.
Battle, pralium, i.
Be, esse; be among, interesse, 174;
be over, pneesse ; be wanting, de-
esse, witbdat
Beam, trabs, (trab) is, 293.
Bear (verb), feire, 596.
Beast, bestia, e ; beast of burden,
jomentom, i
Beautiful, pulcher, cbra, chruu, 77, a.
Becaiise, conj., quod, qma, propterea
quod.
Becoming (it is), decet, 583.
Bed, cubiie, (cubil) ia, 312, bed-
chamber, cubiculum, L
Before, prep., ante (ace.) ; adv., an-
tea ; b^ore that, antequam.
Beg, rogftre, orfire.
Begin, incip&e, 416, Cf I begm,
ccepi, 611.
Beginning, initium, i*
Behold, spectAre.
Behooves (it), oportet^ 588.
Belgian, Belga, n.
Believe, credSre, 411, c
Belong, pertindre, 394, L
Benevolent, benevolus, % vol
Benevolence, benevolentia, «•
Beseech, obsecrare.
Besiege, oppagntre.
Best, optimus, a, um, 370.
Betake omfs se^, »e reoip«re, 41Q, a
Better, melior, 370.
Between, inter.
Bind, obstringere.
Bird, avis (avis), 300.
BU, frsBuum, i; pi., i and a, 3918.
BiU, mordere, 395, IV.
Black, niger, gr«, gnua, 77, a.
Blame, incusftre, vitaperttre.
Blood, sanguis, (sanguin) » (m.).
Blooming, flsrem, {Aoncut) is» 16?.
Boast, prsBdicare.
Body, corpus, (cocpor) i«, 9H-
Bond, vincolumy i
Book, liber, brL
Booty, prasda, as.
Bom (to b^), nasci ^at), de|u
Boundary, &m, (fin) is (m.).
Boy, paer; i.
Brave, fortis, e; bravely, fintitflr
«15, 2.
Bravery, virtus, (virtnt) is, 293.
Break through, pexfiriugSre (p^a
^ i pamm^Sra, 666, V^ «.
Digitized by
Google
EWSUSHrLATIN rOGAB^LA&T.
387
Bridge^ pciiB, [^fosA) is, ^IM, E. L
Bring, duc6re, agdref Arifi^^<idb,re'
ducfire ; bring back word, renan-
tiflre ; bring te pcui, perficfir^ ;
, hinf iogeAar, ofl«?foe, 416, h,
Britain, Britannia, 8B ; Briton, Bri-
tannns, i
Broad, latxis, a, ubl
Brother, frater, <fiwtr) k.
£iei^, aedifiottBe^ bmOd « fMt^ 'Bidi-
ficfire.
Bvll, tannu, i
Bum^ incead&e ; hum Mp, exvH^
^»r^n, oncis, ^«iei^ ii, S44.
Burst into, IranapirQ, 606, V ., -o.
Business, negotium, i
Bui, sed, aotom.
Btty, entire ; buy up, eoemdre.
B^, prep, with i^ a «w* cb, 93, li.
d^ mght, zMcta, adv^.
Casar, 0»sar, (Cesar) is.
Call, Yocare ; to name, appeBire ;
^ be called, aaoimftri, appeOkl
Call together, «oiHroeare.
CaU-upon, in^sdefire.
Camp, eastra, ^inuB.
C<»7» (to be 9kk^, po«e, 56T ; / eem-
moif man patmm, ntqaea
Captive, captiyns, 1
Care (noun), com, «; (reri^, 43QX«ee.
Carefully, diligeniw; atndiose.
Ciwry, fiorttoia, vehSr*; carry i»,
. ^gmfin, 401, 4, A
Varihage, €«tiiagpo, (Cactii^fia^ is.
CcusitLS, Cassias, L
Casticus, Casticns, i
Catiline, C«tiliiia« MS.
Cause, caasa, «.
Cautious, cavtns, a, mL
Caoalry, eiqpzitetBS, «f ; Adiwisvn^
to cavalry, eqniettris, «, 104.
(kiebrate, celdnAre.
CfZ^, Celta, «.
Cemsure, i
Ceai/i«9«on, centario, (c ea i UnK Wi) is.
Certmn, certos, a, mn; a certain
one, qoidam, 178. j
Certainly, adr^ isarfet : pra£Kto,Tero.
Chain, vincolmn, L
Change (dooh), oom n wi ta tio, (eom-
mntatkm) is ; (r«i4»), iMitare, eom>
mntare.
Champ, mordere, 995, IV.
C&iie, iacKpaiae, 396.
Cid^, pnnDeps, (piincip) is, i07.
CAt^ infans, (infant) is, 107 ; €Jka.
ilncn, jilMri, ocwa.
CiMae, driigtei, 666, V., «.
Christ, Christas, i
Cicero, Cieeio, (Cioeeta) is.
0»&iidil acK, (are) ia, 993.
Citizen, civis, (ciy) is, c, 25, a.
City,mAB,(^)iM,^3.
Cloud, nubes, (nab) is, 300; domd
ofdmMt ▼k palreria.
Cokaii, iooboo, (ooftiast) is, 5»8.
Cold, Mgidas, a, am ; (noon), itvgas,
(fii«Dr)iB^3i4.
Collect, colligere (leg-, laet^); <x>-
gere (coeg-, coaet-) ; eoUeet com,
framentftri, dep.; collect into a
Jlock, Goagregin.
Colour, color, (colAr) is, 519.
Come, rewatOt 4S7« IV.; c^me near,
ai^ropinqoftre ; come to, parre-
Dire ; come tegt^Om-, eonraidra.
Coming, adventa^ tm»
Command, inq>erare, wiiii dat
Commemderr VBOfesnXat, (imperaMr)
is, 319.
Commit, committfira; eaeimt^ sal-
cide, mortem sibi oosHcisedre.
Common, commamis, a, KM.
Cammunhpecpb, iddbs,. (ipkl^ is, 1»3.
Companion, socitis» i; alNnes^ (co-
mit) is.
Compel, cngfea, 416, h
Cprnpiain, qaeri (quest), dap.
Oomplete, conficdre.
Digitized by
Google
888
ENGLISH-LATIN VOCABULART.
Concerning (prep, widi abl), de.
Coneerm (it), intereit, re(iBr% 584, d.
Co ndemn, damnire, oondemnlre,
348.
Cottfennce, ooQoqaojam, i
Confess, fittfiri, dep.
Con^net, &aiM,pL of&oaM.
Coi^/Uet, ooogreftofl, ta,
Cot^rm, oonSmare.
Coirfound, pertnrbire.
Congratulate, gntaltai, dep.
Conquer, vinoArft (vio-, Tict-) ; rape-
rire.
Conqueror, victor, (yictOr) U, 319.
Conepiraey, coDJanik), (ooi\jimtite)
is, 333, B.
Comul, ooofii], (coDsiil) if.
Consult, ootMolfire (oonraln-, ccm-
ralt-).
Contemplate, oontempliri, dep.
Contend, contendere.
Content, ccmtentiu, a, nm (witb abL).
Continuous, cootineni, (continent)
if, 107.
Continuance, continnatio, (cootinna-
tiOn) if.
Com, finuneotnni, L
Council, condlinm, i.
Counsel, consiliom, L
Course, cnxias, tB.
Covetous, cnpidof , a, am.
Cow, vacca, n.
Cowardice, ignavia, ».
Creak, crepare, 390.
Create, creAre.
€irime, crimen, (crimin) is, 344, a.
Cross over, transire, trajicdre.
Crow, connu, i.
Crown, corona, ob.
Cry out, exclamtre.
Cultivation, coltas, tB \ homanitas.
Cup, pocolmn, i.
Cure, sanftre.
Custom, mm, ^mor) if, 331, b.
Cut down, refdndfire (reacid-, re-
scisi-).
Cut to pieces, o»d«ie, 411, b.
Cyrus, OyvoBfi,
Daily, ad^,, qnotidianns, a, nm ; siii9^
qootldie.
Dance, aaltire.
Danger, pericohmi, i.
Danube, Danabina, i
Dare, anddre (auras sum).
Dart, telmn, i ; pilun, i.
Daughter, filia, ».
Dixy, dief , ei, 116, B.., by day ; in-
terdio, ady. ; to-day, hodie, adr.
Dragon, draoo» (dracdn) is.
Z>e<u2, mortoos, a,iim.
Deesr, cams, a, nm.
Death, mora, (mort) is, 293.
Deceive, falLBre (fefell-, fids-).
Decide OH, wHetaeire.
Decree (verb), deceiqfire (deerdr-,
deoret-) ; (noon), decretnm, i ; <2e-
cree of the senate, senatos congul-
tcLm._
Deep, altos, a, am.
D^eat, peUdre, 411, b.
Defend, defenddre, 421, c.
Defence, monitio, 333.
Defender, vindez, (vindic) is, 306.
Defiles, angostiie, amm, 57, &.
Delay, conctlri (dep.); active, tar-
dare (to retard).
Deliberate, delibeiAre.
Delight, delect&re.
DeUght (with), libenter, adv.
Demand, posc6re, 411, a; postolftre,
imperare, 390; demand bade, re-
petdre.
Deny, negAre.
Depart, discedSre, 401, 3, b.
Depart out of, exceddre.
Departure, discessos, As.
Dependant, diens, (client) is, c.
Descend, descendfire.
Desert, deserdre, 406, a; a desert,
desertom, i.
Digitized by
Google
ENGLISn-LATIN VOCABULARY.
369
Deterter, perfiig^ ob.
Desire, capiditas, (cupidit&t) if;
(verb), cupere (io) : stadiam, L
Desirous, cupidas, a, am.
Despair (verb), desper&re; (aonn),
desperatio, 333, R.
Despise, Bpem6re, 406, TTT., a: cxm-
temndre.
Destroy, delfire, 394, n.
Destruction, interitns, us.
Determine, (xmstdtadre, statoSre.
Devoid, expers, 336.
Die, moiiri, or wan (morta-), dep.
Difference (it makes do), xiibil inter-
est, nihil refert.
i>t^eren^,diversas, a,mn; alias, 194,
R. 1.
DifficuU, difficilis, e, 104.
Dignity, dignitas, (dignitftt) is, 293.
Diligence, dUigentia, 8b.
Diligent, diligens, (di%ent) is, 107 ;
diligently, adv., diUgenter.
Diminish, minaSre. diminadre.
Direct (of a ship), gabemftre.
Disagree, dissentire, 427, III.
Discipline, disciplina, a.
DiscomJU, fag&re.
Discover, invenire, 427, IV.
Discourse, disserSre (disseni-, dis-
sert-).
Discretion, oonsiliam, i.
Dismiss, dimittdre (mis-, missr).
Displease, displicSre (displica-, dis-
plicit-), with dat, 161, R.
Dispute^ dispatfire.
Dissolve, dissolv^re, 421, a.
Distant (to be), dist&re.
Distribute, distribaSre, 406, a; ar-
range, dispon^re.
District, pagas, i
DividCi dividSroi 401, 3, a; divide
among, distribaere, 423, c.
Divulge, enanti&re.
Do, agSre, fac6re.
Dock-yard, navale, (naval) is, 312.
Dog, canis, (can) is.
K
Door, (ana, (for) is, 300.
Double, daplicftre.
Doubt, dabitare.
Doubtful, incertas, a, am; dabiifl^
a, am.
Dove, colomba, se.
Draw, trahdre (traz-, tract-) ; dn-
cdre (dor-, dact-); draw up, ixt*
straSre, 401, 2 ; draw as a sword^
stringere, 401 ; droM out, edocdre.
Dread, formidare.
Drive, agSre ; drive back, repellftre ;
drive on, or together* oompeUdre.
Druids, Draides, am, pi.
Duty, manos, (manor) is, 344.
Each, qaisqae, 178 ; omnis, e ; eoe^
of the two, vterqae.
Eagle, mqpila, ».
Earth, terra, ».
Easily, facile (adv.).
East, Oriens.
Easy, facDis, e ; very ea<y,perfacilia.
Educate, edacftre.
Egypt, Bgyptas, i (£).
Eighty, octoginta.
Eloqtient, {&caxiidam, B., umi diseititf,
a, am ; eloqaens, 107.
Embark (apon), conscendSre, 309.
Embrace, amplecti (aDq>lex-), dep.
Emperor, imperator, (imperatdr) is,
319.
Employ, ati (as-), dep., with ablt
. adhibdre.
End, finis, (fin) is (m.).
Endeavour, conari (conflt-), dep.
Endure, dor&re ; to bear, tolertre.
Enemy, hostis, (host) is, c.
Enjoin upon, proecipSre.
Enmity, inimicitia, as.
Enough, satis, adv.
Ertrol, conscribfire.
Entreat, rogare.
Equanimity (with), seqao i
Erect, commanire.^
k2
Digitized by
Google
wa
BBrausa-LATm rocABULAitr.
Err, errftre.
EipeeiaUy, adv., pnMeitiiii.
EiiabUthf oonfirm&re.
£ven up to, luqae ad.
Ever, muicuun.
Ev0rla9ting, sempltenHa, a, nm.
£«9r)f, omniM, e, 104.
£««7, malum, i.
E^H-deeA, maleflciam, i
Example, exemplom, i.
Excd, pnMtiro (pnMtit-), witk dat.
ExeOUni, ptwStai^ a, nm; prm-
tans, 107.
Excite, exeictre.
Excuse, excoaatio, 333, B>.
Exercise, exercere.
EsOmt, hoffM, dep.
Expedient (it ia), especQt; 583.
Expel, expellSre.
Expense, anmptiu, ta; ai kis own
expense, a ompts aoa
Eye, oculua, i.
Fable, fabnla, ».
Fot^, fides, ei
Fa2/, cad6re, 411, ^.
Fame, fama, n.
Family of slaves, lAiuilia, to*
Far, ]OBge> adtr.
Farm (as revenues), redimfire.
Farmer, agrie^i.
Father, pater, (patr) is.
Father-in-law, socer, i
FattZ^, culpa, ffi; peccatum, l;^»kf
/att2^ i9«^, culpflre, incnsftre.
Favour, vekria, s; (verb), fkvSre,
395, V.
Fear, timor, (timOr) is, 319 ; (verb),
timere, metuSre.
Feather, pluma, m.
Fell (cut down), cadere, 413, €^.
Fetff, paud, m, a; very fsw, p«r-
paucL
Fidelity, fides, ei
J^feW, ager, gri.
Fierce, feiDz, (feroe) iff, 107 1 atnuL,
107.
JV/1^ quintas, t, mnw
Fight, pugnare.
.Rgw^figara^ a.
FiU, implere ; Jill up, oompttfire,
395, n.
Finally, demfjue, adv.
Find, i uvenire , 427, IV. ; find out,
reperire, 487, V.
Findfaidt with, incusAre.
Fiwtsn, conficeTe.
Fire, ignis, (ign) is (m.).
F%rmafnent, ccalum, i*
First, primus, a, um.
Fish, piscis, (pise) is (m.).
Fit for, idoneus, a, um, with dat.
Five, quinque ; fifoe at a time, quini,
189.
Flag, vexillum, i
Flame, flamma, m.
Flee, fag&re (io), 416, e.
Fleet, classic, (class) is, 30a
ITesh, caro, (earn) ia ^.).
Flight, foga, ».
Flock, grex, (greg) is (m.) ; iiijtodkt,
gregatim, adv.
Hog, verberftre.
Flow, fluSre ; Jlow toge^er, oottflu-
«re, 401, 2, 422.
Flower, fios, (fldi) is, 331, &
Fly, volare.
Follow sequi (seciEt'), dep.
Folly, stuftitia, tbi ineptin^ amm,
57, R.
Fool, stultuB, i;fooH^ atnltus, a,
um.
Foot, pes, (ped) is fm.).
Foot-soldier, pedes, (pedit) is.
For, conj., enim, etenim; /or flijr
saA«, mea causa.
Force, vis, vim, vi, 301, 1; forces
(tnx>ps), oopin, arum, 57, a.
Foreign, alienus, a, um.
EI«GLI8H*LATIIf YOCABITLART.
391
Forest, sylva, ae.
Forever^ in setemnm.
Forget., obliviscly wkli §[eik
Fonot forma, m.
Forti/icationf
Fortify, maxaro,
Fortunatet ftntiuiMiu, a, qii»
Fortmne, foctooa, m.
Forum, forum, i.
Four, qxiBiixxor',four ixpiaet^ 169.
Founder, conditor, 319.
Fountain, forui^ (fo&t) is (m.)-
FraU, 0r««^li«, e, 104.
Free from (to be), cai«re, 34&
Friend, amicus, i.
Friendship, amicitia, «.
Frighten, terrere ; frighiem com-
jdekly, peiterrere.
From, a, ^ifrom every »ide, wadi'
qae, adv.; from my boyhood, a
puero.
FntgoUty, parsisionia» «.
Fruit, fractEts» as.
FvJl, pleaoB, a, vm, 348, &.
Futwre, fntwpu, a» vm.
Giotto, GbOba, «.
Gain^ potiri, 209; gain for
coDciliare.
Game, ladus, i
Oondfen, faoctos, i.
Garrison, prmiidiiiiii, i
Gaie, porta, se.
Gather, coIHg6r«, 41«, d^
G^ati^, Gallia, sb; «Jbe QmiU, QtSJi,
orom.
General, imperator, 319.
German, Oermamu, a, vm.
Get sight of, oonspiettre (oonipex*,
conapect-).
Gift, donum, i
Girl, paella, ae.
€H.ve, dare, 387, m.
Give largess, largiri (It-), d^
Glare, splendor, 319.
Glory, gloria, e.
Go, ire, 605 ; go itraight, petgitf ;
go away, disceddre, 401, 3, b; go
forward, proc^dire,* go forA, or
out, exire.
Goad, ooncitasa.
God, Dens, i, 62, E. a.
Gold, aomm, L
Good, bomu, a« «m; j«0Mi <ieei2, ben^
eficiom ; good^will, volnotas, 293.
Govern, gubemftre. •
Grant (verb), ooQced&re, 401, 3, ft,
dAre : (dooh), coiie«Miia, d».
Great, magnus, a, uin; comp,, ma^
jor ; superL, maximal.
Greatly, vaM«.
Greatness, magnitado, 339.
Greek, Graecus, a, urn.
Ors^, moeror, 319 ; lactus, na,113,N.
Grieve, dolere<; it grieves one, piget,
579.
Guardian, coMos, (costod) ia, o,
2S,a.
Guest, hoBpes, (hof pit) i§,e,fiS,eh
Guide, dioz, (due) is.
Hail, grando, (graodi^ is, 838
Halt,
Hand, vanas, us (£).
Hannibal, Haombal, (Hannibal) if.
Happen, acciddre; it hty^pens, ao-
cidit, 530.
Happily, beate.
Happy, beatua, a, am; feHz, 107
Harass, laoesstee, 406, IH., b.
Harbinger, pranontia, a>.
Harbour, portus, Ha,
Hard, dwnu, p, am.
Hasten, festinftre, contender©.
Hate (to), odisse, 611.
Haired, odtom, i
Have, babfire (haba-, habit). I have
a book, est mihi liber, 125.
He, is, bic, ille.
.fiSMu22o?i^,precep8,(pr8Bciplt)is 107.
Digitized by
Google
892
ENOLISH*LATIN VOCABULARY.
Healt sanire.
Hear, sodire.
Heart, fsor, (oord) is (n.y.
Heaveiit ccBlam, i
Heavy, gravi*, e, 104.
Hdp, aaxfliam, i.
Helvetian, Helvetiafl, «, vm.
HereUdf pmoo, (pnwxm) ii.
Herb, hcffba, e.
Hentate, dnbitire.
HigK altWi m lun ; higher, fiq>erior,
comjx c/'«apenu, 370i
HiU, conii, is (m.}w
HiUock, tamnlai, i
Hinder, impedlre, prohibdre;
His, mmB, a, nm: ejiu.
History, histoiia, n.
Hold, tenere, obtindre : hold back,
retindre.
Home (at), domi, gen. of domiii.
Honest, probuf , a, am.
Honour, honor, 319; (Teib), coUre
(oolo-, colt-).
HonourtMble, honostns, a, uk
Hope, spes, eL
Horn, coma, 113.
Homed, oorniger, a, woo, Tt, b.
Horse, eqaiu, i
Horse-soldier, eqnes, (eqoit) ii.
Hostage, obses, (obtid) if, c, 95, a.
Hour, bora, ».
House, domos, i and as (£), 118, 3.
Household, familia, n.
How great, how manyt qowntos,
186, obe. ; however great, qaan-
tascanqae, 184 ; how long, qaam-
dia, adv.
Humanity, hamanitas, (hamanitat)
u. 393.
Hunger, fames, (fam) is, 300.
Hurl, cingicere, 416, c (coi\)ec-, con-
ject-).
Hurt,
I, ego, 120.
Ides, Idasr idaam (£).
If,BL
Ignorance, ignoratio, 339.
Ignorant, ignaras, a, am; to be ig^
norant of, ignortre, nesdre.
Illustrious, daras, a, am; pmcUu
ros, a, am.
Image, imago, 339.
Immediately, Statim.
Immense, immensas, a, am.
Immortal, immortalis, e, lOi.
Impious, impios, a« am.
Implore, implorftre.
In, prep., in, with abL
Ineess€mt, oontinens, (continent) is^
107.
Increase, aag@re (aax-, aact-).
Incredible, ineredibilis, e, 104.
Indeed, qoidem.
Indolence, inertia, n ; ignaria, m.
Indolent, ignaras, a, am.
Induce, indoc^re, addaclire.
Indulge, indalgdre, dat
Infant, infans, (infant) is, c.
Influence, aactoritas.
Inform any one, aliqaem certioreni
facero.
Inhabitant, incola, ».
If^ure. yiol«re.
Injwry, injaria, n ; incomaodam, i
Innocence, ionocentia, se.
Insect, insectam, i.
Instead of, pro (prep, widi abL).
Instigate, instigftre.
In the mean time, interea.
It interests, interest.
Intrust, committ6re (with dat)*
Invoke, invocftre.
Ireland, Hiberaia, SB.
Iron, ferram, i.
Island, insula, m.
Italy, Italia* a.
Itself, IS».
Digitized by
Google
EN6USH-LATIN
Javdin, telum, i ; tntgola, s.
Join, jnngSre (jimx-, jaxtct-); join
together, conjxmgSre.
Journey, iter, (itiner) ii (n.).
Junior, junior, 370.
Jupiter, 351.
Just, Justus, a, vm;juU to many,
totidem.
Jutiiee, justitia, m.
Keep, tenure, servflre.
Kind, bemgnds, a, urn, with dat:
saayis, e, 335.
Kindle, excit&re.
King, rex, (reg) is.
Kingdom, regnum, i.
KiU, occidSre, interficdre, 390.
Know, scire, noscdre, 525; oognos-
c3re : not to know, nescnre.
Knowledge, scientia, aib
Labour (zKran), labor, 319 ; (verb),
laborare.
Lamb, agnus, i.
Land, terra ; by land and tea, terra
mariqae.
Language, lingua, e: seimo, 331.
Large, magnus, a, um.
Last (to), dnr&re.
Latin, Latinus, a, um.
Laugh, riddre ; laughter, risus, iis.
Imw, jus, ( jur) is (n.).
Lawful (it is), licet.
Lay aside, depondre, 406, b.
Lay waste, populari (at-), dep.
Lead, ducSre (dux-, duct-); lead
back, reducQre ; lead out, edu-
c6re ; lead together, conducdre ;
lead over or across, transducdre,
113, n.
Leader, dux, (duc^ is.
Leaf, folium, i.
League, fosdus, (fosder) is, 344.
Learn, f"^^'^ "— -^' ^- ^i- — ^^-
Leave, relinqudrer
Legion, legio, (legion) is, 333, B.
Letter, epistola, 8b; Utters, arum,
58, N.
Level, planus, a, um ; aqons, a, am.
Levy, conscribSre.
Lieutenant, legatus, i.
Lightning, fulgur, (fulgur) is, 3S5.
Life, vita, sb.
Like, similis, e, 104 (with dat).
Line of battle, acies, ei
Lion, leo, (leon) is.
Literature, litters, arum, 57, R.
Little, parvus, a, um.
Live, viv6re.
Living - being, animans, (animant)
is.
Lofty, altus, a, um.
Long, bngus, a, um; adv., longe; a
long timet diu.
Look at, intueri, dep.
Lose, amittSre, perd^re.
Lot, SOTS, (sort) is, 293.
Love (verb), amftre, diligfire ; (noon),
amor, 319.
Low, humilis, e, 104.
Lycurgus, Lycurgus.
M.
Magnanimous, magnanimus, a, um.
Maidservant, ancUla, ».
Maintain, al6re.
Make, facSre, 199; make wa/r, bel-
Ifire ; make war upon, bellum in-
ferre, with dat ; make an attack,
ixx^etum facdre.
Maker, faber, bri.
Maltreat, viol&re.
Man, homo, vir.
Many, multus, a, um.
Marble, marmor, 325.
Master (of school), magister, tri ; (oC
slaves), hems, domious.
Matters (it), interest, refert, 583.
Digitized by
Google
984
BITflLUnHLATIN VOCABULAXT.
MMiein^ medieuia, n.
Mediterranean, Madkemito8a% i
JnlOKt OUBV Qum.
Memory, memoria, e.
AArcsAtfn^ MawalBr, 319.
Messenger, mmtios, i.
Metal, metallmii, L
jtfui-cbiy, mendieB» oi
Middle, medias, «, am.
Migrate, migrtre.
Mile, millia (pMMam), 191, ^;
Military command, imftixua, L
itfil^A. lac, (laek) is (n.).
Mind, mens, (mant) if (C); am-
mas, i.
Mine, mens, a, onk
jtftnerro, Minerva, sb.
Miserable, miser, a, mn^ 77, h,
MiHgute, mitigftre.
Moderation, modos, L
Money, peconia, m.
Moon, lona, 8B.
More, plas, plnrts ; adv., Magia.
Afortei; mortaUfl, e, 104.
Most, plorimos, a, xmi; mosit mm,
pleriqae, 195.
Mountain, mons, (loaDt) it (iil).
Move, movere.
jlfttc^, moltas, a, am; much money.
Magna peosBio.
Multitude, m«lt2ttacko^ sat.
Jliy, meas, a, am.
N.
iMndt Budatf, % am.
Name, nomen, (nocoii^ ia, 344, «;
to name, nominHra.
Narrow, angastas, a» watL
Neighbouring, fimtimaa, a, am:
proximns, a, am.
Nmther, coi\}. — n^r, aeo — neqoa;
neither (of two), iiMtor, tra» tnuo,
194, B. 1.
Neb, rete, (ret) is.
Never, nanqaam (adv.).
Neverikelus, tamflD» oenj.
New, novas, a, am.
Next, posterns, a, am, 118; pnni*
mas, 371.
Nigkt, nox, (noct) ii, 293.
Nine, novem.
Ninik, oonns, a» am.
NobilUy, nobiUtas, (nobniitat) ia 903.
Ab^fe; nobilis, e, 104*
Nobody, nemo, (nemiB) is, ^
Ainse, clamor, 319.
No one, wnlkuh tt, am, 194, B» 1
JNfoi, Bdn ; with tamper., nd.
Nothing, mhiL
Notice, (see) QpniqE»o6re.
Nourish, aldre.
Novelty, novitas, (aovitat) is, 293.
iNfivvem^, Novembar, bris.
Nurse, natriz, (natric) is, 293
Oath, josjorandam, 351, 4.
Obe^, parSre (with dat.).
Obscure, obscaitre.
Obtain booty, prsdAci (ds|^.>.
Obviously; proraQS.
OoBsn, ooaamu, i.
Of, de.
Of owls own accord, altro.
Old, vetos, (vetei) ia, 107.
Old man, senez.
OM a^e, seoectoa, 293.
Oft <Ae otfter side cf, traaa (aoo.) j 911
Digitized by
Google
BNOLira-LATIir TOCABDLART.
SOS
opportunity of (wiA genmd in
gen.), spfttittm, i.
Oradty oracnlain, i.
Oration^ oratio, 333, B»
Orator, orator, 319.
Order J ordo, (ordin) is (m.); to or-
der, jub^re.
Orgetorixt Org^etorix, (Org e to rig ) is.
Origin, origo, 339.
Other, alias, a, od, 194, B>. 1.
Otherwise, aliter.
Ought (one), oportet, 583
Our, noster, tra, tram.
Out of, e, or ex (abL).
Chyertome, snpertee.
Oxt bos, 351, 2.
Pain, doknr, 319.
Paltry, vilis, e, 1«4.
Pardon, venia, ae.
Parents, pareutei, ium.
Part, pars, (part) is.
Pass, iter fao&-e, 310.
Pcusage, iter, (itiner) is (■.).
Patience, patientia, ».
Patiently, patienter, adr.
Pay, pendSre.
Peace, pax, (pac) is, 293.
Peninsula, peniasqla, m.
People, popalas, i.
Perceive, animadvert^re.
Perchance, forsitan, forte, adv.
Persian, Persa, ae.
Persuade, saaddre, penroadire.
Phalanx, phalanx, (pliaiang) is.
Philosopher, philosophas, i
Philosophize, philosoph&ri, dep.
Pilot, g«bemator, 319.
Pious, pins, a, am.
Pirate, prs^o, 335.
Pity, miserere ; I pity, me miserdt^
579.
Place, locfiM,ii pL,ianda: toplaee,
p(»Are.
Place into, im]
! Plmeid, placidns, a, mn.
Plain, planus, a, urn; e<]piafl, a, vin:
a plain, seqaor, 327.
Plan, oonsilian^ i.
Plant, planta, m; toptemt, seHMre.
Plato, Plato, 834.
Pleading, dictio, 333, B.
Pleastmt, jueoiidas, a, aa.
Please, placdre (with dat.); iipteai*
es, placet, 583.
PUoMUM, Totaptas, (tat^ is, t93.
Plough, arlre.
Plunder, dii^>Cre s pzvidtri, dep., 491.
Poet, poeta, m (m.).
Pompey, Pompetns, i
Poor, aegens, inops, paaper, 107.
Port, portas, ds.
Post, statio, 333, R.
Possess on^s self of, potiri (with
gen. or abL).
Power, vis, vim, vi, 301, 1 ; jxitestas,
(tat) is, 293.
Powerful, potems, (poten^ is, 167.
Praise, laos^ (land) k, 293 ; toprmse,
laadare.
Prayers, preces, am, pL of prax.
Precept, prMoeptani, i.
Preceptor, praeceptor, 319.
Precious, cams, a, am.
Prefer, anteponfire.
Prepare, par&re.
Present (to be), adessA ; isAenwe,
267.
Preserve, servftre ; prtterve moderth
Hon, modam habere.
Preside over, pneesse.
Prevail upon, permovOre.
Prevent, profaibere, ofastare.
Principle, prlncqnom, i
Prisoner, captivus, L
Private information, indicivii, L
Proceed, perg^re, 447.
Proclaimer, prseco, 331, a.
Procure, oomparftre.
Promise, fides, ei ; to p i vmite , tpoo*
dfire, 395, IV.
Digitized by
Google
896
ENGLISH-LATIN VOCABULARY.
Property, res fiuniliarif : funUia, a.
Providence^ Providenti*, «.
Province, provincia, e.
Prudence, prodentia, «.
Pmdeni, pradenf , (prodent) ii, 107.
Ptolemy, Ptolemnaa, t
Punish, pmiire.
Pumshment, poena, »: snppUoi-
Qin, L
Pursue, perseqcd (dep.)-
Put-toJUgJii, fogAre : dire in fiigam.
Pyrenees, Pyren»i (montea).
Pythagoras, Pythagonui, a.
Queen, Teginti, »•
Quickly, cito, adv.
Jtace, genoB, (gener) is, 344; gens,
(gent) is.
Rain, imber, bris.
Raise, tollSre : exciMre.
Rank, ordo, (ordin) is (m.).
Rapidly, celeriter, adv.
Rashly, temere.
Rashness, temeriUs, (temeritat) is,
293.
Reach, pervenire.
Read, leg^re.
Ruxp, metdre.
Reason, ratio, 333, B..
Rebellion, rebellio, 333, &.
ReeaU, reTOOftre.
Receive, accipfee; fvoetve back, re-
cipSre.
Reckon, dnc^re.
Recollection, memoria, a.
Red, ruber, bra, bmm, 77, a.
Refrain, temperare.
Refuse, recusAre.
Reign, regnnm,!', to reign, regiOre.
RjQoice, gaodere.
Rdnte, narrftre : oommemorare.
Reliece, levftra.
Religion, religio, 333, R,.
Remain, man&re.
Remains, reliqain, anun, 57, &.
Remove, removgre.
Renew, renovftre : redintegrfire.
Repair, refic6re.
Repel, propnls&re (ward oflf ).
Repent, pasnitere ; I repent, me pea
nitet, 579.
Repress, opprim6re.
Reprove, increpftre.
RepubUc, respnblica, 351, 3.
Resist, resistere, with dat.
Restrain, retindre.
Retreat, recedCre.
iZe^um (restore), reddSre; (go back),
revertare, or reverti.
Revenue, vectigal, (vectigal) is.
Revere, veuerftre.
Revoke, revocftre, abrogare.
Reward, pnemiimi, i.
Rhine, Khenns, i.
Rhetoric, rbetorica, a.
Rich, dives, (divit) is, 107.
Riches, divitisB, anun, 57, B*.
Ride (on horseback), eqnitAre.
Right, jus, (jur) is; rightly, jure
(abl. of jus) : recte, adv.
Rise, oriri, dep.
River, flavins, i ; flomen, (flumin) is.
Robber, latro, 331, a.
Rockf^petn, a.
Roll, volv6re.
Roman, Bomanos, a, nm.
Rome, Bx>ma, a.
Rose, rosa, a.
Rouse up, ezcitftre.
Rov^, fhgire, pellSre : fandSre, 416, a.
Royal-power, regnnm, i.
Ride, regfire : imperSre, with dat.
Run, corrdre.
8.
Sacred, sanctos, a, nm ; sacer, era,
omm; S€Kred rites, sacriK, oram;
Sacred Way, Via Sa^-a; Sacred
Mount, Mens Sacer.
Digitized by
Google
EKGUSfl-LATIN VOCABULARY.
397
8adnet$, triftitia, m : aaoaror, 319.
St^fe, salvag, a« um; tatiu, a, am.
Safety, fains, (sahit) ia, 293.
Sailor, naata, e.
Sake— for the sake of, canat, abL,
135^ n., b.
Same, is, ea, id; the very $ame,
idem, 150.
Sand, aridom, i
Say, dicSre ; / say, too, inquam.
Scarcely, vix.
Scatter, nptirgSTe.
Scholar, diicipaliUy L
School, MckkoU, m.
Scout, exploratnr, 319.
Sea, mare, 312 ; mqaor, 325.
Secede, BecediSre.
Second, aecondiia, a, wn.
SedUion, aeditio, 333, B.
See, vidfire ; (notice), eonapioire.
Seek, qaarere.
Seize, occapAre ; seize up, aniptee.
Self, ipse.
Senate, senatas, As.
Senate-house, oioria, n.
Senator, senator, 319.
Send, mittere; send away, dimit-
tdre ; send for, azcess£re.
Senior, senior, (senior) is, 107 (oomp.
of senex), 370.
Separate, separtre : dirid^e.
Sepulchre, sepulchmm, i.
Sequanian, Seqaanos, i.
Serve (worship), colore.
Set (as heavenly bodies), oooid«re.
Set out, profioisci ; set forth, expo-
nSre ; set up, propondre.
Setting (of heavenly bodies), occa-
sus, ds.
Seven, septem; seventh, septimos,
a, nm.
Seventy, septaaginta.
Severe, gravis, e, 104.
Severity, severitas, (severitit) is,
993.
Shadow, umbra, a.
L
Sharp, acotos, a, nm.
Shdrpiy, acriter, adv.
Shine, mictre, 389, |y j shine forth,
emicAre.
Ship, navis, 300.
Shore, littns, (littor) is, 344.
Short, brevis, e, 104. \
iS^A^nc, monstrare, ostenddre ; (noon),
species, ei.
Shower, imber, bris.
Shun, vitftre.
Shut, claoddre.
Sick, aBger, gra, gram.
Sig^n, signam, i.
Sight, conspectas, us ; in sight of,
conspectu.
Silent (to be), tac«re.
Silver, argentum, i.
Similar to, similis (dat).
Sin, peccatum, i; to sin, peoctre.
Since, quum, quoniam.
Sing, cant&re.
Singing, cantus, us.
Sister, soror, (8or6r) is (£).
Sit, sedgre, 394, V.
Six, sex; sixth, sextos, a, urn.
Slave, servus, i.
Slay, occidere, interficdre.
Slayer, interfector, 319.
Sleep, Bomnus, i ; to sleep, dozmlre.
Slinger, fimdiUn:, 319.
Small, parvus, a, um.
Snatch up, airipdre.
So, itSL, tam; so great, taatoa; $o
long, tamdiu ; so many, tot
Socrates, Socrates, is.
Soldier, miles, (miht) is.
Some (persons), nonnullL
Somebody, some, 178; some one, all-
quia.
Sometimee, inteidnm, noananqoami
Somewhat great, aliquantos, 184.
Son, filius, i.
Soninrlaw, gener, L
Song, carmen, 344, a.
Soul, animus, L
L
Digitized by
Google
898
ENOLMHoI.ATIN VOOABUI^AKT.
Spain, Higpania, a.
Spaniard, HiBpftMui, L
A Sport, paroSre (dat).
^ Sparta, Sparta, n.
Speak, dicSre, loqoL
Speech, sermo, 331.
Spend, conanmfire.
Spiritedly, - aoriter.
Splendid, splendidiu, a, viBk
Spoil, pneda, n.
Spur, calcar, 325.
Stag", cervos, L
Stain, macalftre.
Stand, stare ; stand in ike way, ob>
■tare.
Standard, signum, i
Star, aidos, (aider) is, 344; Stel-
la, ae.
State, civitas, (civitftt) is; respaUi-
ca, 351, 3.
Station, statio, 333, U; to station,
constitnere, collocftre.
Stitnulaie, indacdre.
Stir up, instigtre.
Stoic, Stoicas, i.
Stone, lapis, (I^P^) ^ {^'Y
Stormy t tarbidas, a, qui.
Strange, aovas, a, lun.
Strength, vis, 301 ; robv, 344.
StTet^then, connnnAre.
Strive after, peraeqni, S06.
Strong, valjidiis, a, nm.
Strong desire, capiditas, 893.
Study, stadiiuM, i.
Subdue, subigdre.
Succour, sabsidioiB, L
Such, talis, e, 184.
Sudden, repeiitinos, a, urn.
Suddenly, sabito, adv.
Svffide^Uly, satis.
Sum of money, peovnU, «.
Summer, nstas, (estat) is, 903.
Sun, sol, (sol) is (m.).
Sup, csnare.
Superior, superior^ orw..
Support, aldre.
Swnrenier, ^^ditie, 333, B-
Sv/rreund, eircamreiiire ; eacnm*
8t«re, 391 ; eingCre, 401, 9.
Sure, certos, a, am.
Suspicion, snspieio, 333, B.
Sustmn, sustintee.
SioeiUow, hiroBdo, 339.
Sioeet, dolcis, e, 104.
Swift, celer, velox, 107.
Swiftly, celenter, 917.
Swim, natire; swim across, tms-
nftre.
Sword, gladias, i.
Syracuse, Syracas», i
Take, somere ; take awmy, ei^»in;
take back, recipere; take caftive,
cap^re ; take care of, coran ; tait
by storm, expoguttre ; iabt pos-
session of, occapare.
TaUni, inge&imiv L
Tame, domare.
Teach, docdre.
Teacher, magisten txU
Tear, lacryma, m.
TeU, dioAw, nontiire.
Tempest, proceUa, m: tempeslwi.
Temple, temphun, L
Tenacious, tenaz, (temtc) is, 107.
Tender, teuer, % iiagt
Tent, pellis, 339.
Tenth, deeiaos, a, vm^
Terrify, terrdre.
Tervitiifryt finis (m.).
Tha», qaam.
That (proB,), ille, is, isto.
That, ooiy., in order that, ut; that
not, ne.
Themselves, nm, 149.
Then^ torn, adv.
There, ibi.
Thick, densas, a, tun.
Thine, tons, a, run.
Thing, res, rei; this thmg-, Inc}
these things, hoo.
Digitized by
Google
BUGLBH-^LATIN VOOABULAST.
899
JTUnk, puttt*, oogitftre, ae
sentire, censdre.
Third, tertios, «, Qm.
Thirst, flitis, 300.
Thirteen, trediodm*
Thirty, triginta.
This, bic, Ihbc, hoa
rhither, eo.
rJ^yvc^ traiy ift.
rhraugh, pet (prep, witk eefc).
i'fenw, jacdre ; ^f«Ht b^»re, pa>-
jicCre.
TA«Mwi0r (Verb), tanir&
TAt«, ita. '
TA^, taas» a, vm*
TtboTr T&eria, is.
Time, tempns, (teupai^ is, 344.
Timid, timidas, a, nm.
To, ad (prep, with aoo.).
Te-dxuf, hodie.
Together, xma (adr.).
T<»i; labor, 319: epera» «.
To-morrow, eras (adr.).
Tongtte, lingnar 0.
T(0o mtMT^ nimixis, a« vttk
Tooth, dens, (dent) is (m.)*
Top of, Btimnms, 297, a.
Totuih, tanggre; touch upon, attin-
gSre.
Tower, ttirris, 300: casteUom, i.
Tovm, oppidom, i.
TotcmMnan, oppidanas, i.
Treaty, foedus, (foeder) is, 344.
Tree, arbor, (arbor) is (£.).
Trial, judiciam, i.
Tribune, tribunus, i.
Tributary, stipendiarins, a, urn.
Tribute, stipendinm, i.
True, yems, a« xun. ^
Truce, indatin, vnm, 57, B*.
TruBt to, oredSre (with dat). *
Turbid, torbidns, a, am.
Turn, vertfire.
Tioen/y, viginti.
3\po.a^pieoe^ biiii, 189.
Uly$$et, Uljsses, is.
Uncertain, iaoertos, a, nm.
Under, sub, prep., 3S3.
Underttandt inteUigeve.
Undertake, suscipSre.
Unfriendly, iiili]iie«a, % vm.
Unjtut, injnstas, a, am.
Unless, nisi (oonj.).
Unmindful of, imttemor ( wiA
gen.).
Until, donee, dam (eeii|.).
Use, nans, As ; ta um, oti^ dep. ri)!.,
316,*.
27MfieA atilis, e, 104.
V.
Vacant (to be), yacftre.
Fa»n^-wt ©oin, firostra (ady.).
Valour, virtos, (yirtttt) is, 293.
Value, jyretinm, i; to vcdue, nsti-
Vast, yastos, a, am.
Vaunt, ostentftre.
Vehemently, ycbementer (ady.).
Venetian, Venetos, i.
Very, vslde, admodom; veiry easy,
petfaeilis, e-, very few, perpaad;
very near, prozinras.
Vice, vitiam, L
Victory, victoria, a.
Vile, vilis, e, 104.
Village, vicas, i.
Violate, violare.
Virgifi, virgo, 339.
ViHue, yirtus, (Virtut) is, 293.
Virtuous, probas, a, am.
Voice, vox, (vOc) is, 293.
Vow, spondere, 395, IV.
W.
Wage (e. g., »<w), ger^re: bellom
inferre. ^
Wagon, camis, i.
Wait for, expeettre.
Digitized by
Google
400
ENGLISH-LATIN VOCABULARY.
Walk, ambnlire.
WaU, moras, i ; watts, moenia, mn.
Wander, Tagftre, errtre.
Want, CBi&ce, 348.
Wanting (to be), deesse, 267, b.
War, belloxn, i
Warlike, bellioorai, a, om.
Warn, mondre.
Wash, alladre.
Waick, watching, TigUia* n ; to
watch, vigil&re.
Water, aqua, a.
Waioe, flactoa, ta.
Way, via, 8B ; to make (their) way,
iter facere.
Wearied, defessoa, a« nm.
Weary of, taedet, 579.
Weep, flere.
Well (to be), valere.
West, Occidens.
Wh4Mt (in number)? quotas ? what
is the difference t qaid interest?
When, qnom (ooiuO-
WAewcc, ande (adv.).
PVAc^Aer, nam, 174 : atrom.
Where, ubi (adv.).
Which of the two, nter, 194, B. 1.
WJiirlioirid, turbo, (turbin) is (m.).
WA<>, qui, quae, quod; who? quis,
qase, quid ?
Whole, omnis, e; nniversus, a, um;
totas, a, um ; cunctus, 441.
Why? c6rl
Wicked, improbus, a, um.
Wide, latus, a, mn; widely, laid;
more widely, latius.
Wild beast, fera, m.
Wind, ventus, i.
Willingly, libenter.
Wine, vinum, L
Wing, ala, ».
Winter, hyems, (hyem) is, 293; to
winter, biem&re ; winter-quarters,
bibema, orum (pL).
Wisdom, sapientia, 89.
Wise, sapiens, (sapient) it, 107 1
wisdy, sapienter.
Wish, velle, cupftre.
With, cum (prep., abi).
WHkout, sine (prep., abL); to be
without, carSre.
Withstand, resistfire, 390.
Wolf, lupus, i
Woman, femina, as ; nralier, is (£).
Wonder at, admiraii, dep.
Wonderful, mirabilis, e, 104.
Wood (a), sylva, aa.
Word, verbum, i ; ward is brought,
nuntiatum est.
Work, opus, (oper) is, 344.
World, mundus, i : orbis tararam.
Worse, pejus, adv.; worst, pessi-
mus, 370.
Worship, colore, adorSre.
Worthy, dignus, a, um (with abL).
Would-that, utinam, 526.
Wound, vnbms, (vulner) is, 344; to
wound, vulnerftre.
Wretched, miser, 77, b.
Write, Bcnbdre,
Writer, scriptor, 319.
X
Xenophon, Xenopbon, (Xenopbont)
Year, annus, adv.
Yearly, quotannis, i.
Yes, immo.
Yesterday, beri.
Yet, tamen.
Yoke, jugum, i.
Young-man, juvenis, is (m.): ado-
lescens.
You, vos {sing.i tu).
Your, vester, tra, trum, 134.
Youth, juventus, (javentat) is, 293;
a youth. Bee young tftan.
Zeal, studium, i.
Digitized by
Google
EXAMINATION QUESTIONS.
What Im a monosyUahle 7 a dissyUahle f b: polysyllable ? (8.) — ^What is
in/Uetion ? — ^Wbat is the inflectkxi of nouns called ? of verbs T (21, 2 R.) —
Name the vowels : the liquids : tiie <;-«ottfM2« .• p-sounds : t-sounds : double
consoTiants : diphthongs^ (23.) — ^Repeat the general rules of quantity, (24.)
— ^Repeat the general rules of gender, (25, a.)
Has the Latin any article 7 (27.) — What is the stem of a noun ? (30.) —
How many cases of nouns are there 7 (31.) — ^What is the use of the nomi- ,
native 7 the vocative 7 the genitive 7 (33.) — How many declensions ?— How
distinguished ? (34.) — GKve nom., voc., and gen. endings of 1st decl. (nom.
and YOG., ft short ; ahl., ft long). — What is the gender of 1st decl. ? (36, c.)
Where do you put the unemphatic gen. 7 {After its noun, 38, a.) — ^The
emphatic 7 {Before its noun, 38, b.)
I What is the subject of a sentence 7 the predicate 7 (41.) — ^What is an
active verb 7 transitive 7 intransitive 7 (42.) — ^What does the infinitive
express 7 the indicative 7 (43.) — ^What does the present tense express 7
the imperfect 7 the future 7 (44.) — What is the infinitive-ending of 1st
conj. 7 — How do you find the stem of a verb 7 (45.) — Qire the 3d person
endings of the indicative, (46.) — Are the personal pronouns necessarily
nsed in Latin 7 (47, B.)— Where do you put the sxibject nominative in a
sentence 7 (48, n.)
WTiat is the case of the direct object 7 (51.) — Give the accusative-end-
ings of 1st decL (52.) — ^Rule of position for the object accusative 7 (53, U.)
What does the dative express 7 (54) : the ablative 7 (55.)~Give the
case-endings complete, 1st ded. (618) : quantity of final syllables (618, B.
1) : gender (618, R. 2) : rule of position for remote ol^ect (58, II., a) : for
preposition and its noun (58, 11., b.)
Case-endings, 2d decL, masc. (61.) — ^Name ihe feminine nouns of 2d decL
(alvus, cdlus, htimus, vannus). — ^What nouns have t for vocative-ending 7
(62, R. 2.)--When to implies motion, how do you render it in Latin 7
(63, BT)
What nouns of Sd decL reject the endings iis and « 7 (64.)— Which of
Ll2
Digitized by
Google
402 EXAMINATION aUESTIONS.
these retain the H in the oblique cases 7 (65, B^) — ^What case is used wiA
words oi abounding and wanting ? (66, XL, a.)
Case-endings, 2d decL, neat. (68.) — Short final syllables in 2d dec!, (d s,
6, dm, a). — Long final syllables (i, 6, is, 6s). — ^What is the infinitive-end-
ing of verbs, 8d oo^i. Y (70.) — Give the 3d person eadings, indie, present :
imperfect : fatare, (71.)
Give the endings of adjectives of Class I. (76.) — What adjectives reject
the endings fts and d 7 (77.) — Where do you pat the onempfaatic adjective
in a sentence 7 (78, II., a.) — ^Where do yoa pot the adjective beloi^;uig to
a noun which govema another in tike genitive 7 (B^9re the genitive, 7%
IL. b.)
' Give the 3d pers. endings of e s s e, indie. (79) : rale of syntax for predi-
cate noon (80, a) : for predicate adjective, (81, b.)
Infinitive-ending, 3d conj. (83.) — Indie, 3d pers. endings, present : im-
perfect : future, (84.) — Infinitive-ending, 4th cory. (86.) — Indie, 3d peni.»
present : imperfect : fature, (87.) — ^Where do you put the adjective be-
longing to a noun governed by a preposition 7 (89, IL)
What syllable forms the 3d pers. pass, ending, indie. 7 (90.) — In patting
an active sentence into the passive form, what changes occur 7 (93, IL) —
When is the preposition omitted 7 (93, II., B,.)
Case-endings, 3d decL (98.) — ^What is the gender of most nouns which
add s to form the nom. 7 (99.) — ^Decline sermo : urbs : lex.
What is the gender of nouns in al, ar, e 7 (102, R. 2.) — Endings of ad-
jectives of 2d class 7 (104.) — Decline brfivlg. (105.) — ^What adjectives
take 8 instead of i in abL 7 (105, R. 2.) — What case is used with adjec-
tives of advantage or disadvantage t of likeness or unlikeness 7 (106,
n.. c.)
Whafadjectives form Class nL7 (107.)— Decline felix. (108.)— Which
ending do participles in as take in abL sing., <& or i 7 (108, R. 1, b.)
What nouns belong to 4tfa decL 7 (110.)— Give the ca«e^ndingB, masa
(111) : neut. (Ill) : quantity of final syUables, 4th decL (621, R. 1) : fenu
nouns of 4th decL (621, R. 2.)— What nouns take ubus in abL plur. 7 (621,
R. 3.)— Decline ddmfis, (112, 3.)— What does d6mi meant (112, 4.)—
Rule of S3mtax for verbs cOmpoanded with trans, (U3,IL,a.) — Is trans
ever repeated 7
WTiat nouns betong to 5th decl. 7 (1 14.)— Case-endings. 5di decL 7 (116.)
—When is the • in ei long 7 whan short 7 (116, R.)— What noons of Sth
Digitized by
Google
EXAMINATION aUXSTIONS* 403
decl have plnr. complete 1 (117, R.)— Time whm m put in what cue 7
(118, IL, c.)
Decline ego, (120.) — ^What is the adj. personal pron. of 1st pen. ting. 1
of 1st pers. plur. 7 (122.) — Give 1st pers. endings, 1st conj., act indie. pre$-
ent : imperfect : future. — Also, pass, present : imperfect : future. (123.)—
What case is nsed with esse to denote the possessor? (125, II., a.) — la
cum prefixed or sdfixed to the personal pronoons T (125, II., b.)
What are the 1st person endings, act. and pass., for 2d conj., indie
present ? imperfect I future ? (126.) — ^The same fiw 3d conj. (127.)—
Fourth, (128.)
Decline tu, (130.) — ^What are the 2d pers. endings, 1st conj., act and
pass., indie, present ? imperfect ? future 1 (131.) — ^The same for 2d conj.
(133.)^-What are the pottestive pronouns of 2d pers. ? (134.) — How is nd
used ? (135, U., a.) — ^Where is causft placed in a sentence 7 (135, II., b.)
Wltat are die dd pers. endings of verbs, 3d conj., act. and pass., indic.
pres. 7 imperfect 7 future 7 (136.)— The same for 4th conj. (137.)
Decline the rejUa^ne pronoun sui, (142.) — ^What is the at^ective-pertomU
pranoun of 3d pers. 7 (143.) — What ease does imper&re govern? (147.)
Why are demonttrative pronbuna soealled? (149.)-:— Decline is, eS, id,
(150.)— Inflect esse, pres., impeif., and fat. indie. (151.) — ^Distinguish
Buus and ejusr (153.)— What is the demonstrative of the 1st person?
(156) : of 2d 7 (157) : <rf 3d 7 (158.)
Decline qui, (164.)— Syntax of the relative, (167, b.)
Decline quis, (170.)— How is the answer yes given 7 (173.)— What an-
swer does num expect 7 (175, b.)
Name tiie seven indefinite pronouns, (178.) — ^Honr nre inde£ prottduna
used with a genitive t (180, a.)
Name the correlative pronouns, (184.) — Give the Latin for much ffold
(186, a) : for mv^ik money (186, a). — ^Distinguish tantum and tantus,
(186, obs.)
Bepeat the first twelve numerak in all four classes, (189.)— Give the
rule for accus. of time or apacct (191.)
Decline unas, djao, and tres, (194.)— What words are declined like
anas 7 (194, R. 1.)— Is the penult of unius long cr short?
Digitized
by Google
404 EXAMINATION aUESTIONS.
Inflect capftre in prea., imperfl, and fat indie. (199.)
What are deponent verba ? (206.1 — ^How are they ocmjngated t (Ana.,
like pasaiTes.)
How do yon form derivative adverb* from adjectivea of Claaa I. ? (*215,
1) : of Claaa XL ? (215, 2.) — ^What ia the general position of the adverb in
a aentence ? (218, a.) — ^Where Ib ferd placed ? (218, h.) — How ia nequi-
demnaed? (218, c.)
What prepoaitiona govern the accoa. or ablat 7 (223.) — Give the role of
appoiition, (225, a.)
Give the peraon-endinga, pres. indio. act.: tenae-atem: connecting-
vowel: let coig.: 2d: 3d: 4th, (234.)
Imperfect tenae, peraon-endinga : tenae-atem, fijor conj'a. : connecting-
vowel, (237.) — Future tenae, lat and 2d oonj., peraon-endinga : tense-
Btema : connectmg-vowela (238) : 3d and 4th ooi^., fdt, peraon-ending :
tenae-atem ; connecting-vowel, (240.)
Paaaive-endinga, (243.) — ^Apparent irregnlaritiea, viz., lat pera. pres.
indie. : 3d conj., 2d pera. aing. prea. : lat and 2d conj., fat., 2d pera. aing.
(244.)
Rules of Quantity. — ^Monosyllablea ending in a vowel (247, a.) : exoep-
tiona.— Monosyllablea ending in a conaonant: exceptiona, (247, b.) —
Oaantity of a final (248) : e final (249) : of t final (250) : of o final (251) :
of u final, (252.) — Final ayllablea ending in a conaonant, (253.) — ^Final as,
ea, 08 : exceptions, (254.) — Final is and ns r exceptions, (255.)— Increase
of nonna (257) : of verba, (258.) — ^Pennlta of perf. tenae, (259.) — Adjectives
inidaa, iena: in inn a: in ilia, bills, (^0.)
What are the tenaea for action completed ? (262) : their endinga ? (263.)
— Give the perf., plaperf., and fiit. perf. of eaae, (264.) — ^Diating^h pert
prea. fix)m per£ aoriat, (265.) — ^What eaae do the compodnda of eaae with
prepoaitiona govern ? (267, b.)
How ia perf. stem formed in most verba of lat conj. T of 2d ? of 4th 1
(270.) — Give perf. of amare, mondre, andire, (271.)
How ia perf. atom formed of moat verba of 3d conj. 1 (276.) — ^Enphonic
rules : (1) k-aoond before a : (2) b before a : (3) t-aoand before a, (277.)—
What answer does nonne expect? (280.) — ^How ia the pluperf. formed?
the fat. perf. ? (283.)
EXAMINATION aUESTIONS. 405
Kame the six dasses of nomui of 3d ded. (291.) — ^Eaphonic rales, (292.)
— ^How do yoa expreas "on the top of the mounUdn" in Latin 1 (297.)
Bedine Japiter: Bos: Respublica: Jnsjarandnm, (351.)
Kepeat the roles of gender, 3d ded., from nominatiye formation, with
tiie exceptions under each, (355.)
Comparison of Adjectwet.—What is the eompar. ending ? (357.)— -If the
stem ends in a vowel, how is the eompar. formed ? (357, K.) — Syntax of
eompar., when qnam is omitted, (360, c.)
Superl. ending, (363.)— Stems in er add what ending ! (364.)— Stems
in 1, what ending ! (365.)— What case is nsed with sapetlatives ? (367, b.)
Compare bonus, mains, magnns, multns, parvns, senex, jare-
His, exteras, inferns, snperns, posterns, (370.) — Comp. dives,
benevolns. *
Are adverbs compared T — ^How T (376.)
What is the supine 7 (377.) — ^Fonn supine-stem, 1st conj. : 2d : 3d : 4th,
(378.) — ^How is snpine in nm nsed 7 (379.) — ^How is supine in u used 7
(380.) — ^Name the supines in u which are in common use, (381.) — ^What
case answers die question whither ? (383.)
What are the^Jwr ways of forming per£ stem, 1st conj. 7 (387.) — ^How
many verbs does each class contain 7 (387.) — How do you form perf.,
pluperf., or fat. perf. of these verbs 7 (388.)
What are the Jive ways of forming the perf. stem, 2d ooi^j. 7 (394.) —
How many verbs does each class contain 7 (395.)— What roles of euphony
are to be applied here 7 (395, III., a, b, c.)
Name the six ways of forming the perf. stem, 3d conj. (400.)— What
rales of euphony are to be applied in forming perf. stems of verbs of Ist
class 7 (401, 1, &c.)
How do verbs of 2d class form perf. stem 7 (406) : verbs of 3d class 7—
In what sense is ad often used by CsBsar? (408, c.)
How do verbs of 4th class fbnn perf. stem 7 (411.)— What vowel chan-
ges must be observed here 7 (411, a, b, c.)— Give the rale for verbs of de-
manding (413, 1) : for verbs of sparing (413, 4.)— What is the perf. of
cAddrfi? ofcnd«r6 7 (413,^7*.)
Mm
Digitized by
Google
406 EXAMIN ATIOlf aUXSTIONS.
How do verbf of 5tfa clais form perf. stem t (416.) — ^Form the perf.
itemi of the io verbi in (416, c).— What u Mid of the pr^momen 1 (418, c.)
■f
'; How do TtriM of 6th dasfl fivm perl stem ? (481.)— What caaes are
J ased after distrXbadre ? (423, c.)
f ■
:T What are tbe^tw wayi of forming the per£ stem in 4th coDJ. 7 (426.)~
How many verbs does each dass rontiin ? (427.) — How is the manner of
n^ an actien expreiaed in Latin ? (428, a.)
!' How are the passive tenses for completed action formed ? (431.)— How
\ is the perf part formed 1 (432, b.) — How is it inflected 7 (432, a.)— Inflect
'.[ the perf., {daperf., and fiat. per£ pass, of imAr^, {433.) — How is the perf
pass. part, sometimes used with est? (435, c.)
How manj participles are latere in Latin, act and paas. 7 (438.)-^i7e
'l the endings of the present part act in the four oonj^^^tions, (439, o.)^
I How is it declined? (440i|^Has the Latin any tMctive part, to express
.* complete action? (None, excepting ini2epon«M/ verbs, 440, a, d.)— What
i is the nse of the part, in disconrse ? (448, «.)— Give the words in which
cannot stand first in a clanse or sentence, (442, c)
Hew is tiie Alt part net formed ? (445.)— Ii^eot the periphraitio pres.«
put and flit of imAr«, (446.)--Give the role for the nse of IIm fot part
with verbs of motion, (448.)
How is Ihe perf. pass. part, formed? {4.51, a.)— ^How is it inflected?
(451, &.) — How do deponent verbs asethe perf. part, form? (451, c.) — ^What
is the case of the place where 1 (453, a) : of the plaoe vKence ? (453, b) : of
the place whither ? (453, c.)
When is Ibe part nsed in the ablative with a noon ? (456.)-^How is
the want ef a pecC act part supplied in Latin? (4K.)'—CMi « iMwnho
nsed in the ablative absolute with another noon t (Yes : 458.)
Hew does the infin. express action ? (465.) — Give the infin. forms, act
and pass., in all the conjugations, (466.) — Give the role for the oomple*
mentary infin. (468, a.)
Name the classes of verbs which take after them the accns. and infin.
(471.) — Give the method of changing English sentences commencing with
that into the Latin accos. and infin. (472, 1, 2, 3.)
Give Ihe fonnation of tiie perf. infin. pass. {478.)— When the
Bted witii tiiis infin., with vfy^ does its pert ^pree ? (476.)
How is the infin. fat act. formed ? (481^ : the infti. fat pats. ? (483.)
EXAMINATION aUBBTIONS. 407
Under what form does the gerund express the action of the rerb 1 (487,
a.) — How is the gerund-stem formed f (467, 6.)-^How the eases of the ge-
rund 1 (487, c.) — ^What rules applj to the eases of the infin. and gerund 1
(489.) — Is the infin. or the aocus. ger. used with a preposition ? (489, R.) —
What case does the ger. govern ? (490^
How does the gerundive express die action of a verb t (495, a.) — ^How
are its cases formed 1 (495, b.) — How is it used ? (496.) — ^When mvst tbe
gerundive be used instead of the gerund ? — When may it be so used 7
(496, R.) — ^After what verbs does the genmdiTe express a purpose or ob-
ject ! (498, S^,)
> What does Ae gerundive in the nom. neut. with esse express 7 (501,
a.) — ^What does it express when used with esse as a verbal ai^eetive T
(502.) — What is the case of the person in both these constructions ?
(The dative.)
Hew does imper. mood exproM the aotimi ^ the veib T (507.)— What is
mt witii the imper. f (516, Rule.)
When is a sentence compound f (513, a.) — Give an example of a prin-
cipal sentence : of a subordiaate senftenoe, (513, c.)-*^Give some of the
classes of subordinate seBtences, (514, a, See,)
Repeat the eopulative conjunctions, (515.)-^How are e t and que usedf
(517, a): ac? (517, &.)— What does et IbUowed by anodter et meant
(517, c.)— What is the Latin for again and again ? for not only— but
also? {517, d.)
Name the disjunctive conjunctions, (519.)— What does aut indicate ?
▼elt (519, R. 1 and 2.)— How is ve used? (519, R. 3.)— What do these
conj. mean when repeated ? (519, R. 4.)— Give the adversatives, (520.) —
What does sed express ? (522, a): aut em? (522, b.)
How daes the sabjune. mood express affirmation 7 {9M.) — ^iflect subjmie.
pres. of esse, (525.) — ^laflect sul]9nne. i>res. met. and pass, of ftmftrfi,
mdndrC, rSgfirS, audire, (526, b.) — How may a wish be expressed in
Latin 7 (528, a.) — How may a softened command be expressed 7 (528, b,) —
How do you express a direct question when dmtit is implied ? (528, c.)
Infleotsubjunc. pert of esse, (531.)— HowdoregaiarreAsformsubjunc.
perf. act. 7 (532, 1) : subjunc. perf pass. 7 (532, 2.)— Inflect the subjunc.
perf. act. and pass.of ftmftr6,mdnerfi, rdgdrd, aud!r£, (532,3.)— How
is t^ aol^iine. perf. nsed imperatively 7 (534, a.)— How »ay a supposed
case be «xpi«Med 7 <584, 6.)-^How may a tefiemd aswetHon be express-
ed? (534, c.)— What interrogative sentences take the si^fajune. 7 (584, e.)
Digitized by
Google
408 EXAMINATION aUESTIONS.
How u the BTibjaiic. imperf. formed? (537.) — Repeat l^e paradigm
(538.) — How is the snbjiiDC plaper£ act and pass, formed ? (539, a and b.)
— Give the paradigm, (539, e.) — Repeat the conditional conjunctions, (540,
a.)— What is a conditional sentence ? (540, b.) — ^In conditional sentences
bow do yoa express a real condition 7 a possible condition 7 an unreal or
impossible in present time 7 an unreal or impossible condition in past
time 7 (542, 6, Role.) — Can the per£ or plaperf. indie, ever be osed with
si 7 (Na)
Inflect posse in snbjonc. pres. : imperf. : perf. : plaperf (545.) — State
the composition of posse. — Repeat the final conjonctions, (546.) — ^How is
purpose or aim expressed in English 7 bow in Latin 7 (548, a.) — How is an
object to be provided against introduced in English? how in Latin 7 (548,
o.) — Can a purpose or aim be expressed in Latin by an infin. 7 (No.)
Give the primary tenses of the Latin verb : the historical, (551, 2, a, b.)
— ^What is the role finr the succession of tenses 7 (551, 3.) — How is a result
expressed in English 7 how in Latin? (553, a.) — ^What is the role for at
signifying that ? (553, b.)
How is the want of a fat subjonc. supplied in Latin 7 (556.) — Give the
paradigm, periph. conj. subjunc. (556.) — ^When does quo express a pur-
pose instead of at 7 (558, a.) — In what sense is qui n used 7 (1) after neg-
ative sentences? (2) after non dubito, &c.? (558,6.) — ^When is quo-
minus used in preference to ne 7 (558, e.)
What are the two uses of quum 7 (561.) — What is the first use called ?
the second? (561.) — ^When is quum followed by the indie? (563, a.) —
When is quum temporal followed by the imperf. or plaperf subjuncf
(563, b.)^WhtX is the rule for quum causal 7 (563, c.)
When is the rel. pronoun followed by the subjunc. 7 (566.) — Give the
rule for the use of subjunc. in a rel. sentence, (568, d.) — ^Is the rel. to ex-
press a purpose very common in CsBsar? (Yes.)
In what two ways may we relate the words of another 7 (571.) — What
is each method called 7 (571.) — ^What kinds of sentences are introduced in
oratio obliqua? (Either principal or subordinate.) — ^What mood is
used in principal sentences in oratio obliqua? (574, a) : in subordinate
sentences 7 (574, b.)
What are impersonal verbs 7 (577.) — Give the classes of impersonals,
(578.)~What impersonals are followed by the aocus. of die person and
the gen. of tlie cause 7 (579, a.)
Digitized by
Google
EXAMINATION aUESTIONS. 409
Qive Hie rale for 5portet and decet (584, a) : for plftcet (584, 5)«
for licet andlibet (584, c): for interest andrdfert (584, d).
State the composition of possum, and repeat the paradigm, (587.)
Give the composition of ndlo and mftlo, and repeat the paradigms
(592.) — Give the three roles for veil e, nolle, and malle, in (594).
Bepeat the paradigm of irregular forms of f erre, (596.) — ^How are the
remaining tenses formed? (596, b.) — ^What is the meaning of ffirnnt?
(598, b.)
Of what verb does fieri form the pass.? (600.) — ^How are the tenses
formed ? (600.) — Give the paradigm.— What is the quantity ofiin fieri?
(600, B.)— What forms of edere are similar to those of esse ? (601.) —
Give the paradigm. — ^What is the quantity of e s, from esse? of e s, from
edere? (601, R.)
What conjugation does ire follow ? (605.) — Give the paradigm. — ^What
is said of the compounds ? (665, 1, 2.)— How are queo and nequeo con-
jugated ? (606.)
Inflect aio (609) : inquam (610) : n6 vi (611).— How do you distinguish
between the use of aio and of inquam? (613, b, I^*.) — What form of
cfspi is used with a pass, infin.? (613, e, ^p*.)
Mm2
THE END
Digitized by
Google
Digitized by
Google
TVNews
OpenLibrary